<?xml version="1.0"?>
<feed xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2005/Atom" xml:lang="en">
	<id>https://wiki.silbonetworks.com/api.php?action=feedcontributions&amp;feedformat=atom&amp;user=Tanisha</id>
	<title>Silbo Networks - User contributions [en]</title>
	<link rel="self" type="application/atom+xml" href="https://wiki.silbonetworks.com/api.php?action=feedcontributions&amp;feedformat=atom&amp;user=Tanisha"/>
	<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.silbonetworks.com/index.php/Special:Contributions/Tanisha"/>
	<updated>2026-04-04T00:30:12Z</updated>
	<subtitle>User contributions</subtitle>
	<generator>MediaWiki 1.41.1</generator>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.silbonetworks.com/index.php?title=RC44_User_Manual&amp;diff=1205</id>
		<title>RC44 User Manual</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.silbonetworks.com/index.php?title=RC44_User_Manual&amp;diff=1205"/>
		<updated>2024-09-03T06:14:01Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tanisha: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;This page contains the user manual for RC44.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Connecting with the device to the System (Laptop/Desktop).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To log in to SILBO_RC44 by connecting the router to your laptop or desktop via LAN or using Wi-Fi, please follow the steps below. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Connecting via LAN:&#039;&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Connect your laptop&#039;s LAN port to one of the router&#039;s LAN interfaces. Ensure that you select any LAN interface (there are two available) while making sure the WAN interface is not used. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
                                                                                                                                                          &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;How to connect with the SILBO_RC44&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;application&#039;&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the LAN connection is established between the device and the laptop or the desktop&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please open the command prompt and ping go get the ip config of that device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Type the command &#039;&#039;&#039;Ipconfig&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:How_to_connect_with_the_SILBO_RB44_application.png|alt=How to connect with the SILBO RB44 application|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It will provide the Ip address/url of that device through which the application can be accessed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Connecting_via_LAN_RB44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Log In==&lt;br /&gt;
Open the web browser and type the IP address in the URL.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It will show the log in page of the application.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Log In.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Give the valid credentials for the username and password to login to the application page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user credentials are provided it will direct to the landing page of the application.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Login Dashboard RC44.png|frameless|636x636px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The “Status” landing page shows all the detailed specification of the device like system, memory storage and connection tracking etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The application is divided in to 6 Modules.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Info&lt;br /&gt;
* Settings&lt;br /&gt;
* Maintenance&lt;br /&gt;
* Status&lt;br /&gt;
* Features&lt;br /&gt;
* Logout&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==1.Info==&lt;br /&gt;
The “Info” module provides the information about the devices to the user.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It provides all the specification related to the hardware, firmware, Networks and the Connection uptimes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It has 3 submodules.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Overview&lt;br /&gt;
* System Log&lt;br /&gt;
* Kernel Log&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Info dashboard RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===1.1 Overview===&lt;br /&gt;
In overview module it displays all the specification categorically of a device like System, Memory, storage, Connection tracking, DHCP Lease.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Login Dashboard RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;System&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this section it displays the hardware configured specification of the device.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Info system RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The specifications details are as follows,&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&lt;br /&gt;
!SN&lt;br /&gt;
!Field name &lt;br /&gt;
!Sample value&lt;br /&gt;
!Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Hostname&lt;br /&gt;
|22B09230239&lt;br /&gt;
|This field  displays the router serial number of the device&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Model&lt;br /&gt;
|Silbo_RC44- EC200A&lt;br /&gt;
|This field  displays the model number of the device&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Firmware Version and IPK Version&lt;br /&gt;
|1.16_1.13_RC3&lt;br /&gt;
|This field  displays the firmware version and IPK version&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Kernel Version&lt;br /&gt;
|4.14.180&lt;br /&gt;
|This field  displays the kernel version of the device&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Local Time&lt;br /&gt;
|Monday, July 1, 2024, at 05:43:58 PM&lt;br /&gt;
|This field  displays the local time&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Uptime&lt;br /&gt;
|0h 7m 29s&lt;br /&gt;
|This field  displays the uptime of the device&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|Load Average&lt;br /&gt;
|1.73 1.87 1.04&lt;br /&gt;
|This field  displays the average load&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Memory&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this section it displays the memory configured specification of the device.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Memory Dashboard RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The specifications details are as follows.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Total Available&lt;br /&gt;
|68676 kB / 124208 kB (55%)&lt;br /&gt;
|This field  displays the total availability of memory space in the device&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Free&lt;br /&gt;
|59344 kB / 124208 kB (47%)&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the  Free memory space in the device&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Cached&lt;br /&gt;
|312 kB / 124208 kB (0%)&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the  Cached memory space in the device&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Buffered&lt;br /&gt;
|9332 kB / 124208 kB (7%)&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the  Buffered memory space in the device&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Storage&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this section it displays the status of storage as root and temporary usage specification of the device.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Storage Dashboard RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The specifications details are as follows.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Root Usage&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
796 kB / 15488 kB (5%)&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays  the total root usage of the device&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Temporary  Usage&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
312 kB / 62104 kB (0%)&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the total temporary  usage of the device&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Connection Tracking&#039;&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this section it displays the status of connection tracking for the device.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Connection Tracking RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The specifications details are as follows.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Active Connection&lt;br /&gt;
|48 / 16384 (0%)&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the active connection of the device.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;DHCP Leases&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this section, it displays the DHCP lease of the temporary assignment of an IP address to a device on the network.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:DCHP Leases RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The specifications details are as follows.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Host Name&lt;br /&gt;
|KermaniK-LT&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays  the configured Host Name/User Name for that device.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|IPv4-Address&lt;br /&gt;
|192.168.10.147&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the IP  address of the device.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|MAC-Address&lt;br /&gt;
|34:73:5a:bb: ab:7a&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the MAC-Address  of the device.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Lease time remaining&lt;br /&gt;
|11h 53m 49s&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the lease  time remaining for the device.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===1.2 System Log===&lt;br /&gt;
This page provides on screen System logging information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user gets to view the system logs &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:System Log.png|frameless|617x617px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===1.3 Kernel Log===&lt;br /&gt;
This page provides on-screen Kernel logging information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this page, the user gets to view the Kernel logs&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Kernel Log.png|frameless|621x621px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==2. Setting==&lt;br /&gt;
In this “Setting” module the user can Configure/update all the required parameters related to Network, SIM Switch, Internet, VPN, Firewall, Loopback Rule, Remote monitoring, Tunnel as per requirement.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
IT consist of 8 submodules.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Network&lt;br /&gt;
* Sim Switch&lt;br /&gt;
* Internet&lt;br /&gt;
* VPN&lt;br /&gt;
* Firewall&lt;br /&gt;
* Loopback Rule&lt;br /&gt;
* Remote Monitoring&lt;br /&gt;
* Tunnel&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Settings.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===2.1 Network===&lt;br /&gt;
In this section the user does all the setting related configuration with reference to network like Ethernet Setting, Cellular Setting, Band lock and Operator Lock, Wi-Fi, Guest Wi-Fi, Wireless Schedule, SMS Setting, Loopback IP.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Network Dashboard RC44.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Ethernet Setting&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this page it will display all the configured port that is attached with the device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For this device 3 ports are configured. Ethernet mode can be configured as WAN and as LAN as well. Ethernet LAN Connection settings can be configured as DHCP server or Static.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Ethernet Settings RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;For port 3 setting&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Kindly select the option &#039;&#039;&#039;LAN4&#039;&#039;&#039; for &#039;&#039;&#039;Port 3 mode LAN/WAN&#039;&#039;&#039;. Based on the option selected the filed will also changes the user needs to configure all the required field and click on the save to save the required fields.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Ethernet Settings RC44 part 2.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Port 3 mode LAN/WAN&lt;br /&gt;
|LAN&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the port mode selection&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Port 3 Ethernet Protocol [LAN Eth0.1]&lt;br /&gt;
|DHCP Server&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the Ethernet mode selection&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Port 3 DHCP Server IP&lt;br /&gt;
|192.168.10.1&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays DHCP server IP configured.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Port 3 DHCP Netmask&lt;br /&gt;
|255.255.255.0&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays DHCP server Netmask address configured&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Port 3 DHCP Start Address&lt;br /&gt;
|100&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays DHCP server  start address configured&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Port 3 DHCP Limit&lt;br /&gt;
|50&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays DHCP server  limit&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Kindly select the option &#039;&#039;&#039;EWAN&#039;&#039;&#039; for &#039;&#039;&#039;Port 3 mode LAN/WAN&#039;&#039;&#039;. Based on the option selected the filed will also changes the user needs to configure all the required field and click on the save to save the required fields.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:EWAN Port 3 Configuration RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Port 3 mode LAN/WAN&lt;br /&gt;
|EWAN&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the port mode selection&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Ethernet Protocol Port 3 WAN&lt;br /&gt;
|DHCP  client&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the client&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Gateway&lt;br /&gt;
|192.168.1.1&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays gateway address  configured&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the save once all the configuration is done and click on the update button to update all the information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;SW_LAN settings&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this part the user can configure the setting for SW_LAN &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SW LAN settings RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|SW_LAN Ethernet Protocol&lt;br /&gt;
|DHCP  Server&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the  Ethernet mode selection&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|SW_LAN DHCP Server IP&lt;br /&gt;
|192.168.10.1&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays DHCP server IP  configured.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|SW_LAN  DHCP Netmask&lt;br /&gt;
|255.255.255.0&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays DHCP server  Netmask address configured&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|SW_LAN  DHCP Start Address&lt;br /&gt;
|100&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays DHCP server  start address configured&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|SW_LAN  DHCP Limit&lt;br /&gt;
|50&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays DHCP server  limit&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|DNS  Server&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|This filed display number of DSN  server availability&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|DNS  Server Address&lt;br /&gt;
|8.8.8.8&lt;br /&gt;
|This  filed display the DSN server address.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After configuring all the required information, the user should click on the save and then click on the update to update the all the required information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Static option for SW_LAN Ethernet Protocol&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the option of static from the drop-down menu for SW_LAN Ethernet Protocol.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SW LAN settings Static Ethernet Protocol.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|SW_LAN Ethernet Protocol&lt;br /&gt;
|Static&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the  Ethernet mode selection&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|SW_LAN static IP&lt;br /&gt;
|192.168.5.1&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays static server IP  configured.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|SW_LAN  Netmask&lt;br /&gt;
|255.255.255.0&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays static server  Netmask address configured&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|DNS  Server&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|This filed display number of DSN  server availability&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|DSN  Server Address&lt;br /&gt;
|8.8.8.8&lt;br /&gt;
|This  filed display the DSN server address.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
After configuring all the required information, the user should click on the save and then click on the update to update the all the required information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Cellular Setting&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this page, the user needs to configure the various details with respect to the SIM.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
select single cellular single sim where the user must configure the APN details of the sim used for the router device. The Configurations can be done based on the SIM usage, with respect to IPV4 or IPV.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Cellular Settings RC44.png|frameless|619x619px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Cellular  Operation Mode&lt;br /&gt;
|Single Cellular with Dual Sim&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays  the cellular operation mode.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Cellular  Modem 1&lt;br /&gt;
|QuectelEC200A&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the modem name.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Network  Mode&lt;br /&gt;
|Automatic&lt;br /&gt;
|This  field displays the  Network mode selection&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM 1  Access Point Name&lt;br /&gt;
|airtelgprs.com&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the  name of the Sim 1 access point configured.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM 1  PDP Type&lt;br /&gt;
|IPV4&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays  the type of SIM 1&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM 1  Username&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|This field is optional, and the user can configure the name of  the SIM 1&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM 1  Password&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|This  field is optional, and the user can configure the password for the SIM 1&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM 1  Authentication Protocol&lt;br /&gt;
|None&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the type of  protocol is being used for SIM 1&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|9&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM 2  Access Point Name&lt;br /&gt;
|airtelgprs.com&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the name of the  Sim 2 access point configured.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|10&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM 2  PDP Type&lt;br /&gt;
|IPV4&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the type of SIM  2&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|11&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM 2  Username&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|This  field is optional, and the user can configure the name of the SIM 2&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|12&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM 2  Password&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|This  field is optional, and the user can configure the password for the SIM 2&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|13&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM 2  Authentication Protocol&lt;br /&gt;
|None&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the type of  protocol is being used for SIM 2&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|14&lt;br /&gt;
|Primary  SIM Switchback Time (In Minutes)&lt;br /&gt;
|10&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the time given  for sim to swich in between.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
After configuring all the required information, the user should click on the save and then click on the update to update the all the required information. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Band lock and Operator Lock&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this page, the user needs to configure the lock band and operator based on the service provider&#039;&#039;&#039;.&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Bands available in the drop-down list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Band lock and Operator Lock.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;2G/3G option&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2G/3G: - 3G allows additional features such as mobile internet access, video calls and mobile TV. While the main function of 2G technology is the transmission of information through voice calls.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:2G-3G option.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user should select the band check box  available for 2g/3g  from the given list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Bands available for selection under LTE for the bands available that zone.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Operator Selection Mode&#039;&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user needs to click on the check box of the “operator select enable” to select the operator.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the check box is clicked there will be a dropdown list of the operator modes from which the user needs to select the mode. The user needs to select the operator mode from the given dropdown list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Operator Selection Mode.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the user selects the mode “Manual” or “Manual-Automatic” then one more text box will appear where the user must provide the operator code.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Band lock and Operator Lock 1.png|frameless|542x542px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After configuring all the required information, the user should click on the save and then click on the update to update the all the required information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Wi-Fi Setting&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wi-Fi is a family of wireless network protocols based on the IEEE 802.11 family of standards, which are commonly used for local area network of devices and internet access, allowing nearby digital devices to exchanges data by radio waves. These are the most widely used computer network, used globally in home and small office networks to link devices and to provided internet access with wireless router and wireless access point in public places. In this router has the general setting and change country code, channel, radio mode, radio passphrase as per the requirement after clicking on enable Radio button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Wi-Fi Setting.png|frameless|585x585px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user needs to select the respective radio mode based on its need. Basically, it has 3 radio mode.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Wi-Fi Setting access Point.png|frameless|590x590px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Access Point mode:&#039;&#039;&#039; In Access Point mode, router connects to a wireless router through an Ethernet cable to extend the coverage of wireless signal to other network client.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Access Point Mode RC44.png|frameless|573x573px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Client point:&#039;&#039;&#039;  In client mode, the access point connects your wired devices to a wireless network. This mode is suitable when you have a wired device with an Ethernet port and no wireless capability, for example, a smart TV, Media Player, or Game console and you want to connect it to the internet wirelessly, select the Client Mode and give the Radio SSID &amp;amp; client passphrase&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Client Point RC44.png|frameless|587x587px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Access point and client point&#039;&#039;&#039;: select this option for both type connection, give both SSID and passphrase.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Access point and Client Point RC44.png|frameless|571x571px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After configuring all the required information, the user should click on the save and then click on the update to update the all the required information.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Radio  0 Protocol&lt;br /&gt;
|IEEE 802.11 b/g/n&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the  user should select which protocol is being used&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Country  Code&lt;br /&gt;
|INDIA&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the  user should select which county it belongs to.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Channel&lt;br /&gt;
|Auto&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user should  select the proper channel to be used.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|TX  Power&lt;br /&gt;
|100&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user should  specify the power.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Channel  Width&lt;br /&gt;
|20 MHz&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user should  select the channel width&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Radio  Mode&lt;br /&gt;
|Access  point&lt;br /&gt;
|In this drop down the user should  select the mode.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|Radio  SSID&lt;br /&gt;
|APClient_22B09230239&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user should  specify the SSID number&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|Radio  Authentication&lt;br /&gt;
|WPA2  Personal (PSK)&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user should  select the type of authentication.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|9&lt;br /&gt;
|Radio  Encryption&lt;br /&gt;
|AES&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user should  select the type of encryption required.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|10&lt;br /&gt;
|Radio  Passphrase&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user should  specify the password.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|11&lt;br /&gt;
|Radio  DHCP server IP&lt;br /&gt;
|192.168.100.1&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user should  specify the IP address of DHCP server.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|12&lt;br /&gt;
|Radio  DHCP start address&lt;br /&gt;
|100&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user should  specify the start address of the DHCP.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|13&lt;br /&gt;
|Radio  DHCP limit&lt;br /&gt;
|50&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user should  specify the limit for the DHCP.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Wireless Schedule&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wi-Fi can be automatically withdrawn based on the configuration done in this section.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user can schedule the Wi-Fi’s accessibility time during a particular period.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Wireless Schedule.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After configuring all the required information, the user should click on the save and then click on the update to update the all the required information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user can select more than one “day of the week” for scheduling the wifi working hours.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Wifi Schedule.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Loop back IP settings&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The loopback IP address, often referred to as “localhost”. it’s used to establish network connections within the same device for testing and troubleshooting purpose.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Loop back IP settings.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After configuring all the required information, the user should click on the save and then click on the update to update the all the required information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The loopback IP address, commonly represented as 127.0.0.1, is a special address used for testing network connectivity on a local machine. It allows a device to send network messages to itself without involving external networks, making it useful for troubleshooting and diagnostics.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
However, this IP can be changed as per requirement and to do that, Navigating to Setting&amp;gt;&amp;gt;Network configuration&amp;gt;&amp;gt; Loopback IP settings can be changed/updated.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Above screenshot shows the configuration window from GUI/WebUI&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;SMS Settings&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
User needs to enable SMS option in SMS settings page. This option is to validate the mobile numbers using which controlling commands could be sent to the router device. 1 to 5 mobile numbers can be authenticated by choosing from “Select Valid SMS user numbers” and adding the mobile numbers below respectively. API key is the pass key used in the commands while sending SMS. Displayed in the below screen is the default API key which can be edited and changed as per choice.   After addition of the mobile numbers user needs to click on save button for changes to take place.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SMS Settings.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select valid user number max. 5 and add authorized phone number in the main menu where want to find the alert and click on SMS Response Enable, save and update button, now send SMS commands from the configured mobile number. Once the commands are received from the user phone number the board send acknowledgement as per the commands after that it will send the router’s status once it has rebooted and is operational again. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mentioned below are a few commands which can be sent from the configured mobile number to the router device. Below two commands are One for rebooting the router device and another to get the uptime.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1) {&amp;quot;device&amp;quot;:[&amp;quot;passkey&amp;quot;,&amp;quot;API key&amp;quot;],&amp;quot;command&amp;quot;:&amp;quot;reboot&amp;quot;,&amp;quot;arguments&amp;quot;:&amp;quot;hardware&amp;quot;}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2) {&amp;quot;device&amp;quot;:[&amp;quot;passkey &amp;quot;,&amp;quot;API key&amp;quot;],&amp;quot;command&amp;quot;:&amp;quot;uptime&amp;quot;}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After configuring all the required information, the user should click on the save and then click on the update to update the all the required information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===2.2 SIM===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user needs to configure the Sim for the given device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SIM Switch.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user needs to select from the drop-down menu on which basis the sim needs to be switched.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Sim Switch Configuration.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user selects on “&#039;&#039;&#039;signal strength&#039;&#039;&#039;” then the parameters related to signal strength will pop up and the user needs to configure the parameters based on the requirement &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Signal Strength.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Threshold RSRP&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This Needs to be set appropriately. Incorrect setting may cause unnecessary SIM switching. ( In General a BAD RSRP value range is -140 to -115 and FAIR RSRP value range is -115 to -105).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Threshold SINR&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This Needs to be set appropriately. Incorrect setting may cause unnecessary SIM switching. ( In General a BAD SNR value range is -20 to 0 and FAIR SNR value range is 0 to 13)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user selects on “&#039;&#039;&#039;Data Limit&#039;&#039;&#039;” then the parameters related to Data Limit will pop up and the user needs to configure the parameters based on the requirement.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Data limit.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM Switch Based on&lt;br /&gt;
|Data Limit&lt;br /&gt;
|The user needs to select from the  drop-down menu on what basis the sim needs to be switched.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM 1 Data Usage Limit (In MB)&lt;br /&gt;
|1000&lt;br /&gt;
|The user needs to set the limit for the data  usage for SIM 1.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM 2 Data Usage Limit (In MB)&lt;br /&gt;
|1000&lt;br /&gt;
|The user needs to set the limit for the data  usage for SIM 2.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Periodicity&lt;br /&gt;
|Daily&lt;br /&gt;
|The user needs to set the pattern/frequency to  switch the sims.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Day Of Month&lt;br /&gt;
|16&lt;br /&gt;
|The user needs to set the day for switching the  sim.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
After configuring all the required information, the user should click on the save.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===2.3 Internet===&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user needs to configure the internet connection to set the priority from the various options. The user should decide what kind of connection it needs to provide to the device like LAN, WAN etc. Once the connections are configured then click on save option and then on update.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Internet.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the user needs to edit on the existing configuration, then the user should click on the “EDIT” button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Network Edit Options.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Name&lt;br /&gt;
|EWAN2&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the name of the WAN  connection&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Priority&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown box the user need to select  the priority.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Select Track IP Numbers&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user needs to select the  track number for the Ips.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|TrackIP1&lt;br /&gt;
|8.8.8.8&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text field the user needs to set the IP  address for the track 1&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|TrackIP2&lt;br /&gt;
|8.8.4.4&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text field the user needs to set the IP  address for the track 1&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Reliability&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Not sure what needs to be written&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|Count&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Not sure what needs to be written&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|Up&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Not sure what needs to be written&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|9&lt;br /&gt;
|Down&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Not sure what needs to be written&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user is done with modification click on the save button to save all the changes and then click on the update button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===2.4 VPN===&lt;br /&gt;
VPN stands for &#039;&#039;&#039;Virtual Private Network&#039;&#039;&#039;, it establishes a connection between the system and a remote server, which is owned by a VPN provider.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Creating a point-to-point tunnel that encrypts the personal data, masks the IP address, and allows to block the required website to blocks via firewalls on the internet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:VPN Settings RC44.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are 5 types of setting available under VPN configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* General Settings&lt;br /&gt;
* IPSEC&lt;br /&gt;
* Open VPN&lt;br /&gt;
* Wireguard&lt;br /&gt;
* Zerotier&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;General Settings&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user must choose which type of VPN connection is required for the device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user must select from IPSEC or Open VPN based on its requirement. If required, the user can select for both the options. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:VPN General Settings RC44.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user needs to click on the save after selecting the option based on its requirement.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;IPSEC&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
IPSEC VPN is used to create a VPN connection between local and remote networks. To use IPSEC VPN, the user should check that both local and remote routers support IPSEC VPN feature.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user can add/edit/delete the IPSEC VPN connection for the device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:VPN IPSEC changes RC44.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user needs to click on the update button once the required configuration is completed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In IPSEC the user needs to click on edit button to edit the configuration of an existing VPN connection.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:VPN Edit Options.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the save button after the required configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The tunnel will show established, showing the connection has been made.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:IPSEC .png|thumb|631x631px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|IPSEC&lt;br /&gt;
|Site to Site VPN&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user should select  the IPSEC connection type.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|IPSEC Role&lt;br /&gt;
|Client/Server&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown box the user needs to select  the IPSEC role.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Connection Type&lt;br /&gt;
|Tunnel&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user needs to select the connection  type. The user should select on the connection enable check box.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Connection mode&lt;br /&gt;
|start&lt;br /&gt;
|In this drop down list the user should select  the mode for the connection. it will have route/add/start/trap mode&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Remote Server IP&lt;br /&gt;
|1.1.1.1&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text field the user needs to set the IP  address for the remote server.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Local ID&lt;br /&gt;
|g300&lt;br /&gt;
|The user needs to set the local id.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|No. of local subnets&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user needs to select how  many subnets it will be connected.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|Local Subnet 1&lt;br /&gt;
|192.168.11.1/24&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user needs to put the  address of the local subnet.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|9&lt;br /&gt;
|Remote id&lt;br /&gt;
|sophos&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user needs to put the id  of the remote connection.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|10&lt;br /&gt;
|No of remote subnet&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user needs to select how  many subnets it will be connected remotely.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|11&lt;br /&gt;
|Remote subnet&lt;br /&gt;
|192.168.10.0/24&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user needs to put the  address of the remote subnet.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|12&lt;br /&gt;
|Key exchange&lt;br /&gt;
|Ikev1&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user should select the  which key exchange version to be selected.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|13&lt;br /&gt;
|Aggressive&lt;br /&gt;
|Yes/No&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user should select either  yes or no .&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|14&lt;br /&gt;
|IKE lifetime&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|Fill according to user’s requirements.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|15&lt;br /&gt;
|Lifetime in seconds&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Fill according to user’s requirements.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|16&lt;br /&gt;
|Enable DPD Detection&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;1&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
0&lt;br /&gt;
|Indicates  whether Dead Peer Detection is enabled to detect a lost connection. Enable  this option as per server-side settings.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|17&lt;br /&gt;
|Time Interval (In Seconds)&lt;br /&gt;
|60&lt;br /&gt;
|This option  is available only if DPD Detection is enabled. The time interval is the  interval for DPD checks.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|18&lt;br /&gt;
|Action&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Restart&#039;&#039;&#039;/clear/hold/&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
trap/start&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Restart&#039;&#039;&#039;: Action to take when  DPD detects a lost connection (restart the connection). Select as per  server-side setting.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|19&lt;br /&gt;
|Authentication Method&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;PSK&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;PSK&#039;&#039;&#039;: Pre-shared key is used  for authentication. Select this option for authentication as per sever side  setting.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|20&lt;br /&gt;
|Multiple Secrets&lt;br /&gt;
|1/&#039;&#039;&#039;0&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|Indicates  whether multiple PSK secrets are used. Enable only if required.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|21&lt;br /&gt;
|PSK Value&lt;br /&gt;
|******&lt;br /&gt;
|Pre-shared  key value (masked for security).&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;*Below are Phase I and Phase II settings details*&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&lt;br /&gt;
! colspan=&amp;quot;4&amp;quot; |                                                        &#039;&#039;&#039;Proposal settings Phase I&#039;&#039;&#039;                                                                                                                     &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|22            &lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Encryption Algorithm&#039;&#039;&#039;                                                 &lt;br /&gt;
|AES 128&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AES 192&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;AES 256&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3DES                                                                                                                                     &lt;br /&gt;
|                                                                                                                                     &#039;&#039;&#039;AES 256&#039;&#039;&#039;: Encryption algorithm  for Phase I. Select as per server-side configuration. Both server and client  should have same configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|23&lt;br /&gt;
|Authentication Phase I&lt;br /&gt;
|SHA1&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MD5&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SHA 256&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SHA 384&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;SHA 512&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;SHA 512&#039;&#039;&#039;: Authentication  algorithm for Phase I.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select as per  server-side configuration. Both server and client should have same configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|24&lt;br /&gt;
|DH Group&lt;br /&gt;
|MODP768(group1)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MODP1024(group2)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MODP1536(group5)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;MODP2048(group14)&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MODP3072(group15)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MODP4096(group16)&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;MODP2048 (group14)&#039;&#039;&#039;:  Diffie-Hellman group for key exchange.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select as per  server-side configuration. Both server and client should have same  configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| colspan=&amp;quot;4&amp;quot; |                                                                                                                                                                 &#039;&#039;&#039;Proposal settings Phase II&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|25&lt;br /&gt;
|Hash Algorithm&lt;br /&gt;
|AES 128&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AES 192&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;AES 256&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3DES&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;AES 256&#039;&#039;&#039;: Encryption algorithm  for Phase II. Select as per server-side configuration. Both server and client  should have same configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|26&lt;br /&gt;
|Authentication Phase II&lt;br /&gt;
|SHA1&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MD5&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SHA 256&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SHA 384&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;SHA 512&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;SHA 512&#039;&#039;&#039;: Authentication  algorithm for Phase II.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select as per  server-side configuration. Both server and client should have same  configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|27&lt;br /&gt;
|PFS Group&lt;br /&gt;
|MODP768(group1)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MODP1024(group2)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MODP1536(group5)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;MODP2048(group14)&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MODP3072(group15)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MODP4096(group16)&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;MODP2048 (group14)&#039;&#039;&#039;: Perfect  Forward Secrecy group.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select as per  server-side configuration. Both server and client should have same  configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Open VPN&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the OpenVPN connection, the home network can act as a server, and the remote device can access the server through the router which acts as an OpenVPN Server gateway. To use the VPN feature, the user should enable OpenVPN Server on the router, and install and run VPN client software on the remote device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Open VPN Settings RC44.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user needs to “upload” the respective certificate from a valid path and then click on the “Update.”&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the OpenVPN connection starts the user will get an option to enable/disable the VPN connection as and when required.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By clicking on the enable/disable button, the user can start/stop the VPN connection.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Open VPN Settings RC44 Dashboard.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
VPN has been established.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;WireGuard:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;WireGuard&#039;&#039;&#039; is simple, fast, lean, and modern VPN that utilizes secure and trusted cryptography.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on “Edit” to start configurations as needed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Wire Guard RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;EDIT:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Wire Guard RC44 Setttings.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the save button after the required configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample Value     &lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Wireguard Role&lt;br /&gt;
|Client/Server&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown box the user needs to select  the wireguard role.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Listen Port&lt;br /&gt;
|51820&lt;br /&gt;
|The UDP port on which the WireGuard client  listens for incoming connections.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|IP Addresses&lt;br /&gt;
|10.0.0.1/24&lt;br /&gt;
|The IP  address and subnet mask assigned to the WireGuard client&#039;s interface. This  address is used within the VPN.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Allowed PeerIPs&lt;br /&gt;
|10.1.1.1&lt;br /&gt;
|The IP  address of the allowed peer(s) that can connect to this WireGuard client.  This might need adjustment based on the actual peer IPs used in the network.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Endpoint HostIP&lt;br /&gt;
|10.1.1.1&lt;br /&gt;
|The IP  address of the WireGuard server (the endpoint to which the client connects).&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Endpoint HostPort&lt;br /&gt;
|51820&lt;br /&gt;
|The port on  the WireGuard server to which the client connects.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|PeerPublicKey&lt;br /&gt;
|*****&lt;br /&gt;
|The public  key of the peer (the server) the client is connecting to. This key is part of  the public-private key pair used in WireGuard for encryption and  authentication.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|Enable Preshared key&lt;br /&gt;
|Yes/No&lt;br /&gt;
|This option  indicates that a pre-shared key (PSK) is used in addition to the  public-private key pair for an extra layer of security.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|9&lt;br /&gt;
|Preshared key&lt;br /&gt;
|*****&lt;br /&gt;
|The actual  pre-shared key value shared between the client and the server. This option  appears only if you have enabled preshared key.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Zerotier:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ZeroTier is a tool that lets you create your own private network over the internet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Go to ZeroTier Central and sign up for a free account. In ZeroTier Central, click on &amp;quot;Create a Network&amp;quot;. This will generate a unique 16-digit network ID for your new network.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Go to settings =&amp;gt; VPN, in general settings, enable ZeroTier and save.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Zerotier Settings RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Copy and paste the unique 16-digit network ID in the edit section.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Zero Seetings Dashboard RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Zerotier Dashboard.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the save button after the required configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field Name    &lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  Value           &lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|NetworkID&lt;br /&gt;
|Ad2769hfkw2345f4&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown box the user needs to paste  the unique 16-digit network id.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Listen Port&lt;br /&gt;
|9993&lt;br /&gt;
|Default&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== 2.5 Firewall ===&lt;br /&gt;
A firewall is a layer of security between the network and the Internet. Since a router is the main connection from a network to the Internet, the firewall function is merged into this device. Every network should have a firewall to protect its privacy.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Firewall.png|frameless|635x635px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are 6 types of setting available under firewall.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* General Settings&lt;br /&gt;
* Port forwards&lt;br /&gt;
* Traffic Rules&lt;br /&gt;
* SNAT traffic Rules&lt;br /&gt;
* Parental Control&lt;br /&gt;
* Zone Forwarding&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;General Setting&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
General settings are subdivided into 2 parts,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1.) General settings&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In general settings, the settings that are made are default settings and can be changed according to user’s preference.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Firewall General Settings.png|frameless|622x622px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Specification details are below:&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;SN&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Field Name&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Sample Value&#039;&#039;&#039;      &lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Description&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Enable SYN-flood  protection&lt;br /&gt;
|Enabled&lt;br /&gt;
|This is  enabled by default; setting can be changed if required.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Disable IPV6&lt;br /&gt;
|Disabled&lt;br /&gt;
|This is  enabled by default; setting can be changed if required.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Drop invalid packets&lt;br /&gt;
|Disabled&lt;br /&gt;
|This is  enabled by default; setting can be changed if required.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|TCP SYN Cookies&lt;br /&gt;
|Disabled&lt;br /&gt;
|This is  enabled by default; setting can be changed if required.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Input&lt;br /&gt;
|Reject/Accept&lt;br /&gt;
|By  default, the setting is ‘Reject’ but this needs to be changed to ‘Accept’  compulsory.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Output&lt;br /&gt;
|Reject/Accept&lt;br /&gt;
|By  default, the setting is ‘Reject’ but this needs to be changed to ‘Accept’  compulsory.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|Forward&lt;br /&gt;
|Reject/Accept&lt;br /&gt;
|By  default, the setting is ‘Reject’ but this needs to be changed to ‘Accept’  compulsory.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2.) Zone settings&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In zone settings, there’s an option to add “New Zone”, according to user’s requirement.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Zone settings.png|thumb|628x628px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Port Forwards:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Port forwarding is a feature in a router or gateway that allows external devices to access services on a private network.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It maps an external port on the router to an internal IP address and port on the local network, enabling applications such as gaming servers, web servers, or remote desktop connections to be accessed from outside the network.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This helps in directing incoming traffic to the correct device within a local network based on the port number, enhancing connectivity and accessibility.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Firewall Port Forward.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;EDIT&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Firewall Edit Option RC44.png|frameless|622x622px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the save button after the required configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Name&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Web_Server_Forward&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|Field must  not be empty. Provide a name for the rule to easily identify it.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Protocol&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;TCP+UDP&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|Select the protocol  for the rule.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Options  typically include TCP+UDP, TCP, UDP, ICMP, Custom.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Source zone&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;SW_LAN&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|Select the  source zone where the traffic is originating from. Options typically include EWAN2,SW_LAN,CWAN1,CWAN1_0,CWAN1_1,VPN&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Source MAC address [optional]&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;any&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;any&#039;&#039;&#039;: Leave as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;any&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; if you don&#039;t want to specify a MAC address.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Source IP address[optional]&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: Leave blank if not needed.&lt;br /&gt;
|Optionally  specify an IP address or range.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Source port&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;80, 443&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;  (if matching traffic for web server ports)&lt;br /&gt;
|Specify the  source port or port range.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|Destination zone&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;SW_LAN&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|Select the  destination zone where the traffic is heading to.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|Destination IP address&lt;br /&gt;
|Leave blank if not needed.&lt;br /&gt;
|Optionally specify  the destination IP address or range.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|9&lt;br /&gt;
|Destination port&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;80&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;  (if redirecting to a web server port)&lt;br /&gt;
|Specify the  destination port or port range.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Traffic Rule:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;Traffic rules&amp;quot; refer to the policies and regulations that govern the flow of data packets within a network.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To allow new traffic, click on “Add and Edit” in “New Traffic Rule”.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Firewall Traffic Rule.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;EDIT&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Firewall Traffic Rule Edit.png|frameless|621x621px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Specification details are below:&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample Value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Name&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: Allow_HTTP_and_HTTPS&lt;br /&gt;
|Field must  not be empty: Provide a descriptive name for the traffic rule.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Restrict to Address Family&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|1.       Options:  IPv4, IPv6&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2.       Example:  IPv4 if dealing with typical internet traffic.&lt;br /&gt;
|Select the  address family to generate iptables rules for.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Protocol&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: TCP+UDP&lt;br /&gt;
|TCP+UDP:  Match incoming traffic using the given protocol.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Match ICMP Type&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: any&lt;br /&gt;
|Match all  ICMP types if set to any. Specific types can be chosen if needed.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Source Zone&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: LAN&lt;br /&gt;
|Specifies the  traffic source zone.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Enable DDoS Prevention&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: ‘Checked’ if you want to enable DDoS prevention  measures&lt;br /&gt;
|Enable or  disable Distributed Denial of Service (DDoS) prevention.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|Source MAC Address&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: any&lt;br /&gt;
|any: Match  traffic from any MAC address or specify a particular MAC address.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|Source Address&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: 192.168.1.0/24&lt;br /&gt;
|Match  incoming traffic from the specified source IP address or range.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|9&lt;br /&gt;
|Source Port&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: any if all source ports should be matched&lt;br /&gt;
|any: Match  incoming traffic from the specified source port or port range.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|10&lt;br /&gt;
|Destination Zone&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: WAN&lt;br /&gt;
|Specifies the  traffic destination zone.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|11&lt;br /&gt;
|Action&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: ACCEPT&lt;br /&gt;
|Options:  ACCEPT, DROP, REJECT. Specify the action to take for matched traffic.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|12&lt;br /&gt;
|Limit&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: 10/minute to limit matches to 10 times per  minute.&lt;br /&gt;
|Maximum  average matching rate; specified as a number, with an optional /second,  /minute, /hour, or /day suffix.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|13&lt;br /&gt;
|Extra arguments&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: --log-prefix &amp;quot;Blocked: &amp;quot; to add a log  prefix to log messages for this rule.&lt;br /&gt;
|Passes  additional arguments to iptables. Use with care as it can significantly alter  rule behaviour.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
Click on save once configured.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;SNAT Traffic Rule:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For configuring SNAT (Source Network Address Translation) traffic rules, you can control how outbound traffic from your local network is translated to a different IP address as it exits the network.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To add new source NAT,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on “ADD” in “New Source NAT:”&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SNAT Traffic Rule.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Edit&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SNAT Edit Options RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Specification details are below:&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Name&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: SNAT_WAN_to_LAN&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Field must  not be empty&#039;&#039;&#039;: Provide a unique and descriptive name for the SNAT rule.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Protocol&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: TCP+UDP&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;TCP+UDP&#039;&#039;&#039;:  Select the protocols that the SNAT rule will apply to.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Source Zone&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: wan&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;wan&#039;&#039;&#039;:  Specifies the source zone from which the traffic originates.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Source IP Address&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: any or a specific range like 192.168.1.0/24&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;-- please  choose --&#039;&#039;&#039;: Specify the source IP address or range. Leave empty if the  rule applies to any source IP.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Source Port&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: any&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;any&#039;&#039;&#039;:  Specify the source port or port range from which the traffic originates.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Destination Zone&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: lan&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;lan&#039;&#039;&#039;:  Specifies the destination zone to which the traffic is directed.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|Destination IP Address&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: any or a specific IP like 192.168.1.100&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;-- please  choose --&#039;&#039;&#039;: Specify the destination IP address or range. Leave empty if  the rule applies to any destination IP.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|Destination port&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: any&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;any&#039;&#039;&#039;:  Specify the destination port or port range to which the traffic is directed.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|9&lt;br /&gt;
|SNAT IP Address&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: 203.0.113.5 (an external IP address)&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;-- please  choose --&#039;&#039;&#039;: Specify the IP address to which the source IP should be  translated.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|10&lt;br /&gt;
|SNAT Port&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: Leave empty if not needed, or specify a port  like ‘12345’&lt;br /&gt;
|Optionally,  rewrite matched traffic to a specific source port. Leave empty to only  rewrite the IP address.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|11&lt;br /&gt;
|Extra Arguments&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: --log-prefix &amp;quot;SNAT_traffic: &amp;quot; (to add  a log prefix to log messages for this rule)&lt;br /&gt;
|Pass  additional arguments to iptables. Use with care as it can significantly alter  rule behaviour.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
Click on save once configured.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Parental Control:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For configuring parental control rules, you want to set restrictions based on time, source, and destination zones, as well as specific devices.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To add parental control in firewall,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on “Add and Edit” in “New parental control:” field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Parental Control.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Edit&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Parental Control Edit Options RC44.png|frameless|622x622px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Specification details are given below:&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  Name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  Value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Name&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  Parental_Control_Sunday&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Field must  not be empty&#039;&#039;&#039;: Provide a unique and descriptive name for the parental  control rule.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Proto&lt;br /&gt;
|all&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;all&#039;&#039;&#039;:  This specifies that the rule will apply to all protocols.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Source Zone&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: lan&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Field must  not be empty&#039;&#039;&#039;: Please look at Firewall-&amp;gt;Zone Settings to find zone  names.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Destination  Zone&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: wan&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Field must  not be empty&#039;&#039;&#039;: Please look at Firewall-&amp;gt;Zone Settings to find zone  names.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Source MAC  Address&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  00:1A:2B:3C:4D:5E&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Field&#039;&#039;&#039;:  Enter the MAC address of the device you want to apply the parental control  rule to. This is useful for restricting specific devices.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Target&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  Reject&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Accept&#039;&#039;&#039;:  This specifies the action to take. For parental controls, you might want to  use ‘Reject’ or ‘Drop’ to block traffic.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|Weekdays&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  Sunday&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Sunday&#039;&#039;&#039;:  Specify the days of the week when the rule should be active.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|Month Days&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: All&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;All:&#039;&#039;&#039; Specify  the days of the month when the rule should be active.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|9&lt;br /&gt;
|Start Time (hh:mm:ss)&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  18:00:00 (6:00 PM)&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Field must  not be empty:&#039;&#039;&#039; Specify the start time when the rule should begin to apply.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|10&lt;br /&gt;
|Stop Time  (hh:mm:ss)&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  22:00:00 (10:00 PM)&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Field must  not be empty:&#039;&#039;&#039; Specify the stop time when the rule should end.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
Click on save once configured.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Zone Forwarding:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Zone forwarding in network configuration allows traffic to be directed from one zone to another.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To ADD new zone,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on “Add” in “New Zone Forward:” field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Zone Forwarding RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;EDIT&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Zone Forwarding editing Options RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Specification details are below:&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  Name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  Value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Source Zone&lt;br /&gt;
|Example options: lan, wan, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;--please  choose--&#039;&#039;&#039;: Select the source zone from which the traffic originates.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Destination Zone&lt;br /&gt;
|Example options: lan, wan, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;--please  choose--&#039;&#039;&#039;: Select the destination zone to which the traffic is directed.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
Click on save once configured.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===2.6 Loopback Rule===&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user can configure the port where he want to forward the traffic to. Here the user can add/edit/delete different port ports as per the requirement. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Loopback Rule.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user should click on ‘add’ and then ‘edit’ to do the required changes in the port and enter the valid information in each section to configure the port for forwarding.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Loopback Rule edit.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Specification details are given below:&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  Name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  Value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Name&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: loopback&lt;br /&gt;
|Provide a  descriptive name for the rule.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Protocol&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: TCP+UDP&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;TCP+UDP&#039;&#039;&#039;:  Select the protocols that the rule will apply to.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Source IP Address [Optional]&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: any or a specific IP range like 192.168.1.0/24&lt;br /&gt;
|Optionally  specify the source IP address or range. Leave empty if the rule should apply  to any source IP.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Source Port [Optional]&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: any&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;any&#039;&#039;&#039;:  Specify the source port or port range from which the traffic originates. any  allows traffic from all ports.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Loopback IP Address&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: 127.0.0.1&lt;br /&gt;
|Specify the  loopback IP address. Typically, this is 127.0.0.1.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Port&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: any&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;any&#039;&#039;&#039;:  Specify the destination port or port range to which the traffic is directed.  any allows traffic to all ports.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|Action&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: DNAT&lt;br /&gt;
|This  specifies the action to take either DNAT or SNAT.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|Internal IP Address&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: 192.168.1.100&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Field must  not be empty&#039;&#039;&#039;: Specify the internal IP address to which the traffic should  be redirected.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|9&lt;br /&gt;
|Internal Port&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: any&lt;br /&gt;
|Redirect  matched incoming traffic to the given port on the internal host.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user is done with the required configurations, user should click save button and then click on the update to save the changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===2.7 Remote Monitoring===&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user can select which equipment needs to be monitored remotely.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user selects the type of RMS click on save.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Remote Monitoring.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;NMS:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user should type the server IP or domain name in the URL then click on save.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on upload and start (Once key is uploaded and this option is clicked, NMS automatically starts, and this router device gets registered with the NMS server provided).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:NMS.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;TR069&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To enable the TR069 the user needs to click on the enable check box.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:TR069.png|frameless|582x582px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user clicks on the check box of enable it will display all the required filed to configured.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Remote Monitoring Tr-069.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Specification details are given below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field Name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample Value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Serving  Interval&lt;br /&gt;
|300&lt;br /&gt;
|A value of 300 seconds means the device  will check in with the ACS (auto-configuration servers) every 5 minutes.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Interface&lt;br /&gt;
|This can  be something like eth0 or wan.&lt;br /&gt;
|This specifies the network interface  used for TR-069 communication.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Username&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: User&lt;br /&gt;
|The username used to authenticate with  the ACS.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Password&lt;br /&gt;
|••••&lt;br /&gt;
|The password used to authenticate with  the ACS.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|URL&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;http://example.com&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|The URL of the ACS. This is where the  CPE (customer-premises equipment) will send its requests and where it will  receive configurations and updates from.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
The user should fill all the required fields and click on the save button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===2.8 Tunnel===&lt;br /&gt;
Tunnels are a method of transporting data across a network using protocols which are not supported by that network.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is further categorised into 3 sections,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1.) General Settings&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2.) GRE Tunnel&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3.) IPIP Tunnel&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tunnel Settings.png|frameless|621x621px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;General Settings&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user needs to select under which type of tunnel it needs to send the data.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tunnel General Settings.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user selects the type of tunnel then click in the save button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;GRE Tunnel:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A GRE (Generic Routing Encapsulation) tunnel configuration involves setting up a virtual point-to-point connection between two endpoints over an IP network.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here the user can add/edit/delete the details of the tunnel.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:GRE Tunnel 1.png|thumb|633x633px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the required update is done then click on update to save the changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;EDIT:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:GRE Tunnel.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Specification details are given below:&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field Name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample Value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Tunnel  name&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  GRETunnel&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;GRETunnel&#039;&#039;&#039;: The name of the GRE tunnel.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Local  external IP&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  10.1.1.66&lt;br /&gt;
|The IP address of the local endpoint  that will initiate the GRE tunnel.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Remote external  IP&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  10.1.1.40&lt;br /&gt;
|The IP address of the remote endpoint  that will terminate the GRE tunnel.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Peer  tunnel IP&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  10.1.1.4&lt;br /&gt;
|The IP address of the peer&#039;s tunnel  interface.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Local  tunnel IP&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  10.1.1.6&lt;br /&gt;
|The IP address of the local tunnel  interface.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Local  tunnel net mask&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  255.255.255.0&lt;br /&gt;
|The subnet mask of the local tunnel  interface.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|Remote IP&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  192.168.10.0/24&lt;br /&gt;
|The remote network that is reachable  through the GRE tunnel.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|Enable  Tunnel Link&lt;br /&gt;
|Check to  enable&lt;br /&gt;
|Enable or disable the GRE tunnel link.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|9&lt;br /&gt;
|Interface  type&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  EWAN2&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;EWAN2&#039;&#039;&#039;: The  type of network interface used for the GRE tunnel.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|10&lt;br /&gt;
|MTU&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  1476&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;1476&#039;&#039;&#039;: Maximum  Transmission Unit size for the GRE tunnel.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|11&lt;br /&gt;
|TTL&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  64&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;64&#039;&#039;&#039;: Time To  Live value for the packets within the GRE tunnel.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|12&lt;br /&gt;
|Tunnel  key&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  12345678&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;12345678&#039;&#039;&#039;: A unique key used to identify the GRE tunnel.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|13&lt;br /&gt;
|Enable  keep alive&lt;br /&gt;
|Check to  enable&lt;br /&gt;
|Enable or disable the keep-alive  feature to monitor the tunnel&#039;s status.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|14&lt;br /&gt;
|Keep  alive interval&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  10&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;10&#039;&#039;&#039;:  Interval in seconds for the keep-alive packets.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
Once the required update is done then click on update to save the changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;IPIP Tunnel:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An IPIP (IP-in-IP) tunnel is a simple tunneling protocol used to encapsulate IP packets within IP packets. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is similar to GRE but without additional features such as keying and type fields.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here the user can add/edit/delete the details of the tunnel.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:IPIP Tunnel1.png|thumb|635x635px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;EDIT:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:IPIP Edit.png|thumb|637x637px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Specification details are given below:&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field Name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample Value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Tunnel  name&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  IPIPTunnel&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;IPIPTunnel:&#039;&#039;&#039; The name of the IPIP tunnel.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Local external  IP&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  10.1.1.66&lt;br /&gt;
|The IP address of the local endpoint  that will initiate the IPIP tunnel.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Remote  external IP&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  10.1.1.40&lt;br /&gt;
|The IP address of the remote endpoint  that will terminate the IPIP tunnel.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Peer  tunnel IP&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: 10.1.1.4&lt;br /&gt;
|The IP address of the peer&#039;s tunnel  interface.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Local  tunnel IP&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  10.1.1.6&lt;br /&gt;
|The IP address of the local tunnel  interface.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Local  tunnel net mask&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  255.255.255.0&lt;br /&gt;
|The subnet mask of the local tunnel  interface.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|Remote IP&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  192.168.10.0/24&lt;br /&gt;
|The remote network that is reachable  through the IPIP tunnel.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|Enable  Tunnel Link&lt;br /&gt;
|Check to  enable&lt;br /&gt;
|Enable or disable the IPIP tunnel link.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|9&lt;br /&gt;
|Interface  type&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  EWAN2&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;EWAN2&#039;&#039;&#039;: The  type of network interface used for the IPIP tunnel.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|10&lt;br /&gt;
|MTU&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  1476&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;1476&#039;&#039;&#039;: Maximum  Transmission Unit size for the IPIP tunnel.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|11&lt;br /&gt;
|TTL&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  64&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;64&#039;&#039;&#039;: Time To  Live value for the packets within the IPIP tunnel.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|12&lt;br /&gt;
|Tunnel  key&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  12345678&lt;br /&gt;
|Although typically not used in IPIP,  this field might be included for compatibility with certain configurations.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|13&lt;br /&gt;
|Enable  keep alive&lt;br /&gt;
|Check to  enable&lt;br /&gt;
|Enable or disable the keep-alive  feature to monitor the tunnel&#039;s status.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|14&lt;br /&gt;
|Keep  alive interval&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  10&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;10&#039;&#039;&#039;:  Interval in seconds for the keep-alive packets.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
Once the required update is done then click on update to save the changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==3 Maintenance==&lt;br /&gt;
In this module the user can configure/upgrade/modify the settings related to system, password, firmware and monitoring.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It includes below submodules.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
·      General&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
·      Password&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
·      Reboot&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
·      Import and Export config&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
·      Firmware upgrade&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
·      Monitor Application&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Maintenance.png|thumb|631x631px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== 3.1 General/ System ===&lt;br /&gt;
Here you can configure the basic aspects of router like its hostname or the timezone.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is further sub-divided into,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1.) General Settings&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2.) Logging&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3.) Language and Style&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;General Settings:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Maintenance General.png|frameless|619x619px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;EDIT:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field Name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample Value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Local Time&lt;br /&gt;
|2024/07/30  13:25:47&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|The current local date and time set on  the device.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Hostname&lt;br /&gt;
|22B25240007&lt;br /&gt;
|The hostname of the device, which is  used to identify it on the network.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Timezone&lt;br /&gt;
|Asia/Kolkata&lt;br /&gt;
|The timezone setting of the device,  which determines the local time.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user configures the required details then click on the save button to save all the details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Logging:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here the user can configure the basic aspects of your device related to system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The system log configuration provided specifies how the device handles and stores log information, including buffer size, external log server details, and log detail levels.[[File:Maintenance logging.png|frameless|608x608px]]&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field Name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample Value            &lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|System  log buffer size&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  32 kiB&lt;br /&gt;
|The size of the memory buffer allocated  (0-32) for storing system logs before they are either written to a file or  sent to an external server.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|External  system log server&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  0.0.0.0&lt;br /&gt;
|The IP address of an external server  where logs can be sent.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|External  system log server port&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  514&lt;br /&gt;
|The port used to send logs to the  external log server. Port 514 is the default port for syslog.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Log  output level&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  Debug&lt;br /&gt;
|Sets the detail level of the system  logs.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Cron Log  level&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  Debug&lt;br /&gt;
|The detail level of the logs for cron  jobs.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user configures the required details then click on the save button to save all the details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Language and Style:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here the user can configure the basic aspects of your device related to language.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user configures the required details then click on the save button to save all the details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Maintenance Language and Style.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===3.2 Password===&lt;br /&gt;
In this module the user can set the password for the admin credentials.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Specifies the password for the guest account. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the user enters a plaintext password here, it will get replaced with a crypted password on save. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The new password will be effective once the user logs out and log in again.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Password.png|thumb|640x640px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;3.3 Reboot&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this module the user can reboot the device remotely.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
First option is to directly reboot the device without enabling the maintenance reboot tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on “Reboot Now” at the bottom of the screen to start the reboot process.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Reboot 1.png|thumb|632x632px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To start maintenance reboot process first the user needs to fill all the required fields.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Need to select the type of reboot for the device whether it needs to be Hardware or Software reboot.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Main reboot.png|thumb|640x640px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Specification details are given below:&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field Name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample Value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Enable  Maintenance Reboot&lt;br /&gt;
|Enable/Disable&lt;br /&gt;
|Indicates whether the maintenance  reboot feature is enabled or not.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Type&lt;br /&gt;
|Maintenance  Reboot&lt;br /&gt;
|Specifies the type of reboot being  scheduled.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Reboot  Type&lt;br /&gt;
|Software/Hardware&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Hardware&#039;&#039;&#039;: A hardware reboot involves restarting the  entire device as if it were powered off and on again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Software&#039;&#039;&#039;: A software reboot involves restarting the  operating system without powering off the hardware.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Minutes&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  59&lt;br /&gt;
|The minute at which the reboot should  occur (0-59).&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Hours&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  22 (10 PM)&lt;br /&gt;
|The hour at which the reboot should  occur (0-23, in 24-hour format).&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Day Of  Month&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  All&lt;br /&gt;
|Specifies which days of the month the  reboot should occur (1-31). &amp;quot;All&amp;quot; means it will occur every day.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|Month&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  All&lt;br /&gt;
|Specifies which months the reboot  should occur (1-12). &amp;quot;All&amp;quot; means it will occur every month.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|Day Of  Week&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  All&lt;br /&gt;
|Specifies which days of the week the  reboot should occur (0-6, where 0 is Sunday). &amp;quot;All&amp;quot; means it will  occur every day of the week.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user fills all the required given parameters click on the save.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===3.4 Import and Export===&lt;br /&gt;
In this section, User can Import &amp;amp; Export Configuration files of the Device.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Exp &amp;amp; imp.png|thumb|635x635px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
click “Export Config” to export device configuration &amp;amp; settings to a text file,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
click “Import Config” to import device configuration &amp;amp; settings from a previously exported text file.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Exp &amp;amp; imp edit.png|thumb|641x641px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;3.5 Firmware Upgrade&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user can upgrade with the latest software for the existing firmware. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Frimware Upgrade.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the &#039;&#039;&#039;flash image&#039;&#039;&#039; and chose the path where the sys-upgrade file is kept and then click on flash image, it will upgrade to the latest software once the reboot is done.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This option will completely reset the device to default settings.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Flash image.png|thumb|634x634px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the &#039;&#039;&#039;Retain Config and flash&#039;&#039;&#039; and chose the path where the sys-upgrade file is kept and then click on Retain Config and flash, it will upgrade to the latest software once the reboot is done.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This refers to updating the firmware (flashing) of a device while preserving the current configuration settings.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Retain config.png|thumb|638x638px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the &#039;&#039;&#039;Factory Reset&#039;&#039;&#039; for the complete reset of the device.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Factory reset.png|thumb|641x641px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===3===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;3.6 Monitor Application&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this section, the monitor application is divided into major 2 configurations which is further sub-divided into 4 editable options,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1.) Modem Monitor Application Configuration:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2.) Router Monitor Application Configuration:[[File:Monitor Application.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Router Application Remote Configuration.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Router Remote Configuration.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==4 Status==&lt;br /&gt;
In this module the user can view the status of the router device with respect to the network, Wan, modem etc.[[File:Status.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It has 4 submodules.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Interfaces&lt;br /&gt;
* Internet&lt;br /&gt;
* Modem&lt;br /&gt;
* Route&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===4.1 Interfaces===&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user can see the traffic status for all the network through which the device works.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Status Interfaces.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Looking on the network status the user can check if the cellular or the ethernet is up.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===4.2 Internet===&lt;br /&gt;
In this submodule the user can view the status of the internet connections.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Internet Status.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
  To see the latest status of the internet connection the user needs to click on the refresh button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===4.3 Modem===&lt;br /&gt;
In this sub module the user will get to know the status of the cellular interface which is installed inside the modem. The user can view all the details related to the sim in terms of Operator, Network technology, Mobile country code, Upload bandwidth, Download Bandwidth, Frequency band, RSRP, RSRQ, RSSI &amp;amp; SNR under this page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Modem Status.png|frameless|602x602px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== 4.4 Route ===&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user can check the status of the route for the device. The ARP status can be visible in under this page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Route Status.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==5 Features==&lt;br /&gt;
In this module the user can see all the features that the router device has.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This module includes the below features.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Mac Address Binding&lt;br /&gt;
* URL Filtering&lt;br /&gt;
* Web Server&lt;br /&gt;
* Wi-Fi MacID Filtering&lt;br /&gt;
* Routing&lt;br /&gt;
* Others&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Features.png|frameless|618x618px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===5.1 Mac Address Binding===&lt;br /&gt;
Under this submodule the user can configure/update/edit the IP Address for MAC&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mac Addressing Binding.png|frameless|622x622px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user should write MAC address and then click on the add button. Once the address is added then click on the update button to save the modification.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user needs to click on the Edit button to modify the preexisting configuration. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mac Address Edit.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user modifies the MAC address /IP Address then click on the save button to save the changes done.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user can click on the deleted button to delete an existing configured device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Post all the changes the user needs to click on the update to reflect all the changes in the application.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===5.2 URL Filtering===&lt;br /&gt;
In this submodule the user should provide the URL which needs to be blocked for the device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:URL Filtering.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To add the new URL for blocking, click on the Add New button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user clicks on the Add New button a new pop will appear in that page write the URL and click on the save. The user can select the status of that URL while defining the URL.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Url Update.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To edit / delete the existing URL the user needs to click on the edit /deleted button respectively.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Edit or Delete URL.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the save after the changes are done as per the need.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== 5.3 Web Server ===&lt;br /&gt;
In this submodule the user can configure webserver related parameters.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Web server.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To configure the HTTP, click on the enable HTTP. Once the user clicks on the check box the HTTP Port text box will appear where the user needs to configure the port id.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Webserver Configuration.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on save buttons to save the changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To configure the 2nd HTTP, click on the enable HTTP. Once the user clicks on the check box the HTTP Port text box will appear where the user needs to configure the port id.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Webserver Https Redirect.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on save buttons to save the changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the “Redirect https” and “RFC1918 Filter” check box to respectively and click on the save button to save the changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To configure the NTP sync, click on the enable NTP sync. Once the user clicks on the check box the respective text boxes will appear to configure the parameters. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:RFC1918 Filter.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user configures the parameters click on the save button to save the given values.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===5.4 Wi-Fi MacID Filtering===&lt;br /&gt;
In this module the user can filter the Macids. Mac address filtering allows users to block traffic coming from certain known machines or devices.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Wi-Fi MacID Filtering.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Before adding the MacIDs the user needs to select the mode from the dropdown menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To Add the MacID the user needs to click on Add New option select the mac id and network name Wi-Fi 2.4G AP OR Wi-Fi 2.4G AP Guest, select enable/disable option and save it and update.              &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Configuring MacID and Network Name.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the required MACID and Network Name is configured the user needs to click on the save button to add the details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user needs to click on the edit button to do modifications on the pre-existing configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Macid and name removing.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the required MACID / Network Name is modified the user needs to click on the save button to reflect the changed value in the application.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;WIFI 2.4G AP Guest&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To Add the MacID the user needs to click on Add New option select the mac id and network name Wi-Fi 2.4G AP Guest, select enable/disable option and save it and update.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
     [[File:WIFI 2.4G AP Guest.png|frameless|623x623px]]  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the required MACID and Network Name is configured the user needs to click on the save button to add the details. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user needs to click on the edit button to do modifications on the pre-existing configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Configuring MacID and Network Name.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the required MACID / Network Name is modified the user needs to click on the save button to reflect the changed value in the application.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===5.5 Routing===&lt;br /&gt;
In this submodule the user can configure the parameters related to routing of the device. like Target address, Networks address etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Routing IPV4 Routes.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To add a new device the user needs to fill all the required information and click on the add button.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Interface&lt;br /&gt;
|eth0.1&lt;br /&gt;
|In this drop down list the user should  configure the interface name.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Target&lt;br /&gt;
|192.168.10.1&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user needs to insert the  target IP address&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|IPV4 Netmask&lt;br /&gt;
|255.255.255.0&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user should give the  address for the IPV4Netmask&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Metric&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user should insert the  number of the metric.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|IPV4 Gateway&lt;br /&gt;
|192.168.100.1&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user should configured the  address for the IPV4 Gateway.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Route Type&lt;br /&gt;
|Unicast&lt;br /&gt;
|In this drop down box the user should select  the type of route needed for the device.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
To edit the existing device the user needs to click on the edit option.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Routing Configuration.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the changes are done click on the save button to save all the changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the deleted button to delete the existing device detail.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Advanced Static IPV4 Routes:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Advanced Static IPV4 Routes.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To add a new device the user needs to fill all the required information and click on the add button.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Interface&lt;br /&gt;
|eth0.1&lt;br /&gt;
|In this drop down list the user should  configure the interface name.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|To&lt;br /&gt;
|192.168.10.1&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user needs to insert the  target IP address&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|IPV4 Netmask&lt;br /&gt;
|255.255.255.0&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user should give the  address for the IPV4Netmask&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Table&lt;br /&gt;
|local&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|From&lt;br /&gt;
|192.168.100.1&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user should configured the  from address for the routes&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Priority&lt;br /&gt;
|230&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
To edit the existing device the user needs to click on the edit option.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Routing Editing.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the changes are done click on the save button to save all the changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the deleted button to delete the existing device detail.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once all the configurations are done click on the update button to reflect the changes made.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===5.6 Others===&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user will get to do all the other miscellaneous configuration with respect to the device based on the required parameters.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Miscellaneous configuration.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Utility&lt;br /&gt;
|Action&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Set Date&lt;br /&gt;
|SET&lt;br /&gt;
|Need to set the date and time and after  click command get the Date and time&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Gate Date&lt;br /&gt;
|GET&lt;br /&gt;
|Needs to get the system date and time&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|IPsec status all&lt;br /&gt;
|GET&lt;br /&gt;
|Needs to get the IPsec details&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Wi-Fi Scan&lt;br /&gt;
|GET&lt;br /&gt;
|Needs to get the Wi-Fi status&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|ipref3 client&lt;br /&gt;
|RUN&lt;br /&gt;
|Needs to click on the RUN to execute  the command&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|ipref3 server&lt;br /&gt;
|RUN&lt;br /&gt;
|Needs to click on the RUN to execute  the command&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|Ping&lt;br /&gt;
|PING&lt;br /&gt;
|Needs to click on the ping status&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|9&lt;br /&gt;
|Traceroute&lt;br /&gt;
|RUN&lt;br /&gt;
|Needs to click on the ping Traceroute status&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|10&lt;br /&gt;
|NTP Sync&lt;br /&gt;
|SYNC&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to Sync the NTP&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|11&lt;br /&gt;
|Download Files&lt;br /&gt;
|DOWNLOAD&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to Download the files /Database&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|12&lt;br /&gt;
|Restart Power&lt;br /&gt;
|RESTART&lt;br /&gt;
|Click Restart the power&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|13&lt;br /&gt;
|Restart Modem&lt;br /&gt;
|RESTART&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to Restart the modem&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|14&lt;br /&gt;
|Run at command&lt;br /&gt;
|RUN&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to Run the command&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|15&lt;br /&gt;
|Show board configuration&lt;br /&gt;
|SHOW&lt;br /&gt;
|To Show the board configuration&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|16&lt;br /&gt;
|Show VPN Certificate Name&lt;br /&gt;
|SHOW&lt;br /&gt;
|To Show VPN Certificate Name&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|17&lt;br /&gt;
|Switch SIM to Secondary&lt;br /&gt;
|RUN&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to switch the SIM to secondary  mode&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|18&lt;br /&gt;
|Send Test SMS&lt;br /&gt;
|SEND&lt;br /&gt;
|To Send the SMS Confirmation&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|19&lt;br /&gt;
|Readlatest SMS&lt;br /&gt;
|READ&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to Read the latest SMS&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|20&lt;br /&gt;
|Data Usage&lt;br /&gt;
|SHOW&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to show the data usage.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|21&lt;br /&gt;
|Monthly Data Usage&lt;br /&gt;
|SHOW&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to show the monthly data usage&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|22&lt;br /&gt;
|Modem debug Info&lt;br /&gt;
|READ&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to read the information about the  modem debug&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|23&lt;br /&gt;
|Scan Network operators (take&amp;gt;3mins)&lt;br /&gt;
|SHOW&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to show the Network operator&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|24&lt;br /&gt;
|Network operators (first perform scan  network operator&lt;br /&gt;
|SHOW&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to show the Network operator&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|25&lt;br /&gt;
|ReadLogFiles&lt;br /&gt;
|READ&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to read the log files&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|26&lt;br /&gt;
|Enable ssh&lt;br /&gt;
|RUN&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to Run the command&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|27&lt;br /&gt;
|Disable ssh&lt;br /&gt;
|RUN&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to Run the command&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|28&lt;br /&gt;
|Clear SIM1 Data&lt;br /&gt;
|CLEAR&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to clear the SIM1 data&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|29&lt;br /&gt;
|Clear SIM2 Data&lt;br /&gt;
|CLEAR&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to clear the SIM data&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==6 Logout==&lt;br /&gt;
The user should click on log out option to logged out from the router application.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Logout.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user needs to click on the ok to come out of the router application.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tanisha</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.silbonetworks.com/index.php?title=RC44_User_Manual&amp;diff=1204</id>
		<title>RC44 User Manual</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.silbonetworks.com/index.php?title=RC44_User_Manual&amp;diff=1204"/>
		<updated>2024-09-03T06:08:05Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tanisha: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;This page contains the user manual for RC44.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Connecting with the device to the System (Laptop/Desktop).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To log in to SILBO_RC44 by connecting the router to your laptop or desktop via LAN or using Wi-Fi, please follow the steps below. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Connecting via LAN:&#039;&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Connect your laptop&#039;s LAN port to one of the router&#039;s LAN interfaces. Ensure that you select any LAN interface (there are two available) while making sure the WAN interface is not used. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
                                                                                                                                                          &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;How to connect with the SILBO_RC44&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;application&#039;&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the LAN connection is established between the device and the laptop or the desktop&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please open the command prompt and ping go get the ip config of that device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Type the command &#039;&#039;&#039;Ipconfig&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:How_to_connect_with_the_SILBO_RB44_application.png|alt=How to connect with the SILBO RB44 application|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It will provide the Ip address/url of that device through which the application can be accessed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Connecting_via_LAN_RB44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Log In==&lt;br /&gt;
Open the web browser and type the IP address in the URL.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It will show the log in page of the application.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Log In.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Give the valid credentials for the username and password to login to the application page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user credentials are provided it will direct to the landing page of the application.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Login Dashboard RC44.png|frameless|636x636px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The “Status” landing page shows all the detailed specification of the device like system, memory storage and connection tracking etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The application is divided in to 6 Modules.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Info&lt;br /&gt;
* Settings&lt;br /&gt;
* Maintenance&lt;br /&gt;
* Status&lt;br /&gt;
* Features&lt;br /&gt;
* Logout&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==1.Info==&lt;br /&gt;
The “Info” module provides the information about the devices to the user.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It provides all the specification related to the hardware, firmware, Networks and the Connection uptimes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It has 3 submodules.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Overview&lt;br /&gt;
* System Log&lt;br /&gt;
* Kernel Log&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Info dashboard RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===1.1 Overview===&lt;br /&gt;
In overview module it displays all the specification categorically of a device like System, Memory, storage, Connection tracking, DHCP Lease.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Login Dashboard RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;System&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this section it displays the hardware configured specification of the device.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Info system RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The specifications details are as follows,&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&lt;br /&gt;
!SN&lt;br /&gt;
!Field name &lt;br /&gt;
!Sample value&lt;br /&gt;
!Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Hostname&lt;br /&gt;
|22B09230239&lt;br /&gt;
|This field  displays the router serial number of the device&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Model&lt;br /&gt;
|Silbo_RC44- EC200A&lt;br /&gt;
|This field  displays the model number of the device&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Firmware Version and IPK Version&lt;br /&gt;
|1.16_1.13_RC3&lt;br /&gt;
|This field  displays the firmware version and IPK version&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Kernel Version&lt;br /&gt;
|4.14.180&lt;br /&gt;
|This field  displays the kernel version of the device&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Local Time&lt;br /&gt;
|Monday, July 1, 2024, at 05:43:58 PM&lt;br /&gt;
|This field  displays the local time&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Uptime&lt;br /&gt;
|0h 7m 29s&lt;br /&gt;
|This field  displays the uptime of the device&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|Load Average&lt;br /&gt;
|1.73 1.87 1.04&lt;br /&gt;
|This field  displays the average load&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Memory&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this section it displays the memory configured specification of the device.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Memory Dashboard RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The specifications details are as follows.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Total Available&lt;br /&gt;
|68676 kB / 124208 kB (55%)&lt;br /&gt;
|This field  displays the total availability of memory space in the device&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Free&lt;br /&gt;
|59344 kB / 124208 kB (47%)&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the  Free memory space in the device&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Cached&lt;br /&gt;
|312 kB / 124208 kB (0%)&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the  Cached memory space in the device&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Buffered&lt;br /&gt;
|9332 kB / 124208 kB (7%)&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the  Buffered memory space in the device&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Storage&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this section it displays the status of storage as root and temporary usage specification of the device.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Storage Dashboard RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The specifications details are as follows.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Root Usage&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
796 kB / 15488 kB (5%)&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays  the total root usage of the device&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Temporary  Usage&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
312 kB / 62104 kB (0%)&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the total temporary  usage of the device&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Connection Tracking&#039;&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this section it displays the status of connection tracking for the device.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Connection Tracking RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The specifications details are as follows.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Active Connection&lt;br /&gt;
|48 / 16384 (0%)&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the active connection of the device.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;DHCP Leases&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this section, it displays the DHCP lease of the temporary assignment of an IP address to a device on the network.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:DCHP Leases RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The specifications details are as follows.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Host Name&lt;br /&gt;
|KermaniK-LT&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays  the configured Host Name/User Name for that device.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|IPv4-Address&lt;br /&gt;
|192.168.10.147&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the IP  address of the device.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|MAC-Address&lt;br /&gt;
|34:73:5a:bb: ab:7a&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the MAC-Address  of the device.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Lease time remaining&lt;br /&gt;
|11h 53m 49s&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the lease  time remaining for the device.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===1.2 System Log===&lt;br /&gt;
This page provides on screen System logging information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user gets to view the system logs &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:System Log.png|frameless|617x617px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===1.3 Kernel Log===&lt;br /&gt;
This page provides on-screen Kernel logging information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this page, the user gets to view the Kernel logs&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Kernel Log.png|frameless|621x621px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==2. Setting==&lt;br /&gt;
In this “Setting” module the user can Configure/update all the required parameters related to Network, SIM Switch, Internet, VPN, Firewall, Loopback Rule, Remote monitoring, Tunnel as per requirement.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
IT consist of 8 submodules.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Network&lt;br /&gt;
* Sim Switch&lt;br /&gt;
* Internet&lt;br /&gt;
* VPN&lt;br /&gt;
* Firewall&lt;br /&gt;
* Loopback Rule&lt;br /&gt;
* Remote Monitoring&lt;br /&gt;
* Tunnel&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Settings.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===2.1 Network===&lt;br /&gt;
In this section the user does all the setting related configuration with reference to network like Ethernet Setting, Cellular Setting, Band lock and Operator Lock, Wi-Fi, Guest Wi-Fi, Wireless Schedule, SMS Setting, Loopback IP.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Network Dashboard RC44.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Ethernet Setting&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this page it will display all the configured port that is attached with the device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For this device 3 ports are configured. Ethernet mode can be configured as WAN and as LAN as well. Ethernet LAN Connection settings can be configured as DHCP server or Static.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Ethernet Settings RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;For port 3 setting&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Kindly select the option &#039;&#039;&#039;LAN4&#039;&#039;&#039; for &#039;&#039;&#039;Port 3 mode LAN/WAN&#039;&#039;&#039;. Based on the option selected the filed will also changes the user needs to configure all the required field and click on the save to save the required fields.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Ethernet Settings RC44 part 2.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Port 3 mode LAN/WAN&lt;br /&gt;
|LAN&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the port mode selection&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Port 3 Ethernet Protocol [LAN Eth0.1]&lt;br /&gt;
|DHCP Server&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the Ethernet mode selection&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Port 3 DHCP Server IP&lt;br /&gt;
|192.168.10.1&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays DHCP server IP configured.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Port 3 DHCP Netmask&lt;br /&gt;
|255.255.255.0&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays DHCP server Netmask address configured&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Port 3 DHCP Start Address&lt;br /&gt;
|100&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays DHCP server  start address configured&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Port 3 DHCP Limit&lt;br /&gt;
|50&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays DHCP server  limit&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Kindly select the option &#039;&#039;&#039;EWAN&#039;&#039;&#039; for &#039;&#039;&#039;Port 3 mode LAN/WAN&#039;&#039;&#039;. Based on the option selected the filed will also changes the user needs to configure all the required field and click on the save to save the required fields.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:EWAN Port 3 Configuration RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Port 3 mode LAN/WAN&lt;br /&gt;
|EWAN&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the port mode selection&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Ethernet Protocol Port 3 WAN&lt;br /&gt;
|DHCP  client&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the client&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Gateway&lt;br /&gt;
|192.168.1.1&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays gateway address  configured&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the save once all the configuration is done and click on the update button to update all the information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;SW_LAN settings&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this part the user can configure the setting for SW_LAN &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SW LAN settings RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|SW_LAN Ethernet Protocol&lt;br /&gt;
|DHCP  Server&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the  Ethernet mode selection&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|SW_LAN DHCP Server IP&lt;br /&gt;
|192.168.10.1&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays DHCP server IP  configured.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|SW_LAN  DHCP Netmask&lt;br /&gt;
|255.255.255.0&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays DHCP server  Netmask address configured&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|SW_LAN  DHCP Start Address&lt;br /&gt;
|100&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays DHCP server  start address configured&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|SW_LAN  DHCP Limit&lt;br /&gt;
|50&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays DHCP server  limit&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|DNS  Server&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|This filed display number of DSN  server availability&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|DNS  Server Address&lt;br /&gt;
|8.8.8.8&lt;br /&gt;
|This  filed display the DSN server address.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After configuring all the required information, the user should click on the save and then click on the update to update the all the required information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Static option for SW_LAN Ethernet Protocol&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the option of static from the drop-down menu for SW_LAN Ethernet Protocol.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SW LAN settings Static Ethernet Protocol.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|SW_LAN Ethernet Protocol&lt;br /&gt;
|Static&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the  Ethernet mode selection&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|SW_LAN static IP&lt;br /&gt;
|192.168.5.1&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays static server IP  configured.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|SW_LAN  Netmask&lt;br /&gt;
|255.255.255.0&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays static server  Netmask address configured&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|DNS  Server&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|This filed display number of DSN  server availability&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|DSN  Server Address&lt;br /&gt;
|8.8.8.8&lt;br /&gt;
|This  filed display the DSN server address.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
After configuring all the required information, the user should click on the save and then click on the update to update the all the required information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Cellular Setting&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this page, the user needs to configure the various details with respect to the SIM.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
select single cellular single sim where the user must configure the APN details of the sim used for the router device. The Configurations can be done based on the SIM usage, with respect to IPV4 or IPV.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Cellular Settings RC44.png|frameless|619x619px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Cellular  Operation Mode&lt;br /&gt;
|Single Cellular with Dual Sim&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays  the cellular operation mode.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Cellular  Modem 1&lt;br /&gt;
|QuectelEC200A&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the modem name.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Network  Mode&lt;br /&gt;
|Automatic&lt;br /&gt;
|This  field displays the  Network mode selection&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM 1  Access Point Name&lt;br /&gt;
|airtelgprs.com&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the  name of the Sim 1 access point configured.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM 1  PDP Type&lt;br /&gt;
|IPV4&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays  the type of SIM 1&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM 1  Username&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|This field is optional, and the user can configure the name of  the SIM 1&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM 1  Password&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|This  field is optional, and the user can configure the password for the SIM 1&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM 1  Authentication Protocol&lt;br /&gt;
|None&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the type of  protocol is being used for SIM 1&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|9&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM 2  Access Point Name&lt;br /&gt;
|airtelgprs.com&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the name of the  Sim 2 access point configured.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|10&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM 2  PDP Type&lt;br /&gt;
|IPV4&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the type of SIM  2&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|11&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM 2  Username&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|This  field is optional, and the user can configure the name of the SIM 2&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|12&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM 2  Password&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|This  field is optional, and the user can configure the password for the SIM 2&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|13&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM 2  Authentication Protocol&lt;br /&gt;
|None&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the type of  protocol is being used for SIM 2&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|14&lt;br /&gt;
|Primary  SIM Switchback Time (In Minutes)&lt;br /&gt;
|10&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the time given  for sim to swich in between.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
After configuring all the required information, the user should click on the save and then click on the update to update the all the required information. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Band lock and Operator Lock&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this page, the user needs to configure the lock band and operator based on the service provider&#039;&#039;&#039;.&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Bands available in the drop-down list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Band lock and Operator Lock.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;2G/3G option&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2G/3G: - 3G allows additional features such as mobile internet access, video calls and mobile TV. While the main function of 2G technology is the transmission of information through voice calls.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:2G-3G option.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user should select the band check box  available for 2g/3g  from the given list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Bands available for selection under LTE for the bands available that zone.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Operator Selection Mode&#039;&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user needs to click on the check box of the “operator select enable” to select the operator.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the check box is clicked there will be a dropdown list of the operator modes from which the user needs to select the mode. The user needs to select the operator mode from the given dropdown list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Operator Selection Mode.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the user selects the mode “Manual” or “Manual-Automatic” then one more text box will appear where the user must provide the operator code.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Band lock and Operator Lock 1.png|frameless|542x542px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After configuring all the required information, the user should click on the save and then click on the update to update the all the required information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Wi-Fi Setting&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wi-Fi is a family of wireless network protocols based on the IEEE 802.11 family of standards, which are commonly used for local area network of devices and internet access, allowing nearby digital devices to exchanges data by radio waves. These are the most widely used computer network, used globally in home and small office networks to link devices and to provided internet access with wireless router and wireless access point in public places. In this router has the general setting and change country code, channel, radio mode, radio passphrase as per the requirement after clicking on enable Radio button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Wi-Fi Setting.png|frameless|585x585px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user needs to select the respective radio mode based on its need. Basically, it has 3 radio mode.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Wi-Fi Setting access Point.png|frameless|590x590px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Access Point mode:&#039;&#039;&#039; In Access Point mode, router connects to a wireless router through an Ethernet cable to extend the coverage of wireless signal to other network client.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Access Point Mode RC44.png|frameless|573x573px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Client point:&#039;&#039;&#039;  In client mode, the access point connects your wired devices to a wireless network. This mode is suitable when you have a wired device with an Ethernet port and no wireless capability, for example, a smart TV, Media Player, or Game console and you want to connect it to the internet wirelessly, select the Client Mode and give the Radio SSID &amp;amp; client passphrase&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Client Point RC44.png|frameless|587x587px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Access point and client point&#039;&#039;&#039;: select this option for both type connection, give both SSID and passphrase.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Access point and Client Point RC44.png|frameless|571x571px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After configuring all the required information, the user should click on the save and then click on the update to update the all the required information.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Radio  0 Protocol&lt;br /&gt;
|IEEE 802.11 b/g/n&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the  user should select which protocol is being used&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Country  Code&lt;br /&gt;
|INDIA&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the  user should select which county it belongs to.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Channel&lt;br /&gt;
|Auto&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user should  select the proper channel to be used.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|TX  Power&lt;br /&gt;
|100&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user should  specify the power.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Channel  Width&lt;br /&gt;
|20 MHz&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user should  select the channel width&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Radio  Mode&lt;br /&gt;
|Access  point&lt;br /&gt;
|In this drop down the user should  select the mode.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|Radio  SSID&lt;br /&gt;
|APClient_22B09230239&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user should  specify the SSID number&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|Radio  Authentication&lt;br /&gt;
|WPA2  Personal (PSK)&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user should  select the type of authentication.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|9&lt;br /&gt;
|Radio  Encryption&lt;br /&gt;
|AES&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user should  select the type of encryption required.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|10&lt;br /&gt;
|Radio  Passphrase&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user should  specify the password.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|11&lt;br /&gt;
|Radio  DHCP server IP&lt;br /&gt;
|192.168.100.1&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user should  specify the IP address of DHCP server.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|12&lt;br /&gt;
|Radio  DHCP start address&lt;br /&gt;
|100&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user should  specify the start address of the DHCP.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|13&lt;br /&gt;
|Radio  DHCP limit&lt;br /&gt;
|50&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user should  specify the limit for the DHCP.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Wireless Schedule&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wi-Fi can be automatically withdrawn based on the configuration done in this section.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user can schedule the Wi-Fi’s accessibility time during a particular period.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Wireless Schedule.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After configuring all the required information, the user should click on the save and then click on the update to update the all the required information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user can select more than one “day of the week” for scheduling the wifi working hours.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Wifi Schedule.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Loop back IP settings&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The loopback IP address, often referred to as “localhost”. it’s used to establish network connections within the same device for testing and troubleshooting purpose.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Loop back IP settings.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After configuring all the required information, the user should click on the save and then click on the update to update the all the required information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The loopback IP address, commonly represented as 127.0.0.1, is a special address used for testing network connectivity on a local machine. It allows a device to send network messages to itself without involving external networks, making it useful for troubleshooting and diagnostics.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
However, this IP can be changed as per requirement and to do that, Navigating to Setting&amp;gt;&amp;gt;Network configuration&amp;gt;&amp;gt; Loopback IP settings can be changed/updated.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Above screenshot shows the configuration window from GUI/WebUI&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;SMS Settings&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
User needs to enable SMS option in SMS settings page. This option is to validate the mobile numbers using which controlling commands could be sent to the router device. 1 to 5 mobile numbers can be authenticated by choosing from “Select Valid SMS user numbers” and adding the mobile numbers below respectively. API key is the pass key used in the commands while sending SMS. Displayed in the below screen is the default API key which can be edited and changed as per choice.   After addition of the mobile numbers user needs to click on save button for changes to take place.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SMS Settings.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select valid user number max. 5 and add authorized phone number in the main menu where want to find the alert and click on SMS Response Enable, save and update button, now send SMS commands from the configured mobile number. Once the commands are received from the user phone number the board send acknowledgement as per the commands after that it will send the router’s status once it has rebooted and is operational again. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mentioned below are a few commands which can be sent from the configured mobile number to the router device. Below two commands are One for rebooting the router device and another to get the uptime.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1) {&amp;quot;device&amp;quot;:[&amp;quot;passkey&amp;quot;,&amp;quot;API key&amp;quot;],&amp;quot;command&amp;quot;:&amp;quot;reboot&amp;quot;,&amp;quot;arguments&amp;quot;:&amp;quot;hardware&amp;quot;}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2) {&amp;quot;device&amp;quot;:[&amp;quot;passkey &amp;quot;,&amp;quot;API key&amp;quot;],&amp;quot;command&amp;quot;:&amp;quot;uptime&amp;quot;}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After configuring all the required information, the user should click on the save and then click on the update to update the all the required information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===2.2 SIM===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user needs to configure the Sim for the given device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SIM Switch.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user needs to select from the drop-down menu on which basis the sim needs to be switched.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Sim Switch Configuration.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user selects on “&#039;&#039;&#039;signal strength&#039;&#039;&#039;” then the parameters related to signal strength will pop up and the user needs to configure the parameters based on the requirement &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Signal Strength.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Threshold RSRP&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This Needs to be set appropriately. Incorrect setting may cause unnecessary SIM switching. ( In General a BAD RSRP value range is -140 to -115 and FAIR RSRP value range is -115 to -105).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Threshold SINR&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This Needs to be set appropriately. Incorrect setting may cause unnecessary SIM switching. ( In General a BAD SNR value range is -20 to 0 and FAIR SNR value range is 0 to 13)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user selects on “&#039;&#039;&#039;Data Limit&#039;&#039;&#039;” then the parameters related to Data Limit will pop up and the user needs to configure the parameters based on the requirement.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Data limit.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM Switch Based on&lt;br /&gt;
|Data Limit&lt;br /&gt;
|The user needs to select from the  drop-down menu on what basis the sim needs to be switched.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM 1 Data Usage Limit (In MB)&lt;br /&gt;
|1000&lt;br /&gt;
|The user needs to set the limit for the data  usage for SIM 1.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM 2 Data Usage Limit (In MB)&lt;br /&gt;
|1000&lt;br /&gt;
|The user needs to set the limit for the data  usage for SIM 2.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Periodicity&lt;br /&gt;
|Daily&lt;br /&gt;
|The user needs to set the pattern/frequency to  switch the sims.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Day Of Month&lt;br /&gt;
|16&lt;br /&gt;
|The user needs to set the day for switching the  sim.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
After configuring all the required information, the user should click on the save.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===2.3 Internet===&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user needs to configure the internet connection to set the priority from the various options. The user should decide what kind of connection it needs to provide to the device like LAN, WAN etc. Once the connections are configured then click on save option and then on update.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Internet.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the user needs to edit on the existing configuration, then the user should click on the “EDIT” button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Network Edit Options.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Name&lt;br /&gt;
|EWAN2&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the name of the WAN  connection&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Priority&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown box the user need to select  the priority.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Select Track IP Numbers&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user needs to select the  track number for the Ips.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|TrackIP1&lt;br /&gt;
|8.8.8.8&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text field the user needs to set the IP  address for the track 1&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|TrackIP2&lt;br /&gt;
|8.8.4.4&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text field the user needs to set the IP  address for the track 1&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Reliability&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Not sure what needs to be written&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|Count&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Not sure what needs to be written&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|Up&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Not sure what needs to be written&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|9&lt;br /&gt;
|Down&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Not sure what needs to be written&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user is done with modification click on the save button to save all the changes and then click on the update button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===2.4 VPN===&lt;br /&gt;
VPN stands for &#039;&#039;&#039;Virtual Private Network&#039;&#039;&#039;, it establishes a connection between the system and a remote server, which is owned by a VPN provider.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Creating a point-to-point tunnel that encrypts the personal data, masks the IP address, and allows to block the required website to blocks via firewalls on the internet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:VPN Settings RC44.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are 5 types of setting available under VPN configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* General Settings&lt;br /&gt;
* IPSEC&lt;br /&gt;
* Open VPN&lt;br /&gt;
* Wireguard&lt;br /&gt;
* Zerotier&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;General Settings&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user must choose which type of VPN connection is required for the device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user must select from IPSEC or Open VPN based on its requirement. If required, the user can select for both the options. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:VPN General Settings RC44.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user needs to click on the save after selecting the option based on its requirement.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;IPSEC&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
IPSEC VPN is used to create a VPN connection between local and remote networks. To use IPSEC VPN, the user should check that both local and remote routers support IPSEC VPN feature.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user can add/edit/delete the IPSEC VPN connection for the device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:VPN IPSEC changes RC44.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user needs to click on the update button once the required configuration is completed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In IPSEC the user needs to click on edit button to edit the configuration of an existing VPN connection.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:VPN Edit Options.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the save button after the required configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The tunnel will show established, showing the connection has been made.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:IPSEC .png|thumb|631x631px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|IPSEC&lt;br /&gt;
|Site to Site VPN&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user should select  the IPSEC connection type.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|IPSEC Role&lt;br /&gt;
|Client/Server&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown box the user needs to select  the IPSEC role.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Connection Type&lt;br /&gt;
|Tunnel&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user needs to select the connection  type. The user should select on the connection enable check box.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Connection mode&lt;br /&gt;
|start&lt;br /&gt;
|In this drop down list the user should select  the mode for the connection. it will have route/add/start/trap mode&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Remote Server IP&lt;br /&gt;
|1.1.1.1&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text field the user needs to set the IP  address for the remote server.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Local ID&lt;br /&gt;
|g300&lt;br /&gt;
|The user needs to set the local id.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|No. of local subnets&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user needs to select how  many subnets it will be connected.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|Local Subnet 1&lt;br /&gt;
|192.168.11.1/24&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user needs to put the  address of the local subnet.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|9&lt;br /&gt;
|Remote id&lt;br /&gt;
|sophos&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user needs to put the id  of the remote connection.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|10&lt;br /&gt;
|No of remote subnet&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user needs to select how  many subnets it will be connected remotely.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|11&lt;br /&gt;
|Remote subnet&lt;br /&gt;
|192.168.10.0/24&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user needs to put the  address of the remote subnet.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|12&lt;br /&gt;
|Key exchange&lt;br /&gt;
|Ikev1&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user should select the  which key exchange version to be selected.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|13&lt;br /&gt;
|Aggressive&lt;br /&gt;
|Yes/No&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user should select either  yes or no .&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|14&lt;br /&gt;
|IKE lifetime&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|Fill according to user’s requirements.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|15&lt;br /&gt;
|Lifetime in seconds&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Fill according to user’s requirements.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|16&lt;br /&gt;
|Enable DPD Detection&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;1&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
0&lt;br /&gt;
|Indicates  whether Dead Peer Detection is enabled to detect a lost connection. Enable  this option as per server-side settings.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|17&lt;br /&gt;
|Time Interval (In Seconds)&lt;br /&gt;
|60&lt;br /&gt;
|This option  is available only if DPD Detection is enabled. The time interval is the  interval for DPD checks.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|18&lt;br /&gt;
|Action&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Restart&#039;&#039;&#039;/clear/hold/&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
trap/start&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Restart&#039;&#039;&#039;: Action to take when  DPD detects a lost connection (restart the connection). Select as per  server-side setting.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|19&lt;br /&gt;
|Authentication Method&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;PSK&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;PSK&#039;&#039;&#039;: Pre-shared key is used  for authentication. Select this option for authentication as per sever side  setting.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|20&lt;br /&gt;
|Multiple Secrets&lt;br /&gt;
|1/&#039;&#039;&#039;0&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|Indicates  whether multiple PSK secrets are used. Enable only if required.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|21&lt;br /&gt;
|PSK Value&lt;br /&gt;
|******&lt;br /&gt;
|Pre-shared  key value (masked for security).&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;*Below are Phase I and Phase II settings details*&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&lt;br /&gt;
! colspan=&amp;quot;4&amp;quot; |                                                        &#039;&#039;&#039;Proposal settings Phase I&#039;&#039;&#039;                                                                                                                     &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|22            &lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Encryption Algorithm&#039;&#039;&#039;                                                 &lt;br /&gt;
|AES 128&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AES 192&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;AES 256&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3DES                                                                                                                                     &lt;br /&gt;
|                                                                                                                                     &#039;&#039;&#039;AES 256&#039;&#039;&#039;: Encryption algorithm  for Phase I. Select as per server-side configuration. Both server and client  should have same configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|23&lt;br /&gt;
|Authentication Phase I&lt;br /&gt;
|SHA1&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MD5&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SHA 256&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SHA 384&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;SHA 512&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;SHA 512&#039;&#039;&#039;: Authentication  algorithm for Phase I.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select as per  server-side configuration. Both server and client should have same configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|24&lt;br /&gt;
|DH Group&lt;br /&gt;
|MODP768(group1)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MODP1024(group2)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MODP1536(group5)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;MODP2048(group14)&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MODP3072(group15)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MODP4096(group16)&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;MODP2048 (group14)&#039;&#039;&#039;:  Diffie-Hellman group for key exchange.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select as per  server-side configuration. Both server and client should have same  configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| colspan=&amp;quot;4&amp;quot; |                                                                                                                                                                 &#039;&#039;&#039;Proposal settings Phase II&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|25&lt;br /&gt;
|Hash Algorithm&lt;br /&gt;
|AES 128&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AES 192&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;AES 256&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3DES&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;AES 256&#039;&#039;&#039;: Encryption algorithm  for Phase II. Select as per server-side configuration. Both server and client  should have same configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|26&lt;br /&gt;
|Authentication Phase II&lt;br /&gt;
|SHA1&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MD5&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SHA 256&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SHA 384&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;SHA 512&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;SHA 512&#039;&#039;&#039;: Authentication  algorithm for Phase II.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select as per  server-side configuration. Both server and client should have same  configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|27&lt;br /&gt;
|PFS Group&lt;br /&gt;
|MODP768(group1)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MODP1024(group2)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MODP1536(group5)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;MODP2048(group14)&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MODP3072(group15)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MODP4096(group16)&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;MODP2048 (group14)&#039;&#039;&#039;: Perfect  Forward Secrecy group.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select as per  server-side configuration. Both server and client should have same  configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Open VPN&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the OpenVPN connection, the home network can act as a server, and the remote device can access the server through the router which acts as an OpenVPN Server gateway. To use the VPN feature, the user should enable OpenVPN Server on the router, and install and run VPN client software on the remote device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Open VPN Settings RC44.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user needs to “upload” the respective certificate from a valid path and then click on the “Update.”&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the OpenVPN connection starts the user will get an option to enable/disable the VPN connection as and when required.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By clicking on the enable/disable button, the user can start/stop the VPN connection.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Open VPN Settings RC44 Dashboard.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
VPN has been established.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;WireGuard:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;WireGuard&#039;&#039;&#039; is simple, fast, lean, and modern VPN that utilizes secure and trusted cryptography.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on “Edit” to start configurations as needed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Wire Guard RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;EDIT:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Wire Guard RC44 Setttings.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the save button after the required configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample Value     &lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Wireguard Role&lt;br /&gt;
|Client/Server&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown box the user needs to select  the wireguard role.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Listen Port&lt;br /&gt;
|51820&lt;br /&gt;
|The UDP port on which the WireGuard client  listens for incoming connections.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|IP Addresses&lt;br /&gt;
|10.0.0.1/24&lt;br /&gt;
|The IP  address and subnet mask assigned to the WireGuard client&#039;s interface. This  address is used within the VPN.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Allowed PeerIPs&lt;br /&gt;
|10.1.1.1&lt;br /&gt;
|The IP  address of the allowed peer(s) that can connect to this WireGuard client.  This might need adjustment based on the actual peer IPs used in the network.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Endpoint HostIP&lt;br /&gt;
|10.1.1.1&lt;br /&gt;
|The IP  address of the WireGuard server (the endpoint to which the client connects).&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Endpoint HostPort&lt;br /&gt;
|51820&lt;br /&gt;
|The port on  the WireGuard server to which the client connects.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|PeerPublicKey&lt;br /&gt;
|*****&lt;br /&gt;
|The public  key of the peer (the server) the client is connecting to. This key is part of  the public-private key pair used in WireGuard for encryption and  authentication.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|Enable Preshared key&lt;br /&gt;
|Yes/No&lt;br /&gt;
|This option  indicates that a pre-shared key (PSK) is used in addition to the  public-private key pair for an extra layer of security.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|9&lt;br /&gt;
|Preshared key&lt;br /&gt;
|*****&lt;br /&gt;
|The actual  pre-shared key value shared between the client and the server. This option  appears only if you have enabled preshared key.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Zerotier:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ZeroTier is a tool that lets you create your own private network over the internet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Go to ZeroTier Central and sign up for a free account. In ZeroTier Central, click on &amp;quot;Create a Network&amp;quot;. This will generate a unique 16-digit network ID for your new network.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Go to settings =&amp;gt; VPN, in general settings, enable ZeroTier and save.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Zerotier Settings RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Copy and paste the unique 16-digit network ID in the edit section.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Zero Seetings Dashboard RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Zerotier Dashboard.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the save button after the required configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field Name    &lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  Value           &lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|NetworkID&lt;br /&gt;
|Ad2769hfkw2345f4&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown box the user needs to paste  the unique 16-digit network id.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Listen Port&lt;br /&gt;
|9993&lt;br /&gt;
|Default&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== 2.5 Firewall ===&lt;br /&gt;
A firewall is a layer of security between the network and the Internet. Since a router is the main connection from a network to the Internet, the firewall function is merged into this device. Every network should have a firewall to protect its privacy.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Firewall.png|frameless|635x635px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are 6 types of setting available under firewall.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* General Settings&lt;br /&gt;
* Port forwards&lt;br /&gt;
* Traffic Rules&lt;br /&gt;
* SNAT traffic Rules&lt;br /&gt;
* Parental Control&lt;br /&gt;
* Zone Forwarding&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;General Setting&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
General settings are subdivided into 2 parts,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1.) General settings&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In general settings, the settings that are made are default settings and can be changed according to user’s preference.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Firewall General Settings.png|frameless|622x622px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Specification details are below:&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;SN&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Field Name&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Sample Value&#039;&#039;&#039;      &lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Description&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Enable SYN-flood  protection&lt;br /&gt;
|Enabled&lt;br /&gt;
|This is  enabled by default; setting can be changed if required.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Disable IPV6&lt;br /&gt;
|Disabled&lt;br /&gt;
|This is  enabled by default; setting can be changed if required.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Drop invalid packets&lt;br /&gt;
|Disabled&lt;br /&gt;
|This is  enabled by default; setting can be changed if required.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|TCP SYN Cookies&lt;br /&gt;
|Disabled&lt;br /&gt;
|This is  enabled by default; setting can be changed if required.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Input&lt;br /&gt;
|Reject/Accept&lt;br /&gt;
|By  default, the setting is ‘Reject’ but this needs to be changed to ‘Accept’  compulsory.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Output&lt;br /&gt;
|Reject/Accept&lt;br /&gt;
|By  default, the setting is ‘Reject’ but this needs to be changed to ‘Accept’  compulsory.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|Forward&lt;br /&gt;
|Reject/Accept&lt;br /&gt;
|By  default, the setting is ‘Reject’ but this needs to be changed to ‘Accept’  compulsory.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2.) Zone settings&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In zone settings, there’s an option to add “New Zone”, according to user’s requirement.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Zone settings.png|thumb|628x628px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Port Forwards:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Port forwarding is a feature in a router or gateway that allows external devices to access services on a private network.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It maps an external port on the router to an internal IP address and port on the local network, enabling applications such as gaming servers, web servers, or remote desktop connections to be accessed from outside the network.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This helps in directing incoming traffic to the correct device within a local network based on the port number, enhancing connectivity and accessibility.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Firewall Port Forward.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;EDIT&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Firewall Edit Option RC44.png|frameless|622x622px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the save button after the required configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Name&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Web_Server_Forward&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|Field must  not be empty. Provide a name for the rule to easily identify it.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Protocol&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;TCP+UDP&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|Select the protocol  for the rule.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Options  typically include TCP+UDP, TCP, UDP, ICMP, Custom.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Source zone&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;SW_LAN&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|Select the  source zone where the traffic is originating from. Options typically include EWAN2,SW_LAN,CWAN1,CWAN1_0,CWAN1_1,VPN&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Source MAC address [optional]&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;any&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;any&#039;&#039;&#039;: Leave as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;any&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; if you don&#039;t want to specify a MAC address.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Source IP address[optional]&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: Leave blank if not needed.&lt;br /&gt;
|Optionally  specify an IP address or range.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Source port&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;80, 443&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;  (if matching traffic for web server ports)&lt;br /&gt;
|Specify the  source port or port range.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|Destination zone&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;SW_LAN&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|Select the  destination zone where the traffic is heading to.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|Destination IP address&lt;br /&gt;
|Leave blank if not needed.&lt;br /&gt;
|Optionally specify  the destination IP address or range.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|9&lt;br /&gt;
|Destination port&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;80&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;  (if redirecting to a web server port)&lt;br /&gt;
|Specify the  destination port or port range.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Traffic Rule:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;Traffic rules&amp;quot; refer to the policies and regulations that govern the flow of data packets within a network.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To allow new traffic, click on “Add and Edit” in “New Traffic Rule”.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Firewall Traffic Rule.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;EDIT&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Firewall Traffic Rule Edit.png|frameless|621x621px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Specification details are below:&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample Value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Name&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: Allow_HTTP_and_HTTPS&lt;br /&gt;
|Field must  not be empty: Provide a descriptive name for the traffic rule.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Restrict to Address Family&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|1.       Options:  IPv4, IPv6&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2.       Example:  IPv4 if dealing with typical internet traffic.&lt;br /&gt;
|Select the  address family to generate iptables rules for.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Protocol&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: TCP+UDP&lt;br /&gt;
|TCP+UDP:  Match incoming traffic using the given protocol.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Match ICMP Type&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: any&lt;br /&gt;
|Match all  ICMP types if set to any. Specific types can be chosen if needed.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Source Zone&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: LAN&lt;br /&gt;
|Specifies the  traffic source zone.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Enable DDoS Prevention&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: ‘Checked’ if you want to enable DDoS prevention  measures&lt;br /&gt;
|Enable or  disable Distributed Denial of Service (DDoS) prevention.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|Source MAC Address&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: any&lt;br /&gt;
|any: Match  traffic from any MAC address or specify a particular MAC address.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|Source Address&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: 192.168.1.0/24&lt;br /&gt;
|Match  incoming traffic from the specified source IP address or range.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|9&lt;br /&gt;
|Source Port&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: any if all source ports should be matched&lt;br /&gt;
|any: Match  incoming traffic from the specified source port or port range.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|10&lt;br /&gt;
|Destination Zone&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: WAN&lt;br /&gt;
|Specifies the  traffic destination zone.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|11&lt;br /&gt;
|Action&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: ACCEPT&lt;br /&gt;
|Options:  ACCEPT, DROP, REJECT. Specify the action to take for matched traffic.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|12&lt;br /&gt;
|Limit&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: 10/minute to limit matches to 10 times per  minute.&lt;br /&gt;
|Maximum  average matching rate; specified as a number, with an optional /second,  /minute, /hour, or /day suffix.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|13&lt;br /&gt;
|Extra arguments&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: --log-prefix &amp;quot;Blocked: &amp;quot; to add a log  prefix to log messages for this rule.&lt;br /&gt;
|Passes  additional arguments to iptables. Use with care as it can significantly alter  rule behaviour.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
Click on save once configured.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;SNAT Traffic Rule:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For configuring SNAT (Source Network Address Translation) traffic rules, you can control how outbound traffic from your local network is translated to a different IP address as it exits the network.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To add new source NAT,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on “ADD” in “New Source NAT:”&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SNAT Traffic Rule.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Edit&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SNAT Edit Options RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Specification details are below:&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Name&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: SNAT_WAN_to_LAN&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Field must  not be empty&#039;&#039;&#039;: Provide a unique and descriptive name for the SNAT rule.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Protocol&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: TCP+UDP&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;TCP+UDP&#039;&#039;&#039;:  Select the protocols that the SNAT rule will apply to.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Source Zone&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: wan&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;wan&#039;&#039;&#039;:  Specifies the source zone from which the traffic originates.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Source IP Address&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: any or a specific range like 192.168.1.0/24&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;-- please  choose --&#039;&#039;&#039;: Specify the source IP address or range. Leave empty if the  rule applies to any source IP.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Source Port&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: any&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;any&#039;&#039;&#039;:  Specify the source port or port range from which the traffic originates.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Destination Zone&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: lan&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;lan&#039;&#039;&#039;:  Specifies the destination zone to which the traffic is directed.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|Destination IP Address&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: any or a specific IP like 192.168.1.100&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;-- please  choose --&#039;&#039;&#039;: Specify the destination IP address or range. Leave empty if  the rule applies to any destination IP.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|Destination port&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: any&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;any&#039;&#039;&#039;:  Specify the destination port or port range to which the traffic is directed.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|9&lt;br /&gt;
|SNAT IP Address&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: 203.0.113.5 (an external IP address)&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;-- please  choose --&#039;&#039;&#039;: Specify the IP address to which the source IP should be  translated.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|10&lt;br /&gt;
|SNAT Port&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: Leave empty if not needed, or specify a port  like ‘12345’&lt;br /&gt;
|Optionally,  rewrite matched traffic to a specific source port. Leave empty to only  rewrite the IP address.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|11&lt;br /&gt;
|Extra Arguments&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: --log-prefix &amp;quot;SNAT_traffic: &amp;quot; (to add  a log prefix to log messages for this rule)&lt;br /&gt;
|Pass  additional arguments to iptables. Use with care as it can significantly alter  rule behaviour.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
Click on save once configured.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Parental Control:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For configuring parental control rules, you want to set restrictions based on time, source, and destination zones, as well as specific devices.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To add parental control in firewall,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on “Add and Edit” in “New parental control:” field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Parental Control.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Edit&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Parental Control Edit Options RC44.png|frameless|622x622px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Specification details are given below:&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  Name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  Value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Name&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  Parental_Control_Sunday&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Field must  not be empty&#039;&#039;&#039;: Provide a unique and descriptive name for the parental  control rule.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Proto&lt;br /&gt;
|all&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;all&#039;&#039;&#039;:  This specifies that the rule will apply to all protocols.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Source Zone&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: lan&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Field must  not be empty&#039;&#039;&#039;: Please look at Firewall-&amp;gt;Zone Settings to find zone  names.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Destination  Zone&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: wan&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Field must  not be empty&#039;&#039;&#039;: Please look at Firewall-&amp;gt;Zone Settings to find zone  names.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Source MAC  Address&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  00:1A:2B:3C:4D:5E&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Field&#039;&#039;&#039;:  Enter the MAC address of the device you want to apply the parental control  rule to. This is useful for restricting specific devices.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Target&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  Reject&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Accept&#039;&#039;&#039;:  This specifies the action to take. For parental controls, you might want to  use ‘Reject’ or ‘Drop’ to block traffic.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|Weekdays&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  Sunday&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Sunday&#039;&#039;&#039;:  Specify the days of the week when the rule should be active.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|Month Days&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: All&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;All:&#039;&#039;&#039; Specify  the days of the month when the rule should be active.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|9&lt;br /&gt;
|Start Time (hh:mm:ss)&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  18:00:00 (6:00 PM)&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Field must  not be empty:&#039;&#039;&#039; Specify the start time when the rule should begin to apply.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|10&lt;br /&gt;
|Stop Time  (hh:mm:ss)&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  22:00:00 (10:00 PM)&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Field must  not be empty:&#039;&#039;&#039; Specify the stop time when the rule should end.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
Click on save once configured.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Zone Forwarding:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Zone forwarding in network configuration allows traffic to be directed from one zone to another.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To ADD new zone,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on “Add” in “New Zone Forward:” field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Zone Forwarding RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;EDIT&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Zone Forwarding editing Options RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Specification details are below:&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  Name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  Value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Source Zone&lt;br /&gt;
|Example options: lan, wan, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;--please  choose--&#039;&#039;&#039;: Select the source zone from which the traffic originates.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Destination Zone&lt;br /&gt;
|Example options: lan, wan, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;--please  choose--&#039;&#039;&#039;: Select the destination zone to which the traffic is directed.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
Click on save once configured.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===2.6 Loopback Rule===&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user can configure the port where he want to forward the traffic to. Here the user can add/edit/delete different port ports as per the requirement. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Loopback Rule.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user should click on ‘add’ and then ‘edit’ to do the required changes in the port and enter the valid information in each section to configure the port for forwarding.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Loopback Rule edit.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Specification details are given below:&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  Name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  Value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Name&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: loopback&lt;br /&gt;
|Provide a  descriptive name for the rule.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Protocol&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: TCP+UDP&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;TCP+UDP&#039;&#039;&#039;:  Select the protocols that the rule will apply to.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Source IP Address [Optional]&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: any or a specific IP range like 192.168.1.0/24&lt;br /&gt;
|Optionally  specify the source IP address or range. Leave empty if the rule should apply  to any source IP.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Source Port [Optional]&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: any&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;any&#039;&#039;&#039;:  Specify the source port or port range from which the traffic originates. any  allows traffic from all ports.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Loopback IP Address&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: 127.0.0.1&lt;br /&gt;
|Specify the  loopback IP address. Typically, this is 127.0.0.1.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Port&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: any&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;any&#039;&#039;&#039;:  Specify the destination port or port range to which the traffic is directed.  any allows traffic to all ports.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|Action&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: DNAT&lt;br /&gt;
|This  specifies the action to take either DNAT or SNAT.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|Internal IP Address&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: 192.168.1.100&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Field must  not be empty&#039;&#039;&#039;: Specify the internal IP address to which the traffic should  be redirected.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|9&lt;br /&gt;
|Internal Port&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: any&lt;br /&gt;
|Redirect  matched incoming traffic to the given port on the internal host.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user is done with the required configurations, user should click save button and then click on the update to save the changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===2.7 Remote Monitoring===&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user can select which equipment needs to be monitored remotely.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user selects the type of RMS click on save.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Remote Monitoring.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;NMS:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user should type the server IP or domain name in the URL then click on save.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on upload and start (Once key is uploaded and this option is clicked, NMS automatically starts, and this router device gets registered with the NMS server provided).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:NMS.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;TR069&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To enable the TR069 the user needs to click on the enable check box.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:TR069.png|frameless|582x582px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user clicks on the check box of enable it will display all the required filed to configured.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Remote Monitoring Tr-069.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Specification details are given below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field Name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample Value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Serving  Interval&lt;br /&gt;
|300&lt;br /&gt;
|A value of 300 seconds means the device  will check in with the ACS (auto-configuration servers) every 5 minutes.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Interface&lt;br /&gt;
|This can  be something like eth0 or wan.&lt;br /&gt;
|This specifies the network interface  used for TR-069 communication.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Username&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: User&lt;br /&gt;
|The username used to authenticate with  the ACS.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Password&lt;br /&gt;
|••••&lt;br /&gt;
|The password used to authenticate with  the ACS.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|URL&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;http://example.com&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|The URL of the ACS. This is where the  CPE (customer-premises equipment) will send its requests and where it will  receive configurations and updates from.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
The user should fill all the required fields and click on the save button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===2.8 Tunnel===&lt;br /&gt;
Tunnels are a method of transporting data across a network using protocols which are not supported by that network.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is further categorised into 3 sections,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1.) General Settings&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2.) GRE Tunnel&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3.) IPIP Tunnel&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tunnel Settings.png|frameless|621x621px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;General Settings&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user needs to select under which type of tunnel it needs to send the data.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tunnel General Settings.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user selects the type of tunnel then click in the save button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;GRE Tunnel:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A GRE (Generic Routing Encapsulation) tunnel configuration involves setting up a virtual point-to-point connection between two endpoints over an IP network.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here the user can add/edit/delete the details of the tunnel.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:GRE Tunnel 1.png|thumb|633x633px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the required update is done then click on update to save the changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;EDIT:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:GRE Tunnel.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Specification details are given below:&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field Name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample Value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Tunnel  name&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  GRETunnel&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;GRETunnel&#039;&#039;&#039;: The name of the GRE tunnel.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Local  external IP&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  10.1.1.66&lt;br /&gt;
|The IP address of the local endpoint  that will initiate the GRE tunnel.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Remote external  IP&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  10.1.1.40&lt;br /&gt;
|The IP address of the remote endpoint  that will terminate the GRE tunnel.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Peer  tunnel IP&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  10.1.1.4&lt;br /&gt;
|The IP address of the peer&#039;s tunnel  interface.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Local  tunnel IP&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  10.1.1.6&lt;br /&gt;
|The IP address of the local tunnel  interface.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Local  tunnel net mask&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  255.255.255.0&lt;br /&gt;
|The subnet mask of the local tunnel  interface.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|Remote IP&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  192.168.10.0/24&lt;br /&gt;
|The remote network that is reachable  through the GRE tunnel.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|Enable  Tunnel Link&lt;br /&gt;
|Check to  enable&lt;br /&gt;
|Enable or disable the GRE tunnel link.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|9&lt;br /&gt;
|Interface  type&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  EWAN2&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;EWAN2&#039;&#039;&#039;: The  type of network interface used for the GRE tunnel.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|10&lt;br /&gt;
|MTU&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  1476&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;1476&#039;&#039;&#039;: Maximum  Transmission Unit size for the GRE tunnel.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|11&lt;br /&gt;
|TTL&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  64&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;64&#039;&#039;&#039;: Time To  Live value for the packets within the GRE tunnel.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|12&lt;br /&gt;
|Tunnel  key&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  12345678&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;12345678&#039;&#039;&#039;: A unique key used to identify the GRE tunnel.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|13&lt;br /&gt;
|Enable  keep alive&lt;br /&gt;
|Check to  enable&lt;br /&gt;
|Enable or disable the keep-alive  feature to monitor the tunnel&#039;s status.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|14&lt;br /&gt;
|Keep  alive interval&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  10&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;10&#039;&#039;&#039;:  Interval in seconds for the keep-alive packets.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
Once the required update is done then click on update to save the changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;IPIP Tunnel:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An IPIP (IP-in-IP) tunnel is a simple tunneling protocol used to encapsulate IP packets within IP packets. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is similar to GRE but without additional features such as keying and type fields.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here the user can add/edit/delete the details of the tunnel.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:IPIP Tunnel1.png|thumb|635x635px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;EDIT:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:IPIP Edit.png|thumb|637x637px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Specification details are given below:&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field Name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample Value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Tunnel  name&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  IPIPTunnel&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;IPIPTunnel:&#039;&#039;&#039; The name of the IPIP tunnel.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Local external  IP&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  10.1.1.66&lt;br /&gt;
|The IP address of the local endpoint  that will initiate the IPIP tunnel.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Remote  external IP&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  10.1.1.40&lt;br /&gt;
|The IP address of the remote endpoint  that will terminate the IPIP tunnel.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Peer  tunnel IP&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: 10.1.1.4&lt;br /&gt;
|The IP address of the peer&#039;s tunnel  interface.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Local  tunnel IP&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  10.1.1.6&lt;br /&gt;
|The IP address of the local tunnel  interface.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Local  tunnel net mask&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  255.255.255.0&lt;br /&gt;
|The subnet mask of the local tunnel  interface.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|Remote IP&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  192.168.10.0/24&lt;br /&gt;
|The remote network that is reachable  through the IPIP tunnel.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|Enable  Tunnel Link&lt;br /&gt;
|Check to  enable&lt;br /&gt;
|Enable or disable the IPIP tunnel link.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|9&lt;br /&gt;
|Interface  type&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  EWAN2&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;EWAN2&#039;&#039;&#039;: The  type of network interface used for the IPIP tunnel.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|10&lt;br /&gt;
|MTU&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  1476&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;1476&#039;&#039;&#039;: Maximum  Transmission Unit size for the IPIP tunnel.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|11&lt;br /&gt;
|TTL&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  64&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;64&#039;&#039;&#039;: Time To  Live value for the packets within the IPIP tunnel.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|12&lt;br /&gt;
|Tunnel  key&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  12345678&lt;br /&gt;
|Although typically not used in IPIP,  this field might be included for compatibility with certain configurations.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|13&lt;br /&gt;
|Enable  keep alive&lt;br /&gt;
|Check to  enable&lt;br /&gt;
|Enable or disable the keep-alive  feature to monitor the tunnel&#039;s status.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|14&lt;br /&gt;
|Keep  alive interval&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  10&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;10&#039;&#039;&#039;:  Interval in seconds for the keep-alive packets.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
Once the required update is done then click on update to save the changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==3 Maintenance==&lt;br /&gt;
In this module the user can configure/upgrade/modify the settings related to system, password, firmware and monitoring.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It includes below submodules.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
·      General&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
·      Password&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
·      Reboot&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
·      Import and Export config&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
·      Firmware upgrade&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
·      Monitor Application&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Maintenance.png|thumb|631x631px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== 3.1 General/ System ===&lt;br /&gt;
Here you can configure the basic aspects of router like its hostname or the timezone.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is further sub-divided into,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1.) General Settings&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2.) Logging&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3.) Language and Style&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;General Settings:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Maintenance General.png|frameless|619x619px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;EDIT:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field Name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample Value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Local Time&lt;br /&gt;
|2024/07/30  13:25:47&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|The current local date and time set on  the device.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Hostname&lt;br /&gt;
|22B25240007&lt;br /&gt;
|The hostname of the device, which is  used to identify it on the network.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Timezone&lt;br /&gt;
|Asia/Kolkata&lt;br /&gt;
|The timezone setting of the device,  which determines the local time.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user configures the required details then click on the save button to save all the details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Logging:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here the user can configure the basic aspects of your device related to system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The system log configuration provided specifies how the device handles and stores log information, including buffer size, external log server details, and log detail levels.[[File:Maintenance logging.png|frameless|608x608px]]&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field Name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample Value            &lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|System  log buffer size&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  32 kiB&lt;br /&gt;
|The size of the memory buffer allocated  (0-32) for storing system logs before they are either written to a file or  sent to an external server.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|External  system log server&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  0.0.0.0&lt;br /&gt;
|The IP address of an external server  where logs can be sent.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|External  system log server port&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  514&lt;br /&gt;
|The port used to send logs to the  external log server. Port 514 is the default port for syslog.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Log  output level&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  Debug&lt;br /&gt;
|Sets the detail level of the system  logs.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Cron Log  level&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  Debug&lt;br /&gt;
|The detail level of the logs for cron  jobs.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user configures the required details then click on the save button to save all the details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Language and Style:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here the user can configure the basic aspects of your device related to language.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user configures the required details then click on the save button to save all the details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Maintenance Language and Style.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===3.2 Password===&lt;br /&gt;
In this module the user can set the password for the admin credentials.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Specifies the password for the guest account. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the user enters a plaintext password here, it will get replaced with a crypted password on save. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The new password will be effective once the user logs out and log in again.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Password.png|thumb|640x640px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;3.3 Reboot&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this module the user can reboot the device remotely.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
First option is to directly reboot the device without enabling the maintenance reboot tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on “Reboot Now” at the bottom of the screen to start the reboot process.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Reboot 1.png|thumb|632x632px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To start maintenance reboot process first the user needs to fill all the required fields.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Need to select the type of reboot for the device whether it needs to be Hardware or Software reboot.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Main reboot.png|thumb|640x640px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Specification details are given below:&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field Name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample Value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Enable  Maintenance Reboot&lt;br /&gt;
|Enable/Disable&lt;br /&gt;
|Indicates whether the maintenance  reboot feature is enabled or not.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Type&lt;br /&gt;
|Maintenance  Reboot&lt;br /&gt;
|Specifies the type of reboot being  scheduled.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Reboot  Type&lt;br /&gt;
|Software/Hardware&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Hardware&#039;&#039;&#039;: A hardware reboot involves restarting the  entire device as if it were powered off and on again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Software&#039;&#039;&#039;: A software reboot involves restarting the  operating system without powering off the hardware.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Minutes&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  59&lt;br /&gt;
|The minute at which the reboot should  occur (0-59).&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Hours&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  22 (10 PM)&lt;br /&gt;
|The hour at which the reboot should  occur (0-23, in 24-hour format).&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Day Of  Month&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  All&lt;br /&gt;
|Specifies which days of the month the  reboot should occur (1-31). &amp;quot;All&amp;quot; means it will occur every day.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|Month&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  All&lt;br /&gt;
|Specifies which months the reboot  should occur (1-12). &amp;quot;All&amp;quot; means it will occur every month.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|Day Of  Week&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  All&lt;br /&gt;
|Specifies which days of the week the  reboot should occur (0-6, where 0 is Sunday). &amp;quot;All&amp;quot; means it will  occur every day of the week.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user fills all the required given parameters click on the save.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===3.4 Import and Export===&lt;br /&gt;
In this section, User can Import &amp;amp; Export Configuration files of the Device.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Exp &amp;amp; imp.png|thumb|635x635px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
click “Export Config” to export device configuration &amp;amp; settings to a text file,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
click “Import Config” to import device configuration &amp;amp; settings from a previously exported text file.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Exp &amp;amp; imp edit.png|thumb|641x641px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;3.5 Firmware Upgrade&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user can upgrade with the latest software for the existing firmware. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Frimware Upgrade.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the &#039;&#039;&#039;flash image&#039;&#039;&#039; and chose the path where the sys-upgrade file is kept and then click on flash image, it will upgrade to the latest software once the reboot is done.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This option will completely reset the device to default settings.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Flash image.png|thumb|634x634px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the &#039;&#039;&#039;Retain Config and flash&#039;&#039;&#039; and chose the path where the sys-upgrade file is kept and then click on Retain Config and flash, it will upgrade to the latest software once the reboot is done.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This refers to updating the firmware (flashing) of a device while preserving the current configuration settings.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Retain config.png|thumb|638x638px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the &#039;&#039;&#039;Factory Reset&#039;&#039;&#039; for the complete reset of the device.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Factory reset.png|thumb|641x641px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===3.6 Monitor Application===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Monitor Application.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Router Application Remote Configuration.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Router Remote Configuration.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==4 Status==&lt;br /&gt;
In this module the user can view the status of the router device with respect to the network, Wan, modem etc.[[File:Status.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It has 4 submodules.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Interfaces&lt;br /&gt;
* Internet&lt;br /&gt;
* Modem&lt;br /&gt;
* Route&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===4.1 Interfaces===&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user can see the traffic status for all the network through which the device works.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Status Interfaces.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Looking on the network status the user can check if the cellular or the ethernet is up.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===4.2 Internet===&lt;br /&gt;
In this submodule the user can view the status of the internet connections.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Internet Status.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
  To see the latest status of the internet connection the user needs to click on the refresh button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===4.3 Modem===&lt;br /&gt;
In this sub module the user will get to know the status of the cellular interface which is installed inside the modem. The user can view all the details related to the sim in terms of Operator, Network technology, Mobile country code, Upload bandwidth, Download Bandwidth, Frequency band, RSRP, RSRQ, RSSI &amp;amp; SNR under this page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Modem Status.png|frameless|602x602px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== 4.4 Route ===&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user can check the status of the route for the device. The ARP status can be visible in under this page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Route Status.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==5 Features==&lt;br /&gt;
In this module the user can see all the features that the router device has.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This module includes the below features.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Mac Address Binding&lt;br /&gt;
* URL Filtering&lt;br /&gt;
* Web Server&lt;br /&gt;
* Wi-Fi MacID Filtering&lt;br /&gt;
* Routing&lt;br /&gt;
* Others&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Features.png|frameless|618x618px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===5.1 Mac Address Binding===&lt;br /&gt;
Under this submodule the user can configure/update/edit the IP Address for MAC&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mac Addressing Binding.png|frameless|622x622px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user should write MAC address and then click on the add button. Once the address is added then click on the update button to save the modification.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user needs to click on the Edit button to modify the preexisting configuration. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mac Address Edit.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user modifies the MAC address /IP Address then click on the save button to save the changes done.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user can click on the deleted button to delete an existing configured device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Post all the changes the user needs to click on the update to reflect all the changes in the application.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===5.2 URL Filtering===&lt;br /&gt;
In this submodule the user should provide the URL which needs to be blocked for the device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:URL Filtering.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To add the new URL for blocking, click on the Add New button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user clicks on the Add New button a new pop will appear in that page write the URL and click on the save. The user can select the status of that URL while defining the URL.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Url Update.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To edit / delete the existing URL the user needs to click on the edit /deleted button respectively.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Edit or Delete URL.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the save after the changes are done as per the need.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== 5.3 Web Server ===&lt;br /&gt;
In this submodule the user can configure webserver related parameters.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Web server.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To configure the HTTP, click on the enable HTTP. Once the user clicks on the check box the HTTP Port text box will appear where the user needs to configure the port id.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Webserver Configuration.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on save buttons to save the changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To configure the 2nd HTTP, click on the enable HTTP. Once the user clicks on the check box the HTTP Port text box will appear where the user needs to configure the port id.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Webserver Https Redirect.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on save buttons to save the changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the “Redirect https” and “RFC1918 Filter” check box to respectively and click on the save button to save the changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To configure the NTP sync, click on the enable NTP sync. Once the user clicks on the check box the respective text boxes will appear to configure the parameters. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:RFC1918 Filter.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user configures the parameters click on the save button to save the given values.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===5.4 Wi-Fi MacID Filtering===&lt;br /&gt;
In this module the user can filter the Macids. Mac address filtering allows users to block traffic coming from certain known machines or devices.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Wi-Fi MacID Filtering.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Before adding the MacIDs the user needs to select the mode from the dropdown menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To Add the MacID the user needs to click on Add New option select the mac id and network name Wi-Fi 2.4G AP OR Wi-Fi 2.4G AP Guest, select enable/disable option and save it and update.              &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Configuring MacID and Network Name.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the required MACID and Network Name is configured the user needs to click on the save button to add the details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user needs to click on the edit button to do modifications on the pre-existing configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Macid and name removing.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the required MACID / Network Name is modified the user needs to click on the save button to reflect the changed value in the application.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;WIFI 2.4G AP Guest&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To Add the MacID the user needs to click on Add New option select the mac id and network name Wi-Fi 2.4G AP Guest, select enable/disable option and save it and update.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
     [[File:WIFI 2.4G AP Guest.png|frameless|623x623px]]  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the required MACID and Network Name is configured the user needs to click on the save button to add the details. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user needs to click on the edit button to do modifications on the pre-existing configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Configuring MacID and Network Name.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the required MACID / Network Name is modified the user needs to click on the save button to reflect the changed value in the application.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===5.5 Routing===&lt;br /&gt;
In this submodule the user can configure the parameters related to routing of the device. like Target address, Networks address etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Routing IPV4 Routes.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To add a new device the user needs to fill all the required information and click on the add button.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Interface&lt;br /&gt;
|eth0.1&lt;br /&gt;
|In this drop down list the user should  configure the interface name.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Target&lt;br /&gt;
|192.168.10.1&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user needs to insert the  target IP address&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|IPV4 Netmask&lt;br /&gt;
|255.255.255.0&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user should give the  address for the IPV4Netmask&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Metric&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user should insert the  number of the metric.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|IPV4 Gateway&lt;br /&gt;
|192.168.100.1&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user should configured the  address for the IPV4 Gateway.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Route Type&lt;br /&gt;
|Unicast&lt;br /&gt;
|In this drop down box the user should select  the type of route needed for the device.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
To edit the existing device the user needs to click on the edit option.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Routing Configuration.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the changes are done click on the save button to save all the changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the deleted button to delete the existing device detail.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Advanced Static IPV4 Routes:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Advanced Static IPV4 Routes.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To add a new device the user needs to fill all the required information and click on the add button.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Interface&lt;br /&gt;
|eth0.1&lt;br /&gt;
|In this drop down list the user should  configure the interface name.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|To&lt;br /&gt;
|192.168.10.1&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user needs to insert the  target IP address&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|IPV4 Netmask&lt;br /&gt;
|255.255.255.0&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user should give the  address for the IPV4Netmask&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Table&lt;br /&gt;
|local&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|From&lt;br /&gt;
|192.168.100.1&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user should configured the  from address for the routes&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Priority&lt;br /&gt;
|230&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
To edit the existing device the user needs to click on the edit option.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Routing Editing.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the changes are done click on the save button to save all the changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the deleted button to delete the existing device detail.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once all the configurations are done click on the update button to reflect the changes made.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===5.6 Others===&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user will get to do all the other miscellaneous configuration with respect to the device based on the required parameters.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Miscellaneous configuration.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Utility&lt;br /&gt;
|Action&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Set Date&lt;br /&gt;
|SET&lt;br /&gt;
|Need to set the date and time and after  click command get the Date and time&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Gate Date&lt;br /&gt;
|GET&lt;br /&gt;
|Needs to get the system date and time&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|IPsec status all&lt;br /&gt;
|GET&lt;br /&gt;
|Needs to get the IPsec details&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Wi-Fi Scan&lt;br /&gt;
|GET&lt;br /&gt;
|Needs to get the Wi-Fi status&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|ipref3 client&lt;br /&gt;
|RUN&lt;br /&gt;
|Needs to click on the RUN to execute  the command&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|ipref3 server&lt;br /&gt;
|RUN&lt;br /&gt;
|Needs to click on the RUN to execute  the command&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|Ping&lt;br /&gt;
|PING&lt;br /&gt;
|Needs to click on the ping status&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|9&lt;br /&gt;
|Traceroute&lt;br /&gt;
|RUN&lt;br /&gt;
|Needs to click on the ping Traceroute status&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|10&lt;br /&gt;
|NTP Sync&lt;br /&gt;
|SYNC&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to Sync the NTP&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|11&lt;br /&gt;
|Download Files&lt;br /&gt;
|DOWNLOAD&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to Download the files /Database&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|12&lt;br /&gt;
|Restart Power&lt;br /&gt;
|RESTART&lt;br /&gt;
|Click Restart the power&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|13&lt;br /&gt;
|Restart Modem&lt;br /&gt;
|RESTART&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to Restart the modem&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|14&lt;br /&gt;
|Run at command&lt;br /&gt;
|RUN&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to Run the command&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|15&lt;br /&gt;
|Show board configuration&lt;br /&gt;
|SHOW&lt;br /&gt;
|To Show the board configuration&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|16&lt;br /&gt;
|Show VPN Certificate Name&lt;br /&gt;
|SHOW&lt;br /&gt;
|To Show VPN Certificate Name&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|17&lt;br /&gt;
|Switch SIM to Secondary&lt;br /&gt;
|RUN&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to switch the SIM to secondary  mode&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|18&lt;br /&gt;
|Send Test SMS&lt;br /&gt;
|SEND&lt;br /&gt;
|To Send the SMS Confirmation&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|19&lt;br /&gt;
|Readlatest SMS&lt;br /&gt;
|READ&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to Read the latest SMS&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|20&lt;br /&gt;
|Data Usage&lt;br /&gt;
|SHOW&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to show the data usage.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|21&lt;br /&gt;
|Monthly Data Usage&lt;br /&gt;
|SHOW&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to show the monthly data usage&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|22&lt;br /&gt;
|Modem debug Info&lt;br /&gt;
|READ&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to read the information about the  modem debug&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|23&lt;br /&gt;
|Scan Network operators (take&amp;gt;3mins)&lt;br /&gt;
|SHOW&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to show the Network operator&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|24&lt;br /&gt;
|Network operators (first perform scan  network operator&lt;br /&gt;
|SHOW&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to show the Network operator&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|25&lt;br /&gt;
|ReadLogFiles&lt;br /&gt;
|READ&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to read the log files&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|26&lt;br /&gt;
|Enable ssh&lt;br /&gt;
|RUN&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to Run the command&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|27&lt;br /&gt;
|Disable ssh&lt;br /&gt;
|RUN&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to Run the command&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|28&lt;br /&gt;
|Clear SIM1 Data&lt;br /&gt;
|CLEAR&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to clear the SIM1 data&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|29&lt;br /&gt;
|Clear SIM2 Data&lt;br /&gt;
|CLEAR&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to clear the SIM data&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==6 Logout==&lt;br /&gt;
The user should click on log out option to logged out from the router application.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Logout.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user needs to click on the ok to come out of the router application.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tanisha</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.silbonetworks.com/index.php?title=File:Factory_reset.png&amp;diff=1203</id>
		<title>File:Factory reset.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.silbonetworks.com/index.php?title=File:Factory_reset.png&amp;diff=1203"/>
		<updated>2024-09-03T06:07:06Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tanisha: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Factory reset&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tanisha</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.silbonetworks.com/index.php?title=File:Retain_config.png&amp;diff=1202</id>
		<title>File:Retain config.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.silbonetworks.com/index.php?title=File:Retain_config.png&amp;diff=1202"/>
		<updated>2024-09-03T06:05:44Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tanisha: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Retain config&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tanisha</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.silbonetworks.com/index.php?title=File:Flash_image.png&amp;diff=1201</id>
		<title>File:Flash image.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.silbonetworks.com/index.php?title=File:Flash_image.png&amp;diff=1201"/>
		<updated>2024-09-03T06:03:48Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tanisha: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Flash image&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tanisha</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.silbonetworks.com/index.php?title=File:Frimware_Upgrade.png&amp;diff=1200</id>
		<title>File:Frimware Upgrade.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.silbonetworks.com/index.php?title=File:Frimware_Upgrade.png&amp;diff=1200"/>
		<updated>2024-09-03T06:02:00Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tanisha: Tanisha uploaded a new version of File:Frimware Upgrade.png&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Frimware Upgrade&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tanisha</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.silbonetworks.com/index.php?title=RC44_User_Manual&amp;diff=1199</id>
		<title>RC44 User Manual</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.silbonetworks.com/index.php?title=RC44_User_Manual&amp;diff=1199"/>
		<updated>2024-09-03T06:00:29Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tanisha: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;This page contains the user manual for RC44.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Connecting with the device to the System (Laptop/Desktop).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To log in to SILBO_RC44 by connecting the router to your laptop or desktop via LAN or using Wi-Fi, please follow the steps below. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Connecting via LAN:&#039;&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Connect your laptop&#039;s LAN port to one of the router&#039;s LAN interfaces. Ensure that you select any LAN interface (there are two available) while making sure the WAN interface is not used. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
                                                                                                                                                          &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;How to connect with the SILBO_RC44&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;application&#039;&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the LAN connection is established between the device and the laptop or the desktop&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please open the command prompt and ping go get the ip config of that device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Type the command &#039;&#039;&#039;Ipconfig&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:How_to_connect_with_the_SILBO_RB44_application.png|alt=How to connect with the SILBO RB44 application|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It will provide the Ip address/url of that device through which the application can be accessed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Connecting_via_LAN_RB44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Log In==&lt;br /&gt;
Open the web browser and type the IP address in the URL.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It will show the log in page of the application.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Log In.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Give the valid credentials for the username and password to login to the application page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user credentials are provided it will direct to the landing page of the application.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Login Dashboard RC44.png|frameless|636x636px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The “Status” landing page shows all the detailed specification of the device like system, memory storage and connection tracking etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The application is divided in to 6 Modules.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Info&lt;br /&gt;
* Settings&lt;br /&gt;
* Maintenance&lt;br /&gt;
* Status&lt;br /&gt;
* Features&lt;br /&gt;
* Logout&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==1.Info==&lt;br /&gt;
The “Info” module provides the information about the devices to the user.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It provides all the specification related to the hardware, firmware, Networks and the Connection uptimes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It has 3 submodules.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Overview&lt;br /&gt;
* System Log&lt;br /&gt;
* Kernel Log&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Info dashboard RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===1.1 Overview===&lt;br /&gt;
In overview module it displays all the specification categorically of a device like System, Memory, storage, Connection tracking, DHCP Lease.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Login Dashboard RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;System&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this section it displays the hardware configured specification of the device.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Info system RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The specifications details are as follows,&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&lt;br /&gt;
!SN&lt;br /&gt;
!Field name &lt;br /&gt;
!Sample value&lt;br /&gt;
!Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Hostname&lt;br /&gt;
|22B09230239&lt;br /&gt;
|This field  displays the router serial number of the device&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Model&lt;br /&gt;
|Silbo_RC44- EC200A&lt;br /&gt;
|This field  displays the model number of the device&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Firmware Version and IPK Version&lt;br /&gt;
|1.16_1.13_RC3&lt;br /&gt;
|This field  displays the firmware version and IPK version&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Kernel Version&lt;br /&gt;
|4.14.180&lt;br /&gt;
|This field  displays the kernel version of the device&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Local Time&lt;br /&gt;
|Monday, July 1, 2024, at 05:43:58 PM&lt;br /&gt;
|This field  displays the local time&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Uptime&lt;br /&gt;
|0h 7m 29s&lt;br /&gt;
|This field  displays the uptime of the device&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|Load Average&lt;br /&gt;
|1.73 1.87 1.04&lt;br /&gt;
|This field  displays the average load&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Memory&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this section it displays the memory configured specification of the device.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Memory Dashboard RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The specifications details are as follows.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Total Available&lt;br /&gt;
|68676 kB / 124208 kB (55%)&lt;br /&gt;
|This field  displays the total availability of memory space in the device&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Free&lt;br /&gt;
|59344 kB / 124208 kB (47%)&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the  Free memory space in the device&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Cached&lt;br /&gt;
|312 kB / 124208 kB (0%)&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the  Cached memory space in the device&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Buffered&lt;br /&gt;
|9332 kB / 124208 kB (7%)&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the  Buffered memory space in the device&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Storage&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this section it displays the status of storage as root and temporary usage specification of the device.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Storage Dashboard RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The specifications details are as follows.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Root Usage&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
796 kB / 15488 kB (5%)&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays  the total root usage of the device&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Temporary  Usage&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
312 kB / 62104 kB (0%)&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the total temporary  usage of the device&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Connection Tracking&#039;&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this section it displays the status of connection tracking for the device.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Connection Tracking RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The specifications details are as follows.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Active Connection&lt;br /&gt;
|48 / 16384 (0%)&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the active connection of the device.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;DHCP Leases&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this section, it displays the DHCP lease of the temporary assignment of an IP address to a device on the network.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:DCHP Leases RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The specifications details are as follows.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Host Name&lt;br /&gt;
|KermaniK-LT&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays  the configured Host Name/User Name for that device.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|IPv4-Address&lt;br /&gt;
|192.168.10.147&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the IP  address of the device.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|MAC-Address&lt;br /&gt;
|34:73:5a:bb: ab:7a&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the MAC-Address  of the device.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Lease time remaining&lt;br /&gt;
|11h 53m 49s&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the lease  time remaining for the device.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===1.2 System Log===&lt;br /&gt;
This page provides on screen System logging information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user gets to view the system logs &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:System Log.png|frameless|617x617px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===1.3 Kernel Log===&lt;br /&gt;
This page provides on-screen Kernel logging information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this page, the user gets to view the Kernel logs&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Kernel Log.png|frameless|621x621px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==2. Setting==&lt;br /&gt;
In this “Setting” module the user can Configure/update all the required parameters related to Network, SIM Switch, Internet, VPN, Firewall, Loopback Rule, Remote monitoring, Tunnel as per requirement.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
IT consist of 8 submodules.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Network&lt;br /&gt;
* Sim Switch&lt;br /&gt;
* Internet&lt;br /&gt;
* VPN&lt;br /&gt;
* Firewall&lt;br /&gt;
* Loopback Rule&lt;br /&gt;
* Remote Monitoring&lt;br /&gt;
* Tunnel&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Settings.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===2.1 Network===&lt;br /&gt;
In this section the user does all the setting related configuration with reference to network like Ethernet Setting, Cellular Setting, Band lock and Operator Lock, Wi-Fi, Guest Wi-Fi, Wireless Schedule, SMS Setting, Loopback IP.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Network Dashboard RC44.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Ethernet Setting&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this page it will display all the configured port that is attached with the device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For this device 3 ports are configured. Ethernet mode can be configured as WAN and as LAN as well. Ethernet LAN Connection settings can be configured as DHCP server or Static.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Ethernet Settings RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;For port 3 setting&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Kindly select the option &#039;&#039;&#039;LAN4&#039;&#039;&#039; for &#039;&#039;&#039;Port 3 mode LAN/WAN&#039;&#039;&#039;. Based on the option selected the filed will also changes the user needs to configure all the required field and click on the save to save the required fields.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Ethernet Settings RC44 part 2.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Port 3 mode LAN/WAN&lt;br /&gt;
|LAN&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the port mode selection&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Port 3 Ethernet Protocol [LAN Eth0.1]&lt;br /&gt;
|DHCP Server&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the Ethernet mode selection&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Port 3 DHCP Server IP&lt;br /&gt;
|192.168.10.1&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays DHCP server IP configured.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Port 3 DHCP Netmask&lt;br /&gt;
|255.255.255.0&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays DHCP server Netmask address configured&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Port 3 DHCP Start Address&lt;br /&gt;
|100&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays DHCP server  start address configured&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Port 3 DHCP Limit&lt;br /&gt;
|50&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays DHCP server  limit&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Kindly select the option &#039;&#039;&#039;EWAN&#039;&#039;&#039; for &#039;&#039;&#039;Port 3 mode LAN/WAN&#039;&#039;&#039;. Based on the option selected the filed will also changes the user needs to configure all the required field and click on the save to save the required fields.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:EWAN Port 3 Configuration RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Port 3 mode LAN/WAN&lt;br /&gt;
|EWAN&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the port mode selection&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Ethernet Protocol Port 3 WAN&lt;br /&gt;
|DHCP  client&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the client&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Gateway&lt;br /&gt;
|192.168.1.1&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays gateway address  configured&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the save once all the configuration is done and click on the update button to update all the information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;SW_LAN settings&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this part the user can configure the setting for SW_LAN &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SW LAN settings RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|SW_LAN Ethernet Protocol&lt;br /&gt;
|DHCP  Server&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the  Ethernet mode selection&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|SW_LAN DHCP Server IP&lt;br /&gt;
|192.168.10.1&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays DHCP server IP  configured.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|SW_LAN  DHCP Netmask&lt;br /&gt;
|255.255.255.0&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays DHCP server  Netmask address configured&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|SW_LAN  DHCP Start Address&lt;br /&gt;
|100&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays DHCP server  start address configured&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|SW_LAN  DHCP Limit&lt;br /&gt;
|50&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays DHCP server  limit&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|DNS  Server&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|This filed display number of DSN  server availability&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|DNS  Server Address&lt;br /&gt;
|8.8.8.8&lt;br /&gt;
|This  filed display the DSN server address.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After configuring all the required information, the user should click on the save and then click on the update to update the all the required information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Static option for SW_LAN Ethernet Protocol&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the option of static from the drop-down menu for SW_LAN Ethernet Protocol.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SW LAN settings Static Ethernet Protocol.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|SW_LAN Ethernet Protocol&lt;br /&gt;
|Static&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the  Ethernet mode selection&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|SW_LAN static IP&lt;br /&gt;
|192.168.5.1&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays static server IP  configured.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|SW_LAN  Netmask&lt;br /&gt;
|255.255.255.0&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays static server  Netmask address configured&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|DNS  Server&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|This filed display number of DSN  server availability&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|DSN  Server Address&lt;br /&gt;
|8.8.8.8&lt;br /&gt;
|This  filed display the DSN server address.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
After configuring all the required information, the user should click on the save and then click on the update to update the all the required information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Cellular Setting&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this page, the user needs to configure the various details with respect to the SIM.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
select single cellular single sim where the user must configure the APN details of the sim used for the router device. The Configurations can be done based on the SIM usage, with respect to IPV4 or IPV.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Cellular Settings RC44.png|frameless|619x619px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Cellular  Operation Mode&lt;br /&gt;
|Single Cellular with Dual Sim&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays  the cellular operation mode.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Cellular  Modem 1&lt;br /&gt;
|QuectelEC200A&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the modem name.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Network  Mode&lt;br /&gt;
|Automatic&lt;br /&gt;
|This  field displays the  Network mode selection&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM 1  Access Point Name&lt;br /&gt;
|airtelgprs.com&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the  name of the Sim 1 access point configured.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM 1  PDP Type&lt;br /&gt;
|IPV4&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays  the type of SIM 1&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM 1  Username&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|This field is optional, and the user can configure the name of  the SIM 1&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM 1  Password&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|This  field is optional, and the user can configure the password for the SIM 1&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM 1  Authentication Protocol&lt;br /&gt;
|None&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the type of  protocol is being used for SIM 1&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|9&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM 2  Access Point Name&lt;br /&gt;
|airtelgprs.com&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the name of the  Sim 2 access point configured.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|10&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM 2  PDP Type&lt;br /&gt;
|IPV4&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the type of SIM  2&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|11&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM 2  Username&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|This  field is optional, and the user can configure the name of the SIM 2&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|12&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM 2  Password&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|This  field is optional, and the user can configure the password for the SIM 2&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|13&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM 2  Authentication Protocol&lt;br /&gt;
|None&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the type of  protocol is being used for SIM 2&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|14&lt;br /&gt;
|Primary  SIM Switchback Time (In Minutes)&lt;br /&gt;
|10&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the time given  for sim to swich in between.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
After configuring all the required information, the user should click on the save and then click on the update to update the all the required information. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Band lock and Operator Lock&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this page, the user needs to configure the lock band and operator based on the service provider&#039;&#039;&#039;.&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Bands available in the drop-down list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Band lock and Operator Lock.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;2G/3G option&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2G/3G: - 3G allows additional features such as mobile internet access, video calls and mobile TV. While the main function of 2G technology is the transmission of information through voice calls.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:2G-3G option.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user should select the band check box  available for 2g/3g  from the given list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Bands available for selection under LTE for the bands available that zone.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Operator Selection Mode&#039;&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user needs to click on the check box of the “operator select enable” to select the operator.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the check box is clicked there will be a dropdown list of the operator modes from which the user needs to select the mode. The user needs to select the operator mode from the given dropdown list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Operator Selection Mode.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the user selects the mode “Manual” or “Manual-Automatic” then one more text box will appear where the user must provide the operator code.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Band lock and Operator Lock 1.png|frameless|542x542px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After configuring all the required information, the user should click on the save and then click on the update to update the all the required information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Wi-Fi Setting&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wi-Fi is a family of wireless network protocols based on the IEEE 802.11 family of standards, which are commonly used for local area network of devices and internet access, allowing nearby digital devices to exchanges data by radio waves. These are the most widely used computer network, used globally in home and small office networks to link devices and to provided internet access with wireless router and wireless access point in public places. In this router has the general setting and change country code, channel, radio mode, radio passphrase as per the requirement after clicking on enable Radio button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Wi-Fi Setting.png|frameless|585x585px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user needs to select the respective radio mode based on its need. Basically, it has 3 radio mode.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Wi-Fi Setting access Point.png|frameless|590x590px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Access Point mode:&#039;&#039;&#039; In Access Point mode, router connects to a wireless router through an Ethernet cable to extend the coverage of wireless signal to other network client.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Access Point Mode RC44.png|frameless|573x573px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Client point:&#039;&#039;&#039;  In client mode, the access point connects your wired devices to a wireless network. This mode is suitable when you have a wired device with an Ethernet port and no wireless capability, for example, a smart TV, Media Player, or Game console and you want to connect it to the internet wirelessly, select the Client Mode and give the Radio SSID &amp;amp; client passphrase&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Client Point RC44.png|frameless|587x587px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Access point and client point&#039;&#039;&#039;: select this option for both type connection, give both SSID and passphrase.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Access point and Client Point RC44.png|frameless|571x571px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After configuring all the required information, the user should click on the save and then click on the update to update the all the required information.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Radio  0 Protocol&lt;br /&gt;
|IEEE 802.11 b/g/n&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the  user should select which protocol is being used&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Country  Code&lt;br /&gt;
|INDIA&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the  user should select which county it belongs to.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Channel&lt;br /&gt;
|Auto&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user should  select the proper channel to be used.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|TX  Power&lt;br /&gt;
|100&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user should  specify the power.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Channel  Width&lt;br /&gt;
|20 MHz&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user should  select the channel width&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Radio  Mode&lt;br /&gt;
|Access  point&lt;br /&gt;
|In this drop down the user should  select the mode.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|Radio  SSID&lt;br /&gt;
|APClient_22B09230239&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user should  specify the SSID number&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|Radio  Authentication&lt;br /&gt;
|WPA2  Personal (PSK)&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user should  select the type of authentication.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|9&lt;br /&gt;
|Radio  Encryption&lt;br /&gt;
|AES&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user should  select the type of encryption required.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|10&lt;br /&gt;
|Radio  Passphrase&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user should  specify the password.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|11&lt;br /&gt;
|Radio  DHCP server IP&lt;br /&gt;
|192.168.100.1&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user should  specify the IP address of DHCP server.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|12&lt;br /&gt;
|Radio  DHCP start address&lt;br /&gt;
|100&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user should  specify the start address of the DHCP.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|13&lt;br /&gt;
|Radio  DHCP limit&lt;br /&gt;
|50&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user should  specify the limit for the DHCP.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Wireless Schedule&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wi-Fi can be automatically withdrawn based on the configuration done in this section.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user can schedule the Wi-Fi’s accessibility time during a particular period.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Wireless Schedule.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After configuring all the required information, the user should click on the save and then click on the update to update the all the required information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user can select more than one “day of the week” for scheduling the wifi working hours.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Wifi Schedule.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Loop back IP settings&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The loopback IP address, often referred to as “localhost”. it’s used to establish network connections within the same device for testing and troubleshooting purpose.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Loop back IP settings.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After configuring all the required information, the user should click on the save and then click on the update to update the all the required information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The loopback IP address, commonly represented as 127.0.0.1, is a special address used for testing network connectivity on a local machine. It allows a device to send network messages to itself without involving external networks, making it useful for troubleshooting and diagnostics.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
However, this IP can be changed as per requirement and to do that, Navigating to Setting&amp;gt;&amp;gt;Network configuration&amp;gt;&amp;gt; Loopback IP settings can be changed/updated.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Above screenshot shows the configuration window from GUI/WebUI&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;SMS Settings&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
User needs to enable SMS option in SMS settings page. This option is to validate the mobile numbers using which controlling commands could be sent to the router device. 1 to 5 mobile numbers can be authenticated by choosing from “Select Valid SMS user numbers” and adding the mobile numbers below respectively. API key is the pass key used in the commands while sending SMS. Displayed in the below screen is the default API key which can be edited and changed as per choice.   After addition of the mobile numbers user needs to click on save button for changes to take place.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SMS Settings.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select valid user number max. 5 and add authorized phone number in the main menu where want to find the alert and click on SMS Response Enable, save and update button, now send SMS commands from the configured mobile number. Once the commands are received from the user phone number the board send acknowledgement as per the commands after that it will send the router’s status once it has rebooted and is operational again. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mentioned below are a few commands which can be sent from the configured mobile number to the router device. Below two commands are One for rebooting the router device and another to get the uptime.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1) {&amp;quot;device&amp;quot;:[&amp;quot;passkey&amp;quot;,&amp;quot;API key&amp;quot;],&amp;quot;command&amp;quot;:&amp;quot;reboot&amp;quot;,&amp;quot;arguments&amp;quot;:&amp;quot;hardware&amp;quot;}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2) {&amp;quot;device&amp;quot;:[&amp;quot;passkey &amp;quot;,&amp;quot;API key&amp;quot;],&amp;quot;command&amp;quot;:&amp;quot;uptime&amp;quot;}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After configuring all the required information, the user should click on the save and then click on the update to update the all the required information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===2.2 SIM===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user needs to configure the Sim for the given device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SIM Switch.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user needs to select from the drop-down menu on which basis the sim needs to be switched.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Sim Switch Configuration.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user selects on “&#039;&#039;&#039;signal strength&#039;&#039;&#039;” then the parameters related to signal strength will pop up and the user needs to configure the parameters based on the requirement &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Signal Strength.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Threshold RSRP&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This Needs to be set appropriately. Incorrect setting may cause unnecessary SIM switching. ( In General a BAD RSRP value range is -140 to -115 and FAIR RSRP value range is -115 to -105).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Threshold SINR&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This Needs to be set appropriately. Incorrect setting may cause unnecessary SIM switching. ( In General a BAD SNR value range is -20 to 0 and FAIR SNR value range is 0 to 13)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user selects on “&#039;&#039;&#039;Data Limit&#039;&#039;&#039;” then the parameters related to Data Limit will pop up and the user needs to configure the parameters based on the requirement.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Data limit.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM Switch Based on&lt;br /&gt;
|Data Limit&lt;br /&gt;
|The user needs to select from the  drop-down menu on what basis the sim needs to be switched.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM 1 Data Usage Limit (In MB)&lt;br /&gt;
|1000&lt;br /&gt;
|The user needs to set the limit for the data  usage for SIM 1.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM 2 Data Usage Limit (In MB)&lt;br /&gt;
|1000&lt;br /&gt;
|The user needs to set the limit for the data  usage for SIM 2.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Periodicity&lt;br /&gt;
|Daily&lt;br /&gt;
|The user needs to set the pattern/frequency to  switch the sims.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Day Of Month&lt;br /&gt;
|16&lt;br /&gt;
|The user needs to set the day for switching the  sim.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
After configuring all the required information, the user should click on the save.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===2.3 Internet===&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user needs to configure the internet connection to set the priority from the various options. The user should decide what kind of connection it needs to provide to the device like LAN, WAN etc. Once the connections are configured then click on save option and then on update.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Internet.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the user needs to edit on the existing configuration, then the user should click on the “EDIT” button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Network Edit Options.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Name&lt;br /&gt;
|EWAN2&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the name of the WAN  connection&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Priority&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown box the user need to select  the priority.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Select Track IP Numbers&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user needs to select the  track number for the Ips.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|TrackIP1&lt;br /&gt;
|8.8.8.8&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text field the user needs to set the IP  address for the track 1&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|TrackIP2&lt;br /&gt;
|8.8.4.4&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text field the user needs to set the IP  address for the track 1&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Reliability&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Not sure what needs to be written&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|Count&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Not sure what needs to be written&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|Up&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Not sure what needs to be written&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|9&lt;br /&gt;
|Down&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Not sure what needs to be written&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user is done with modification click on the save button to save all the changes and then click on the update button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===2.4 VPN===&lt;br /&gt;
VPN stands for &#039;&#039;&#039;Virtual Private Network&#039;&#039;&#039;, it establishes a connection between the system and a remote server, which is owned by a VPN provider.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Creating a point-to-point tunnel that encrypts the personal data, masks the IP address, and allows to block the required website to blocks via firewalls on the internet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:VPN Settings RC44.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are 5 types of setting available under VPN configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* General Settings&lt;br /&gt;
* IPSEC&lt;br /&gt;
* Open VPN&lt;br /&gt;
* Wireguard&lt;br /&gt;
* Zerotier&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;General Settings&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user must choose which type of VPN connection is required for the device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user must select from IPSEC or Open VPN based on its requirement. If required, the user can select for both the options. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:VPN General Settings RC44.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user needs to click on the save after selecting the option based on its requirement.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;IPSEC&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
IPSEC VPN is used to create a VPN connection between local and remote networks. To use IPSEC VPN, the user should check that both local and remote routers support IPSEC VPN feature.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user can add/edit/delete the IPSEC VPN connection for the device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:VPN IPSEC changes RC44.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user needs to click on the update button once the required configuration is completed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In IPSEC the user needs to click on edit button to edit the configuration of an existing VPN connection.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:VPN Edit Options.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the save button after the required configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The tunnel will show established, showing the connection has been made.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:IPSEC .png|thumb|631x631px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|IPSEC&lt;br /&gt;
|Site to Site VPN&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user should select  the IPSEC connection type.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|IPSEC Role&lt;br /&gt;
|Client/Server&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown box the user needs to select  the IPSEC role.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Connection Type&lt;br /&gt;
|Tunnel&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user needs to select the connection  type. The user should select on the connection enable check box.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Connection mode&lt;br /&gt;
|start&lt;br /&gt;
|In this drop down list the user should select  the mode for the connection. it will have route/add/start/trap mode&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Remote Server IP&lt;br /&gt;
|1.1.1.1&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text field the user needs to set the IP  address for the remote server.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Local ID&lt;br /&gt;
|g300&lt;br /&gt;
|The user needs to set the local id.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|No. of local subnets&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user needs to select how  many subnets it will be connected.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|Local Subnet 1&lt;br /&gt;
|192.168.11.1/24&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user needs to put the  address of the local subnet.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|9&lt;br /&gt;
|Remote id&lt;br /&gt;
|sophos&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user needs to put the id  of the remote connection.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|10&lt;br /&gt;
|No of remote subnet&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user needs to select how  many subnets it will be connected remotely.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|11&lt;br /&gt;
|Remote subnet&lt;br /&gt;
|192.168.10.0/24&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user needs to put the  address of the remote subnet.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|12&lt;br /&gt;
|Key exchange&lt;br /&gt;
|Ikev1&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user should select the  which key exchange version to be selected.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|13&lt;br /&gt;
|Aggressive&lt;br /&gt;
|Yes/No&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user should select either  yes or no .&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|14&lt;br /&gt;
|IKE lifetime&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|Fill according to user’s requirements.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|15&lt;br /&gt;
|Lifetime in seconds&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Fill according to user’s requirements.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|16&lt;br /&gt;
|Enable DPD Detection&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;1&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
0&lt;br /&gt;
|Indicates  whether Dead Peer Detection is enabled to detect a lost connection. Enable  this option as per server-side settings.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|17&lt;br /&gt;
|Time Interval (In Seconds)&lt;br /&gt;
|60&lt;br /&gt;
|This option  is available only if DPD Detection is enabled. The time interval is the  interval for DPD checks.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|18&lt;br /&gt;
|Action&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Restart&#039;&#039;&#039;/clear/hold/&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
trap/start&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Restart&#039;&#039;&#039;: Action to take when  DPD detects a lost connection (restart the connection). Select as per  server-side setting.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|19&lt;br /&gt;
|Authentication Method&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;PSK&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;PSK&#039;&#039;&#039;: Pre-shared key is used  for authentication. Select this option for authentication as per sever side  setting.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|20&lt;br /&gt;
|Multiple Secrets&lt;br /&gt;
|1/&#039;&#039;&#039;0&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|Indicates  whether multiple PSK secrets are used. Enable only if required.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|21&lt;br /&gt;
|PSK Value&lt;br /&gt;
|******&lt;br /&gt;
|Pre-shared  key value (masked for security).&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;*Below are Phase I and Phase II settings details*&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&lt;br /&gt;
! colspan=&amp;quot;4&amp;quot; |                                                        &#039;&#039;&#039;Proposal settings Phase I&#039;&#039;&#039;                                                                                                                     &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|22            &lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Encryption Algorithm&#039;&#039;&#039;                                                 &lt;br /&gt;
|AES 128&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AES 192&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;AES 256&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3DES                                                                                                                                     &lt;br /&gt;
|                                                                                                                                     &#039;&#039;&#039;AES 256&#039;&#039;&#039;: Encryption algorithm  for Phase I. Select as per server-side configuration. Both server and client  should have same configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|23&lt;br /&gt;
|Authentication Phase I&lt;br /&gt;
|SHA1&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MD5&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SHA 256&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SHA 384&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;SHA 512&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;SHA 512&#039;&#039;&#039;: Authentication  algorithm for Phase I.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select as per  server-side configuration. Both server and client should have same configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|24&lt;br /&gt;
|DH Group&lt;br /&gt;
|MODP768(group1)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MODP1024(group2)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MODP1536(group5)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;MODP2048(group14)&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MODP3072(group15)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MODP4096(group16)&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;MODP2048 (group14)&#039;&#039;&#039;:  Diffie-Hellman group for key exchange.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select as per  server-side configuration. Both server and client should have same  configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| colspan=&amp;quot;4&amp;quot; |                                                                                                                                                                 &#039;&#039;&#039;Proposal settings Phase II&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|25&lt;br /&gt;
|Hash Algorithm&lt;br /&gt;
|AES 128&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AES 192&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;AES 256&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3DES&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;AES 256&#039;&#039;&#039;: Encryption algorithm  for Phase II. Select as per server-side configuration. Both server and client  should have same configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|26&lt;br /&gt;
|Authentication Phase II&lt;br /&gt;
|SHA1&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MD5&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SHA 256&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SHA 384&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;SHA 512&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;SHA 512&#039;&#039;&#039;: Authentication  algorithm for Phase II.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select as per  server-side configuration. Both server and client should have same  configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|27&lt;br /&gt;
|PFS Group&lt;br /&gt;
|MODP768(group1)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MODP1024(group2)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MODP1536(group5)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;MODP2048(group14)&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MODP3072(group15)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MODP4096(group16)&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;MODP2048 (group14)&#039;&#039;&#039;: Perfect  Forward Secrecy group.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select as per  server-side configuration. Both server and client should have same  configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Open VPN&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the OpenVPN connection, the home network can act as a server, and the remote device can access the server through the router which acts as an OpenVPN Server gateway. To use the VPN feature, the user should enable OpenVPN Server on the router, and install and run VPN client software on the remote device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Open VPN Settings RC44.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user needs to “upload” the respective certificate from a valid path and then click on the “Update.”&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the OpenVPN connection starts the user will get an option to enable/disable the VPN connection as and when required.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By clicking on the enable/disable button, the user can start/stop the VPN connection.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Open VPN Settings RC44 Dashboard.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
VPN has been established.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;WireGuard:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;WireGuard&#039;&#039;&#039; is simple, fast, lean, and modern VPN that utilizes secure and trusted cryptography.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on “Edit” to start configurations as needed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Wire Guard RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;EDIT:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Wire Guard RC44 Setttings.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the save button after the required configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample Value     &lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Wireguard Role&lt;br /&gt;
|Client/Server&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown box the user needs to select  the wireguard role.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Listen Port&lt;br /&gt;
|51820&lt;br /&gt;
|The UDP port on which the WireGuard client  listens for incoming connections.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|IP Addresses&lt;br /&gt;
|10.0.0.1/24&lt;br /&gt;
|The IP  address and subnet mask assigned to the WireGuard client&#039;s interface. This  address is used within the VPN.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Allowed PeerIPs&lt;br /&gt;
|10.1.1.1&lt;br /&gt;
|The IP  address of the allowed peer(s) that can connect to this WireGuard client.  This might need adjustment based on the actual peer IPs used in the network.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Endpoint HostIP&lt;br /&gt;
|10.1.1.1&lt;br /&gt;
|The IP  address of the WireGuard server (the endpoint to which the client connects).&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Endpoint HostPort&lt;br /&gt;
|51820&lt;br /&gt;
|The port on  the WireGuard server to which the client connects.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|PeerPublicKey&lt;br /&gt;
|*****&lt;br /&gt;
|The public  key of the peer (the server) the client is connecting to. This key is part of  the public-private key pair used in WireGuard for encryption and  authentication.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|Enable Preshared key&lt;br /&gt;
|Yes/No&lt;br /&gt;
|This option  indicates that a pre-shared key (PSK) is used in addition to the  public-private key pair for an extra layer of security.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|9&lt;br /&gt;
|Preshared key&lt;br /&gt;
|*****&lt;br /&gt;
|The actual  pre-shared key value shared between the client and the server. This option  appears only if you have enabled preshared key.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Zerotier:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ZeroTier is a tool that lets you create your own private network over the internet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Go to ZeroTier Central and sign up for a free account. In ZeroTier Central, click on &amp;quot;Create a Network&amp;quot;. This will generate a unique 16-digit network ID for your new network.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Go to settings =&amp;gt; VPN, in general settings, enable ZeroTier and save.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Zerotier Settings RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Copy and paste the unique 16-digit network ID in the edit section.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Zero Seetings Dashboard RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Zerotier Dashboard.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the save button after the required configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field Name    &lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  Value           &lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|NetworkID&lt;br /&gt;
|Ad2769hfkw2345f4&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown box the user needs to paste  the unique 16-digit network id.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Listen Port&lt;br /&gt;
|9993&lt;br /&gt;
|Default&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== 2.5 Firewall ===&lt;br /&gt;
A firewall is a layer of security between the network and the Internet. Since a router is the main connection from a network to the Internet, the firewall function is merged into this device. Every network should have a firewall to protect its privacy.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Firewall.png|frameless|635x635px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are 6 types of setting available under firewall.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* General Settings&lt;br /&gt;
* Port forwards&lt;br /&gt;
* Traffic Rules&lt;br /&gt;
* SNAT traffic Rules&lt;br /&gt;
* Parental Control&lt;br /&gt;
* Zone Forwarding&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;General Setting&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
General settings are subdivided into 2 parts,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1.) General settings&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In general settings, the settings that are made are default settings and can be changed according to user’s preference.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Firewall General Settings.png|frameless|622x622px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Specification details are below:&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;SN&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Field Name&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Sample Value&#039;&#039;&#039;      &lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Description&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Enable SYN-flood  protection&lt;br /&gt;
|Enabled&lt;br /&gt;
|This is  enabled by default; setting can be changed if required.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Disable IPV6&lt;br /&gt;
|Disabled&lt;br /&gt;
|This is  enabled by default; setting can be changed if required.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Drop invalid packets&lt;br /&gt;
|Disabled&lt;br /&gt;
|This is  enabled by default; setting can be changed if required.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|TCP SYN Cookies&lt;br /&gt;
|Disabled&lt;br /&gt;
|This is  enabled by default; setting can be changed if required.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Input&lt;br /&gt;
|Reject/Accept&lt;br /&gt;
|By  default, the setting is ‘Reject’ but this needs to be changed to ‘Accept’  compulsory.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Output&lt;br /&gt;
|Reject/Accept&lt;br /&gt;
|By  default, the setting is ‘Reject’ but this needs to be changed to ‘Accept’  compulsory.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|Forward&lt;br /&gt;
|Reject/Accept&lt;br /&gt;
|By  default, the setting is ‘Reject’ but this needs to be changed to ‘Accept’  compulsory.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2.) Zone settings&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In zone settings, there’s an option to add “New Zone”, according to user’s requirement.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Zone settings.png|thumb|628x628px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Port Forwards:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Port forwarding is a feature in a router or gateway that allows external devices to access services on a private network.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It maps an external port on the router to an internal IP address and port on the local network, enabling applications such as gaming servers, web servers, or remote desktop connections to be accessed from outside the network.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This helps in directing incoming traffic to the correct device within a local network based on the port number, enhancing connectivity and accessibility.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Firewall Port Forward.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;EDIT&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Firewall Edit Option RC44.png|frameless|622x622px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the save button after the required configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Name&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Web_Server_Forward&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|Field must  not be empty. Provide a name for the rule to easily identify it.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Protocol&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;TCP+UDP&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|Select the protocol  for the rule.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Options  typically include TCP+UDP, TCP, UDP, ICMP, Custom.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Source zone&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;SW_LAN&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|Select the  source zone where the traffic is originating from. Options typically include EWAN2,SW_LAN,CWAN1,CWAN1_0,CWAN1_1,VPN&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Source MAC address [optional]&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;any&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;any&#039;&#039;&#039;: Leave as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;any&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; if you don&#039;t want to specify a MAC address.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Source IP address[optional]&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: Leave blank if not needed.&lt;br /&gt;
|Optionally  specify an IP address or range.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Source port&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;80, 443&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;  (if matching traffic for web server ports)&lt;br /&gt;
|Specify the  source port or port range.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|Destination zone&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;SW_LAN&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|Select the  destination zone where the traffic is heading to.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|Destination IP address&lt;br /&gt;
|Leave blank if not needed.&lt;br /&gt;
|Optionally specify  the destination IP address or range.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|9&lt;br /&gt;
|Destination port&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;80&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;  (if redirecting to a web server port)&lt;br /&gt;
|Specify the  destination port or port range.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Traffic Rule:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;Traffic rules&amp;quot; refer to the policies and regulations that govern the flow of data packets within a network.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To allow new traffic, click on “Add and Edit” in “New Traffic Rule”.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Firewall Traffic Rule.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;EDIT&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Firewall Traffic Rule Edit.png|frameless|621x621px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Specification details are below:&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample Value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Name&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: Allow_HTTP_and_HTTPS&lt;br /&gt;
|Field must  not be empty: Provide a descriptive name for the traffic rule.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Restrict to Address Family&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|1.       Options:  IPv4, IPv6&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2.       Example:  IPv4 if dealing with typical internet traffic.&lt;br /&gt;
|Select the  address family to generate iptables rules for.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Protocol&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: TCP+UDP&lt;br /&gt;
|TCP+UDP:  Match incoming traffic using the given protocol.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Match ICMP Type&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: any&lt;br /&gt;
|Match all  ICMP types if set to any. Specific types can be chosen if needed.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Source Zone&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: LAN&lt;br /&gt;
|Specifies the  traffic source zone.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Enable DDoS Prevention&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: ‘Checked’ if you want to enable DDoS prevention  measures&lt;br /&gt;
|Enable or  disable Distributed Denial of Service (DDoS) prevention.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|Source MAC Address&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: any&lt;br /&gt;
|any: Match  traffic from any MAC address or specify a particular MAC address.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|Source Address&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: 192.168.1.0/24&lt;br /&gt;
|Match  incoming traffic from the specified source IP address or range.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|9&lt;br /&gt;
|Source Port&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: any if all source ports should be matched&lt;br /&gt;
|any: Match  incoming traffic from the specified source port or port range.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|10&lt;br /&gt;
|Destination Zone&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: WAN&lt;br /&gt;
|Specifies the  traffic destination zone.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|11&lt;br /&gt;
|Action&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: ACCEPT&lt;br /&gt;
|Options:  ACCEPT, DROP, REJECT. Specify the action to take for matched traffic.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|12&lt;br /&gt;
|Limit&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: 10/minute to limit matches to 10 times per  minute.&lt;br /&gt;
|Maximum  average matching rate; specified as a number, with an optional /second,  /minute, /hour, or /day suffix.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|13&lt;br /&gt;
|Extra arguments&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: --log-prefix &amp;quot;Blocked: &amp;quot; to add a log  prefix to log messages for this rule.&lt;br /&gt;
|Passes  additional arguments to iptables. Use with care as it can significantly alter  rule behaviour.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
Click on save once configured.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;SNAT Traffic Rule:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For configuring SNAT (Source Network Address Translation) traffic rules, you can control how outbound traffic from your local network is translated to a different IP address as it exits the network.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To add new source NAT,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on “ADD” in “New Source NAT:”&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SNAT Traffic Rule.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Edit&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SNAT Edit Options RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Specification details are below:&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Name&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: SNAT_WAN_to_LAN&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Field must  not be empty&#039;&#039;&#039;: Provide a unique and descriptive name for the SNAT rule.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Protocol&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: TCP+UDP&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;TCP+UDP&#039;&#039;&#039;:  Select the protocols that the SNAT rule will apply to.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Source Zone&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: wan&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;wan&#039;&#039;&#039;:  Specifies the source zone from which the traffic originates.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Source IP Address&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: any or a specific range like 192.168.1.0/24&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;-- please  choose --&#039;&#039;&#039;: Specify the source IP address or range. Leave empty if the  rule applies to any source IP.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Source Port&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: any&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;any&#039;&#039;&#039;:  Specify the source port or port range from which the traffic originates.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Destination Zone&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: lan&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;lan&#039;&#039;&#039;:  Specifies the destination zone to which the traffic is directed.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|Destination IP Address&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: any or a specific IP like 192.168.1.100&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;-- please  choose --&#039;&#039;&#039;: Specify the destination IP address or range. Leave empty if  the rule applies to any destination IP.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|Destination port&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: any&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;any&#039;&#039;&#039;:  Specify the destination port or port range to which the traffic is directed.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|9&lt;br /&gt;
|SNAT IP Address&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: 203.0.113.5 (an external IP address)&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;-- please  choose --&#039;&#039;&#039;: Specify the IP address to which the source IP should be  translated.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|10&lt;br /&gt;
|SNAT Port&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: Leave empty if not needed, or specify a port  like ‘12345’&lt;br /&gt;
|Optionally,  rewrite matched traffic to a specific source port. Leave empty to only  rewrite the IP address.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|11&lt;br /&gt;
|Extra Arguments&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: --log-prefix &amp;quot;SNAT_traffic: &amp;quot; (to add  a log prefix to log messages for this rule)&lt;br /&gt;
|Pass  additional arguments to iptables. Use with care as it can significantly alter  rule behaviour.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
Click on save once configured.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Parental Control:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For configuring parental control rules, you want to set restrictions based on time, source, and destination zones, as well as specific devices.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To add parental control in firewall,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on “Add and Edit” in “New parental control:” field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Parental Control.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Edit&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Parental Control Edit Options RC44.png|frameless|622x622px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Specification details are given below:&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  Name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  Value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Name&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  Parental_Control_Sunday&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Field must  not be empty&#039;&#039;&#039;: Provide a unique and descriptive name for the parental  control rule.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Proto&lt;br /&gt;
|all&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;all&#039;&#039;&#039;:  This specifies that the rule will apply to all protocols.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Source Zone&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: lan&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Field must  not be empty&#039;&#039;&#039;: Please look at Firewall-&amp;gt;Zone Settings to find zone  names.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Destination  Zone&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: wan&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Field must  not be empty&#039;&#039;&#039;: Please look at Firewall-&amp;gt;Zone Settings to find zone  names.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Source MAC  Address&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  00:1A:2B:3C:4D:5E&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Field&#039;&#039;&#039;:  Enter the MAC address of the device you want to apply the parental control  rule to. This is useful for restricting specific devices.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Target&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  Reject&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Accept&#039;&#039;&#039;:  This specifies the action to take. For parental controls, you might want to  use ‘Reject’ or ‘Drop’ to block traffic.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|Weekdays&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  Sunday&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Sunday&#039;&#039;&#039;:  Specify the days of the week when the rule should be active.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|Month Days&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: All&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;All:&#039;&#039;&#039; Specify  the days of the month when the rule should be active.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|9&lt;br /&gt;
|Start Time (hh:mm:ss)&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  18:00:00 (6:00 PM)&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Field must  not be empty:&#039;&#039;&#039; Specify the start time when the rule should begin to apply.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|10&lt;br /&gt;
|Stop Time  (hh:mm:ss)&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  22:00:00 (10:00 PM)&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Field must  not be empty:&#039;&#039;&#039; Specify the stop time when the rule should end.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
Click on save once configured.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Zone Forwarding:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Zone forwarding in network configuration allows traffic to be directed from one zone to another.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To ADD new zone,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on “Add” in “New Zone Forward:” field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Zone Forwarding RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;EDIT&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Zone Forwarding editing Options RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Specification details are below:&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  Name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  Value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Source Zone&lt;br /&gt;
|Example options: lan, wan, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;--please  choose--&#039;&#039;&#039;: Select the source zone from which the traffic originates.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Destination Zone&lt;br /&gt;
|Example options: lan, wan, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;--please  choose--&#039;&#039;&#039;: Select the destination zone to which the traffic is directed.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
Click on save once configured.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===2.6 Loopback Rule===&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user can configure the port where he want to forward the traffic to. Here the user can add/edit/delete different port ports as per the requirement. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Loopback Rule.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user should click on ‘add’ and then ‘edit’ to do the required changes in the port and enter the valid information in each section to configure the port for forwarding.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Loopback Rule edit.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Specification details are given below:&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  Name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  Value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Name&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: loopback&lt;br /&gt;
|Provide a  descriptive name for the rule.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Protocol&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: TCP+UDP&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;TCP+UDP&#039;&#039;&#039;:  Select the protocols that the rule will apply to.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Source IP Address [Optional]&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: any or a specific IP range like 192.168.1.0/24&lt;br /&gt;
|Optionally  specify the source IP address or range. Leave empty if the rule should apply  to any source IP.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Source Port [Optional]&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: any&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;any&#039;&#039;&#039;:  Specify the source port or port range from which the traffic originates. any  allows traffic from all ports.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Loopback IP Address&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: 127.0.0.1&lt;br /&gt;
|Specify the  loopback IP address. Typically, this is 127.0.0.1.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Port&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: any&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;any&#039;&#039;&#039;:  Specify the destination port or port range to which the traffic is directed.  any allows traffic to all ports.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|Action&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: DNAT&lt;br /&gt;
|This  specifies the action to take either DNAT or SNAT.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|Internal IP Address&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: 192.168.1.100&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Field must  not be empty&#039;&#039;&#039;: Specify the internal IP address to which the traffic should  be redirected.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|9&lt;br /&gt;
|Internal Port&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: any&lt;br /&gt;
|Redirect  matched incoming traffic to the given port on the internal host.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user is done with the required configurations, user should click save button and then click on the update to save the changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===2.7 Remote Monitoring===&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user can select which equipment needs to be monitored remotely.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user selects the type of RMS click on save.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Remote Monitoring.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;NMS:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user should type the server IP or domain name in the URL then click on save.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on upload and start (Once key is uploaded and this option is clicked, NMS automatically starts, and this router device gets registered with the NMS server provided).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:NMS.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;TR069&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To enable the TR069 the user needs to click on the enable check box.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:TR069.png|frameless|582x582px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user clicks on the check box of enable it will display all the required filed to configured.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Remote Monitoring Tr-069.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Specification details are given below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field Name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample Value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Serving  Interval&lt;br /&gt;
|300&lt;br /&gt;
|A value of 300 seconds means the device  will check in with the ACS (auto-configuration servers) every 5 minutes.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Interface&lt;br /&gt;
|This can  be something like eth0 or wan.&lt;br /&gt;
|This specifies the network interface  used for TR-069 communication.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Username&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: User&lt;br /&gt;
|The username used to authenticate with  the ACS.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Password&lt;br /&gt;
|••••&lt;br /&gt;
|The password used to authenticate with  the ACS.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|URL&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;http://example.com&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|The URL of the ACS. This is where the  CPE (customer-premises equipment) will send its requests and where it will  receive configurations and updates from.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
The user should fill all the required fields and click on the save button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===2.8 Tunnel===&lt;br /&gt;
Tunnels are a method of transporting data across a network using protocols which are not supported by that network.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is further categorised into 3 sections,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1.) General Settings&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2.) GRE Tunnel&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3.) IPIP Tunnel&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tunnel Settings.png|frameless|621x621px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;General Settings&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user needs to select under which type of tunnel it needs to send the data.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tunnel General Settings.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user selects the type of tunnel then click in the save button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;GRE Tunnel:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A GRE (Generic Routing Encapsulation) tunnel configuration involves setting up a virtual point-to-point connection between two endpoints over an IP network.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here the user can add/edit/delete the details of the tunnel.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:GRE Tunnel 1.png|thumb|633x633px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the required update is done then click on update to save the changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;EDIT:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:GRE Tunnel.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Specification details are given below:&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field Name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample Value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Tunnel  name&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  GRETunnel&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;GRETunnel&#039;&#039;&#039;: The name of the GRE tunnel.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Local  external IP&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  10.1.1.66&lt;br /&gt;
|The IP address of the local endpoint  that will initiate the GRE tunnel.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Remote external  IP&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  10.1.1.40&lt;br /&gt;
|The IP address of the remote endpoint  that will terminate the GRE tunnel.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Peer  tunnel IP&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  10.1.1.4&lt;br /&gt;
|The IP address of the peer&#039;s tunnel  interface.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Local  tunnel IP&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  10.1.1.6&lt;br /&gt;
|The IP address of the local tunnel  interface.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Local  tunnel net mask&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  255.255.255.0&lt;br /&gt;
|The subnet mask of the local tunnel  interface.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|Remote IP&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  192.168.10.0/24&lt;br /&gt;
|The remote network that is reachable  through the GRE tunnel.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|Enable  Tunnel Link&lt;br /&gt;
|Check to  enable&lt;br /&gt;
|Enable or disable the GRE tunnel link.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|9&lt;br /&gt;
|Interface  type&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  EWAN2&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;EWAN2&#039;&#039;&#039;: The  type of network interface used for the GRE tunnel.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|10&lt;br /&gt;
|MTU&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  1476&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;1476&#039;&#039;&#039;: Maximum  Transmission Unit size for the GRE tunnel.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|11&lt;br /&gt;
|TTL&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  64&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;64&#039;&#039;&#039;: Time To  Live value for the packets within the GRE tunnel.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|12&lt;br /&gt;
|Tunnel  key&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  12345678&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;12345678&#039;&#039;&#039;: A unique key used to identify the GRE tunnel.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|13&lt;br /&gt;
|Enable  keep alive&lt;br /&gt;
|Check to  enable&lt;br /&gt;
|Enable or disable the keep-alive  feature to monitor the tunnel&#039;s status.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|14&lt;br /&gt;
|Keep  alive interval&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  10&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;10&#039;&#039;&#039;:  Interval in seconds for the keep-alive packets.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
Once the required update is done then click on update to save the changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;IPIP Tunnel:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An IPIP (IP-in-IP) tunnel is a simple tunneling protocol used to encapsulate IP packets within IP packets. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is similar to GRE but without additional features such as keying and type fields.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here the user can add/edit/delete the details of the tunnel.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:IPIP Tunnel1.png|thumb|635x635px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;EDIT:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:IPIP Edit.png|thumb|637x637px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Specification details are given below:&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field Name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample Value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Tunnel  name&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  IPIPTunnel&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;IPIPTunnel:&#039;&#039;&#039; The name of the IPIP tunnel.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Local external  IP&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  10.1.1.66&lt;br /&gt;
|The IP address of the local endpoint  that will initiate the IPIP tunnel.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Remote  external IP&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  10.1.1.40&lt;br /&gt;
|The IP address of the remote endpoint  that will terminate the IPIP tunnel.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Peer  tunnel IP&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: 10.1.1.4&lt;br /&gt;
|The IP address of the peer&#039;s tunnel  interface.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Local  tunnel IP&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  10.1.1.6&lt;br /&gt;
|The IP address of the local tunnel  interface.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Local  tunnel net mask&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  255.255.255.0&lt;br /&gt;
|The subnet mask of the local tunnel  interface.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|Remote IP&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  192.168.10.0/24&lt;br /&gt;
|The remote network that is reachable  through the IPIP tunnel.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|Enable  Tunnel Link&lt;br /&gt;
|Check to  enable&lt;br /&gt;
|Enable or disable the IPIP tunnel link.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|9&lt;br /&gt;
|Interface  type&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  EWAN2&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;EWAN2&#039;&#039;&#039;: The  type of network interface used for the IPIP tunnel.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|10&lt;br /&gt;
|MTU&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  1476&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;1476&#039;&#039;&#039;: Maximum  Transmission Unit size for the IPIP tunnel.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|11&lt;br /&gt;
|TTL&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  64&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;64&#039;&#039;&#039;: Time To  Live value for the packets within the IPIP tunnel.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|12&lt;br /&gt;
|Tunnel  key&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  12345678&lt;br /&gt;
|Although typically not used in IPIP,  this field might be included for compatibility with certain configurations.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|13&lt;br /&gt;
|Enable  keep alive&lt;br /&gt;
|Check to  enable&lt;br /&gt;
|Enable or disable the keep-alive  feature to monitor the tunnel&#039;s status.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|14&lt;br /&gt;
|Keep  alive interval&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  10&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;10&#039;&#039;&#039;:  Interval in seconds for the keep-alive packets.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
Once the required update is done then click on update to save the changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==3 Maintenance==&lt;br /&gt;
In this module the user can configure/upgrade/modify the settings related to system, password, firmware and monitoring.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It includes below submodules.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
·      General&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
·      Password&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
·      Reboot&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
·      Import and Export config&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
·      Firmware upgrade&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
·      Monitor Application&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Maintenance.png|thumb|631x631px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== 3.1 General/ System ===&lt;br /&gt;
Here you can configure the basic aspects of router like its hostname or the timezone.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is further sub-divided into,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1.) General Settings&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2.) Logging&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3.) Language and Style&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;General Settings:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Maintenance General.png|frameless|619x619px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;EDIT:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field Name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample Value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Local Time&lt;br /&gt;
|2024/07/30  13:25:47&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|The current local date and time set on  the device.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Hostname&lt;br /&gt;
|22B25240007&lt;br /&gt;
|The hostname of the device, which is  used to identify it on the network.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Timezone&lt;br /&gt;
|Asia/Kolkata&lt;br /&gt;
|The timezone setting of the device,  which determines the local time.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user configures the required details then click on the save button to save all the details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Logging:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here the user can configure the basic aspects of your device related to system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The system log configuration provided specifies how the device handles and stores log information, including buffer size, external log server details, and log detail levels.[[File:Maintenance logging.png|frameless|608x608px]]&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field Name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample Value            &lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|System  log buffer size&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  32 kiB&lt;br /&gt;
|The size of the memory buffer allocated  (0-32) for storing system logs before they are either written to a file or  sent to an external server.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|External  system log server&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  0.0.0.0&lt;br /&gt;
|The IP address of an external server  where logs can be sent.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|External  system log server port&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  514&lt;br /&gt;
|The port used to send logs to the  external log server. Port 514 is the default port for syslog.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Log  output level&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  Debug&lt;br /&gt;
|Sets the detail level of the system  logs.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Cron Log  level&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  Debug&lt;br /&gt;
|The detail level of the logs for cron  jobs.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user configures the required details then click on the save button to save all the details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Language and Style:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here the user can configure the basic aspects of your device related to language.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user configures the required details then click on the save button to save all the details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Maintenance Language and Style.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===3.2 Password===&lt;br /&gt;
In this module the user can set the password for the admin credentials.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Specifies the password for the guest account. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the user enters a plaintext password here, it will get replaced with a crypted password on save. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The new password will be effective once the user logs out and log in again.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Password.png|thumb|640x640px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;3.3 Reboot&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this module the user can reboot the device remotely.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
First option is to directly reboot the device without enabling the maintenance reboot tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on “Reboot Now” at the bottom of the screen to start the reboot process.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Reboot 1.png|thumb|632x632px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To start maintenance reboot process first the user needs to fill all the required fields.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Need to select the type of reboot for the device whether it needs to be Hardware or Software reboot.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Main reboot.png|thumb|640x640px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Specification details are given below:&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field Name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample Value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Enable  Maintenance Reboot&lt;br /&gt;
|Enable/Disable&lt;br /&gt;
|Indicates whether the maintenance  reboot feature is enabled or not.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Type&lt;br /&gt;
|Maintenance  Reboot&lt;br /&gt;
|Specifies the type of reboot being  scheduled.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Reboot  Type&lt;br /&gt;
|Software/Hardware&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Hardware&#039;&#039;&#039;: A hardware reboot involves restarting the  entire device as if it were powered off and on again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Software&#039;&#039;&#039;: A software reboot involves restarting the  operating system without powering off the hardware.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Minutes&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  59&lt;br /&gt;
|The minute at which the reboot should  occur (0-59).&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Hours&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  22 (10 PM)&lt;br /&gt;
|The hour at which the reboot should  occur (0-23, in 24-hour format).&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Day Of  Month&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  All&lt;br /&gt;
|Specifies which days of the month the  reboot should occur (1-31). &amp;quot;All&amp;quot; means it will occur every day.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|Month&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  All&lt;br /&gt;
|Specifies which months the reboot  should occur (1-12). &amp;quot;All&amp;quot; means it will occur every month.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|Day Of  Week&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  All&lt;br /&gt;
|Specifies which days of the week the  reboot should occur (0-6, where 0 is Sunday). &amp;quot;All&amp;quot; means it will  occur every day of the week.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user fills all the required given parameters click on the save.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===3.4 Import and Export===&lt;br /&gt;
In this section, User can Import &amp;amp; Export Configuration files of the Device.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Exp &amp;amp; imp.png|thumb|635x635px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
click “Export Config” to export device configuration &amp;amp; settings to a text file,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
click “Import Config” to import device configuration &amp;amp; settings from a previously exported text file.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Exp &amp;amp; imp edit.png|thumb|641x641px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;3.5 Firmware Upgrade&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user can upgrade with the latest software for the existing firmware. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Frimware Upgrade.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the &#039;&#039;&#039;flash image&#039;&#039;&#039; and chose the path where the sys-upgrade file is kept and then click on flash image, it will upgrade to the latest software once the reboot is done.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Flash Image.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the &#039;&#039;&#039;Retain Config and flash&#039;&#039;&#039; and chose the path where the sys-upgrade file is kept and then click on Retain Config and flash, it will upgrade to the latest software once the reboot is done.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Flash Image.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the &#039;&#039;&#039;Factory Reset&#039;&#039;&#039; for the complete retest of the device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===3.6 Monitor Application===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Monitor Application.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Router Application Remote Configuration.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Router Remote Configuration.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==4 Status==&lt;br /&gt;
In this module the user can view the status of the router device with respect to the network, Wan, modem etc.[[File:Status.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It has 4 submodules.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Interfaces&lt;br /&gt;
* Internet&lt;br /&gt;
* Modem&lt;br /&gt;
* Route&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===4.1 Interfaces===&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user can see the traffic status for all the network through which the device works.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Status Interfaces.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Looking on the network status the user can check if the cellular or the ethernet is up.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===4.2 Internet===&lt;br /&gt;
In this submodule the user can view the status of the internet connections.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Internet Status.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
  To see the latest status of the internet connection the user needs to click on the refresh button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===4.3 Modem===&lt;br /&gt;
In this sub module the user will get to know the status of the cellular interface which is installed inside the modem. The user can view all the details related to the sim in terms of Operator, Network technology, Mobile country code, Upload bandwidth, Download Bandwidth, Frequency band, RSRP, RSRQ, RSSI &amp;amp; SNR under this page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Modem Status.png|frameless|602x602px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== 4.4 Route ===&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user can check the status of the route for the device. The ARP status can be visible in under this page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Route Status.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==5 Features==&lt;br /&gt;
In this module the user can see all the features that the router device has.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This module includes the below features.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Mac Address Binding&lt;br /&gt;
* URL Filtering&lt;br /&gt;
* Web Server&lt;br /&gt;
* Wi-Fi MacID Filtering&lt;br /&gt;
* Routing&lt;br /&gt;
* Others&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Features.png|frameless|618x618px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===5.1 Mac Address Binding===&lt;br /&gt;
Under this submodule the user can configure/update/edit the IP Address for MAC&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mac Addressing Binding.png|frameless|622x622px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user should write MAC address and then click on the add button. Once the address is added then click on the update button to save the modification.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user needs to click on the Edit button to modify the preexisting configuration. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mac Address Edit.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user modifies the MAC address /IP Address then click on the save button to save the changes done.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user can click on the deleted button to delete an existing configured device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Post all the changes the user needs to click on the update to reflect all the changes in the application.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===5.2 URL Filtering===&lt;br /&gt;
In this submodule the user should provide the URL which needs to be blocked for the device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:URL Filtering.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To add the new URL for blocking, click on the Add New button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user clicks on the Add New button a new pop will appear in that page write the URL and click on the save. The user can select the status of that URL while defining the URL.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Url Update.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To edit / delete the existing URL the user needs to click on the edit /deleted button respectively.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Edit or Delete URL.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the save after the changes are done as per the need.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== 5.3 Web Server ===&lt;br /&gt;
In this submodule the user can configure webserver related parameters.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Web server.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To configure the HTTP, click on the enable HTTP. Once the user clicks on the check box the HTTP Port text box will appear where the user needs to configure the port id.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Webserver Configuration.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on save buttons to save the changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To configure the 2nd HTTP, click on the enable HTTP. Once the user clicks on the check box the HTTP Port text box will appear where the user needs to configure the port id.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Webserver Https Redirect.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on save buttons to save the changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the “Redirect https” and “RFC1918 Filter” check box to respectively and click on the save button to save the changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To configure the NTP sync, click on the enable NTP sync. Once the user clicks on the check box the respective text boxes will appear to configure the parameters. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:RFC1918 Filter.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user configures the parameters click on the save button to save the given values.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===5.4 Wi-Fi MacID Filtering===&lt;br /&gt;
In this module the user can filter the Macids. Mac address filtering allows users to block traffic coming from certain known machines or devices.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Wi-Fi MacID Filtering.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Before adding the MacIDs the user needs to select the mode from the dropdown menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To Add the MacID the user needs to click on Add New option select the mac id and network name Wi-Fi 2.4G AP OR Wi-Fi 2.4G AP Guest, select enable/disable option and save it and update.              &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Configuring MacID and Network Name.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the required MACID and Network Name is configured the user needs to click on the save button to add the details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user needs to click on the edit button to do modifications on the pre-existing configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Macid and name removing.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the required MACID / Network Name is modified the user needs to click on the save button to reflect the changed value in the application.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;WIFI 2.4G AP Guest&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To Add the MacID the user needs to click on Add New option select the mac id and network name Wi-Fi 2.4G AP Guest, select enable/disable option and save it and update.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
     [[File:WIFI 2.4G AP Guest.png|frameless|623x623px]]  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the required MACID and Network Name is configured the user needs to click on the save button to add the details. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user needs to click on the edit button to do modifications on the pre-existing configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Configuring MacID and Network Name.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the required MACID / Network Name is modified the user needs to click on the save button to reflect the changed value in the application.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===5.5 Routing===&lt;br /&gt;
In this submodule the user can configure the parameters related to routing of the device. like Target address, Networks address etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Routing IPV4 Routes.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To add a new device the user needs to fill all the required information and click on the add button.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Interface&lt;br /&gt;
|eth0.1&lt;br /&gt;
|In this drop down list the user should  configure the interface name.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Target&lt;br /&gt;
|192.168.10.1&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user needs to insert the  target IP address&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|IPV4 Netmask&lt;br /&gt;
|255.255.255.0&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user should give the  address for the IPV4Netmask&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Metric&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user should insert the  number of the metric.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|IPV4 Gateway&lt;br /&gt;
|192.168.100.1&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user should configured the  address for the IPV4 Gateway.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Route Type&lt;br /&gt;
|Unicast&lt;br /&gt;
|In this drop down box the user should select  the type of route needed for the device.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
To edit the existing device the user needs to click on the edit option.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Routing Configuration.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the changes are done click on the save button to save all the changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the deleted button to delete the existing device detail.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Advanced Static IPV4 Routes:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Advanced Static IPV4 Routes.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To add a new device the user needs to fill all the required information and click on the add button.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Interface&lt;br /&gt;
|eth0.1&lt;br /&gt;
|In this drop down list the user should  configure the interface name.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|To&lt;br /&gt;
|192.168.10.1&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user needs to insert the  target IP address&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|IPV4 Netmask&lt;br /&gt;
|255.255.255.0&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user should give the  address for the IPV4Netmask&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Table&lt;br /&gt;
|local&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|From&lt;br /&gt;
|192.168.100.1&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user should configured the  from address for the routes&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Priority&lt;br /&gt;
|230&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
To edit the existing device the user needs to click on the edit option.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Routing Editing.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the changes are done click on the save button to save all the changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the deleted button to delete the existing device detail.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once all the configurations are done click on the update button to reflect the changes made.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===5.6 Others===&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user will get to do all the other miscellaneous configuration with respect to the device based on the required parameters.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Miscellaneous configuration.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Utility&lt;br /&gt;
|Action&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Set Date&lt;br /&gt;
|SET&lt;br /&gt;
|Need to set the date and time and after  click command get the Date and time&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Gate Date&lt;br /&gt;
|GET&lt;br /&gt;
|Needs to get the system date and time&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|IPsec status all&lt;br /&gt;
|GET&lt;br /&gt;
|Needs to get the IPsec details&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Wi-Fi Scan&lt;br /&gt;
|GET&lt;br /&gt;
|Needs to get the Wi-Fi status&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|ipref3 client&lt;br /&gt;
|RUN&lt;br /&gt;
|Needs to click on the RUN to execute  the command&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|ipref3 server&lt;br /&gt;
|RUN&lt;br /&gt;
|Needs to click on the RUN to execute  the command&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|Ping&lt;br /&gt;
|PING&lt;br /&gt;
|Needs to click on the ping status&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|9&lt;br /&gt;
|Traceroute&lt;br /&gt;
|RUN&lt;br /&gt;
|Needs to click on the ping Traceroute status&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|10&lt;br /&gt;
|NTP Sync&lt;br /&gt;
|SYNC&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to Sync the NTP&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|11&lt;br /&gt;
|Download Files&lt;br /&gt;
|DOWNLOAD&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to Download the files /Database&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|12&lt;br /&gt;
|Restart Power&lt;br /&gt;
|RESTART&lt;br /&gt;
|Click Restart the power&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|13&lt;br /&gt;
|Restart Modem&lt;br /&gt;
|RESTART&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to Restart the modem&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|14&lt;br /&gt;
|Run at command&lt;br /&gt;
|RUN&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to Run the command&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|15&lt;br /&gt;
|Show board configuration&lt;br /&gt;
|SHOW&lt;br /&gt;
|To Show the board configuration&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|16&lt;br /&gt;
|Show VPN Certificate Name&lt;br /&gt;
|SHOW&lt;br /&gt;
|To Show VPN Certificate Name&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|17&lt;br /&gt;
|Switch SIM to Secondary&lt;br /&gt;
|RUN&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to switch the SIM to secondary  mode&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|18&lt;br /&gt;
|Send Test SMS&lt;br /&gt;
|SEND&lt;br /&gt;
|To Send the SMS Confirmation&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|19&lt;br /&gt;
|Readlatest SMS&lt;br /&gt;
|READ&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to Read the latest SMS&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|20&lt;br /&gt;
|Data Usage&lt;br /&gt;
|SHOW&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to show the data usage.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|21&lt;br /&gt;
|Monthly Data Usage&lt;br /&gt;
|SHOW&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to show the monthly data usage&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|22&lt;br /&gt;
|Modem debug Info&lt;br /&gt;
|READ&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to read the information about the  modem debug&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|23&lt;br /&gt;
|Scan Network operators (take&amp;gt;3mins)&lt;br /&gt;
|SHOW&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to show the Network operator&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|24&lt;br /&gt;
|Network operators (first perform scan  network operator&lt;br /&gt;
|SHOW&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to show the Network operator&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|25&lt;br /&gt;
|ReadLogFiles&lt;br /&gt;
|READ&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to read the log files&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|26&lt;br /&gt;
|Enable ssh&lt;br /&gt;
|RUN&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to Run the command&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|27&lt;br /&gt;
|Disable ssh&lt;br /&gt;
|RUN&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to Run the command&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|28&lt;br /&gt;
|Clear SIM1 Data&lt;br /&gt;
|CLEAR&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to clear the SIM1 data&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|29&lt;br /&gt;
|Clear SIM2 Data&lt;br /&gt;
|CLEAR&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to clear the SIM data&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==6 Logout==&lt;br /&gt;
The user should click on log out option to logged out from the router application.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Logout.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user needs to click on the ok to come out of the router application.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tanisha</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.silbonetworks.com/index.php?title=File:Exp_%26_imp_edit.png&amp;diff=1198</id>
		<title>File:Exp &amp; imp edit.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.silbonetworks.com/index.php?title=File:Exp_%26_imp_edit.png&amp;diff=1198"/>
		<updated>2024-09-03T05:59:33Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tanisha: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Exp &amp;amp; imp edit&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tanisha</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.silbonetworks.com/index.php?title=File:Exp_%26_imp.png&amp;diff=1197</id>
		<title>File:Exp &amp; imp.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.silbonetworks.com/index.php?title=File:Exp_%26_imp.png&amp;diff=1197"/>
		<updated>2024-09-03T05:57:49Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tanisha: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Exp &amp;amp; imp&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tanisha</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.silbonetworks.com/index.php?title=File:Main_reboot.png&amp;diff=1196</id>
		<title>File:Main reboot.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.silbonetworks.com/index.php?title=File:Main_reboot.png&amp;diff=1196"/>
		<updated>2024-09-03T05:52:20Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tanisha: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Main reboot&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tanisha</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.silbonetworks.com/index.php?title=File:Reboot_1.png&amp;diff=1195</id>
		<title>File:Reboot 1.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.silbonetworks.com/index.php?title=File:Reboot_1.png&amp;diff=1195"/>
		<updated>2024-09-03T05:49:43Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tanisha: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Reboot 1&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tanisha</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.silbonetworks.com/index.php?title=File:Password.png&amp;diff=1194</id>
		<title>File:Password.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.silbonetworks.com/index.php?title=File:Password.png&amp;diff=1194"/>
		<updated>2024-09-03T05:45:49Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tanisha: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Password&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tanisha</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.silbonetworks.com/index.php?title=File:Maintenance_Language_and_Style.png&amp;diff=1193</id>
		<title>File:Maintenance Language and Style.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.silbonetworks.com/index.php?title=File:Maintenance_Language_and_Style.png&amp;diff=1193"/>
		<updated>2024-09-03T05:43:53Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tanisha: Tanisha uploaded a new version of File:Maintenance Language and Style.png&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Maintenance Language and Style&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tanisha</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.silbonetworks.com/index.php?title=RC44_User_Manual&amp;diff=1192</id>
		<title>RC44 User Manual</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.silbonetworks.com/index.php?title=RC44_User_Manual&amp;diff=1192"/>
		<updated>2024-09-03T05:43:12Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tanisha: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;This page contains the user manual for RC44.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Connecting with the device to the System (Laptop/Desktop).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To log in to SILBO_RC44 by connecting the router to your laptop or desktop via LAN or using Wi-Fi, please follow the steps below. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Connecting via LAN:&#039;&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Connect your laptop&#039;s LAN port to one of the router&#039;s LAN interfaces. Ensure that you select any LAN interface (there are two available) while making sure the WAN interface is not used. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
                                                                                                                                                          &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;How to connect with the SILBO_RC44&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;application&#039;&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the LAN connection is established between the device and the laptop or the desktop&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please open the command prompt and ping go get the ip config of that device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Type the command &#039;&#039;&#039;Ipconfig&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:How_to_connect_with_the_SILBO_RB44_application.png|alt=How to connect with the SILBO RB44 application|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It will provide the Ip address/url of that device through which the application can be accessed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Connecting_via_LAN_RB44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Log In==&lt;br /&gt;
Open the web browser and type the IP address in the URL.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It will show the log in page of the application.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Log In.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Give the valid credentials for the username and password to login to the application page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user credentials are provided it will direct to the landing page of the application.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Login Dashboard RC44.png|frameless|636x636px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The “Status” landing page shows all the detailed specification of the device like system, memory storage and connection tracking etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The application is divided in to 6 Modules.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Info&lt;br /&gt;
* Settings&lt;br /&gt;
* Maintenance&lt;br /&gt;
* Status&lt;br /&gt;
* Features&lt;br /&gt;
* Logout&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==1.Info==&lt;br /&gt;
The “Info” module provides the information about the devices to the user.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It provides all the specification related to the hardware, firmware, Networks and the Connection uptimes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It has 3 submodules.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Overview&lt;br /&gt;
* System Log&lt;br /&gt;
* Kernel Log&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Info dashboard RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===1.1 Overview===&lt;br /&gt;
In overview module it displays all the specification categorically of a device like System, Memory, storage, Connection tracking, DHCP Lease.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Login Dashboard RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;System&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this section it displays the hardware configured specification of the device.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Info system RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The specifications details are as follows,&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&lt;br /&gt;
!SN&lt;br /&gt;
!Field name &lt;br /&gt;
!Sample value&lt;br /&gt;
!Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Hostname&lt;br /&gt;
|22B09230239&lt;br /&gt;
|This field  displays the router serial number of the device&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Model&lt;br /&gt;
|Silbo_RC44- EC200A&lt;br /&gt;
|This field  displays the model number of the device&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Firmware Version and IPK Version&lt;br /&gt;
|1.16_1.13_RC3&lt;br /&gt;
|This field  displays the firmware version and IPK version&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Kernel Version&lt;br /&gt;
|4.14.180&lt;br /&gt;
|This field  displays the kernel version of the device&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Local Time&lt;br /&gt;
|Monday, July 1, 2024, at 05:43:58 PM&lt;br /&gt;
|This field  displays the local time&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Uptime&lt;br /&gt;
|0h 7m 29s&lt;br /&gt;
|This field  displays the uptime of the device&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|Load Average&lt;br /&gt;
|1.73 1.87 1.04&lt;br /&gt;
|This field  displays the average load&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Memory&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this section it displays the memory configured specification of the device.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Memory Dashboard RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The specifications details are as follows.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Total Available&lt;br /&gt;
|68676 kB / 124208 kB (55%)&lt;br /&gt;
|This field  displays the total availability of memory space in the device&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Free&lt;br /&gt;
|59344 kB / 124208 kB (47%)&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the  Free memory space in the device&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Cached&lt;br /&gt;
|312 kB / 124208 kB (0%)&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the  Cached memory space in the device&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Buffered&lt;br /&gt;
|9332 kB / 124208 kB (7%)&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the  Buffered memory space in the device&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Storage&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this section it displays the status of storage as root and temporary usage specification of the device.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Storage Dashboard RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The specifications details are as follows.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Root Usage&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
796 kB / 15488 kB (5%)&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays  the total root usage of the device&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Temporary  Usage&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
312 kB / 62104 kB (0%)&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the total temporary  usage of the device&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Connection Tracking&#039;&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this section it displays the status of connection tracking for the device.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Connection Tracking RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The specifications details are as follows.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Active Connection&lt;br /&gt;
|48 / 16384 (0%)&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the active connection of the device.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;DHCP Leases&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this section, it displays the DHCP lease of the temporary assignment of an IP address to a device on the network.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:DCHP Leases RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The specifications details are as follows.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Host Name&lt;br /&gt;
|KermaniK-LT&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays  the configured Host Name/User Name for that device.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|IPv4-Address&lt;br /&gt;
|192.168.10.147&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the IP  address of the device.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|MAC-Address&lt;br /&gt;
|34:73:5a:bb: ab:7a&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the MAC-Address  of the device.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Lease time remaining&lt;br /&gt;
|11h 53m 49s&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the lease  time remaining for the device.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===1.2 System Log===&lt;br /&gt;
This page provides on screen System logging information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user gets to view the system logs &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:System Log.png|frameless|617x617px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===1.3 Kernel Log===&lt;br /&gt;
This page provides on-screen Kernel logging information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this page, the user gets to view the Kernel logs&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Kernel Log.png|frameless|621x621px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==2. Setting==&lt;br /&gt;
In this “Setting” module the user can Configure/update all the required parameters related to Network, SIM Switch, Internet, VPN, Firewall, Loopback Rule, Remote monitoring, Tunnel as per requirement.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
IT consist of 8 submodules.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Network&lt;br /&gt;
* Sim Switch&lt;br /&gt;
* Internet&lt;br /&gt;
* VPN&lt;br /&gt;
* Firewall&lt;br /&gt;
* Loopback Rule&lt;br /&gt;
* Remote Monitoring&lt;br /&gt;
* Tunnel&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Settings.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===2.1 Network===&lt;br /&gt;
In this section the user does all the setting related configuration with reference to network like Ethernet Setting, Cellular Setting, Band lock and Operator Lock, Wi-Fi, Guest Wi-Fi, Wireless Schedule, SMS Setting, Loopback IP.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Network Dashboard RC44.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Ethernet Setting&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this page it will display all the configured port that is attached with the device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For this device 3 ports are configured. Ethernet mode can be configured as WAN and as LAN as well. Ethernet LAN Connection settings can be configured as DHCP server or Static.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Ethernet Settings RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;For port 3 setting&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Kindly select the option &#039;&#039;&#039;LAN4&#039;&#039;&#039; for &#039;&#039;&#039;Port 3 mode LAN/WAN&#039;&#039;&#039;. Based on the option selected the filed will also changes the user needs to configure all the required field and click on the save to save the required fields.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Ethernet Settings RC44 part 2.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Port 3 mode LAN/WAN&lt;br /&gt;
|LAN&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the port mode selection&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Port 3 Ethernet Protocol [LAN Eth0.1]&lt;br /&gt;
|DHCP Server&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the Ethernet mode selection&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Port 3 DHCP Server IP&lt;br /&gt;
|192.168.10.1&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays DHCP server IP configured.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Port 3 DHCP Netmask&lt;br /&gt;
|255.255.255.0&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays DHCP server Netmask address configured&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Port 3 DHCP Start Address&lt;br /&gt;
|100&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays DHCP server  start address configured&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Port 3 DHCP Limit&lt;br /&gt;
|50&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays DHCP server  limit&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Kindly select the option &#039;&#039;&#039;EWAN&#039;&#039;&#039; for &#039;&#039;&#039;Port 3 mode LAN/WAN&#039;&#039;&#039;. Based on the option selected the filed will also changes the user needs to configure all the required field and click on the save to save the required fields.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:EWAN Port 3 Configuration RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Port 3 mode LAN/WAN&lt;br /&gt;
|EWAN&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the port mode selection&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Ethernet Protocol Port 3 WAN&lt;br /&gt;
|DHCP  client&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the client&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Gateway&lt;br /&gt;
|192.168.1.1&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays gateway address  configured&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the save once all the configuration is done and click on the update button to update all the information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;SW_LAN settings&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this part the user can configure the setting for SW_LAN &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SW LAN settings RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|SW_LAN Ethernet Protocol&lt;br /&gt;
|DHCP  Server&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the  Ethernet mode selection&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|SW_LAN DHCP Server IP&lt;br /&gt;
|192.168.10.1&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays DHCP server IP  configured.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|SW_LAN  DHCP Netmask&lt;br /&gt;
|255.255.255.0&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays DHCP server  Netmask address configured&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|SW_LAN  DHCP Start Address&lt;br /&gt;
|100&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays DHCP server  start address configured&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|SW_LAN  DHCP Limit&lt;br /&gt;
|50&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays DHCP server  limit&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|DNS  Server&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|This filed display number of DSN  server availability&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|DNS  Server Address&lt;br /&gt;
|8.8.8.8&lt;br /&gt;
|This  filed display the DSN server address.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After configuring all the required information, the user should click on the save and then click on the update to update the all the required information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Static option for SW_LAN Ethernet Protocol&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the option of static from the drop-down menu for SW_LAN Ethernet Protocol.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SW LAN settings Static Ethernet Protocol.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|SW_LAN Ethernet Protocol&lt;br /&gt;
|Static&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the  Ethernet mode selection&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|SW_LAN static IP&lt;br /&gt;
|192.168.5.1&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays static server IP  configured.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|SW_LAN  Netmask&lt;br /&gt;
|255.255.255.0&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays static server  Netmask address configured&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|DNS  Server&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|This filed display number of DSN  server availability&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|DSN  Server Address&lt;br /&gt;
|8.8.8.8&lt;br /&gt;
|This  filed display the DSN server address.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
After configuring all the required information, the user should click on the save and then click on the update to update the all the required information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Cellular Setting&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this page, the user needs to configure the various details with respect to the SIM.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
select single cellular single sim where the user must configure the APN details of the sim used for the router device. The Configurations can be done based on the SIM usage, with respect to IPV4 or IPV.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Cellular Settings RC44.png|frameless|619x619px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Cellular  Operation Mode&lt;br /&gt;
|Single Cellular with Dual Sim&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays  the cellular operation mode.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Cellular  Modem 1&lt;br /&gt;
|QuectelEC200A&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the modem name.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Network  Mode&lt;br /&gt;
|Automatic&lt;br /&gt;
|This  field displays the  Network mode selection&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM 1  Access Point Name&lt;br /&gt;
|airtelgprs.com&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the  name of the Sim 1 access point configured.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM 1  PDP Type&lt;br /&gt;
|IPV4&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays  the type of SIM 1&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM 1  Username&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|This field is optional, and the user can configure the name of  the SIM 1&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM 1  Password&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|This  field is optional, and the user can configure the password for the SIM 1&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM 1  Authentication Protocol&lt;br /&gt;
|None&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the type of  protocol is being used for SIM 1&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|9&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM 2  Access Point Name&lt;br /&gt;
|airtelgprs.com&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the name of the  Sim 2 access point configured.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|10&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM 2  PDP Type&lt;br /&gt;
|IPV4&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the type of SIM  2&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|11&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM 2  Username&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|This  field is optional, and the user can configure the name of the SIM 2&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|12&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM 2  Password&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|This  field is optional, and the user can configure the password for the SIM 2&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|13&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM 2  Authentication Protocol&lt;br /&gt;
|None&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the type of  protocol is being used for SIM 2&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|14&lt;br /&gt;
|Primary  SIM Switchback Time (In Minutes)&lt;br /&gt;
|10&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the time given  for sim to swich in between.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
After configuring all the required information, the user should click on the save and then click on the update to update the all the required information. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Band lock and Operator Lock&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this page, the user needs to configure the lock band and operator based on the service provider&#039;&#039;&#039;.&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Bands available in the drop-down list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Band lock and Operator Lock.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;2G/3G option&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2G/3G: - 3G allows additional features such as mobile internet access, video calls and mobile TV. While the main function of 2G technology is the transmission of information through voice calls.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:2G-3G option.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user should select the band check box  available for 2g/3g  from the given list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Bands available for selection under LTE for the bands available that zone.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Operator Selection Mode&#039;&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user needs to click on the check box of the “operator select enable” to select the operator.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the check box is clicked there will be a dropdown list of the operator modes from which the user needs to select the mode. The user needs to select the operator mode from the given dropdown list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Operator Selection Mode.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the user selects the mode “Manual” or “Manual-Automatic” then one more text box will appear where the user must provide the operator code.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Band lock and Operator Lock 1.png|frameless|542x542px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After configuring all the required information, the user should click on the save and then click on the update to update the all the required information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Wi-Fi Setting&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wi-Fi is a family of wireless network protocols based on the IEEE 802.11 family of standards, which are commonly used for local area network of devices and internet access, allowing nearby digital devices to exchanges data by radio waves. These are the most widely used computer network, used globally in home and small office networks to link devices and to provided internet access with wireless router and wireless access point in public places. In this router has the general setting and change country code, channel, radio mode, radio passphrase as per the requirement after clicking on enable Radio button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Wi-Fi Setting.png|frameless|585x585px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user needs to select the respective radio mode based on its need. Basically, it has 3 radio mode.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Wi-Fi Setting access Point.png|frameless|590x590px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Access Point mode:&#039;&#039;&#039; In Access Point mode, router connects to a wireless router through an Ethernet cable to extend the coverage of wireless signal to other network client.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Access Point Mode RC44.png|frameless|573x573px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Client point:&#039;&#039;&#039;  In client mode, the access point connects your wired devices to a wireless network. This mode is suitable when you have a wired device with an Ethernet port and no wireless capability, for example, a smart TV, Media Player, or Game console and you want to connect it to the internet wirelessly, select the Client Mode and give the Radio SSID &amp;amp; client passphrase&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Client Point RC44.png|frameless|587x587px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Access point and client point&#039;&#039;&#039;: select this option for both type connection, give both SSID and passphrase.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Access point and Client Point RC44.png|frameless|571x571px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After configuring all the required information, the user should click on the save and then click on the update to update the all the required information.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Radio  0 Protocol&lt;br /&gt;
|IEEE 802.11 b/g/n&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the  user should select which protocol is being used&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Country  Code&lt;br /&gt;
|INDIA&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the  user should select which county it belongs to.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Channel&lt;br /&gt;
|Auto&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user should  select the proper channel to be used.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|TX  Power&lt;br /&gt;
|100&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user should  specify the power.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Channel  Width&lt;br /&gt;
|20 MHz&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user should  select the channel width&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Radio  Mode&lt;br /&gt;
|Access  point&lt;br /&gt;
|In this drop down the user should  select the mode.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|Radio  SSID&lt;br /&gt;
|APClient_22B09230239&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user should  specify the SSID number&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|Radio  Authentication&lt;br /&gt;
|WPA2  Personal (PSK)&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user should  select the type of authentication.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|9&lt;br /&gt;
|Radio  Encryption&lt;br /&gt;
|AES&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user should  select the type of encryption required.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|10&lt;br /&gt;
|Radio  Passphrase&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user should  specify the password.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|11&lt;br /&gt;
|Radio  DHCP server IP&lt;br /&gt;
|192.168.100.1&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user should  specify the IP address of DHCP server.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|12&lt;br /&gt;
|Radio  DHCP start address&lt;br /&gt;
|100&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user should  specify the start address of the DHCP.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|13&lt;br /&gt;
|Radio  DHCP limit&lt;br /&gt;
|50&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user should  specify the limit for the DHCP.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Wireless Schedule&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wi-Fi can be automatically withdrawn based on the configuration done in this section.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user can schedule the Wi-Fi’s accessibility time during a particular period.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Wireless Schedule.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After configuring all the required information, the user should click on the save and then click on the update to update the all the required information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user can select more than one “day of the week” for scheduling the wifi working hours.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Wifi Schedule.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Loop back IP settings&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The loopback IP address, often referred to as “localhost”. it’s used to establish network connections within the same device for testing and troubleshooting purpose.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Loop back IP settings.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After configuring all the required information, the user should click on the save and then click on the update to update the all the required information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The loopback IP address, commonly represented as 127.0.0.1, is a special address used for testing network connectivity on a local machine. It allows a device to send network messages to itself without involving external networks, making it useful for troubleshooting and diagnostics.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
However, this IP can be changed as per requirement and to do that, Navigating to Setting&amp;gt;&amp;gt;Network configuration&amp;gt;&amp;gt; Loopback IP settings can be changed/updated.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Above screenshot shows the configuration window from GUI/WebUI&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;SMS Settings&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
User needs to enable SMS option in SMS settings page. This option is to validate the mobile numbers using which controlling commands could be sent to the router device. 1 to 5 mobile numbers can be authenticated by choosing from “Select Valid SMS user numbers” and adding the mobile numbers below respectively. API key is the pass key used in the commands while sending SMS. Displayed in the below screen is the default API key which can be edited and changed as per choice.   After addition of the mobile numbers user needs to click on save button for changes to take place.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SMS Settings.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select valid user number max. 5 and add authorized phone number in the main menu where want to find the alert and click on SMS Response Enable, save and update button, now send SMS commands from the configured mobile number. Once the commands are received from the user phone number the board send acknowledgement as per the commands after that it will send the router’s status once it has rebooted and is operational again. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mentioned below are a few commands which can be sent from the configured mobile number to the router device. Below two commands are One for rebooting the router device and another to get the uptime.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1) {&amp;quot;device&amp;quot;:[&amp;quot;passkey&amp;quot;,&amp;quot;API key&amp;quot;],&amp;quot;command&amp;quot;:&amp;quot;reboot&amp;quot;,&amp;quot;arguments&amp;quot;:&amp;quot;hardware&amp;quot;}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2) {&amp;quot;device&amp;quot;:[&amp;quot;passkey &amp;quot;,&amp;quot;API key&amp;quot;],&amp;quot;command&amp;quot;:&amp;quot;uptime&amp;quot;}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After configuring all the required information, the user should click on the save and then click on the update to update the all the required information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===2.2 SIM===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user needs to configure the Sim for the given device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SIM Switch.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user needs to select from the drop-down menu on which basis the sim needs to be switched.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Sim Switch Configuration.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user selects on “&#039;&#039;&#039;signal strength&#039;&#039;&#039;” then the parameters related to signal strength will pop up and the user needs to configure the parameters based on the requirement &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Signal Strength.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Threshold RSRP&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This Needs to be set appropriately. Incorrect setting may cause unnecessary SIM switching. ( In General a BAD RSRP value range is -140 to -115 and FAIR RSRP value range is -115 to -105).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Threshold SINR&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This Needs to be set appropriately. Incorrect setting may cause unnecessary SIM switching. ( In General a BAD SNR value range is -20 to 0 and FAIR SNR value range is 0 to 13)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user selects on “&#039;&#039;&#039;Data Limit&#039;&#039;&#039;” then the parameters related to Data Limit will pop up and the user needs to configure the parameters based on the requirement.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Data limit.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM Switch Based on&lt;br /&gt;
|Data Limit&lt;br /&gt;
|The user needs to select from the  drop-down menu on what basis the sim needs to be switched.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM 1 Data Usage Limit (In MB)&lt;br /&gt;
|1000&lt;br /&gt;
|The user needs to set the limit for the data  usage for SIM 1.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM 2 Data Usage Limit (In MB)&lt;br /&gt;
|1000&lt;br /&gt;
|The user needs to set the limit for the data  usage for SIM 2.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Periodicity&lt;br /&gt;
|Daily&lt;br /&gt;
|The user needs to set the pattern/frequency to  switch the sims.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Day Of Month&lt;br /&gt;
|16&lt;br /&gt;
|The user needs to set the day for switching the  sim.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
After configuring all the required information, the user should click on the save.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===2.3 Internet===&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user needs to configure the internet connection to set the priority from the various options. The user should decide what kind of connection it needs to provide to the device like LAN, WAN etc. Once the connections are configured then click on save option and then on update.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Internet.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the user needs to edit on the existing configuration, then the user should click on the “EDIT” button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Network Edit Options.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Name&lt;br /&gt;
|EWAN2&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the name of the WAN  connection&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Priority&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown box the user need to select  the priority.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Select Track IP Numbers&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user needs to select the  track number for the Ips.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|TrackIP1&lt;br /&gt;
|8.8.8.8&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text field the user needs to set the IP  address for the track 1&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|TrackIP2&lt;br /&gt;
|8.8.4.4&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text field the user needs to set the IP  address for the track 1&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Reliability&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Not sure what needs to be written&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|Count&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Not sure what needs to be written&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|Up&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Not sure what needs to be written&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|9&lt;br /&gt;
|Down&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Not sure what needs to be written&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user is done with modification click on the save button to save all the changes and then click on the update button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===2.4 VPN===&lt;br /&gt;
VPN stands for &#039;&#039;&#039;Virtual Private Network&#039;&#039;&#039;, it establishes a connection between the system and a remote server, which is owned by a VPN provider.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Creating a point-to-point tunnel that encrypts the personal data, masks the IP address, and allows to block the required website to blocks via firewalls on the internet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:VPN Settings RC44.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are 5 types of setting available under VPN configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* General Settings&lt;br /&gt;
* IPSEC&lt;br /&gt;
* Open VPN&lt;br /&gt;
* Wireguard&lt;br /&gt;
* Zerotier&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;General Settings&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user must choose which type of VPN connection is required for the device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user must select from IPSEC or Open VPN based on its requirement. If required, the user can select for both the options. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:VPN General Settings RC44.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user needs to click on the save after selecting the option based on its requirement.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;IPSEC&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
IPSEC VPN is used to create a VPN connection between local and remote networks. To use IPSEC VPN, the user should check that both local and remote routers support IPSEC VPN feature.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user can add/edit/delete the IPSEC VPN connection for the device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:VPN IPSEC changes RC44.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user needs to click on the update button once the required configuration is completed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In IPSEC the user needs to click on edit button to edit the configuration of an existing VPN connection.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:VPN Edit Options.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the save button after the required configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The tunnel will show established, showing the connection has been made.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:IPSEC .png|thumb|631x631px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|IPSEC&lt;br /&gt;
|Site to Site VPN&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user should select  the IPSEC connection type.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|IPSEC Role&lt;br /&gt;
|Client/Server&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown box the user needs to select  the IPSEC role.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Connection Type&lt;br /&gt;
|Tunnel&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user needs to select the connection  type. The user should select on the connection enable check box.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Connection mode&lt;br /&gt;
|start&lt;br /&gt;
|In this drop down list the user should select  the mode for the connection. it will have route/add/start/trap mode&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Remote Server IP&lt;br /&gt;
|1.1.1.1&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text field the user needs to set the IP  address for the remote server.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Local ID&lt;br /&gt;
|g300&lt;br /&gt;
|The user needs to set the local id.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|No. of local subnets&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user needs to select how  many subnets it will be connected.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|Local Subnet 1&lt;br /&gt;
|192.168.11.1/24&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user needs to put the  address of the local subnet.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|9&lt;br /&gt;
|Remote id&lt;br /&gt;
|sophos&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user needs to put the id  of the remote connection.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|10&lt;br /&gt;
|No of remote subnet&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user needs to select how  many subnets it will be connected remotely.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|11&lt;br /&gt;
|Remote subnet&lt;br /&gt;
|192.168.10.0/24&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user needs to put the  address of the remote subnet.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|12&lt;br /&gt;
|Key exchange&lt;br /&gt;
|Ikev1&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user should select the  which key exchange version to be selected.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|13&lt;br /&gt;
|Aggressive&lt;br /&gt;
|Yes/No&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user should select either  yes or no .&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|14&lt;br /&gt;
|IKE lifetime&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|Fill according to user’s requirements.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|15&lt;br /&gt;
|Lifetime in seconds&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Fill according to user’s requirements.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|16&lt;br /&gt;
|Enable DPD Detection&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;1&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
0&lt;br /&gt;
|Indicates  whether Dead Peer Detection is enabled to detect a lost connection. Enable  this option as per server-side settings.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|17&lt;br /&gt;
|Time Interval (In Seconds)&lt;br /&gt;
|60&lt;br /&gt;
|This option  is available only if DPD Detection is enabled. The time interval is the  interval for DPD checks.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|18&lt;br /&gt;
|Action&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Restart&#039;&#039;&#039;/clear/hold/&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
trap/start&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Restart&#039;&#039;&#039;: Action to take when  DPD detects a lost connection (restart the connection). Select as per  server-side setting.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|19&lt;br /&gt;
|Authentication Method&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;PSK&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;PSK&#039;&#039;&#039;: Pre-shared key is used  for authentication. Select this option for authentication as per sever side  setting.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|20&lt;br /&gt;
|Multiple Secrets&lt;br /&gt;
|1/&#039;&#039;&#039;0&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|Indicates  whether multiple PSK secrets are used. Enable only if required.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|21&lt;br /&gt;
|PSK Value&lt;br /&gt;
|******&lt;br /&gt;
|Pre-shared  key value (masked for security).&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;*Below are Phase I and Phase II settings details*&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&lt;br /&gt;
! colspan=&amp;quot;4&amp;quot; |                                                        &#039;&#039;&#039;Proposal settings Phase I&#039;&#039;&#039;                                                                                                                     &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|22            &lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Encryption Algorithm&#039;&#039;&#039;                                                 &lt;br /&gt;
|AES 128&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AES 192&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;AES 256&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3DES                                                                                                                                     &lt;br /&gt;
|                                                                                                                                     &#039;&#039;&#039;AES 256&#039;&#039;&#039;: Encryption algorithm  for Phase I. Select as per server-side configuration. Both server and client  should have same configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|23&lt;br /&gt;
|Authentication Phase I&lt;br /&gt;
|SHA1&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MD5&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SHA 256&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SHA 384&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;SHA 512&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;SHA 512&#039;&#039;&#039;: Authentication  algorithm for Phase I.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select as per  server-side configuration. Both server and client should have same configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|24&lt;br /&gt;
|DH Group&lt;br /&gt;
|MODP768(group1)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MODP1024(group2)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MODP1536(group5)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;MODP2048(group14)&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MODP3072(group15)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MODP4096(group16)&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;MODP2048 (group14)&#039;&#039;&#039;:  Diffie-Hellman group for key exchange.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select as per  server-side configuration. Both server and client should have same  configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| colspan=&amp;quot;4&amp;quot; |                                                                                                                                                                 &#039;&#039;&#039;Proposal settings Phase II&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|25&lt;br /&gt;
|Hash Algorithm&lt;br /&gt;
|AES 128&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AES 192&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;AES 256&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3DES&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;AES 256&#039;&#039;&#039;: Encryption algorithm  for Phase II. Select as per server-side configuration. Both server and client  should have same configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|26&lt;br /&gt;
|Authentication Phase II&lt;br /&gt;
|SHA1&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MD5&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SHA 256&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SHA 384&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;SHA 512&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;SHA 512&#039;&#039;&#039;: Authentication  algorithm for Phase II.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select as per  server-side configuration. Both server and client should have same  configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|27&lt;br /&gt;
|PFS Group&lt;br /&gt;
|MODP768(group1)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MODP1024(group2)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MODP1536(group5)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;MODP2048(group14)&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MODP3072(group15)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MODP4096(group16)&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;MODP2048 (group14)&#039;&#039;&#039;: Perfect  Forward Secrecy group.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select as per  server-side configuration. Both server and client should have same  configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Open VPN&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the OpenVPN connection, the home network can act as a server, and the remote device can access the server through the router which acts as an OpenVPN Server gateway. To use the VPN feature, the user should enable OpenVPN Server on the router, and install and run VPN client software on the remote device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Open VPN Settings RC44.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user needs to “upload” the respective certificate from a valid path and then click on the “Update.”&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the OpenVPN connection starts the user will get an option to enable/disable the VPN connection as and when required.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By clicking on the enable/disable button, the user can start/stop the VPN connection.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Open VPN Settings RC44 Dashboard.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
VPN has been established.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;WireGuard:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;WireGuard&#039;&#039;&#039; is simple, fast, lean, and modern VPN that utilizes secure and trusted cryptography.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on “Edit” to start configurations as needed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Wire Guard RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;EDIT:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Wire Guard RC44 Setttings.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the save button after the required configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample Value     &lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Wireguard Role&lt;br /&gt;
|Client/Server&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown box the user needs to select  the wireguard role.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Listen Port&lt;br /&gt;
|51820&lt;br /&gt;
|The UDP port on which the WireGuard client  listens for incoming connections.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|IP Addresses&lt;br /&gt;
|10.0.0.1/24&lt;br /&gt;
|The IP  address and subnet mask assigned to the WireGuard client&#039;s interface. This  address is used within the VPN.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Allowed PeerIPs&lt;br /&gt;
|10.1.1.1&lt;br /&gt;
|The IP  address of the allowed peer(s) that can connect to this WireGuard client.  This might need adjustment based on the actual peer IPs used in the network.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Endpoint HostIP&lt;br /&gt;
|10.1.1.1&lt;br /&gt;
|The IP  address of the WireGuard server (the endpoint to which the client connects).&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Endpoint HostPort&lt;br /&gt;
|51820&lt;br /&gt;
|The port on  the WireGuard server to which the client connects.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|PeerPublicKey&lt;br /&gt;
|*****&lt;br /&gt;
|The public  key of the peer (the server) the client is connecting to. This key is part of  the public-private key pair used in WireGuard for encryption and  authentication.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|Enable Preshared key&lt;br /&gt;
|Yes/No&lt;br /&gt;
|This option  indicates that a pre-shared key (PSK) is used in addition to the  public-private key pair for an extra layer of security.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|9&lt;br /&gt;
|Preshared key&lt;br /&gt;
|*****&lt;br /&gt;
|The actual  pre-shared key value shared between the client and the server. This option  appears only if you have enabled preshared key.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Zerotier:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ZeroTier is a tool that lets you create your own private network over the internet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Go to ZeroTier Central and sign up for a free account. In ZeroTier Central, click on &amp;quot;Create a Network&amp;quot;. This will generate a unique 16-digit network ID for your new network.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Go to settings =&amp;gt; VPN, in general settings, enable ZeroTier and save.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Zerotier Settings RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Copy and paste the unique 16-digit network ID in the edit section.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Zero Seetings Dashboard RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Zerotier Dashboard.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the save button after the required configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field Name    &lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  Value           &lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|NetworkID&lt;br /&gt;
|Ad2769hfkw2345f4&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown box the user needs to paste  the unique 16-digit network id.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Listen Port&lt;br /&gt;
|9993&lt;br /&gt;
|Default&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== 2.5 Firewall ===&lt;br /&gt;
A firewall is a layer of security between the network and the Internet. Since a router is the main connection from a network to the Internet, the firewall function is merged into this device. Every network should have a firewall to protect its privacy.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Firewall.png|frameless|635x635px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are 6 types of setting available under firewall.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* General Settings&lt;br /&gt;
* Port forwards&lt;br /&gt;
* Traffic Rules&lt;br /&gt;
* SNAT traffic Rules&lt;br /&gt;
* Parental Control&lt;br /&gt;
* Zone Forwarding&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;General Setting&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
General settings are subdivided into 2 parts,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1.) General settings&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In general settings, the settings that are made are default settings and can be changed according to user’s preference.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Firewall General Settings.png|frameless|622x622px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Specification details are below:&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;SN&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Field Name&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Sample Value&#039;&#039;&#039;      &lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Description&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Enable SYN-flood  protection&lt;br /&gt;
|Enabled&lt;br /&gt;
|This is  enabled by default; setting can be changed if required.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Disable IPV6&lt;br /&gt;
|Disabled&lt;br /&gt;
|This is  enabled by default; setting can be changed if required.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Drop invalid packets&lt;br /&gt;
|Disabled&lt;br /&gt;
|This is  enabled by default; setting can be changed if required.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|TCP SYN Cookies&lt;br /&gt;
|Disabled&lt;br /&gt;
|This is  enabled by default; setting can be changed if required.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Input&lt;br /&gt;
|Reject/Accept&lt;br /&gt;
|By  default, the setting is ‘Reject’ but this needs to be changed to ‘Accept’  compulsory.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Output&lt;br /&gt;
|Reject/Accept&lt;br /&gt;
|By  default, the setting is ‘Reject’ but this needs to be changed to ‘Accept’  compulsory.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|Forward&lt;br /&gt;
|Reject/Accept&lt;br /&gt;
|By  default, the setting is ‘Reject’ but this needs to be changed to ‘Accept’  compulsory.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2.) Zone settings&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In zone settings, there’s an option to add “New Zone”, according to user’s requirement.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Zone settings.png|thumb|628x628px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Port Forwards:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Port forwarding is a feature in a router or gateway that allows external devices to access services on a private network.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It maps an external port on the router to an internal IP address and port on the local network, enabling applications such as gaming servers, web servers, or remote desktop connections to be accessed from outside the network.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This helps in directing incoming traffic to the correct device within a local network based on the port number, enhancing connectivity and accessibility.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Firewall Port Forward.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;EDIT&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Firewall Edit Option RC44.png|frameless|622x622px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the save button after the required configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Name&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Web_Server_Forward&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|Field must  not be empty. Provide a name for the rule to easily identify it.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Protocol&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;TCP+UDP&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|Select the protocol  for the rule.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Options  typically include TCP+UDP, TCP, UDP, ICMP, Custom.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Source zone&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;SW_LAN&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|Select the  source zone where the traffic is originating from. Options typically include EWAN2,SW_LAN,CWAN1,CWAN1_0,CWAN1_1,VPN&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Source MAC address [optional]&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;any&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;any&#039;&#039;&#039;: Leave as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;any&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; if you don&#039;t want to specify a MAC address.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Source IP address[optional]&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: Leave blank if not needed.&lt;br /&gt;
|Optionally  specify an IP address or range.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Source port&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;80, 443&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;  (if matching traffic for web server ports)&lt;br /&gt;
|Specify the  source port or port range.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|Destination zone&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;SW_LAN&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|Select the  destination zone where the traffic is heading to.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|Destination IP address&lt;br /&gt;
|Leave blank if not needed.&lt;br /&gt;
|Optionally specify  the destination IP address or range.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|9&lt;br /&gt;
|Destination port&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;80&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;  (if redirecting to a web server port)&lt;br /&gt;
|Specify the  destination port or port range.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Traffic Rule:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;Traffic rules&amp;quot; refer to the policies and regulations that govern the flow of data packets within a network.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To allow new traffic, click on “Add and Edit” in “New Traffic Rule”.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Firewall Traffic Rule.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;EDIT&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Firewall Traffic Rule Edit.png|frameless|621x621px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Specification details are below:&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample Value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Name&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: Allow_HTTP_and_HTTPS&lt;br /&gt;
|Field must  not be empty: Provide a descriptive name for the traffic rule.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Restrict to Address Family&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|1.       Options:  IPv4, IPv6&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2.       Example:  IPv4 if dealing with typical internet traffic.&lt;br /&gt;
|Select the  address family to generate iptables rules for.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Protocol&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: TCP+UDP&lt;br /&gt;
|TCP+UDP:  Match incoming traffic using the given protocol.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Match ICMP Type&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: any&lt;br /&gt;
|Match all  ICMP types if set to any. Specific types can be chosen if needed.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Source Zone&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: LAN&lt;br /&gt;
|Specifies the  traffic source zone.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Enable DDoS Prevention&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: ‘Checked’ if you want to enable DDoS prevention  measures&lt;br /&gt;
|Enable or  disable Distributed Denial of Service (DDoS) prevention.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|Source MAC Address&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: any&lt;br /&gt;
|any: Match  traffic from any MAC address or specify a particular MAC address.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|Source Address&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: 192.168.1.0/24&lt;br /&gt;
|Match  incoming traffic from the specified source IP address or range.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|9&lt;br /&gt;
|Source Port&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: any if all source ports should be matched&lt;br /&gt;
|any: Match  incoming traffic from the specified source port or port range.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|10&lt;br /&gt;
|Destination Zone&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: WAN&lt;br /&gt;
|Specifies the  traffic destination zone.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|11&lt;br /&gt;
|Action&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: ACCEPT&lt;br /&gt;
|Options:  ACCEPT, DROP, REJECT. Specify the action to take for matched traffic.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|12&lt;br /&gt;
|Limit&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: 10/minute to limit matches to 10 times per  minute.&lt;br /&gt;
|Maximum  average matching rate; specified as a number, with an optional /second,  /minute, /hour, or /day suffix.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|13&lt;br /&gt;
|Extra arguments&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: --log-prefix &amp;quot;Blocked: &amp;quot; to add a log  prefix to log messages for this rule.&lt;br /&gt;
|Passes  additional arguments to iptables. Use with care as it can significantly alter  rule behaviour.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
Click on save once configured.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;SNAT Traffic Rule:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For configuring SNAT (Source Network Address Translation) traffic rules, you can control how outbound traffic from your local network is translated to a different IP address as it exits the network.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To add new source NAT,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on “ADD” in “New Source NAT:”&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SNAT Traffic Rule.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Edit&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SNAT Edit Options RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Specification details are below:&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Name&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: SNAT_WAN_to_LAN&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Field must  not be empty&#039;&#039;&#039;: Provide a unique and descriptive name for the SNAT rule.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Protocol&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: TCP+UDP&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;TCP+UDP&#039;&#039;&#039;:  Select the protocols that the SNAT rule will apply to.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Source Zone&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: wan&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;wan&#039;&#039;&#039;:  Specifies the source zone from which the traffic originates.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Source IP Address&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: any or a specific range like 192.168.1.0/24&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;-- please  choose --&#039;&#039;&#039;: Specify the source IP address or range. Leave empty if the  rule applies to any source IP.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Source Port&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: any&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;any&#039;&#039;&#039;:  Specify the source port or port range from which the traffic originates.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Destination Zone&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: lan&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;lan&#039;&#039;&#039;:  Specifies the destination zone to which the traffic is directed.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|Destination IP Address&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: any or a specific IP like 192.168.1.100&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;-- please  choose --&#039;&#039;&#039;: Specify the destination IP address or range. Leave empty if  the rule applies to any destination IP.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|Destination port&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: any&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;any&#039;&#039;&#039;:  Specify the destination port or port range to which the traffic is directed.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|9&lt;br /&gt;
|SNAT IP Address&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: 203.0.113.5 (an external IP address)&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;-- please  choose --&#039;&#039;&#039;: Specify the IP address to which the source IP should be  translated.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|10&lt;br /&gt;
|SNAT Port&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: Leave empty if not needed, or specify a port  like ‘12345’&lt;br /&gt;
|Optionally,  rewrite matched traffic to a specific source port. Leave empty to only  rewrite the IP address.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|11&lt;br /&gt;
|Extra Arguments&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: --log-prefix &amp;quot;SNAT_traffic: &amp;quot; (to add  a log prefix to log messages for this rule)&lt;br /&gt;
|Pass  additional arguments to iptables. Use with care as it can significantly alter  rule behaviour.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
Click on save once configured.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Parental Control:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For configuring parental control rules, you want to set restrictions based on time, source, and destination zones, as well as specific devices.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To add parental control in firewall,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on “Add and Edit” in “New parental control:” field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Parental Control.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Edit&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Parental Control Edit Options RC44.png|frameless|622x622px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Specification details are given below:&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  Name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  Value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Name&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  Parental_Control_Sunday&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Field must  not be empty&#039;&#039;&#039;: Provide a unique and descriptive name for the parental  control rule.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Proto&lt;br /&gt;
|all&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;all&#039;&#039;&#039;:  This specifies that the rule will apply to all protocols.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Source Zone&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: lan&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Field must  not be empty&#039;&#039;&#039;: Please look at Firewall-&amp;gt;Zone Settings to find zone  names.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Destination  Zone&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: wan&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Field must  not be empty&#039;&#039;&#039;: Please look at Firewall-&amp;gt;Zone Settings to find zone  names.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Source MAC  Address&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  00:1A:2B:3C:4D:5E&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Field&#039;&#039;&#039;:  Enter the MAC address of the device you want to apply the parental control  rule to. This is useful for restricting specific devices.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Target&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  Reject&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Accept&#039;&#039;&#039;:  This specifies the action to take. For parental controls, you might want to  use ‘Reject’ or ‘Drop’ to block traffic.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|Weekdays&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  Sunday&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Sunday&#039;&#039;&#039;:  Specify the days of the week when the rule should be active.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|Month Days&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: All&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;All:&#039;&#039;&#039; Specify  the days of the month when the rule should be active.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|9&lt;br /&gt;
|Start Time (hh:mm:ss)&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  18:00:00 (6:00 PM)&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Field must  not be empty:&#039;&#039;&#039; Specify the start time when the rule should begin to apply.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|10&lt;br /&gt;
|Stop Time  (hh:mm:ss)&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  22:00:00 (10:00 PM)&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Field must  not be empty:&#039;&#039;&#039; Specify the stop time when the rule should end.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
Click on save once configured.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Zone Forwarding:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Zone forwarding in network configuration allows traffic to be directed from one zone to another.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To ADD new zone,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on “Add” in “New Zone Forward:” field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Zone Forwarding RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;EDIT&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Zone Forwarding editing Options RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Specification details are below:&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  Name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  Value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Source Zone&lt;br /&gt;
|Example options: lan, wan, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;--please  choose--&#039;&#039;&#039;: Select the source zone from which the traffic originates.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Destination Zone&lt;br /&gt;
|Example options: lan, wan, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;--please  choose--&#039;&#039;&#039;: Select the destination zone to which the traffic is directed.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
Click on save once configured.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===2.6 Loopback Rule===&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user can configure the port where he want to forward the traffic to. Here the user can add/edit/delete different port ports as per the requirement. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Loopback Rule.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user should click on ‘add’ and then ‘edit’ to do the required changes in the port and enter the valid information in each section to configure the port for forwarding.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Loopback Rule edit.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Specification details are given below:&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  Name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  Value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Name&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: loopback&lt;br /&gt;
|Provide a  descriptive name for the rule.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Protocol&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: TCP+UDP&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;TCP+UDP&#039;&#039;&#039;:  Select the protocols that the rule will apply to.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Source IP Address [Optional]&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: any or a specific IP range like 192.168.1.0/24&lt;br /&gt;
|Optionally  specify the source IP address or range. Leave empty if the rule should apply  to any source IP.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Source Port [Optional]&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: any&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;any&#039;&#039;&#039;:  Specify the source port or port range from which the traffic originates. any  allows traffic from all ports.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Loopback IP Address&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: 127.0.0.1&lt;br /&gt;
|Specify the  loopback IP address. Typically, this is 127.0.0.1.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Port&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: any&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;any&#039;&#039;&#039;:  Specify the destination port or port range to which the traffic is directed.  any allows traffic to all ports.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|Action&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: DNAT&lt;br /&gt;
|This  specifies the action to take either DNAT or SNAT.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|Internal IP Address&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: 192.168.1.100&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Field must  not be empty&#039;&#039;&#039;: Specify the internal IP address to which the traffic should  be redirected.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|9&lt;br /&gt;
|Internal Port&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: any&lt;br /&gt;
|Redirect  matched incoming traffic to the given port on the internal host.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user is done with the required configurations, user should click save button and then click on the update to save the changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===2.7 Remote Monitoring===&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user can select which equipment needs to be monitored remotely.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user selects the type of RMS click on save.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Remote Monitoring.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;NMS:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user should type the server IP or domain name in the URL then click on save.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on upload and start (Once key is uploaded and this option is clicked, NMS automatically starts, and this router device gets registered with the NMS server provided).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:NMS.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;TR069&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To enable the TR069 the user needs to click on the enable check box.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:TR069.png|frameless|582x582px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user clicks on the check box of enable it will display all the required filed to configured.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Remote Monitoring Tr-069.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Specification details are given below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field Name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample Value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Serving  Interval&lt;br /&gt;
|300&lt;br /&gt;
|A value of 300 seconds means the device  will check in with the ACS (auto-configuration servers) every 5 minutes.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Interface&lt;br /&gt;
|This can  be something like eth0 or wan.&lt;br /&gt;
|This specifies the network interface  used for TR-069 communication.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Username&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: User&lt;br /&gt;
|The username used to authenticate with  the ACS.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Password&lt;br /&gt;
|••••&lt;br /&gt;
|The password used to authenticate with  the ACS.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|URL&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;http://example.com&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|The URL of the ACS. This is where the  CPE (customer-premises equipment) will send its requests and where it will  receive configurations and updates from.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
The user should fill all the required fields and click on the save button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===2.8 Tunnel===&lt;br /&gt;
Tunnels are a method of transporting data across a network using protocols which are not supported by that network.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is further categorised into 3 sections,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1.) General Settings&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2.) GRE Tunnel&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3.) IPIP Tunnel&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tunnel Settings.png|frameless|621x621px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;General Settings&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user needs to select under which type of tunnel it needs to send the data.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tunnel General Settings.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user selects the type of tunnel then click in the save button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;GRE Tunnel:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A GRE (Generic Routing Encapsulation) tunnel configuration involves setting up a virtual point-to-point connection between two endpoints over an IP network.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here the user can add/edit/delete the details of the tunnel.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:GRE Tunnel 1.png|thumb|633x633px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the required update is done then click on update to save the changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;EDIT:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:GRE Tunnel.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Specification details are given below:&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field Name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample Value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Tunnel  name&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  GRETunnel&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;GRETunnel&#039;&#039;&#039;: The name of the GRE tunnel.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Local  external IP&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  10.1.1.66&lt;br /&gt;
|The IP address of the local endpoint  that will initiate the GRE tunnel.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Remote external  IP&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  10.1.1.40&lt;br /&gt;
|The IP address of the remote endpoint  that will terminate the GRE tunnel.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Peer  tunnel IP&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  10.1.1.4&lt;br /&gt;
|The IP address of the peer&#039;s tunnel  interface.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Local  tunnel IP&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  10.1.1.6&lt;br /&gt;
|The IP address of the local tunnel  interface.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Local  tunnel net mask&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  255.255.255.0&lt;br /&gt;
|The subnet mask of the local tunnel  interface.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|Remote IP&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  192.168.10.0/24&lt;br /&gt;
|The remote network that is reachable  through the GRE tunnel.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|Enable  Tunnel Link&lt;br /&gt;
|Check to  enable&lt;br /&gt;
|Enable or disable the GRE tunnel link.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|9&lt;br /&gt;
|Interface  type&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  EWAN2&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;EWAN2&#039;&#039;&#039;: The  type of network interface used for the GRE tunnel.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|10&lt;br /&gt;
|MTU&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  1476&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;1476&#039;&#039;&#039;: Maximum  Transmission Unit size for the GRE tunnel.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|11&lt;br /&gt;
|TTL&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  64&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;64&#039;&#039;&#039;: Time To  Live value for the packets within the GRE tunnel.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|12&lt;br /&gt;
|Tunnel  key&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  12345678&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;12345678&#039;&#039;&#039;: A unique key used to identify the GRE tunnel.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|13&lt;br /&gt;
|Enable  keep alive&lt;br /&gt;
|Check to  enable&lt;br /&gt;
|Enable or disable the keep-alive  feature to monitor the tunnel&#039;s status.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|14&lt;br /&gt;
|Keep  alive interval&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  10&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;10&#039;&#039;&#039;:  Interval in seconds for the keep-alive packets.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
Once the required update is done then click on update to save the changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;IPIP Tunnel:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An IPIP (IP-in-IP) tunnel is a simple tunneling protocol used to encapsulate IP packets within IP packets. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is similar to GRE but without additional features such as keying and type fields.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here the user can add/edit/delete the details of the tunnel.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:IPIP Tunnel1.png|thumb|635x635px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;EDIT:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:IPIP Edit.png|thumb|637x637px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Specification details are given below:&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field Name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample Value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Tunnel  name&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  IPIPTunnel&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;IPIPTunnel:&#039;&#039;&#039; The name of the IPIP tunnel.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Local external  IP&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  10.1.1.66&lt;br /&gt;
|The IP address of the local endpoint  that will initiate the IPIP tunnel.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Remote  external IP&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  10.1.1.40&lt;br /&gt;
|The IP address of the remote endpoint  that will terminate the IPIP tunnel.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Peer  tunnel IP&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: 10.1.1.4&lt;br /&gt;
|The IP address of the peer&#039;s tunnel  interface.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Local  tunnel IP&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  10.1.1.6&lt;br /&gt;
|The IP address of the local tunnel  interface.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Local  tunnel net mask&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  255.255.255.0&lt;br /&gt;
|The subnet mask of the local tunnel  interface.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|Remote IP&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  192.168.10.0/24&lt;br /&gt;
|The remote network that is reachable  through the IPIP tunnel.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|Enable  Tunnel Link&lt;br /&gt;
|Check to  enable&lt;br /&gt;
|Enable or disable the IPIP tunnel link.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|9&lt;br /&gt;
|Interface  type&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  EWAN2&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;EWAN2&#039;&#039;&#039;: The  type of network interface used for the IPIP tunnel.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|10&lt;br /&gt;
|MTU&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  1476&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;1476&#039;&#039;&#039;: Maximum  Transmission Unit size for the IPIP tunnel.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|11&lt;br /&gt;
|TTL&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  64&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;64&#039;&#039;&#039;: Time To  Live value for the packets within the IPIP tunnel.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|12&lt;br /&gt;
|Tunnel  key&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  12345678&lt;br /&gt;
|Although typically not used in IPIP,  this field might be included for compatibility with certain configurations.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|13&lt;br /&gt;
|Enable  keep alive&lt;br /&gt;
|Check to  enable&lt;br /&gt;
|Enable or disable the keep-alive  feature to monitor the tunnel&#039;s status.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|14&lt;br /&gt;
|Keep  alive interval&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  10&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;10&#039;&#039;&#039;:  Interval in seconds for the keep-alive packets.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
Once the required update is done then click on update to save the changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==3 Maintenance==&lt;br /&gt;
In this module the user can configure/upgrade/modify the settings related to system, password, firmware and monitoring.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It includes below submodules.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
·      General&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
·      Password&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
·      Reboot&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
·      Import and Export config&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
·      Firmware upgrade&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
·      Monitor Application&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Maintenance.png|thumb|631x631px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== 3.1 General/ System ===&lt;br /&gt;
Here you can configure the basic aspects of router like its hostname or the timezone.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is further sub-divided into,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1.) General Settings&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2.) Logging&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3.) Language and Style&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;General Settings:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Maintenance General.png|frameless|619x619px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;EDIT:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field Name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample Value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Local Time&lt;br /&gt;
|2024/07/30  13:25:47&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|The current local date and time set on  the device.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Hostname&lt;br /&gt;
|22B25240007&lt;br /&gt;
|The hostname of the device, which is  used to identify it on the network.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Timezone&lt;br /&gt;
|Asia/Kolkata&lt;br /&gt;
|The timezone setting of the device,  which determines the local time.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user configures the required details then click on the save button to save all the details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Logging:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here the user can configure the basic aspects of your device related to system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The system log configuration provided specifies how the device handles and stores log information, including buffer size, external log server details, and log detail levels.[[File:Maintenance logging.png|frameless|608x608px]]&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field Name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample Value            &lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|System  log buffer size&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  32 kiB&lt;br /&gt;
|The size of the memory buffer allocated  (0-32) for storing system logs before they are either written to a file or  sent to an external server.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|External  system log server&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  0.0.0.0&lt;br /&gt;
|The IP address of an external server  where logs can be sent.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|External  system log server port&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  514&lt;br /&gt;
|The port used to send logs to the  external log server. Port 514 is the default port for syslog.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Log  output level&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  Debug&lt;br /&gt;
|Sets the detail level of the system  logs.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Cron Log  level&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  Debug&lt;br /&gt;
|The detail level of the logs for cron  jobs.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user configures the required details then click on the save button to save all the details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Language and Style:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here the user can configure the basic aspects of your device related to language.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user configures the required details then click on the save button to save all the details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Maintenance Language and Style.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===3.2 Password===&lt;br /&gt;
In this module the user can set the password for the admin credentials.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Change you password.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Specifies the password for the guest account. If the user enter a plaintext password here, it will get replaced with a crypted password on save. The new password will be effective once the user logs out and log in again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user needs to write the password in the text box and click on the save button to save the password.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===3.3 Reboot===&lt;br /&gt;
In this module the user can reboot the device remotely.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Reboot.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To start the reboot process first the user needs to fill all the required fields.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Need to select the type of reboot for the device whether it needs to be Hardware or Software reboot.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Maintenance Reboot.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Type&lt;br /&gt;
|Maintenance Reboot&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown list the user needs to  select the type of reboot is required to configure.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Reboot Type&lt;br /&gt;
|Hardware&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown list the user needs to select  the hardware or software reboot is required.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Minutes&lt;br /&gt;
|59&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user needs to configure  the min to start the reboot activity&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Hours&lt;br /&gt;
|22&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user needs to configure  the hours to start the reboot activity&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Day of Month&lt;br /&gt;
|All&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user needs to configure  the day of the month to start the reboot activity&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Month&lt;br /&gt;
|All&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user needs to configure  the month to start the reboot activity&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|Day of the week&lt;br /&gt;
|All&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user needs to configure  the week to start the reboot activity&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user fills all the required given parameters click on the save.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To start the reboot process, click on the “Reboot Now” button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===3.4 Import and Export===&lt;br /&gt;
In this section, User can Import &amp;amp; Export Configuration files of the Device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Import and Export.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
click “Export Config” to export device configuration &amp;amp; settings to a text file,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
click “Import Config” to import device configuration &amp;amp; settings from a previously exported text file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Import window.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user need to select on the choose file to and click on the apply.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===3.5 Firmware Upgrade===&lt;br /&gt;
The user can upgrade with the latest software for the existing firmware. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Frimware Upgrade.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the &#039;&#039;&#039;flash image&#039;&#039;&#039; and chose the path where the sys-upgrade file is kept and then click on flash image, it will upgrade to the latest software once the reboot is done.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Flash Image.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the &#039;&#039;&#039;Retain Config and flash&#039;&#039;&#039; and chose the path where the sys-upgrade file is kept and then click on Retain Config and flash, it will upgrade to the latest software once the reboot is done.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Flash Image.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the &#039;&#039;&#039;Factory Reset&#039;&#039;&#039; for the complete retest of the device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===3.6 Monitor Application===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Monitor Application.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Router Application Remote Configuration.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Router Remote Configuration.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==4 Status==&lt;br /&gt;
In this module the user can view the status of the router device with respect to the network, Wan, modem etc.[[File:Status.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It has 4 submodules.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Interfaces&lt;br /&gt;
* Internet&lt;br /&gt;
* Modem&lt;br /&gt;
* Route&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===4.1 Interfaces===&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user can see the traffic status for all the network through which the device works.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Status Interfaces.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Looking on the network status the user can check if the cellular or the ethernet is up.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===4.2 Internet===&lt;br /&gt;
In this submodule the user can view the status of the internet connections.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Internet Status.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
  To see the latest status of the internet connection the user needs to click on the refresh button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===4.3 Modem===&lt;br /&gt;
In this sub module the user will get to know the status of the cellular interface which is installed inside the modem. The user can view all the details related to the sim in terms of Operator, Network technology, Mobile country code, Upload bandwidth, Download Bandwidth, Frequency band, RSRP, RSRQ, RSSI &amp;amp; SNR under this page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Modem Status.png|frameless|602x602px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== 4.4 Route ===&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user can check the status of the route for the device. The ARP status can be visible in under this page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Route Status.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==5 Features==&lt;br /&gt;
In this module the user can see all the features that the router device has.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This module includes the below features.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Mac Address Binding&lt;br /&gt;
* URL Filtering&lt;br /&gt;
* Web Server&lt;br /&gt;
* Wi-Fi MacID Filtering&lt;br /&gt;
* Routing&lt;br /&gt;
* Others&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Features.png|frameless|618x618px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===5.1 Mac Address Binding===&lt;br /&gt;
Under this submodule the user can configure/update/edit the IP Address for MAC&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mac Addressing Binding.png|frameless|622x622px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user should write MAC address and then click on the add button. Once the address is added then click on the update button to save the modification.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user needs to click on the Edit button to modify the preexisting configuration. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mac Address Edit.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user modifies the MAC address /IP Address then click on the save button to save the changes done.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user can click on the deleted button to delete an existing configured device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Post all the changes the user needs to click on the update to reflect all the changes in the application.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===5.2 URL Filtering===&lt;br /&gt;
In this submodule the user should provide the URL which needs to be blocked for the device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:URL Filtering.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To add the new URL for blocking, click on the Add New button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user clicks on the Add New button a new pop will appear in that page write the URL and click on the save. The user can select the status of that URL while defining the URL.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Url Update.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To edit / delete the existing URL the user needs to click on the edit /deleted button respectively.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Edit or Delete URL.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the save after the changes are done as per the need.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== 5.3 Web Server ===&lt;br /&gt;
In this submodule the user can configure webserver related parameters.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Web server.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To configure the HTTP, click on the enable HTTP. Once the user clicks on the check box the HTTP Port text box will appear where the user needs to configure the port id.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Webserver Configuration.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on save buttons to save the changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To configure the 2nd HTTP, click on the enable HTTP. Once the user clicks on the check box the HTTP Port text box will appear where the user needs to configure the port id.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Webserver Https Redirect.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on save buttons to save the changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the “Redirect https” and “RFC1918 Filter” check box to respectively and click on the save button to save the changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To configure the NTP sync, click on the enable NTP sync. Once the user clicks on the check box the respective text boxes will appear to configure the parameters. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:RFC1918 Filter.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user configures the parameters click on the save button to save the given values.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===5.4 Wi-Fi MacID Filtering===&lt;br /&gt;
In this module the user can filter the Macids. Mac address filtering allows users to block traffic coming from certain known machines or devices.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Wi-Fi MacID Filtering.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Before adding the MacIDs the user needs to select the mode from the dropdown menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To Add the MacID the user needs to click on Add New option select the mac id and network name Wi-Fi 2.4G AP OR Wi-Fi 2.4G AP Guest, select enable/disable option and save it and update.              &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Configuring MacID and Network Name.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the required MACID and Network Name is configured the user needs to click on the save button to add the details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user needs to click on the edit button to do modifications on the pre-existing configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Macid and name removing.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the required MACID / Network Name is modified the user needs to click on the save button to reflect the changed value in the application.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;WIFI 2.4G AP Guest&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To Add the MacID the user needs to click on Add New option select the mac id and network name Wi-Fi 2.4G AP Guest, select enable/disable option and save it and update.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
     [[File:WIFI 2.4G AP Guest.png|frameless|623x623px]]  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the required MACID and Network Name is configured the user needs to click on the save button to add the details. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user needs to click on the edit button to do modifications on the pre-existing configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Configuring MacID and Network Name.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the required MACID / Network Name is modified the user needs to click on the save button to reflect the changed value in the application.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===5.5 Routing===&lt;br /&gt;
In this submodule the user can configure the parameters related to routing of the device. like Target address, Networks address etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Routing IPV4 Routes.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To add a new device the user needs to fill all the required information and click on the add button.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Interface&lt;br /&gt;
|eth0.1&lt;br /&gt;
|In this drop down list the user should  configure the interface name.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Target&lt;br /&gt;
|192.168.10.1&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user needs to insert the  target IP address&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|IPV4 Netmask&lt;br /&gt;
|255.255.255.0&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user should give the  address for the IPV4Netmask&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Metric&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user should insert the  number of the metric.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|IPV4 Gateway&lt;br /&gt;
|192.168.100.1&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user should configured the  address for the IPV4 Gateway.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Route Type&lt;br /&gt;
|Unicast&lt;br /&gt;
|In this drop down box the user should select  the type of route needed for the device.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
To edit the existing device the user needs to click on the edit option.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Routing Configuration.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the changes are done click on the save button to save all the changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the deleted button to delete the existing device detail.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Advanced Static IPV4 Routes:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Advanced Static IPV4 Routes.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To add a new device the user needs to fill all the required information and click on the add button.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Interface&lt;br /&gt;
|eth0.1&lt;br /&gt;
|In this drop down list the user should  configure the interface name.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|To&lt;br /&gt;
|192.168.10.1&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user needs to insert the  target IP address&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|IPV4 Netmask&lt;br /&gt;
|255.255.255.0&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user should give the  address for the IPV4Netmask&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Table&lt;br /&gt;
|local&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|From&lt;br /&gt;
|192.168.100.1&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user should configured the  from address for the routes&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Priority&lt;br /&gt;
|230&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
To edit the existing device the user needs to click on the edit option.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Routing Editing.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the changes are done click on the save button to save all the changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the deleted button to delete the existing device detail.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once all the configurations are done click on the update button to reflect the changes made.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===5.6 Others===&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user will get to do all the other miscellaneous configuration with respect to the device based on the required parameters.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Miscellaneous configuration.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Utility&lt;br /&gt;
|Action&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Set Date&lt;br /&gt;
|SET&lt;br /&gt;
|Need to set the date and time and after  click command get the Date and time&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Gate Date&lt;br /&gt;
|GET&lt;br /&gt;
|Needs to get the system date and time&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|IPsec status all&lt;br /&gt;
|GET&lt;br /&gt;
|Needs to get the IPsec details&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Wi-Fi Scan&lt;br /&gt;
|GET&lt;br /&gt;
|Needs to get the Wi-Fi status&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|ipref3 client&lt;br /&gt;
|RUN&lt;br /&gt;
|Needs to click on the RUN to execute  the command&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|ipref3 server&lt;br /&gt;
|RUN&lt;br /&gt;
|Needs to click on the RUN to execute  the command&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|Ping&lt;br /&gt;
|PING&lt;br /&gt;
|Needs to click on the ping status&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|9&lt;br /&gt;
|Traceroute&lt;br /&gt;
|RUN&lt;br /&gt;
|Needs to click on the ping Traceroute status&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|10&lt;br /&gt;
|NTP Sync&lt;br /&gt;
|SYNC&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to Sync the NTP&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|11&lt;br /&gt;
|Download Files&lt;br /&gt;
|DOWNLOAD&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to Download the files /Database&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|12&lt;br /&gt;
|Restart Power&lt;br /&gt;
|RESTART&lt;br /&gt;
|Click Restart the power&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|13&lt;br /&gt;
|Restart Modem&lt;br /&gt;
|RESTART&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to Restart the modem&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|14&lt;br /&gt;
|Run at command&lt;br /&gt;
|RUN&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to Run the command&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|15&lt;br /&gt;
|Show board configuration&lt;br /&gt;
|SHOW&lt;br /&gt;
|To Show the board configuration&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|16&lt;br /&gt;
|Show VPN Certificate Name&lt;br /&gt;
|SHOW&lt;br /&gt;
|To Show VPN Certificate Name&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|17&lt;br /&gt;
|Switch SIM to Secondary&lt;br /&gt;
|RUN&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to switch the SIM to secondary  mode&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|18&lt;br /&gt;
|Send Test SMS&lt;br /&gt;
|SEND&lt;br /&gt;
|To Send the SMS Confirmation&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|19&lt;br /&gt;
|Readlatest SMS&lt;br /&gt;
|READ&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to Read the latest SMS&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|20&lt;br /&gt;
|Data Usage&lt;br /&gt;
|SHOW&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to show the data usage.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|21&lt;br /&gt;
|Monthly Data Usage&lt;br /&gt;
|SHOW&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to show the monthly data usage&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|22&lt;br /&gt;
|Modem debug Info&lt;br /&gt;
|READ&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to read the information about the  modem debug&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|23&lt;br /&gt;
|Scan Network operators (take&amp;gt;3mins)&lt;br /&gt;
|SHOW&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to show the Network operator&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|24&lt;br /&gt;
|Network operators (first perform scan  network operator&lt;br /&gt;
|SHOW&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to show the Network operator&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|25&lt;br /&gt;
|ReadLogFiles&lt;br /&gt;
|READ&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to read the log files&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|26&lt;br /&gt;
|Enable ssh&lt;br /&gt;
|RUN&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to Run the command&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|27&lt;br /&gt;
|Disable ssh&lt;br /&gt;
|RUN&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to Run the command&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|28&lt;br /&gt;
|Clear SIM1 Data&lt;br /&gt;
|CLEAR&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to clear the SIM1 data&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|29&lt;br /&gt;
|Clear SIM2 Data&lt;br /&gt;
|CLEAR&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to clear the SIM data&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==6 Logout==&lt;br /&gt;
The user should click on log out option to logged out from the router application.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Logout.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user needs to click on the ok to come out of the router application.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tanisha</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.silbonetworks.com/index.php?title=File:Maintenance_logging.png&amp;diff=1191</id>
		<title>File:Maintenance logging.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.silbonetworks.com/index.php?title=File:Maintenance_logging.png&amp;diff=1191"/>
		<updated>2024-09-03T05:42:12Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tanisha: Tanisha uploaded a new version of File:Maintenance logging.png&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Maintenance logging&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tanisha</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.silbonetworks.com/index.php?title=File:Maintenance_General.png&amp;diff=1190</id>
		<title>File:Maintenance General.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.silbonetworks.com/index.php?title=File:Maintenance_General.png&amp;diff=1190"/>
		<updated>2024-09-03T05:35:11Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tanisha: Tanisha uploaded a new version of File:Maintenance General.png&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Maintenance General&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tanisha</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.silbonetworks.com/index.php?title=RC44_User_Manual&amp;diff=1189</id>
		<title>RC44 User Manual</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.silbonetworks.com/index.php?title=RC44_User_Manual&amp;diff=1189"/>
		<updated>2024-09-03T05:30:02Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tanisha: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;This page contains the user manual for RC44.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Connecting with the device to the System (Laptop/Desktop).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To log in to SILBO_RC44 by connecting the router to your laptop or desktop via LAN or using Wi-Fi, please follow the steps below. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Connecting via LAN:&#039;&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Connect your laptop&#039;s LAN port to one of the router&#039;s LAN interfaces. Ensure that you select any LAN interface (there are two available) while making sure the WAN interface is not used. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
                                                                                                                                                          &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;How to connect with the SILBO_RC44&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;application&#039;&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the LAN connection is established between the device and the laptop or the desktop&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please open the command prompt and ping go get the ip config of that device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Type the command &#039;&#039;&#039;Ipconfig&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:How_to_connect_with_the_SILBO_RB44_application.png|alt=How to connect with the SILBO RB44 application|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It will provide the Ip address/url of that device through which the application can be accessed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Connecting_via_LAN_RB44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Log In==&lt;br /&gt;
Open the web browser and type the IP address in the URL.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It will show the log in page of the application.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Log In.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Give the valid credentials for the username and password to login to the application page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user credentials are provided it will direct to the landing page of the application.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Login Dashboard RC44.png|frameless|636x636px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The “Status” landing page shows all the detailed specification of the device like system, memory storage and connection tracking etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The application is divided in to 6 Modules.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Info&lt;br /&gt;
* Settings&lt;br /&gt;
* Maintenance&lt;br /&gt;
* Status&lt;br /&gt;
* Features&lt;br /&gt;
* Logout&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==1.Info==&lt;br /&gt;
The “Info” module provides the information about the devices to the user.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It provides all the specification related to the hardware, firmware, Networks and the Connection uptimes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It has 3 submodules.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Overview&lt;br /&gt;
* System Log&lt;br /&gt;
* Kernel Log&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Info dashboard RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===1.1 Overview===&lt;br /&gt;
In overview module it displays all the specification categorically of a device like System, Memory, storage, Connection tracking, DHCP Lease.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Login Dashboard RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;System&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this section it displays the hardware configured specification of the device.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Info system RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The specifications details are as follows,&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&lt;br /&gt;
!SN&lt;br /&gt;
!Field name &lt;br /&gt;
!Sample value&lt;br /&gt;
!Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Hostname&lt;br /&gt;
|22B09230239&lt;br /&gt;
|This field  displays the router serial number of the device&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Model&lt;br /&gt;
|Silbo_RC44- EC200A&lt;br /&gt;
|This field  displays the model number of the device&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Firmware Version and IPK Version&lt;br /&gt;
|1.16_1.13_RC3&lt;br /&gt;
|This field  displays the firmware version and IPK version&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Kernel Version&lt;br /&gt;
|4.14.180&lt;br /&gt;
|This field  displays the kernel version of the device&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Local Time&lt;br /&gt;
|Monday, July 1, 2024, at 05:43:58 PM&lt;br /&gt;
|This field  displays the local time&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Uptime&lt;br /&gt;
|0h 7m 29s&lt;br /&gt;
|This field  displays the uptime of the device&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|Load Average&lt;br /&gt;
|1.73 1.87 1.04&lt;br /&gt;
|This field  displays the average load&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Memory&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this section it displays the memory configured specification of the device.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Memory Dashboard RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The specifications details are as follows.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Total Available&lt;br /&gt;
|68676 kB / 124208 kB (55%)&lt;br /&gt;
|This field  displays the total availability of memory space in the device&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Free&lt;br /&gt;
|59344 kB / 124208 kB (47%)&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the  Free memory space in the device&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Cached&lt;br /&gt;
|312 kB / 124208 kB (0%)&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the  Cached memory space in the device&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Buffered&lt;br /&gt;
|9332 kB / 124208 kB (7%)&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the  Buffered memory space in the device&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Storage&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this section it displays the status of storage as root and temporary usage specification of the device.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Storage Dashboard RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The specifications details are as follows.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Root Usage&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
796 kB / 15488 kB (5%)&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays  the total root usage of the device&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Temporary  Usage&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
312 kB / 62104 kB (0%)&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the total temporary  usage of the device&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Connection Tracking&#039;&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this section it displays the status of connection tracking for the device.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Connection Tracking RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The specifications details are as follows.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Active Connection&lt;br /&gt;
|48 / 16384 (0%)&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the active connection of the device.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;DHCP Leases&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this section, it displays the DHCP lease of the temporary assignment of an IP address to a device on the network.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:DCHP Leases RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The specifications details are as follows.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Host Name&lt;br /&gt;
|KermaniK-LT&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays  the configured Host Name/User Name for that device.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|IPv4-Address&lt;br /&gt;
|192.168.10.147&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the IP  address of the device.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|MAC-Address&lt;br /&gt;
|34:73:5a:bb: ab:7a&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the MAC-Address  of the device.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Lease time remaining&lt;br /&gt;
|11h 53m 49s&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the lease  time remaining for the device.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===1.2 System Log===&lt;br /&gt;
This page provides on screen System logging information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user gets to view the system logs &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:System Log.png|frameless|617x617px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===1.3 Kernel Log===&lt;br /&gt;
This page provides on-screen Kernel logging information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this page, the user gets to view the Kernel logs&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Kernel Log.png|frameless|621x621px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==2. Setting==&lt;br /&gt;
In this “Setting” module the user can Configure/update all the required parameters related to Network, SIM Switch, Internet, VPN, Firewall, Loopback Rule, Remote monitoring, Tunnel as per requirement.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
IT consist of 8 submodules.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Network&lt;br /&gt;
* Sim Switch&lt;br /&gt;
* Internet&lt;br /&gt;
* VPN&lt;br /&gt;
* Firewall&lt;br /&gt;
* Loopback Rule&lt;br /&gt;
* Remote Monitoring&lt;br /&gt;
* Tunnel&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Settings.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===2.1 Network===&lt;br /&gt;
In this section the user does all the setting related configuration with reference to network like Ethernet Setting, Cellular Setting, Band lock and Operator Lock, Wi-Fi, Guest Wi-Fi, Wireless Schedule, SMS Setting, Loopback IP.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Network Dashboard RC44.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Ethernet Setting&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this page it will display all the configured port that is attached with the device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For this device 3 ports are configured. Ethernet mode can be configured as WAN and as LAN as well. Ethernet LAN Connection settings can be configured as DHCP server or Static.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Ethernet Settings RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;For port 3 setting&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Kindly select the option &#039;&#039;&#039;LAN4&#039;&#039;&#039; for &#039;&#039;&#039;Port 3 mode LAN/WAN&#039;&#039;&#039;. Based on the option selected the filed will also changes the user needs to configure all the required field and click on the save to save the required fields.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Ethernet Settings RC44 part 2.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Port 3 mode LAN/WAN&lt;br /&gt;
|LAN&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the port mode selection&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Port 3 Ethernet Protocol [LAN Eth0.1]&lt;br /&gt;
|DHCP Server&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the Ethernet mode selection&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Port 3 DHCP Server IP&lt;br /&gt;
|192.168.10.1&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays DHCP server IP configured.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Port 3 DHCP Netmask&lt;br /&gt;
|255.255.255.0&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays DHCP server Netmask address configured&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Port 3 DHCP Start Address&lt;br /&gt;
|100&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays DHCP server  start address configured&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Port 3 DHCP Limit&lt;br /&gt;
|50&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays DHCP server  limit&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Kindly select the option &#039;&#039;&#039;EWAN&#039;&#039;&#039; for &#039;&#039;&#039;Port 3 mode LAN/WAN&#039;&#039;&#039;. Based on the option selected the filed will also changes the user needs to configure all the required field and click on the save to save the required fields.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:EWAN Port 3 Configuration RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Port 3 mode LAN/WAN&lt;br /&gt;
|EWAN&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the port mode selection&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Ethernet Protocol Port 3 WAN&lt;br /&gt;
|DHCP  client&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the client&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Gateway&lt;br /&gt;
|192.168.1.1&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays gateway address  configured&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the save once all the configuration is done and click on the update button to update all the information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;SW_LAN settings&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this part the user can configure the setting for SW_LAN &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SW LAN settings RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|SW_LAN Ethernet Protocol&lt;br /&gt;
|DHCP  Server&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the  Ethernet mode selection&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|SW_LAN DHCP Server IP&lt;br /&gt;
|192.168.10.1&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays DHCP server IP  configured.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|SW_LAN  DHCP Netmask&lt;br /&gt;
|255.255.255.0&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays DHCP server  Netmask address configured&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|SW_LAN  DHCP Start Address&lt;br /&gt;
|100&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays DHCP server  start address configured&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|SW_LAN  DHCP Limit&lt;br /&gt;
|50&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays DHCP server  limit&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|DNS  Server&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|This filed display number of DSN  server availability&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|DNS  Server Address&lt;br /&gt;
|8.8.8.8&lt;br /&gt;
|This  filed display the DSN server address.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After configuring all the required information, the user should click on the save and then click on the update to update the all the required information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Static option for SW_LAN Ethernet Protocol&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the option of static from the drop-down menu for SW_LAN Ethernet Protocol.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SW LAN settings Static Ethernet Protocol.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|SW_LAN Ethernet Protocol&lt;br /&gt;
|Static&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the  Ethernet mode selection&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|SW_LAN static IP&lt;br /&gt;
|192.168.5.1&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays static server IP  configured.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|SW_LAN  Netmask&lt;br /&gt;
|255.255.255.0&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays static server  Netmask address configured&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|DNS  Server&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|This filed display number of DSN  server availability&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|DSN  Server Address&lt;br /&gt;
|8.8.8.8&lt;br /&gt;
|This  filed display the DSN server address.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
After configuring all the required information, the user should click on the save and then click on the update to update the all the required information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Cellular Setting&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this page, the user needs to configure the various details with respect to the SIM.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
select single cellular single sim where the user must configure the APN details of the sim used for the router device. The Configurations can be done based on the SIM usage, with respect to IPV4 or IPV.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Cellular Settings RC44.png|frameless|619x619px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Cellular  Operation Mode&lt;br /&gt;
|Single Cellular with Dual Sim&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays  the cellular operation mode.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Cellular  Modem 1&lt;br /&gt;
|QuectelEC200A&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the modem name.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Network  Mode&lt;br /&gt;
|Automatic&lt;br /&gt;
|This  field displays the  Network mode selection&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM 1  Access Point Name&lt;br /&gt;
|airtelgprs.com&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the  name of the Sim 1 access point configured.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM 1  PDP Type&lt;br /&gt;
|IPV4&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays  the type of SIM 1&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM 1  Username&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|This field is optional, and the user can configure the name of  the SIM 1&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM 1  Password&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|This  field is optional, and the user can configure the password for the SIM 1&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM 1  Authentication Protocol&lt;br /&gt;
|None&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the type of  protocol is being used for SIM 1&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|9&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM 2  Access Point Name&lt;br /&gt;
|airtelgprs.com&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the name of the  Sim 2 access point configured.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|10&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM 2  PDP Type&lt;br /&gt;
|IPV4&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the type of SIM  2&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|11&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM 2  Username&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|This  field is optional, and the user can configure the name of the SIM 2&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|12&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM 2  Password&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|This  field is optional, and the user can configure the password for the SIM 2&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|13&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM 2  Authentication Protocol&lt;br /&gt;
|None&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the type of  protocol is being used for SIM 2&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|14&lt;br /&gt;
|Primary  SIM Switchback Time (In Minutes)&lt;br /&gt;
|10&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the time given  for sim to swich in between.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
After configuring all the required information, the user should click on the save and then click on the update to update the all the required information. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Band lock and Operator Lock&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this page, the user needs to configure the lock band and operator based on the service provider&#039;&#039;&#039;.&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Bands available in the drop-down list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Band lock and Operator Lock.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;2G/3G option&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2G/3G: - 3G allows additional features such as mobile internet access, video calls and mobile TV. While the main function of 2G technology is the transmission of information through voice calls.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:2G-3G option.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user should select the band check box  available for 2g/3g  from the given list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Bands available for selection under LTE for the bands available that zone.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Operator Selection Mode&#039;&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user needs to click on the check box of the “operator select enable” to select the operator.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the check box is clicked there will be a dropdown list of the operator modes from which the user needs to select the mode. The user needs to select the operator mode from the given dropdown list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Operator Selection Mode.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the user selects the mode “Manual” or “Manual-Automatic” then one more text box will appear where the user must provide the operator code.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Band lock and Operator Lock 1.png|frameless|542x542px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After configuring all the required information, the user should click on the save and then click on the update to update the all the required information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Wi-Fi Setting&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wi-Fi is a family of wireless network protocols based on the IEEE 802.11 family of standards, which are commonly used for local area network of devices and internet access, allowing nearby digital devices to exchanges data by radio waves. These are the most widely used computer network, used globally in home and small office networks to link devices and to provided internet access with wireless router and wireless access point in public places. In this router has the general setting and change country code, channel, radio mode, radio passphrase as per the requirement after clicking on enable Radio button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Wi-Fi Setting.png|frameless|585x585px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user needs to select the respective radio mode based on its need. Basically, it has 3 radio mode.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Wi-Fi Setting access Point.png|frameless|590x590px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Access Point mode:&#039;&#039;&#039; In Access Point mode, router connects to a wireless router through an Ethernet cable to extend the coverage of wireless signal to other network client.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Access Point Mode RC44.png|frameless|573x573px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Client point:&#039;&#039;&#039;  In client mode, the access point connects your wired devices to a wireless network. This mode is suitable when you have a wired device with an Ethernet port and no wireless capability, for example, a smart TV, Media Player, or Game console and you want to connect it to the internet wirelessly, select the Client Mode and give the Radio SSID &amp;amp; client passphrase&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Client Point RC44.png|frameless|587x587px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Access point and client point&#039;&#039;&#039;: select this option for both type connection, give both SSID and passphrase.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Access point and Client Point RC44.png|frameless|571x571px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After configuring all the required information, the user should click on the save and then click on the update to update the all the required information.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Radio  0 Protocol&lt;br /&gt;
|IEEE 802.11 b/g/n&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the  user should select which protocol is being used&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Country  Code&lt;br /&gt;
|INDIA&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the  user should select which county it belongs to.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Channel&lt;br /&gt;
|Auto&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user should  select the proper channel to be used.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|TX  Power&lt;br /&gt;
|100&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user should  specify the power.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Channel  Width&lt;br /&gt;
|20 MHz&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user should  select the channel width&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Radio  Mode&lt;br /&gt;
|Access  point&lt;br /&gt;
|In this drop down the user should  select the mode.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|Radio  SSID&lt;br /&gt;
|APClient_22B09230239&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user should  specify the SSID number&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|Radio  Authentication&lt;br /&gt;
|WPA2  Personal (PSK)&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user should  select the type of authentication.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|9&lt;br /&gt;
|Radio  Encryption&lt;br /&gt;
|AES&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user should  select the type of encryption required.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|10&lt;br /&gt;
|Radio  Passphrase&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user should  specify the password.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|11&lt;br /&gt;
|Radio  DHCP server IP&lt;br /&gt;
|192.168.100.1&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user should  specify the IP address of DHCP server.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|12&lt;br /&gt;
|Radio  DHCP start address&lt;br /&gt;
|100&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user should  specify the start address of the DHCP.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|13&lt;br /&gt;
|Radio  DHCP limit&lt;br /&gt;
|50&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user should  specify the limit for the DHCP.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Wireless Schedule&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wi-Fi can be automatically withdrawn based on the configuration done in this section.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user can schedule the Wi-Fi’s accessibility time during a particular period.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Wireless Schedule.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After configuring all the required information, the user should click on the save and then click on the update to update the all the required information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user can select more than one “day of the week” for scheduling the wifi working hours.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Wifi Schedule.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Loop back IP settings&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The loopback IP address, often referred to as “localhost”. it’s used to establish network connections within the same device for testing and troubleshooting purpose.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Loop back IP settings.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After configuring all the required information, the user should click on the save and then click on the update to update the all the required information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The loopback IP address, commonly represented as 127.0.0.1, is a special address used for testing network connectivity on a local machine. It allows a device to send network messages to itself without involving external networks, making it useful for troubleshooting and diagnostics.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
However, this IP can be changed as per requirement and to do that, Navigating to Setting&amp;gt;&amp;gt;Network configuration&amp;gt;&amp;gt; Loopback IP settings can be changed/updated.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Above screenshot shows the configuration window from GUI/WebUI&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;SMS Settings&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
User needs to enable SMS option in SMS settings page. This option is to validate the mobile numbers using which controlling commands could be sent to the router device. 1 to 5 mobile numbers can be authenticated by choosing from “Select Valid SMS user numbers” and adding the mobile numbers below respectively. API key is the pass key used in the commands while sending SMS. Displayed in the below screen is the default API key which can be edited and changed as per choice.   After addition of the mobile numbers user needs to click on save button for changes to take place.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SMS Settings.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select valid user number max. 5 and add authorized phone number in the main menu where want to find the alert and click on SMS Response Enable, save and update button, now send SMS commands from the configured mobile number. Once the commands are received from the user phone number the board send acknowledgement as per the commands after that it will send the router’s status once it has rebooted and is operational again. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mentioned below are a few commands which can be sent from the configured mobile number to the router device. Below two commands are One for rebooting the router device and another to get the uptime.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1) {&amp;quot;device&amp;quot;:[&amp;quot;passkey&amp;quot;,&amp;quot;API key&amp;quot;],&amp;quot;command&amp;quot;:&amp;quot;reboot&amp;quot;,&amp;quot;arguments&amp;quot;:&amp;quot;hardware&amp;quot;}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2) {&amp;quot;device&amp;quot;:[&amp;quot;passkey &amp;quot;,&amp;quot;API key&amp;quot;],&amp;quot;command&amp;quot;:&amp;quot;uptime&amp;quot;}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After configuring all the required information, the user should click on the save and then click on the update to update the all the required information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===2.2 SIM===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user needs to configure the Sim for the given device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SIM Switch.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user needs to select from the drop-down menu on which basis the sim needs to be switched.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Sim Switch Configuration.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user selects on “&#039;&#039;&#039;signal strength&#039;&#039;&#039;” then the parameters related to signal strength will pop up and the user needs to configure the parameters based on the requirement &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Signal Strength.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Threshold RSRP&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This Needs to be set appropriately. Incorrect setting may cause unnecessary SIM switching. ( In General a BAD RSRP value range is -140 to -115 and FAIR RSRP value range is -115 to -105).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Threshold SINR&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This Needs to be set appropriately. Incorrect setting may cause unnecessary SIM switching. ( In General a BAD SNR value range is -20 to 0 and FAIR SNR value range is 0 to 13)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user selects on “&#039;&#039;&#039;Data Limit&#039;&#039;&#039;” then the parameters related to Data Limit will pop up and the user needs to configure the parameters based on the requirement.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Data limit.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM Switch Based on&lt;br /&gt;
|Data Limit&lt;br /&gt;
|The user needs to select from the  drop-down menu on what basis the sim needs to be switched.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM 1 Data Usage Limit (In MB)&lt;br /&gt;
|1000&lt;br /&gt;
|The user needs to set the limit for the data  usage for SIM 1.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM 2 Data Usage Limit (In MB)&lt;br /&gt;
|1000&lt;br /&gt;
|The user needs to set the limit for the data  usage for SIM 2.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Periodicity&lt;br /&gt;
|Daily&lt;br /&gt;
|The user needs to set the pattern/frequency to  switch the sims.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Day Of Month&lt;br /&gt;
|16&lt;br /&gt;
|The user needs to set the day for switching the  sim.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
After configuring all the required information, the user should click on the save.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===2.3 Internet===&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user needs to configure the internet connection to set the priority from the various options. The user should decide what kind of connection it needs to provide to the device like LAN, WAN etc. Once the connections are configured then click on save option and then on update.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Internet.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the user needs to edit on the existing configuration, then the user should click on the “EDIT” button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Network Edit Options.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Name&lt;br /&gt;
|EWAN2&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the name of the WAN  connection&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Priority&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown box the user need to select  the priority.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Select Track IP Numbers&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user needs to select the  track number for the Ips.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|TrackIP1&lt;br /&gt;
|8.8.8.8&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text field the user needs to set the IP  address for the track 1&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|TrackIP2&lt;br /&gt;
|8.8.4.4&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text field the user needs to set the IP  address for the track 1&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Reliability&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Not sure what needs to be written&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|Count&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Not sure what needs to be written&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|Up&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Not sure what needs to be written&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|9&lt;br /&gt;
|Down&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Not sure what needs to be written&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user is done with modification click on the save button to save all the changes and then click on the update button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===2.4 VPN===&lt;br /&gt;
VPN stands for &#039;&#039;&#039;Virtual Private Network&#039;&#039;&#039;, it establishes a connection between the system and a remote server, which is owned by a VPN provider.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Creating a point-to-point tunnel that encrypts the personal data, masks the IP address, and allows to block the required website to blocks via firewalls on the internet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:VPN Settings RC44.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are 5 types of setting available under VPN configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* General Settings&lt;br /&gt;
* IPSEC&lt;br /&gt;
* Open VPN&lt;br /&gt;
* Wireguard&lt;br /&gt;
* Zerotier&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;General Settings&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user must choose which type of VPN connection is required for the device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user must select from IPSEC or Open VPN based on its requirement. If required, the user can select for both the options. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:VPN General Settings RC44.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user needs to click on the save after selecting the option based on its requirement.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;IPSEC&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
IPSEC VPN is used to create a VPN connection between local and remote networks. To use IPSEC VPN, the user should check that both local and remote routers support IPSEC VPN feature.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user can add/edit/delete the IPSEC VPN connection for the device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:VPN IPSEC changes RC44.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user needs to click on the update button once the required configuration is completed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In IPSEC the user needs to click on edit button to edit the configuration of an existing VPN connection.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:VPN Edit Options.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the save button after the required configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The tunnel will show established, showing the connection has been made.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:IPSEC .png|thumb|631x631px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|IPSEC&lt;br /&gt;
|Site to Site VPN&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user should select  the IPSEC connection type.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|IPSEC Role&lt;br /&gt;
|Client/Server&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown box the user needs to select  the IPSEC role.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Connection Type&lt;br /&gt;
|Tunnel&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user needs to select the connection  type. The user should select on the connection enable check box.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Connection mode&lt;br /&gt;
|start&lt;br /&gt;
|In this drop down list the user should select  the mode for the connection. it will have route/add/start/trap mode&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Remote Server IP&lt;br /&gt;
|1.1.1.1&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text field the user needs to set the IP  address for the remote server.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Local ID&lt;br /&gt;
|g300&lt;br /&gt;
|The user needs to set the local id.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|No. of local subnets&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user needs to select how  many subnets it will be connected.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|Local Subnet 1&lt;br /&gt;
|192.168.11.1/24&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user needs to put the  address of the local subnet.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|9&lt;br /&gt;
|Remote id&lt;br /&gt;
|sophos&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user needs to put the id  of the remote connection.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|10&lt;br /&gt;
|No of remote subnet&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user needs to select how  many subnets it will be connected remotely.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|11&lt;br /&gt;
|Remote subnet&lt;br /&gt;
|192.168.10.0/24&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user needs to put the  address of the remote subnet.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|12&lt;br /&gt;
|Key exchange&lt;br /&gt;
|Ikev1&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user should select the  which key exchange version to be selected.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|13&lt;br /&gt;
|Aggressive&lt;br /&gt;
|Yes/No&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user should select either  yes or no .&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|14&lt;br /&gt;
|IKE lifetime&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|Fill according to user’s requirements.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|15&lt;br /&gt;
|Lifetime in seconds&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Fill according to user’s requirements.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|16&lt;br /&gt;
|Enable DPD Detection&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;1&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
0&lt;br /&gt;
|Indicates  whether Dead Peer Detection is enabled to detect a lost connection. Enable  this option as per server-side settings.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|17&lt;br /&gt;
|Time Interval (In Seconds)&lt;br /&gt;
|60&lt;br /&gt;
|This option  is available only if DPD Detection is enabled. The time interval is the  interval for DPD checks.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|18&lt;br /&gt;
|Action&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Restart&#039;&#039;&#039;/clear/hold/&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
trap/start&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Restart&#039;&#039;&#039;: Action to take when  DPD detects a lost connection (restart the connection). Select as per  server-side setting.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|19&lt;br /&gt;
|Authentication Method&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;PSK&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;PSK&#039;&#039;&#039;: Pre-shared key is used  for authentication. Select this option for authentication as per sever side  setting.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|20&lt;br /&gt;
|Multiple Secrets&lt;br /&gt;
|1/&#039;&#039;&#039;0&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|Indicates  whether multiple PSK secrets are used. Enable only if required.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|21&lt;br /&gt;
|PSK Value&lt;br /&gt;
|******&lt;br /&gt;
|Pre-shared  key value (masked for security).&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;*Below are Phase I and Phase II settings details*&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&lt;br /&gt;
! colspan=&amp;quot;4&amp;quot; |                                                        &#039;&#039;&#039;Proposal settings Phase I&#039;&#039;&#039;                                                                                                                     &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|22            &lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Encryption Algorithm&#039;&#039;&#039;                                                 &lt;br /&gt;
|AES 128&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AES 192&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;AES 256&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3DES                                                                                                                                     &lt;br /&gt;
|                                                                                                                                     &#039;&#039;&#039;AES 256&#039;&#039;&#039;: Encryption algorithm  for Phase I. Select as per server-side configuration. Both server and client  should have same configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|23&lt;br /&gt;
|Authentication Phase I&lt;br /&gt;
|SHA1&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MD5&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SHA 256&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SHA 384&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;SHA 512&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;SHA 512&#039;&#039;&#039;: Authentication  algorithm for Phase I.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select as per  server-side configuration. Both server and client should have same configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|24&lt;br /&gt;
|DH Group&lt;br /&gt;
|MODP768(group1)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MODP1024(group2)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MODP1536(group5)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;MODP2048(group14)&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MODP3072(group15)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MODP4096(group16)&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;MODP2048 (group14)&#039;&#039;&#039;:  Diffie-Hellman group for key exchange.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select as per  server-side configuration. Both server and client should have same  configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| colspan=&amp;quot;4&amp;quot; |                                                                                                                                                                 &#039;&#039;&#039;Proposal settings Phase II&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|25&lt;br /&gt;
|Hash Algorithm&lt;br /&gt;
|AES 128&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AES 192&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;AES 256&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3DES&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;AES 256&#039;&#039;&#039;: Encryption algorithm  for Phase II. Select as per server-side configuration. Both server and client  should have same configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|26&lt;br /&gt;
|Authentication Phase II&lt;br /&gt;
|SHA1&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MD5&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SHA 256&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SHA 384&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;SHA 512&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;SHA 512&#039;&#039;&#039;: Authentication  algorithm for Phase II.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select as per  server-side configuration. Both server and client should have same  configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|27&lt;br /&gt;
|PFS Group&lt;br /&gt;
|MODP768(group1)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MODP1024(group2)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MODP1536(group5)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;MODP2048(group14)&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MODP3072(group15)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MODP4096(group16)&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;MODP2048 (group14)&#039;&#039;&#039;: Perfect  Forward Secrecy group.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select as per  server-side configuration. Both server and client should have same  configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Open VPN&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the OpenVPN connection, the home network can act as a server, and the remote device can access the server through the router which acts as an OpenVPN Server gateway. To use the VPN feature, the user should enable OpenVPN Server on the router, and install and run VPN client software on the remote device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Open VPN Settings RC44.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user needs to “upload” the respective certificate from a valid path and then click on the “Update.”&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the OpenVPN connection starts the user will get an option to enable/disable the VPN connection as and when required.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By clicking on the enable/disable button, the user can start/stop the VPN connection.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Open VPN Settings RC44 Dashboard.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
VPN has been established.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;WireGuard:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;WireGuard&#039;&#039;&#039; is simple, fast, lean, and modern VPN that utilizes secure and trusted cryptography.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on “Edit” to start configurations as needed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Wire Guard RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;EDIT:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Wire Guard RC44 Setttings.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the save button after the required configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample Value     &lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Wireguard Role&lt;br /&gt;
|Client/Server&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown box the user needs to select  the wireguard role.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Listen Port&lt;br /&gt;
|51820&lt;br /&gt;
|The UDP port on which the WireGuard client  listens for incoming connections.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|IP Addresses&lt;br /&gt;
|10.0.0.1/24&lt;br /&gt;
|The IP  address and subnet mask assigned to the WireGuard client&#039;s interface. This  address is used within the VPN.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Allowed PeerIPs&lt;br /&gt;
|10.1.1.1&lt;br /&gt;
|The IP  address of the allowed peer(s) that can connect to this WireGuard client.  This might need adjustment based on the actual peer IPs used in the network.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Endpoint HostIP&lt;br /&gt;
|10.1.1.1&lt;br /&gt;
|The IP  address of the WireGuard server (the endpoint to which the client connects).&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Endpoint HostPort&lt;br /&gt;
|51820&lt;br /&gt;
|The port on  the WireGuard server to which the client connects.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|PeerPublicKey&lt;br /&gt;
|*****&lt;br /&gt;
|The public  key of the peer (the server) the client is connecting to. This key is part of  the public-private key pair used in WireGuard for encryption and  authentication.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|Enable Preshared key&lt;br /&gt;
|Yes/No&lt;br /&gt;
|This option  indicates that a pre-shared key (PSK) is used in addition to the  public-private key pair for an extra layer of security.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|9&lt;br /&gt;
|Preshared key&lt;br /&gt;
|*****&lt;br /&gt;
|The actual  pre-shared key value shared between the client and the server. This option  appears only if you have enabled preshared key.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Zerotier:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ZeroTier is a tool that lets you create your own private network over the internet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Go to ZeroTier Central and sign up for a free account. In ZeroTier Central, click on &amp;quot;Create a Network&amp;quot;. This will generate a unique 16-digit network ID for your new network.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Go to settings =&amp;gt; VPN, in general settings, enable ZeroTier and save.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Zerotier Settings RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Copy and paste the unique 16-digit network ID in the edit section.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Zero Seetings Dashboard RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Zerotier Dashboard.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the save button after the required configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field Name    &lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  Value           &lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|NetworkID&lt;br /&gt;
|Ad2769hfkw2345f4&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown box the user needs to paste  the unique 16-digit network id.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Listen Port&lt;br /&gt;
|9993&lt;br /&gt;
|Default&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== 2.5 Firewall ===&lt;br /&gt;
A firewall is a layer of security between the network and the Internet. Since a router is the main connection from a network to the Internet, the firewall function is merged into this device. Every network should have a firewall to protect its privacy.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Firewall.png|frameless|635x635px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are 6 types of setting available under firewall.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* General Settings&lt;br /&gt;
* Port forwards&lt;br /&gt;
* Traffic Rules&lt;br /&gt;
* SNAT traffic Rules&lt;br /&gt;
* Parental Control&lt;br /&gt;
* Zone Forwarding&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;General Setting&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
General settings are subdivided into 2 parts,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1.) General settings&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In general settings, the settings that are made are default settings and can be changed according to user’s preference.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Firewall General Settings.png|frameless|622x622px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Specification details are below:&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;SN&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Field Name&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Sample Value&#039;&#039;&#039;      &lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Description&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Enable SYN-flood  protection&lt;br /&gt;
|Enabled&lt;br /&gt;
|This is  enabled by default; setting can be changed if required.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Disable IPV6&lt;br /&gt;
|Disabled&lt;br /&gt;
|This is  enabled by default; setting can be changed if required.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Drop invalid packets&lt;br /&gt;
|Disabled&lt;br /&gt;
|This is  enabled by default; setting can be changed if required.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|TCP SYN Cookies&lt;br /&gt;
|Disabled&lt;br /&gt;
|This is  enabled by default; setting can be changed if required.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Input&lt;br /&gt;
|Reject/Accept&lt;br /&gt;
|By  default, the setting is ‘Reject’ but this needs to be changed to ‘Accept’  compulsory.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Output&lt;br /&gt;
|Reject/Accept&lt;br /&gt;
|By  default, the setting is ‘Reject’ but this needs to be changed to ‘Accept’  compulsory.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|Forward&lt;br /&gt;
|Reject/Accept&lt;br /&gt;
|By  default, the setting is ‘Reject’ but this needs to be changed to ‘Accept’  compulsory.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2.) Zone settings&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In zone settings, there’s an option to add “New Zone”, according to user’s requirement.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Zone settings.png|thumb|628x628px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Port Forwards:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Port forwarding is a feature in a router or gateway that allows external devices to access services on a private network.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It maps an external port on the router to an internal IP address and port on the local network, enabling applications such as gaming servers, web servers, or remote desktop connections to be accessed from outside the network.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This helps in directing incoming traffic to the correct device within a local network based on the port number, enhancing connectivity and accessibility.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Firewall Port Forward.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;EDIT&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Firewall Edit Option RC44.png|frameless|622x622px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the save button after the required configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Name&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Web_Server_Forward&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|Field must  not be empty. Provide a name for the rule to easily identify it.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Protocol&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;TCP+UDP&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|Select the protocol  for the rule.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Options  typically include TCP+UDP, TCP, UDP, ICMP, Custom.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Source zone&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;SW_LAN&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|Select the  source zone where the traffic is originating from. Options typically include EWAN2,SW_LAN,CWAN1,CWAN1_0,CWAN1_1,VPN&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Source MAC address [optional]&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;any&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;any&#039;&#039;&#039;: Leave as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;any&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; if you don&#039;t want to specify a MAC address.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Source IP address[optional]&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: Leave blank if not needed.&lt;br /&gt;
|Optionally  specify an IP address or range.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Source port&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;80, 443&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;  (if matching traffic for web server ports)&lt;br /&gt;
|Specify the  source port or port range.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|Destination zone&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;SW_LAN&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|Select the  destination zone where the traffic is heading to.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|Destination IP address&lt;br /&gt;
|Leave blank if not needed.&lt;br /&gt;
|Optionally specify  the destination IP address or range.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|9&lt;br /&gt;
|Destination port&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;80&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;  (if redirecting to a web server port)&lt;br /&gt;
|Specify the  destination port or port range.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Traffic Rule:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;Traffic rules&amp;quot; refer to the policies and regulations that govern the flow of data packets within a network.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To allow new traffic, click on “Add and Edit” in “New Traffic Rule”.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Firewall Traffic Rule.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;EDIT&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Firewall Traffic Rule Edit.png|frameless|621x621px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Specification details are below:&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample Value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Name&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: Allow_HTTP_and_HTTPS&lt;br /&gt;
|Field must  not be empty: Provide a descriptive name for the traffic rule.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Restrict to Address Family&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|1.       Options:  IPv4, IPv6&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2.       Example:  IPv4 if dealing with typical internet traffic.&lt;br /&gt;
|Select the  address family to generate iptables rules for.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Protocol&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: TCP+UDP&lt;br /&gt;
|TCP+UDP:  Match incoming traffic using the given protocol.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Match ICMP Type&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: any&lt;br /&gt;
|Match all  ICMP types if set to any. Specific types can be chosen if needed.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Source Zone&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: LAN&lt;br /&gt;
|Specifies the  traffic source zone.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Enable DDoS Prevention&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: ‘Checked’ if you want to enable DDoS prevention  measures&lt;br /&gt;
|Enable or  disable Distributed Denial of Service (DDoS) prevention.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|Source MAC Address&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: any&lt;br /&gt;
|any: Match  traffic from any MAC address or specify a particular MAC address.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|Source Address&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: 192.168.1.0/24&lt;br /&gt;
|Match  incoming traffic from the specified source IP address or range.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|9&lt;br /&gt;
|Source Port&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: any if all source ports should be matched&lt;br /&gt;
|any: Match  incoming traffic from the specified source port or port range.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|10&lt;br /&gt;
|Destination Zone&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: WAN&lt;br /&gt;
|Specifies the  traffic destination zone.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|11&lt;br /&gt;
|Action&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: ACCEPT&lt;br /&gt;
|Options:  ACCEPT, DROP, REJECT. Specify the action to take for matched traffic.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|12&lt;br /&gt;
|Limit&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: 10/minute to limit matches to 10 times per  minute.&lt;br /&gt;
|Maximum  average matching rate; specified as a number, with an optional /second,  /minute, /hour, or /day suffix.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|13&lt;br /&gt;
|Extra arguments&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: --log-prefix &amp;quot;Blocked: &amp;quot; to add a log  prefix to log messages for this rule.&lt;br /&gt;
|Passes  additional arguments to iptables. Use with care as it can significantly alter  rule behaviour.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
Click on save once configured.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;SNAT Traffic Rule:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For configuring SNAT (Source Network Address Translation) traffic rules, you can control how outbound traffic from your local network is translated to a different IP address as it exits the network.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To add new source NAT,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on “ADD” in “New Source NAT:”&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SNAT Traffic Rule.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Edit&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SNAT Edit Options RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Specification details are below:&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Name&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: SNAT_WAN_to_LAN&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Field must  not be empty&#039;&#039;&#039;: Provide a unique and descriptive name for the SNAT rule.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Protocol&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: TCP+UDP&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;TCP+UDP&#039;&#039;&#039;:  Select the protocols that the SNAT rule will apply to.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Source Zone&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: wan&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;wan&#039;&#039;&#039;:  Specifies the source zone from which the traffic originates.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Source IP Address&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: any or a specific range like 192.168.1.0/24&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;-- please  choose --&#039;&#039;&#039;: Specify the source IP address or range. Leave empty if the  rule applies to any source IP.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Source Port&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: any&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;any&#039;&#039;&#039;:  Specify the source port or port range from which the traffic originates.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Destination Zone&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: lan&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;lan&#039;&#039;&#039;:  Specifies the destination zone to which the traffic is directed.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|Destination IP Address&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: any or a specific IP like 192.168.1.100&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;-- please  choose --&#039;&#039;&#039;: Specify the destination IP address or range. Leave empty if  the rule applies to any destination IP.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|Destination port&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: any&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;any&#039;&#039;&#039;:  Specify the destination port or port range to which the traffic is directed.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|9&lt;br /&gt;
|SNAT IP Address&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: 203.0.113.5 (an external IP address)&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;-- please  choose --&#039;&#039;&#039;: Specify the IP address to which the source IP should be  translated.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|10&lt;br /&gt;
|SNAT Port&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: Leave empty if not needed, or specify a port  like ‘12345’&lt;br /&gt;
|Optionally,  rewrite matched traffic to a specific source port. Leave empty to only  rewrite the IP address.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|11&lt;br /&gt;
|Extra Arguments&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: --log-prefix &amp;quot;SNAT_traffic: &amp;quot; (to add  a log prefix to log messages for this rule)&lt;br /&gt;
|Pass  additional arguments to iptables. Use with care as it can significantly alter  rule behaviour.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
Click on save once configured.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Parental Control:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For configuring parental control rules, you want to set restrictions based on time, source, and destination zones, as well as specific devices.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To add parental control in firewall,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on “Add and Edit” in “New parental control:” field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Parental Control.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Edit&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Parental Control Edit Options RC44.png|frameless|622x622px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Specification details are given below:&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  Name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  Value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Name&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  Parental_Control_Sunday&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Field must  not be empty&#039;&#039;&#039;: Provide a unique and descriptive name for the parental  control rule.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Proto&lt;br /&gt;
|all&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;all&#039;&#039;&#039;:  This specifies that the rule will apply to all protocols.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Source Zone&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: lan&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Field must  not be empty&#039;&#039;&#039;: Please look at Firewall-&amp;gt;Zone Settings to find zone  names.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Destination  Zone&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: wan&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Field must  not be empty&#039;&#039;&#039;: Please look at Firewall-&amp;gt;Zone Settings to find zone  names.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Source MAC  Address&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  00:1A:2B:3C:4D:5E&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Field&#039;&#039;&#039;:  Enter the MAC address of the device you want to apply the parental control  rule to. This is useful for restricting specific devices.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Target&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  Reject&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Accept&#039;&#039;&#039;:  This specifies the action to take. For parental controls, you might want to  use ‘Reject’ or ‘Drop’ to block traffic.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|Weekdays&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  Sunday&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Sunday&#039;&#039;&#039;:  Specify the days of the week when the rule should be active.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|Month Days&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: All&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;All:&#039;&#039;&#039; Specify  the days of the month when the rule should be active.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|9&lt;br /&gt;
|Start Time (hh:mm:ss)&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  18:00:00 (6:00 PM)&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Field must  not be empty:&#039;&#039;&#039; Specify the start time when the rule should begin to apply.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|10&lt;br /&gt;
|Stop Time  (hh:mm:ss)&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  22:00:00 (10:00 PM)&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Field must  not be empty:&#039;&#039;&#039; Specify the stop time when the rule should end.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
Click on save once configured.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Zone Forwarding:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Zone forwarding in network configuration allows traffic to be directed from one zone to another.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To ADD new zone,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on “Add” in “New Zone Forward:” field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Zone Forwarding RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;EDIT&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Zone Forwarding editing Options RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Specification details are below:&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  Name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  Value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Source Zone&lt;br /&gt;
|Example options: lan, wan, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;--please  choose--&#039;&#039;&#039;: Select the source zone from which the traffic originates.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Destination Zone&lt;br /&gt;
|Example options: lan, wan, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;--please  choose--&#039;&#039;&#039;: Select the destination zone to which the traffic is directed.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
Click on save once configured.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===2.6 Loopback Rule===&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user can configure the port where he want to forward the traffic to. Here the user can add/edit/delete different port ports as per the requirement. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Loopback Rule.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user should click on ‘add’ and then ‘edit’ to do the required changes in the port and enter the valid information in each section to configure the port for forwarding.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Loopback Rule edit.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Specification details are given below:&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  Name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  Value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Name&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: loopback&lt;br /&gt;
|Provide a  descriptive name for the rule.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Protocol&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: TCP+UDP&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;TCP+UDP&#039;&#039;&#039;:  Select the protocols that the rule will apply to.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Source IP Address [Optional]&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: any or a specific IP range like 192.168.1.0/24&lt;br /&gt;
|Optionally  specify the source IP address or range. Leave empty if the rule should apply  to any source IP.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Source Port [Optional]&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: any&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;any&#039;&#039;&#039;:  Specify the source port or port range from which the traffic originates. any  allows traffic from all ports.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Loopback IP Address&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: 127.0.0.1&lt;br /&gt;
|Specify the  loopback IP address. Typically, this is 127.0.0.1.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Port&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: any&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;any&#039;&#039;&#039;:  Specify the destination port or port range to which the traffic is directed.  any allows traffic to all ports.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|Action&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: DNAT&lt;br /&gt;
|This  specifies the action to take either DNAT or SNAT.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|Internal IP Address&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: 192.168.1.100&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Field must  not be empty&#039;&#039;&#039;: Specify the internal IP address to which the traffic should  be redirected.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|9&lt;br /&gt;
|Internal Port&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: any&lt;br /&gt;
|Redirect  matched incoming traffic to the given port on the internal host.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user is done with the required configurations, user should click save button and then click on the update to save the changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===2.7 Remote Monitoring===&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user can select which equipment needs to be monitored remotely.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user selects the type of RMS click on save.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Remote Monitoring.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;NMS:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user should type the server IP or domain name in the URL then click on save.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on upload and start (Once key is uploaded and this option is clicked, NMS automatically starts, and this router device gets registered with the NMS server provided).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:NMS.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;TR069&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To enable the TR069 the user needs to click on the enable check box.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:TR069.png|frameless|582x582px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user clicks on the check box of enable it will display all the required filed to configured.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Remote Monitoring Tr-069.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Specification details are given below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field Name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample Value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Serving  Interval&lt;br /&gt;
|300&lt;br /&gt;
|A value of 300 seconds means the device  will check in with the ACS (auto-configuration servers) every 5 minutes.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Interface&lt;br /&gt;
|This can  be something like eth0 or wan.&lt;br /&gt;
|This specifies the network interface  used for TR-069 communication.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Username&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: User&lt;br /&gt;
|The username used to authenticate with  the ACS.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Password&lt;br /&gt;
|••••&lt;br /&gt;
|The password used to authenticate with  the ACS.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|URL&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;http://example.com&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|The URL of the ACS. This is where the  CPE (customer-premises equipment) will send its requests and where it will  receive configurations and updates from.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
The user should fill all the required fields and click on the save button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===2.8 Tunnel===&lt;br /&gt;
Tunnels are a method of transporting data across a network using protocols which are not supported by that network.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is further categorised into 3 sections,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1.) General Settings&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2.) GRE Tunnel&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3.) IPIP Tunnel&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tunnel Settings.png|frameless|621x621px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;General Settings&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user needs to select under which type of tunnel it needs to send the data.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tunnel General Settings.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user selects the type of tunnel then click in the save button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;GRE Tunnel:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A GRE (Generic Routing Encapsulation) tunnel configuration involves setting up a virtual point-to-point connection between two endpoints over an IP network.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here the user can add/edit/delete the details of the tunnel.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:GRE Tunnel 1.png|thumb|633x633px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the required update is done then click on update to save the changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;EDIT:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:GRE Tunnel.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Specification details are given below:&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field Name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample Value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Tunnel  name&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  GRETunnel&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;GRETunnel&#039;&#039;&#039;: The name of the GRE tunnel.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Local  external IP&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  10.1.1.66&lt;br /&gt;
|The IP address of the local endpoint  that will initiate the GRE tunnel.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Remote external  IP&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  10.1.1.40&lt;br /&gt;
|The IP address of the remote endpoint  that will terminate the GRE tunnel.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Peer  tunnel IP&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  10.1.1.4&lt;br /&gt;
|The IP address of the peer&#039;s tunnel  interface.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Local  tunnel IP&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  10.1.1.6&lt;br /&gt;
|The IP address of the local tunnel  interface.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Local  tunnel net mask&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  255.255.255.0&lt;br /&gt;
|The subnet mask of the local tunnel  interface.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|Remote IP&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  192.168.10.0/24&lt;br /&gt;
|The remote network that is reachable  through the GRE tunnel.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|Enable  Tunnel Link&lt;br /&gt;
|Check to  enable&lt;br /&gt;
|Enable or disable the GRE tunnel link.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|9&lt;br /&gt;
|Interface  type&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  EWAN2&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;EWAN2&#039;&#039;&#039;: The  type of network interface used for the GRE tunnel.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|10&lt;br /&gt;
|MTU&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  1476&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;1476&#039;&#039;&#039;: Maximum  Transmission Unit size for the GRE tunnel.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|11&lt;br /&gt;
|TTL&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  64&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;64&#039;&#039;&#039;: Time To  Live value for the packets within the GRE tunnel.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|12&lt;br /&gt;
|Tunnel  key&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  12345678&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;12345678&#039;&#039;&#039;: A unique key used to identify the GRE tunnel.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|13&lt;br /&gt;
|Enable  keep alive&lt;br /&gt;
|Check to  enable&lt;br /&gt;
|Enable or disable the keep-alive  feature to monitor the tunnel&#039;s status.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|14&lt;br /&gt;
|Keep  alive interval&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  10&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;10&#039;&#039;&#039;:  Interval in seconds for the keep-alive packets.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
Once the required update is done then click on update to save the changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;IPIP Tunnel:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An IPIP (IP-in-IP) tunnel is a simple tunneling protocol used to encapsulate IP packets within IP packets. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is similar to GRE but without additional features such as keying and type fields.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here the user can add/edit/delete the details of the tunnel.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:IPIP Tunnel1.png|thumb|635x635px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;EDIT:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:IPIP Edit.png|thumb|637x637px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Specification details are given below:&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field Name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample Value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Tunnel  name&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  IPIPTunnel&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;IPIPTunnel:&#039;&#039;&#039; The name of the IPIP tunnel.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Local external  IP&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  10.1.1.66&lt;br /&gt;
|The IP address of the local endpoint  that will initiate the IPIP tunnel.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Remote  external IP&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  10.1.1.40&lt;br /&gt;
|The IP address of the remote endpoint  that will terminate the IPIP tunnel.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Peer  tunnel IP&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: 10.1.1.4&lt;br /&gt;
|The IP address of the peer&#039;s tunnel  interface.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Local  tunnel IP&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  10.1.1.6&lt;br /&gt;
|The IP address of the local tunnel  interface.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Local  tunnel net mask&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  255.255.255.0&lt;br /&gt;
|The subnet mask of the local tunnel  interface.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|Remote IP&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  192.168.10.0/24&lt;br /&gt;
|The remote network that is reachable  through the IPIP tunnel.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|Enable  Tunnel Link&lt;br /&gt;
|Check to  enable&lt;br /&gt;
|Enable or disable the IPIP tunnel link.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|9&lt;br /&gt;
|Interface  type&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  EWAN2&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;EWAN2&#039;&#039;&#039;: The  type of network interface used for the IPIP tunnel.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|10&lt;br /&gt;
|MTU&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  1476&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;1476&#039;&#039;&#039;: Maximum  Transmission Unit size for the IPIP tunnel.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|11&lt;br /&gt;
|TTL&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  64&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;64&#039;&#039;&#039;: Time To  Live value for the packets within the IPIP tunnel.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|12&lt;br /&gt;
|Tunnel  key&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  12345678&lt;br /&gt;
|Although typically not used in IPIP,  this field might be included for compatibility with certain configurations.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|13&lt;br /&gt;
|Enable  keep alive&lt;br /&gt;
|Check to  enable&lt;br /&gt;
|Enable or disable the keep-alive  feature to monitor the tunnel&#039;s status.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|14&lt;br /&gt;
|Keep  alive interval&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  10&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;10&#039;&#039;&#039;:  Interval in seconds for the keep-alive packets.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
Once the required update is done then click on update to save the changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==3 Maintenance==&lt;br /&gt;
In this module the user can configure/upgrade/modify the settings related to system, password, firmware and monitoring.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It includes below submodules.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
·      General&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
·      Password&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
·      Reboot&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
·      Import and Export config&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
·      Firmware upgrade&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
·      Monitor Application&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Maintenance.png|thumb|631x631px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== 3.1 General/ System ===&lt;br /&gt;
Here you can configure the basic aspects of router like its hostname or the timezone.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is further sub-divided into,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1.) General Settings&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2.) Logging&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3.) Language and Style&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;General Settings:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Maintenance General.png|frameless|619x619px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;EDIT:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field Name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample Value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Local Time&lt;br /&gt;
|2024/07/30  13:25:47&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|The current local date and time set on  the device.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Hostname&lt;br /&gt;
|22B25240007&lt;br /&gt;
|The hostname of the device, which is  used to identify it on the network.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Timezone&lt;br /&gt;
|Asia/Kolkata&lt;br /&gt;
|The timezone setting of the device,  which determines the local time.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user configures the required details then click on the save button to save all the details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Logging:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here the user can configure the basic aspects of your device related to system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The system log configuration provided specifies how the device handles and stores log information, including buffer size, external log server details, and log detail levels.[[File:Maintenance logging.png|frameless|608x608px]]&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field Name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample Value            &lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|System  log buffer size&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  32 kiB&lt;br /&gt;
|The size of the memory buffer allocated  (0-32) for storing system logs before they are either written to a file or  sent to an external server.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|External  system log server&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  0.0.0.0&lt;br /&gt;
|The IP address of an external server  where logs can be sent.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|External  system log server port&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  514&lt;br /&gt;
|The port used to send logs to the  external log server. Port 514 is the default port for syslog.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Log  output level&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  Debug&lt;br /&gt;
|Sets the detail level of the system  logs.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Cron Log  level&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  Debug&lt;br /&gt;
|The detail level of the logs for cron  jobs.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user configures the required details then click on the save button to save all the details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Language and Style&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here the user can configure the basic aspects of your device related to language.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Maintenance Language and Style.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user configures the required details then click on the save button to save all the details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===3.2 Password===&lt;br /&gt;
In this module the user can set the password for the admin credentials.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Change you password.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Specifies the password for the guest account. If the user enter a plaintext password here, it will get replaced with a crypted password on save. The new password will be effective once the user logs out and log in again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user needs to write the password in the text box and click on the save button to save the password.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===3.3 Reboot===&lt;br /&gt;
In this module the user can reboot the device remotely.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Reboot.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To start the reboot process first the user needs to fill all the required fields.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Need to select the type of reboot for the device whether it needs to be Hardware or Software reboot.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Maintenance Reboot.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Type&lt;br /&gt;
|Maintenance Reboot&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown list the user needs to  select the type of reboot is required to configure.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Reboot Type&lt;br /&gt;
|Hardware&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown list the user needs to select  the hardware or software reboot is required.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Minutes&lt;br /&gt;
|59&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user needs to configure  the min to start the reboot activity&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Hours&lt;br /&gt;
|22&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user needs to configure  the hours to start the reboot activity&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Day of Month&lt;br /&gt;
|All&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user needs to configure  the day of the month to start the reboot activity&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Month&lt;br /&gt;
|All&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user needs to configure  the month to start the reboot activity&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|Day of the week&lt;br /&gt;
|All&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user needs to configure  the week to start the reboot activity&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user fills all the required given parameters click on the save.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To start the reboot process, click on the “Reboot Now” button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===3.4 Import and Export===&lt;br /&gt;
In this section, User can Import &amp;amp; Export Configuration files of the Device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Import and Export.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
click “Export Config” to export device configuration &amp;amp; settings to a text file,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
click “Import Config” to import device configuration &amp;amp; settings from a previously exported text file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Import window.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user need to select on the choose file to and click on the apply.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===3.5 Firmware Upgrade===&lt;br /&gt;
The user can upgrade with the latest software for the existing firmware. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Frimware Upgrade.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the &#039;&#039;&#039;flash image&#039;&#039;&#039; and chose the path where the sys-upgrade file is kept and then click on flash image, it will upgrade to the latest software once the reboot is done.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Flash Image.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the &#039;&#039;&#039;Retain Config and flash&#039;&#039;&#039; and chose the path where the sys-upgrade file is kept and then click on Retain Config and flash, it will upgrade to the latest software once the reboot is done.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Flash Image.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the &#039;&#039;&#039;Factory Reset&#039;&#039;&#039; for the complete retest of the device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===3.6 Monitor Application===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Monitor Application.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Router Application Remote Configuration.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Router Remote Configuration.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==4 Status==&lt;br /&gt;
In this module the user can view the status of the router device with respect to the network, Wan, modem etc.[[File:Status.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It has 4 submodules.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Interfaces&lt;br /&gt;
* Internet&lt;br /&gt;
* Modem&lt;br /&gt;
* Route&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===4.1 Interfaces===&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user can see the traffic status for all the network through which the device works.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Status Interfaces.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Looking on the network status the user can check if the cellular or the ethernet is up.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===4.2 Internet===&lt;br /&gt;
In this submodule the user can view the status of the internet connections.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Internet Status.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
  To see the latest status of the internet connection the user needs to click on the refresh button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===4.3 Modem===&lt;br /&gt;
In this sub module the user will get to know the status of the cellular interface which is installed inside the modem. The user can view all the details related to the sim in terms of Operator, Network technology, Mobile country code, Upload bandwidth, Download Bandwidth, Frequency band, RSRP, RSRQ, RSSI &amp;amp; SNR under this page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Modem Status.png|frameless|602x602px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== 4.4 Route ===&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user can check the status of the route for the device. The ARP status can be visible in under this page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Route Status.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==5 Features==&lt;br /&gt;
In this module the user can see all the features that the router device has.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This module includes the below features.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Mac Address Binding&lt;br /&gt;
* URL Filtering&lt;br /&gt;
* Web Server&lt;br /&gt;
* Wi-Fi MacID Filtering&lt;br /&gt;
* Routing&lt;br /&gt;
* Others&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Features.png|frameless|618x618px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===5.1 Mac Address Binding===&lt;br /&gt;
Under this submodule the user can configure/update/edit the IP Address for MAC&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mac Addressing Binding.png|frameless|622x622px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user should write MAC address and then click on the add button. Once the address is added then click on the update button to save the modification.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user needs to click on the Edit button to modify the preexisting configuration. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mac Address Edit.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user modifies the MAC address /IP Address then click on the save button to save the changes done.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user can click on the deleted button to delete an existing configured device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Post all the changes the user needs to click on the update to reflect all the changes in the application.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===5.2 URL Filtering===&lt;br /&gt;
In this submodule the user should provide the URL which needs to be blocked for the device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:URL Filtering.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To add the new URL for blocking, click on the Add New button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user clicks on the Add New button a new pop will appear in that page write the URL and click on the save. The user can select the status of that URL while defining the URL.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Url Update.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To edit / delete the existing URL the user needs to click on the edit /deleted button respectively.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Edit or Delete URL.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the save after the changes are done as per the need.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== 5.3 Web Server ===&lt;br /&gt;
In this submodule the user can configure webserver related parameters.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Web server.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To configure the HTTP, click on the enable HTTP. Once the user clicks on the check box the HTTP Port text box will appear where the user needs to configure the port id.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Webserver Configuration.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on save buttons to save the changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To configure the 2nd HTTP, click on the enable HTTP. Once the user clicks on the check box the HTTP Port text box will appear where the user needs to configure the port id.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Webserver Https Redirect.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on save buttons to save the changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the “Redirect https” and “RFC1918 Filter” check box to respectively and click on the save button to save the changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To configure the NTP sync, click on the enable NTP sync. Once the user clicks on the check box the respective text boxes will appear to configure the parameters. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:RFC1918 Filter.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user configures the parameters click on the save button to save the given values.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===5.4 Wi-Fi MacID Filtering===&lt;br /&gt;
In this module the user can filter the Macids. Mac address filtering allows users to block traffic coming from certain known machines or devices.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Wi-Fi MacID Filtering.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Before adding the MacIDs the user needs to select the mode from the dropdown menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To Add the MacID the user needs to click on Add New option select the mac id and network name Wi-Fi 2.4G AP OR Wi-Fi 2.4G AP Guest, select enable/disable option and save it and update.              &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Configuring MacID and Network Name.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the required MACID and Network Name is configured the user needs to click on the save button to add the details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user needs to click on the edit button to do modifications on the pre-existing configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Macid and name removing.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the required MACID / Network Name is modified the user needs to click on the save button to reflect the changed value in the application.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;WIFI 2.4G AP Guest&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To Add the MacID the user needs to click on Add New option select the mac id and network name Wi-Fi 2.4G AP Guest, select enable/disable option and save it and update.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
     [[File:WIFI 2.4G AP Guest.png|frameless|623x623px]]  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the required MACID and Network Name is configured the user needs to click on the save button to add the details. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user needs to click on the edit button to do modifications on the pre-existing configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Configuring MacID and Network Name.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the required MACID / Network Name is modified the user needs to click on the save button to reflect the changed value in the application.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===5.5 Routing===&lt;br /&gt;
In this submodule the user can configure the parameters related to routing of the device. like Target address, Networks address etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Routing IPV4 Routes.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To add a new device the user needs to fill all the required information and click on the add button.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Interface&lt;br /&gt;
|eth0.1&lt;br /&gt;
|In this drop down list the user should  configure the interface name.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Target&lt;br /&gt;
|192.168.10.1&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user needs to insert the  target IP address&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|IPV4 Netmask&lt;br /&gt;
|255.255.255.0&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user should give the  address for the IPV4Netmask&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Metric&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user should insert the  number of the metric.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|IPV4 Gateway&lt;br /&gt;
|192.168.100.1&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user should configured the  address for the IPV4 Gateway.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Route Type&lt;br /&gt;
|Unicast&lt;br /&gt;
|In this drop down box the user should select  the type of route needed for the device.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
To edit the existing device the user needs to click on the edit option.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Routing Configuration.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the changes are done click on the save button to save all the changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the deleted button to delete the existing device detail.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Advanced Static IPV4 Routes:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Advanced Static IPV4 Routes.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To add a new device the user needs to fill all the required information and click on the add button.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Interface&lt;br /&gt;
|eth0.1&lt;br /&gt;
|In this drop down list the user should  configure the interface name.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|To&lt;br /&gt;
|192.168.10.1&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user needs to insert the  target IP address&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|IPV4 Netmask&lt;br /&gt;
|255.255.255.0&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user should give the  address for the IPV4Netmask&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Table&lt;br /&gt;
|local&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|From&lt;br /&gt;
|192.168.100.1&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user should configured the  from address for the routes&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Priority&lt;br /&gt;
|230&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
To edit the existing device the user needs to click on the edit option.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Routing Editing.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the changes are done click on the save button to save all the changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the deleted button to delete the existing device detail.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once all the configurations are done click on the update button to reflect the changes made.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===5.6 Others===&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user will get to do all the other miscellaneous configuration with respect to the device based on the required parameters.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Miscellaneous configuration.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Utility&lt;br /&gt;
|Action&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Set Date&lt;br /&gt;
|SET&lt;br /&gt;
|Need to set the date and time and after  click command get the Date and time&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Gate Date&lt;br /&gt;
|GET&lt;br /&gt;
|Needs to get the system date and time&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|IPsec status all&lt;br /&gt;
|GET&lt;br /&gt;
|Needs to get the IPsec details&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Wi-Fi Scan&lt;br /&gt;
|GET&lt;br /&gt;
|Needs to get the Wi-Fi status&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|ipref3 client&lt;br /&gt;
|RUN&lt;br /&gt;
|Needs to click on the RUN to execute  the command&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|ipref3 server&lt;br /&gt;
|RUN&lt;br /&gt;
|Needs to click on the RUN to execute  the command&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|Ping&lt;br /&gt;
|PING&lt;br /&gt;
|Needs to click on the ping status&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|9&lt;br /&gt;
|Traceroute&lt;br /&gt;
|RUN&lt;br /&gt;
|Needs to click on the ping Traceroute status&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|10&lt;br /&gt;
|NTP Sync&lt;br /&gt;
|SYNC&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to Sync the NTP&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|11&lt;br /&gt;
|Download Files&lt;br /&gt;
|DOWNLOAD&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to Download the files /Database&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|12&lt;br /&gt;
|Restart Power&lt;br /&gt;
|RESTART&lt;br /&gt;
|Click Restart the power&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|13&lt;br /&gt;
|Restart Modem&lt;br /&gt;
|RESTART&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to Restart the modem&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|14&lt;br /&gt;
|Run at command&lt;br /&gt;
|RUN&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to Run the command&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|15&lt;br /&gt;
|Show board configuration&lt;br /&gt;
|SHOW&lt;br /&gt;
|To Show the board configuration&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|16&lt;br /&gt;
|Show VPN Certificate Name&lt;br /&gt;
|SHOW&lt;br /&gt;
|To Show VPN Certificate Name&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|17&lt;br /&gt;
|Switch SIM to Secondary&lt;br /&gt;
|RUN&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to switch the SIM to secondary  mode&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|18&lt;br /&gt;
|Send Test SMS&lt;br /&gt;
|SEND&lt;br /&gt;
|To Send the SMS Confirmation&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|19&lt;br /&gt;
|Readlatest SMS&lt;br /&gt;
|READ&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to Read the latest SMS&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|20&lt;br /&gt;
|Data Usage&lt;br /&gt;
|SHOW&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to show the data usage.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|21&lt;br /&gt;
|Monthly Data Usage&lt;br /&gt;
|SHOW&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to show the monthly data usage&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|22&lt;br /&gt;
|Modem debug Info&lt;br /&gt;
|READ&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to read the information about the  modem debug&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|23&lt;br /&gt;
|Scan Network operators (take&amp;gt;3mins)&lt;br /&gt;
|SHOW&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to show the Network operator&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|24&lt;br /&gt;
|Network operators (first perform scan  network operator&lt;br /&gt;
|SHOW&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to show the Network operator&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|25&lt;br /&gt;
|ReadLogFiles&lt;br /&gt;
|READ&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to read the log files&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|26&lt;br /&gt;
|Enable ssh&lt;br /&gt;
|RUN&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to Run the command&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|27&lt;br /&gt;
|Disable ssh&lt;br /&gt;
|RUN&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to Run the command&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|28&lt;br /&gt;
|Clear SIM1 Data&lt;br /&gt;
|CLEAR&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to clear the SIM1 data&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|29&lt;br /&gt;
|Clear SIM2 Data&lt;br /&gt;
|CLEAR&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to clear the SIM data&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==6 Logout==&lt;br /&gt;
The user should click on log out option to logged out from the router application.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Logout.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user needs to click on the ok to come out of the router application.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tanisha</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.silbonetworks.com/index.php?title=File:Maintenance.png&amp;diff=1188</id>
		<title>File:Maintenance.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.silbonetworks.com/index.php?title=File:Maintenance.png&amp;diff=1188"/>
		<updated>2024-09-03T05:25:15Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tanisha: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Maintenance&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tanisha</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.silbonetworks.com/index.php?title=RC44_User_Manual&amp;diff=1187</id>
		<title>RC44 User Manual</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.silbonetworks.com/index.php?title=RC44_User_Manual&amp;diff=1187"/>
		<updated>2024-09-03T05:22:23Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tanisha: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;This page contains the user manual for RC44.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Connecting with the device to the System (Laptop/Desktop).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To log in to SILBO_RC44 by connecting the router to your laptop or desktop via LAN or using Wi-Fi, please follow the steps below. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Connecting via LAN:&#039;&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Connect your laptop&#039;s LAN port to one of the router&#039;s LAN interfaces. Ensure that you select any LAN interface (there are two available) while making sure the WAN interface is not used. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
                                                                                                                                                          &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;How to connect with the SILBO_RC44&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;application&#039;&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the LAN connection is established between the device and the laptop or the desktop&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please open the command prompt and ping go get the ip config of that device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Type the command &#039;&#039;&#039;Ipconfig&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:How_to_connect_with_the_SILBO_RB44_application.png|alt=How to connect with the SILBO RB44 application|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It will provide the Ip address/url of that device through which the application can be accessed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Connecting_via_LAN_RB44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Log In==&lt;br /&gt;
Open the web browser and type the IP address in the URL.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It will show the log in page of the application.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Log In.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Give the valid credentials for the username and password to login to the application page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user credentials are provided it will direct to the landing page of the application.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Login Dashboard RC44.png|frameless|636x636px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The “Status” landing page shows all the detailed specification of the device like system, memory storage and connection tracking etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The application is divided in to 6 Modules.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Info&lt;br /&gt;
* Settings&lt;br /&gt;
* Maintenance&lt;br /&gt;
* Status&lt;br /&gt;
* Features&lt;br /&gt;
* Logout&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==1.Info==&lt;br /&gt;
The “Info” module provides the information about the devices to the user.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It provides all the specification related to the hardware, firmware, Networks and the Connection uptimes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It has 3 submodules.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Overview&lt;br /&gt;
* System Log&lt;br /&gt;
* Kernel Log&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Info dashboard RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===1.1 Overview===&lt;br /&gt;
In overview module it displays all the specification categorically of a device like System, Memory, storage, Connection tracking, DHCP Lease.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Login Dashboard RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;System&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this section it displays the hardware configured specification of the device.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Info system RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The specifications details are as follows,&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&lt;br /&gt;
!SN&lt;br /&gt;
!Field name &lt;br /&gt;
!Sample value&lt;br /&gt;
!Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Hostname&lt;br /&gt;
|22B09230239&lt;br /&gt;
|This field  displays the router serial number of the device&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Model&lt;br /&gt;
|Silbo_RC44- EC200A&lt;br /&gt;
|This field  displays the model number of the device&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Firmware Version and IPK Version&lt;br /&gt;
|1.16_1.13_RC3&lt;br /&gt;
|This field  displays the firmware version and IPK version&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Kernel Version&lt;br /&gt;
|4.14.180&lt;br /&gt;
|This field  displays the kernel version of the device&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Local Time&lt;br /&gt;
|Monday, July 1, 2024, at 05:43:58 PM&lt;br /&gt;
|This field  displays the local time&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Uptime&lt;br /&gt;
|0h 7m 29s&lt;br /&gt;
|This field  displays the uptime of the device&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|Load Average&lt;br /&gt;
|1.73 1.87 1.04&lt;br /&gt;
|This field  displays the average load&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Memory&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this section it displays the memory configured specification of the device.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Memory Dashboard RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The specifications details are as follows.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Total Available&lt;br /&gt;
|68676 kB / 124208 kB (55%)&lt;br /&gt;
|This field  displays the total availability of memory space in the device&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Free&lt;br /&gt;
|59344 kB / 124208 kB (47%)&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the  Free memory space in the device&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Cached&lt;br /&gt;
|312 kB / 124208 kB (0%)&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the  Cached memory space in the device&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Buffered&lt;br /&gt;
|9332 kB / 124208 kB (7%)&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the  Buffered memory space in the device&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Storage&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this section it displays the status of storage as root and temporary usage specification of the device.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Storage Dashboard RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The specifications details are as follows.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Root Usage&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
796 kB / 15488 kB (5%)&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays  the total root usage of the device&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Temporary  Usage&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
312 kB / 62104 kB (0%)&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the total temporary  usage of the device&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Connection Tracking&#039;&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this section it displays the status of connection tracking for the device.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Connection Tracking RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The specifications details are as follows.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Active Connection&lt;br /&gt;
|48 / 16384 (0%)&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the active connection of the device.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;DHCP Leases&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this section, it displays the DHCP lease of the temporary assignment of an IP address to a device on the network.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:DCHP Leases RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The specifications details are as follows.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Host Name&lt;br /&gt;
|KermaniK-LT&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays  the configured Host Name/User Name for that device.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|IPv4-Address&lt;br /&gt;
|192.168.10.147&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the IP  address of the device.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|MAC-Address&lt;br /&gt;
|34:73:5a:bb: ab:7a&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the MAC-Address  of the device.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Lease time remaining&lt;br /&gt;
|11h 53m 49s&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the lease  time remaining for the device.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===1.2 System Log===&lt;br /&gt;
This page provides on screen System logging information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user gets to view the system logs &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:System Log.png|frameless|617x617px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===1.3 Kernel Log===&lt;br /&gt;
This page provides on-screen Kernel logging information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this page, the user gets to view the Kernel logs&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Kernel Log.png|frameless|621x621px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==2. Setting==&lt;br /&gt;
In this “Setting” module the user can Configure/update all the required parameters related to Network, SIM Switch, Internet, VPN, Firewall, Loopback Rule, Remote monitoring, Tunnel as per requirement.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
IT consist of 8 submodules.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Network&lt;br /&gt;
* Sim Switch&lt;br /&gt;
* Internet&lt;br /&gt;
* VPN&lt;br /&gt;
* Firewall&lt;br /&gt;
* Loopback Rule&lt;br /&gt;
* Remote Monitoring&lt;br /&gt;
* Tunnel&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Settings.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===2.1 Network===&lt;br /&gt;
In this section the user does all the setting related configuration with reference to network like Ethernet Setting, Cellular Setting, Band lock and Operator Lock, Wi-Fi, Guest Wi-Fi, Wireless Schedule, SMS Setting, Loopback IP.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Network Dashboard RC44.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Ethernet Setting&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this page it will display all the configured port that is attached with the device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For this device 3 ports are configured. Ethernet mode can be configured as WAN and as LAN as well. Ethernet LAN Connection settings can be configured as DHCP server or Static.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Ethernet Settings RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;For port 3 setting&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Kindly select the option &#039;&#039;&#039;LAN4&#039;&#039;&#039; for &#039;&#039;&#039;Port 3 mode LAN/WAN&#039;&#039;&#039;. Based on the option selected the filed will also changes the user needs to configure all the required field and click on the save to save the required fields.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Ethernet Settings RC44 part 2.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Port 3 mode LAN/WAN&lt;br /&gt;
|LAN&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the port mode selection&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Port 3 Ethernet Protocol [LAN Eth0.1]&lt;br /&gt;
|DHCP Server&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the Ethernet mode selection&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Port 3 DHCP Server IP&lt;br /&gt;
|192.168.10.1&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays DHCP server IP configured.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Port 3 DHCP Netmask&lt;br /&gt;
|255.255.255.0&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays DHCP server Netmask address configured&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Port 3 DHCP Start Address&lt;br /&gt;
|100&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays DHCP server  start address configured&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Port 3 DHCP Limit&lt;br /&gt;
|50&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays DHCP server  limit&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Kindly select the option &#039;&#039;&#039;EWAN&#039;&#039;&#039; for &#039;&#039;&#039;Port 3 mode LAN/WAN&#039;&#039;&#039;. Based on the option selected the filed will also changes the user needs to configure all the required field and click on the save to save the required fields.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:EWAN Port 3 Configuration RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Port 3 mode LAN/WAN&lt;br /&gt;
|EWAN&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the port mode selection&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Ethernet Protocol Port 3 WAN&lt;br /&gt;
|DHCP  client&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the client&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Gateway&lt;br /&gt;
|192.168.1.1&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays gateway address  configured&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the save once all the configuration is done and click on the update button to update all the information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;SW_LAN settings&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this part the user can configure the setting for SW_LAN &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SW LAN settings RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|SW_LAN Ethernet Protocol&lt;br /&gt;
|DHCP  Server&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the  Ethernet mode selection&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|SW_LAN DHCP Server IP&lt;br /&gt;
|192.168.10.1&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays DHCP server IP  configured.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|SW_LAN  DHCP Netmask&lt;br /&gt;
|255.255.255.0&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays DHCP server  Netmask address configured&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|SW_LAN  DHCP Start Address&lt;br /&gt;
|100&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays DHCP server  start address configured&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|SW_LAN  DHCP Limit&lt;br /&gt;
|50&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays DHCP server  limit&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|DNS  Server&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|This filed display number of DSN  server availability&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|DNS  Server Address&lt;br /&gt;
|8.8.8.8&lt;br /&gt;
|This  filed display the DSN server address.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After configuring all the required information, the user should click on the save and then click on the update to update the all the required information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Static option for SW_LAN Ethernet Protocol&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the option of static from the drop-down menu for SW_LAN Ethernet Protocol.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SW LAN settings Static Ethernet Protocol.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|SW_LAN Ethernet Protocol&lt;br /&gt;
|Static&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the  Ethernet mode selection&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|SW_LAN static IP&lt;br /&gt;
|192.168.5.1&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays static server IP  configured.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|SW_LAN  Netmask&lt;br /&gt;
|255.255.255.0&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays static server  Netmask address configured&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|DNS  Server&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|This filed display number of DSN  server availability&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|DSN  Server Address&lt;br /&gt;
|8.8.8.8&lt;br /&gt;
|This  filed display the DSN server address.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
After configuring all the required information, the user should click on the save and then click on the update to update the all the required information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Cellular Setting&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this page, the user needs to configure the various details with respect to the SIM.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
select single cellular single sim where the user must configure the APN details of the sim used for the router device. The Configurations can be done based on the SIM usage, with respect to IPV4 or IPV.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Cellular Settings RC44.png|frameless|619x619px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Cellular  Operation Mode&lt;br /&gt;
|Single Cellular with Dual Sim&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays  the cellular operation mode.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Cellular  Modem 1&lt;br /&gt;
|QuectelEC200A&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the modem name.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Network  Mode&lt;br /&gt;
|Automatic&lt;br /&gt;
|This  field displays the  Network mode selection&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM 1  Access Point Name&lt;br /&gt;
|airtelgprs.com&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the  name of the Sim 1 access point configured.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM 1  PDP Type&lt;br /&gt;
|IPV4&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays  the type of SIM 1&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM 1  Username&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|This field is optional, and the user can configure the name of  the SIM 1&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM 1  Password&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|This  field is optional, and the user can configure the password for the SIM 1&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM 1  Authentication Protocol&lt;br /&gt;
|None&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the type of  protocol is being used for SIM 1&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|9&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM 2  Access Point Name&lt;br /&gt;
|airtelgprs.com&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the name of the  Sim 2 access point configured.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|10&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM 2  PDP Type&lt;br /&gt;
|IPV4&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the type of SIM  2&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|11&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM 2  Username&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|This  field is optional, and the user can configure the name of the SIM 2&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|12&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM 2  Password&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|This  field is optional, and the user can configure the password for the SIM 2&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|13&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM 2  Authentication Protocol&lt;br /&gt;
|None&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the type of  protocol is being used for SIM 2&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|14&lt;br /&gt;
|Primary  SIM Switchback Time (In Minutes)&lt;br /&gt;
|10&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the time given  for sim to swich in between.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
After configuring all the required information, the user should click on the save and then click on the update to update the all the required information. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Band lock and Operator Lock&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this page, the user needs to configure the lock band and operator based on the service provider&#039;&#039;&#039;.&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Bands available in the drop-down list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Band lock and Operator Lock.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;2G/3G option&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2G/3G: - 3G allows additional features such as mobile internet access, video calls and mobile TV. While the main function of 2G technology is the transmission of information through voice calls.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:2G-3G option.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user should select the band check box  available for 2g/3g  from the given list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Bands available for selection under LTE for the bands available that zone.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Operator Selection Mode&#039;&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user needs to click on the check box of the “operator select enable” to select the operator.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the check box is clicked there will be a dropdown list of the operator modes from which the user needs to select the mode. The user needs to select the operator mode from the given dropdown list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Operator Selection Mode.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the user selects the mode “Manual” or “Manual-Automatic” then one more text box will appear where the user must provide the operator code.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Band lock and Operator Lock 1.png|frameless|542x542px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After configuring all the required information, the user should click on the save and then click on the update to update the all the required information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Wi-Fi Setting&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wi-Fi is a family of wireless network protocols based on the IEEE 802.11 family of standards, which are commonly used for local area network of devices and internet access, allowing nearby digital devices to exchanges data by radio waves. These are the most widely used computer network, used globally in home and small office networks to link devices and to provided internet access with wireless router and wireless access point in public places. In this router has the general setting and change country code, channel, radio mode, radio passphrase as per the requirement after clicking on enable Radio button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Wi-Fi Setting.png|frameless|585x585px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user needs to select the respective radio mode based on its need. Basically, it has 3 radio mode.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Wi-Fi Setting access Point.png|frameless|590x590px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Access Point mode:&#039;&#039;&#039; In Access Point mode, router connects to a wireless router through an Ethernet cable to extend the coverage of wireless signal to other network client.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Access Point Mode RC44.png|frameless|573x573px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Client point:&#039;&#039;&#039;  In client mode, the access point connects your wired devices to a wireless network. This mode is suitable when you have a wired device with an Ethernet port and no wireless capability, for example, a smart TV, Media Player, or Game console and you want to connect it to the internet wirelessly, select the Client Mode and give the Radio SSID &amp;amp; client passphrase&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Client Point RC44.png|frameless|587x587px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Access point and client point&#039;&#039;&#039;: select this option for both type connection, give both SSID and passphrase.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Access point and Client Point RC44.png|frameless|571x571px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After configuring all the required information, the user should click on the save and then click on the update to update the all the required information.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Radio  0 Protocol&lt;br /&gt;
|IEEE 802.11 b/g/n&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the  user should select which protocol is being used&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Country  Code&lt;br /&gt;
|INDIA&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the  user should select which county it belongs to.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Channel&lt;br /&gt;
|Auto&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user should  select the proper channel to be used.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|TX  Power&lt;br /&gt;
|100&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user should  specify the power.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Channel  Width&lt;br /&gt;
|20 MHz&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user should  select the channel width&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Radio  Mode&lt;br /&gt;
|Access  point&lt;br /&gt;
|In this drop down the user should  select the mode.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|Radio  SSID&lt;br /&gt;
|APClient_22B09230239&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user should  specify the SSID number&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|Radio  Authentication&lt;br /&gt;
|WPA2  Personal (PSK)&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user should  select the type of authentication.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|9&lt;br /&gt;
|Radio  Encryption&lt;br /&gt;
|AES&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user should  select the type of encryption required.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|10&lt;br /&gt;
|Radio  Passphrase&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user should  specify the password.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|11&lt;br /&gt;
|Radio  DHCP server IP&lt;br /&gt;
|192.168.100.1&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user should  specify the IP address of DHCP server.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|12&lt;br /&gt;
|Radio  DHCP start address&lt;br /&gt;
|100&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user should  specify the start address of the DHCP.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|13&lt;br /&gt;
|Radio  DHCP limit&lt;br /&gt;
|50&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user should  specify the limit for the DHCP.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Wireless Schedule&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wi-Fi can be automatically withdrawn based on the configuration done in this section.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user can schedule the Wi-Fi’s accessibility time during a particular period.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Wireless Schedule.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After configuring all the required information, the user should click on the save and then click on the update to update the all the required information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user can select more than one “day of the week” for scheduling the wifi working hours.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Wifi Schedule.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Loop back IP settings&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The loopback IP address, often referred to as “localhost”. it’s used to establish network connections within the same device for testing and troubleshooting purpose.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Loop back IP settings.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After configuring all the required information, the user should click on the save and then click on the update to update the all the required information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The loopback IP address, commonly represented as 127.0.0.1, is a special address used for testing network connectivity on a local machine. It allows a device to send network messages to itself without involving external networks, making it useful for troubleshooting and diagnostics.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
However, this IP can be changed as per requirement and to do that, Navigating to Setting&amp;gt;&amp;gt;Network configuration&amp;gt;&amp;gt; Loopback IP settings can be changed/updated.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Above screenshot shows the configuration window from GUI/WebUI&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;SMS Settings&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
User needs to enable SMS option in SMS settings page. This option is to validate the mobile numbers using which controlling commands could be sent to the router device. 1 to 5 mobile numbers can be authenticated by choosing from “Select Valid SMS user numbers” and adding the mobile numbers below respectively. API key is the pass key used in the commands while sending SMS. Displayed in the below screen is the default API key which can be edited and changed as per choice.   After addition of the mobile numbers user needs to click on save button for changes to take place.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SMS Settings.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select valid user number max. 5 and add authorized phone number in the main menu where want to find the alert and click on SMS Response Enable, save and update button, now send SMS commands from the configured mobile number. Once the commands are received from the user phone number the board send acknowledgement as per the commands after that it will send the router’s status once it has rebooted and is operational again. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mentioned below are a few commands which can be sent from the configured mobile number to the router device. Below two commands are One for rebooting the router device and another to get the uptime.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1) {&amp;quot;device&amp;quot;:[&amp;quot;passkey&amp;quot;,&amp;quot;API key&amp;quot;],&amp;quot;command&amp;quot;:&amp;quot;reboot&amp;quot;,&amp;quot;arguments&amp;quot;:&amp;quot;hardware&amp;quot;}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2) {&amp;quot;device&amp;quot;:[&amp;quot;passkey &amp;quot;,&amp;quot;API key&amp;quot;],&amp;quot;command&amp;quot;:&amp;quot;uptime&amp;quot;}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After configuring all the required information, the user should click on the save and then click on the update to update the all the required information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===2.2 SIM===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user needs to configure the Sim for the given device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SIM Switch.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user needs to select from the drop-down menu on which basis the sim needs to be switched.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Sim Switch Configuration.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user selects on “&#039;&#039;&#039;signal strength&#039;&#039;&#039;” then the parameters related to signal strength will pop up and the user needs to configure the parameters based on the requirement &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Signal Strength.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Threshold RSRP&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This Needs to be set appropriately. Incorrect setting may cause unnecessary SIM switching. ( In General a BAD RSRP value range is -140 to -115 and FAIR RSRP value range is -115 to -105).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Threshold SINR&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This Needs to be set appropriately. Incorrect setting may cause unnecessary SIM switching. ( In General a BAD SNR value range is -20 to 0 and FAIR SNR value range is 0 to 13)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user selects on “&#039;&#039;&#039;Data Limit&#039;&#039;&#039;” then the parameters related to Data Limit will pop up and the user needs to configure the parameters based on the requirement.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Data limit.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM Switch Based on&lt;br /&gt;
|Data Limit&lt;br /&gt;
|The user needs to select from the  drop-down menu on what basis the sim needs to be switched.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM 1 Data Usage Limit (In MB)&lt;br /&gt;
|1000&lt;br /&gt;
|The user needs to set the limit for the data  usage for SIM 1.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM 2 Data Usage Limit (In MB)&lt;br /&gt;
|1000&lt;br /&gt;
|The user needs to set the limit for the data  usage for SIM 2.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Periodicity&lt;br /&gt;
|Daily&lt;br /&gt;
|The user needs to set the pattern/frequency to  switch the sims.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Day Of Month&lt;br /&gt;
|16&lt;br /&gt;
|The user needs to set the day for switching the  sim.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
After configuring all the required information, the user should click on the save.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===2.3 Internet===&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user needs to configure the internet connection to set the priority from the various options. The user should decide what kind of connection it needs to provide to the device like LAN, WAN etc. Once the connections are configured then click on save option and then on update.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Internet.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the user needs to edit on the existing configuration, then the user should click on the “EDIT” button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Network Edit Options.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Name&lt;br /&gt;
|EWAN2&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the name of the WAN  connection&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Priority&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown box the user need to select  the priority.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Select Track IP Numbers&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user needs to select the  track number for the Ips.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|TrackIP1&lt;br /&gt;
|8.8.8.8&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text field the user needs to set the IP  address for the track 1&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|TrackIP2&lt;br /&gt;
|8.8.4.4&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text field the user needs to set the IP  address for the track 1&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Reliability&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Not sure what needs to be written&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|Count&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Not sure what needs to be written&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|Up&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Not sure what needs to be written&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|9&lt;br /&gt;
|Down&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Not sure what needs to be written&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user is done with modification click on the save button to save all the changes and then click on the update button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===2.4 VPN===&lt;br /&gt;
VPN stands for &#039;&#039;&#039;Virtual Private Network&#039;&#039;&#039;, it establishes a connection between the system and a remote server, which is owned by a VPN provider.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Creating a point-to-point tunnel that encrypts the personal data, masks the IP address, and allows to block the required website to blocks via firewalls on the internet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:VPN Settings RC44.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are 5 types of setting available under VPN configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* General Settings&lt;br /&gt;
* IPSEC&lt;br /&gt;
* Open VPN&lt;br /&gt;
* Wireguard&lt;br /&gt;
* Zerotier&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;General Settings&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user must choose which type of VPN connection is required for the device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user must select from IPSEC or Open VPN based on its requirement. If required, the user can select for both the options. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:VPN General Settings RC44.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user needs to click on the save after selecting the option based on its requirement.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;IPSEC&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
IPSEC VPN is used to create a VPN connection between local and remote networks. To use IPSEC VPN, the user should check that both local and remote routers support IPSEC VPN feature.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user can add/edit/delete the IPSEC VPN connection for the device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:VPN IPSEC changes RC44.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user needs to click on the update button once the required configuration is completed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In IPSEC the user needs to click on edit button to edit the configuration of an existing VPN connection.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:VPN Edit Options.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the save button after the required configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The tunnel will show established, showing the connection has been made.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:IPSEC .png|thumb|631x631px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|IPSEC&lt;br /&gt;
|Site to Site VPN&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user should select  the IPSEC connection type.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|IPSEC Role&lt;br /&gt;
|Client/Server&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown box the user needs to select  the IPSEC role.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Connection Type&lt;br /&gt;
|Tunnel&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user needs to select the connection  type. The user should select on the connection enable check box.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Connection mode&lt;br /&gt;
|start&lt;br /&gt;
|In this drop down list the user should select  the mode for the connection. it will have route/add/start/trap mode&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Remote Server IP&lt;br /&gt;
|1.1.1.1&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text field the user needs to set the IP  address for the remote server.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Local ID&lt;br /&gt;
|g300&lt;br /&gt;
|The user needs to set the local id.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|No. of local subnets&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user needs to select how  many subnets it will be connected.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|Local Subnet 1&lt;br /&gt;
|192.168.11.1/24&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user needs to put the  address of the local subnet.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|9&lt;br /&gt;
|Remote id&lt;br /&gt;
|sophos&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user needs to put the id  of the remote connection.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|10&lt;br /&gt;
|No of remote subnet&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user needs to select how  many subnets it will be connected remotely.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|11&lt;br /&gt;
|Remote subnet&lt;br /&gt;
|192.168.10.0/24&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user needs to put the  address of the remote subnet.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|12&lt;br /&gt;
|Key exchange&lt;br /&gt;
|Ikev1&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user should select the  which key exchange version to be selected.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|13&lt;br /&gt;
|Aggressive&lt;br /&gt;
|Yes/No&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user should select either  yes or no .&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|14&lt;br /&gt;
|IKE lifetime&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|Fill according to user’s requirements.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|15&lt;br /&gt;
|Lifetime in seconds&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Fill according to user’s requirements.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|16&lt;br /&gt;
|Enable DPD Detection&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;1&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
0&lt;br /&gt;
|Indicates  whether Dead Peer Detection is enabled to detect a lost connection. Enable  this option as per server-side settings.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|17&lt;br /&gt;
|Time Interval (In Seconds)&lt;br /&gt;
|60&lt;br /&gt;
|This option  is available only if DPD Detection is enabled. The time interval is the  interval for DPD checks.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|18&lt;br /&gt;
|Action&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Restart&#039;&#039;&#039;/clear/hold/&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
trap/start&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Restart&#039;&#039;&#039;: Action to take when  DPD detects a lost connection (restart the connection). Select as per  server-side setting.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|19&lt;br /&gt;
|Authentication Method&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;PSK&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;PSK&#039;&#039;&#039;: Pre-shared key is used  for authentication. Select this option for authentication as per sever side  setting.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|20&lt;br /&gt;
|Multiple Secrets&lt;br /&gt;
|1/&#039;&#039;&#039;0&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|Indicates  whether multiple PSK secrets are used. Enable only if required.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|21&lt;br /&gt;
|PSK Value&lt;br /&gt;
|******&lt;br /&gt;
|Pre-shared  key value (masked for security).&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;*Below are Phase I and Phase II settings details*&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&lt;br /&gt;
! colspan=&amp;quot;4&amp;quot; |                                                        &#039;&#039;&#039;Proposal settings Phase I&#039;&#039;&#039;                                                                                                                     &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|22            &lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Encryption Algorithm&#039;&#039;&#039;                                                 &lt;br /&gt;
|AES 128&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AES 192&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;AES 256&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3DES                                                                                                                                     &lt;br /&gt;
|                                                                                                                                     &#039;&#039;&#039;AES 256&#039;&#039;&#039;: Encryption algorithm  for Phase I. Select as per server-side configuration. Both server and client  should have same configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|23&lt;br /&gt;
|Authentication Phase I&lt;br /&gt;
|SHA1&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MD5&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SHA 256&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SHA 384&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;SHA 512&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;SHA 512&#039;&#039;&#039;: Authentication  algorithm for Phase I.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select as per  server-side configuration. Both server and client should have same configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|24&lt;br /&gt;
|DH Group&lt;br /&gt;
|MODP768(group1)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MODP1024(group2)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MODP1536(group5)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;MODP2048(group14)&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MODP3072(group15)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MODP4096(group16)&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;MODP2048 (group14)&#039;&#039;&#039;:  Diffie-Hellman group for key exchange.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select as per  server-side configuration. Both server and client should have same  configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| colspan=&amp;quot;4&amp;quot; |                                                                                                                                                                 &#039;&#039;&#039;Proposal settings Phase II&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|25&lt;br /&gt;
|Hash Algorithm&lt;br /&gt;
|AES 128&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AES 192&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;AES 256&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3DES&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;AES 256&#039;&#039;&#039;: Encryption algorithm  for Phase II. Select as per server-side configuration. Both server and client  should have same configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|26&lt;br /&gt;
|Authentication Phase II&lt;br /&gt;
|SHA1&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MD5&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SHA 256&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SHA 384&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;SHA 512&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;SHA 512&#039;&#039;&#039;: Authentication  algorithm for Phase II.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select as per  server-side configuration. Both server and client should have same  configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|27&lt;br /&gt;
|PFS Group&lt;br /&gt;
|MODP768(group1)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MODP1024(group2)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MODP1536(group5)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;MODP2048(group14)&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MODP3072(group15)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MODP4096(group16)&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;MODP2048 (group14)&#039;&#039;&#039;: Perfect  Forward Secrecy group.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select as per  server-side configuration. Both server and client should have same  configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Open VPN&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the OpenVPN connection, the home network can act as a server, and the remote device can access the server through the router which acts as an OpenVPN Server gateway. To use the VPN feature, the user should enable OpenVPN Server on the router, and install and run VPN client software on the remote device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Open VPN Settings RC44.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user needs to “upload” the respective certificate from a valid path and then click on the “Update.”&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the OpenVPN connection starts the user will get an option to enable/disable the VPN connection as and when required.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By clicking on the enable/disable button, the user can start/stop the VPN connection.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Open VPN Settings RC44 Dashboard.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
VPN has been established.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;WireGuard:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;WireGuard&#039;&#039;&#039; is simple, fast, lean, and modern VPN that utilizes secure and trusted cryptography.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on “Edit” to start configurations as needed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Wire Guard RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;EDIT:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Wire Guard RC44 Setttings.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the save button after the required configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample Value     &lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Wireguard Role&lt;br /&gt;
|Client/Server&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown box the user needs to select  the wireguard role.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Listen Port&lt;br /&gt;
|51820&lt;br /&gt;
|The UDP port on which the WireGuard client  listens for incoming connections.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|IP Addresses&lt;br /&gt;
|10.0.0.1/24&lt;br /&gt;
|The IP  address and subnet mask assigned to the WireGuard client&#039;s interface. This  address is used within the VPN.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Allowed PeerIPs&lt;br /&gt;
|10.1.1.1&lt;br /&gt;
|The IP  address of the allowed peer(s) that can connect to this WireGuard client.  This might need adjustment based on the actual peer IPs used in the network.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Endpoint HostIP&lt;br /&gt;
|10.1.1.1&lt;br /&gt;
|The IP  address of the WireGuard server (the endpoint to which the client connects).&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Endpoint HostPort&lt;br /&gt;
|51820&lt;br /&gt;
|The port on  the WireGuard server to which the client connects.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|PeerPublicKey&lt;br /&gt;
|*****&lt;br /&gt;
|The public  key of the peer (the server) the client is connecting to. This key is part of  the public-private key pair used in WireGuard for encryption and  authentication.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|Enable Preshared key&lt;br /&gt;
|Yes/No&lt;br /&gt;
|This option  indicates that a pre-shared key (PSK) is used in addition to the  public-private key pair for an extra layer of security.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|9&lt;br /&gt;
|Preshared key&lt;br /&gt;
|*****&lt;br /&gt;
|The actual  pre-shared key value shared between the client and the server. This option  appears only if you have enabled preshared key.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Zerotier:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ZeroTier is a tool that lets you create your own private network over the internet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Go to ZeroTier Central and sign up for a free account. In ZeroTier Central, click on &amp;quot;Create a Network&amp;quot;. This will generate a unique 16-digit network ID for your new network.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Go to settings =&amp;gt; VPN, in general settings, enable ZeroTier and save.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Zerotier Settings RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Copy and paste the unique 16-digit network ID in the edit section.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Zero Seetings Dashboard RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Zerotier Dashboard.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the save button after the required configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field Name    &lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  Value           &lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|NetworkID&lt;br /&gt;
|Ad2769hfkw2345f4&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown box the user needs to paste  the unique 16-digit network id.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Listen Port&lt;br /&gt;
|9993&lt;br /&gt;
|Default&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== 2.5 Firewall ===&lt;br /&gt;
A firewall is a layer of security between the network and the Internet. Since a router is the main connection from a network to the Internet, the firewall function is merged into this device. Every network should have a firewall to protect its privacy.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Firewall.png|frameless|635x635px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are 6 types of setting available under firewall.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* General Settings&lt;br /&gt;
* Port forwards&lt;br /&gt;
* Traffic Rules&lt;br /&gt;
* SNAT traffic Rules&lt;br /&gt;
* Parental Control&lt;br /&gt;
* Zone Forwarding&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;General Setting&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
General settings are subdivided into 2 parts,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1.) General settings&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In general settings, the settings that are made are default settings and can be changed according to user’s preference.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Firewall General Settings.png|frameless|622x622px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Specification details are below:&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;SN&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Field Name&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Sample Value&#039;&#039;&#039;      &lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Description&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Enable SYN-flood  protection&lt;br /&gt;
|Enabled&lt;br /&gt;
|This is  enabled by default; setting can be changed if required.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Disable IPV6&lt;br /&gt;
|Disabled&lt;br /&gt;
|This is  enabled by default; setting can be changed if required.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Drop invalid packets&lt;br /&gt;
|Disabled&lt;br /&gt;
|This is  enabled by default; setting can be changed if required.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|TCP SYN Cookies&lt;br /&gt;
|Disabled&lt;br /&gt;
|This is  enabled by default; setting can be changed if required.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Input&lt;br /&gt;
|Reject/Accept&lt;br /&gt;
|By  default, the setting is ‘Reject’ but this needs to be changed to ‘Accept’  compulsory.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Output&lt;br /&gt;
|Reject/Accept&lt;br /&gt;
|By  default, the setting is ‘Reject’ but this needs to be changed to ‘Accept’  compulsory.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|Forward&lt;br /&gt;
|Reject/Accept&lt;br /&gt;
|By  default, the setting is ‘Reject’ but this needs to be changed to ‘Accept’  compulsory.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2.) Zone settings&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In zone settings, there’s an option to add “New Zone”, according to user’s requirement.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Zone settings.png|thumb|628x628px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Port Forwards:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Port forwarding is a feature in a router or gateway that allows external devices to access services on a private network.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It maps an external port on the router to an internal IP address and port on the local network, enabling applications such as gaming servers, web servers, or remote desktop connections to be accessed from outside the network.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This helps in directing incoming traffic to the correct device within a local network based on the port number, enhancing connectivity and accessibility.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Firewall Port Forward.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;EDIT&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Firewall Edit Option RC44.png|frameless|622x622px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the save button after the required configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Name&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Web_Server_Forward&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|Field must  not be empty. Provide a name for the rule to easily identify it.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Protocol&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;TCP+UDP&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|Select the protocol  for the rule.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Options  typically include TCP+UDP, TCP, UDP, ICMP, Custom.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Source zone&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;SW_LAN&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|Select the  source zone where the traffic is originating from. Options typically include EWAN2,SW_LAN,CWAN1,CWAN1_0,CWAN1_1,VPN&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Source MAC address [optional]&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;any&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;any&#039;&#039;&#039;: Leave as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;any&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; if you don&#039;t want to specify a MAC address.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Source IP address[optional]&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: Leave blank if not needed.&lt;br /&gt;
|Optionally  specify an IP address or range.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Source port&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;80, 443&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;  (if matching traffic for web server ports)&lt;br /&gt;
|Specify the  source port or port range.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|Destination zone&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;SW_LAN&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|Select the  destination zone where the traffic is heading to.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|Destination IP address&lt;br /&gt;
|Leave blank if not needed.&lt;br /&gt;
|Optionally specify  the destination IP address or range.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|9&lt;br /&gt;
|Destination port&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;80&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;  (if redirecting to a web server port)&lt;br /&gt;
|Specify the  destination port or port range.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Traffic Rule:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;Traffic rules&amp;quot; refer to the policies and regulations that govern the flow of data packets within a network.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To allow new traffic, click on “Add and Edit” in “New Traffic Rule”.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Firewall Traffic Rule.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;EDIT&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Firewall Traffic Rule Edit.png|frameless|621x621px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Specification details are below:&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample Value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Name&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: Allow_HTTP_and_HTTPS&lt;br /&gt;
|Field must  not be empty: Provide a descriptive name for the traffic rule.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Restrict to Address Family&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|1.       Options:  IPv4, IPv6&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2.       Example:  IPv4 if dealing with typical internet traffic.&lt;br /&gt;
|Select the  address family to generate iptables rules for.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Protocol&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: TCP+UDP&lt;br /&gt;
|TCP+UDP:  Match incoming traffic using the given protocol.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Match ICMP Type&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: any&lt;br /&gt;
|Match all  ICMP types if set to any. Specific types can be chosen if needed.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Source Zone&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: LAN&lt;br /&gt;
|Specifies the  traffic source zone.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Enable DDoS Prevention&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: ‘Checked’ if you want to enable DDoS prevention  measures&lt;br /&gt;
|Enable or  disable Distributed Denial of Service (DDoS) prevention.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|Source MAC Address&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: any&lt;br /&gt;
|any: Match  traffic from any MAC address or specify a particular MAC address.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|Source Address&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: 192.168.1.0/24&lt;br /&gt;
|Match  incoming traffic from the specified source IP address or range.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|9&lt;br /&gt;
|Source Port&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: any if all source ports should be matched&lt;br /&gt;
|any: Match  incoming traffic from the specified source port or port range.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|10&lt;br /&gt;
|Destination Zone&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: WAN&lt;br /&gt;
|Specifies the  traffic destination zone.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|11&lt;br /&gt;
|Action&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: ACCEPT&lt;br /&gt;
|Options:  ACCEPT, DROP, REJECT. Specify the action to take for matched traffic.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|12&lt;br /&gt;
|Limit&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: 10/minute to limit matches to 10 times per  minute.&lt;br /&gt;
|Maximum  average matching rate; specified as a number, with an optional /second,  /minute, /hour, or /day suffix.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|13&lt;br /&gt;
|Extra arguments&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: --log-prefix &amp;quot;Blocked: &amp;quot; to add a log  prefix to log messages for this rule.&lt;br /&gt;
|Passes  additional arguments to iptables. Use with care as it can significantly alter  rule behaviour.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
Click on save once configured.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;SNAT Traffic Rule:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For configuring SNAT (Source Network Address Translation) traffic rules, you can control how outbound traffic from your local network is translated to a different IP address as it exits the network.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To add new source NAT,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on “ADD” in “New Source NAT:”&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SNAT Traffic Rule.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Edit&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SNAT Edit Options RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Specification details are below:&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Name&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: SNAT_WAN_to_LAN&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Field must  not be empty&#039;&#039;&#039;: Provide a unique and descriptive name for the SNAT rule.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Protocol&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: TCP+UDP&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;TCP+UDP&#039;&#039;&#039;:  Select the protocols that the SNAT rule will apply to.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Source Zone&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: wan&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;wan&#039;&#039;&#039;:  Specifies the source zone from which the traffic originates.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Source IP Address&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: any or a specific range like 192.168.1.0/24&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;-- please  choose --&#039;&#039;&#039;: Specify the source IP address or range. Leave empty if the  rule applies to any source IP.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Source Port&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: any&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;any&#039;&#039;&#039;:  Specify the source port or port range from which the traffic originates.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Destination Zone&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: lan&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;lan&#039;&#039;&#039;:  Specifies the destination zone to which the traffic is directed.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|Destination IP Address&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: any or a specific IP like 192.168.1.100&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;-- please  choose --&#039;&#039;&#039;: Specify the destination IP address or range. Leave empty if  the rule applies to any destination IP.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|Destination port&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: any&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;any&#039;&#039;&#039;:  Specify the destination port or port range to which the traffic is directed.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|9&lt;br /&gt;
|SNAT IP Address&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: 203.0.113.5 (an external IP address)&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;-- please  choose --&#039;&#039;&#039;: Specify the IP address to which the source IP should be  translated.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|10&lt;br /&gt;
|SNAT Port&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: Leave empty if not needed, or specify a port  like ‘12345’&lt;br /&gt;
|Optionally,  rewrite matched traffic to a specific source port. Leave empty to only  rewrite the IP address.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|11&lt;br /&gt;
|Extra Arguments&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: --log-prefix &amp;quot;SNAT_traffic: &amp;quot; (to add  a log prefix to log messages for this rule)&lt;br /&gt;
|Pass  additional arguments to iptables. Use with care as it can significantly alter  rule behaviour.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
Click on save once configured.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Parental Control:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For configuring parental control rules, you want to set restrictions based on time, source, and destination zones, as well as specific devices.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To add parental control in firewall,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on “Add and Edit” in “New parental control:” field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Parental Control.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Edit&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Parental Control Edit Options RC44.png|frameless|622x622px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Specification details are given below:&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  Name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  Value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Name&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  Parental_Control_Sunday&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Field must  not be empty&#039;&#039;&#039;: Provide a unique and descriptive name for the parental  control rule.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Proto&lt;br /&gt;
|all&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;all&#039;&#039;&#039;:  This specifies that the rule will apply to all protocols.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Source Zone&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: lan&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Field must  not be empty&#039;&#039;&#039;: Please look at Firewall-&amp;gt;Zone Settings to find zone  names.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Destination  Zone&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: wan&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Field must  not be empty&#039;&#039;&#039;: Please look at Firewall-&amp;gt;Zone Settings to find zone  names.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Source MAC  Address&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  00:1A:2B:3C:4D:5E&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Field&#039;&#039;&#039;:  Enter the MAC address of the device you want to apply the parental control  rule to. This is useful for restricting specific devices.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Target&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  Reject&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Accept&#039;&#039;&#039;:  This specifies the action to take. For parental controls, you might want to  use ‘Reject’ or ‘Drop’ to block traffic.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|Weekdays&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  Sunday&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Sunday&#039;&#039;&#039;:  Specify the days of the week when the rule should be active.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|Month Days&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: All&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;All:&#039;&#039;&#039; Specify  the days of the month when the rule should be active.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|9&lt;br /&gt;
|Start Time (hh:mm:ss)&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  18:00:00 (6:00 PM)&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Field must  not be empty:&#039;&#039;&#039; Specify the start time when the rule should begin to apply.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|10&lt;br /&gt;
|Stop Time  (hh:mm:ss)&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  22:00:00 (10:00 PM)&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Field must  not be empty:&#039;&#039;&#039; Specify the stop time when the rule should end.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
Click on save once configured.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Zone Forwarding:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Zone forwarding in network configuration allows traffic to be directed from one zone to another.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To ADD new zone,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on “Add” in “New Zone Forward:” field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Zone Forwarding RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;EDIT&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Zone Forwarding editing Options RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Specification details are below:&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  Name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  Value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Source Zone&lt;br /&gt;
|Example options: lan, wan, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;--please  choose--&#039;&#039;&#039;: Select the source zone from which the traffic originates.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Destination Zone&lt;br /&gt;
|Example options: lan, wan, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;--please  choose--&#039;&#039;&#039;: Select the destination zone to which the traffic is directed.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
Click on save once configured.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===2.6 Loopback Rule===&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user can configure the port where he want to forward the traffic to. Here the user can add/edit/delete different port ports as per the requirement. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Loopback Rule.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user should click on ‘add’ and then ‘edit’ to do the required changes in the port and enter the valid information in each section to configure the port for forwarding.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Loopback Rule edit.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Specification details are given below:&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  Name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  Value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Name&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: loopback&lt;br /&gt;
|Provide a  descriptive name for the rule.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Protocol&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: TCP+UDP&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;TCP+UDP&#039;&#039;&#039;:  Select the protocols that the rule will apply to.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Source IP Address [Optional]&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: any or a specific IP range like 192.168.1.0/24&lt;br /&gt;
|Optionally  specify the source IP address or range. Leave empty if the rule should apply  to any source IP.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Source Port [Optional]&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: any&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;any&#039;&#039;&#039;:  Specify the source port or port range from which the traffic originates. any  allows traffic from all ports.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Loopback IP Address&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: 127.0.0.1&lt;br /&gt;
|Specify the  loopback IP address. Typically, this is 127.0.0.1.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Port&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: any&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;any&#039;&#039;&#039;:  Specify the destination port or port range to which the traffic is directed.  any allows traffic to all ports.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|Action&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: DNAT&lt;br /&gt;
|This  specifies the action to take either DNAT or SNAT.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|Internal IP Address&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: 192.168.1.100&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Field must  not be empty&#039;&#039;&#039;: Specify the internal IP address to which the traffic should  be redirected.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|9&lt;br /&gt;
|Internal Port&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: any&lt;br /&gt;
|Redirect  matched incoming traffic to the given port on the internal host.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user is done with the required configurations, user should click save button and then click on the update to save the changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===2.7 Remote Monitoring===&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user can select which equipment needs to be monitored remotely.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user selects the type of RMS click on save.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Remote Monitoring.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;NMS:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user should type the server IP or domain name in the URL then click on save.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on upload and start (Once key is uploaded and this option is clicked, NMS automatically starts, and this router device gets registered with the NMS server provided).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:NMS.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;TR069&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To enable the TR069 the user needs to click on the enable check box.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:TR069.png|frameless|582x582px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user clicks on the check box of enable it will display all the required filed to configured.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Remote Monitoring Tr-069.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Specification details are given below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field Name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample Value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Serving  Interval&lt;br /&gt;
|300&lt;br /&gt;
|A value of 300 seconds means the device  will check in with the ACS (auto-configuration servers) every 5 minutes.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Interface&lt;br /&gt;
|This can  be something like eth0 or wan.&lt;br /&gt;
|This specifies the network interface  used for TR-069 communication.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Username&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: User&lt;br /&gt;
|The username used to authenticate with  the ACS.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Password&lt;br /&gt;
|••••&lt;br /&gt;
|The password used to authenticate with  the ACS.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|URL&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;http://example.com&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|The URL of the ACS. This is where the  CPE (customer-premises equipment) will send its requests and where it will  receive configurations and updates from.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
The user should fill all the required fields and click on the save button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===2.8 Tunnel===&lt;br /&gt;
Tunnels are a method of transporting data across a network using protocols which are not supported by that network.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is further categorised into 3 sections,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1.) General Settings&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2.) GRE Tunnel&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3.) IPIP Tunnel&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tunnel Settings.png|frameless|621x621px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;General Settings&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user needs to select under which type of tunnel it needs to send the data.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tunnel General Settings.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user selects the type of tunnel then click in the save button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;GRE Tunnel:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A GRE (Generic Routing Encapsulation) tunnel configuration involves setting up a virtual point-to-point connection between two endpoints over an IP network.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here the user can add/edit/delete the details of the tunnel.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:GRE Tunnel 1.png|thumb|633x633px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the required update is done then click on update to save the changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;EDIT:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:GRE Tunnel.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Specification details are given below:&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field Name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample Value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Tunnel  name&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  GRETunnel&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;GRETunnel&#039;&#039;&#039;: The name of the GRE tunnel.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Local  external IP&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  10.1.1.66&lt;br /&gt;
|The IP address of the local endpoint  that will initiate the GRE tunnel.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Remote external  IP&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  10.1.1.40&lt;br /&gt;
|The IP address of the remote endpoint  that will terminate the GRE tunnel.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Peer  tunnel IP&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  10.1.1.4&lt;br /&gt;
|The IP address of the peer&#039;s tunnel  interface.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Local  tunnel IP&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  10.1.1.6&lt;br /&gt;
|The IP address of the local tunnel  interface.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Local  tunnel net mask&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  255.255.255.0&lt;br /&gt;
|The subnet mask of the local tunnel  interface.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|Remote IP&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  192.168.10.0/24&lt;br /&gt;
|The remote network that is reachable  through the GRE tunnel.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|Enable  Tunnel Link&lt;br /&gt;
|Check to  enable&lt;br /&gt;
|Enable or disable the GRE tunnel link.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|9&lt;br /&gt;
|Interface  type&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  EWAN2&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;EWAN2&#039;&#039;&#039;: The  type of network interface used for the GRE tunnel.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|10&lt;br /&gt;
|MTU&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  1476&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;1476&#039;&#039;&#039;: Maximum  Transmission Unit size for the GRE tunnel.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|11&lt;br /&gt;
|TTL&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  64&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;64&#039;&#039;&#039;: Time To  Live value for the packets within the GRE tunnel.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|12&lt;br /&gt;
|Tunnel  key&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  12345678&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;12345678&#039;&#039;&#039;: A unique key used to identify the GRE tunnel.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|13&lt;br /&gt;
|Enable  keep alive&lt;br /&gt;
|Check to  enable&lt;br /&gt;
|Enable or disable the keep-alive  feature to monitor the tunnel&#039;s status.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|14&lt;br /&gt;
|Keep  alive interval&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  10&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;10&#039;&#039;&#039;:  Interval in seconds for the keep-alive packets.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
Once the required update is done then click on update to save the changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;IPIP Tunnel:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An IPIP (IP-in-IP) tunnel is a simple tunneling protocol used to encapsulate IP packets within IP packets. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is similar to GRE but without additional features such as keying and type fields.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here the user can add/edit/delete the details of the tunnel.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:IPIP Tunnel1.png|thumb|635x635px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;EDIT:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:IPIP Edit.png|thumb|637x637px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Specification details are given below:&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field Name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample Value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Tunnel  name&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  IPIPTunnel&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;IPIPTunnel:&#039;&#039;&#039; The name of the IPIP tunnel.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Local external  IP&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  10.1.1.66&lt;br /&gt;
|The IP address of the local endpoint  that will initiate the IPIP tunnel.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Remote  external IP&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  10.1.1.40&lt;br /&gt;
|The IP address of the remote endpoint  that will terminate the IPIP tunnel.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Peer  tunnel IP&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: 10.1.1.4&lt;br /&gt;
|The IP address of the peer&#039;s tunnel  interface.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Local  tunnel IP&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  10.1.1.6&lt;br /&gt;
|The IP address of the local tunnel  interface.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Local  tunnel net mask&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  255.255.255.0&lt;br /&gt;
|The subnet mask of the local tunnel  interface.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|Remote IP&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  192.168.10.0/24&lt;br /&gt;
|The remote network that is reachable  through the IPIP tunnel.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|Enable  Tunnel Link&lt;br /&gt;
|Check to  enable&lt;br /&gt;
|Enable or disable the IPIP tunnel link.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|9&lt;br /&gt;
|Interface  type&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  EWAN2&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;EWAN2&#039;&#039;&#039;: The  type of network interface used for the IPIP tunnel.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|10&lt;br /&gt;
|MTU&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  1476&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;1476&#039;&#039;&#039;: Maximum  Transmission Unit size for the IPIP tunnel.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|11&lt;br /&gt;
|TTL&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  64&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;64&#039;&#039;&#039;: Time To  Live value for the packets within the IPIP tunnel.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|12&lt;br /&gt;
|Tunnel  key&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  12345678&lt;br /&gt;
|Although typically not used in IPIP,  this field might be included for compatibility with certain configurations.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|13&lt;br /&gt;
|Enable  keep alive&lt;br /&gt;
|Check to  enable&lt;br /&gt;
|Enable or disable the keep-alive  feature to monitor the tunnel&#039;s status.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|14&lt;br /&gt;
|Keep  alive interval&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  10&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;10&#039;&#039;&#039;:  Interval in seconds for the keep-alive packets.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
Once the required update is done then click on update to save the changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==3 Maintenance==&lt;br /&gt;
In this module the user can configure/upgrade/modify the settings related to system, password, firmware and monitoring.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Maintenance System.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It includes below submodules.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* General&lt;br /&gt;
* Password&lt;br /&gt;
* Reboot&lt;br /&gt;
* Import and Export config&lt;br /&gt;
* Firmware upgrade&lt;br /&gt;
* Monitor Application&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===3.1 General===&lt;br /&gt;
In this section the user can configure the details related to time zone and host name&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Maintenance General.png|frameless|619x619px]]&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Local Time&lt;br /&gt;
|2023/12/13 12:24:11&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|It displays the system current date and  time.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|HostName&lt;br /&gt;
|31B30230298&lt;br /&gt;
|It displays the host name.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Timezone&lt;br /&gt;
|Asia/Kolkata&lt;br /&gt;
|It displays in which time zone its configured.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user configures the required details then click on the save button to save all the details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Logging&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here the user can configure the basic aspects of your device related to system.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Maintenance logging.png|frameless|608x608px]]&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|System log buffer size&lt;br /&gt;
|32&lt;br /&gt;
|This displays the log size of system buffer&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|External system log server&lt;br /&gt;
|0.0.0.0&lt;br /&gt;
|This displays the ip add of the external system  log&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|External system log server port&lt;br /&gt;
|514&lt;br /&gt;
|This displays the port number of the external  system log&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Log output level&lt;br /&gt;
|debug&lt;br /&gt;
|In this drop down the user selects the level of  the log output.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Cron Log level&lt;br /&gt;
|debug&lt;br /&gt;
|In this drop down the user selects the level of  the corn log .&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user configures the required details then click on the save button to save all the details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Language and Style&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here the user can configure the basic aspects of your device related to language.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Maintenance Language and Style.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user configures the required details then click on the save button to save all the details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===3.2 Password===&lt;br /&gt;
In this module the user can set the password for the admin credentials.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Change you password.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Specifies the password for the guest account. If the user enter a plaintext password here, it will get replaced with a crypted password on save. The new password will be effective once the user logs out and log in again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user needs to write the password in the text box and click on the save button to save the password.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===3.3 Reboot===&lt;br /&gt;
In this module the user can reboot the device remotely.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Reboot.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To start the reboot process first the user needs to fill all the required fields.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Need to select the type of reboot for the device whether it needs to be Hardware or Software reboot.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Maintenance Reboot.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Type&lt;br /&gt;
|Maintenance Reboot&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown list the user needs to  select the type of reboot is required to configure.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Reboot Type&lt;br /&gt;
|Hardware&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown list the user needs to select  the hardware or software reboot is required.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Minutes&lt;br /&gt;
|59&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user needs to configure  the min to start the reboot activity&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Hours&lt;br /&gt;
|22&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user needs to configure  the hours to start the reboot activity&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Day of Month&lt;br /&gt;
|All&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user needs to configure  the day of the month to start the reboot activity&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Month&lt;br /&gt;
|All&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user needs to configure  the month to start the reboot activity&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|Day of the week&lt;br /&gt;
|All&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user needs to configure  the week to start the reboot activity&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user fills all the required given parameters click on the save.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To start the reboot process, click on the “Reboot Now” button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===3.4 Import and Export===&lt;br /&gt;
In this section, User can Import &amp;amp; Export Configuration files of the Device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Import and Export.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
click “Export Config” to export device configuration &amp;amp; settings to a text file,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
click “Import Config” to import device configuration &amp;amp; settings from a previously exported text file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Import window.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user need to select on the choose file to and click on the apply.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===3.5 Firmware Upgrade===&lt;br /&gt;
The user can upgrade with the latest software for the existing firmware. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Frimware Upgrade.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the &#039;&#039;&#039;flash image&#039;&#039;&#039; and chose the path where the sys-upgrade file is kept and then click on flash image, it will upgrade to the latest software once the reboot is done.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Flash Image.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the &#039;&#039;&#039;Retain Config and flash&#039;&#039;&#039; and chose the path where the sys-upgrade file is kept and then click on Retain Config and flash, it will upgrade to the latest software once the reboot is done.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Flash Image.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the &#039;&#039;&#039;Factory Reset&#039;&#039;&#039; for the complete retest of the device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===3.6 Monitor Application===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Monitor Application.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Router Application Remote Configuration.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Router Remote Configuration.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==4 Status==&lt;br /&gt;
In this module the user can view the status of the router device with respect to the network, Wan, modem etc.[[File:Status.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It has 4 submodules.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Interfaces&lt;br /&gt;
* Internet&lt;br /&gt;
* Modem&lt;br /&gt;
* Route&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===4.1 Interfaces===&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user can see the traffic status for all the network through which the device works.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Status Interfaces.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Looking on the network status the user can check if the cellular or the ethernet is up.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===4.2 Internet===&lt;br /&gt;
In this submodule the user can view the status of the internet connections.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Internet Status.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
  To see the latest status of the internet connection the user needs to click on the refresh button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===4.3 Modem===&lt;br /&gt;
In this sub module the user will get to know the status of the cellular interface which is installed inside the modem. The user can view all the details related to the sim in terms of Operator, Network technology, Mobile country code, Upload bandwidth, Download Bandwidth, Frequency band, RSRP, RSRQ, RSSI &amp;amp; SNR under this page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Modem Status.png|frameless|602x602px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== 4.4 Route ===&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user can check the status of the route for the device. The ARP status can be visible in under this page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Route Status.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==5 Features==&lt;br /&gt;
In this module the user can see all the features that the router device has.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This module includes the below features.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Mac Address Binding&lt;br /&gt;
* URL Filtering&lt;br /&gt;
* Web Server&lt;br /&gt;
* Wi-Fi MacID Filtering&lt;br /&gt;
* Routing&lt;br /&gt;
* Others&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Features.png|frameless|618x618px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===5.1 Mac Address Binding===&lt;br /&gt;
Under this submodule the user can configure/update/edit the IP Address for MAC&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mac Addressing Binding.png|frameless|622x622px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user should write MAC address and then click on the add button. Once the address is added then click on the update button to save the modification.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user needs to click on the Edit button to modify the preexisting configuration. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mac Address Edit.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user modifies the MAC address /IP Address then click on the save button to save the changes done.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user can click on the deleted button to delete an existing configured device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Post all the changes the user needs to click on the update to reflect all the changes in the application.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===5.2 URL Filtering===&lt;br /&gt;
In this submodule the user should provide the URL which needs to be blocked for the device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:URL Filtering.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To add the new URL for blocking, click on the Add New button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user clicks on the Add New button a new pop will appear in that page write the URL and click on the save. The user can select the status of that URL while defining the URL.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Url Update.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To edit / delete the existing URL the user needs to click on the edit /deleted button respectively.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Edit or Delete URL.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the save after the changes are done as per the need.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== 5.3 Web Server ===&lt;br /&gt;
In this submodule the user can configure webserver related parameters.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Web server.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To configure the HTTP, click on the enable HTTP. Once the user clicks on the check box the HTTP Port text box will appear where the user needs to configure the port id.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Webserver Configuration.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on save buttons to save the changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To configure the 2nd HTTP, click on the enable HTTP. Once the user clicks on the check box the HTTP Port text box will appear where the user needs to configure the port id.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Webserver Https Redirect.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on save buttons to save the changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the “Redirect https” and “RFC1918 Filter” check box to respectively and click on the save button to save the changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To configure the NTP sync, click on the enable NTP sync. Once the user clicks on the check box the respective text boxes will appear to configure the parameters. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:RFC1918 Filter.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user configures the parameters click on the save button to save the given values.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===5.4 Wi-Fi MacID Filtering===&lt;br /&gt;
In this module the user can filter the Macids. Mac address filtering allows users to block traffic coming from certain known machines or devices.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Wi-Fi MacID Filtering.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Before adding the MacIDs the user needs to select the mode from the dropdown menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To Add the MacID the user needs to click on Add New option select the mac id and network name Wi-Fi 2.4G AP OR Wi-Fi 2.4G AP Guest, select enable/disable option and save it and update.              &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Configuring MacID and Network Name.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the required MACID and Network Name is configured the user needs to click on the save button to add the details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user needs to click on the edit button to do modifications on the pre-existing configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Macid and name removing.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the required MACID / Network Name is modified the user needs to click on the save button to reflect the changed value in the application.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;WIFI 2.4G AP Guest&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To Add the MacID the user needs to click on Add New option select the mac id and network name Wi-Fi 2.4G AP Guest, select enable/disable option and save it and update.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
     [[File:WIFI 2.4G AP Guest.png|frameless|623x623px]]  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the required MACID and Network Name is configured the user needs to click on the save button to add the details. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user needs to click on the edit button to do modifications on the pre-existing configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Configuring MacID and Network Name.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the required MACID / Network Name is modified the user needs to click on the save button to reflect the changed value in the application.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===5.5 Routing===&lt;br /&gt;
In this submodule the user can configure the parameters related to routing of the device. like Target address, Networks address etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Routing IPV4 Routes.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To add a new device the user needs to fill all the required information and click on the add button.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Interface&lt;br /&gt;
|eth0.1&lt;br /&gt;
|In this drop down list the user should  configure the interface name.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Target&lt;br /&gt;
|192.168.10.1&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user needs to insert the  target IP address&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|IPV4 Netmask&lt;br /&gt;
|255.255.255.0&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user should give the  address for the IPV4Netmask&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Metric&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user should insert the  number of the metric.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|IPV4 Gateway&lt;br /&gt;
|192.168.100.1&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user should configured the  address for the IPV4 Gateway.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Route Type&lt;br /&gt;
|Unicast&lt;br /&gt;
|In this drop down box the user should select  the type of route needed for the device.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
To edit the existing device the user needs to click on the edit option.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Routing Configuration.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the changes are done click on the save button to save all the changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the deleted button to delete the existing device detail.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Advanced Static IPV4 Routes:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Advanced Static IPV4 Routes.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To add a new device the user needs to fill all the required information and click on the add button.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Interface&lt;br /&gt;
|eth0.1&lt;br /&gt;
|In this drop down list the user should  configure the interface name.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|To&lt;br /&gt;
|192.168.10.1&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user needs to insert the  target IP address&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|IPV4 Netmask&lt;br /&gt;
|255.255.255.0&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user should give the  address for the IPV4Netmask&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Table&lt;br /&gt;
|local&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|From&lt;br /&gt;
|192.168.100.1&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user should configured the  from address for the routes&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Priority&lt;br /&gt;
|230&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
To edit the existing device the user needs to click on the edit option.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Routing Editing.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the changes are done click on the save button to save all the changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the deleted button to delete the existing device detail.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once all the configurations are done click on the update button to reflect the changes made.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===5.6 Others===&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user will get to do all the other miscellaneous configuration with respect to the device based on the required parameters.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Miscellaneous configuration.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Utility&lt;br /&gt;
|Action&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Set Date&lt;br /&gt;
|SET&lt;br /&gt;
|Need to set the date and time and after  click command get the Date and time&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Gate Date&lt;br /&gt;
|GET&lt;br /&gt;
|Needs to get the system date and time&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|IPsec status all&lt;br /&gt;
|GET&lt;br /&gt;
|Needs to get the IPsec details&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Wi-Fi Scan&lt;br /&gt;
|GET&lt;br /&gt;
|Needs to get the Wi-Fi status&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|ipref3 client&lt;br /&gt;
|RUN&lt;br /&gt;
|Needs to click on the RUN to execute  the command&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|ipref3 server&lt;br /&gt;
|RUN&lt;br /&gt;
|Needs to click on the RUN to execute  the command&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|Ping&lt;br /&gt;
|PING&lt;br /&gt;
|Needs to click on the ping status&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|9&lt;br /&gt;
|Traceroute&lt;br /&gt;
|RUN&lt;br /&gt;
|Needs to click on the ping Traceroute status&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|10&lt;br /&gt;
|NTP Sync&lt;br /&gt;
|SYNC&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to Sync the NTP&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|11&lt;br /&gt;
|Download Files&lt;br /&gt;
|DOWNLOAD&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to Download the files /Database&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|12&lt;br /&gt;
|Restart Power&lt;br /&gt;
|RESTART&lt;br /&gt;
|Click Restart the power&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|13&lt;br /&gt;
|Restart Modem&lt;br /&gt;
|RESTART&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to Restart the modem&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|14&lt;br /&gt;
|Run at command&lt;br /&gt;
|RUN&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to Run the command&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|15&lt;br /&gt;
|Show board configuration&lt;br /&gt;
|SHOW&lt;br /&gt;
|To Show the board configuration&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|16&lt;br /&gt;
|Show VPN Certificate Name&lt;br /&gt;
|SHOW&lt;br /&gt;
|To Show VPN Certificate Name&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|17&lt;br /&gt;
|Switch SIM to Secondary&lt;br /&gt;
|RUN&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to switch the SIM to secondary  mode&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|18&lt;br /&gt;
|Send Test SMS&lt;br /&gt;
|SEND&lt;br /&gt;
|To Send the SMS Confirmation&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|19&lt;br /&gt;
|Readlatest SMS&lt;br /&gt;
|READ&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to Read the latest SMS&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|20&lt;br /&gt;
|Data Usage&lt;br /&gt;
|SHOW&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to show the data usage.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|21&lt;br /&gt;
|Monthly Data Usage&lt;br /&gt;
|SHOW&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to show the monthly data usage&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|22&lt;br /&gt;
|Modem debug Info&lt;br /&gt;
|READ&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to read the information about the  modem debug&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|23&lt;br /&gt;
|Scan Network operators (take&amp;gt;3mins)&lt;br /&gt;
|SHOW&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to show the Network operator&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|24&lt;br /&gt;
|Network operators (first perform scan  network operator&lt;br /&gt;
|SHOW&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to show the Network operator&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|25&lt;br /&gt;
|ReadLogFiles&lt;br /&gt;
|READ&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to read the log files&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|26&lt;br /&gt;
|Enable ssh&lt;br /&gt;
|RUN&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to Run the command&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|27&lt;br /&gt;
|Disable ssh&lt;br /&gt;
|RUN&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to Run the command&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|28&lt;br /&gt;
|Clear SIM1 Data&lt;br /&gt;
|CLEAR&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to clear the SIM1 data&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|29&lt;br /&gt;
|Clear SIM2 Data&lt;br /&gt;
|CLEAR&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to clear the SIM data&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==6 Logout==&lt;br /&gt;
The user should click on log out option to logged out from the router application.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Logout.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user needs to click on the ok to come out of the router application.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tanisha</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.silbonetworks.com/index.php?title=File:IPIP_Edit.png&amp;diff=1186</id>
		<title>File:IPIP Edit.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.silbonetworks.com/index.php?title=File:IPIP_Edit.png&amp;diff=1186"/>
		<updated>2024-09-03T05:20:40Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tanisha: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;IPIP Edit&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tanisha</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.silbonetworks.com/index.php?title=File:IPIP_Tunnel1.png&amp;diff=1185</id>
		<title>File:IPIP Tunnel1.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.silbonetworks.com/index.php?title=File:IPIP_Tunnel1.png&amp;diff=1185"/>
		<updated>2024-09-03T05:18:26Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tanisha: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;IPIP Tunnel1&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tanisha</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.silbonetworks.com/index.php?title=File:GRE_Tunnel.png&amp;diff=1184</id>
		<title>File:GRE Tunnel.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.silbonetworks.com/index.php?title=File:GRE_Tunnel.png&amp;diff=1184"/>
		<updated>2024-09-03T05:13:10Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tanisha: Tanisha uploaded a new version of File:GRE Tunnel.png&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;GRE Tunnel&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tanisha</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.silbonetworks.com/index.php?title=File:GRE_Tunnel_1.png&amp;diff=1183</id>
		<title>File:GRE Tunnel 1.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.silbonetworks.com/index.php?title=File:GRE_Tunnel_1.png&amp;diff=1183"/>
		<updated>2024-09-03T05:11:45Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tanisha: Tanisha uploaded a new version of File:GRE Tunnel 1.png&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;GRE Tunnel 1&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tanisha</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.silbonetworks.com/index.php?title=RC44_User_Manual&amp;diff=1182</id>
		<title>RC44 User Manual</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.silbonetworks.com/index.php?title=RC44_User_Manual&amp;diff=1182"/>
		<updated>2024-09-03T05:09:35Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tanisha: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;This page contains the user manual for RC44.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Connecting with the device to the System (Laptop/Desktop).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To log in to SILBO_RC44 by connecting the router to your laptop or desktop via LAN or using Wi-Fi, please follow the steps below. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Connecting via LAN:&#039;&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Connect your laptop&#039;s LAN port to one of the router&#039;s LAN interfaces. Ensure that you select any LAN interface (there are two available) while making sure the WAN interface is not used. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
                                                                                                                                                          &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;How to connect with the SILBO_RC44&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;application&#039;&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the LAN connection is established between the device and the laptop or the desktop&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please open the command prompt and ping go get the ip config of that device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Type the command &#039;&#039;&#039;Ipconfig&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:How_to_connect_with_the_SILBO_RB44_application.png|alt=How to connect with the SILBO RB44 application|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It will provide the Ip address/url of that device through which the application can be accessed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Connecting_via_LAN_RB44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Log In==&lt;br /&gt;
Open the web browser and type the IP address in the URL.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It will show the log in page of the application.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Log In.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Give the valid credentials for the username and password to login to the application page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user credentials are provided it will direct to the landing page of the application.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Login Dashboard RC44.png|frameless|636x636px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The “Status” landing page shows all the detailed specification of the device like system, memory storage and connection tracking etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The application is divided in to 6 Modules.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Info&lt;br /&gt;
* Settings&lt;br /&gt;
* Maintenance&lt;br /&gt;
* Status&lt;br /&gt;
* Features&lt;br /&gt;
* Logout&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==1.Info==&lt;br /&gt;
The “Info” module provides the information about the devices to the user.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It provides all the specification related to the hardware, firmware, Networks and the Connection uptimes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It has 3 submodules.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Overview&lt;br /&gt;
* System Log&lt;br /&gt;
* Kernel Log&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Info dashboard RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===1.1 Overview===&lt;br /&gt;
In overview module it displays all the specification categorically of a device like System, Memory, storage, Connection tracking, DHCP Lease.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Login Dashboard RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;System&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this section it displays the hardware configured specification of the device.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Info system RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The specifications details are as follows,&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&lt;br /&gt;
!SN&lt;br /&gt;
!Field name &lt;br /&gt;
!Sample value&lt;br /&gt;
!Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Hostname&lt;br /&gt;
|22B09230239&lt;br /&gt;
|This field  displays the router serial number of the device&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Model&lt;br /&gt;
|Silbo_RC44- EC200A&lt;br /&gt;
|This field  displays the model number of the device&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Firmware Version and IPK Version&lt;br /&gt;
|1.16_1.13_RC3&lt;br /&gt;
|This field  displays the firmware version and IPK version&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Kernel Version&lt;br /&gt;
|4.14.180&lt;br /&gt;
|This field  displays the kernel version of the device&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Local Time&lt;br /&gt;
|Monday, July 1, 2024, at 05:43:58 PM&lt;br /&gt;
|This field  displays the local time&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Uptime&lt;br /&gt;
|0h 7m 29s&lt;br /&gt;
|This field  displays the uptime of the device&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|Load Average&lt;br /&gt;
|1.73 1.87 1.04&lt;br /&gt;
|This field  displays the average load&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Memory&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this section it displays the memory configured specification of the device.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Memory Dashboard RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The specifications details are as follows.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Total Available&lt;br /&gt;
|68676 kB / 124208 kB (55%)&lt;br /&gt;
|This field  displays the total availability of memory space in the device&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Free&lt;br /&gt;
|59344 kB / 124208 kB (47%)&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the  Free memory space in the device&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Cached&lt;br /&gt;
|312 kB / 124208 kB (0%)&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the  Cached memory space in the device&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Buffered&lt;br /&gt;
|9332 kB / 124208 kB (7%)&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the  Buffered memory space in the device&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Storage&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this section it displays the status of storage as root and temporary usage specification of the device.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Storage Dashboard RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The specifications details are as follows.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Root Usage&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
796 kB / 15488 kB (5%)&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays  the total root usage of the device&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Temporary  Usage&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
312 kB / 62104 kB (0%)&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the total temporary  usage of the device&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Connection Tracking&#039;&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this section it displays the status of connection tracking for the device.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Connection Tracking RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The specifications details are as follows.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Active Connection&lt;br /&gt;
|48 / 16384 (0%)&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the active connection of the device.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;DHCP Leases&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this section, it displays the DHCP lease of the temporary assignment of an IP address to a device on the network.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:DCHP Leases RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The specifications details are as follows.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Host Name&lt;br /&gt;
|KermaniK-LT&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays  the configured Host Name/User Name for that device.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|IPv4-Address&lt;br /&gt;
|192.168.10.147&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the IP  address of the device.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|MAC-Address&lt;br /&gt;
|34:73:5a:bb: ab:7a&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the MAC-Address  of the device.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Lease time remaining&lt;br /&gt;
|11h 53m 49s&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the lease  time remaining for the device.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===1.2 System Log===&lt;br /&gt;
This page provides on screen System logging information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user gets to view the system logs &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:System Log.png|frameless|617x617px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===1.3 Kernel Log===&lt;br /&gt;
This page provides on-screen Kernel logging information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this page, the user gets to view the Kernel logs&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Kernel Log.png|frameless|621x621px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==2. Setting==&lt;br /&gt;
In this “Setting” module the user can Configure/update all the required parameters related to Network, SIM Switch, Internet, VPN, Firewall, Loopback Rule, Remote monitoring, Tunnel as per requirement.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
IT consist of 8 submodules.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Network&lt;br /&gt;
* Sim Switch&lt;br /&gt;
* Internet&lt;br /&gt;
* VPN&lt;br /&gt;
* Firewall&lt;br /&gt;
* Loopback Rule&lt;br /&gt;
* Remote Monitoring&lt;br /&gt;
* Tunnel&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Settings.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===2.1 Network===&lt;br /&gt;
In this section the user does all the setting related configuration with reference to network like Ethernet Setting, Cellular Setting, Band lock and Operator Lock, Wi-Fi, Guest Wi-Fi, Wireless Schedule, SMS Setting, Loopback IP.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Network Dashboard RC44.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Ethernet Setting&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this page it will display all the configured port that is attached with the device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For this device 3 ports are configured. Ethernet mode can be configured as WAN and as LAN as well. Ethernet LAN Connection settings can be configured as DHCP server or Static.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Ethernet Settings RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;For port 3 setting&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Kindly select the option &#039;&#039;&#039;LAN4&#039;&#039;&#039; for &#039;&#039;&#039;Port 3 mode LAN/WAN&#039;&#039;&#039;. Based on the option selected the filed will also changes the user needs to configure all the required field and click on the save to save the required fields.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Ethernet Settings RC44 part 2.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Port 3 mode LAN/WAN&lt;br /&gt;
|LAN&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the port mode selection&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Port 3 Ethernet Protocol [LAN Eth0.1]&lt;br /&gt;
|DHCP Server&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the Ethernet mode selection&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Port 3 DHCP Server IP&lt;br /&gt;
|192.168.10.1&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays DHCP server IP configured.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Port 3 DHCP Netmask&lt;br /&gt;
|255.255.255.0&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays DHCP server Netmask address configured&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Port 3 DHCP Start Address&lt;br /&gt;
|100&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays DHCP server  start address configured&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Port 3 DHCP Limit&lt;br /&gt;
|50&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays DHCP server  limit&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Kindly select the option &#039;&#039;&#039;EWAN&#039;&#039;&#039; for &#039;&#039;&#039;Port 3 mode LAN/WAN&#039;&#039;&#039;. Based on the option selected the filed will also changes the user needs to configure all the required field and click on the save to save the required fields.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:EWAN Port 3 Configuration RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Port 3 mode LAN/WAN&lt;br /&gt;
|EWAN&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the port mode selection&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Ethernet Protocol Port 3 WAN&lt;br /&gt;
|DHCP  client&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the client&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Gateway&lt;br /&gt;
|192.168.1.1&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays gateway address  configured&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the save once all the configuration is done and click on the update button to update all the information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;SW_LAN settings&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this part the user can configure the setting for SW_LAN &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SW LAN settings RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|SW_LAN Ethernet Protocol&lt;br /&gt;
|DHCP  Server&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the  Ethernet mode selection&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|SW_LAN DHCP Server IP&lt;br /&gt;
|192.168.10.1&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays DHCP server IP  configured.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|SW_LAN  DHCP Netmask&lt;br /&gt;
|255.255.255.0&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays DHCP server  Netmask address configured&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|SW_LAN  DHCP Start Address&lt;br /&gt;
|100&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays DHCP server  start address configured&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|SW_LAN  DHCP Limit&lt;br /&gt;
|50&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays DHCP server  limit&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|DNS  Server&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|This filed display number of DSN  server availability&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|DNS  Server Address&lt;br /&gt;
|8.8.8.8&lt;br /&gt;
|This  filed display the DSN server address.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After configuring all the required information, the user should click on the save and then click on the update to update the all the required information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Static option for SW_LAN Ethernet Protocol&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the option of static from the drop-down menu for SW_LAN Ethernet Protocol.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SW LAN settings Static Ethernet Protocol.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|SW_LAN Ethernet Protocol&lt;br /&gt;
|Static&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the  Ethernet mode selection&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|SW_LAN static IP&lt;br /&gt;
|192.168.5.1&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays static server IP  configured.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|SW_LAN  Netmask&lt;br /&gt;
|255.255.255.0&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays static server  Netmask address configured&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|DNS  Server&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|This filed display number of DSN  server availability&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|DSN  Server Address&lt;br /&gt;
|8.8.8.8&lt;br /&gt;
|This  filed display the DSN server address.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
After configuring all the required information, the user should click on the save and then click on the update to update the all the required information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Cellular Setting&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this page, the user needs to configure the various details with respect to the SIM.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
select single cellular single sim where the user must configure the APN details of the sim used for the router device. The Configurations can be done based on the SIM usage, with respect to IPV4 or IPV.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Cellular Settings RC44.png|frameless|619x619px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Cellular  Operation Mode&lt;br /&gt;
|Single Cellular with Dual Sim&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays  the cellular operation mode.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Cellular  Modem 1&lt;br /&gt;
|QuectelEC200A&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the modem name.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Network  Mode&lt;br /&gt;
|Automatic&lt;br /&gt;
|This  field displays the  Network mode selection&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM 1  Access Point Name&lt;br /&gt;
|airtelgprs.com&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the  name of the Sim 1 access point configured.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM 1  PDP Type&lt;br /&gt;
|IPV4&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays  the type of SIM 1&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM 1  Username&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|This field is optional, and the user can configure the name of  the SIM 1&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM 1  Password&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|This  field is optional, and the user can configure the password for the SIM 1&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM 1  Authentication Protocol&lt;br /&gt;
|None&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the type of  protocol is being used for SIM 1&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|9&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM 2  Access Point Name&lt;br /&gt;
|airtelgprs.com&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the name of the  Sim 2 access point configured.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|10&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM 2  PDP Type&lt;br /&gt;
|IPV4&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the type of SIM  2&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|11&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM 2  Username&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|This  field is optional, and the user can configure the name of the SIM 2&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|12&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM 2  Password&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|This  field is optional, and the user can configure the password for the SIM 2&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|13&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM 2  Authentication Protocol&lt;br /&gt;
|None&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the type of  protocol is being used for SIM 2&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|14&lt;br /&gt;
|Primary  SIM Switchback Time (In Minutes)&lt;br /&gt;
|10&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the time given  for sim to swich in between.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
After configuring all the required information, the user should click on the save and then click on the update to update the all the required information. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Band lock and Operator Lock&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this page, the user needs to configure the lock band and operator based on the service provider&#039;&#039;&#039;.&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Bands available in the drop-down list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Band lock and Operator Lock.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;2G/3G option&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2G/3G: - 3G allows additional features such as mobile internet access, video calls and mobile TV. While the main function of 2G technology is the transmission of information through voice calls.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:2G-3G option.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user should select the band check box  available for 2g/3g  from the given list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Bands available for selection under LTE for the bands available that zone.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Operator Selection Mode&#039;&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user needs to click on the check box of the “operator select enable” to select the operator.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the check box is clicked there will be a dropdown list of the operator modes from which the user needs to select the mode. The user needs to select the operator mode from the given dropdown list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Operator Selection Mode.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the user selects the mode “Manual” or “Manual-Automatic” then one more text box will appear where the user must provide the operator code.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Band lock and Operator Lock 1.png|frameless|542x542px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After configuring all the required information, the user should click on the save and then click on the update to update the all the required information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Wi-Fi Setting&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wi-Fi is a family of wireless network protocols based on the IEEE 802.11 family of standards, which are commonly used for local area network of devices and internet access, allowing nearby digital devices to exchanges data by radio waves. These are the most widely used computer network, used globally in home and small office networks to link devices and to provided internet access with wireless router and wireless access point in public places. In this router has the general setting and change country code, channel, radio mode, radio passphrase as per the requirement after clicking on enable Radio button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Wi-Fi Setting.png|frameless|585x585px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user needs to select the respective radio mode based on its need. Basically, it has 3 radio mode.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Wi-Fi Setting access Point.png|frameless|590x590px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Access Point mode:&#039;&#039;&#039; In Access Point mode, router connects to a wireless router through an Ethernet cable to extend the coverage of wireless signal to other network client.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Access Point Mode RC44.png|frameless|573x573px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Client point:&#039;&#039;&#039;  In client mode, the access point connects your wired devices to a wireless network. This mode is suitable when you have a wired device with an Ethernet port and no wireless capability, for example, a smart TV, Media Player, or Game console and you want to connect it to the internet wirelessly, select the Client Mode and give the Radio SSID &amp;amp; client passphrase&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Client Point RC44.png|frameless|587x587px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Access point and client point&#039;&#039;&#039;: select this option for both type connection, give both SSID and passphrase.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Access point and Client Point RC44.png|frameless|571x571px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After configuring all the required information, the user should click on the save and then click on the update to update the all the required information.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Radio  0 Protocol&lt;br /&gt;
|IEEE 802.11 b/g/n&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the  user should select which protocol is being used&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Country  Code&lt;br /&gt;
|INDIA&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the  user should select which county it belongs to.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Channel&lt;br /&gt;
|Auto&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user should  select the proper channel to be used.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|TX  Power&lt;br /&gt;
|100&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user should  specify the power.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Channel  Width&lt;br /&gt;
|20 MHz&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user should  select the channel width&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Radio  Mode&lt;br /&gt;
|Access  point&lt;br /&gt;
|In this drop down the user should  select the mode.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|Radio  SSID&lt;br /&gt;
|APClient_22B09230239&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user should  specify the SSID number&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|Radio  Authentication&lt;br /&gt;
|WPA2  Personal (PSK)&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user should  select the type of authentication.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|9&lt;br /&gt;
|Radio  Encryption&lt;br /&gt;
|AES&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user should  select the type of encryption required.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|10&lt;br /&gt;
|Radio  Passphrase&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user should  specify the password.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|11&lt;br /&gt;
|Radio  DHCP server IP&lt;br /&gt;
|192.168.100.1&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user should  specify the IP address of DHCP server.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|12&lt;br /&gt;
|Radio  DHCP start address&lt;br /&gt;
|100&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user should  specify the start address of the DHCP.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|13&lt;br /&gt;
|Radio  DHCP limit&lt;br /&gt;
|50&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user should  specify the limit for the DHCP.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Wireless Schedule&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wi-Fi can be automatically withdrawn based on the configuration done in this section.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user can schedule the Wi-Fi’s accessibility time during a particular period.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Wireless Schedule.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After configuring all the required information, the user should click on the save and then click on the update to update the all the required information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user can select more than one “day of the week” for scheduling the wifi working hours.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Wifi Schedule.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Loop back IP settings&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The loopback IP address, often referred to as “localhost”. it’s used to establish network connections within the same device for testing and troubleshooting purpose.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Loop back IP settings.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After configuring all the required information, the user should click on the save and then click on the update to update the all the required information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The loopback IP address, commonly represented as 127.0.0.1, is a special address used for testing network connectivity on a local machine. It allows a device to send network messages to itself without involving external networks, making it useful for troubleshooting and diagnostics.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
However, this IP can be changed as per requirement and to do that, Navigating to Setting&amp;gt;&amp;gt;Network configuration&amp;gt;&amp;gt; Loopback IP settings can be changed/updated.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Above screenshot shows the configuration window from GUI/WebUI&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;SMS Settings&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
User needs to enable SMS option in SMS settings page. This option is to validate the mobile numbers using which controlling commands could be sent to the router device. 1 to 5 mobile numbers can be authenticated by choosing from “Select Valid SMS user numbers” and adding the mobile numbers below respectively. API key is the pass key used in the commands while sending SMS. Displayed in the below screen is the default API key which can be edited and changed as per choice.   After addition of the mobile numbers user needs to click on save button for changes to take place.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SMS Settings.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select valid user number max. 5 and add authorized phone number in the main menu where want to find the alert and click on SMS Response Enable, save and update button, now send SMS commands from the configured mobile number. Once the commands are received from the user phone number the board send acknowledgement as per the commands after that it will send the router’s status once it has rebooted and is operational again. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mentioned below are a few commands which can be sent from the configured mobile number to the router device. Below two commands are One for rebooting the router device and another to get the uptime.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1) {&amp;quot;device&amp;quot;:[&amp;quot;passkey&amp;quot;,&amp;quot;API key&amp;quot;],&amp;quot;command&amp;quot;:&amp;quot;reboot&amp;quot;,&amp;quot;arguments&amp;quot;:&amp;quot;hardware&amp;quot;}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2) {&amp;quot;device&amp;quot;:[&amp;quot;passkey &amp;quot;,&amp;quot;API key&amp;quot;],&amp;quot;command&amp;quot;:&amp;quot;uptime&amp;quot;}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After configuring all the required information, the user should click on the save and then click on the update to update the all the required information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===2.2 SIM===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user needs to configure the Sim for the given device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SIM Switch.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user needs to select from the drop-down menu on which basis the sim needs to be switched.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Sim Switch Configuration.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user selects on “&#039;&#039;&#039;signal strength&#039;&#039;&#039;” then the parameters related to signal strength will pop up and the user needs to configure the parameters based on the requirement &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Signal Strength.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Threshold RSRP&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This Needs to be set appropriately. Incorrect setting may cause unnecessary SIM switching. ( In General a BAD RSRP value range is -140 to -115 and FAIR RSRP value range is -115 to -105).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Threshold SINR&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This Needs to be set appropriately. Incorrect setting may cause unnecessary SIM switching. ( In General a BAD SNR value range is -20 to 0 and FAIR SNR value range is 0 to 13)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user selects on “&#039;&#039;&#039;Data Limit&#039;&#039;&#039;” then the parameters related to Data Limit will pop up and the user needs to configure the parameters based on the requirement.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Data limit.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM Switch Based on&lt;br /&gt;
|Data Limit&lt;br /&gt;
|The user needs to select from the  drop-down menu on what basis the sim needs to be switched.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM 1 Data Usage Limit (In MB)&lt;br /&gt;
|1000&lt;br /&gt;
|The user needs to set the limit for the data  usage for SIM 1.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM 2 Data Usage Limit (In MB)&lt;br /&gt;
|1000&lt;br /&gt;
|The user needs to set the limit for the data  usage for SIM 2.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Periodicity&lt;br /&gt;
|Daily&lt;br /&gt;
|The user needs to set the pattern/frequency to  switch the sims.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Day Of Month&lt;br /&gt;
|16&lt;br /&gt;
|The user needs to set the day for switching the  sim.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
After configuring all the required information, the user should click on the save.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===2.3 Internet===&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user needs to configure the internet connection to set the priority from the various options. The user should decide what kind of connection it needs to provide to the device like LAN, WAN etc. Once the connections are configured then click on save option and then on update.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Internet.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the user needs to edit on the existing configuration, then the user should click on the “EDIT” button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Network Edit Options.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Name&lt;br /&gt;
|EWAN2&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the name of the WAN  connection&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Priority&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown box the user need to select  the priority.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Select Track IP Numbers&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user needs to select the  track number for the Ips.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|TrackIP1&lt;br /&gt;
|8.8.8.8&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text field the user needs to set the IP  address for the track 1&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|TrackIP2&lt;br /&gt;
|8.8.4.4&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text field the user needs to set the IP  address for the track 1&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Reliability&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Not sure what needs to be written&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|Count&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Not sure what needs to be written&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|Up&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Not sure what needs to be written&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|9&lt;br /&gt;
|Down&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Not sure what needs to be written&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user is done with modification click on the save button to save all the changes and then click on the update button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===2.4 VPN===&lt;br /&gt;
VPN stands for &#039;&#039;&#039;Virtual Private Network&#039;&#039;&#039;, it establishes a connection between the system and a remote server, which is owned by a VPN provider.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Creating a point-to-point tunnel that encrypts the personal data, masks the IP address, and allows to block the required website to blocks via firewalls on the internet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:VPN Settings RC44.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are 5 types of setting available under VPN configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* General Settings&lt;br /&gt;
* IPSEC&lt;br /&gt;
* Open VPN&lt;br /&gt;
* Wireguard&lt;br /&gt;
* Zerotier&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;General Settings&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user must choose which type of VPN connection is required for the device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user must select from IPSEC or Open VPN based on its requirement. If required, the user can select for both the options. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:VPN General Settings RC44.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user needs to click on the save after selecting the option based on its requirement.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;IPSEC&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
IPSEC VPN is used to create a VPN connection between local and remote networks. To use IPSEC VPN, the user should check that both local and remote routers support IPSEC VPN feature.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user can add/edit/delete the IPSEC VPN connection for the device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:VPN IPSEC changes RC44.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user needs to click on the update button once the required configuration is completed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In IPSEC the user needs to click on edit button to edit the configuration of an existing VPN connection.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:VPN Edit Options.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the save button after the required configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The tunnel will show established, showing the connection has been made.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:IPSEC .png|thumb|631x631px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|IPSEC&lt;br /&gt;
|Site to Site VPN&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user should select  the IPSEC connection type.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|IPSEC Role&lt;br /&gt;
|Client/Server&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown box the user needs to select  the IPSEC role.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Connection Type&lt;br /&gt;
|Tunnel&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user needs to select the connection  type. The user should select on the connection enable check box.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Connection mode&lt;br /&gt;
|start&lt;br /&gt;
|In this drop down list the user should select  the mode for the connection. it will have route/add/start/trap mode&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Remote Server IP&lt;br /&gt;
|1.1.1.1&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text field the user needs to set the IP  address for the remote server.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Local ID&lt;br /&gt;
|g300&lt;br /&gt;
|The user needs to set the local id.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|No. of local subnets&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user needs to select how  many subnets it will be connected.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|Local Subnet 1&lt;br /&gt;
|192.168.11.1/24&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user needs to put the  address of the local subnet.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|9&lt;br /&gt;
|Remote id&lt;br /&gt;
|sophos&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user needs to put the id  of the remote connection.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|10&lt;br /&gt;
|No of remote subnet&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user needs to select how  many subnets it will be connected remotely.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|11&lt;br /&gt;
|Remote subnet&lt;br /&gt;
|192.168.10.0/24&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user needs to put the  address of the remote subnet.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|12&lt;br /&gt;
|Key exchange&lt;br /&gt;
|Ikev1&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user should select the  which key exchange version to be selected.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|13&lt;br /&gt;
|Aggressive&lt;br /&gt;
|Yes/No&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user should select either  yes or no .&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|14&lt;br /&gt;
|IKE lifetime&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|Fill according to user’s requirements.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|15&lt;br /&gt;
|Lifetime in seconds&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Fill according to user’s requirements.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|16&lt;br /&gt;
|Enable DPD Detection&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;1&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
0&lt;br /&gt;
|Indicates  whether Dead Peer Detection is enabled to detect a lost connection. Enable  this option as per server-side settings.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|17&lt;br /&gt;
|Time Interval (In Seconds)&lt;br /&gt;
|60&lt;br /&gt;
|This option  is available only if DPD Detection is enabled. The time interval is the  interval for DPD checks.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|18&lt;br /&gt;
|Action&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Restart&#039;&#039;&#039;/clear/hold/&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
trap/start&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Restart&#039;&#039;&#039;: Action to take when  DPD detects a lost connection (restart the connection). Select as per  server-side setting.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|19&lt;br /&gt;
|Authentication Method&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;PSK&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;PSK&#039;&#039;&#039;: Pre-shared key is used  for authentication. Select this option for authentication as per sever side  setting.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|20&lt;br /&gt;
|Multiple Secrets&lt;br /&gt;
|1/&#039;&#039;&#039;0&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|Indicates  whether multiple PSK secrets are used. Enable only if required.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|21&lt;br /&gt;
|PSK Value&lt;br /&gt;
|******&lt;br /&gt;
|Pre-shared  key value (masked for security).&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;*Below are Phase I and Phase II settings details*&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&lt;br /&gt;
! colspan=&amp;quot;4&amp;quot; |                                                        &#039;&#039;&#039;Proposal settings Phase I&#039;&#039;&#039;                                                                                                                     &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|22            &lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Encryption Algorithm&#039;&#039;&#039;                                                 &lt;br /&gt;
|AES 128&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AES 192&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;AES 256&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3DES                                                                                                                                     &lt;br /&gt;
|                                                                                                                                     &#039;&#039;&#039;AES 256&#039;&#039;&#039;: Encryption algorithm  for Phase I. Select as per server-side configuration. Both server and client  should have same configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|23&lt;br /&gt;
|Authentication Phase I&lt;br /&gt;
|SHA1&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MD5&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SHA 256&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SHA 384&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;SHA 512&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;SHA 512&#039;&#039;&#039;: Authentication  algorithm for Phase I.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select as per  server-side configuration. Both server and client should have same configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|24&lt;br /&gt;
|DH Group&lt;br /&gt;
|MODP768(group1)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MODP1024(group2)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MODP1536(group5)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;MODP2048(group14)&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MODP3072(group15)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MODP4096(group16)&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;MODP2048 (group14)&#039;&#039;&#039;:  Diffie-Hellman group for key exchange.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select as per  server-side configuration. Both server and client should have same  configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| colspan=&amp;quot;4&amp;quot; |                                                                                                                                                                 &#039;&#039;&#039;Proposal settings Phase II&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|25&lt;br /&gt;
|Hash Algorithm&lt;br /&gt;
|AES 128&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AES 192&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;AES 256&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3DES&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;AES 256&#039;&#039;&#039;: Encryption algorithm  for Phase II. Select as per server-side configuration. Both server and client  should have same configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|26&lt;br /&gt;
|Authentication Phase II&lt;br /&gt;
|SHA1&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MD5&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SHA 256&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SHA 384&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;SHA 512&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;SHA 512&#039;&#039;&#039;: Authentication  algorithm for Phase II.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select as per  server-side configuration. Both server and client should have same  configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|27&lt;br /&gt;
|PFS Group&lt;br /&gt;
|MODP768(group1)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MODP1024(group2)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MODP1536(group5)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;MODP2048(group14)&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MODP3072(group15)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MODP4096(group16)&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;MODP2048 (group14)&#039;&#039;&#039;: Perfect  Forward Secrecy group.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select as per  server-side configuration. Both server and client should have same  configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Open VPN&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the OpenVPN connection, the home network can act as a server, and the remote device can access the server through the router which acts as an OpenVPN Server gateway. To use the VPN feature, the user should enable OpenVPN Server on the router, and install and run VPN client software on the remote device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Open VPN Settings RC44.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user needs to “upload” the respective certificate from a valid path and then click on the “Update.”&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the OpenVPN connection starts the user will get an option to enable/disable the VPN connection as and when required.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By clicking on the enable/disable button, the user can start/stop the VPN connection.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Open VPN Settings RC44 Dashboard.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
VPN has been established.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;WireGuard:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;WireGuard&#039;&#039;&#039; is simple, fast, lean, and modern VPN that utilizes secure and trusted cryptography.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on “Edit” to start configurations as needed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Wire Guard RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;EDIT:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Wire Guard RC44 Setttings.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the save button after the required configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample Value     &lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Wireguard Role&lt;br /&gt;
|Client/Server&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown box the user needs to select  the wireguard role.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Listen Port&lt;br /&gt;
|51820&lt;br /&gt;
|The UDP port on which the WireGuard client  listens for incoming connections.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|IP Addresses&lt;br /&gt;
|10.0.0.1/24&lt;br /&gt;
|The IP  address and subnet mask assigned to the WireGuard client&#039;s interface. This  address is used within the VPN.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Allowed PeerIPs&lt;br /&gt;
|10.1.1.1&lt;br /&gt;
|The IP  address of the allowed peer(s) that can connect to this WireGuard client.  This might need adjustment based on the actual peer IPs used in the network.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Endpoint HostIP&lt;br /&gt;
|10.1.1.1&lt;br /&gt;
|The IP  address of the WireGuard server (the endpoint to which the client connects).&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Endpoint HostPort&lt;br /&gt;
|51820&lt;br /&gt;
|The port on  the WireGuard server to which the client connects.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|PeerPublicKey&lt;br /&gt;
|*****&lt;br /&gt;
|The public  key of the peer (the server) the client is connecting to. This key is part of  the public-private key pair used in WireGuard for encryption and  authentication.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|Enable Preshared key&lt;br /&gt;
|Yes/No&lt;br /&gt;
|This option  indicates that a pre-shared key (PSK) is used in addition to the  public-private key pair for an extra layer of security.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|9&lt;br /&gt;
|Preshared key&lt;br /&gt;
|*****&lt;br /&gt;
|The actual  pre-shared key value shared between the client and the server. This option  appears only if you have enabled preshared key.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Zerotier:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ZeroTier is a tool that lets you create your own private network over the internet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Go to ZeroTier Central and sign up for a free account. In ZeroTier Central, click on &amp;quot;Create a Network&amp;quot;. This will generate a unique 16-digit network ID for your new network.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Go to settings =&amp;gt; VPN, in general settings, enable ZeroTier and save.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Zerotier Settings RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Copy and paste the unique 16-digit network ID in the edit section.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Zero Seetings Dashboard RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Zerotier Dashboard.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the save button after the required configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field Name    &lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  Value           &lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|NetworkID&lt;br /&gt;
|Ad2769hfkw2345f4&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown box the user needs to paste  the unique 16-digit network id.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Listen Port&lt;br /&gt;
|9993&lt;br /&gt;
|Default&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== 2.5 Firewall ===&lt;br /&gt;
A firewall is a layer of security between the network and the Internet. Since a router is the main connection from a network to the Internet, the firewall function is merged into this device. Every network should have a firewall to protect its privacy.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Firewall.png|frameless|635x635px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are 6 types of setting available under firewall.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* General Settings&lt;br /&gt;
* Port forwards&lt;br /&gt;
* Traffic Rules&lt;br /&gt;
* SNAT traffic Rules&lt;br /&gt;
* Parental Control&lt;br /&gt;
* Zone Forwarding&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;General Setting&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
General settings are subdivided into 2 parts,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1.) General settings&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In general settings, the settings that are made are default settings and can be changed according to user’s preference.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Firewall General Settings.png|frameless|622x622px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Specification details are below:&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;SN&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Field Name&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Sample Value&#039;&#039;&#039;      &lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Description&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Enable SYN-flood  protection&lt;br /&gt;
|Enabled&lt;br /&gt;
|This is  enabled by default; setting can be changed if required.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Disable IPV6&lt;br /&gt;
|Disabled&lt;br /&gt;
|This is  enabled by default; setting can be changed if required.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Drop invalid packets&lt;br /&gt;
|Disabled&lt;br /&gt;
|This is  enabled by default; setting can be changed if required.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|TCP SYN Cookies&lt;br /&gt;
|Disabled&lt;br /&gt;
|This is  enabled by default; setting can be changed if required.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Input&lt;br /&gt;
|Reject/Accept&lt;br /&gt;
|By  default, the setting is ‘Reject’ but this needs to be changed to ‘Accept’  compulsory.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Output&lt;br /&gt;
|Reject/Accept&lt;br /&gt;
|By  default, the setting is ‘Reject’ but this needs to be changed to ‘Accept’  compulsory.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|Forward&lt;br /&gt;
|Reject/Accept&lt;br /&gt;
|By  default, the setting is ‘Reject’ but this needs to be changed to ‘Accept’  compulsory.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2.) Zone settings&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In zone settings, there’s an option to add “New Zone”, according to user’s requirement.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Zone settings.png|thumb|628x628px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Port Forwards:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Port forwarding is a feature in a router or gateway that allows external devices to access services on a private network.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It maps an external port on the router to an internal IP address and port on the local network, enabling applications such as gaming servers, web servers, or remote desktop connections to be accessed from outside the network.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This helps in directing incoming traffic to the correct device within a local network based on the port number, enhancing connectivity and accessibility.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Firewall Port Forward.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;EDIT&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Firewall Edit Option RC44.png|frameless|622x622px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the save button after the required configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Name&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Web_Server_Forward&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|Field must  not be empty. Provide a name for the rule to easily identify it.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Protocol&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;TCP+UDP&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|Select the protocol  for the rule.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Options  typically include TCP+UDP, TCP, UDP, ICMP, Custom.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Source zone&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;SW_LAN&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|Select the  source zone where the traffic is originating from. Options typically include EWAN2,SW_LAN,CWAN1,CWAN1_0,CWAN1_1,VPN&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Source MAC address [optional]&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;any&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;any&#039;&#039;&#039;: Leave as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;any&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; if you don&#039;t want to specify a MAC address.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Source IP address[optional]&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: Leave blank if not needed.&lt;br /&gt;
|Optionally  specify an IP address or range.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Source port&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;80, 443&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;  (if matching traffic for web server ports)&lt;br /&gt;
|Specify the  source port or port range.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|Destination zone&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;SW_LAN&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|Select the  destination zone where the traffic is heading to.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|Destination IP address&lt;br /&gt;
|Leave blank if not needed.&lt;br /&gt;
|Optionally specify  the destination IP address or range.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|9&lt;br /&gt;
|Destination port&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;80&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;  (if redirecting to a web server port)&lt;br /&gt;
|Specify the  destination port or port range.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Traffic Rule:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;Traffic rules&amp;quot; refer to the policies and regulations that govern the flow of data packets within a network.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To allow new traffic, click on “Add and Edit” in “New Traffic Rule”.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Firewall Traffic Rule.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;EDIT&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Firewall Traffic Rule Edit.png|frameless|621x621px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Specification details are below:&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample Value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Name&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: Allow_HTTP_and_HTTPS&lt;br /&gt;
|Field must  not be empty: Provide a descriptive name for the traffic rule.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Restrict to Address Family&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|1.       Options:  IPv4, IPv6&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2.       Example:  IPv4 if dealing with typical internet traffic.&lt;br /&gt;
|Select the  address family to generate iptables rules for.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Protocol&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: TCP+UDP&lt;br /&gt;
|TCP+UDP:  Match incoming traffic using the given protocol.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Match ICMP Type&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: any&lt;br /&gt;
|Match all  ICMP types if set to any. Specific types can be chosen if needed.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Source Zone&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: LAN&lt;br /&gt;
|Specifies the  traffic source zone.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Enable DDoS Prevention&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: ‘Checked’ if you want to enable DDoS prevention  measures&lt;br /&gt;
|Enable or  disable Distributed Denial of Service (DDoS) prevention.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|Source MAC Address&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: any&lt;br /&gt;
|any: Match  traffic from any MAC address or specify a particular MAC address.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|Source Address&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: 192.168.1.0/24&lt;br /&gt;
|Match  incoming traffic from the specified source IP address or range.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|9&lt;br /&gt;
|Source Port&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: any if all source ports should be matched&lt;br /&gt;
|any: Match  incoming traffic from the specified source port or port range.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|10&lt;br /&gt;
|Destination Zone&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: WAN&lt;br /&gt;
|Specifies the  traffic destination zone.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|11&lt;br /&gt;
|Action&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: ACCEPT&lt;br /&gt;
|Options:  ACCEPT, DROP, REJECT. Specify the action to take for matched traffic.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|12&lt;br /&gt;
|Limit&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: 10/minute to limit matches to 10 times per  minute.&lt;br /&gt;
|Maximum  average matching rate; specified as a number, with an optional /second,  /minute, /hour, or /day suffix.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|13&lt;br /&gt;
|Extra arguments&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: --log-prefix &amp;quot;Blocked: &amp;quot; to add a log  prefix to log messages for this rule.&lt;br /&gt;
|Passes  additional arguments to iptables. Use with care as it can significantly alter  rule behaviour.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
Click on save once configured.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;SNAT Traffic Rule:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For configuring SNAT (Source Network Address Translation) traffic rules, you can control how outbound traffic from your local network is translated to a different IP address as it exits the network.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To add new source NAT,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on “ADD” in “New Source NAT:”&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SNAT Traffic Rule.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Edit&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SNAT Edit Options RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Specification details are below:&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Name&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: SNAT_WAN_to_LAN&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Field must  not be empty&#039;&#039;&#039;: Provide a unique and descriptive name for the SNAT rule.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Protocol&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: TCP+UDP&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;TCP+UDP&#039;&#039;&#039;:  Select the protocols that the SNAT rule will apply to.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Source Zone&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: wan&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;wan&#039;&#039;&#039;:  Specifies the source zone from which the traffic originates.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Source IP Address&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: any or a specific range like 192.168.1.0/24&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;-- please  choose --&#039;&#039;&#039;: Specify the source IP address or range. Leave empty if the  rule applies to any source IP.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Source Port&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: any&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;any&#039;&#039;&#039;:  Specify the source port or port range from which the traffic originates.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Destination Zone&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: lan&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;lan&#039;&#039;&#039;:  Specifies the destination zone to which the traffic is directed.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|Destination IP Address&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: any or a specific IP like 192.168.1.100&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;-- please  choose --&#039;&#039;&#039;: Specify the destination IP address or range. Leave empty if  the rule applies to any destination IP.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|Destination port&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: any&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;any&#039;&#039;&#039;:  Specify the destination port or port range to which the traffic is directed.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|9&lt;br /&gt;
|SNAT IP Address&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: 203.0.113.5 (an external IP address)&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;-- please  choose --&#039;&#039;&#039;: Specify the IP address to which the source IP should be  translated.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|10&lt;br /&gt;
|SNAT Port&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: Leave empty if not needed, or specify a port  like ‘12345’&lt;br /&gt;
|Optionally,  rewrite matched traffic to a specific source port. Leave empty to only  rewrite the IP address.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|11&lt;br /&gt;
|Extra Arguments&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: --log-prefix &amp;quot;SNAT_traffic: &amp;quot; (to add  a log prefix to log messages for this rule)&lt;br /&gt;
|Pass  additional arguments to iptables. Use with care as it can significantly alter  rule behaviour.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
Click on save once configured.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Parental Control:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For configuring parental control rules, you want to set restrictions based on time, source, and destination zones, as well as specific devices.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To add parental control in firewall,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on “Add and Edit” in “New parental control:” field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Parental Control.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Edit&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Parental Control Edit Options RC44.png|frameless|622x622px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Specification details are given below:&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  Name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  Value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Name&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  Parental_Control_Sunday&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Field must  not be empty&#039;&#039;&#039;: Provide a unique and descriptive name for the parental  control rule.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Proto&lt;br /&gt;
|all&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;all&#039;&#039;&#039;:  This specifies that the rule will apply to all protocols.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Source Zone&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: lan&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Field must  not be empty&#039;&#039;&#039;: Please look at Firewall-&amp;gt;Zone Settings to find zone  names.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Destination  Zone&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: wan&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Field must  not be empty&#039;&#039;&#039;: Please look at Firewall-&amp;gt;Zone Settings to find zone  names.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Source MAC  Address&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  00:1A:2B:3C:4D:5E&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Field&#039;&#039;&#039;:  Enter the MAC address of the device you want to apply the parental control  rule to. This is useful for restricting specific devices.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Target&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  Reject&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Accept&#039;&#039;&#039;:  This specifies the action to take. For parental controls, you might want to  use ‘Reject’ or ‘Drop’ to block traffic.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|Weekdays&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  Sunday&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Sunday&#039;&#039;&#039;:  Specify the days of the week when the rule should be active.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|Month Days&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: All&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;All:&#039;&#039;&#039; Specify  the days of the month when the rule should be active.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|9&lt;br /&gt;
|Start Time (hh:mm:ss)&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  18:00:00 (6:00 PM)&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Field must  not be empty:&#039;&#039;&#039; Specify the start time when the rule should begin to apply.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|10&lt;br /&gt;
|Stop Time  (hh:mm:ss)&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  22:00:00 (10:00 PM)&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Field must  not be empty:&#039;&#039;&#039; Specify the stop time when the rule should end.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
Click on save once configured.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Zone Forwarding:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Zone forwarding in network configuration allows traffic to be directed from one zone to another.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To ADD new zone,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on “Add” in “New Zone Forward:” field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Zone Forwarding RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;EDIT&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Zone Forwarding editing Options RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Specification details are below:&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  Name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  Value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Source Zone&lt;br /&gt;
|Example options: lan, wan, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;--please  choose--&#039;&#039;&#039;: Select the source zone from which the traffic originates.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Destination Zone&lt;br /&gt;
|Example options: lan, wan, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;--please  choose--&#039;&#039;&#039;: Select the destination zone to which the traffic is directed.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
Click on save once configured.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===2.6 Loopback Rule===&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user can configure the port where he want to forward the traffic to. Here the user can add/edit/delete different port ports as per the requirement. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Loopback Rule.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user should click on ‘add’ and then ‘edit’ to do the required changes in the port and enter the valid information in each section to configure the port for forwarding.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Loopback Rule edit.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Specification details are given below:&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  Name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  Value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Name&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: loopback&lt;br /&gt;
|Provide a  descriptive name for the rule.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Protocol&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: TCP+UDP&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;TCP+UDP&#039;&#039;&#039;:  Select the protocols that the rule will apply to.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Source IP Address [Optional]&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: any or a specific IP range like 192.168.1.0/24&lt;br /&gt;
|Optionally  specify the source IP address or range. Leave empty if the rule should apply  to any source IP.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Source Port [Optional]&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: any&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;any&#039;&#039;&#039;:  Specify the source port or port range from which the traffic originates. any  allows traffic from all ports.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Loopback IP Address&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: 127.0.0.1&lt;br /&gt;
|Specify the  loopback IP address. Typically, this is 127.0.0.1.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Port&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: any&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;any&#039;&#039;&#039;:  Specify the destination port or port range to which the traffic is directed.  any allows traffic to all ports.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|Action&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: DNAT&lt;br /&gt;
|This  specifies the action to take either DNAT or SNAT.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|Internal IP Address&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: 192.168.1.100&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Field must  not be empty&#039;&#039;&#039;: Specify the internal IP address to which the traffic should  be redirected.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|9&lt;br /&gt;
|Internal Port&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: any&lt;br /&gt;
|Redirect  matched incoming traffic to the given port on the internal host.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user is done with the required configurations, user should click save button and then click on the update to save the changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===2.7 Remote Monitoring===&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user can select which equipment needs to be monitored remotely.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user selects the type of RMS click on save.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Remote Monitoring.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;NMS:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user should type the server IP or domain name in the URL then click on save.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on upload and start (Once key is uploaded and this option is clicked, NMS automatically starts, and this router device gets registered with the NMS server provided).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:NMS.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;TR069&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To enable the TR069 the user needs to click on the enable check box.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:TR069.png|frameless|582x582px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user clicks on the check box of enable it will display all the required filed to configured.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Remote Monitoring Tr-069.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Specification details are given below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field Name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample Value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Serving  Interval&lt;br /&gt;
|300&lt;br /&gt;
|A value of 300 seconds means the device  will check in with the ACS (auto-configuration servers) every 5 minutes.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Interface&lt;br /&gt;
|This can  be something like eth0 or wan.&lt;br /&gt;
|This specifies the network interface  used for TR-069 communication.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Username&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: User&lt;br /&gt;
|The username used to authenticate with  the ACS.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Password&lt;br /&gt;
|••••&lt;br /&gt;
|The password used to authenticate with  the ACS.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|URL&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;http://example.com&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|The URL of the ACS. This is where the  CPE (customer-premises equipment) will send its requests and where it will  receive configurations and updates from.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
The user should fill all the required fields and click on the save button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===2.8 Tunnel===&lt;br /&gt;
Tunnels are a method of transporting data across a network using protocols which are not supported by that network.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is further categorised into 3 sections,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1.) General Settings&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2.) GRE Tunnel&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3.) IPIP Tunnel&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tunnel Settings.png|frameless|621x621px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;General Settings&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user needs to select under which type of tunnel it needs to send the data.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tunnel General Settings.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user selects the type of tunnel then click in the save button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;GRE Tunnel:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A GRE (Generic Routing Encapsulation) tunnel configuration involves setting up a virtual point-to-point connection between two endpoints over an IP network.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here the user can add/edit/delete the details of the tunnel.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:GRE Tunnel 1.png|thumb|633x633px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the required update is done then click on update to save the changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;EDIT:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:GRE Tunnel.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here the user can add/edit/delete the details of the tunnel. Once the required update is done then it needs to click on update to save the changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tunnel Configuration.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;IPIP Tunnel&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user needs to add all the details of IPIP tunnels.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user configured all the required fields then it needs to click on the save. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:IPIP Tunnel.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here the user can add/edit/delete the details of the tunnel. Once the required update is done then it needs to click on update to save the changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Ipip config.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==3 Maintenance==&lt;br /&gt;
In this module the user can configure/upgrade/modify the settings related to system, password, firmware and monitoring.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Maintenance System.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It includes below submodules.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* General&lt;br /&gt;
* Password&lt;br /&gt;
* Reboot&lt;br /&gt;
* Import and Export config&lt;br /&gt;
* Firmware upgrade&lt;br /&gt;
* Monitor Application&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===3.1 General===&lt;br /&gt;
In this section the user can configure the details related to time zone and host name&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Maintenance General.png|frameless|619x619px]]&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Local Time&lt;br /&gt;
|2023/12/13 12:24:11&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|It displays the system current date and  time.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|HostName&lt;br /&gt;
|31B30230298&lt;br /&gt;
|It displays the host name.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Timezone&lt;br /&gt;
|Asia/Kolkata&lt;br /&gt;
|It displays in which time zone its configured.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user configures the required details then click on the save button to save all the details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Logging&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here the user can configure the basic aspects of your device related to system.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Maintenance logging.png|frameless|608x608px]]&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|System log buffer size&lt;br /&gt;
|32&lt;br /&gt;
|This displays the log size of system buffer&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|External system log server&lt;br /&gt;
|0.0.0.0&lt;br /&gt;
|This displays the ip add of the external system  log&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|External system log server port&lt;br /&gt;
|514&lt;br /&gt;
|This displays the port number of the external  system log&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Log output level&lt;br /&gt;
|debug&lt;br /&gt;
|In this drop down the user selects the level of  the log output.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Cron Log level&lt;br /&gt;
|debug&lt;br /&gt;
|In this drop down the user selects the level of  the corn log .&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user configures the required details then click on the save button to save all the details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Language and Style&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here the user can configure the basic aspects of your device related to language.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Maintenance Language and Style.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user configures the required details then click on the save button to save all the details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===3.2 Password===&lt;br /&gt;
In this module the user can set the password for the admin credentials.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Change you password.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Specifies the password for the guest account. If the user enter a plaintext password here, it will get replaced with a crypted password on save. The new password will be effective once the user logs out and log in again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user needs to write the password in the text box and click on the save button to save the password.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===3.3 Reboot===&lt;br /&gt;
In this module the user can reboot the device remotely.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Reboot.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To start the reboot process first the user needs to fill all the required fields.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Need to select the type of reboot for the device whether it needs to be Hardware or Software reboot.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Maintenance Reboot.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Type&lt;br /&gt;
|Maintenance Reboot&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown list the user needs to  select the type of reboot is required to configure.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Reboot Type&lt;br /&gt;
|Hardware&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown list the user needs to select  the hardware or software reboot is required.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Minutes&lt;br /&gt;
|59&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user needs to configure  the min to start the reboot activity&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Hours&lt;br /&gt;
|22&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user needs to configure  the hours to start the reboot activity&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Day of Month&lt;br /&gt;
|All&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user needs to configure  the day of the month to start the reboot activity&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Month&lt;br /&gt;
|All&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user needs to configure  the month to start the reboot activity&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|Day of the week&lt;br /&gt;
|All&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user needs to configure  the week to start the reboot activity&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user fills all the required given parameters click on the save.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To start the reboot process, click on the “Reboot Now” button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===3.4 Import and Export===&lt;br /&gt;
In this section, User can Import &amp;amp; Export Configuration files of the Device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Import and Export.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
click “Export Config” to export device configuration &amp;amp; settings to a text file,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
click “Import Config” to import device configuration &amp;amp; settings from a previously exported text file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Import window.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user need to select on the choose file to and click on the apply.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===3.5 Firmware Upgrade===&lt;br /&gt;
The user can upgrade with the latest software for the existing firmware. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Frimware Upgrade.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the &#039;&#039;&#039;flash image&#039;&#039;&#039; and chose the path where the sys-upgrade file is kept and then click on flash image, it will upgrade to the latest software once the reboot is done.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Flash Image.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the &#039;&#039;&#039;Retain Config and flash&#039;&#039;&#039; and chose the path where the sys-upgrade file is kept and then click on Retain Config and flash, it will upgrade to the latest software once the reboot is done.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Flash Image.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the &#039;&#039;&#039;Factory Reset&#039;&#039;&#039; for the complete retest of the device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===3.6 Monitor Application===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Monitor Application.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Router Application Remote Configuration.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Router Remote Configuration.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==4 Status==&lt;br /&gt;
In this module the user can view the status of the router device with respect to the network, Wan, modem etc.[[File:Status.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It has 4 submodules.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Interfaces&lt;br /&gt;
* Internet&lt;br /&gt;
* Modem&lt;br /&gt;
* Route&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===4.1 Interfaces===&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user can see the traffic status for all the network through which the device works.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Status Interfaces.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Looking on the network status the user can check if the cellular or the ethernet is up.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===4.2 Internet===&lt;br /&gt;
In this submodule the user can view the status of the internet connections.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Internet Status.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
  To see the latest status of the internet connection the user needs to click on the refresh button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===4.3 Modem===&lt;br /&gt;
In this sub module the user will get to know the status of the cellular interface which is installed inside the modem. The user can view all the details related to the sim in terms of Operator, Network technology, Mobile country code, Upload bandwidth, Download Bandwidth, Frequency band, RSRP, RSRQ, RSSI &amp;amp; SNR under this page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Modem Status.png|frameless|602x602px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== 4.4 Route ===&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user can check the status of the route for the device. The ARP status can be visible in under this page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Route Status.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==5 Features==&lt;br /&gt;
In this module the user can see all the features that the router device has.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This module includes the below features.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Mac Address Binding&lt;br /&gt;
* URL Filtering&lt;br /&gt;
* Web Server&lt;br /&gt;
* Wi-Fi MacID Filtering&lt;br /&gt;
* Routing&lt;br /&gt;
* Others&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Features.png|frameless|618x618px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===5.1 Mac Address Binding===&lt;br /&gt;
Under this submodule the user can configure/update/edit the IP Address for MAC&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mac Addressing Binding.png|frameless|622x622px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user should write MAC address and then click on the add button. Once the address is added then click on the update button to save the modification.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user needs to click on the Edit button to modify the preexisting configuration. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mac Address Edit.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user modifies the MAC address /IP Address then click on the save button to save the changes done.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user can click on the deleted button to delete an existing configured device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Post all the changes the user needs to click on the update to reflect all the changes in the application.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===5.2 URL Filtering===&lt;br /&gt;
In this submodule the user should provide the URL which needs to be blocked for the device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:URL Filtering.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To add the new URL for blocking, click on the Add New button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user clicks on the Add New button a new pop will appear in that page write the URL and click on the save. The user can select the status of that URL while defining the URL.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Url Update.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To edit / delete the existing URL the user needs to click on the edit /deleted button respectively.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Edit or Delete URL.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the save after the changes are done as per the need.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== 5.3 Web Server ===&lt;br /&gt;
In this submodule the user can configure webserver related parameters.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Web server.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To configure the HTTP, click on the enable HTTP. Once the user clicks on the check box the HTTP Port text box will appear where the user needs to configure the port id.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Webserver Configuration.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on save buttons to save the changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To configure the 2nd HTTP, click on the enable HTTP. Once the user clicks on the check box the HTTP Port text box will appear where the user needs to configure the port id.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Webserver Https Redirect.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on save buttons to save the changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the “Redirect https” and “RFC1918 Filter” check box to respectively and click on the save button to save the changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To configure the NTP sync, click on the enable NTP sync. Once the user clicks on the check box the respective text boxes will appear to configure the parameters. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:RFC1918 Filter.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user configures the parameters click on the save button to save the given values.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===5.4 Wi-Fi MacID Filtering===&lt;br /&gt;
In this module the user can filter the Macids. Mac address filtering allows users to block traffic coming from certain known machines or devices.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Wi-Fi MacID Filtering.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Before adding the MacIDs the user needs to select the mode from the dropdown menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To Add the MacID the user needs to click on Add New option select the mac id and network name Wi-Fi 2.4G AP OR Wi-Fi 2.4G AP Guest, select enable/disable option and save it and update.              &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Configuring MacID and Network Name.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the required MACID and Network Name is configured the user needs to click on the save button to add the details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user needs to click on the edit button to do modifications on the pre-existing configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Macid and name removing.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the required MACID / Network Name is modified the user needs to click on the save button to reflect the changed value in the application.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;WIFI 2.4G AP Guest&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To Add the MacID the user needs to click on Add New option select the mac id and network name Wi-Fi 2.4G AP Guest, select enable/disable option and save it and update.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
     [[File:WIFI 2.4G AP Guest.png|frameless|623x623px]]  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the required MACID and Network Name is configured the user needs to click on the save button to add the details. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user needs to click on the edit button to do modifications on the pre-existing configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Configuring MacID and Network Name.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the required MACID / Network Name is modified the user needs to click on the save button to reflect the changed value in the application.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===5.5 Routing===&lt;br /&gt;
In this submodule the user can configure the parameters related to routing of the device. like Target address, Networks address etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Routing IPV4 Routes.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To add a new device the user needs to fill all the required information and click on the add button.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Interface&lt;br /&gt;
|eth0.1&lt;br /&gt;
|In this drop down list the user should  configure the interface name.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Target&lt;br /&gt;
|192.168.10.1&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user needs to insert the  target IP address&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|IPV4 Netmask&lt;br /&gt;
|255.255.255.0&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user should give the  address for the IPV4Netmask&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Metric&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user should insert the  number of the metric.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|IPV4 Gateway&lt;br /&gt;
|192.168.100.1&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user should configured the  address for the IPV4 Gateway.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Route Type&lt;br /&gt;
|Unicast&lt;br /&gt;
|In this drop down box the user should select  the type of route needed for the device.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
To edit the existing device the user needs to click on the edit option.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Routing Configuration.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the changes are done click on the save button to save all the changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the deleted button to delete the existing device detail.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Advanced Static IPV4 Routes:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Advanced Static IPV4 Routes.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To add a new device the user needs to fill all the required information and click on the add button.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Interface&lt;br /&gt;
|eth0.1&lt;br /&gt;
|In this drop down list the user should  configure the interface name.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|To&lt;br /&gt;
|192.168.10.1&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user needs to insert the  target IP address&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|IPV4 Netmask&lt;br /&gt;
|255.255.255.0&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user should give the  address for the IPV4Netmask&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Table&lt;br /&gt;
|local&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|From&lt;br /&gt;
|192.168.100.1&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user should configured the  from address for the routes&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Priority&lt;br /&gt;
|230&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
To edit the existing device the user needs to click on the edit option.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Routing Editing.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the changes are done click on the save button to save all the changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the deleted button to delete the existing device detail.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once all the configurations are done click on the update button to reflect the changes made.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===5.6 Others===&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user will get to do all the other miscellaneous configuration with respect to the device based on the required parameters.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Miscellaneous configuration.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Utility&lt;br /&gt;
|Action&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Set Date&lt;br /&gt;
|SET&lt;br /&gt;
|Need to set the date and time and after  click command get the Date and time&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Gate Date&lt;br /&gt;
|GET&lt;br /&gt;
|Needs to get the system date and time&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|IPsec status all&lt;br /&gt;
|GET&lt;br /&gt;
|Needs to get the IPsec details&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Wi-Fi Scan&lt;br /&gt;
|GET&lt;br /&gt;
|Needs to get the Wi-Fi status&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|ipref3 client&lt;br /&gt;
|RUN&lt;br /&gt;
|Needs to click on the RUN to execute  the command&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|ipref3 server&lt;br /&gt;
|RUN&lt;br /&gt;
|Needs to click on the RUN to execute  the command&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|Ping&lt;br /&gt;
|PING&lt;br /&gt;
|Needs to click on the ping status&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|9&lt;br /&gt;
|Traceroute&lt;br /&gt;
|RUN&lt;br /&gt;
|Needs to click on the ping Traceroute status&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|10&lt;br /&gt;
|NTP Sync&lt;br /&gt;
|SYNC&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to Sync the NTP&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|11&lt;br /&gt;
|Download Files&lt;br /&gt;
|DOWNLOAD&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to Download the files /Database&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|12&lt;br /&gt;
|Restart Power&lt;br /&gt;
|RESTART&lt;br /&gt;
|Click Restart the power&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|13&lt;br /&gt;
|Restart Modem&lt;br /&gt;
|RESTART&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to Restart the modem&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|14&lt;br /&gt;
|Run at command&lt;br /&gt;
|RUN&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to Run the command&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|15&lt;br /&gt;
|Show board configuration&lt;br /&gt;
|SHOW&lt;br /&gt;
|To Show the board configuration&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|16&lt;br /&gt;
|Show VPN Certificate Name&lt;br /&gt;
|SHOW&lt;br /&gt;
|To Show VPN Certificate Name&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|17&lt;br /&gt;
|Switch SIM to Secondary&lt;br /&gt;
|RUN&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to switch the SIM to secondary  mode&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|18&lt;br /&gt;
|Send Test SMS&lt;br /&gt;
|SEND&lt;br /&gt;
|To Send the SMS Confirmation&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|19&lt;br /&gt;
|Readlatest SMS&lt;br /&gt;
|READ&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to Read the latest SMS&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|20&lt;br /&gt;
|Data Usage&lt;br /&gt;
|SHOW&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to show the data usage.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|21&lt;br /&gt;
|Monthly Data Usage&lt;br /&gt;
|SHOW&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to show the monthly data usage&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|22&lt;br /&gt;
|Modem debug Info&lt;br /&gt;
|READ&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to read the information about the  modem debug&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|23&lt;br /&gt;
|Scan Network operators (take&amp;gt;3mins)&lt;br /&gt;
|SHOW&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to show the Network operator&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|24&lt;br /&gt;
|Network operators (first perform scan  network operator&lt;br /&gt;
|SHOW&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to show the Network operator&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|25&lt;br /&gt;
|ReadLogFiles&lt;br /&gt;
|READ&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to read the log files&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|26&lt;br /&gt;
|Enable ssh&lt;br /&gt;
|RUN&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to Run the command&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|27&lt;br /&gt;
|Disable ssh&lt;br /&gt;
|RUN&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to Run the command&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|28&lt;br /&gt;
|Clear SIM1 Data&lt;br /&gt;
|CLEAR&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to clear the SIM1 data&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|29&lt;br /&gt;
|Clear SIM2 Data&lt;br /&gt;
|CLEAR&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to clear the SIM data&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==6 Logout==&lt;br /&gt;
The user should click on log out option to logged out from the router application.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Logout.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user needs to click on the ok to come out of the router application.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tanisha</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.silbonetworks.com/index.php?title=File:GRE_Tunnel_1.png&amp;diff=1181</id>
		<title>File:GRE Tunnel 1.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.silbonetworks.com/index.php?title=File:GRE_Tunnel_1.png&amp;diff=1181"/>
		<updated>2024-09-03T05:07:33Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tanisha: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;GRE Tunnel 1&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tanisha</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.silbonetworks.com/index.php?title=File:Tunnel_General_Settings.png&amp;diff=1180</id>
		<title>File:Tunnel General Settings.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.silbonetworks.com/index.php?title=File:Tunnel_General_Settings.png&amp;diff=1180"/>
		<updated>2024-09-03T05:02:33Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tanisha: Tanisha uploaded a new version of File:Tunnel General Settings.png&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Tunnel General Settings&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tanisha</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.silbonetworks.com/index.php?title=File:Tunnel_Settings.png&amp;diff=1179</id>
		<title>File:Tunnel Settings.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.silbonetworks.com/index.php?title=File:Tunnel_Settings.png&amp;diff=1179"/>
		<updated>2024-09-03T05:00:39Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tanisha: Tanisha uploaded a new version of File:Tunnel Settings.png&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Tunnel Settings&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tanisha</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.silbonetworks.com/index.php?title=RC44_User_Manual&amp;diff=1177</id>
		<title>RC44 User Manual</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.silbonetworks.com/index.php?title=RC44_User_Manual&amp;diff=1177"/>
		<updated>2024-09-02T12:16:28Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tanisha: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;This page contains the user manual for RC44.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Connecting with the device to the System (Laptop/Desktop).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To log in to SILBO_RC44 by connecting the router to your laptop or desktop via LAN or using Wi-Fi, please follow the steps below. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Connecting via LAN:&#039;&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Connect your laptop&#039;s LAN port to one of the router&#039;s LAN interfaces. Ensure that you select any LAN interface (there are two available) while making sure the WAN interface is not used. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
                                                                                                                                                          &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;How to connect with the SILBO_RC44&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;application&#039;&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the LAN connection is established between the device and the laptop or the desktop&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please open the command prompt and ping go get the ip config of that device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Type the command &#039;&#039;&#039;Ipconfig&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:How_to_connect_with_the_SILBO_RB44_application.png|alt=How to connect with the SILBO RB44 application|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It will provide the Ip address/url of that device through which the application can be accessed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Connecting_via_LAN_RB44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Log In==&lt;br /&gt;
Open the web browser and type the IP address in the URL.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It will show the log in page of the application.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Log In.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Give the valid credentials for the username and password to login to the application page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user credentials are provided it will direct to the landing page of the application.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Login Dashboard RC44.png|frameless|636x636px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The “Status” landing page shows all the detailed specification of the device like system, memory storage and connection tracking etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The application is divided in to 6 Modules.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Info&lt;br /&gt;
* Settings&lt;br /&gt;
* Maintenance&lt;br /&gt;
* Status&lt;br /&gt;
* Features&lt;br /&gt;
* Logout&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==1.Info==&lt;br /&gt;
The “Info” module provides the information about the devices to the user.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It provides all the specification related to the hardware, firmware, Networks and the Connection uptimes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It has 3 submodules.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Overview&lt;br /&gt;
* System Log&lt;br /&gt;
* Kernel Log&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Info dashboard RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===1.1 Overview===&lt;br /&gt;
In overview module it displays all the specification categorically of a device like System, Memory, storage, Connection tracking, DHCP Lease.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Login Dashboard RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;System&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this section it displays the hardware configured specification of the device.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Info system RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The specifications details are as follows,&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&lt;br /&gt;
!SN&lt;br /&gt;
!Field name &lt;br /&gt;
!Sample value&lt;br /&gt;
!Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Hostname&lt;br /&gt;
|22B09230239&lt;br /&gt;
|This field  displays the router serial number of the device&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Model&lt;br /&gt;
|Silbo_RC44- EC200A&lt;br /&gt;
|This field  displays the model number of the device&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Firmware Version and IPK Version&lt;br /&gt;
|1.16_1.13_RC3&lt;br /&gt;
|This field  displays the firmware version and IPK version&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Kernel Version&lt;br /&gt;
|4.14.180&lt;br /&gt;
|This field  displays the kernel version of the device&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Local Time&lt;br /&gt;
|Monday, July 1, 2024, at 05:43:58 PM&lt;br /&gt;
|This field  displays the local time&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Uptime&lt;br /&gt;
|0h 7m 29s&lt;br /&gt;
|This field  displays the uptime of the device&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|Load Average&lt;br /&gt;
|1.73 1.87 1.04&lt;br /&gt;
|This field  displays the average load&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Memory&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this section it displays the memory configured specification of the device.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Memory Dashboard RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The specifications details are as follows.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Total Available&lt;br /&gt;
|68676 kB / 124208 kB (55%)&lt;br /&gt;
|This field  displays the total availability of memory space in the device&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Free&lt;br /&gt;
|59344 kB / 124208 kB (47%)&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the  Free memory space in the device&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Cached&lt;br /&gt;
|312 kB / 124208 kB (0%)&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the  Cached memory space in the device&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Buffered&lt;br /&gt;
|9332 kB / 124208 kB (7%)&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the  Buffered memory space in the device&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Storage&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this section it displays the status of storage as root and temporary usage specification of the device.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Storage Dashboard RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The specifications details are as follows.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Root Usage&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
796 kB / 15488 kB (5%)&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays  the total root usage of the device&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Temporary  Usage&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
312 kB / 62104 kB (0%)&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the total temporary  usage of the device&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Connection Tracking&#039;&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this section it displays the status of connection tracking for the device.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Connection Tracking RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The specifications details are as follows.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Active Connection&lt;br /&gt;
|48 / 16384 (0%)&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the active connection of the device.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;DHCP Leases&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this section, it displays the DHCP lease of the temporary assignment of an IP address to a device on the network.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:DCHP Leases RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The specifications details are as follows.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Host Name&lt;br /&gt;
|KermaniK-LT&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays  the configured Host Name/User Name for that device.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|IPv4-Address&lt;br /&gt;
|192.168.10.147&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the IP  address of the device.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|MAC-Address&lt;br /&gt;
|34:73:5a:bb: ab:7a&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the MAC-Address  of the device.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Lease time remaining&lt;br /&gt;
|11h 53m 49s&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the lease  time remaining for the device.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===1.2 System Log===&lt;br /&gt;
This page provides on screen System logging information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user gets to view the system logs &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:System Log.png|frameless|617x617px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===1.3 Kernel Log===&lt;br /&gt;
This page provides on-screen Kernel logging information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this page, the user gets to view the Kernel logs&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Kernel Log.png|frameless|621x621px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==2. Setting==&lt;br /&gt;
In this “Setting” module the user can Configure/update all the required parameters related to Network, SIM Switch, Internet, VPN, Firewall, Loopback Rule, Remote monitoring, Tunnel as per requirement.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
IT consist of 8 submodules.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Network&lt;br /&gt;
* Sim Switch&lt;br /&gt;
* Internet&lt;br /&gt;
* VPN&lt;br /&gt;
* Firewall&lt;br /&gt;
* Loopback Rule&lt;br /&gt;
* Remote Monitoring&lt;br /&gt;
* Tunnel&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Settings.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===2.1 Network===&lt;br /&gt;
In this section the user does all the setting related configuration with reference to network like Ethernet Setting, Cellular Setting, Band lock and Operator Lock, Wi-Fi, Guest Wi-Fi, Wireless Schedule, SMS Setting, Loopback IP.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Network Dashboard RC44.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Ethernet Setting&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this page it will display all the configured port that is attached with the device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For this device 3 ports are configured. Ethernet mode can be configured as WAN and as LAN as well. Ethernet LAN Connection settings can be configured as DHCP server or Static.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Ethernet Settings RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;For port 3 setting&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Kindly select the option &#039;&#039;&#039;LAN4&#039;&#039;&#039; for &#039;&#039;&#039;Port 3 mode LAN/WAN&#039;&#039;&#039;. Based on the option selected the filed will also changes the user needs to configure all the required field and click on the save to save the required fields.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Ethernet Settings RC44 part 2.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Port 3 mode LAN/WAN&lt;br /&gt;
|LAN&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the port mode selection&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Port 3 Ethernet Protocol [LAN Eth0.1]&lt;br /&gt;
|DHCP Server&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the Ethernet mode selection&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Port 3 DHCP Server IP&lt;br /&gt;
|192.168.10.1&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays DHCP server IP configured.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Port 3 DHCP Netmask&lt;br /&gt;
|255.255.255.0&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays DHCP server Netmask address configured&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Port 3 DHCP Start Address&lt;br /&gt;
|100&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays DHCP server  start address configured&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Port 3 DHCP Limit&lt;br /&gt;
|50&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays DHCP server  limit&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Kindly select the option &#039;&#039;&#039;EWAN&#039;&#039;&#039; for &#039;&#039;&#039;Port 3 mode LAN/WAN&#039;&#039;&#039;. Based on the option selected the filed will also changes the user needs to configure all the required field and click on the save to save the required fields.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:EWAN Port 3 Configuration RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Port 3 mode LAN/WAN&lt;br /&gt;
|EWAN&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the port mode selection&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Ethernet Protocol Port 3 WAN&lt;br /&gt;
|DHCP  client&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the client&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Gateway&lt;br /&gt;
|192.168.1.1&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays gateway address  configured&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the save once all the configuration is done and click on the update button to update all the information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;SW_LAN settings&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this part the user can configure the setting for SW_LAN &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SW LAN settings RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|SW_LAN Ethernet Protocol&lt;br /&gt;
|DHCP  Server&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the  Ethernet mode selection&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|SW_LAN DHCP Server IP&lt;br /&gt;
|192.168.10.1&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays DHCP server IP  configured.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|SW_LAN  DHCP Netmask&lt;br /&gt;
|255.255.255.0&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays DHCP server  Netmask address configured&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|SW_LAN  DHCP Start Address&lt;br /&gt;
|100&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays DHCP server  start address configured&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|SW_LAN  DHCP Limit&lt;br /&gt;
|50&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays DHCP server  limit&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|DNS  Server&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|This filed display number of DSN  server availability&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|DNS  Server Address&lt;br /&gt;
|8.8.8.8&lt;br /&gt;
|This  filed display the DSN server address.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After configuring all the required information, the user should click on the save and then click on the update to update the all the required information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Static option for SW_LAN Ethernet Protocol&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the option of static from the drop-down menu for SW_LAN Ethernet Protocol.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SW LAN settings Static Ethernet Protocol.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|SW_LAN Ethernet Protocol&lt;br /&gt;
|Static&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the  Ethernet mode selection&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|SW_LAN static IP&lt;br /&gt;
|192.168.5.1&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays static server IP  configured.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|SW_LAN  Netmask&lt;br /&gt;
|255.255.255.0&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays static server  Netmask address configured&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|DNS  Server&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|This filed display number of DSN  server availability&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|DSN  Server Address&lt;br /&gt;
|8.8.8.8&lt;br /&gt;
|This  filed display the DSN server address.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
After configuring all the required information, the user should click on the save and then click on the update to update the all the required information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Cellular Setting&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this page, the user needs to configure the various details with respect to the SIM.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
select single cellular single sim where the user must configure the APN details of the sim used for the router device. The Configurations can be done based on the SIM usage, with respect to IPV4 or IPV.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Cellular Settings RC44.png|frameless|619x619px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Cellular  Operation Mode&lt;br /&gt;
|Single Cellular with Dual Sim&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays  the cellular operation mode.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Cellular  Modem 1&lt;br /&gt;
|QuectelEC200A&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the modem name.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Network  Mode&lt;br /&gt;
|Automatic&lt;br /&gt;
|This  field displays the  Network mode selection&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM 1  Access Point Name&lt;br /&gt;
|airtelgprs.com&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the  name of the Sim 1 access point configured.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM 1  PDP Type&lt;br /&gt;
|IPV4&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays  the type of SIM 1&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM 1  Username&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|This field is optional, and the user can configure the name of  the SIM 1&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM 1  Password&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|This  field is optional, and the user can configure the password for the SIM 1&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM 1  Authentication Protocol&lt;br /&gt;
|None&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the type of  protocol is being used for SIM 1&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|9&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM 2  Access Point Name&lt;br /&gt;
|airtelgprs.com&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the name of the  Sim 2 access point configured.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|10&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM 2  PDP Type&lt;br /&gt;
|IPV4&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the type of SIM  2&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|11&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM 2  Username&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|This  field is optional, and the user can configure the name of the SIM 2&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|12&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM 2  Password&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|This  field is optional, and the user can configure the password for the SIM 2&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|13&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM 2  Authentication Protocol&lt;br /&gt;
|None&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the type of  protocol is being used for SIM 2&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|14&lt;br /&gt;
|Primary  SIM Switchback Time (In Minutes)&lt;br /&gt;
|10&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the time given  for sim to swich in between.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
After configuring all the required information, the user should click on the save and then click on the update to update the all the required information. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Band lock and Operator Lock&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this page, the user needs to configure the lock band and operator based on the service provider&#039;&#039;&#039;.&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Bands available in the drop-down list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Band lock and Operator Lock.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;2G/3G option&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2G/3G: - 3G allows additional features such as mobile internet access, video calls and mobile TV. While the main function of 2G technology is the transmission of information through voice calls.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:2G-3G option.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user should select the band check box  available for 2g/3g  from the given list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Bands available for selection under LTE for the bands available that zone.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Operator Selection Mode&#039;&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user needs to click on the check box of the “operator select enable” to select the operator.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the check box is clicked there will be a dropdown list of the operator modes from which the user needs to select the mode. The user needs to select the operator mode from the given dropdown list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Operator Selection Mode.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the user selects the mode “Manual” or “Manual-Automatic” then one more text box will appear where the user must provide the operator code.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Band lock and Operator Lock 1.png|frameless|542x542px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After configuring all the required information, the user should click on the save and then click on the update to update the all the required information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Wi-Fi Setting&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wi-Fi is a family of wireless network protocols based on the IEEE 802.11 family of standards, which are commonly used for local area network of devices and internet access, allowing nearby digital devices to exchanges data by radio waves. These are the most widely used computer network, used globally in home and small office networks to link devices and to provided internet access with wireless router and wireless access point in public places. In this router has the general setting and change country code, channel, radio mode, radio passphrase as per the requirement after clicking on enable Radio button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Wi-Fi Setting.png|frameless|585x585px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user needs to select the respective radio mode based on its need. Basically, it has 3 radio mode.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Wi-Fi Setting access Point.png|frameless|590x590px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Access Point mode:&#039;&#039;&#039; In Access Point mode, router connects to a wireless router through an Ethernet cable to extend the coverage of wireless signal to other network client.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Access Point Mode RC44.png|frameless|573x573px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Client point:&#039;&#039;&#039;  In client mode, the access point connects your wired devices to a wireless network. This mode is suitable when you have a wired device with an Ethernet port and no wireless capability, for example, a smart TV, Media Player, or Game console and you want to connect it to the internet wirelessly, select the Client Mode and give the Radio SSID &amp;amp; client passphrase&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Client Point RC44.png|frameless|587x587px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Access point and client point&#039;&#039;&#039;: select this option for both type connection, give both SSID and passphrase.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Access point and Client Point RC44.png|frameless|571x571px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After configuring all the required information, the user should click on the save and then click on the update to update the all the required information.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Radio  0 Protocol&lt;br /&gt;
|IEEE 802.11 b/g/n&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the  user should select which protocol is being used&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Country  Code&lt;br /&gt;
|INDIA&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the  user should select which county it belongs to.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Channel&lt;br /&gt;
|Auto&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user should  select the proper channel to be used.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|TX  Power&lt;br /&gt;
|100&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user should  specify the power.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Channel  Width&lt;br /&gt;
|20 MHz&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user should  select the channel width&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Radio  Mode&lt;br /&gt;
|Access  point&lt;br /&gt;
|In this drop down the user should  select the mode.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|Radio  SSID&lt;br /&gt;
|APClient_22B09230239&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user should  specify the SSID number&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|Radio  Authentication&lt;br /&gt;
|WPA2  Personal (PSK)&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user should  select the type of authentication.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|9&lt;br /&gt;
|Radio  Encryption&lt;br /&gt;
|AES&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user should  select the type of encryption required.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|10&lt;br /&gt;
|Radio  Passphrase&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user should  specify the password.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|11&lt;br /&gt;
|Radio  DHCP server IP&lt;br /&gt;
|192.168.100.1&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user should  specify the IP address of DHCP server.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|12&lt;br /&gt;
|Radio  DHCP start address&lt;br /&gt;
|100&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user should  specify the start address of the DHCP.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|13&lt;br /&gt;
|Radio  DHCP limit&lt;br /&gt;
|50&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user should  specify the limit for the DHCP.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Wireless Schedule&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wi-Fi can be automatically withdrawn based on the configuration done in this section.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user can schedule the Wi-Fi’s accessibility time during a particular period.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Wireless Schedule.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After configuring all the required information, the user should click on the save and then click on the update to update the all the required information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user can select more than one “day of the week” for scheduling the wifi working hours.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Wifi Schedule.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Loop back IP settings&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The loopback IP address, often referred to as “localhost”. it’s used to establish network connections within the same device for testing and troubleshooting purpose.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Loop back IP settings.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After configuring all the required information, the user should click on the save and then click on the update to update the all the required information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The loopback IP address, commonly represented as 127.0.0.1, is a special address used for testing network connectivity on a local machine. It allows a device to send network messages to itself without involving external networks, making it useful for troubleshooting and diagnostics.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
However, this IP can be changed as per requirement and to do that, Navigating to Setting&amp;gt;&amp;gt;Network configuration&amp;gt;&amp;gt; Loopback IP settings can be changed/updated.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Above screenshot shows the configuration window from GUI/WebUI&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;SMS Settings&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
User needs to enable SMS option in SMS settings page. This option is to validate the mobile numbers using which controlling commands could be sent to the router device. 1 to 5 mobile numbers can be authenticated by choosing from “Select Valid SMS user numbers” and adding the mobile numbers below respectively. API key is the pass key used in the commands while sending SMS. Displayed in the below screen is the default API key which can be edited and changed as per choice.   After addition of the mobile numbers user needs to click on save button for changes to take place.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SMS Settings.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select valid user number max. 5 and add authorized phone number in the main menu where want to find the alert and click on SMS Response Enable, save and update button, now send SMS commands from the configured mobile number. Once the commands are received from the user phone number the board send acknowledgement as per the commands after that it will send the router’s status once it has rebooted and is operational again. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mentioned below are a few commands which can be sent from the configured mobile number to the router device. Below two commands are One for rebooting the router device and another to get the uptime.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1) {&amp;quot;device&amp;quot;:[&amp;quot;passkey&amp;quot;,&amp;quot;API key&amp;quot;],&amp;quot;command&amp;quot;:&amp;quot;reboot&amp;quot;,&amp;quot;arguments&amp;quot;:&amp;quot;hardware&amp;quot;}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2) {&amp;quot;device&amp;quot;:[&amp;quot;passkey &amp;quot;,&amp;quot;API key&amp;quot;],&amp;quot;command&amp;quot;:&amp;quot;uptime&amp;quot;}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After configuring all the required information, the user should click on the save and then click on the update to update the all the required information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===2.2 SIM===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user needs to configure the Sim for the given device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SIM Switch.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user needs to select from the drop-down menu on which basis the sim needs to be switched.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Sim Switch Configuration.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user selects on “&#039;&#039;&#039;signal strength&#039;&#039;&#039;” then the parameters related to signal strength will pop up and the user needs to configure the parameters based on the requirement &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Signal Strength.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Threshold RSRP&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This Needs to be set appropriately. Incorrect setting may cause unnecessary SIM switching. ( In General a BAD RSRP value range is -140 to -115 and FAIR RSRP value range is -115 to -105).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Threshold SINR&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This Needs to be set appropriately. Incorrect setting may cause unnecessary SIM switching. ( In General a BAD SNR value range is -20 to 0 and FAIR SNR value range is 0 to 13)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user selects on “&#039;&#039;&#039;Data Limit&#039;&#039;&#039;” then the parameters related to Data Limit will pop up and the user needs to configure the parameters based on the requirement.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Data limit.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM Switch Based on&lt;br /&gt;
|Data Limit&lt;br /&gt;
|The user needs to select from the  drop-down menu on what basis the sim needs to be switched.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM 1 Data Usage Limit (In MB)&lt;br /&gt;
|1000&lt;br /&gt;
|The user needs to set the limit for the data  usage for SIM 1.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM 2 Data Usage Limit (In MB)&lt;br /&gt;
|1000&lt;br /&gt;
|The user needs to set the limit for the data  usage for SIM 2.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Periodicity&lt;br /&gt;
|Daily&lt;br /&gt;
|The user needs to set the pattern/frequency to  switch the sims.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Day Of Month&lt;br /&gt;
|16&lt;br /&gt;
|The user needs to set the day for switching the  sim.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
After configuring all the required information, the user should click on the save.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===2.3 Internet===&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user needs to configure the internet connection to set the priority from the various options. The user should decide what kind of connection it needs to provide to the device like LAN, WAN etc. Once the connections are configured then click on save option and then on update.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Internet.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the user needs to edit on the existing configuration, then the user should click on the “EDIT” button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Network Edit Options.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Name&lt;br /&gt;
|EWAN2&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the name of the WAN  connection&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Priority&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown box the user need to select  the priority.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Select Track IP Numbers&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user needs to select the  track number for the Ips.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|TrackIP1&lt;br /&gt;
|8.8.8.8&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text field the user needs to set the IP  address for the track 1&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|TrackIP2&lt;br /&gt;
|8.8.4.4&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text field the user needs to set the IP  address for the track 1&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Reliability&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Not sure what needs to be written&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|Count&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Not sure what needs to be written&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|Up&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Not sure what needs to be written&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|9&lt;br /&gt;
|Down&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Not sure what needs to be written&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user is done with modification click on the save button to save all the changes and then click on the update button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===2.4 VPN===&lt;br /&gt;
VPN stands for &#039;&#039;&#039;Virtual Private Network&#039;&#039;&#039;, it establishes a connection between the system and a remote server, which is owned by a VPN provider.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Creating a point-to-point tunnel that encrypts the personal data, masks the IP address, and allows to block the required website to blocks via firewalls on the internet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:VPN Settings RC44.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are 5 types of setting available under VPN configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* General Settings&lt;br /&gt;
* IPSEC&lt;br /&gt;
* Open VPN&lt;br /&gt;
* Wireguard&lt;br /&gt;
* Zerotier&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;General Settings&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user must choose which type of VPN connection is required for the device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user must select from IPSEC or Open VPN based on its requirement. If required, the user can select for both the options. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:VPN General Settings RC44.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user needs to click on the save after selecting the option based on its requirement.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;IPSEC&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
IPSEC VPN is used to create a VPN connection between local and remote networks. To use IPSEC VPN, the user should check that both local and remote routers support IPSEC VPN feature.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user can add/edit/delete the IPSEC VPN connection for the device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:VPN IPSEC changes RC44.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user needs to click on the update button once the required configuration is completed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In IPSEC the user needs to click on edit button to edit the configuration of an existing VPN connection.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:VPN Edit Options.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the save button after the required configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The tunnel will show established, showing the connection has been made.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:IPSEC .png|thumb|631x631px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|IPSEC&lt;br /&gt;
|Site to Site VPN&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user should select  the IPSEC connection type.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|IPSEC Role&lt;br /&gt;
|Client/Server&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown box the user needs to select  the IPSEC role.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Connection Type&lt;br /&gt;
|Tunnel&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user needs to select the connection  type. The user should select on the connection enable check box.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Connection mode&lt;br /&gt;
|start&lt;br /&gt;
|In this drop down list the user should select  the mode for the connection. it will have route/add/start/trap mode&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Remote Server IP&lt;br /&gt;
|1.1.1.1&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text field the user needs to set the IP  address for the remote server.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Local ID&lt;br /&gt;
|g300&lt;br /&gt;
|The user needs to set the local id.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|No. of local subnets&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user needs to select how  many subnets it will be connected.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|Local Subnet 1&lt;br /&gt;
|192.168.11.1/24&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user needs to put the  address of the local subnet.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|9&lt;br /&gt;
|Remote id&lt;br /&gt;
|sophos&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user needs to put the id  of the remote connection.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|10&lt;br /&gt;
|No of remote subnet&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user needs to select how  many subnets it will be connected remotely.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|11&lt;br /&gt;
|Remote subnet&lt;br /&gt;
|192.168.10.0/24&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user needs to put the  address of the remote subnet.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|12&lt;br /&gt;
|Key exchange&lt;br /&gt;
|Ikev1&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user should select the  which key exchange version to be selected.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|13&lt;br /&gt;
|Aggressive&lt;br /&gt;
|Yes/No&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user should select either  yes or no .&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|14&lt;br /&gt;
|IKE lifetime&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|Fill according to user’s requirements.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|15&lt;br /&gt;
|Lifetime in seconds&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Fill according to user’s requirements.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|16&lt;br /&gt;
|Enable DPD Detection&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;1&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
0&lt;br /&gt;
|Indicates  whether Dead Peer Detection is enabled to detect a lost connection. Enable  this option as per server-side settings.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|17&lt;br /&gt;
|Time Interval (In Seconds)&lt;br /&gt;
|60&lt;br /&gt;
|This option  is available only if DPD Detection is enabled. The time interval is the  interval for DPD checks.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|18&lt;br /&gt;
|Action&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Restart&#039;&#039;&#039;/clear/hold/&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
trap/start&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Restart&#039;&#039;&#039;: Action to take when  DPD detects a lost connection (restart the connection). Select as per  server-side setting.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|19&lt;br /&gt;
|Authentication Method&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;PSK&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;PSK&#039;&#039;&#039;: Pre-shared key is used  for authentication. Select this option for authentication as per sever side  setting.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|20&lt;br /&gt;
|Multiple Secrets&lt;br /&gt;
|1/&#039;&#039;&#039;0&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|Indicates  whether multiple PSK secrets are used. Enable only if required.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|21&lt;br /&gt;
|PSK Value&lt;br /&gt;
|******&lt;br /&gt;
|Pre-shared  key value (masked for security).&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;*Below are Phase I and Phase II settings details*&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&lt;br /&gt;
! colspan=&amp;quot;4&amp;quot; |                                                        &#039;&#039;&#039;Proposal settings Phase I&#039;&#039;&#039;                                                                                                                     &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|22            &lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Encryption Algorithm&#039;&#039;&#039;                                                 &lt;br /&gt;
|AES 128&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AES 192&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;AES 256&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3DES                                                                                                                                     &lt;br /&gt;
|                                                                                                                                     &#039;&#039;&#039;AES 256&#039;&#039;&#039;: Encryption algorithm  for Phase I. Select as per server-side configuration. Both server and client  should have same configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|23&lt;br /&gt;
|Authentication Phase I&lt;br /&gt;
|SHA1&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MD5&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SHA 256&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SHA 384&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;SHA 512&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;SHA 512&#039;&#039;&#039;: Authentication  algorithm for Phase I.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select as per  server-side configuration. Both server and client should have same configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|24&lt;br /&gt;
|DH Group&lt;br /&gt;
|MODP768(group1)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MODP1024(group2)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MODP1536(group5)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;MODP2048(group14)&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MODP3072(group15)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MODP4096(group16)&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;MODP2048 (group14)&#039;&#039;&#039;:  Diffie-Hellman group for key exchange.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select as per  server-side configuration. Both server and client should have same  configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| colspan=&amp;quot;4&amp;quot; |                                                                                                                                                                 &#039;&#039;&#039;Proposal settings Phase II&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|25&lt;br /&gt;
|Hash Algorithm&lt;br /&gt;
|AES 128&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AES 192&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;AES 256&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3DES&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;AES 256&#039;&#039;&#039;: Encryption algorithm  for Phase II. Select as per server-side configuration. Both server and client  should have same configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|26&lt;br /&gt;
|Authentication Phase II&lt;br /&gt;
|SHA1&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MD5&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SHA 256&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SHA 384&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;SHA 512&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;SHA 512&#039;&#039;&#039;: Authentication  algorithm for Phase II.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select as per  server-side configuration. Both server and client should have same  configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|27&lt;br /&gt;
|PFS Group&lt;br /&gt;
|MODP768(group1)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MODP1024(group2)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MODP1536(group5)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;MODP2048(group14)&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MODP3072(group15)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MODP4096(group16)&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;MODP2048 (group14)&#039;&#039;&#039;: Perfect  Forward Secrecy group.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select as per  server-side configuration. Both server and client should have same  configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Open VPN&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the OpenVPN connection, the home network can act as a server, and the remote device can access the server through the router which acts as an OpenVPN Server gateway. To use the VPN feature, the user should enable OpenVPN Server on the router, and install and run VPN client software on the remote device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Open VPN Settings RC44.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user needs to “upload” the respective certificate from a valid path and then click on the “Update.”&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the OpenVPN connection starts the user will get an option to enable/disable the VPN connection as and when required.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By clicking on the enable/disable button, the user can start/stop the VPN connection.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Open VPN Settings RC44 Dashboard.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
VPN has been established.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;WireGuard:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;WireGuard&#039;&#039;&#039; is simple, fast, lean, and modern VPN that utilizes secure and trusted cryptography.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on “Edit” to start configurations as needed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Wire Guard RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;EDIT:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Wire Guard RC44 Setttings.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the save button after the required configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample Value     &lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Wireguard Role&lt;br /&gt;
|Client/Server&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown box the user needs to select  the wireguard role.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Listen Port&lt;br /&gt;
|51820&lt;br /&gt;
|The UDP port on which the WireGuard client  listens for incoming connections.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|IP Addresses&lt;br /&gt;
|10.0.0.1/24&lt;br /&gt;
|The IP  address and subnet mask assigned to the WireGuard client&#039;s interface. This  address is used within the VPN.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Allowed PeerIPs&lt;br /&gt;
|10.1.1.1&lt;br /&gt;
|The IP  address of the allowed peer(s) that can connect to this WireGuard client.  This might need adjustment based on the actual peer IPs used in the network.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Endpoint HostIP&lt;br /&gt;
|10.1.1.1&lt;br /&gt;
|The IP  address of the WireGuard server (the endpoint to which the client connects).&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Endpoint HostPort&lt;br /&gt;
|51820&lt;br /&gt;
|The port on  the WireGuard server to which the client connects.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|PeerPublicKey&lt;br /&gt;
|*****&lt;br /&gt;
|The public  key of the peer (the server) the client is connecting to. This key is part of  the public-private key pair used in WireGuard for encryption and  authentication.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|Enable Preshared key&lt;br /&gt;
|Yes/No&lt;br /&gt;
|This option  indicates that a pre-shared key (PSK) is used in addition to the  public-private key pair for an extra layer of security.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|9&lt;br /&gt;
|Preshared key&lt;br /&gt;
|*****&lt;br /&gt;
|The actual  pre-shared key value shared between the client and the server. This option  appears only if you have enabled preshared key.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Zerotier:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ZeroTier is a tool that lets you create your own private network over the internet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Go to ZeroTier Central and sign up for a free account. In ZeroTier Central, click on &amp;quot;Create a Network&amp;quot;. This will generate a unique 16-digit network ID for your new network.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Go to settings =&amp;gt; VPN, in general settings, enable ZeroTier and save.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Zerotier Settings RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Copy and paste the unique 16-digit network ID in the edit section.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Zero Seetings Dashboard RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Zerotier Dashboard.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the save button after the required configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field Name    &lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  Value           &lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|NetworkID&lt;br /&gt;
|Ad2769hfkw2345f4&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown box the user needs to paste  the unique 16-digit network id.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Listen Port&lt;br /&gt;
|9993&lt;br /&gt;
|Default&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== 2.5 Firewall ===&lt;br /&gt;
A firewall is a layer of security between the network and the Internet. Since a router is the main connection from a network to the Internet, the firewall function is merged into this device. Every network should have a firewall to protect its privacy.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Firewall.png|frameless|635x635px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are 6 types of setting available under firewall.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* General Settings&lt;br /&gt;
* Port forwards&lt;br /&gt;
* Traffic Rules&lt;br /&gt;
* SNAT traffic Rules&lt;br /&gt;
* Parental Control&lt;br /&gt;
* Zone Forwarding&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;General Setting&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
General settings are subdivided into 2 parts,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1.) General settings&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In general settings, the settings that are made are default settings and can be changed according to user’s preference.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Firewall General Settings.png|frameless|622x622px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Specification details are below:&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;SN&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Field Name&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Sample Value&#039;&#039;&#039;      &lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Description&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Enable SYN-flood  protection&lt;br /&gt;
|Enabled&lt;br /&gt;
|This is  enabled by default; setting can be changed if required.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Disable IPV6&lt;br /&gt;
|Disabled&lt;br /&gt;
|This is  enabled by default; setting can be changed if required.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Drop invalid packets&lt;br /&gt;
|Disabled&lt;br /&gt;
|This is  enabled by default; setting can be changed if required.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|TCP SYN Cookies&lt;br /&gt;
|Disabled&lt;br /&gt;
|This is  enabled by default; setting can be changed if required.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Input&lt;br /&gt;
|Reject/Accept&lt;br /&gt;
|By  default, the setting is ‘Reject’ but this needs to be changed to ‘Accept’  compulsory.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Output&lt;br /&gt;
|Reject/Accept&lt;br /&gt;
|By  default, the setting is ‘Reject’ but this needs to be changed to ‘Accept’  compulsory.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|Forward&lt;br /&gt;
|Reject/Accept&lt;br /&gt;
|By  default, the setting is ‘Reject’ but this needs to be changed to ‘Accept’  compulsory.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2.) Zone settings&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In zone settings, there’s an option to add “New Zone”, according to user’s requirement.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Zone settings.png|thumb|628x628px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Port Forwards:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Port forwarding is a feature in a router or gateway that allows external devices to access services on a private network.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It maps an external port on the router to an internal IP address and port on the local network, enabling applications such as gaming servers, web servers, or remote desktop connections to be accessed from outside the network.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This helps in directing incoming traffic to the correct device within a local network based on the port number, enhancing connectivity and accessibility.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Firewall Port Forward.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;EDIT&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Firewall Edit Option RC44.png|frameless|622x622px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the save button after the required configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Name&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Web_Server_Forward&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|Field must  not be empty. Provide a name for the rule to easily identify it.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Protocol&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;TCP+UDP&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|Select the protocol  for the rule.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Options  typically include TCP+UDP, TCP, UDP, ICMP, Custom.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Source zone&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;SW_LAN&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|Select the  source zone where the traffic is originating from. Options typically include EWAN2,SW_LAN,CWAN1,CWAN1_0,CWAN1_1,VPN&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Source MAC address [optional]&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;any&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;any&#039;&#039;&#039;: Leave as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;any&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; if you don&#039;t want to specify a MAC address.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Source IP address[optional]&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: Leave blank if not needed.&lt;br /&gt;
|Optionally  specify an IP address or range.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Source port&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;80, 443&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;  (if matching traffic for web server ports)&lt;br /&gt;
|Specify the  source port or port range.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|Destination zone&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;SW_LAN&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|Select the  destination zone where the traffic is heading to.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|Destination IP address&lt;br /&gt;
|Leave blank if not needed.&lt;br /&gt;
|Optionally specify  the destination IP address or range.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|9&lt;br /&gt;
|Destination port&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;80&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;  (if redirecting to a web server port)&lt;br /&gt;
|Specify the  destination port or port range.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Traffic Rule:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;Traffic rules&amp;quot; refer to the policies and regulations that govern the flow of data packets within a network.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To allow new traffic, click on “Add and Edit” in “New Traffic Rule”.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Firewall Traffic Rule.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;EDIT&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Firewall Traffic Rule Edit.png|frameless|621x621px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Specification details are below:&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample Value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Name&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: Allow_HTTP_and_HTTPS&lt;br /&gt;
|Field must  not be empty: Provide a descriptive name for the traffic rule.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Restrict to Address Family&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|1.       Options:  IPv4, IPv6&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2.       Example:  IPv4 if dealing with typical internet traffic.&lt;br /&gt;
|Select the  address family to generate iptables rules for.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Protocol&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: TCP+UDP&lt;br /&gt;
|TCP+UDP:  Match incoming traffic using the given protocol.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Match ICMP Type&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: any&lt;br /&gt;
|Match all  ICMP types if set to any. Specific types can be chosen if needed.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Source Zone&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: LAN&lt;br /&gt;
|Specifies the  traffic source zone.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Enable DDoS Prevention&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: ‘Checked’ if you want to enable DDoS prevention  measures&lt;br /&gt;
|Enable or  disable Distributed Denial of Service (DDoS) prevention.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|Source MAC Address&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: any&lt;br /&gt;
|any: Match  traffic from any MAC address or specify a particular MAC address.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|Source Address&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: 192.168.1.0/24&lt;br /&gt;
|Match  incoming traffic from the specified source IP address or range.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|9&lt;br /&gt;
|Source Port&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: any if all source ports should be matched&lt;br /&gt;
|any: Match  incoming traffic from the specified source port or port range.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|10&lt;br /&gt;
|Destination Zone&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: WAN&lt;br /&gt;
|Specifies the  traffic destination zone.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|11&lt;br /&gt;
|Action&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: ACCEPT&lt;br /&gt;
|Options:  ACCEPT, DROP, REJECT. Specify the action to take for matched traffic.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|12&lt;br /&gt;
|Limit&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: 10/minute to limit matches to 10 times per  minute.&lt;br /&gt;
|Maximum  average matching rate; specified as a number, with an optional /second,  /minute, /hour, or /day suffix.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|13&lt;br /&gt;
|Extra arguments&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: --log-prefix &amp;quot;Blocked: &amp;quot; to add a log  prefix to log messages for this rule.&lt;br /&gt;
|Passes  additional arguments to iptables. Use with care as it can significantly alter  rule behaviour.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
Click on save once configured.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;SNAT Traffic Rule:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For configuring SNAT (Source Network Address Translation) traffic rules, you can control how outbound traffic from your local network is translated to a different IP address as it exits the network.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To add new source NAT,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on “ADD” in “New Source NAT:”&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SNAT Traffic Rule.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Edit&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SNAT Edit Options RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Specification details are below:&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Name&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: SNAT_WAN_to_LAN&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Field must  not be empty&#039;&#039;&#039;: Provide a unique and descriptive name for the SNAT rule.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Protocol&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: TCP+UDP&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;TCP+UDP&#039;&#039;&#039;:  Select the protocols that the SNAT rule will apply to.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Source Zone&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: wan&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;wan&#039;&#039;&#039;:  Specifies the source zone from which the traffic originates.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Source IP Address&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: any or a specific range like 192.168.1.0/24&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;-- please  choose --&#039;&#039;&#039;: Specify the source IP address or range. Leave empty if the  rule applies to any source IP.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Source Port&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: any&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;any&#039;&#039;&#039;:  Specify the source port or port range from which the traffic originates.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Destination Zone&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: lan&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;lan&#039;&#039;&#039;:  Specifies the destination zone to which the traffic is directed.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|Destination IP Address&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: any or a specific IP like 192.168.1.100&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;-- please  choose --&#039;&#039;&#039;: Specify the destination IP address or range. Leave empty if  the rule applies to any destination IP.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|Destination port&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: any&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;any&#039;&#039;&#039;:  Specify the destination port or port range to which the traffic is directed.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|9&lt;br /&gt;
|SNAT IP Address&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: 203.0.113.5 (an external IP address)&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;-- please  choose --&#039;&#039;&#039;: Specify the IP address to which the source IP should be  translated.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|10&lt;br /&gt;
|SNAT Port&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: Leave empty if not needed, or specify a port  like ‘12345’&lt;br /&gt;
|Optionally,  rewrite matched traffic to a specific source port. Leave empty to only  rewrite the IP address.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|11&lt;br /&gt;
|Extra Arguments&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: --log-prefix &amp;quot;SNAT_traffic: &amp;quot; (to add  a log prefix to log messages for this rule)&lt;br /&gt;
|Pass  additional arguments to iptables. Use with care as it can significantly alter  rule behaviour.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
Click on save once configured.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Parental Control:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For configuring parental control rules, you want to set restrictions based on time, source, and destination zones, as well as specific devices.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To add parental control in firewall,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on “Add and Edit” in “New parental control:” field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Parental Control.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Edit&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Parental Control Edit Options RC44.png|frameless|622x622px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Specification details are given below:&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  Name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  Value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Name&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  Parental_Control_Sunday&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Field must  not be empty&#039;&#039;&#039;: Provide a unique and descriptive name for the parental  control rule.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Proto&lt;br /&gt;
|all&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;all&#039;&#039;&#039;:  This specifies that the rule will apply to all protocols.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Source Zone&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: lan&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Field must  not be empty&#039;&#039;&#039;: Please look at Firewall-&amp;gt;Zone Settings to find zone  names.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Destination  Zone&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: wan&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Field must  not be empty&#039;&#039;&#039;: Please look at Firewall-&amp;gt;Zone Settings to find zone  names.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Source MAC  Address&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  00:1A:2B:3C:4D:5E&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Field&#039;&#039;&#039;:  Enter the MAC address of the device you want to apply the parental control  rule to. This is useful for restricting specific devices.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Target&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  Reject&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Accept&#039;&#039;&#039;:  This specifies the action to take. For parental controls, you might want to  use ‘Reject’ or ‘Drop’ to block traffic.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|Weekdays&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  Sunday&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Sunday&#039;&#039;&#039;:  Specify the days of the week when the rule should be active.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|Month Days&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: All&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;All:&#039;&#039;&#039; Specify  the days of the month when the rule should be active.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|9&lt;br /&gt;
|Start Time (hh:mm:ss)&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  18:00:00 (6:00 PM)&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Field must  not be empty:&#039;&#039;&#039; Specify the start time when the rule should begin to apply.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|10&lt;br /&gt;
|Stop Time  (hh:mm:ss)&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  22:00:00 (10:00 PM)&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Field must  not be empty:&#039;&#039;&#039; Specify the stop time when the rule should end.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
Click on save once configured.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Zone Forwarding:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Zone forwarding in network configuration allows traffic to be directed from one zone to another.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To ADD new zone,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on “Add” in “New Zone Forward:” field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Zone Forwarding RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;EDIT&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Zone Forwarding editing Options RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Specification details are below:&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  Name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  Value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Source Zone&lt;br /&gt;
|Example options: lan, wan, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;--please  choose--&#039;&#039;&#039;: Select the source zone from which the traffic originates.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Destination Zone&lt;br /&gt;
|Example options: lan, wan, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;--please  choose--&#039;&#039;&#039;: Select the destination zone to which the traffic is directed.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
Click on save once configured.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===2.6 Loopback Rule===&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user can configure the port where he want to forward the traffic to. Here the user can add/edit/delete different port ports as per the requirement. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Loopback Rule.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user should click on ‘add’ and then ‘edit’ to do the required changes in the port and enter the valid information in each section to configure the port for forwarding.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Loopback Rule edit.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Specification details are given below:&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  Name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  Value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Name&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: loopback&lt;br /&gt;
|Provide a  descriptive name for the rule.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Protocol&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: TCP+UDP&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;TCP+UDP&#039;&#039;&#039;:  Select the protocols that the rule will apply to.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Source IP Address [Optional]&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: any or a specific IP range like 192.168.1.0/24&lt;br /&gt;
|Optionally  specify the source IP address or range. Leave empty if the rule should apply  to any source IP.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Source Port [Optional]&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: any&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;any&#039;&#039;&#039;:  Specify the source port or port range from which the traffic originates. any  allows traffic from all ports.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Loopback IP Address&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: 127.0.0.1&lt;br /&gt;
|Specify the  loopback IP address. Typically, this is 127.0.0.1.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Port&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: any&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;any&#039;&#039;&#039;:  Specify the destination port or port range to which the traffic is directed.  any allows traffic to all ports.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|Action&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: DNAT&lt;br /&gt;
|This  specifies the action to take either DNAT or SNAT.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|Internal IP Address&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: 192.168.1.100&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Field must  not be empty&#039;&#039;&#039;: Specify the internal IP address to which the traffic should  be redirected.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|9&lt;br /&gt;
|Internal Port&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: any&lt;br /&gt;
|Redirect  matched incoming traffic to the given port on the internal host.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user is done with the required configurations, user should click save button and then click on the update to save the changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===2.7 Remote Monitoring===&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user can select which equipment needs to be monitored remotely.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user selects the type of RMS click on save.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Remote Monitoring.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;NMS:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user should type the server IP or domain name in the URL then click on save.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on upload and start (Once key is uploaded and this option is clicked, NMS automatically starts, and this router device gets registered with the NMS server provided).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:NMS.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;TR069&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To enable the TR069 the user needs to click on the enable check box.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:TR069.png|frameless|582x582px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user clicks on the check box of enable it will display all the required filed to configured.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Remote Monitoring Tr-069.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Specification details are given below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field Name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample Value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Serving  Interval&lt;br /&gt;
|300&lt;br /&gt;
|A value of 300 seconds means the device  will check in with the ACS (auto-configuration servers) every 5 minutes.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Interface&lt;br /&gt;
|This can  be something like eth0 or wan.&lt;br /&gt;
|This specifies the network interface  used for TR-069 communication.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Username&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: User&lt;br /&gt;
|The username used to authenticate with  the ACS.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Password&lt;br /&gt;
|••••&lt;br /&gt;
|The password used to authenticate with  the ACS.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|URL&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;http://example.com&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|The URL of the ACS. This is where the  CPE (customer-premises equipment) will send its requests and where it will  receive configurations and updates from.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
The user should fill all the required fields and click on the save button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===2.8 Tunnel===&lt;br /&gt;
Tunnels are a method of transporting data across a network using protocols which are not supported by that network.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is further categorised into 3 sections,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1.) General Settings&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2.) GRE Tunnel&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3.) IPIP Tunnel&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tunnel Settings.png|frameless|621x621px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;General Settings&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user needs to select under which type of tunnel it needs to send the data.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tunnel General Settings.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user selects the type of tunnel then click in the save button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;GRE Tunnel&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user needs to add all the details of GRE tunnels.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user configured all the required fields then it needs to click on the save. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:GRE Tunnel.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here the user can add/edit/delete the details of the tunnel. Once the required update is done then it needs to click on update to save the changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tunnel Configuration.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;IPIP Tunnel&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user needs to add all the details of IPIP tunnels.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user configured all the required fields then it needs to click on the save. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:IPIP Tunnel.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here the user can add/edit/delete the details of the tunnel. Once the required update is done then it needs to click on update to save the changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Ipip config.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==3 Maintenance==&lt;br /&gt;
In this module the user can configure/upgrade/modify the settings related to system, password, firmware and monitoring.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Maintenance System.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It includes below submodules.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* General&lt;br /&gt;
* Password&lt;br /&gt;
* Reboot&lt;br /&gt;
* Import and Export config&lt;br /&gt;
* Firmware upgrade&lt;br /&gt;
* Monitor Application&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===3.1 General===&lt;br /&gt;
In this section the user can configure the details related to time zone and host name&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Maintenance General.png|frameless|619x619px]]&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Local Time&lt;br /&gt;
|2023/12/13 12:24:11&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|It displays the system current date and  time.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|HostName&lt;br /&gt;
|31B30230298&lt;br /&gt;
|It displays the host name.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Timezone&lt;br /&gt;
|Asia/Kolkata&lt;br /&gt;
|It displays in which time zone its configured.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user configures the required details then click on the save button to save all the details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Logging&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here the user can configure the basic aspects of your device related to system.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Maintenance logging.png|frameless|608x608px]]&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|System log buffer size&lt;br /&gt;
|32&lt;br /&gt;
|This displays the log size of system buffer&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|External system log server&lt;br /&gt;
|0.0.0.0&lt;br /&gt;
|This displays the ip add of the external system  log&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|External system log server port&lt;br /&gt;
|514&lt;br /&gt;
|This displays the port number of the external  system log&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Log output level&lt;br /&gt;
|debug&lt;br /&gt;
|In this drop down the user selects the level of  the log output.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Cron Log level&lt;br /&gt;
|debug&lt;br /&gt;
|In this drop down the user selects the level of  the corn log .&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user configures the required details then click on the save button to save all the details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Language and Style&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here the user can configure the basic aspects of your device related to language.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Maintenance Language and Style.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user configures the required details then click on the save button to save all the details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===3.2 Password===&lt;br /&gt;
In this module the user can set the password for the admin credentials.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Change you password.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Specifies the password for the guest account. If the user enter a plaintext password here, it will get replaced with a crypted password on save. The new password will be effective once the user logs out and log in again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user needs to write the password in the text box and click on the save button to save the password.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===3.3 Reboot===&lt;br /&gt;
In this module the user can reboot the device remotely.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Reboot.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To start the reboot process first the user needs to fill all the required fields.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Need to select the type of reboot for the device whether it needs to be Hardware or Software reboot.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Maintenance Reboot.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Type&lt;br /&gt;
|Maintenance Reboot&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown list the user needs to  select the type of reboot is required to configure.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Reboot Type&lt;br /&gt;
|Hardware&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown list the user needs to select  the hardware or software reboot is required.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Minutes&lt;br /&gt;
|59&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user needs to configure  the min to start the reboot activity&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Hours&lt;br /&gt;
|22&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user needs to configure  the hours to start the reboot activity&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Day of Month&lt;br /&gt;
|All&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user needs to configure  the day of the month to start the reboot activity&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Month&lt;br /&gt;
|All&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user needs to configure  the month to start the reboot activity&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|Day of the week&lt;br /&gt;
|All&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user needs to configure  the week to start the reboot activity&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user fills all the required given parameters click on the save.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To start the reboot process, click on the “Reboot Now” button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===3.4 Import and Export===&lt;br /&gt;
In this section, User can Import &amp;amp; Export Configuration files of the Device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Import and Export.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
click “Export Config” to export device configuration &amp;amp; settings to a text file,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
click “Import Config” to import device configuration &amp;amp; settings from a previously exported text file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Import window.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user need to select on the choose file to and click on the apply.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===3.5 Firmware Upgrade===&lt;br /&gt;
The user can upgrade with the latest software for the existing firmware. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Frimware Upgrade.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the &#039;&#039;&#039;flash image&#039;&#039;&#039; and chose the path where the sys-upgrade file is kept and then click on flash image, it will upgrade to the latest software once the reboot is done.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Flash Image.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the &#039;&#039;&#039;Retain Config and flash&#039;&#039;&#039; and chose the path where the sys-upgrade file is kept and then click on Retain Config and flash, it will upgrade to the latest software once the reboot is done.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Flash Image.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the &#039;&#039;&#039;Factory Reset&#039;&#039;&#039; for the complete retest of the device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===3.6 Monitor Application===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Monitor Application.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Router Application Remote Configuration.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Router Remote Configuration.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==4 Status==&lt;br /&gt;
In this module the user can view the status of the router device with respect to the network, Wan, modem etc.[[File:Status.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It has 4 submodules.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Interfaces&lt;br /&gt;
* Internet&lt;br /&gt;
* Modem&lt;br /&gt;
* Route&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===4.1 Interfaces===&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user can see the traffic status for all the network through which the device works.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Status Interfaces.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Looking on the network status the user can check if the cellular or the ethernet is up.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===4.2 Internet===&lt;br /&gt;
In this submodule the user can view the status of the internet connections.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Internet Status.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
  To see the latest status of the internet connection the user needs to click on the refresh button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===4.3 Modem===&lt;br /&gt;
In this sub module the user will get to know the status of the cellular interface which is installed inside the modem. The user can view all the details related to the sim in terms of Operator, Network technology, Mobile country code, Upload bandwidth, Download Bandwidth, Frequency band, RSRP, RSRQ, RSSI &amp;amp; SNR under this page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Modem Status.png|frameless|602x602px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== 4.4 Route ===&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user can check the status of the route for the device. The ARP status can be visible in under this page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Route Status.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==5 Features==&lt;br /&gt;
In this module the user can see all the features that the router device has.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This module includes the below features.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Mac Address Binding&lt;br /&gt;
* URL Filtering&lt;br /&gt;
* Web Server&lt;br /&gt;
* Wi-Fi MacID Filtering&lt;br /&gt;
* Routing&lt;br /&gt;
* Others&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Features.png|frameless|618x618px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===5.1 Mac Address Binding===&lt;br /&gt;
Under this submodule the user can configure/update/edit the IP Address for MAC&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mac Addressing Binding.png|frameless|622x622px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user should write MAC address and then click on the add button. Once the address is added then click on the update button to save the modification.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user needs to click on the Edit button to modify the preexisting configuration. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mac Address Edit.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user modifies the MAC address /IP Address then click on the save button to save the changes done.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user can click on the deleted button to delete an existing configured device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Post all the changes the user needs to click on the update to reflect all the changes in the application.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===5.2 URL Filtering===&lt;br /&gt;
In this submodule the user should provide the URL which needs to be blocked for the device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:URL Filtering.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To add the new URL for blocking, click on the Add New button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user clicks on the Add New button a new pop will appear in that page write the URL and click on the save. The user can select the status of that URL while defining the URL.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Url Update.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To edit / delete the existing URL the user needs to click on the edit /deleted button respectively.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Edit or Delete URL.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the save after the changes are done as per the need.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== 5.3 Web Server ===&lt;br /&gt;
In this submodule the user can configure webserver related parameters.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Web server.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To configure the HTTP, click on the enable HTTP. Once the user clicks on the check box the HTTP Port text box will appear where the user needs to configure the port id.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Webserver Configuration.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on save buttons to save the changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To configure the 2nd HTTP, click on the enable HTTP. Once the user clicks on the check box the HTTP Port text box will appear where the user needs to configure the port id.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Webserver Https Redirect.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on save buttons to save the changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the “Redirect https” and “RFC1918 Filter” check box to respectively and click on the save button to save the changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To configure the NTP sync, click on the enable NTP sync. Once the user clicks on the check box the respective text boxes will appear to configure the parameters. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:RFC1918 Filter.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user configures the parameters click on the save button to save the given values.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===5.4 Wi-Fi MacID Filtering===&lt;br /&gt;
In this module the user can filter the Macids. Mac address filtering allows users to block traffic coming from certain known machines or devices.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Wi-Fi MacID Filtering.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Before adding the MacIDs the user needs to select the mode from the dropdown menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To Add the MacID the user needs to click on Add New option select the mac id and network name Wi-Fi 2.4G AP OR Wi-Fi 2.4G AP Guest, select enable/disable option and save it and update.              &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Configuring MacID and Network Name.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the required MACID and Network Name is configured the user needs to click on the save button to add the details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user needs to click on the edit button to do modifications on the pre-existing configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Macid and name removing.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the required MACID / Network Name is modified the user needs to click on the save button to reflect the changed value in the application.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;WIFI 2.4G AP Guest&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To Add the MacID the user needs to click on Add New option select the mac id and network name Wi-Fi 2.4G AP Guest, select enable/disable option and save it and update.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
     [[File:WIFI 2.4G AP Guest.png|frameless|623x623px]]  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the required MACID and Network Name is configured the user needs to click on the save button to add the details. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user needs to click on the edit button to do modifications on the pre-existing configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Configuring MacID and Network Name.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the required MACID / Network Name is modified the user needs to click on the save button to reflect the changed value in the application.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===5.5 Routing===&lt;br /&gt;
In this submodule the user can configure the parameters related to routing of the device. like Target address, Networks address etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Routing IPV4 Routes.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To add a new device the user needs to fill all the required information and click on the add button.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Interface&lt;br /&gt;
|eth0.1&lt;br /&gt;
|In this drop down list the user should  configure the interface name.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Target&lt;br /&gt;
|192.168.10.1&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user needs to insert the  target IP address&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|IPV4 Netmask&lt;br /&gt;
|255.255.255.0&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user should give the  address for the IPV4Netmask&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Metric&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user should insert the  number of the metric.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|IPV4 Gateway&lt;br /&gt;
|192.168.100.1&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user should configured the  address for the IPV4 Gateway.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Route Type&lt;br /&gt;
|Unicast&lt;br /&gt;
|In this drop down box the user should select  the type of route needed for the device.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
To edit the existing device the user needs to click on the edit option.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Routing Configuration.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the changes are done click on the save button to save all the changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the deleted button to delete the existing device detail.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Advanced Static IPV4 Routes:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Advanced Static IPV4 Routes.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To add a new device the user needs to fill all the required information and click on the add button.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Interface&lt;br /&gt;
|eth0.1&lt;br /&gt;
|In this drop down list the user should  configure the interface name.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|To&lt;br /&gt;
|192.168.10.1&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user needs to insert the  target IP address&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|IPV4 Netmask&lt;br /&gt;
|255.255.255.0&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user should give the  address for the IPV4Netmask&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Table&lt;br /&gt;
|local&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|From&lt;br /&gt;
|192.168.100.1&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user should configured the  from address for the routes&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Priority&lt;br /&gt;
|230&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
To edit the existing device the user needs to click on the edit option.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Routing Editing.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the changes are done click on the save button to save all the changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the deleted button to delete the existing device detail.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once all the configurations are done click on the update button to reflect the changes made.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===5.6 Others===&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user will get to do all the other miscellaneous configuration with respect to the device based on the required parameters.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Miscellaneous configuration.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Utility&lt;br /&gt;
|Action&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Set Date&lt;br /&gt;
|SET&lt;br /&gt;
|Need to set the date and time and after  click command get the Date and time&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Gate Date&lt;br /&gt;
|GET&lt;br /&gt;
|Needs to get the system date and time&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|IPsec status all&lt;br /&gt;
|GET&lt;br /&gt;
|Needs to get the IPsec details&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Wi-Fi Scan&lt;br /&gt;
|GET&lt;br /&gt;
|Needs to get the Wi-Fi status&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|ipref3 client&lt;br /&gt;
|RUN&lt;br /&gt;
|Needs to click on the RUN to execute  the command&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|ipref3 server&lt;br /&gt;
|RUN&lt;br /&gt;
|Needs to click on the RUN to execute  the command&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|Ping&lt;br /&gt;
|PING&lt;br /&gt;
|Needs to click on the ping status&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|9&lt;br /&gt;
|Traceroute&lt;br /&gt;
|RUN&lt;br /&gt;
|Needs to click on the ping Traceroute status&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|10&lt;br /&gt;
|NTP Sync&lt;br /&gt;
|SYNC&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to Sync the NTP&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|11&lt;br /&gt;
|Download Files&lt;br /&gt;
|DOWNLOAD&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to Download the files /Database&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|12&lt;br /&gt;
|Restart Power&lt;br /&gt;
|RESTART&lt;br /&gt;
|Click Restart the power&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|13&lt;br /&gt;
|Restart Modem&lt;br /&gt;
|RESTART&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to Restart the modem&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|14&lt;br /&gt;
|Run at command&lt;br /&gt;
|RUN&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to Run the command&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|15&lt;br /&gt;
|Show board configuration&lt;br /&gt;
|SHOW&lt;br /&gt;
|To Show the board configuration&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|16&lt;br /&gt;
|Show VPN Certificate Name&lt;br /&gt;
|SHOW&lt;br /&gt;
|To Show VPN Certificate Name&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|17&lt;br /&gt;
|Switch SIM to Secondary&lt;br /&gt;
|RUN&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to switch the SIM to secondary  mode&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|18&lt;br /&gt;
|Send Test SMS&lt;br /&gt;
|SEND&lt;br /&gt;
|To Send the SMS Confirmation&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|19&lt;br /&gt;
|Readlatest SMS&lt;br /&gt;
|READ&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to Read the latest SMS&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|20&lt;br /&gt;
|Data Usage&lt;br /&gt;
|SHOW&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to show the data usage.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|21&lt;br /&gt;
|Monthly Data Usage&lt;br /&gt;
|SHOW&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to show the monthly data usage&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|22&lt;br /&gt;
|Modem debug Info&lt;br /&gt;
|READ&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to read the information about the  modem debug&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|23&lt;br /&gt;
|Scan Network operators (take&amp;gt;3mins)&lt;br /&gt;
|SHOW&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to show the Network operator&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|24&lt;br /&gt;
|Network operators (first perform scan  network operator&lt;br /&gt;
|SHOW&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to show the Network operator&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|25&lt;br /&gt;
|ReadLogFiles&lt;br /&gt;
|READ&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to read the log files&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|26&lt;br /&gt;
|Enable ssh&lt;br /&gt;
|RUN&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to Run the command&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|27&lt;br /&gt;
|Disable ssh&lt;br /&gt;
|RUN&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to Run the command&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|28&lt;br /&gt;
|Clear SIM1 Data&lt;br /&gt;
|CLEAR&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to clear the SIM1 data&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|29&lt;br /&gt;
|Clear SIM2 Data&lt;br /&gt;
|CLEAR&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to clear the SIM data&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==6 Logout==&lt;br /&gt;
The user should click on log out option to logged out from the router application.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Logout.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user needs to click on the ok to come out of the router application.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tanisha</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.silbonetworks.com/index.php?title=File:Remote_Monitoring_Tr-069.png&amp;diff=1167</id>
		<title>File:Remote Monitoring Tr-069.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.silbonetworks.com/index.php?title=File:Remote_Monitoring_Tr-069.png&amp;diff=1167"/>
		<updated>2024-09-02T11:24:09Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tanisha: Tanisha uploaded a new version of File:Remote Monitoring Tr-069.png&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Remote Monitoring Tr-069&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tanisha</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.silbonetworks.com/index.php?title=File:TR069.png&amp;diff=1165</id>
		<title>File:TR069.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.silbonetworks.com/index.php?title=File:TR069.png&amp;diff=1165"/>
		<updated>2024-09-02T11:21:19Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tanisha: Tanisha uploaded a new version of File:TR069.png&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;TR069&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tanisha</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.silbonetworks.com/index.php?title=File:NMS.png&amp;diff=1164</id>
		<title>File:NMS.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.silbonetworks.com/index.php?title=File:NMS.png&amp;diff=1164"/>
		<updated>2024-09-02T11:19:30Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tanisha: Tanisha uploaded a new version of File:NMS.png&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;NMS&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tanisha</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.silbonetworks.com/index.php?title=RC44_User_Manual&amp;diff=1162</id>
		<title>RC44 User Manual</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.silbonetworks.com/index.php?title=RC44_User_Manual&amp;diff=1162"/>
		<updated>2024-09-02T11:18:59Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tanisha: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;This page contains the user manual for RC44.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Connecting with the device to the System (Laptop/Desktop).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To log in to SILBO_RC44 by connecting the router to your laptop or desktop via LAN or using Wi-Fi, please follow the steps below. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Connecting via LAN:&#039;&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Connect your laptop&#039;s LAN port to one of the router&#039;s LAN interfaces. Ensure that you select any LAN interface (there are two available) while making sure the WAN interface is not used. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
                                                                                                                                                          &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;How to connect with the SILBO_RC44&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;application&#039;&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the LAN connection is established between the device and the laptop or the desktop&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please open the command prompt and ping go get the ip config of that device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Type the command &#039;&#039;&#039;Ipconfig&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:How_to_connect_with_the_SILBO_RB44_application.png|alt=How to connect with the SILBO RB44 application|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It will provide the Ip address/url of that device through which the application can be accessed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Connecting_via_LAN_RB44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Log In==&lt;br /&gt;
Open the web browser and type the IP address in the URL.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It will show the log in page of the application.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Log In.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Give the valid credentials for the username and password to login to the application page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user credentials are provided it will direct to the landing page of the application.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Login Dashboard RC44.png|frameless|636x636px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The “Status” landing page shows all the detailed specification of the device like system, memory storage and connection tracking etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The application is divided in to 6 Modules.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Info&lt;br /&gt;
* Settings&lt;br /&gt;
* Maintenance&lt;br /&gt;
* Status&lt;br /&gt;
* Features&lt;br /&gt;
* Logout&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==1.Info==&lt;br /&gt;
The “Info” module provides the information about the devices to the user.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It provides all the specification related to the hardware, firmware, Networks and the Connection uptimes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It has 3 submodules.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Overview&lt;br /&gt;
* System Log&lt;br /&gt;
* Kernel Log&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Info dashboard RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===1.1 Overview===&lt;br /&gt;
In overview module it displays all the specification categorically of a device like System, Memory, storage, Connection tracking, DHCP Lease.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Login Dashboard RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;System&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this section it displays the hardware configured specification of the device.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Info system RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The specifications details are as follows,&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&lt;br /&gt;
!SN&lt;br /&gt;
!Field name &lt;br /&gt;
!Sample value&lt;br /&gt;
!Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Hostname&lt;br /&gt;
|22B09230239&lt;br /&gt;
|This field  displays the router serial number of the device&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Model&lt;br /&gt;
|Silbo_RC44- EC200A&lt;br /&gt;
|This field  displays the model number of the device&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Firmware Version and IPK Version&lt;br /&gt;
|1.16_1.13_RC3&lt;br /&gt;
|This field  displays the firmware version and IPK version&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Kernel Version&lt;br /&gt;
|4.14.180&lt;br /&gt;
|This field  displays the kernel version of the device&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Local Time&lt;br /&gt;
|Monday, July 1, 2024, at 05:43:58 PM&lt;br /&gt;
|This field  displays the local time&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Uptime&lt;br /&gt;
|0h 7m 29s&lt;br /&gt;
|This field  displays the uptime of the device&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|Load Average&lt;br /&gt;
|1.73 1.87 1.04&lt;br /&gt;
|This field  displays the average load&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Memory&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this section it displays the memory configured specification of the device.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Memory Dashboard RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The specifications details are as follows.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Total Available&lt;br /&gt;
|68676 kB / 124208 kB (55%)&lt;br /&gt;
|This field  displays the total availability of memory space in the device&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Free&lt;br /&gt;
|59344 kB / 124208 kB (47%)&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the  Free memory space in the device&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Cached&lt;br /&gt;
|312 kB / 124208 kB (0%)&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the  Cached memory space in the device&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Buffered&lt;br /&gt;
|9332 kB / 124208 kB (7%)&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the  Buffered memory space in the device&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Storage&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this section it displays the status of storage as root and temporary usage specification of the device.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Storage Dashboard RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The specifications details are as follows.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Root Usage&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
796 kB / 15488 kB (5%)&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays  the total root usage of the device&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Temporary  Usage&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
312 kB / 62104 kB (0%)&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the total temporary  usage of the device&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Connection Tracking&#039;&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this section it displays the status of connection tracking for the device.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Connection Tracking RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The specifications details are as follows.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Active Connection&lt;br /&gt;
|48 / 16384 (0%)&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the active connection of the device.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;DHCP Leases&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this section, it displays the DHCP lease of the temporary assignment of an IP address to a device on the network.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:DCHP Leases RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The specifications details are as follows.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Host Name&lt;br /&gt;
|KermaniK-LT&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays  the configured Host Name/User Name for that device.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|IPv4-Address&lt;br /&gt;
|192.168.10.147&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the IP  address of the device.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|MAC-Address&lt;br /&gt;
|34:73:5a:bb: ab:7a&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the MAC-Address  of the device.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Lease time remaining&lt;br /&gt;
|11h 53m 49s&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the lease  time remaining for the device.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===1.2 System Log===&lt;br /&gt;
This page provides on screen System logging information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user gets to view the system logs &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:System Log.png|frameless|617x617px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===1.3 Kernel Log===&lt;br /&gt;
This page provides on-screen Kernel logging information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this page, the user gets to view the Kernel logs&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Kernel Log.png|frameless|621x621px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==2. Setting==&lt;br /&gt;
In this “Setting” module the user can Configure/update all the required parameters related to Network, SIM Switch, Internet, VPN, Firewall, Loopback Rule, Remote monitoring, Tunnel as per requirement.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
IT consist of 8 submodules.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Network&lt;br /&gt;
* Sim Switch&lt;br /&gt;
* Internet&lt;br /&gt;
* VPN&lt;br /&gt;
* Firewall&lt;br /&gt;
* Loopback Rule&lt;br /&gt;
* Remote Monitoring&lt;br /&gt;
* Tunnel&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Settings.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===2.1 Network===&lt;br /&gt;
In this section the user does all the setting related configuration with reference to network like Ethernet Setting, Cellular Setting, Band lock and Operator Lock, Wi-Fi, Guest Wi-Fi, Wireless Schedule, SMS Setting, Loopback IP.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Network Dashboard RC44.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Ethernet Setting&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this page it will display all the configured port that is attached with the device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For this device 3 ports are configured. Ethernet mode can be configured as WAN and as LAN as well. Ethernet LAN Connection settings can be configured as DHCP server or Static.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Ethernet Settings RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;For port 3 setting&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Kindly select the option &#039;&#039;&#039;LAN4&#039;&#039;&#039; for &#039;&#039;&#039;Port 3 mode LAN/WAN&#039;&#039;&#039;. Based on the option selected the filed will also changes the user needs to configure all the required field and click on the save to save the required fields.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Ethernet Settings RC44 part 2.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Port 3 mode LAN/WAN&lt;br /&gt;
|LAN&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the port mode selection&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Port 3 Ethernet Protocol [LAN Eth0.1]&lt;br /&gt;
|DHCP Server&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the Ethernet mode selection&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Port 3 DHCP Server IP&lt;br /&gt;
|192.168.10.1&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays DHCP server IP configured.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Port 3 DHCP Netmask&lt;br /&gt;
|255.255.255.0&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays DHCP server Netmask address configured&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Port 3 DHCP Start Address&lt;br /&gt;
|100&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays DHCP server  start address configured&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Port 3 DHCP Limit&lt;br /&gt;
|50&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays DHCP server  limit&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Kindly select the option &#039;&#039;&#039;EWAN&#039;&#039;&#039; for &#039;&#039;&#039;Port 3 mode LAN/WAN&#039;&#039;&#039;. Based on the option selected the filed will also changes the user needs to configure all the required field and click on the save to save the required fields.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:EWAN Port 3 Configuration RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Port 3 mode LAN/WAN&lt;br /&gt;
|EWAN&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the port mode selection&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Ethernet Protocol Port 3 WAN&lt;br /&gt;
|DHCP  client&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the client&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Gateway&lt;br /&gt;
|192.168.1.1&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays gateway address  configured&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the save once all the configuration is done and click on the update button to update all the information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;SW_LAN settings&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this part the user can configure the setting for SW_LAN &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SW LAN settings RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|SW_LAN Ethernet Protocol&lt;br /&gt;
|DHCP  Server&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the  Ethernet mode selection&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|SW_LAN DHCP Server IP&lt;br /&gt;
|192.168.10.1&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays DHCP server IP  configured.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|SW_LAN  DHCP Netmask&lt;br /&gt;
|255.255.255.0&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays DHCP server  Netmask address configured&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|SW_LAN  DHCP Start Address&lt;br /&gt;
|100&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays DHCP server  start address configured&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|SW_LAN  DHCP Limit&lt;br /&gt;
|50&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays DHCP server  limit&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|DNS  Server&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|This filed display number of DSN  server availability&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|DNS  Server Address&lt;br /&gt;
|8.8.8.8&lt;br /&gt;
|This  filed display the DSN server address.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After configuring all the required information, the user should click on the save and then click on the update to update the all the required information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Static option for SW_LAN Ethernet Protocol&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the option of static from the drop-down menu for SW_LAN Ethernet Protocol.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SW LAN settings Static Ethernet Protocol.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|SW_LAN Ethernet Protocol&lt;br /&gt;
|Static&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the  Ethernet mode selection&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|SW_LAN static IP&lt;br /&gt;
|192.168.5.1&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays static server IP  configured.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|SW_LAN  Netmask&lt;br /&gt;
|255.255.255.0&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays static server  Netmask address configured&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|DNS  Server&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|This filed display number of DSN  server availability&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|DSN  Server Address&lt;br /&gt;
|8.8.8.8&lt;br /&gt;
|This  filed display the DSN server address.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
After configuring all the required information, the user should click on the save and then click on the update to update the all the required information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Cellular Setting&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this page, the user needs to configure the various details with respect to the SIM.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
select single cellular single sim where the user must configure the APN details of the sim used for the router device. The Configurations can be done based on the SIM usage, with respect to IPV4 or IPV.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Cellular Settings RC44.png|frameless|619x619px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Cellular  Operation Mode&lt;br /&gt;
|Single Cellular with Dual Sim&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays  the cellular operation mode.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Cellular  Modem 1&lt;br /&gt;
|QuectelEC200A&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the modem name.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Network  Mode&lt;br /&gt;
|Automatic&lt;br /&gt;
|This  field displays the  Network mode selection&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM 1  Access Point Name&lt;br /&gt;
|airtelgprs.com&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the  name of the Sim 1 access point configured.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM 1  PDP Type&lt;br /&gt;
|IPV4&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays  the type of SIM 1&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM 1  Username&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|This field is optional, and the user can configure the name of  the SIM 1&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM 1  Password&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|This  field is optional, and the user can configure the password for the SIM 1&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM 1  Authentication Protocol&lt;br /&gt;
|None&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the type of  protocol is being used for SIM 1&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|9&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM 2  Access Point Name&lt;br /&gt;
|airtelgprs.com&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the name of the  Sim 2 access point configured.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|10&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM 2  PDP Type&lt;br /&gt;
|IPV4&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the type of SIM  2&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|11&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM 2  Username&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|This  field is optional, and the user can configure the name of the SIM 2&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|12&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM 2  Password&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|This  field is optional, and the user can configure the password for the SIM 2&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|13&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM 2  Authentication Protocol&lt;br /&gt;
|None&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the type of  protocol is being used for SIM 2&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|14&lt;br /&gt;
|Primary  SIM Switchback Time (In Minutes)&lt;br /&gt;
|10&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the time given  for sim to swich in between.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
After configuring all the required information, the user should click on the save and then click on the update to update the all the required information. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Band lock and Operator Lock&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this page, the user needs to configure the lock band and operator based on the service provider&#039;&#039;&#039;.&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Bands available in the drop-down list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Band lock and Operator Lock.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;2G/3G option&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2G/3G: - 3G allows additional features such as mobile internet access, video calls and mobile TV. While the main function of 2G technology is the transmission of information through voice calls.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:2G-3G option.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user should select the band check box  available for 2g/3g  from the given list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Bands available for selection under LTE for the bands available that zone.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Operator Selection Mode&#039;&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user needs to click on the check box of the “operator select enable” to select the operator.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the check box is clicked there will be a dropdown list of the operator modes from which the user needs to select the mode. The user needs to select the operator mode from the given dropdown list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Operator Selection Mode.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the user selects the mode “Manual” or “Manual-Automatic” then one more text box will appear where the user must provide the operator code.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Band lock and Operator Lock 1.png|frameless|542x542px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After configuring all the required information, the user should click on the save and then click on the update to update the all the required information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Wi-Fi Setting&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wi-Fi is a family of wireless network protocols based on the IEEE 802.11 family of standards, which are commonly used for local area network of devices and internet access, allowing nearby digital devices to exchanges data by radio waves. These are the most widely used computer network, used globally in home and small office networks to link devices and to provided internet access with wireless router and wireless access point in public places. In this router has the general setting and change country code, channel, radio mode, radio passphrase as per the requirement after clicking on enable Radio button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Wi-Fi Setting.png|frameless|585x585px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user needs to select the respective radio mode based on its need. Basically, it has 3 radio mode.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Wi-Fi Setting access Point.png|frameless|590x590px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Access Point mode:&#039;&#039;&#039; In Access Point mode, router connects to a wireless router through an Ethernet cable to extend the coverage of wireless signal to other network client.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Access Point Mode RC44.png|frameless|573x573px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Client point:&#039;&#039;&#039;  In client mode, the access point connects your wired devices to a wireless network. This mode is suitable when you have a wired device with an Ethernet port and no wireless capability, for example, a smart TV, Media Player, or Game console and you want to connect it to the internet wirelessly, select the Client Mode and give the Radio SSID &amp;amp; client passphrase&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Client Point RC44.png|frameless|587x587px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Access point and client point&#039;&#039;&#039;: select this option for both type connection, give both SSID and passphrase.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Access point and Client Point RC44.png|frameless|571x571px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After configuring all the required information, the user should click on the save and then click on the update to update the all the required information.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Radio  0 Protocol&lt;br /&gt;
|IEEE 802.11 b/g/n&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the  user should select which protocol is being used&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Country  Code&lt;br /&gt;
|INDIA&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the  user should select which county it belongs to.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Channel&lt;br /&gt;
|Auto&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user should  select the proper channel to be used.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|TX  Power&lt;br /&gt;
|100&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user should  specify the power.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Channel  Width&lt;br /&gt;
|20 MHz&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user should  select the channel width&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Radio  Mode&lt;br /&gt;
|Access  point&lt;br /&gt;
|In this drop down the user should  select the mode.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|Radio  SSID&lt;br /&gt;
|APClient_22B09230239&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user should  specify the SSID number&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|Radio  Authentication&lt;br /&gt;
|WPA2  Personal (PSK)&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user should  select the type of authentication.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|9&lt;br /&gt;
|Radio  Encryption&lt;br /&gt;
|AES&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user should  select the type of encryption required.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|10&lt;br /&gt;
|Radio  Passphrase&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user should  specify the password.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|11&lt;br /&gt;
|Radio  DHCP server IP&lt;br /&gt;
|192.168.100.1&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user should  specify the IP address of DHCP server.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|12&lt;br /&gt;
|Radio  DHCP start address&lt;br /&gt;
|100&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user should  specify the start address of the DHCP.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|13&lt;br /&gt;
|Radio  DHCP limit&lt;br /&gt;
|50&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user should  specify the limit for the DHCP.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Wireless Schedule&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wi-Fi can be automatically withdrawn based on the configuration done in this section.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user can schedule the Wi-Fi’s accessibility time during a particular period.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Wireless Schedule.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After configuring all the required information, the user should click on the save and then click on the update to update the all the required information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user can select more than one “day of the week” for scheduling the wifi working hours.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Wifi Schedule.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Loop back IP settings&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The loopback IP address, often referred to as “localhost”. it’s used to establish network connections within the same device for testing and troubleshooting purpose.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Loop back IP settings.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After configuring all the required information, the user should click on the save and then click on the update to update the all the required information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The loopback IP address, commonly represented as 127.0.0.1, is a special address used for testing network connectivity on a local machine. It allows a device to send network messages to itself without involving external networks, making it useful for troubleshooting and diagnostics.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
However, this IP can be changed as per requirement and to do that, Navigating to Setting&amp;gt;&amp;gt;Network configuration&amp;gt;&amp;gt; Loopback IP settings can be changed/updated.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Above screenshot shows the configuration window from GUI/WebUI&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;SMS Settings&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
User needs to enable SMS option in SMS settings page. This option is to validate the mobile numbers using which controlling commands could be sent to the router device. 1 to 5 mobile numbers can be authenticated by choosing from “Select Valid SMS user numbers” and adding the mobile numbers below respectively. API key is the pass key used in the commands while sending SMS. Displayed in the below screen is the default API key which can be edited and changed as per choice.   After addition of the mobile numbers user needs to click on save button for changes to take place.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SMS Settings.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select valid user number max. 5 and add authorized phone number in the main menu where want to find the alert and click on SMS Response Enable, save and update button, now send SMS commands from the configured mobile number. Once the commands are received from the user phone number the board send acknowledgement as per the commands after that it will send the router’s status once it has rebooted and is operational again. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mentioned below are a few commands which can be sent from the configured mobile number to the router device. Below two commands are One for rebooting the router device and another to get the uptime.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1) {&amp;quot;device&amp;quot;:[&amp;quot;passkey&amp;quot;,&amp;quot;API key&amp;quot;],&amp;quot;command&amp;quot;:&amp;quot;reboot&amp;quot;,&amp;quot;arguments&amp;quot;:&amp;quot;hardware&amp;quot;}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2) {&amp;quot;device&amp;quot;:[&amp;quot;passkey &amp;quot;,&amp;quot;API key&amp;quot;],&amp;quot;command&amp;quot;:&amp;quot;uptime&amp;quot;}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After configuring all the required information, the user should click on the save and then click on the update to update the all the required information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===2.2 SIM===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user needs to configure the Sim for the given device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SIM Switch.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user needs to select from the drop-down menu on which basis the sim needs to be switched.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Sim Switch Configuration.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user selects on “&#039;&#039;&#039;signal strength&#039;&#039;&#039;” then the parameters related to signal strength will pop up and the user needs to configure the parameters based on the requirement &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Signal Strength.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Threshold RSRP&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This Needs to be set appropriately. Incorrect setting may cause unnecessary SIM switching. ( In General a BAD RSRP value range is -140 to -115 and FAIR RSRP value range is -115 to -105).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Threshold SINR&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This Needs to be set appropriately. Incorrect setting may cause unnecessary SIM switching. ( In General a BAD SNR value range is -20 to 0 and FAIR SNR value range is 0 to 13)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user selects on “&#039;&#039;&#039;Data Limit&#039;&#039;&#039;” then the parameters related to Data Limit will pop up and the user needs to configure the parameters based on the requirement.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Data limit.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM Switch Based on&lt;br /&gt;
|Data Limit&lt;br /&gt;
|The user needs to select from the  drop-down menu on what basis the sim needs to be switched.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM 1 Data Usage Limit (In MB)&lt;br /&gt;
|1000&lt;br /&gt;
|The user needs to set the limit for the data  usage for SIM 1.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM 2 Data Usage Limit (In MB)&lt;br /&gt;
|1000&lt;br /&gt;
|The user needs to set the limit for the data  usage for SIM 2.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Periodicity&lt;br /&gt;
|Daily&lt;br /&gt;
|The user needs to set the pattern/frequency to  switch the sims.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Day Of Month&lt;br /&gt;
|16&lt;br /&gt;
|The user needs to set the day for switching the  sim.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
After configuring all the required information, the user should click on the save.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===2.3 Internet===&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user needs to configure the internet connection to set the priority from the various options. The user should decide what kind of connection it needs to provide to the device like LAN, WAN etc. Once the connections are configured then click on save option and then on update.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Internet.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the user needs to edit on the existing configuration, then the user should click on the “EDIT” button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Network Edit Options.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Name&lt;br /&gt;
|EWAN2&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the name of the WAN  connection&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Priority&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown box the user need to select  the priority.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Select Track IP Numbers&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user needs to select the  track number for the Ips.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|TrackIP1&lt;br /&gt;
|8.8.8.8&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text field the user needs to set the IP  address for the track 1&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|TrackIP2&lt;br /&gt;
|8.8.4.4&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text field the user needs to set the IP  address for the track 1&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Reliability&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Not sure what needs to be written&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|Count&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Not sure what needs to be written&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|Up&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Not sure what needs to be written&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|9&lt;br /&gt;
|Down&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Not sure what needs to be written&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user is done with modification click on the save button to save all the changes and then click on the update button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===2.4 VPN===&lt;br /&gt;
VPN stands for &#039;&#039;&#039;Virtual Private Network&#039;&#039;&#039;, it establishes a connection between the system and a remote server, which is owned by a VPN provider.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Creating a point-to-point tunnel that encrypts the personal data, masks the IP address, and allows to block the required website to blocks via firewalls on the internet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:VPN Settings RC44.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are 5 types of setting available under VPN configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* General Settings&lt;br /&gt;
* IPSEC&lt;br /&gt;
* Open VPN&lt;br /&gt;
* Wireguard&lt;br /&gt;
* Zerotier&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;General Settings&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user must choose which type of VPN connection is required for the device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user must select from IPSEC or Open VPN based on its requirement. If required, the user can select for both the options. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:VPN General Settings RC44.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user needs to click on the save after selecting the option based on its requirement.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;IPSEC&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
IPSEC VPN is used to create a VPN connection between local and remote networks. To use IPSEC VPN, the user should check that both local and remote routers support IPSEC VPN feature.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user can add/edit/delete the IPSEC VPN connection for the device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:VPN IPSEC changes RC44.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user needs to click on the update button once the required configuration is completed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In IPSEC the user needs to click on edit button to edit the configuration of an existing VPN connection.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:VPN Edit Options.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the save button after the required configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The tunnel will show established, showing the connection has been made.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:IPSEC .png|thumb|631x631px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|IPSEC&lt;br /&gt;
|Site to Site VPN&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user should select  the IPSEC connection type.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|IPSEC Role&lt;br /&gt;
|Client/Server&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown box the user needs to select  the IPSEC role.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Connection Type&lt;br /&gt;
|Tunnel&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user needs to select the connection  type. The user should select on the connection enable check box.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Connection mode&lt;br /&gt;
|start&lt;br /&gt;
|In this drop down list the user should select  the mode for the connection. it will have route/add/start/trap mode&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Remote Server IP&lt;br /&gt;
|1.1.1.1&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text field the user needs to set the IP  address for the remote server.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Local ID&lt;br /&gt;
|g300&lt;br /&gt;
|The user needs to set the local id.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|No. of local subnets&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user needs to select how  many subnets it will be connected.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|Local Subnet 1&lt;br /&gt;
|192.168.11.1/24&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user needs to put the  address of the local subnet.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|9&lt;br /&gt;
|Remote id&lt;br /&gt;
|sophos&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user needs to put the id  of the remote connection.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|10&lt;br /&gt;
|No of remote subnet&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user needs to select how  many subnets it will be connected remotely.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|11&lt;br /&gt;
|Remote subnet&lt;br /&gt;
|192.168.10.0/24&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user needs to put the  address of the remote subnet.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|12&lt;br /&gt;
|Key exchange&lt;br /&gt;
|Ikev1&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user should select the  which key exchange version to be selected.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|13&lt;br /&gt;
|Aggressive&lt;br /&gt;
|Yes/No&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user should select either  yes or no .&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|14&lt;br /&gt;
|IKE lifetime&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|Fill according to user’s requirements.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|15&lt;br /&gt;
|Lifetime in seconds&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Fill according to user’s requirements.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|16&lt;br /&gt;
|Enable DPD Detection&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;1&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
0&lt;br /&gt;
|Indicates  whether Dead Peer Detection is enabled to detect a lost connection. Enable  this option as per server-side settings.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|17&lt;br /&gt;
|Time Interval (In Seconds)&lt;br /&gt;
|60&lt;br /&gt;
|This option  is available only if DPD Detection is enabled. The time interval is the  interval for DPD checks.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|18&lt;br /&gt;
|Action&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Restart&#039;&#039;&#039;/clear/hold/&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
trap/start&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Restart&#039;&#039;&#039;: Action to take when  DPD detects a lost connection (restart the connection). Select as per  server-side setting.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|19&lt;br /&gt;
|Authentication Method&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;PSK&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;PSK&#039;&#039;&#039;: Pre-shared key is used  for authentication. Select this option for authentication as per sever side  setting.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|20&lt;br /&gt;
|Multiple Secrets&lt;br /&gt;
|1/&#039;&#039;&#039;0&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|Indicates  whether multiple PSK secrets are used. Enable only if required.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|21&lt;br /&gt;
|PSK Value&lt;br /&gt;
|******&lt;br /&gt;
|Pre-shared  key value (masked for security).&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;*Below are Phase I and Phase II settings details*&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&lt;br /&gt;
! colspan=&amp;quot;4&amp;quot; |                                                        &#039;&#039;&#039;Proposal settings Phase I&#039;&#039;&#039;                                                                                                                     &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|22            &lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Encryption Algorithm&#039;&#039;&#039;                                                 &lt;br /&gt;
|AES 128&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AES 192&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;AES 256&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3DES                                                                                                                                     &lt;br /&gt;
|                                                                                                                                     &#039;&#039;&#039;AES 256&#039;&#039;&#039;: Encryption algorithm  for Phase I. Select as per server-side configuration. Both server and client  should have same configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|23&lt;br /&gt;
|Authentication Phase I&lt;br /&gt;
|SHA1&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MD5&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SHA 256&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SHA 384&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;SHA 512&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;SHA 512&#039;&#039;&#039;: Authentication  algorithm for Phase I.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select as per  server-side configuration. Both server and client should have same configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|24&lt;br /&gt;
|DH Group&lt;br /&gt;
|MODP768(group1)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MODP1024(group2)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MODP1536(group5)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;MODP2048(group14)&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MODP3072(group15)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MODP4096(group16)&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;MODP2048 (group14)&#039;&#039;&#039;:  Diffie-Hellman group for key exchange.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select as per  server-side configuration. Both server and client should have same  configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| colspan=&amp;quot;4&amp;quot; |                                                                                                                                                                 &#039;&#039;&#039;Proposal settings Phase II&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|25&lt;br /&gt;
|Hash Algorithm&lt;br /&gt;
|AES 128&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AES 192&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;AES 256&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3DES&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;AES 256&#039;&#039;&#039;: Encryption algorithm  for Phase II. Select as per server-side configuration. Both server and client  should have same configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|26&lt;br /&gt;
|Authentication Phase II&lt;br /&gt;
|SHA1&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MD5&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SHA 256&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SHA 384&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;SHA 512&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;SHA 512&#039;&#039;&#039;: Authentication  algorithm for Phase II.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select as per  server-side configuration. Both server and client should have same  configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|27&lt;br /&gt;
|PFS Group&lt;br /&gt;
|MODP768(group1)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MODP1024(group2)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MODP1536(group5)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;MODP2048(group14)&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MODP3072(group15)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MODP4096(group16)&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;MODP2048 (group14)&#039;&#039;&#039;: Perfect  Forward Secrecy group.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select as per  server-side configuration. Both server and client should have same  configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Open VPN&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the OpenVPN connection, the home network can act as a server, and the remote device can access the server through the router which acts as an OpenVPN Server gateway. To use the VPN feature, the user should enable OpenVPN Server on the router, and install and run VPN client software on the remote device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Open VPN Settings RC44.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user needs to “upload” the respective certificate from a valid path and then click on the “Update.”&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the OpenVPN connection starts the user will get an option to enable/disable the VPN connection as and when required.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By clicking on the enable/disable button, the user can start/stop the VPN connection.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Open VPN Settings RC44 Dashboard.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
VPN has been established.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;WireGuard:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;WireGuard&#039;&#039;&#039; is simple, fast, lean, and modern VPN that utilizes secure and trusted cryptography.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on “Edit” to start configurations as needed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Wire Guard RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;EDIT:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Wire Guard RC44 Setttings.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the save button after the required configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample Value     &lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Wireguard Role&lt;br /&gt;
|Client/Server&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown box the user needs to select  the wireguard role.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Listen Port&lt;br /&gt;
|51820&lt;br /&gt;
|The UDP port on which the WireGuard client  listens for incoming connections.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|IP Addresses&lt;br /&gt;
|10.0.0.1/24&lt;br /&gt;
|The IP  address and subnet mask assigned to the WireGuard client&#039;s interface. This  address is used within the VPN.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Allowed PeerIPs&lt;br /&gt;
|10.1.1.1&lt;br /&gt;
|The IP  address of the allowed peer(s) that can connect to this WireGuard client.  This might need adjustment based on the actual peer IPs used in the network.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Endpoint HostIP&lt;br /&gt;
|10.1.1.1&lt;br /&gt;
|The IP  address of the WireGuard server (the endpoint to which the client connects).&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Endpoint HostPort&lt;br /&gt;
|51820&lt;br /&gt;
|The port on  the WireGuard server to which the client connects.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|PeerPublicKey&lt;br /&gt;
|*****&lt;br /&gt;
|The public  key of the peer (the server) the client is connecting to. This key is part of  the public-private key pair used in WireGuard for encryption and  authentication.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|Enable Preshared key&lt;br /&gt;
|Yes/No&lt;br /&gt;
|This option  indicates that a pre-shared key (PSK) is used in addition to the  public-private key pair for an extra layer of security.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|9&lt;br /&gt;
|Preshared key&lt;br /&gt;
|*****&lt;br /&gt;
|The actual  pre-shared key value shared between the client and the server. This option  appears only if you have enabled preshared key.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Zerotier:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ZeroTier is a tool that lets you create your own private network over the internet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Go to ZeroTier Central and sign up for a free account. In ZeroTier Central, click on &amp;quot;Create a Network&amp;quot;. This will generate a unique 16-digit network ID for your new network.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Go to settings =&amp;gt; VPN, in general settings, enable ZeroTier and save.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Zerotier Settings RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Copy and paste the unique 16-digit network ID in the edit section.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Zero Seetings Dashboard RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Zerotier Dashboard.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the save button after the required configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field Name    &lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  Value           &lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|NetworkID&lt;br /&gt;
|Ad2769hfkw2345f4&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown box the user needs to paste  the unique 16-digit network id.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Listen Port&lt;br /&gt;
|9993&lt;br /&gt;
|Default&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== 2.5 Firewall ===&lt;br /&gt;
A firewall is a layer of security between the network and the Internet. Since a router is the main connection from a network to the Internet, the firewall function is merged into this device. Every network should have a firewall to protect its privacy.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Firewall.png|frameless|635x635px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are 6 types of setting available under firewall.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* General Settings&lt;br /&gt;
* Port forwards&lt;br /&gt;
* Traffic Rules&lt;br /&gt;
* SNAT traffic Rules&lt;br /&gt;
* Parental Control&lt;br /&gt;
* Zone Forwarding&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;General Setting&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
General settings are subdivided into 2 parts,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1.) General settings&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In general settings, the settings that are made are default settings and can be changed according to user’s preference.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Firewall General Settings.png|frameless|622x622px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Specification details are below:&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;SN&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Field Name&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Sample Value&#039;&#039;&#039;      &lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Description&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Enable SYN-flood  protection&lt;br /&gt;
|Enabled&lt;br /&gt;
|This is  enabled by default; setting can be changed if required.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Disable IPV6&lt;br /&gt;
|Disabled&lt;br /&gt;
|This is  enabled by default; setting can be changed if required.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Drop invalid packets&lt;br /&gt;
|Disabled&lt;br /&gt;
|This is  enabled by default; setting can be changed if required.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|TCP SYN Cookies&lt;br /&gt;
|Disabled&lt;br /&gt;
|This is  enabled by default; setting can be changed if required.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Input&lt;br /&gt;
|Reject/Accept&lt;br /&gt;
|By  default, the setting is ‘Reject’ but this needs to be changed to ‘Accept’  compulsory.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Output&lt;br /&gt;
|Reject/Accept&lt;br /&gt;
|By  default, the setting is ‘Reject’ but this needs to be changed to ‘Accept’  compulsory.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|Forward&lt;br /&gt;
|Reject/Accept&lt;br /&gt;
|By  default, the setting is ‘Reject’ but this needs to be changed to ‘Accept’  compulsory.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2.) Zone settings&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In zone settings, there’s an option to add “New Zone”, according to user’s requirement.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Zone settings.png|thumb|628x628px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Port Forwards:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Port forwarding is a feature in a router or gateway that allows external devices to access services on a private network.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It maps an external port on the router to an internal IP address and port on the local network, enabling applications such as gaming servers, web servers, or remote desktop connections to be accessed from outside the network.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This helps in directing incoming traffic to the correct device within a local network based on the port number, enhancing connectivity and accessibility.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Firewall Port Forward.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;EDIT&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Firewall Edit Option RC44.png|frameless|622x622px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the save button after the required configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Name&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Web_Server_Forward&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|Field must  not be empty. Provide a name for the rule to easily identify it.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Protocol&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;TCP+UDP&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|Select the protocol  for the rule.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Options  typically include TCP+UDP, TCP, UDP, ICMP, Custom.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Source zone&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;SW_LAN&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|Select the  source zone where the traffic is originating from. Options typically include EWAN2,SW_LAN,CWAN1,CWAN1_0,CWAN1_1,VPN&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Source MAC address [optional]&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;any&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;any&#039;&#039;&#039;: Leave as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;any&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; if you don&#039;t want to specify a MAC address.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Source IP address[optional]&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: Leave blank if not needed.&lt;br /&gt;
|Optionally  specify an IP address or range.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Source port&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;80, 443&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;  (if matching traffic for web server ports)&lt;br /&gt;
|Specify the  source port or port range.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|Destination zone&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;SW_LAN&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|Select the  destination zone where the traffic is heading to.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|Destination IP address&lt;br /&gt;
|Leave blank if not needed.&lt;br /&gt;
|Optionally specify  the destination IP address or range.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|9&lt;br /&gt;
|Destination port&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;80&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;  (if redirecting to a web server port)&lt;br /&gt;
|Specify the  destination port or port range.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Traffic Rule:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;Traffic rules&amp;quot; refer to the policies and regulations that govern the flow of data packets within a network.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To allow new traffic, click on “Add and Edit” in “New Traffic Rule”.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Firewall Traffic Rule.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;EDIT&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Firewall Traffic Rule Edit.png|frameless|621x621px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Specification details are below:&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample Value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Name&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: Allow_HTTP_and_HTTPS&lt;br /&gt;
|Field must  not be empty: Provide a descriptive name for the traffic rule.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Restrict to Address Family&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|1.       Options:  IPv4, IPv6&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2.       Example:  IPv4 if dealing with typical internet traffic.&lt;br /&gt;
|Select the  address family to generate iptables rules for.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Protocol&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: TCP+UDP&lt;br /&gt;
|TCP+UDP:  Match incoming traffic using the given protocol.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Match ICMP Type&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: any&lt;br /&gt;
|Match all  ICMP types if set to any. Specific types can be chosen if needed.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Source Zone&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: LAN&lt;br /&gt;
|Specifies the  traffic source zone.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Enable DDoS Prevention&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: ‘Checked’ if you want to enable DDoS prevention  measures&lt;br /&gt;
|Enable or  disable Distributed Denial of Service (DDoS) prevention.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|Source MAC Address&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: any&lt;br /&gt;
|any: Match  traffic from any MAC address or specify a particular MAC address.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|Source Address&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: 192.168.1.0/24&lt;br /&gt;
|Match  incoming traffic from the specified source IP address or range.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|9&lt;br /&gt;
|Source Port&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: any if all source ports should be matched&lt;br /&gt;
|any: Match  incoming traffic from the specified source port or port range.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|10&lt;br /&gt;
|Destination Zone&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: WAN&lt;br /&gt;
|Specifies the  traffic destination zone.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|11&lt;br /&gt;
|Action&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: ACCEPT&lt;br /&gt;
|Options:  ACCEPT, DROP, REJECT. Specify the action to take for matched traffic.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|12&lt;br /&gt;
|Limit&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: 10/minute to limit matches to 10 times per  minute.&lt;br /&gt;
|Maximum  average matching rate; specified as a number, with an optional /second,  /minute, /hour, or /day suffix.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|13&lt;br /&gt;
|Extra arguments&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: --log-prefix &amp;quot;Blocked: &amp;quot; to add a log  prefix to log messages for this rule.&lt;br /&gt;
|Passes  additional arguments to iptables. Use with care as it can significantly alter  rule behaviour.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
Click on save once configured.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;SNAT Traffic Rule:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For configuring SNAT (Source Network Address Translation) traffic rules, you can control how outbound traffic from your local network is translated to a different IP address as it exits the network.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To add new source NAT,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on “ADD” in “New Source NAT:”&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SNAT Traffic Rule.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Edit&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SNAT Edit Options RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Specification details are below:&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Name&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: SNAT_WAN_to_LAN&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Field must  not be empty&#039;&#039;&#039;: Provide a unique and descriptive name for the SNAT rule.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Protocol&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: TCP+UDP&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;TCP+UDP&#039;&#039;&#039;:  Select the protocols that the SNAT rule will apply to.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Source Zone&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: wan&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;wan&#039;&#039;&#039;:  Specifies the source zone from which the traffic originates.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Source IP Address&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: any or a specific range like 192.168.1.0/24&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;-- please  choose --&#039;&#039;&#039;: Specify the source IP address or range. Leave empty if the  rule applies to any source IP.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Source Port&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: any&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;any&#039;&#039;&#039;:  Specify the source port or port range from which the traffic originates.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Destination Zone&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: lan&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;lan&#039;&#039;&#039;:  Specifies the destination zone to which the traffic is directed.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|Destination IP Address&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: any or a specific IP like 192.168.1.100&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;-- please  choose --&#039;&#039;&#039;: Specify the destination IP address or range. Leave empty if  the rule applies to any destination IP.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|Destination port&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: any&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;any&#039;&#039;&#039;:  Specify the destination port or port range to which the traffic is directed.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|9&lt;br /&gt;
|SNAT IP Address&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: 203.0.113.5 (an external IP address)&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;-- please  choose --&#039;&#039;&#039;: Specify the IP address to which the source IP should be  translated.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|10&lt;br /&gt;
|SNAT Port&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: Leave empty if not needed, or specify a port  like ‘12345’&lt;br /&gt;
|Optionally,  rewrite matched traffic to a specific source port. Leave empty to only  rewrite the IP address.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|11&lt;br /&gt;
|Extra Arguments&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: --log-prefix &amp;quot;SNAT_traffic: &amp;quot; (to add  a log prefix to log messages for this rule)&lt;br /&gt;
|Pass  additional arguments to iptables. Use with care as it can significantly alter  rule behaviour.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
Click on save once configured.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Parental Control:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For configuring parental control rules, you want to set restrictions based on time, source, and destination zones, as well as specific devices.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To add parental control in firewall,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on “Add and Edit” in “New parental control:” field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Parental Control.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Edit&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Parental Control Edit Options RC44.png|frameless|622x622px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Specification details are given below:&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  Name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  Value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Name&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  Parental_Control_Sunday&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Field must  not be empty&#039;&#039;&#039;: Provide a unique and descriptive name for the parental  control rule.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Proto&lt;br /&gt;
|all&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;all&#039;&#039;&#039;:  This specifies that the rule will apply to all protocols.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Source Zone&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: lan&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Field must  not be empty&#039;&#039;&#039;: Please look at Firewall-&amp;gt;Zone Settings to find zone  names.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Destination  Zone&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: wan&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Field must  not be empty&#039;&#039;&#039;: Please look at Firewall-&amp;gt;Zone Settings to find zone  names.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Source MAC  Address&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  00:1A:2B:3C:4D:5E&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Field&#039;&#039;&#039;:  Enter the MAC address of the device you want to apply the parental control  rule to. This is useful for restricting specific devices.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Target&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  Reject&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Accept&#039;&#039;&#039;:  This specifies the action to take. For parental controls, you might want to  use ‘Reject’ or ‘Drop’ to block traffic.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|Weekdays&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  Sunday&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Sunday&#039;&#039;&#039;:  Specify the days of the week when the rule should be active.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|Month Days&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: All&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;All:&#039;&#039;&#039; Specify  the days of the month when the rule should be active.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|9&lt;br /&gt;
|Start Time (hh:mm:ss)&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  18:00:00 (6:00 PM)&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Field must  not be empty:&#039;&#039;&#039; Specify the start time when the rule should begin to apply.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|10&lt;br /&gt;
|Stop Time  (hh:mm:ss)&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  22:00:00 (10:00 PM)&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Field must  not be empty:&#039;&#039;&#039; Specify the stop time when the rule should end.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
Click on save once configured.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Zone Forwarding:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Zone forwarding in network configuration allows traffic to be directed from one zone to another.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To ADD new zone,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on “Add” in “New Zone Forward:” field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Zone Forwarding RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;EDIT&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Zone Forwarding editing Options RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Specification details are below:&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  Name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  Value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Source Zone&lt;br /&gt;
|Example options: lan, wan, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;--please  choose--&#039;&#039;&#039;: Select the source zone from which the traffic originates.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Destination Zone&lt;br /&gt;
|Example options: lan, wan, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;--please  choose--&#039;&#039;&#039;: Select the destination zone to which the traffic is directed.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
Click on save once configured.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===2.6 Loopback Rule===&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user can configure the port where he want to forward the traffic to. Here the user can add/edit/delete different port ports as per the requirement. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Loopback Rule.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user should click on ‘add’ and then ‘edit’ to do the required changes in the port and enter the valid information in each section to configure the port for forwarding.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Loopback Rule edit.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Specification details are given below:&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  Name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  Value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Name&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: loopback&lt;br /&gt;
|Provide a  descriptive name for the rule.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Protocol&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: TCP+UDP&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;TCP+UDP&#039;&#039;&#039;:  Select the protocols that the rule will apply to.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Source IP Address [Optional]&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: any or a specific IP range like 192.168.1.0/24&lt;br /&gt;
|Optionally  specify the source IP address or range. Leave empty if the rule should apply  to any source IP.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Source Port [Optional]&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: any&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;any&#039;&#039;&#039;:  Specify the source port or port range from which the traffic originates. any  allows traffic from all ports.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Loopback IP Address&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: 127.0.0.1&lt;br /&gt;
|Specify the  loopback IP address. Typically, this is 127.0.0.1.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Port&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: any&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;any&#039;&#039;&#039;:  Specify the destination port or port range to which the traffic is directed.  any allows traffic to all ports.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|Action&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: DNAT&lt;br /&gt;
|This  specifies the action to take either DNAT or SNAT.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|Internal IP Address&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: 192.168.1.100&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Field must  not be empty&#039;&#039;&#039;: Specify the internal IP address to which the traffic should  be redirected.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|9&lt;br /&gt;
|Internal Port&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: any&lt;br /&gt;
|Redirect  matched incoming traffic to the given port on the internal host.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user is done with the required configurations, user should click save button and then click on the update to save the changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===2.7 Remote Monitoring===&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user can select which equipment needs to be monitored remotely.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user selects the type of RMS click on save.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Remote Monitoring.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;NMS:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user should type the server IP or domain name in the URL then click on save.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on upload and start (Once key is uploaded and this option is clicked, NMS automatically starts, and this router device gets registered with the NMS server provided).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:NMS.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;TR069&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To enable the TR069 the user needs to click on the enable check box.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:TR069.png|frameless|582x582px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user clicks on the check box of enable it will display all the required filed to configured.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Remote Monitoring Tr-069.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Serving Interval&lt;br /&gt;
|300&lt;br /&gt;
|This displays the interval time&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Interface&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|Not sure what needs to be written&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Username&lt;br /&gt;
|Username&lt;br /&gt;
|The user needs to mention the username&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Password&lt;br /&gt;
|******&lt;br /&gt;
|The user should set the password&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|URL&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|The user needs to mention the URL&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
The user should fill all the required fields and click on the save button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===2.8 Tunnel===&lt;br /&gt;
Tunnels are a method of transporting data across a network using protocols which are not supported by that network.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tunnel Settings.png|frameless|621x621px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;General Settings&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user needs to select under which type of tunnel it needs to send the data.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tunnel General Settings.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user selects the type of tunnel then click in the save button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;GRE Tunnel&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user needs to add all the details of GRE tunnels.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user configured all the required fields then it needs to click on the save. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:GRE Tunnel.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here the user can add/edit/delete the details of the tunnel. Once the required update is done then it needs to click on update to save the changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tunnel Configuration.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;IPIP Tunnel&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user needs to add all the details of IPIP tunnels.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user configured all the required fields then it needs to click on the save. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:IPIP Tunnel.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here the user can add/edit/delete the details of the tunnel. Once the required update is done then it needs to click on update to save the changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Ipip config.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==3 Maintenance==&lt;br /&gt;
In this module the user can configure/upgrade/modify the settings related to system, password, firmware and monitoring.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Maintenance System.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It includes below submodules.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* General&lt;br /&gt;
* Password&lt;br /&gt;
* Reboot&lt;br /&gt;
* Import and Export config&lt;br /&gt;
* Firmware upgrade&lt;br /&gt;
* Monitor Application&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===3.1 General===&lt;br /&gt;
In this section the user can configure the details related to time zone and host name&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Maintenance General.png|frameless|619x619px]]&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Local Time&lt;br /&gt;
|2023/12/13 12:24:11&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|It displays the system current date and  time.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|HostName&lt;br /&gt;
|31B30230298&lt;br /&gt;
|It displays the host name.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Timezone&lt;br /&gt;
|Asia/Kolkata&lt;br /&gt;
|It displays in which time zone its configured.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user configures the required details then click on the save button to save all the details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Logging&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here the user can configure the basic aspects of your device related to system.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Maintenance logging.png|frameless|608x608px]]&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|System log buffer size&lt;br /&gt;
|32&lt;br /&gt;
|This displays the log size of system buffer&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|External system log server&lt;br /&gt;
|0.0.0.0&lt;br /&gt;
|This displays the ip add of the external system  log&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|External system log server port&lt;br /&gt;
|514&lt;br /&gt;
|This displays the port number of the external  system log&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Log output level&lt;br /&gt;
|debug&lt;br /&gt;
|In this drop down the user selects the level of  the log output.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Cron Log level&lt;br /&gt;
|debug&lt;br /&gt;
|In this drop down the user selects the level of  the corn log .&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user configures the required details then click on the save button to save all the details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Language and Style&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here the user can configure the basic aspects of your device related to language.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Maintenance Language and Style.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user configures the required details then click on the save button to save all the details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===3.2 Password===&lt;br /&gt;
In this module the user can set the password for the admin credentials.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Change you password.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Specifies the password for the guest account. If the user enter a plaintext password here, it will get replaced with a crypted password on save. The new password will be effective once the user logs out and log in again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user needs to write the password in the text box and click on the save button to save the password.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===3.3 Reboot===&lt;br /&gt;
In this module the user can reboot the device remotely.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Reboot.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To start the reboot process first the user needs to fill all the required fields.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Need to select the type of reboot for the device whether it needs to be Hardware or Software reboot.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Maintenance Reboot.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Type&lt;br /&gt;
|Maintenance Reboot&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown list the user needs to  select the type of reboot is required to configure.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Reboot Type&lt;br /&gt;
|Hardware&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown list the user needs to select  the hardware or software reboot is required.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Minutes&lt;br /&gt;
|59&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user needs to configure  the min to start the reboot activity&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Hours&lt;br /&gt;
|22&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user needs to configure  the hours to start the reboot activity&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Day of Month&lt;br /&gt;
|All&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user needs to configure  the day of the month to start the reboot activity&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Month&lt;br /&gt;
|All&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user needs to configure  the month to start the reboot activity&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|Day of the week&lt;br /&gt;
|All&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user needs to configure  the week to start the reboot activity&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user fills all the required given parameters click on the save.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To start the reboot process, click on the “Reboot Now” button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===3.4 Import and Export===&lt;br /&gt;
In this section, User can Import &amp;amp; Export Configuration files of the Device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Import and Export.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
click “Export Config” to export device configuration &amp;amp; settings to a text file,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
click “Import Config” to import device configuration &amp;amp; settings from a previously exported text file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Import window.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user need to select on the choose file to and click on the apply.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===3.5 Firmware Upgrade===&lt;br /&gt;
The user can upgrade with the latest software for the existing firmware. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Frimware Upgrade.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the &#039;&#039;&#039;flash image&#039;&#039;&#039; and chose the path where the sys-upgrade file is kept and then click on flash image, it will upgrade to the latest software once the reboot is done.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Flash Image.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the &#039;&#039;&#039;Retain Config and flash&#039;&#039;&#039; and chose the path where the sys-upgrade file is kept and then click on Retain Config and flash, it will upgrade to the latest software once the reboot is done.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Flash Image.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the &#039;&#039;&#039;Factory Reset&#039;&#039;&#039; for the complete retest of the device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===3.6 Monitor Application===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Monitor Application.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Router Application Remote Configuration.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Router Remote Configuration.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==4 Status==&lt;br /&gt;
In this module the user can view the status of the router device with respect to the network, Wan, modem etc.[[File:Status.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It has 4 submodules.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Interfaces&lt;br /&gt;
* Internet&lt;br /&gt;
* Modem&lt;br /&gt;
* Route&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===4.1 Interfaces===&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user can see the traffic status for all the network through which the device works.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Status Interfaces.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Looking on the network status the user can check if the cellular or the ethernet is up.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===4.2 Internet===&lt;br /&gt;
In this submodule the user can view the status of the internet connections.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Internet Status.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
  To see the latest status of the internet connection the user needs to click on the refresh button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===4.3 Modem===&lt;br /&gt;
In this sub module the user will get to know the status of the cellular interface which is installed inside the modem. The user can view all the details related to the sim in terms of Operator, Network technology, Mobile country code, Upload bandwidth, Download Bandwidth, Frequency band, RSRP, RSRQ, RSSI &amp;amp; SNR under this page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Modem Status.png|frameless|602x602px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== 4.4 Route ===&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user can check the status of the route for the device. The ARP status can be visible in under this page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Route Status.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==5 Features==&lt;br /&gt;
In this module the user can see all the features that the router device has.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This module includes the below features.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Mac Address Binding&lt;br /&gt;
* URL Filtering&lt;br /&gt;
* Web Server&lt;br /&gt;
* Wi-Fi MacID Filtering&lt;br /&gt;
* Routing&lt;br /&gt;
* Others&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Features.png|frameless|618x618px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===5.1 Mac Address Binding===&lt;br /&gt;
Under this submodule the user can configure/update/edit the IP Address for MAC&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mac Addressing Binding.png|frameless|622x622px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user should write MAC address and then click on the add button. Once the address is added then click on the update button to save the modification.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user needs to click on the Edit button to modify the preexisting configuration. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mac Address Edit.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user modifies the MAC address /IP Address then click on the save button to save the changes done.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user can click on the deleted button to delete an existing configured device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Post all the changes the user needs to click on the update to reflect all the changes in the application.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===5.2 URL Filtering===&lt;br /&gt;
In this submodule the user should provide the URL which needs to be blocked for the device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:URL Filtering.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To add the new URL for blocking, click on the Add New button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user clicks on the Add New button a new pop will appear in that page write the URL and click on the save. The user can select the status of that URL while defining the URL.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Url Update.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To edit / delete the existing URL the user needs to click on the edit /deleted button respectively.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Edit or Delete URL.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the save after the changes are done as per the need.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== 5.3 Web Server ===&lt;br /&gt;
In this submodule the user can configure webserver related parameters.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Web server.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To configure the HTTP, click on the enable HTTP. Once the user clicks on the check box the HTTP Port text box will appear where the user needs to configure the port id.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Webserver Configuration.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on save buttons to save the changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To configure the 2nd HTTP, click on the enable HTTP. Once the user clicks on the check box the HTTP Port text box will appear where the user needs to configure the port id.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Webserver Https Redirect.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on save buttons to save the changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the “Redirect https” and “RFC1918 Filter” check box to respectively and click on the save button to save the changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To configure the NTP sync, click on the enable NTP sync. Once the user clicks on the check box the respective text boxes will appear to configure the parameters. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:RFC1918 Filter.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user configures the parameters click on the save button to save the given values.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===5.4 Wi-Fi MacID Filtering===&lt;br /&gt;
In this module the user can filter the Macids. Mac address filtering allows users to block traffic coming from certain known machines or devices.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Wi-Fi MacID Filtering.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Before adding the MacIDs the user needs to select the mode from the dropdown menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To Add the MacID the user needs to click on Add New option select the mac id and network name Wi-Fi 2.4G AP OR Wi-Fi 2.4G AP Guest, select enable/disable option and save it and update.              &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Configuring MacID and Network Name.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the required MACID and Network Name is configured the user needs to click on the save button to add the details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user needs to click on the edit button to do modifications on the pre-existing configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Macid and name removing.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the required MACID / Network Name is modified the user needs to click on the save button to reflect the changed value in the application.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;WIFI 2.4G AP Guest&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To Add the MacID the user needs to click on Add New option select the mac id and network name Wi-Fi 2.4G AP Guest, select enable/disable option and save it and update.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
     [[File:WIFI 2.4G AP Guest.png|frameless|623x623px]]  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the required MACID and Network Name is configured the user needs to click on the save button to add the details. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user needs to click on the edit button to do modifications on the pre-existing configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Configuring MacID and Network Name.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the required MACID / Network Name is modified the user needs to click on the save button to reflect the changed value in the application.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===5.5 Routing===&lt;br /&gt;
In this submodule the user can configure the parameters related to routing of the device. like Target address, Networks address etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Routing IPV4 Routes.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To add a new device the user needs to fill all the required information and click on the add button.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Interface&lt;br /&gt;
|eth0.1&lt;br /&gt;
|In this drop down list the user should  configure the interface name.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Target&lt;br /&gt;
|192.168.10.1&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user needs to insert the  target IP address&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|IPV4 Netmask&lt;br /&gt;
|255.255.255.0&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user should give the  address for the IPV4Netmask&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Metric&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user should insert the  number of the metric.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|IPV4 Gateway&lt;br /&gt;
|192.168.100.1&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user should configured the  address for the IPV4 Gateway.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Route Type&lt;br /&gt;
|Unicast&lt;br /&gt;
|In this drop down box the user should select  the type of route needed for the device.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
To edit the existing device the user needs to click on the edit option.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Routing Configuration.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the changes are done click on the save button to save all the changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the deleted button to delete the existing device detail.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Advanced Static IPV4 Routes:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Advanced Static IPV4 Routes.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To add a new device the user needs to fill all the required information and click on the add button.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Interface&lt;br /&gt;
|eth0.1&lt;br /&gt;
|In this drop down list the user should  configure the interface name.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|To&lt;br /&gt;
|192.168.10.1&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user needs to insert the  target IP address&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|IPV4 Netmask&lt;br /&gt;
|255.255.255.0&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user should give the  address for the IPV4Netmask&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Table&lt;br /&gt;
|local&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|From&lt;br /&gt;
|192.168.100.1&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user should configured the  from address for the routes&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Priority&lt;br /&gt;
|230&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
To edit the existing device the user needs to click on the edit option.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Routing Editing.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the changes are done click on the save button to save all the changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the deleted button to delete the existing device detail.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once all the configurations are done click on the update button to reflect the changes made.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===5.6 Others===&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user will get to do all the other miscellaneous configuration with respect to the device based on the required parameters.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Miscellaneous configuration.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Utility&lt;br /&gt;
|Action&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Set Date&lt;br /&gt;
|SET&lt;br /&gt;
|Need to set the date and time and after  click command get the Date and time&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Gate Date&lt;br /&gt;
|GET&lt;br /&gt;
|Needs to get the system date and time&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|IPsec status all&lt;br /&gt;
|GET&lt;br /&gt;
|Needs to get the IPsec details&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Wi-Fi Scan&lt;br /&gt;
|GET&lt;br /&gt;
|Needs to get the Wi-Fi status&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|ipref3 client&lt;br /&gt;
|RUN&lt;br /&gt;
|Needs to click on the RUN to execute  the command&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|ipref3 server&lt;br /&gt;
|RUN&lt;br /&gt;
|Needs to click on the RUN to execute  the command&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|Ping&lt;br /&gt;
|PING&lt;br /&gt;
|Needs to click on the ping status&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|9&lt;br /&gt;
|Traceroute&lt;br /&gt;
|RUN&lt;br /&gt;
|Needs to click on the ping Traceroute status&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|10&lt;br /&gt;
|NTP Sync&lt;br /&gt;
|SYNC&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to Sync the NTP&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|11&lt;br /&gt;
|Download Files&lt;br /&gt;
|DOWNLOAD&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to Download the files /Database&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|12&lt;br /&gt;
|Restart Power&lt;br /&gt;
|RESTART&lt;br /&gt;
|Click Restart the power&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|13&lt;br /&gt;
|Restart Modem&lt;br /&gt;
|RESTART&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to Restart the modem&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|14&lt;br /&gt;
|Run at command&lt;br /&gt;
|RUN&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to Run the command&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|15&lt;br /&gt;
|Show board configuration&lt;br /&gt;
|SHOW&lt;br /&gt;
|To Show the board configuration&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|16&lt;br /&gt;
|Show VPN Certificate Name&lt;br /&gt;
|SHOW&lt;br /&gt;
|To Show VPN Certificate Name&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|17&lt;br /&gt;
|Switch SIM to Secondary&lt;br /&gt;
|RUN&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to switch the SIM to secondary  mode&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|18&lt;br /&gt;
|Send Test SMS&lt;br /&gt;
|SEND&lt;br /&gt;
|To Send the SMS Confirmation&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|19&lt;br /&gt;
|Readlatest SMS&lt;br /&gt;
|READ&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to Read the latest SMS&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|20&lt;br /&gt;
|Data Usage&lt;br /&gt;
|SHOW&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to show the data usage.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|21&lt;br /&gt;
|Monthly Data Usage&lt;br /&gt;
|SHOW&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to show the monthly data usage&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|22&lt;br /&gt;
|Modem debug Info&lt;br /&gt;
|READ&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to read the information about the  modem debug&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|23&lt;br /&gt;
|Scan Network operators (take&amp;gt;3mins)&lt;br /&gt;
|SHOW&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to show the Network operator&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|24&lt;br /&gt;
|Network operators (first perform scan  network operator&lt;br /&gt;
|SHOW&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to show the Network operator&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|25&lt;br /&gt;
|ReadLogFiles&lt;br /&gt;
|READ&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to read the log files&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|26&lt;br /&gt;
|Enable ssh&lt;br /&gt;
|RUN&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to Run the command&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|27&lt;br /&gt;
|Disable ssh&lt;br /&gt;
|RUN&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to Run the command&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|28&lt;br /&gt;
|Clear SIM1 Data&lt;br /&gt;
|CLEAR&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to clear the SIM1 data&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|29&lt;br /&gt;
|Clear SIM2 Data&lt;br /&gt;
|CLEAR&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to clear the SIM data&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==6 Logout==&lt;br /&gt;
The user should click on log out option to logged out from the router application.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Logout.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user needs to click on the ok to come out of the router application.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tanisha</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.silbonetworks.com/index.php?title=File:Remote_Monitoring.png&amp;diff=1161</id>
		<title>File:Remote Monitoring.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.silbonetworks.com/index.php?title=File:Remote_Monitoring.png&amp;diff=1161"/>
		<updated>2024-09-02T11:17:07Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tanisha: Tanisha uploaded a new version of File:Remote Monitoring.png&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Remote Monitoring&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tanisha</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.silbonetworks.com/index.php?title=RC44_User_Manual&amp;diff=1159</id>
		<title>RC44 User Manual</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.silbonetworks.com/index.php?title=RC44_User_Manual&amp;diff=1159"/>
		<updated>2024-09-02T11:15:33Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tanisha: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;This page contains the user manual for RC44.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Connecting with the device to the System (Laptop/Desktop).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To log in to SILBO_RC44 by connecting the router to your laptop or desktop via LAN or using Wi-Fi, please follow the steps below. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Connecting via LAN:&#039;&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Connect your laptop&#039;s LAN port to one of the router&#039;s LAN interfaces. Ensure that you select any LAN interface (there are two available) while making sure the WAN interface is not used. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
                                                                                                                                                          &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;How to connect with the SILBO_RC44&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;application&#039;&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the LAN connection is established between the device and the laptop or the desktop&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please open the command prompt and ping go get the ip config of that device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Type the command &#039;&#039;&#039;Ipconfig&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:How_to_connect_with_the_SILBO_RB44_application.png|alt=How to connect with the SILBO RB44 application|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It will provide the Ip address/url of that device through which the application can be accessed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Connecting_via_LAN_RB44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Log In==&lt;br /&gt;
Open the web browser and type the IP address in the URL.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It will show the log in page of the application.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Log In.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Give the valid credentials for the username and password to login to the application page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user credentials are provided it will direct to the landing page of the application.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Login Dashboard RC44.png|frameless|636x636px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The “Status” landing page shows all the detailed specification of the device like system, memory storage and connection tracking etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The application is divided in to 6 Modules.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Info&lt;br /&gt;
* Settings&lt;br /&gt;
* Maintenance&lt;br /&gt;
* Status&lt;br /&gt;
* Features&lt;br /&gt;
* Logout&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==1.Info==&lt;br /&gt;
The “Info” module provides the information about the devices to the user.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It provides all the specification related to the hardware, firmware, Networks and the Connection uptimes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It has 3 submodules.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Overview&lt;br /&gt;
* System Log&lt;br /&gt;
* Kernel Log&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Info dashboard RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===1.1 Overview===&lt;br /&gt;
In overview module it displays all the specification categorically of a device like System, Memory, storage, Connection tracking, DHCP Lease.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Login Dashboard RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;System&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this section it displays the hardware configured specification of the device.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Info system RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The specifications details are as follows,&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&lt;br /&gt;
!SN&lt;br /&gt;
!Field name &lt;br /&gt;
!Sample value&lt;br /&gt;
!Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Hostname&lt;br /&gt;
|22B09230239&lt;br /&gt;
|This field  displays the router serial number of the device&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Model&lt;br /&gt;
|Silbo_RC44- EC200A&lt;br /&gt;
|This field  displays the model number of the device&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Firmware Version and IPK Version&lt;br /&gt;
|1.16_1.13_RC3&lt;br /&gt;
|This field  displays the firmware version and IPK version&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Kernel Version&lt;br /&gt;
|4.14.180&lt;br /&gt;
|This field  displays the kernel version of the device&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Local Time&lt;br /&gt;
|Monday, July 1, 2024, at 05:43:58 PM&lt;br /&gt;
|This field  displays the local time&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Uptime&lt;br /&gt;
|0h 7m 29s&lt;br /&gt;
|This field  displays the uptime of the device&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|Load Average&lt;br /&gt;
|1.73 1.87 1.04&lt;br /&gt;
|This field  displays the average load&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Memory&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this section it displays the memory configured specification of the device.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Memory Dashboard RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The specifications details are as follows.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Total Available&lt;br /&gt;
|68676 kB / 124208 kB (55%)&lt;br /&gt;
|This field  displays the total availability of memory space in the device&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Free&lt;br /&gt;
|59344 kB / 124208 kB (47%)&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the  Free memory space in the device&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Cached&lt;br /&gt;
|312 kB / 124208 kB (0%)&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the  Cached memory space in the device&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Buffered&lt;br /&gt;
|9332 kB / 124208 kB (7%)&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the  Buffered memory space in the device&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Storage&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this section it displays the status of storage as root and temporary usage specification of the device.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Storage Dashboard RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The specifications details are as follows.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Root Usage&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
796 kB / 15488 kB (5%)&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays  the total root usage of the device&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Temporary  Usage&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
312 kB / 62104 kB (0%)&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the total temporary  usage of the device&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Connection Tracking&#039;&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this section it displays the status of connection tracking for the device.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Connection Tracking RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The specifications details are as follows.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Active Connection&lt;br /&gt;
|48 / 16384 (0%)&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the active connection of the device.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;DHCP Leases&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this section, it displays the DHCP lease of the temporary assignment of an IP address to a device on the network.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:DCHP Leases RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The specifications details are as follows.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Host Name&lt;br /&gt;
|KermaniK-LT&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays  the configured Host Name/User Name for that device.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|IPv4-Address&lt;br /&gt;
|192.168.10.147&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the IP  address of the device.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|MAC-Address&lt;br /&gt;
|34:73:5a:bb: ab:7a&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the MAC-Address  of the device.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Lease time remaining&lt;br /&gt;
|11h 53m 49s&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the lease  time remaining for the device.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===1.2 System Log===&lt;br /&gt;
This page provides on screen System logging information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user gets to view the system logs &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:System Log.png|frameless|617x617px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===1.3 Kernel Log===&lt;br /&gt;
This page provides on-screen Kernel logging information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this page, the user gets to view the Kernel logs&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Kernel Log.png|frameless|621x621px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==2. Setting==&lt;br /&gt;
In this “Setting” module the user can Configure/update all the required parameters related to Network, SIM Switch, Internet, VPN, Firewall, Loopback Rule, Remote monitoring, Tunnel as per requirement.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
IT consist of 8 submodules.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Network&lt;br /&gt;
* Sim Switch&lt;br /&gt;
* Internet&lt;br /&gt;
* VPN&lt;br /&gt;
* Firewall&lt;br /&gt;
* Loopback Rule&lt;br /&gt;
* Remote Monitoring&lt;br /&gt;
* Tunnel&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Settings.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===2.1 Network===&lt;br /&gt;
In this section the user does all the setting related configuration with reference to network like Ethernet Setting, Cellular Setting, Band lock and Operator Lock, Wi-Fi, Guest Wi-Fi, Wireless Schedule, SMS Setting, Loopback IP.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Network Dashboard RC44.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Ethernet Setting&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this page it will display all the configured port that is attached with the device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For this device 3 ports are configured. Ethernet mode can be configured as WAN and as LAN as well. Ethernet LAN Connection settings can be configured as DHCP server or Static.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Ethernet Settings RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;For port 3 setting&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Kindly select the option &#039;&#039;&#039;LAN4&#039;&#039;&#039; for &#039;&#039;&#039;Port 3 mode LAN/WAN&#039;&#039;&#039;. Based on the option selected the filed will also changes the user needs to configure all the required field and click on the save to save the required fields.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Ethernet Settings RC44 part 2.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Port 3 mode LAN/WAN&lt;br /&gt;
|LAN&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the port mode selection&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Port 3 Ethernet Protocol [LAN Eth0.1]&lt;br /&gt;
|DHCP Server&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the Ethernet mode selection&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Port 3 DHCP Server IP&lt;br /&gt;
|192.168.10.1&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays DHCP server IP configured.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Port 3 DHCP Netmask&lt;br /&gt;
|255.255.255.0&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays DHCP server Netmask address configured&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Port 3 DHCP Start Address&lt;br /&gt;
|100&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays DHCP server  start address configured&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Port 3 DHCP Limit&lt;br /&gt;
|50&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays DHCP server  limit&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Kindly select the option &#039;&#039;&#039;EWAN&#039;&#039;&#039; for &#039;&#039;&#039;Port 3 mode LAN/WAN&#039;&#039;&#039;. Based on the option selected the filed will also changes the user needs to configure all the required field and click on the save to save the required fields.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:EWAN Port 3 Configuration RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Port 3 mode LAN/WAN&lt;br /&gt;
|EWAN&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the port mode selection&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Ethernet Protocol Port 3 WAN&lt;br /&gt;
|DHCP  client&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the client&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Gateway&lt;br /&gt;
|192.168.1.1&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays gateway address  configured&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the save once all the configuration is done and click on the update button to update all the information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;SW_LAN settings&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this part the user can configure the setting for SW_LAN &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SW LAN settings RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|SW_LAN Ethernet Protocol&lt;br /&gt;
|DHCP  Server&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the  Ethernet mode selection&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|SW_LAN DHCP Server IP&lt;br /&gt;
|192.168.10.1&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays DHCP server IP  configured.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|SW_LAN  DHCP Netmask&lt;br /&gt;
|255.255.255.0&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays DHCP server  Netmask address configured&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|SW_LAN  DHCP Start Address&lt;br /&gt;
|100&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays DHCP server  start address configured&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|SW_LAN  DHCP Limit&lt;br /&gt;
|50&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays DHCP server  limit&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|DNS  Server&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|This filed display number of DSN  server availability&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|DNS  Server Address&lt;br /&gt;
|8.8.8.8&lt;br /&gt;
|This  filed display the DSN server address.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After configuring all the required information, the user should click on the save and then click on the update to update the all the required information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Static option for SW_LAN Ethernet Protocol&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the option of static from the drop-down menu for SW_LAN Ethernet Protocol.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SW LAN settings Static Ethernet Protocol.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|SW_LAN Ethernet Protocol&lt;br /&gt;
|Static&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the  Ethernet mode selection&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|SW_LAN static IP&lt;br /&gt;
|192.168.5.1&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays static server IP  configured.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|SW_LAN  Netmask&lt;br /&gt;
|255.255.255.0&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays static server  Netmask address configured&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|DNS  Server&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|This filed display number of DSN  server availability&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|DSN  Server Address&lt;br /&gt;
|8.8.8.8&lt;br /&gt;
|This  filed display the DSN server address.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
After configuring all the required information, the user should click on the save and then click on the update to update the all the required information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Cellular Setting&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this page, the user needs to configure the various details with respect to the SIM.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
select single cellular single sim where the user must configure the APN details of the sim used for the router device. The Configurations can be done based on the SIM usage, with respect to IPV4 or IPV.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Cellular Settings RC44.png|frameless|619x619px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Cellular  Operation Mode&lt;br /&gt;
|Single Cellular with Dual Sim&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays  the cellular operation mode.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Cellular  Modem 1&lt;br /&gt;
|QuectelEC200A&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the modem name.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Network  Mode&lt;br /&gt;
|Automatic&lt;br /&gt;
|This  field displays the  Network mode selection&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM 1  Access Point Name&lt;br /&gt;
|airtelgprs.com&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the  name of the Sim 1 access point configured.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM 1  PDP Type&lt;br /&gt;
|IPV4&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays  the type of SIM 1&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM 1  Username&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|This field is optional, and the user can configure the name of  the SIM 1&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM 1  Password&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|This  field is optional, and the user can configure the password for the SIM 1&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM 1  Authentication Protocol&lt;br /&gt;
|None&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the type of  protocol is being used for SIM 1&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|9&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM 2  Access Point Name&lt;br /&gt;
|airtelgprs.com&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the name of the  Sim 2 access point configured.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|10&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM 2  PDP Type&lt;br /&gt;
|IPV4&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the type of SIM  2&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|11&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM 2  Username&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|This  field is optional, and the user can configure the name of the SIM 2&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|12&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM 2  Password&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|This  field is optional, and the user can configure the password for the SIM 2&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|13&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM 2  Authentication Protocol&lt;br /&gt;
|None&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the type of  protocol is being used for SIM 2&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|14&lt;br /&gt;
|Primary  SIM Switchback Time (In Minutes)&lt;br /&gt;
|10&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the time given  for sim to swich in between.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
After configuring all the required information, the user should click on the save and then click on the update to update the all the required information. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Band lock and Operator Lock&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this page, the user needs to configure the lock band and operator based on the service provider&#039;&#039;&#039;.&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Bands available in the drop-down list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Band lock and Operator Lock.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;2G/3G option&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2G/3G: - 3G allows additional features such as mobile internet access, video calls and mobile TV. While the main function of 2G technology is the transmission of information through voice calls.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:2G-3G option.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user should select the band check box  available for 2g/3g  from the given list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Bands available for selection under LTE for the bands available that zone.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Operator Selection Mode&#039;&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user needs to click on the check box of the “operator select enable” to select the operator.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the check box is clicked there will be a dropdown list of the operator modes from which the user needs to select the mode. The user needs to select the operator mode from the given dropdown list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Operator Selection Mode.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the user selects the mode “Manual” or “Manual-Automatic” then one more text box will appear where the user must provide the operator code.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Band lock and Operator Lock 1.png|frameless|542x542px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After configuring all the required information, the user should click on the save and then click on the update to update the all the required information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Wi-Fi Setting&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wi-Fi is a family of wireless network protocols based on the IEEE 802.11 family of standards, which are commonly used for local area network of devices and internet access, allowing nearby digital devices to exchanges data by radio waves. These are the most widely used computer network, used globally in home and small office networks to link devices and to provided internet access with wireless router and wireless access point in public places. In this router has the general setting and change country code, channel, radio mode, radio passphrase as per the requirement after clicking on enable Radio button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Wi-Fi Setting.png|frameless|585x585px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user needs to select the respective radio mode based on its need. Basically, it has 3 radio mode.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Wi-Fi Setting access Point.png|frameless|590x590px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Access Point mode:&#039;&#039;&#039; In Access Point mode, router connects to a wireless router through an Ethernet cable to extend the coverage of wireless signal to other network client.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Access Point Mode RC44.png|frameless|573x573px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Client point:&#039;&#039;&#039;  In client mode, the access point connects your wired devices to a wireless network. This mode is suitable when you have a wired device with an Ethernet port and no wireless capability, for example, a smart TV, Media Player, or Game console and you want to connect it to the internet wirelessly, select the Client Mode and give the Radio SSID &amp;amp; client passphrase&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Client Point RC44.png|frameless|587x587px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Access point and client point&#039;&#039;&#039;: select this option for both type connection, give both SSID and passphrase.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Access point and Client Point RC44.png|frameless|571x571px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After configuring all the required information, the user should click on the save and then click on the update to update the all the required information.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Radio  0 Protocol&lt;br /&gt;
|IEEE 802.11 b/g/n&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the  user should select which protocol is being used&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Country  Code&lt;br /&gt;
|INDIA&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the  user should select which county it belongs to.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Channel&lt;br /&gt;
|Auto&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user should  select the proper channel to be used.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|TX  Power&lt;br /&gt;
|100&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user should  specify the power.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Channel  Width&lt;br /&gt;
|20 MHz&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user should  select the channel width&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Radio  Mode&lt;br /&gt;
|Access  point&lt;br /&gt;
|In this drop down the user should  select the mode.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|Radio  SSID&lt;br /&gt;
|APClient_22B09230239&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user should  specify the SSID number&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|Radio  Authentication&lt;br /&gt;
|WPA2  Personal (PSK)&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user should  select the type of authentication.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|9&lt;br /&gt;
|Radio  Encryption&lt;br /&gt;
|AES&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user should  select the type of encryption required.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|10&lt;br /&gt;
|Radio  Passphrase&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user should  specify the password.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|11&lt;br /&gt;
|Radio  DHCP server IP&lt;br /&gt;
|192.168.100.1&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user should  specify the IP address of DHCP server.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|12&lt;br /&gt;
|Radio  DHCP start address&lt;br /&gt;
|100&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user should  specify the start address of the DHCP.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|13&lt;br /&gt;
|Radio  DHCP limit&lt;br /&gt;
|50&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user should  specify the limit for the DHCP.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Wireless Schedule&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wi-Fi can be automatically withdrawn based on the configuration done in this section.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user can schedule the Wi-Fi’s accessibility time during a particular period.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Wireless Schedule.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After configuring all the required information, the user should click on the save and then click on the update to update the all the required information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user can select more than one “day of the week” for scheduling the wifi working hours.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Wifi Schedule.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Loop back IP settings&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The loopback IP address, often referred to as “localhost”. it’s used to establish network connections within the same device for testing and troubleshooting purpose.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Loop back IP settings.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After configuring all the required information, the user should click on the save and then click on the update to update the all the required information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The loopback IP address, commonly represented as 127.0.0.1, is a special address used for testing network connectivity on a local machine. It allows a device to send network messages to itself without involving external networks, making it useful for troubleshooting and diagnostics.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
However, this IP can be changed as per requirement and to do that, Navigating to Setting&amp;gt;&amp;gt;Network configuration&amp;gt;&amp;gt; Loopback IP settings can be changed/updated.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Above screenshot shows the configuration window from GUI/WebUI&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;SMS Settings&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
User needs to enable SMS option in SMS settings page. This option is to validate the mobile numbers using which controlling commands could be sent to the router device. 1 to 5 mobile numbers can be authenticated by choosing from “Select Valid SMS user numbers” and adding the mobile numbers below respectively. API key is the pass key used in the commands while sending SMS. Displayed in the below screen is the default API key which can be edited and changed as per choice.   After addition of the mobile numbers user needs to click on save button for changes to take place.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SMS Settings.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select valid user number max. 5 and add authorized phone number in the main menu where want to find the alert and click on SMS Response Enable, save and update button, now send SMS commands from the configured mobile number. Once the commands are received from the user phone number the board send acknowledgement as per the commands after that it will send the router’s status once it has rebooted and is operational again. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mentioned below are a few commands which can be sent from the configured mobile number to the router device. Below two commands are One for rebooting the router device and another to get the uptime.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1) {&amp;quot;device&amp;quot;:[&amp;quot;passkey&amp;quot;,&amp;quot;API key&amp;quot;],&amp;quot;command&amp;quot;:&amp;quot;reboot&amp;quot;,&amp;quot;arguments&amp;quot;:&amp;quot;hardware&amp;quot;}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2) {&amp;quot;device&amp;quot;:[&amp;quot;passkey &amp;quot;,&amp;quot;API key&amp;quot;],&amp;quot;command&amp;quot;:&amp;quot;uptime&amp;quot;}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After configuring all the required information, the user should click on the save and then click on the update to update the all the required information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===2.2 SIM===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user needs to configure the Sim for the given device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SIM Switch.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user needs to select from the drop-down menu on which basis the sim needs to be switched.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Sim Switch Configuration.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user selects on “&#039;&#039;&#039;signal strength&#039;&#039;&#039;” then the parameters related to signal strength will pop up and the user needs to configure the parameters based on the requirement &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Signal Strength.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Threshold RSRP&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This Needs to be set appropriately. Incorrect setting may cause unnecessary SIM switching. ( In General a BAD RSRP value range is -140 to -115 and FAIR RSRP value range is -115 to -105).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Threshold SINR&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This Needs to be set appropriately. Incorrect setting may cause unnecessary SIM switching. ( In General a BAD SNR value range is -20 to 0 and FAIR SNR value range is 0 to 13)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user selects on “&#039;&#039;&#039;Data Limit&#039;&#039;&#039;” then the parameters related to Data Limit will pop up and the user needs to configure the parameters based on the requirement.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Data limit.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM Switch Based on&lt;br /&gt;
|Data Limit&lt;br /&gt;
|The user needs to select from the  drop-down menu on what basis the sim needs to be switched.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM 1 Data Usage Limit (In MB)&lt;br /&gt;
|1000&lt;br /&gt;
|The user needs to set the limit for the data  usage for SIM 1.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM 2 Data Usage Limit (In MB)&lt;br /&gt;
|1000&lt;br /&gt;
|The user needs to set the limit for the data  usage for SIM 2.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Periodicity&lt;br /&gt;
|Daily&lt;br /&gt;
|The user needs to set the pattern/frequency to  switch the sims.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Day Of Month&lt;br /&gt;
|16&lt;br /&gt;
|The user needs to set the day for switching the  sim.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
After configuring all the required information, the user should click on the save.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===2.3 Internet===&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user needs to configure the internet connection to set the priority from the various options. The user should decide what kind of connection it needs to provide to the device like LAN, WAN etc. Once the connections are configured then click on save option and then on update.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Internet.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the user needs to edit on the existing configuration, then the user should click on the “EDIT” button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Network Edit Options.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Name&lt;br /&gt;
|EWAN2&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the name of the WAN  connection&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Priority&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown box the user need to select  the priority.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Select Track IP Numbers&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user needs to select the  track number for the Ips.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|TrackIP1&lt;br /&gt;
|8.8.8.8&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text field the user needs to set the IP  address for the track 1&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|TrackIP2&lt;br /&gt;
|8.8.4.4&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text field the user needs to set the IP  address for the track 1&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Reliability&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Not sure what needs to be written&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|Count&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Not sure what needs to be written&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|Up&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Not sure what needs to be written&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|9&lt;br /&gt;
|Down&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Not sure what needs to be written&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user is done with modification click on the save button to save all the changes and then click on the update button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===2.4 VPN===&lt;br /&gt;
VPN stands for &#039;&#039;&#039;Virtual Private Network&#039;&#039;&#039;, it establishes a connection between the system and a remote server, which is owned by a VPN provider.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Creating a point-to-point tunnel that encrypts the personal data, masks the IP address, and allows to block the required website to blocks via firewalls on the internet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:VPN Settings RC44.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are 5 types of setting available under VPN configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* General Settings&lt;br /&gt;
* IPSEC&lt;br /&gt;
* Open VPN&lt;br /&gt;
* Wireguard&lt;br /&gt;
* Zerotier&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;General Settings&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user must choose which type of VPN connection is required for the device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user must select from IPSEC or Open VPN based on its requirement. If required, the user can select for both the options. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:VPN General Settings RC44.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user needs to click on the save after selecting the option based on its requirement.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;IPSEC&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
IPSEC VPN is used to create a VPN connection between local and remote networks. To use IPSEC VPN, the user should check that both local and remote routers support IPSEC VPN feature.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user can add/edit/delete the IPSEC VPN connection for the device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:VPN IPSEC changes RC44.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user needs to click on the update button once the required configuration is completed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In IPSEC the user needs to click on edit button to edit the configuration of an existing VPN connection.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:VPN Edit Options.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the save button after the required configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The tunnel will show established, showing the connection has been made.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:IPSEC .png|thumb|631x631px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|IPSEC&lt;br /&gt;
|Site to Site VPN&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user should select  the IPSEC connection type.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|IPSEC Role&lt;br /&gt;
|Client/Server&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown box the user needs to select  the IPSEC role.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Connection Type&lt;br /&gt;
|Tunnel&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user needs to select the connection  type. The user should select on the connection enable check box.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Connection mode&lt;br /&gt;
|start&lt;br /&gt;
|In this drop down list the user should select  the mode for the connection. it will have route/add/start/trap mode&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Remote Server IP&lt;br /&gt;
|1.1.1.1&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text field the user needs to set the IP  address for the remote server.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Local ID&lt;br /&gt;
|g300&lt;br /&gt;
|The user needs to set the local id.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|No. of local subnets&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user needs to select how  many subnets it will be connected.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|Local Subnet 1&lt;br /&gt;
|192.168.11.1/24&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user needs to put the  address of the local subnet.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|9&lt;br /&gt;
|Remote id&lt;br /&gt;
|sophos&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user needs to put the id  of the remote connection.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|10&lt;br /&gt;
|No of remote subnet&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user needs to select how  many subnets it will be connected remotely.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|11&lt;br /&gt;
|Remote subnet&lt;br /&gt;
|192.168.10.0/24&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user needs to put the  address of the remote subnet.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|12&lt;br /&gt;
|Key exchange&lt;br /&gt;
|Ikev1&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user should select the  which key exchange version to be selected.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|13&lt;br /&gt;
|Aggressive&lt;br /&gt;
|Yes/No&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user should select either  yes or no .&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|14&lt;br /&gt;
|IKE lifetime&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|Fill according to user’s requirements.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|15&lt;br /&gt;
|Lifetime in seconds&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Fill according to user’s requirements.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|16&lt;br /&gt;
|Enable DPD Detection&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;1&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
0&lt;br /&gt;
|Indicates  whether Dead Peer Detection is enabled to detect a lost connection. Enable  this option as per server-side settings.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|17&lt;br /&gt;
|Time Interval (In Seconds)&lt;br /&gt;
|60&lt;br /&gt;
|This option  is available only if DPD Detection is enabled. The time interval is the  interval for DPD checks.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|18&lt;br /&gt;
|Action&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Restart&#039;&#039;&#039;/clear/hold/&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
trap/start&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Restart&#039;&#039;&#039;: Action to take when  DPD detects a lost connection (restart the connection). Select as per  server-side setting.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|19&lt;br /&gt;
|Authentication Method&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;PSK&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;PSK&#039;&#039;&#039;: Pre-shared key is used  for authentication. Select this option for authentication as per sever side  setting.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|20&lt;br /&gt;
|Multiple Secrets&lt;br /&gt;
|1/&#039;&#039;&#039;0&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|Indicates  whether multiple PSK secrets are used. Enable only if required.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|21&lt;br /&gt;
|PSK Value&lt;br /&gt;
|******&lt;br /&gt;
|Pre-shared  key value (masked for security).&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;*Below are Phase I and Phase II settings details*&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&lt;br /&gt;
! colspan=&amp;quot;4&amp;quot; |                                                        &#039;&#039;&#039;Proposal settings Phase I&#039;&#039;&#039;                                                                                                                     &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|22            &lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Encryption Algorithm&#039;&#039;&#039;                                                 &lt;br /&gt;
|AES 128&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AES 192&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;AES 256&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3DES                                                                                                                                     &lt;br /&gt;
|                                                                                                                                     &#039;&#039;&#039;AES 256&#039;&#039;&#039;: Encryption algorithm  for Phase I. Select as per server-side configuration. Both server and client  should have same configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|23&lt;br /&gt;
|Authentication Phase I&lt;br /&gt;
|SHA1&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MD5&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SHA 256&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SHA 384&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;SHA 512&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;SHA 512&#039;&#039;&#039;: Authentication  algorithm for Phase I.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select as per  server-side configuration. Both server and client should have same configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|24&lt;br /&gt;
|DH Group&lt;br /&gt;
|MODP768(group1)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MODP1024(group2)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MODP1536(group5)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;MODP2048(group14)&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MODP3072(group15)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MODP4096(group16)&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;MODP2048 (group14)&#039;&#039;&#039;:  Diffie-Hellman group for key exchange.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select as per  server-side configuration. Both server and client should have same  configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| colspan=&amp;quot;4&amp;quot; |                                                                                                                                                                 &#039;&#039;&#039;Proposal settings Phase II&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|25&lt;br /&gt;
|Hash Algorithm&lt;br /&gt;
|AES 128&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AES 192&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;AES 256&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3DES&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;AES 256&#039;&#039;&#039;: Encryption algorithm  for Phase II. Select as per server-side configuration. Both server and client  should have same configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|26&lt;br /&gt;
|Authentication Phase II&lt;br /&gt;
|SHA1&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MD5&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SHA 256&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SHA 384&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;SHA 512&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;SHA 512&#039;&#039;&#039;: Authentication  algorithm for Phase II.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select as per  server-side configuration. Both server and client should have same  configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|27&lt;br /&gt;
|PFS Group&lt;br /&gt;
|MODP768(group1)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MODP1024(group2)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MODP1536(group5)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;MODP2048(group14)&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MODP3072(group15)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MODP4096(group16)&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;MODP2048 (group14)&#039;&#039;&#039;: Perfect  Forward Secrecy group.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select as per  server-side configuration. Both server and client should have same  configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Open VPN&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the OpenVPN connection, the home network can act as a server, and the remote device can access the server through the router which acts as an OpenVPN Server gateway. To use the VPN feature, the user should enable OpenVPN Server on the router, and install and run VPN client software on the remote device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Open VPN Settings RC44.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user needs to “upload” the respective certificate from a valid path and then click on the “Update.”&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the OpenVPN connection starts the user will get an option to enable/disable the VPN connection as and when required.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By clicking on the enable/disable button, the user can start/stop the VPN connection.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Open VPN Settings RC44 Dashboard.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
VPN has been established.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;WireGuard:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;WireGuard&#039;&#039;&#039; is simple, fast, lean, and modern VPN that utilizes secure and trusted cryptography.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on “Edit” to start configurations as needed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Wire Guard RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;EDIT:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Wire Guard RC44 Setttings.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the save button after the required configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample Value     &lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Wireguard Role&lt;br /&gt;
|Client/Server&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown box the user needs to select  the wireguard role.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Listen Port&lt;br /&gt;
|51820&lt;br /&gt;
|The UDP port on which the WireGuard client  listens for incoming connections.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|IP Addresses&lt;br /&gt;
|10.0.0.1/24&lt;br /&gt;
|The IP  address and subnet mask assigned to the WireGuard client&#039;s interface. This  address is used within the VPN.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Allowed PeerIPs&lt;br /&gt;
|10.1.1.1&lt;br /&gt;
|The IP  address of the allowed peer(s) that can connect to this WireGuard client.  This might need adjustment based on the actual peer IPs used in the network.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Endpoint HostIP&lt;br /&gt;
|10.1.1.1&lt;br /&gt;
|The IP  address of the WireGuard server (the endpoint to which the client connects).&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Endpoint HostPort&lt;br /&gt;
|51820&lt;br /&gt;
|The port on  the WireGuard server to which the client connects.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|PeerPublicKey&lt;br /&gt;
|*****&lt;br /&gt;
|The public  key of the peer (the server) the client is connecting to. This key is part of  the public-private key pair used in WireGuard for encryption and  authentication.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|Enable Preshared key&lt;br /&gt;
|Yes/No&lt;br /&gt;
|This option  indicates that a pre-shared key (PSK) is used in addition to the  public-private key pair for an extra layer of security.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|9&lt;br /&gt;
|Preshared key&lt;br /&gt;
|*****&lt;br /&gt;
|The actual  pre-shared key value shared between the client and the server. This option  appears only if you have enabled preshared key.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Zerotier:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ZeroTier is a tool that lets you create your own private network over the internet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Go to ZeroTier Central and sign up for a free account. In ZeroTier Central, click on &amp;quot;Create a Network&amp;quot;. This will generate a unique 16-digit network ID for your new network.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Go to settings =&amp;gt; VPN, in general settings, enable ZeroTier and save.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Zerotier Settings RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Copy and paste the unique 16-digit network ID in the edit section.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Zero Seetings Dashboard RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Zerotier Dashboard.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the save button after the required configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field Name    &lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  Value           &lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|NetworkID&lt;br /&gt;
|Ad2769hfkw2345f4&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown box the user needs to paste  the unique 16-digit network id.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Listen Port&lt;br /&gt;
|9993&lt;br /&gt;
|Default&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== 2.5 Firewall ===&lt;br /&gt;
A firewall is a layer of security between the network and the Internet. Since a router is the main connection from a network to the Internet, the firewall function is merged into this device. Every network should have a firewall to protect its privacy.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Firewall.png|frameless|635x635px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are 6 types of setting available under firewall.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* General Settings&lt;br /&gt;
* Port forwards&lt;br /&gt;
* Traffic Rules&lt;br /&gt;
* SNAT traffic Rules&lt;br /&gt;
* Parental Control&lt;br /&gt;
* Zone Forwarding&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;General Setting&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
General settings are subdivided into 2 parts,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1.) General settings&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In general settings, the settings that are made are default settings and can be changed according to user’s preference.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Firewall General Settings.png|frameless|622x622px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Specification details are below:&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;SN&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Field Name&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Sample Value&#039;&#039;&#039;      &lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Description&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Enable SYN-flood  protection&lt;br /&gt;
|Enabled&lt;br /&gt;
|This is  enabled by default; setting can be changed if required.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Disable IPV6&lt;br /&gt;
|Disabled&lt;br /&gt;
|This is  enabled by default; setting can be changed if required.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Drop invalid packets&lt;br /&gt;
|Disabled&lt;br /&gt;
|This is  enabled by default; setting can be changed if required.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|TCP SYN Cookies&lt;br /&gt;
|Disabled&lt;br /&gt;
|This is  enabled by default; setting can be changed if required.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Input&lt;br /&gt;
|Reject/Accept&lt;br /&gt;
|By  default, the setting is ‘Reject’ but this needs to be changed to ‘Accept’  compulsory.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Output&lt;br /&gt;
|Reject/Accept&lt;br /&gt;
|By  default, the setting is ‘Reject’ but this needs to be changed to ‘Accept’  compulsory.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|Forward&lt;br /&gt;
|Reject/Accept&lt;br /&gt;
|By  default, the setting is ‘Reject’ but this needs to be changed to ‘Accept’  compulsory.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2.) Zone settings&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In zone settings, there’s an option to add “New Zone”, according to user’s requirement.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Zone settings.png|thumb|628x628px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Port Forwards:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Port forwarding is a feature in a router or gateway that allows external devices to access services on a private network.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It maps an external port on the router to an internal IP address and port on the local network, enabling applications such as gaming servers, web servers, or remote desktop connections to be accessed from outside the network.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This helps in directing incoming traffic to the correct device within a local network based on the port number, enhancing connectivity and accessibility.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Firewall Port Forward.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;EDIT&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Firewall Edit Option RC44.png|frameless|622x622px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the save button after the required configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Name&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Web_Server_Forward&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|Field must  not be empty. Provide a name for the rule to easily identify it.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Protocol&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;TCP+UDP&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|Select the protocol  for the rule.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Options  typically include TCP+UDP, TCP, UDP, ICMP, Custom.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Source zone&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;SW_LAN&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|Select the  source zone where the traffic is originating from. Options typically include EWAN2,SW_LAN,CWAN1,CWAN1_0,CWAN1_1,VPN&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Source MAC address [optional]&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;any&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;any&#039;&#039;&#039;: Leave as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;any&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; if you don&#039;t want to specify a MAC address.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Source IP address[optional]&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: Leave blank if not needed.&lt;br /&gt;
|Optionally  specify an IP address or range.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Source port&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;80, 443&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;  (if matching traffic for web server ports)&lt;br /&gt;
|Specify the  source port or port range.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|Destination zone&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;SW_LAN&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|Select the  destination zone where the traffic is heading to.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|Destination IP address&lt;br /&gt;
|Leave blank if not needed.&lt;br /&gt;
|Optionally specify  the destination IP address or range.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|9&lt;br /&gt;
|Destination port&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;80&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;  (if redirecting to a web server port)&lt;br /&gt;
|Specify the  destination port or port range.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Traffic Rule:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;Traffic rules&amp;quot; refer to the policies and regulations that govern the flow of data packets within a network.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To allow new traffic, click on “Add and Edit” in “New Traffic Rule”.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Firewall Traffic Rule.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;EDIT&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Firewall Traffic Rule Edit.png|frameless|621x621px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Specification details are below:&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample Value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Name&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: Allow_HTTP_and_HTTPS&lt;br /&gt;
|Field must  not be empty: Provide a descriptive name for the traffic rule.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Restrict to Address Family&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|1.       Options:  IPv4, IPv6&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2.       Example:  IPv4 if dealing with typical internet traffic.&lt;br /&gt;
|Select the  address family to generate iptables rules for.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Protocol&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: TCP+UDP&lt;br /&gt;
|TCP+UDP:  Match incoming traffic using the given protocol.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Match ICMP Type&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: any&lt;br /&gt;
|Match all  ICMP types if set to any. Specific types can be chosen if needed.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Source Zone&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: LAN&lt;br /&gt;
|Specifies the  traffic source zone.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Enable DDoS Prevention&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: ‘Checked’ if you want to enable DDoS prevention  measures&lt;br /&gt;
|Enable or  disable Distributed Denial of Service (DDoS) prevention.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|Source MAC Address&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: any&lt;br /&gt;
|any: Match  traffic from any MAC address or specify a particular MAC address.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|Source Address&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: 192.168.1.0/24&lt;br /&gt;
|Match  incoming traffic from the specified source IP address or range.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|9&lt;br /&gt;
|Source Port&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: any if all source ports should be matched&lt;br /&gt;
|any: Match  incoming traffic from the specified source port or port range.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|10&lt;br /&gt;
|Destination Zone&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: WAN&lt;br /&gt;
|Specifies the  traffic destination zone.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|11&lt;br /&gt;
|Action&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: ACCEPT&lt;br /&gt;
|Options:  ACCEPT, DROP, REJECT. Specify the action to take for matched traffic.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|12&lt;br /&gt;
|Limit&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: 10/minute to limit matches to 10 times per  minute.&lt;br /&gt;
|Maximum  average matching rate; specified as a number, with an optional /second,  /minute, /hour, or /day suffix.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|13&lt;br /&gt;
|Extra arguments&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: --log-prefix &amp;quot;Blocked: &amp;quot; to add a log  prefix to log messages for this rule.&lt;br /&gt;
|Passes  additional arguments to iptables. Use with care as it can significantly alter  rule behaviour.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
Click on save once configured.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;SNAT Traffic Rule:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For configuring SNAT (Source Network Address Translation) traffic rules, you can control how outbound traffic from your local network is translated to a different IP address as it exits the network.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To add new source NAT,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on “ADD” in “New Source NAT:”&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SNAT Traffic Rule.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Edit&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SNAT Edit Options RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Specification details are below:&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Name&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: SNAT_WAN_to_LAN&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Field must  not be empty&#039;&#039;&#039;: Provide a unique and descriptive name for the SNAT rule.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Protocol&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: TCP+UDP&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;TCP+UDP&#039;&#039;&#039;:  Select the protocols that the SNAT rule will apply to.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Source Zone&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: wan&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;wan&#039;&#039;&#039;:  Specifies the source zone from which the traffic originates.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Source IP Address&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: any or a specific range like 192.168.1.0/24&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;-- please  choose --&#039;&#039;&#039;: Specify the source IP address or range. Leave empty if the  rule applies to any source IP.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Source Port&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: any&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;any&#039;&#039;&#039;:  Specify the source port or port range from which the traffic originates.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Destination Zone&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: lan&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;lan&#039;&#039;&#039;:  Specifies the destination zone to which the traffic is directed.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|Destination IP Address&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: any or a specific IP like 192.168.1.100&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;-- please  choose --&#039;&#039;&#039;: Specify the destination IP address or range. Leave empty if  the rule applies to any destination IP.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|Destination port&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: any&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;any&#039;&#039;&#039;:  Specify the destination port or port range to which the traffic is directed.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|9&lt;br /&gt;
|SNAT IP Address&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: 203.0.113.5 (an external IP address)&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;-- please  choose --&#039;&#039;&#039;: Specify the IP address to which the source IP should be  translated.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|10&lt;br /&gt;
|SNAT Port&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: Leave empty if not needed, or specify a port  like ‘12345’&lt;br /&gt;
|Optionally,  rewrite matched traffic to a specific source port. Leave empty to only  rewrite the IP address.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|11&lt;br /&gt;
|Extra Arguments&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: --log-prefix &amp;quot;SNAT_traffic: &amp;quot; (to add  a log prefix to log messages for this rule)&lt;br /&gt;
|Pass  additional arguments to iptables. Use with care as it can significantly alter  rule behaviour.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
Click on save once configured.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Parental Control:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For configuring parental control rules, you want to set restrictions based on time, source, and destination zones, as well as specific devices.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To add parental control in firewall,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on “Add and Edit” in “New parental control:” field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Parental Control.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Edit&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Parental Control Edit Options RC44.png|frameless|622x622px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Specification details are given below:&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  Name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  Value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Name&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  Parental_Control_Sunday&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Field must  not be empty&#039;&#039;&#039;: Provide a unique and descriptive name for the parental  control rule.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Proto&lt;br /&gt;
|all&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;all&#039;&#039;&#039;:  This specifies that the rule will apply to all protocols.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Source Zone&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: lan&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Field must  not be empty&#039;&#039;&#039;: Please look at Firewall-&amp;gt;Zone Settings to find zone  names.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Destination  Zone&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: wan&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Field must  not be empty&#039;&#039;&#039;: Please look at Firewall-&amp;gt;Zone Settings to find zone  names.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Source MAC  Address&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  00:1A:2B:3C:4D:5E&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Field&#039;&#039;&#039;:  Enter the MAC address of the device you want to apply the parental control  rule to. This is useful for restricting specific devices.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Target&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  Reject&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Accept&#039;&#039;&#039;:  This specifies the action to take. For parental controls, you might want to  use ‘Reject’ or ‘Drop’ to block traffic.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|Weekdays&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  Sunday&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Sunday&#039;&#039;&#039;:  Specify the days of the week when the rule should be active.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|Month Days&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: All&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;All:&#039;&#039;&#039; Specify  the days of the month when the rule should be active.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|9&lt;br /&gt;
|Start Time (hh:mm:ss)&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  18:00:00 (6:00 PM)&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Field must  not be empty:&#039;&#039;&#039; Specify the start time when the rule should begin to apply.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|10&lt;br /&gt;
|Stop Time  (hh:mm:ss)&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  22:00:00 (10:00 PM)&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Field must  not be empty:&#039;&#039;&#039; Specify the stop time when the rule should end.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
Click on save once configured.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Zone Forwarding:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Zone forwarding in network configuration allows traffic to be directed from one zone to another.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To ADD new zone,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on “Add” in “New Zone Forward:” field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Zone Forwarding RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;EDIT&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Zone Forwarding editing Options RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Specification details are below:&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  Name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  Value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Source Zone&lt;br /&gt;
|Example options: lan, wan, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;--please  choose--&#039;&#039;&#039;: Select the source zone from which the traffic originates.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Destination Zone&lt;br /&gt;
|Example options: lan, wan, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;--please  choose--&#039;&#039;&#039;: Select the destination zone to which the traffic is directed.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
Click on save once configured.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===2.6 Loopback Rule===&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user can configure the port where he want to forward the traffic to. Here the user can add/edit/delete different port ports as per the requirement. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Loopback Rule.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user should click on ‘add’ and then ‘edit’ to do the required changes in the port and enter the valid information in each section to configure the port for forwarding.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Loopback Rule edit.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Specification details are given below:&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  Name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  Value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Name&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: loopback&lt;br /&gt;
|Provide a  descriptive name for the rule.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Protocol&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: TCP+UDP&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;TCP+UDP&#039;&#039;&#039;:  Select the protocols that the rule will apply to.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Source IP Address [Optional]&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: any or a specific IP range like 192.168.1.0/24&lt;br /&gt;
|Optionally  specify the source IP address or range. Leave empty if the rule should apply  to any source IP.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Source Port [Optional]&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: any&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;any&#039;&#039;&#039;:  Specify the source port or port range from which the traffic originates. any  allows traffic from all ports.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Loopback IP Address&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: 127.0.0.1&lt;br /&gt;
|Specify the  loopback IP address. Typically, this is 127.0.0.1.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Port&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: any&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;any&#039;&#039;&#039;:  Specify the destination port or port range to which the traffic is directed.  any allows traffic to all ports.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|Action&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: DNAT&lt;br /&gt;
|This  specifies the action to take either DNAT or SNAT.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|Internal IP Address&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: 192.168.1.100&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Field must  not be empty&#039;&#039;&#039;: Specify the internal IP address to which the traffic should  be redirected.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|9&lt;br /&gt;
|Internal Port&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: any&lt;br /&gt;
|Redirect  matched incoming traffic to the given port on the internal host.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user is done with the required configurations, user should click save button and then click on the update to save the changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===2.7 Remote Monitoring===&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user can select which equipment needs to be monitored remotely.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user selects the type of RMS click on save.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Remote Monitoring.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
One the user selects the type of RMS click on the save.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;NMS&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
IN this page the user should type the server IP or domain name in the URL then click on sav. Click on upload and start (Once key is uploaded and this option is clicked, NMS automatically starts, and this router device gets registered with the NMS server provided.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:NMS.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;TR069&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To enable the TR069 the user needs to click on the enable check box.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:TR069.png|frameless|582x582px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user clicks on the check box of enable it will display all the required filed to configured.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Remote Monitoring Tr-069.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Serving Interval&lt;br /&gt;
|300&lt;br /&gt;
|This displays the interval time&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Interface&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|Not sure what needs to be written&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Username&lt;br /&gt;
|Username&lt;br /&gt;
|The user needs to mention the username&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Password&lt;br /&gt;
|******&lt;br /&gt;
|The user should set the password&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|URL&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|The user needs to mention the URL&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
The user should fill all the required fields and click on the save button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===2.8 Tunnel===&lt;br /&gt;
Tunnels are a method of transporting data across a network using protocols which are not supported by that network.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tunnel Settings.png|frameless|621x621px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;General Settings&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user needs to select under which type of tunnel it needs to send the data.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tunnel General Settings.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user selects the type of tunnel then click in the save button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;GRE Tunnel&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user needs to add all the details of GRE tunnels.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user configured all the required fields then it needs to click on the save. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:GRE Tunnel.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here the user can add/edit/delete the details of the tunnel. Once the required update is done then it needs to click on update to save the changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tunnel Configuration.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;IPIP Tunnel&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user needs to add all the details of IPIP tunnels.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user configured all the required fields then it needs to click on the save. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:IPIP Tunnel.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here the user can add/edit/delete the details of the tunnel. Once the required update is done then it needs to click on update to save the changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Ipip config.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==3 Maintenance==&lt;br /&gt;
In this module the user can configure/upgrade/modify the settings related to system, password, firmware and monitoring.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Maintenance System.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It includes below submodules.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* General&lt;br /&gt;
* Password&lt;br /&gt;
* Reboot&lt;br /&gt;
* Import and Export config&lt;br /&gt;
* Firmware upgrade&lt;br /&gt;
* Monitor Application&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===3.1 General===&lt;br /&gt;
In this section the user can configure the details related to time zone and host name&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Maintenance General.png|frameless|619x619px]]&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Local Time&lt;br /&gt;
|2023/12/13 12:24:11&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|It displays the system current date and  time.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|HostName&lt;br /&gt;
|31B30230298&lt;br /&gt;
|It displays the host name.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Timezone&lt;br /&gt;
|Asia/Kolkata&lt;br /&gt;
|It displays in which time zone its configured.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user configures the required details then click on the save button to save all the details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Logging&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here the user can configure the basic aspects of your device related to system.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Maintenance logging.png|frameless|608x608px]]&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|System log buffer size&lt;br /&gt;
|32&lt;br /&gt;
|This displays the log size of system buffer&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|External system log server&lt;br /&gt;
|0.0.0.0&lt;br /&gt;
|This displays the ip add of the external system  log&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|External system log server port&lt;br /&gt;
|514&lt;br /&gt;
|This displays the port number of the external  system log&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Log output level&lt;br /&gt;
|debug&lt;br /&gt;
|In this drop down the user selects the level of  the log output.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Cron Log level&lt;br /&gt;
|debug&lt;br /&gt;
|In this drop down the user selects the level of  the corn log .&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user configures the required details then click on the save button to save all the details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Language and Style&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here the user can configure the basic aspects of your device related to language.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Maintenance Language and Style.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user configures the required details then click on the save button to save all the details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===3.2 Password===&lt;br /&gt;
In this module the user can set the password for the admin credentials.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Change you password.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Specifies the password for the guest account. If the user enter a plaintext password here, it will get replaced with a crypted password on save. The new password will be effective once the user logs out and log in again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user needs to write the password in the text box and click on the save button to save the password.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===3.3 Reboot===&lt;br /&gt;
In this module the user can reboot the device remotely.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Reboot.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To start the reboot process first the user needs to fill all the required fields.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Need to select the type of reboot for the device whether it needs to be Hardware or Software reboot.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Maintenance Reboot.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Type&lt;br /&gt;
|Maintenance Reboot&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown list the user needs to  select the type of reboot is required to configure.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Reboot Type&lt;br /&gt;
|Hardware&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown list the user needs to select  the hardware or software reboot is required.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Minutes&lt;br /&gt;
|59&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user needs to configure  the min to start the reboot activity&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Hours&lt;br /&gt;
|22&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user needs to configure  the hours to start the reboot activity&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Day of Month&lt;br /&gt;
|All&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user needs to configure  the day of the month to start the reboot activity&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Month&lt;br /&gt;
|All&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user needs to configure  the month to start the reboot activity&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|Day of the week&lt;br /&gt;
|All&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user needs to configure  the week to start the reboot activity&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user fills all the required given parameters click on the save.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To start the reboot process, click on the “Reboot Now” button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===3.4 Import and Export===&lt;br /&gt;
In this section, User can Import &amp;amp; Export Configuration files of the Device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Import and Export.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
click “Export Config” to export device configuration &amp;amp; settings to a text file,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
click “Import Config” to import device configuration &amp;amp; settings from a previously exported text file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Import window.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user need to select on the choose file to and click on the apply.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===3.5 Firmware Upgrade===&lt;br /&gt;
The user can upgrade with the latest software for the existing firmware. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Frimware Upgrade.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the &#039;&#039;&#039;flash image&#039;&#039;&#039; and chose the path where the sys-upgrade file is kept and then click on flash image, it will upgrade to the latest software once the reboot is done.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Flash Image.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the &#039;&#039;&#039;Retain Config and flash&#039;&#039;&#039; and chose the path where the sys-upgrade file is kept and then click on Retain Config and flash, it will upgrade to the latest software once the reboot is done.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Flash Image.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the &#039;&#039;&#039;Factory Reset&#039;&#039;&#039; for the complete retest of the device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===3.6 Monitor Application===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Monitor Application.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Router Application Remote Configuration.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Router Remote Configuration.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==4 Status==&lt;br /&gt;
In this module the user can view the status of the router device with respect to the network, Wan, modem etc.[[File:Status.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It has 4 submodules.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Interfaces&lt;br /&gt;
* Internet&lt;br /&gt;
* Modem&lt;br /&gt;
* Route&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===4.1 Interfaces===&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user can see the traffic status for all the network through which the device works.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Status Interfaces.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Looking on the network status the user can check if the cellular or the ethernet is up.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===4.2 Internet===&lt;br /&gt;
In this submodule the user can view the status of the internet connections.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Internet Status.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
  To see the latest status of the internet connection the user needs to click on the refresh button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===4.3 Modem===&lt;br /&gt;
In this sub module the user will get to know the status of the cellular interface which is installed inside the modem. The user can view all the details related to the sim in terms of Operator, Network technology, Mobile country code, Upload bandwidth, Download Bandwidth, Frequency band, RSRP, RSRQ, RSSI &amp;amp; SNR under this page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Modem Status.png|frameless|602x602px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== 4.4 Route ===&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user can check the status of the route for the device. The ARP status can be visible in under this page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Route Status.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==5 Features==&lt;br /&gt;
In this module the user can see all the features that the router device has.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This module includes the below features.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Mac Address Binding&lt;br /&gt;
* URL Filtering&lt;br /&gt;
* Web Server&lt;br /&gt;
* Wi-Fi MacID Filtering&lt;br /&gt;
* Routing&lt;br /&gt;
* Others&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Features.png|frameless|618x618px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===5.1 Mac Address Binding===&lt;br /&gt;
Under this submodule the user can configure/update/edit the IP Address for MAC&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mac Addressing Binding.png|frameless|622x622px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user should write MAC address and then click on the add button. Once the address is added then click on the update button to save the modification.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user needs to click on the Edit button to modify the preexisting configuration. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mac Address Edit.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user modifies the MAC address /IP Address then click on the save button to save the changes done.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user can click on the deleted button to delete an existing configured device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Post all the changes the user needs to click on the update to reflect all the changes in the application.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===5.2 URL Filtering===&lt;br /&gt;
In this submodule the user should provide the URL which needs to be blocked for the device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:URL Filtering.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To add the new URL for blocking, click on the Add New button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user clicks on the Add New button a new pop will appear in that page write the URL and click on the save. The user can select the status of that URL while defining the URL.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Url Update.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To edit / delete the existing URL the user needs to click on the edit /deleted button respectively.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Edit or Delete URL.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the save after the changes are done as per the need.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== 5.3 Web Server ===&lt;br /&gt;
In this submodule the user can configure webserver related parameters.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Web server.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To configure the HTTP, click on the enable HTTP. Once the user clicks on the check box the HTTP Port text box will appear where the user needs to configure the port id.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Webserver Configuration.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on save buttons to save the changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To configure the 2nd HTTP, click on the enable HTTP. Once the user clicks on the check box the HTTP Port text box will appear where the user needs to configure the port id.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Webserver Https Redirect.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on save buttons to save the changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the “Redirect https” and “RFC1918 Filter” check box to respectively and click on the save button to save the changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To configure the NTP sync, click on the enable NTP sync. Once the user clicks on the check box the respective text boxes will appear to configure the parameters. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:RFC1918 Filter.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user configures the parameters click on the save button to save the given values.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===5.4 Wi-Fi MacID Filtering===&lt;br /&gt;
In this module the user can filter the Macids. Mac address filtering allows users to block traffic coming from certain known machines or devices.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Wi-Fi MacID Filtering.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Before adding the MacIDs the user needs to select the mode from the dropdown menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To Add the MacID the user needs to click on Add New option select the mac id and network name Wi-Fi 2.4G AP OR Wi-Fi 2.4G AP Guest, select enable/disable option and save it and update.              &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Configuring MacID and Network Name.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the required MACID and Network Name is configured the user needs to click on the save button to add the details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user needs to click on the edit button to do modifications on the pre-existing configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Macid and name removing.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the required MACID / Network Name is modified the user needs to click on the save button to reflect the changed value in the application.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;WIFI 2.4G AP Guest&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To Add the MacID the user needs to click on Add New option select the mac id and network name Wi-Fi 2.4G AP Guest, select enable/disable option and save it and update.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
     [[File:WIFI 2.4G AP Guest.png|frameless|623x623px]]  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the required MACID and Network Name is configured the user needs to click on the save button to add the details. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user needs to click on the edit button to do modifications on the pre-existing configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Configuring MacID and Network Name.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the required MACID / Network Name is modified the user needs to click on the save button to reflect the changed value in the application.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===5.5 Routing===&lt;br /&gt;
In this submodule the user can configure the parameters related to routing of the device. like Target address, Networks address etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Routing IPV4 Routes.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To add a new device the user needs to fill all the required information and click on the add button.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Interface&lt;br /&gt;
|eth0.1&lt;br /&gt;
|In this drop down list the user should  configure the interface name.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Target&lt;br /&gt;
|192.168.10.1&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user needs to insert the  target IP address&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|IPV4 Netmask&lt;br /&gt;
|255.255.255.0&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user should give the  address for the IPV4Netmask&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Metric&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user should insert the  number of the metric.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|IPV4 Gateway&lt;br /&gt;
|192.168.100.1&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user should configured the  address for the IPV4 Gateway.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Route Type&lt;br /&gt;
|Unicast&lt;br /&gt;
|In this drop down box the user should select  the type of route needed for the device.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
To edit the existing device the user needs to click on the edit option.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Routing Configuration.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the changes are done click on the save button to save all the changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the deleted button to delete the existing device detail.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Advanced Static IPV4 Routes:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Advanced Static IPV4 Routes.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To add a new device the user needs to fill all the required information and click on the add button.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Interface&lt;br /&gt;
|eth0.1&lt;br /&gt;
|In this drop down list the user should  configure the interface name.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|To&lt;br /&gt;
|192.168.10.1&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user needs to insert the  target IP address&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|IPV4 Netmask&lt;br /&gt;
|255.255.255.0&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user should give the  address for the IPV4Netmask&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Table&lt;br /&gt;
|local&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|From&lt;br /&gt;
|192.168.100.1&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user should configured the  from address for the routes&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Priority&lt;br /&gt;
|230&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
To edit the existing device the user needs to click on the edit option.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Routing Editing.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the changes are done click on the save button to save all the changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the deleted button to delete the existing device detail.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once all the configurations are done click on the update button to reflect the changes made.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===5.6 Others===&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user will get to do all the other miscellaneous configuration with respect to the device based on the required parameters.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Miscellaneous configuration.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Utility&lt;br /&gt;
|Action&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Set Date&lt;br /&gt;
|SET&lt;br /&gt;
|Need to set the date and time and after  click command get the Date and time&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Gate Date&lt;br /&gt;
|GET&lt;br /&gt;
|Needs to get the system date and time&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|IPsec status all&lt;br /&gt;
|GET&lt;br /&gt;
|Needs to get the IPsec details&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Wi-Fi Scan&lt;br /&gt;
|GET&lt;br /&gt;
|Needs to get the Wi-Fi status&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|ipref3 client&lt;br /&gt;
|RUN&lt;br /&gt;
|Needs to click on the RUN to execute  the command&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|ipref3 server&lt;br /&gt;
|RUN&lt;br /&gt;
|Needs to click on the RUN to execute  the command&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|Ping&lt;br /&gt;
|PING&lt;br /&gt;
|Needs to click on the ping status&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|9&lt;br /&gt;
|Traceroute&lt;br /&gt;
|RUN&lt;br /&gt;
|Needs to click on the ping Traceroute status&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|10&lt;br /&gt;
|NTP Sync&lt;br /&gt;
|SYNC&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to Sync the NTP&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|11&lt;br /&gt;
|Download Files&lt;br /&gt;
|DOWNLOAD&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to Download the files /Database&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|12&lt;br /&gt;
|Restart Power&lt;br /&gt;
|RESTART&lt;br /&gt;
|Click Restart the power&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|13&lt;br /&gt;
|Restart Modem&lt;br /&gt;
|RESTART&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to Restart the modem&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|14&lt;br /&gt;
|Run at command&lt;br /&gt;
|RUN&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to Run the command&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|15&lt;br /&gt;
|Show board configuration&lt;br /&gt;
|SHOW&lt;br /&gt;
|To Show the board configuration&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|16&lt;br /&gt;
|Show VPN Certificate Name&lt;br /&gt;
|SHOW&lt;br /&gt;
|To Show VPN Certificate Name&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|17&lt;br /&gt;
|Switch SIM to Secondary&lt;br /&gt;
|RUN&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to switch the SIM to secondary  mode&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|18&lt;br /&gt;
|Send Test SMS&lt;br /&gt;
|SEND&lt;br /&gt;
|To Send the SMS Confirmation&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|19&lt;br /&gt;
|Readlatest SMS&lt;br /&gt;
|READ&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to Read the latest SMS&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|20&lt;br /&gt;
|Data Usage&lt;br /&gt;
|SHOW&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to show the data usage.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|21&lt;br /&gt;
|Monthly Data Usage&lt;br /&gt;
|SHOW&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to show the monthly data usage&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|22&lt;br /&gt;
|Modem debug Info&lt;br /&gt;
|READ&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to read the information about the  modem debug&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|23&lt;br /&gt;
|Scan Network operators (take&amp;gt;3mins)&lt;br /&gt;
|SHOW&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to show the Network operator&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|24&lt;br /&gt;
|Network operators (first perform scan  network operator&lt;br /&gt;
|SHOW&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to show the Network operator&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|25&lt;br /&gt;
|ReadLogFiles&lt;br /&gt;
|READ&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to read the log files&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|26&lt;br /&gt;
|Enable ssh&lt;br /&gt;
|RUN&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to Run the command&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|27&lt;br /&gt;
|Disable ssh&lt;br /&gt;
|RUN&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to Run the command&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|28&lt;br /&gt;
|Clear SIM1 Data&lt;br /&gt;
|CLEAR&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to clear the SIM1 data&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|29&lt;br /&gt;
|Clear SIM2 Data&lt;br /&gt;
|CLEAR&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to clear the SIM data&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==6 Logout==&lt;br /&gt;
The user should click on log out option to logged out from the router application.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Logout.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user needs to click on the ok to come out of the router application.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tanisha</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.silbonetworks.com/index.php?title=File:Loopback_Rule_edit.png&amp;diff=1158</id>
		<title>File:Loopback Rule edit.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.silbonetworks.com/index.php?title=File:Loopback_Rule_edit.png&amp;diff=1158"/>
		<updated>2024-09-02T11:12:33Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tanisha: Tanisha uploaded a new version of File:Loopback Rule edit.png&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Loopback Rule edit&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tanisha</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.silbonetworks.com/index.php?title=RC44_User_Manual&amp;diff=1156</id>
		<title>RC44 User Manual</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.silbonetworks.com/index.php?title=RC44_User_Manual&amp;diff=1156"/>
		<updated>2024-09-02T11:11:07Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tanisha: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;This page contains the user manual for RC44.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Connecting with the device to the System (Laptop/Desktop).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To log in to SILBO_RC44 by connecting the router to your laptop or desktop via LAN or using Wi-Fi, please follow the steps below. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Connecting via LAN:&#039;&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Connect your laptop&#039;s LAN port to one of the router&#039;s LAN interfaces. Ensure that you select any LAN interface (there are two available) while making sure the WAN interface is not used. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
                                                                                                                                                          &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;How to connect with the SILBO_RC44&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;application&#039;&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the LAN connection is established between the device and the laptop or the desktop&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please open the command prompt and ping go get the ip config of that device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Type the command &#039;&#039;&#039;Ipconfig&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:How_to_connect_with_the_SILBO_RB44_application.png|alt=How to connect with the SILBO RB44 application|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It will provide the Ip address/url of that device through which the application can be accessed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Connecting_via_LAN_RB44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Log In==&lt;br /&gt;
Open the web browser and type the IP address in the URL.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It will show the log in page of the application.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Log In.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Give the valid credentials for the username and password to login to the application page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user credentials are provided it will direct to the landing page of the application.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Login Dashboard RC44.png|frameless|636x636px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The “Status” landing page shows all the detailed specification of the device like system, memory storage and connection tracking etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The application is divided in to 6 Modules.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Info&lt;br /&gt;
* Settings&lt;br /&gt;
* Maintenance&lt;br /&gt;
* Status&lt;br /&gt;
* Features&lt;br /&gt;
* Logout&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==1.Info==&lt;br /&gt;
The “Info” module provides the information about the devices to the user.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It provides all the specification related to the hardware, firmware, Networks and the Connection uptimes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It has 3 submodules.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Overview&lt;br /&gt;
* System Log&lt;br /&gt;
* Kernel Log&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Info dashboard RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===1.1 Overview===&lt;br /&gt;
In overview module it displays all the specification categorically of a device like System, Memory, storage, Connection tracking, DHCP Lease.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Login Dashboard RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;System&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this section it displays the hardware configured specification of the device.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Info system RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The specifications details are as follows,&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&lt;br /&gt;
!SN&lt;br /&gt;
!Field name &lt;br /&gt;
!Sample value&lt;br /&gt;
!Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Hostname&lt;br /&gt;
|22B09230239&lt;br /&gt;
|This field  displays the router serial number of the device&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Model&lt;br /&gt;
|Silbo_RC44- EC200A&lt;br /&gt;
|This field  displays the model number of the device&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Firmware Version and IPK Version&lt;br /&gt;
|1.16_1.13_RC3&lt;br /&gt;
|This field  displays the firmware version and IPK version&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Kernel Version&lt;br /&gt;
|4.14.180&lt;br /&gt;
|This field  displays the kernel version of the device&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Local Time&lt;br /&gt;
|Monday, July 1, 2024, at 05:43:58 PM&lt;br /&gt;
|This field  displays the local time&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Uptime&lt;br /&gt;
|0h 7m 29s&lt;br /&gt;
|This field  displays the uptime of the device&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|Load Average&lt;br /&gt;
|1.73 1.87 1.04&lt;br /&gt;
|This field  displays the average load&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Memory&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this section it displays the memory configured specification of the device.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Memory Dashboard RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The specifications details are as follows.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Total Available&lt;br /&gt;
|68676 kB / 124208 kB (55%)&lt;br /&gt;
|This field  displays the total availability of memory space in the device&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Free&lt;br /&gt;
|59344 kB / 124208 kB (47%)&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the  Free memory space in the device&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Cached&lt;br /&gt;
|312 kB / 124208 kB (0%)&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the  Cached memory space in the device&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Buffered&lt;br /&gt;
|9332 kB / 124208 kB (7%)&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the  Buffered memory space in the device&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Storage&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this section it displays the status of storage as root and temporary usage specification of the device.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Storage Dashboard RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The specifications details are as follows.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Root Usage&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
796 kB / 15488 kB (5%)&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays  the total root usage of the device&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Temporary  Usage&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
312 kB / 62104 kB (0%)&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the total temporary  usage of the device&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Connection Tracking&#039;&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this section it displays the status of connection tracking for the device.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Connection Tracking RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The specifications details are as follows.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Active Connection&lt;br /&gt;
|48 / 16384 (0%)&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the active connection of the device.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;DHCP Leases&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this section, it displays the DHCP lease of the temporary assignment of an IP address to a device on the network.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:DCHP Leases RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The specifications details are as follows.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Host Name&lt;br /&gt;
|KermaniK-LT&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays  the configured Host Name/User Name for that device.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|IPv4-Address&lt;br /&gt;
|192.168.10.147&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the IP  address of the device.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|MAC-Address&lt;br /&gt;
|34:73:5a:bb: ab:7a&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the MAC-Address  of the device.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Lease time remaining&lt;br /&gt;
|11h 53m 49s&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the lease  time remaining for the device.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===1.2 System Log===&lt;br /&gt;
This page provides on screen System logging information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user gets to view the system logs &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:System Log.png|frameless|617x617px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===1.3 Kernel Log===&lt;br /&gt;
This page provides on-screen Kernel logging information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this page, the user gets to view the Kernel logs&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Kernel Log.png|frameless|621x621px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==2. Setting==&lt;br /&gt;
In this “Setting” module the user can Configure/update all the required parameters related to Network, SIM Switch, Internet, VPN, Firewall, Loopback Rule, Remote monitoring, Tunnel as per requirement.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
IT consist of 8 submodules.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Network&lt;br /&gt;
* Sim Switch&lt;br /&gt;
* Internet&lt;br /&gt;
* VPN&lt;br /&gt;
* Firewall&lt;br /&gt;
* Loopback Rule&lt;br /&gt;
* Remote Monitoring&lt;br /&gt;
* Tunnel&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Settings.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===2.1 Network===&lt;br /&gt;
In this section the user does all the setting related configuration with reference to network like Ethernet Setting, Cellular Setting, Band lock and Operator Lock, Wi-Fi, Guest Wi-Fi, Wireless Schedule, SMS Setting, Loopback IP.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Network Dashboard RC44.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Ethernet Setting&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this page it will display all the configured port that is attached with the device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For this device 3 ports are configured. Ethernet mode can be configured as WAN and as LAN as well. Ethernet LAN Connection settings can be configured as DHCP server or Static.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Ethernet Settings RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;For port 3 setting&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Kindly select the option &#039;&#039;&#039;LAN4&#039;&#039;&#039; for &#039;&#039;&#039;Port 3 mode LAN/WAN&#039;&#039;&#039;. Based on the option selected the filed will also changes the user needs to configure all the required field and click on the save to save the required fields.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Ethernet Settings RC44 part 2.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Port 3 mode LAN/WAN&lt;br /&gt;
|LAN&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the port mode selection&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Port 3 Ethernet Protocol [LAN Eth0.1]&lt;br /&gt;
|DHCP Server&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the Ethernet mode selection&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Port 3 DHCP Server IP&lt;br /&gt;
|192.168.10.1&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays DHCP server IP configured.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Port 3 DHCP Netmask&lt;br /&gt;
|255.255.255.0&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays DHCP server Netmask address configured&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Port 3 DHCP Start Address&lt;br /&gt;
|100&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays DHCP server  start address configured&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Port 3 DHCP Limit&lt;br /&gt;
|50&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays DHCP server  limit&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Kindly select the option &#039;&#039;&#039;EWAN&#039;&#039;&#039; for &#039;&#039;&#039;Port 3 mode LAN/WAN&#039;&#039;&#039;. Based on the option selected the filed will also changes the user needs to configure all the required field and click on the save to save the required fields.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:EWAN Port 3 Configuration RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Port 3 mode LAN/WAN&lt;br /&gt;
|EWAN&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the port mode selection&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Ethernet Protocol Port 3 WAN&lt;br /&gt;
|DHCP  client&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the client&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Gateway&lt;br /&gt;
|192.168.1.1&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays gateway address  configured&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the save once all the configuration is done and click on the update button to update all the information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;SW_LAN settings&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this part the user can configure the setting for SW_LAN &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SW LAN settings RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|SW_LAN Ethernet Protocol&lt;br /&gt;
|DHCP  Server&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the  Ethernet mode selection&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|SW_LAN DHCP Server IP&lt;br /&gt;
|192.168.10.1&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays DHCP server IP  configured.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|SW_LAN  DHCP Netmask&lt;br /&gt;
|255.255.255.0&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays DHCP server  Netmask address configured&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|SW_LAN  DHCP Start Address&lt;br /&gt;
|100&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays DHCP server  start address configured&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|SW_LAN  DHCP Limit&lt;br /&gt;
|50&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays DHCP server  limit&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|DNS  Server&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|This filed display number of DSN  server availability&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|DNS  Server Address&lt;br /&gt;
|8.8.8.8&lt;br /&gt;
|This  filed display the DSN server address.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After configuring all the required information, the user should click on the save and then click on the update to update the all the required information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Static option for SW_LAN Ethernet Protocol&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the option of static from the drop-down menu for SW_LAN Ethernet Protocol.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SW LAN settings Static Ethernet Protocol.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|SW_LAN Ethernet Protocol&lt;br /&gt;
|Static&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the  Ethernet mode selection&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|SW_LAN static IP&lt;br /&gt;
|192.168.5.1&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays static server IP  configured.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|SW_LAN  Netmask&lt;br /&gt;
|255.255.255.0&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays static server  Netmask address configured&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|DNS  Server&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|This filed display number of DSN  server availability&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|DSN  Server Address&lt;br /&gt;
|8.8.8.8&lt;br /&gt;
|This  filed display the DSN server address.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
After configuring all the required information, the user should click on the save and then click on the update to update the all the required information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Cellular Setting&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this page, the user needs to configure the various details with respect to the SIM.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
select single cellular single sim where the user must configure the APN details of the sim used for the router device. The Configurations can be done based on the SIM usage, with respect to IPV4 or IPV.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Cellular Settings RC44.png|frameless|619x619px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Cellular  Operation Mode&lt;br /&gt;
|Single Cellular with Dual Sim&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays  the cellular operation mode.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Cellular  Modem 1&lt;br /&gt;
|QuectelEC200A&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the modem name.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Network  Mode&lt;br /&gt;
|Automatic&lt;br /&gt;
|This  field displays the  Network mode selection&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM 1  Access Point Name&lt;br /&gt;
|airtelgprs.com&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the  name of the Sim 1 access point configured.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM 1  PDP Type&lt;br /&gt;
|IPV4&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays  the type of SIM 1&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM 1  Username&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|This field is optional, and the user can configure the name of  the SIM 1&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM 1  Password&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|This  field is optional, and the user can configure the password for the SIM 1&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM 1  Authentication Protocol&lt;br /&gt;
|None&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the type of  protocol is being used for SIM 1&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|9&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM 2  Access Point Name&lt;br /&gt;
|airtelgprs.com&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the name of the  Sim 2 access point configured.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|10&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM 2  PDP Type&lt;br /&gt;
|IPV4&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the type of SIM  2&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|11&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM 2  Username&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|This  field is optional, and the user can configure the name of the SIM 2&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|12&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM 2  Password&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|This  field is optional, and the user can configure the password for the SIM 2&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|13&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM 2  Authentication Protocol&lt;br /&gt;
|None&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the type of  protocol is being used for SIM 2&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|14&lt;br /&gt;
|Primary  SIM Switchback Time (In Minutes)&lt;br /&gt;
|10&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the time given  for sim to swich in between.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
After configuring all the required information, the user should click on the save and then click on the update to update the all the required information. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Band lock and Operator Lock&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this page, the user needs to configure the lock band and operator based on the service provider&#039;&#039;&#039;.&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Bands available in the drop-down list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Band lock and Operator Lock.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;2G/3G option&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2G/3G: - 3G allows additional features such as mobile internet access, video calls and mobile TV. While the main function of 2G technology is the transmission of information through voice calls.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:2G-3G option.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user should select the band check box  available for 2g/3g  from the given list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Bands available for selection under LTE for the bands available that zone.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Operator Selection Mode&#039;&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user needs to click on the check box of the “operator select enable” to select the operator.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the check box is clicked there will be a dropdown list of the operator modes from which the user needs to select the mode. The user needs to select the operator mode from the given dropdown list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Operator Selection Mode.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the user selects the mode “Manual” or “Manual-Automatic” then one more text box will appear where the user must provide the operator code.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Band lock and Operator Lock 1.png|frameless|542x542px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After configuring all the required information, the user should click on the save and then click on the update to update the all the required information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Wi-Fi Setting&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wi-Fi is a family of wireless network protocols based on the IEEE 802.11 family of standards, which are commonly used for local area network of devices and internet access, allowing nearby digital devices to exchanges data by radio waves. These are the most widely used computer network, used globally in home and small office networks to link devices and to provided internet access with wireless router and wireless access point in public places. In this router has the general setting and change country code, channel, radio mode, radio passphrase as per the requirement after clicking on enable Radio button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Wi-Fi Setting.png|frameless|585x585px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user needs to select the respective radio mode based on its need. Basically, it has 3 radio mode.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Wi-Fi Setting access Point.png|frameless|590x590px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Access Point mode:&#039;&#039;&#039; In Access Point mode, router connects to a wireless router through an Ethernet cable to extend the coverage of wireless signal to other network client.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Access Point Mode RC44.png|frameless|573x573px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Client point:&#039;&#039;&#039;  In client mode, the access point connects your wired devices to a wireless network. This mode is suitable when you have a wired device with an Ethernet port and no wireless capability, for example, a smart TV, Media Player, or Game console and you want to connect it to the internet wirelessly, select the Client Mode and give the Radio SSID &amp;amp; client passphrase&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Client Point RC44.png|frameless|587x587px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Access point and client point&#039;&#039;&#039;: select this option for both type connection, give both SSID and passphrase.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Access point and Client Point RC44.png|frameless|571x571px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After configuring all the required information, the user should click on the save and then click on the update to update the all the required information.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Radio  0 Protocol&lt;br /&gt;
|IEEE 802.11 b/g/n&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the  user should select which protocol is being used&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Country  Code&lt;br /&gt;
|INDIA&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the  user should select which county it belongs to.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Channel&lt;br /&gt;
|Auto&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user should  select the proper channel to be used.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|TX  Power&lt;br /&gt;
|100&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user should  specify the power.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Channel  Width&lt;br /&gt;
|20 MHz&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user should  select the channel width&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Radio  Mode&lt;br /&gt;
|Access  point&lt;br /&gt;
|In this drop down the user should  select the mode.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|Radio  SSID&lt;br /&gt;
|APClient_22B09230239&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user should  specify the SSID number&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|Radio  Authentication&lt;br /&gt;
|WPA2  Personal (PSK)&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user should  select the type of authentication.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|9&lt;br /&gt;
|Radio  Encryption&lt;br /&gt;
|AES&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user should  select the type of encryption required.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|10&lt;br /&gt;
|Radio  Passphrase&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user should  specify the password.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|11&lt;br /&gt;
|Radio  DHCP server IP&lt;br /&gt;
|192.168.100.1&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user should  specify the IP address of DHCP server.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|12&lt;br /&gt;
|Radio  DHCP start address&lt;br /&gt;
|100&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user should  specify the start address of the DHCP.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|13&lt;br /&gt;
|Radio  DHCP limit&lt;br /&gt;
|50&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user should  specify the limit for the DHCP.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Wireless Schedule&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wi-Fi can be automatically withdrawn based on the configuration done in this section.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user can schedule the Wi-Fi’s accessibility time during a particular period.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Wireless Schedule.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After configuring all the required information, the user should click on the save and then click on the update to update the all the required information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user can select more than one “day of the week” for scheduling the wifi working hours.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Wifi Schedule.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Loop back IP settings&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The loopback IP address, often referred to as “localhost”. it’s used to establish network connections within the same device for testing and troubleshooting purpose.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Loop back IP settings.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After configuring all the required information, the user should click on the save and then click on the update to update the all the required information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The loopback IP address, commonly represented as 127.0.0.1, is a special address used for testing network connectivity on a local machine. It allows a device to send network messages to itself without involving external networks, making it useful for troubleshooting and diagnostics.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
However, this IP can be changed as per requirement and to do that, Navigating to Setting&amp;gt;&amp;gt;Network configuration&amp;gt;&amp;gt; Loopback IP settings can be changed/updated.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Above screenshot shows the configuration window from GUI/WebUI&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;SMS Settings&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
User needs to enable SMS option in SMS settings page. This option is to validate the mobile numbers using which controlling commands could be sent to the router device. 1 to 5 mobile numbers can be authenticated by choosing from “Select Valid SMS user numbers” and adding the mobile numbers below respectively. API key is the pass key used in the commands while sending SMS. Displayed in the below screen is the default API key which can be edited and changed as per choice.   After addition of the mobile numbers user needs to click on save button for changes to take place.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SMS Settings.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select valid user number max. 5 and add authorized phone number in the main menu where want to find the alert and click on SMS Response Enable, save and update button, now send SMS commands from the configured mobile number. Once the commands are received from the user phone number the board send acknowledgement as per the commands after that it will send the router’s status once it has rebooted and is operational again. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mentioned below are a few commands which can be sent from the configured mobile number to the router device. Below two commands are One for rebooting the router device and another to get the uptime.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1) {&amp;quot;device&amp;quot;:[&amp;quot;passkey&amp;quot;,&amp;quot;API key&amp;quot;],&amp;quot;command&amp;quot;:&amp;quot;reboot&amp;quot;,&amp;quot;arguments&amp;quot;:&amp;quot;hardware&amp;quot;}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2) {&amp;quot;device&amp;quot;:[&amp;quot;passkey &amp;quot;,&amp;quot;API key&amp;quot;],&amp;quot;command&amp;quot;:&amp;quot;uptime&amp;quot;}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After configuring all the required information, the user should click on the save and then click on the update to update the all the required information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===2.2 SIM===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user needs to configure the Sim for the given device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SIM Switch.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user needs to select from the drop-down menu on which basis the sim needs to be switched.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Sim Switch Configuration.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user selects on “&#039;&#039;&#039;signal strength&#039;&#039;&#039;” then the parameters related to signal strength will pop up and the user needs to configure the parameters based on the requirement &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Signal Strength.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Threshold RSRP&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This Needs to be set appropriately. Incorrect setting may cause unnecessary SIM switching. ( In General a BAD RSRP value range is -140 to -115 and FAIR RSRP value range is -115 to -105).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Threshold SINR&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This Needs to be set appropriately. Incorrect setting may cause unnecessary SIM switching. ( In General a BAD SNR value range is -20 to 0 and FAIR SNR value range is 0 to 13)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user selects on “&#039;&#039;&#039;Data Limit&#039;&#039;&#039;” then the parameters related to Data Limit will pop up and the user needs to configure the parameters based on the requirement.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Data limit.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM Switch Based on&lt;br /&gt;
|Data Limit&lt;br /&gt;
|The user needs to select from the  drop-down menu on what basis the sim needs to be switched.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM 1 Data Usage Limit (In MB)&lt;br /&gt;
|1000&lt;br /&gt;
|The user needs to set the limit for the data  usage for SIM 1.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM 2 Data Usage Limit (In MB)&lt;br /&gt;
|1000&lt;br /&gt;
|The user needs to set the limit for the data  usage for SIM 2.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Periodicity&lt;br /&gt;
|Daily&lt;br /&gt;
|The user needs to set the pattern/frequency to  switch the sims.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Day Of Month&lt;br /&gt;
|16&lt;br /&gt;
|The user needs to set the day for switching the  sim.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
After configuring all the required information, the user should click on the save.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===2.3 Internet===&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user needs to configure the internet connection to set the priority from the various options. The user should decide what kind of connection it needs to provide to the device like LAN, WAN etc. Once the connections are configured then click on save option and then on update.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Internet.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the user needs to edit on the existing configuration, then the user should click on the “EDIT” button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Network Edit Options.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Name&lt;br /&gt;
|EWAN2&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the name of the WAN  connection&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Priority&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown box the user need to select  the priority.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Select Track IP Numbers&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user needs to select the  track number for the Ips.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|TrackIP1&lt;br /&gt;
|8.8.8.8&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text field the user needs to set the IP  address for the track 1&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|TrackIP2&lt;br /&gt;
|8.8.4.4&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text field the user needs to set the IP  address for the track 1&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Reliability&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Not sure what needs to be written&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|Count&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Not sure what needs to be written&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|Up&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Not sure what needs to be written&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|9&lt;br /&gt;
|Down&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Not sure what needs to be written&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user is done with modification click on the save button to save all the changes and then click on the update button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===2.4 VPN===&lt;br /&gt;
VPN stands for &#039;&#039;&#039;Virtual Private Network&#039;&#039;&#039;, it establishes a connection between the system and a remote server, which is owned by a VPN provider.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Creating a point-to-point tunnel that encrypts the personal data, masks the IP address, and allows to block the required website to blocks via firewalls on the internet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:VPN Settings RC44.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are 5 types of setting available under VPN configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* General Settings&lt;br /&gt;
* IPSEC&lt;br /&gt;
* Open VPN&lt;br /&gt;
* Wireguard&lt;br /&gt;
* Zerotier&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;General Settings&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user must choose which type of VPN connection is required for the device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user must select from IPSEC or Open VPN based on its requirement. If required, the user can select for both the options. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:VPN General Settings RC44.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user needs to click on the save after selecting the option based on its requirement.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;IPSEC&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
IPSEC VPN is used to create a VPN connection between local and remote networks. To use IPSEC VPN, the user should check that both local and remote routers support IPSEC VPN feature.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user can add/edit/delete the IPSEC VPN connection for the device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:VPN IPSEC changes RC44.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user needs to click on the update button once the required configuration is completed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In IPSEC the user needs to click on edit button to edit the configuration of an existing VPN connection.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:VPN Edit Options.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the save button after the required configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The tunnel will show established, showing the connection has been made.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:IPSEC .png|thumb|631x631px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|IPSEC&lt;br /&gt;
|Site to Site VPN&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user should select  the IPSEC connection type.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|IPSEC Role&lt;br /&gt;
|Client/Server&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown box the user needs to select  the IPSEC role.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Connection Type&lt;br /&gt;
|Tunnel&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user needs to select the connection  type. The user should select on the connection enable check box.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Connection mode&lt;br /&gt;
|start&lt;br /&gt;
|In this drop down list the user should select  the mode for the connection. it will have route/add/start/trap mode&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Remote Server IP&lt;br /&gt;
|1.1.1.1&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text field the user needs to set the IP  address for the remote server.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Local ID&lt;br /&gt;
|g300&lt;br /&gt;
|The user needs to set the local id.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|No. of local subnets&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user needs to select how  many subnets it will be connected.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|Local Subnet 1&lt;br /&gt;
|192.168.11.1/24&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user needs to put the  address of the local subnet.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|9&lt;br /&gt;
|Remote id&lt;br /&gt;
|sophos&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user needs to put the id  of the remote connection.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|10&lt;br /&gt;
|No of remote subnet&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user needs to select how  many subnets it will be connected remotely.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|11&lt;br /&gt;
|Remote subnet&lt;br /&gt;
|192.168.10.0/24&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user needs to put the  address of the remote subnet.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|12&lt;br /&gt;
|Key exchange&lt;br /&gt;
|Ikev1&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user should select the  which key exchange version to be selected.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|13&lt;br /&gt;
|Aggressive&lt;br /&gt;
|Yes/No&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user should select either  yes or no .&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|14&lt;br /&gt;
|IKE lifetime&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|Fill according to user’s requirements.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|15&lt;br /&gt;
|Lifetime in seconds&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Fill according to user’s requirements.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|16&lt;br /&gt;
|Enable DPD Detection&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;1&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
0&lt;br /&gt;
|Indicates  whether Dead Peer Detection is enabled to detect a lost connection. Enable  this option as per server-side settings.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|17&lt;br /&gt;
|Time Interval (In Seconds)&lt;br /&gt;
|60&lt;br /&gt;
|This option  is available only if DPD Detection is enabled. The time interval is the  interval for DPD checks.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|18&lt;br /&gt;
|Action&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Restart&#039;&#039;&#039;/clear/hold/&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
trap/start&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Restart&#039;&#039;&#039;: Action to take when  DPD detects a lost connection (restart the connection). Select as per  server-side setting.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|19&lt;br /&gt;
|Authentication Method&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;PSK&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;PSK&#039;&#039;&#039;: Pre-shared key is used  for authentication. Select this option for authentication as per sever side  setting.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|20&lt;br /&gt;
|Multiple Secrets&lt;br /&gt;
|1/&#039;&#039;&#039;0&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|Indicates  whether multiple PSK secrets are used. Enable only if required.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|21&lt;br /&gt;
|PSK Value&lt;br /&gt;
|******&lt;br /&gt;
|Pre-shared  key value (masked for security).&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;*Below are Phase I and Phase II settings details*&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&lt;br /&gt;
! colspan=&amp;quot;4&amp;quot; |                                                        &#039;&#039;&#039;Proposal settings Phase I&#039;&#039;&#039;                                                                                                                     &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|22            &lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Encryption Algorithm&#039;&#039;&#039;                                                 &lt;br /&gt;
|AES 128&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AES 192&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;AES 256&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3DES                                                                                                                                     &lt;br /&gt;
|                                                                                                                                     &#039;&#039;&#039;AES 256&#039;&#039;&#039;: Encryption algorithm  for Phase I. Select as per server-side configuration. Both server and client  should have same configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|23&lt;br /&gt;
|Authentication Phase I&lt;br /&gt;
|SHA1&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MD5&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SHA 256&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SHA 384&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;SHA 512&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;SHA 512&#039;&#039;&#039;: Authentication  algorithm for Phase I.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select as per  server-side configuration. Both server and client should have same configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|24&lt;br /&gt;
|DH Group&lt;br /&gt;
|MODP768(group1)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MODP1024(group2)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MODP1536(group5)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;MODP2048(group14)&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MODP3072(group15)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MODP4096(group16)&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;MODP2048 (group14)&#039;&#039;&#039;:  Diffie-Hellman group for key exchange.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select as per  server-side configuration. Both server and client should have same  configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| colspan=&amp;quot;4&amp;quot; |                                                                                                                                                                 &#039;&#039;&#039;Proposal settings Phase II&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|25&lt;br /&gt;
|Hash Algorithm&lt;br /&gt;
|AES 128&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AES 192&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;AES 256&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3DES&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;AES 256&#039;&#039;&#039;: Encryption algorithm  for Phase II. Select as per server-side configuration. Both server and client  should have same configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|26&lt;br /&gt;
|Authentication Phase II&lt;br /&gt;
|SHA1&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MD5&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SHA 256&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SHA 384&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;SHA 512&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;SHA 512&#039;&#039;&#039;: Authentication  algorithm for Phase II.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select as per  server-side configuration. Both server and client should have same  configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|27&lt;br /&gt;
|PFS Group&lt;br /&gt;
|MODP768(group1)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MODP1024(group2)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MODP1536(group5)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;MODP2048(group14)&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MODP3072(group15)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MODP4096(group16)&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;MODP2048 (group14)&#039;&#039;&#039;: Perfect  Forward Secrecy group.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select as per  server-side configuration. Both server and client should have same  configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Open VPN&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the OpenVPN connection, the home network can act as a server, and the remote device can access the server through the router which acts as an OpenVPN Server gateway. To use the VPN feature, the user should enable OpenVPN Server on the router, and install and run VPN client software on the remote device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Open VPN Settings RC44.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user needs to “upload” the respective certificate from a valid path and then click on the “Update.”&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the OpenVPN connection starts the user will get an option to enable/disable the VPN connection as and when required.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By clicking on the enable/disable button, the user can start/stop the VPN connection.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Open VPN Settings RC44 Dashboard.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
VPN has been established.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;WireGuard:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;WireGuard&#039;&#039;&#039; is simple, fast, lean, and modern VPN that utilizes secure and trusted cryptography.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on “Edit” to start configurations as needed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Wire Guard RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;EDIT:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Wire Guard RC44 Setttings.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the save button after the required configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample Value     &lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Wireguard Role&lt;br /&gt;
|Client/Server&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown box the user needs to select  the wireguard role.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Listen Port&lt;br /&gt;
|51820&lt;br /&gt;
|The UDP port on which the WireGuard client  listens for incoming connections.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|IP Addresses&lt;br /&gt;
|10.0.0.1/24&lt;br /&gt;
|The IP  address and subnet mask assigned to the WireGuard client&#039;s interface. This  address is used within the VPN.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Allowed PeerIPs&lt;br /&gt;
|10.1.1.1&lt;br /&gt;
|The IP  address of the allowed peer(s) that can connect to this WireGuard client.  This might need adjustment based on the actual peer IPs used in the network.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Endpoint HostIP&lt;br /&gt;
|10.1.1.1&lt;br /&gt;
|The IP  address of the WireGuard server (the endpoint to which the client connects).&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Endpoint HostPort&lt;br /&gt;
|51820&lt;br /&gt;
|The port on  the WireGuard server to which the client connects.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|PeerPublicKey&lt;br /&gt;
|*****&lt;br /&gt;
|The public  key of the peer (the server) the client is connecting to. This key is part of  the public-private key pair used in WireGuard for encryption and  authentication.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|Enable Preshared key&lt;br /&gt;
|Yes/No&lt;br /&gt;
|This option  indicates that a pre-shared key (PSK) is used in addition to the  public-private key pair for an extra layer of security.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|9&lt;br /&gt;
|Preshared key&lt;br /&gt;
|*****&lt;br /&gt;
|The actual  pre-shared key value shared between the client and the server. This option  appears only if you have enabled preshared key.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Zerotier:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ZeroTier is a tool that lets you create your own private network over the internet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Go to ZeroTier Central and sign up for a free account. In ZeroTier Central, click on &amp;quot;Create a Network&amp;quot;. This will generate a unique 16-digit network ID for your new network.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Go to settings =&amp;gt; VPN, in general settings, enable ZeroTier and save.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Zerotier Settings RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Copy and paste the unique 16-digit network ID in the edit section.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Zero Seetings Dashboard RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Zerotier Dashboard.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the save button after the required configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field Name    &lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  Value           &lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|NetworkID&lt;br /&gt;
|Ad2769hfkw2345f4&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown box the user needs to paste  the unique 16-digit network id.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Listen Port&lt;br /&gt;
|9993&lt;br /&gt;
|Default&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== 2.5 Firewall ===&lt;br /&gt;
A firewall is a layer of security between the network and the Internet. Since a router is the main connection from a network to the Internet, the firewall function is merged into this device. Every network should have a firewall to protect its privacy.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Firewall.png|frameless|635x635px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are 6 types of setting available under firewall.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* General Settings&lt;br /&gt;
* Port forwards&lt;br /&gt;
* Traffic Rules&lt;br /&gt;
* SNAT traffic Rules&lt;br /&gt;
* Parental Control&lt;br /&gt;
* Zone Forwarding&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;General Setting&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
General settings are subdivided into 2 parts,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1.) General settings&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In general settings, the settings that are made are default settings and can be changed according to user’s preference.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Firewall General Settings.png|frameless|622x622px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Specification details are below:&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;SN&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Field Name&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Sample Value&#039;&#039;&#039;      &lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Description&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Enable SYN-flood  protection&lt;br /&gt;
|Enabled&lt;br /&gt;
|This is  enabled by default; setting can be changed if required.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Disable IPV6&lt;br /&gt;
|Disabled&lt;br /&gt;
|This is  enabled by default; setting can be changed if required.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Drop invalid packets&lt;br /&gt;
|Disabled&lt;br /&gt;
|This is  enabled by default; setting can be changed if required.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|TCP SYN Cookies&lt;br /&gt;
|Disabled&lt;br /&gt;
|This is  enabled by default; setting can be changed if required.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Input&lt;br /&gt;
|Reject/Accept&lt;br /&gt;
|By  default, the setting is ‘Reject’ but this needs to be changed to ‘Accept’  compulsory.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Output&lt;br /&gt;
|Reject/Accept&lt;br /&gt;
|By  default, the setting is ‘Reject’ but this needs to be changed to ‘Accept’  compulsory.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|Forward&lt;br /&gt;
|Reject/Accept&lt;br /&gt;
|By  default, the setting is ‘Reject’ but this needs to be changed to ‘Accept’  compulsory.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2.) Zone settings&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In zone settings, there’s an option to add “New Zone”, according to user’s requirement.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Zone settings.png|thumb|628x628px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Port Forwards:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Port forwarding is a feature in a router or gateway that allows external devices to access services on a private network.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It maps an external port on the router to an internal IP address and port on the local network, enabling applications such as gaming servers, web servers, or remote desktop connections to be accessed from outside the network.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This helps in directing incoming traffic to the correct device within a local network based on the port number, enhancing connectivity and accessibility.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Firewall Port Forward.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;EDIT&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Firewall Edit Option RC44.png|frameless|622x622px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the save button after the required configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Name&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Web_Server_Forward&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|Field must  not be empty. Provide a name for the rule to easily identify it.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Protocol&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;TCP+UDP&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|Select the protocol  for the rule.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Options  typically include TCP+UDP, TCP, UDP, ICMP, Custom.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Source zone&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;SW_LAN&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|Select the  source zone where the traffic is originating from. Options typically include EWAN2,SW_LAN,CWAN1,CWAN1_0,CWAN1_1,VPN&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Source MAC address [optional]&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;any&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;any&#039;&#039;&#039;: Leave as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;any&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; if you don&#039;t want to specify a MAC address.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Source IP address[optional]&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: Leave blank if not needed.&lt;br /&gt;
|Optionally  specify an IP address or range.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Source port&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;80, 443&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;  (if matching traffic for web server ports)&lt;br /&gt;
|Specify the  source port or port range.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|Destination zone&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;SW_LAN&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|Select the  destination zone where the traffic is heading to.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|Destination IP address&lt;br /&gt;
|Leave blank if not needed.&lt;br /&gt;
|Optionally specify  the destination IP address or range.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|9&lt;br /&gt;
|Destination port&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;80&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;  (if redirecting to a web server port)&lt;br /&gt;
|Specify the  destination port or port range.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Traffic Rule:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;Traffic rules&amp;quot; refer to the policies and regulations that govern the flow of data packets within a network.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To allow new traffic, click on “Add and Edit” in “New Traffic Rule”.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Firewall Traffic Rule.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;EDIT&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Firewall Traffic Rule Edit.png|frameless|621x621px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Specification details are below:&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample Value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Name&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: Allow_HTTP_and_HTTPS&lt;br /&gt;
|Field must  not be empty: Provide a descriptive name for the traffic rule.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Restrict to Address Family&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|1.       Options:  IPv4, IPv6&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2.       Example:  IPv4 if dealing with typical internet traffic.&lt;br /&gt;
|Select the  address family to generate iptables rules for.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Protocol&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: TCP+UDP&lt;br /&gt;
|TCP+UDP:  Match incoming traffic using the given protocol.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Match ICMP Type&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: any&lt;br /&gt;
|Match all  ICMP types if set to any. Specific types can be chosen if needed.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Source Zone&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: LAN&lt;br /&gt;
|Specifies the  traffic source zone.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Enable DDoS Prevention&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: ‘Checked’ if you want to enable DDoS prevention  measures&lt;br /&gt;
|Enable or  disable Distributed Denial of Service (DDoS) prevention.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|Source MAC Address&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: any&lt;br /&gt;
|any: Match  traffic from any MAC address or specify a particular MAC address.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|Source Address&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: 192.168.1.0/24&lt;br /&gt;
|Match  incoming traffic from the specified source IP address or range.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|9&lt;br /&gt;
|Source Port&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: any if all source ports should be matched&lt;br /&gt;
|any: Match  incoming traffic from the specified source port or port range.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|10&lt;br /&gt;
|Destination Zone&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: WAN&lt;br /&gt;
|Specifies the  traffic destination zone.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|11&lt;br /&gt;
|Action&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: ACCEPT&lt;br /&gt;
|Options:  ACCEPT, DROP, REJECT. Specify the action to take for matched traffic.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|12&lt;br /&gt;
|Limit&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: 10/minute to limit matches to 10 times per  minute.&lt;br /&gt;
|Maximum  average matching rate; specified as a number, with an optional /second,  /minute, /hour, or /day suffix.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|13&lt;br /&gt;
|Extra arguments&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: --log-prefix &amp;quot;Blocked: &amp;quot; to add a log  prefix to log messages for this rule.&lt;br /&gt;
|Passes  additional arguments to iptables. Use with care as it can significantly alter  rule behaviour.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
Click on save once configured.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;SNAT Traffic Rule:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For configuring SNAT (Source Network Address Translation) traffic rules, you can control how outbound traffic from your local network is translated to a different IP address as it exits the network.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To add new source NAT,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on “ADD” in “New Source NAT:”&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SNAT Traffic Rule.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Edit&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SNAT Edit Options RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Specification details are below:&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Name&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: SNAT_WAN_to_LAN&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Field must  not be empty&#039;&#039;&#039;: Provide a unique and descriptive name for the SNAT rule.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Protocol&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: TCP+UDP&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;TCP+UDP&#039;&#039;&#039;:  Select the protocols that the SNAT rule will apply to.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Source Zone&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: wan&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;wan&#039;&#039;&#039;:  Specifies the source zone from which the traffic originates.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Source IP Address&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: any or a specific range like 192.168.1.0/24&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;-- please  choose --&#039;&#039;&#039;: Specify the source IP address or range. Leave empty if the  rule applies to any source IP.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Source Port&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: any&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;any&#039;&#039;&#039;:  Specify the source port or port range from which the traffic originates.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Destination Zone&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: lan&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;lan&#039;&#039;&#039;:  Specifies the destination zone to which the traffic is directed.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|Destination IP Address&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: any or a specific IP like 192.168.1.100&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;-- please  choose --&#039;&#039;&#039;: Specify the destination IP address or range. Leave empty if  the rule applies to any destination IP.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|Destination port&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: any&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;any&#039;&#039;&#039;:  Specify the destination port or port range to which the traffic is directed.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|9&lt;br /&gt;
|SNAT IP Address&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: 203.0.113.5 (an external IP address)&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;-- please  choose --&#039;&#039;&#039;: Specify the IP address to which the source IP should be  translated.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|10&lt;br /&gt;
|SNAT Port&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: Leave empty if not needed, or specify a port  like ‘12345’&lt;br /&gt;
|Optionally,  rewrite matched traffic to a specific source port. Leave empty to only  rewrite the IP address.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|11&lt;br /&gt;
|Extra Arguments&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: --log-prefix &amp;quot;SNAT_traffic: &amp;quot; (to add  a log prefix to log messages for this rule)&lt;br /&gt;
|Pass  additional arguments to iptables. Use with care as it can significantly alter  rule behaviour.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
Click on save once configured.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Parental Control:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For configuring parental control rules, you want to set restrictions based on time, source, and destination zones, as well as specific devices.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To add parental control in firewall,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on “Add and Edit” in “New parental control:” field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Parental Control.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Edit&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Parental Control Edit Options RC44.png|frameless|622x622px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Specification details are given below:&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  Name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  Value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Name&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  Parental_Control_Sunday&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Field must  not be empty&#039;&#039;&#039;: Provide a unique and descriptive name for the parental  control rule.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Proto&lt;br /&gt;
|all&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;all&#039;&#039;&#039;:  This specifies that the rule will apply to all protocols.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Source Zone&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: lan&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Field must  not be empty&#039;&#039;&#039;: Please look at Firewall-&amp;gt;Zone Settings to find zone  names.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Destination  Zone&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: wan&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Field must  not be empty&#039;&#039;&#039;: Please look at Firewall-&amp;gt;Zone Settings to find zone  names.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Source MAC  Address&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  00:1A:2B:3C:4D:5E&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Field&#039;&#039;&#039;:  Enter the MAC address of the device you want to apply the parental control  rule to. This is useful for restricting specific devices.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Target&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  Reject&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Accept&#039;&#039;&#039;:  This specifies the action to take. For parental controls, you might want to  use ‘Reject’ or ‘Drop’ to block traffic.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|Weekdays&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  Sunday&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Sunday&#039;&#039;&#039;:  Specify the days of the week when the rule should be active.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|Month Days&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: All&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;All:&#039;&#039;&#039; Specify  the days of the month when the rule should be active.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|9&lt;br /&gt;
|Start Time (hh:mm:ss)&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  18:00:00 (6:00 PM)&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Field must  not be empty:&#039;&#039;&#039; Specify the start time when the rule should begin to apply.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|10&lt;br /&gt;
|Stop Time  (hh:mm:ss)&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  22:00:00 (10:00 PM)&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Field must  not be empty:&#039;&#039;&#039; Specify the stop time when the rule should end.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
Click on save once configured.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Zone Forwarding:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Zone forwarding in network configuration allows traffic to be directed from one zone to another.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To ADD new zone,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on “Add” in “New Zone Forward:” field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Zone Forwarding RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;EDIT&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Zone Forwarding editing Options RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Specification details are below:&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  Name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  Value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Source Zone&lt;br /&gt;
|Example options: lan, wan, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;--please  choose--&#039;&#039;&#039;: Select the source zone from which the traffic originates.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Destination Zone&lt;br /&gt;
|Example options: lan, wan, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;--please  choose--&#039;&#039;&#039;: Select the destination zone to which the traffic is directed.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
Click on save once configured.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===2.6 Loopback Rule===&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user can configure the port where he want to forward the traffic to. Here the user can add/edit/delete different port ports as per the requirement. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Loopback Rule.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user should click on ‘add’ and then ‘edit’ to do the required changes in the port and enter the valid information in each section to configure the port for forwarding.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Loopback Rule edit.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user is done with the required configurations, should click save button and then click on the update to save the changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===2.7 Remote Monitoring===&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user can select which equipment needs to be monitor remotely, the TR-069 device or the NMS device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Remote Monitoring.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
One the user selects the type of RMS click on the save.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;NMS&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
IN this page the user should type the server IP or domain name in the URL then click on sav. Click on upload and start (Once key is uploaded and this option is clicked, NMS automatically starts, and this router device gets registered with the NMS server provided.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:NMS.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;TR069&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To enable the TR069 the user needs to click on the enable check box.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:TR069.png|frameless|582x582px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user clicks on the check box of enable it will display all the required filed to configured.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Remote Monitoring Tr-069.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Serving Interval&lt;br /&gt;
|300&lt;br /&gt;
|This displays the interval time&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Interface&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|Not sure what needs to be written&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Username&lt;br /&gt;
|Username&lt;br /&gt;
|The user needs to mention the username&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Password&lt;br /&gt;
|******&lt;br /&gt;
|The user should set the password&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|URL&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|The user needs to mention the URL&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
The user should fill all the required fields and click on the save button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===2.8 Tunnel===&lt;br /&gt;
Tunnels are a method of transporting data across a network using protocols which are not supported by that network.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tunnel Settings.png|frameless|621x621px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;General Settings&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user needs to select under which type of tunnel it needs to send the data.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tunnel General Settings.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user selects the type of tunnel then click in the save button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;GRE Tunnel&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user needs to add all the details of GRE tunnels.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user configured all the required fields then it needs to click on the save. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:GRE Tunnel.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here the user can add/edit/delete the details of the tunnel. Once the required update is done then it needs to click on update to save the changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tunnel Configuration.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;IPIP Tunnel&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user needs to add all the details of IPIP tunnels.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user configured all the required fields then it needs to click on the save. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:IPIP Tunnel.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here the user can add/edit/delete the details of the tunnel. Once the required update is done then it needs to click on update to save the changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Ipip config.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==3 Maintenance==&lt;br /&gt;
In this module the user can configure/upgrade/modify the settings related to system, password, firmware and monitoring.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Maintenance System.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It includes below submodules.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* General&lt;br /&gt;
* Password&lt;br /&gt;
* Reboot&lt;br /&gt;
* Import and Export config&lt;br /&gt;
* Firmware upgrade&lt;br /&gt;
* Monitor Application&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===3.1 General===&lt;br /&gt;
In this section the user can configure the details related to time zone and host name&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Maintenance General.png|frameless|619x619px]]&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Local Time&lt;br /&gt;
|2023/12/13 12:24:11&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|It displays the system current date and  time.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|HostName&lt;br /&gt;
|31B30230298&lt;br /&gt;
|It displays the host name.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Timezone&lt;br /&gt;
|Asia/Kolkata&lt;br /&gt;
|It displays in which time zone its configured.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user configures the required details then click on the save button to save all the details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Logging&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here the user can configure the basic aspects of your device related to system.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Maintenance logging.png|frameless|608x608px]]&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|System log buffer size&lt;br /&gt;
|32&lt;br /&gt;
|This displays the log size of system buffer&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|External system log server&lt;br /&gt;
|0.0.0.0&lt;br /&gt;
|This displays the ip add of the external system  log&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|External system log server port&lt;br /&gt;
|514&lt;br /&gt;
|This displays the port number of the external  system log&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Log output level&lt;br /&gt;
|debug&lt;br /&gt;
|In this drop down the user selects the level of  the log output.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Cron Log level&lt;br /&gt;
|debug&lt;br /&gt;
|In this drop down the user selects the level of  the corn log .&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user configures the required details then click on the save button to save all the details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Language and Style&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here the user can configure the basic aspects of your device related to language.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Maintenance Language and Style.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user configures the required details then click on the save button to save all the details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===3.2 Password===&lt;br /&gt;
In this module the user can set the password for the admin credentials.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Change you password.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Specifies the password for the guest account. If the user enter a plaintext password here, it will get replaced with a crypted password on save. The new password will be effective once the user logs out and log in again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user needs to write the password in the text box and click on the save button to save the password.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===3.3 Reboot===&lt;br /&gt;
In this module the user can reboot the device remotely.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Reboot.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To start the reboot process first the user needs to fill all the required fields.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Need to select the type of reboot for the device whether it needs to be Hardware or Software reboot.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Maintenance Reboot.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Type&lt;br /&gt;
|Maintenance Reboot&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown list the user needs to  select the type of reboot is required to configure.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Reboot Type&lt;br /&gt;
|Hardware&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown list the user needs to select  the hardware or software reboot is required.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Minutes&lt;br /&gt;
|59&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user needs to configure  the min to start the reboot activity&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Hours&lt;br /&gt;
|22&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user needs to configure  the hours to start the reboot activity&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Day of Month&lt;br /&gt;
|All&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user needs to configure  the day of the month to start the reboot activity&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Month&lt;br /&gt;
|All&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user needs to configure  the month to start the reboot activity&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|Day of the week&lt;br /&gt;
|All&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user needs to configure  the week to start the reboot activity&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user fills all the required given parameters click on the save.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To start the reboot process, click on the “Reboot Now” button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===3.4 Import and Export===&lt;br /&gt;
In this section, User can Import &amp;amp; Export Configuration files of the Device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Import and Export.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
click “Export Config” to export device configuration &amp;amp; settings to a text file,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
click “Import Config” to import device configuration &amp;amp; settings from a previously exported text file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Import window.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user need to select on the choose file to and click on the apply.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===3.5 Firmware Upgrade===&lt;br /&gt;
The user can upgrade with the latest software for the existing firmware. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Frimware Upgrade.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the &#039;&#039;&#039;flash image&#039;&#039;&#039; and chose the path where the sys-upgrade file is kept and then click on flash image, it will upgrade to the latest software once the reboot is done.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Flash Image.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the &#039;&#039;&#039;Retain Config and flash&#039;&#039;&#039; and chose the path where the sys-upgrade file is kept and then click on Retain Config and flash, it will upgrade to the latest software once the reboot is done.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Flash Image.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the &#039;&#039;&#039;Factory Reset&#039;&#039;&#039; for the complete retest of the device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===3.6 Monitor Application===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Monitor Application.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Router Application Remote Configuration.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Router Remote Configuration.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==4 Status==&lt;br /&gt;
In this module the user can view the status of the router device with respect to the network, Wan, modem etc.[[File:Status.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It has 4 submodules.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Interfaces&lt;br /&gt;
* Internet&lt;br /&gt;
* Modem&lt;br /&gt;
* Route&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===4.1 Interfaces===&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user can see the traffic status for all the network through which the device works.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Status Interfaces.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Looking on the network status the user can check if the cellular or the ethernet is up.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===4.2 Internet===&lt;br /&gt;
In this submodule the user can view the status of the internet connections.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Internet Status.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
  To see the latest status of the internet connection the user needs to click on the refresh button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===4.3 Modem===&lt;br /&gt;
In this sub module the user will get to know the status of the cellular interface which is installed inside the modem. The user can view all the details related to the sim in terms of Operator, Network technology, Mobile country code, Upload bandwidth, Download Bandwidth, Frequency band, RSRP, RSRQ, RSSI &amp;amp; SNR under this page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Modem Status.png|frameless|602x602px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== 4.4 Route ===&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user can check the status of the route for the device. The ARP status can be visible in under this page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Route Status.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==5 Features==&lt;br /&gt;
In this module the user can see all the features that the router device has.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This module includes the below features.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Mac Address Binding&lt;br /&gt;
* URL Filtering&lt;br /&gt;
* Web Server&lt;br /&gt;
* Wi-Fi MacID Filtering&lt;br /&gt;
* Routing&lt;br /&gt;
* Others&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Features.png|frameless|618x618px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===5.1 Mac Address Binding===&lt;br /&gt;
Under this submodule the user can configure/update/edit the IP Address for MAC&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mac Addressing Binding.png|frameless|622x622px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user should write MAC address and then click on the add button. Once the address is added then click on the update button to save the modification.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user needs to click on the Edit button to modify the preexisting configuration. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mac Address Edit.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user modifies the MAC address /IP Address then click on the save button to save the changes done.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user can click on the deleted button to delete an existing configured device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Post all the changes the user needs to click on the update to reflect all the changes in the application.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===5.2 URL Filtering===&lt;br /&gt;
In this submodule the user should provide the URL which needs to be blocked for the device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:URL Filtering.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To add the new URL for blocking, click on the Add New button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user clicks on the Add New button a new pop will appear in that page write the URL and click on the save. The user can select the status of that URL while defining the URL.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Url Update.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To edit / delete the existing URL the user needs to click on the edit /deleted button respectively.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Edit or Delete URL.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the save after the changes are done as per the need.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== 5.3 Web Server ===&lt;br /&gt;
In this submodule the user can configure webserver related parameters.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Web server.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To configure the HTTP, click on the enable HTTP. Once the user clicks on the check box the HTTP Port text box will appear where the user needs to configure the port id.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Webserver Configuration.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on save buttons to save the changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To configure the 2nd HTTP, click on the enable HTTP. Once the user clicks on the check box the HTTP Port text box will appear where the user needs to configure the port id.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Webserver Https Redirect.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on save buttons to save the changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the “Redirect https” and “RFC1918 Filter” check box to respectively and click on the save button to save the changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To configure the NTP sync, click on the enable NTP sync. Once the user clicks on the check box the respective text boxes will appear to configure the parameters. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:RFC1918 Filter.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user configures the parameters click on the save button to save the given values.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===5.4 Wi-Fi MacID Filtering===&lt;br /&gt;
In this module the user can filter the Macids. Mac address filtering allows users to block traffic coming from certain known machines or devices.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Wi-Fi MacID Filtering.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Before adding the MacIDs the user needs to select the mode from the dropdown menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To Add the MacID the user needs to click on Add New option select the mac id and network name Wi-Fi 2.4G AP OR Wi-Fi 2.4G AP Guest, select enable/disable option and save it and update.              &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Configuring MacID and Network Name.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the required MACID and Network Name is configured the user needs to click on the save button to add the details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user needs to click on the edit button to do modifications on the pre-existing configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Macid and name removing.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the required MACID / Network Name is modified the user needs to click on the save button to reflect the changed value in the application.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;WIFI 2.4G AP Guest&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To Add the MacID the user needs to click on Add New option select the mac id and network name Wi-Fi 2.4G AP Guest, select enable/disable option and save it and update.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
     [[File:WIFI 2.4G AP Guest.png|frameless|623x623px]]  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the required MACID and Network Name is configured the user needs to click on the save button to add the details. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user needs to click on the edit button to do modifications on the pre-existing configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Configuring MacID and Network Name.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the required MACID / Network Name is modified the user needs to click on the save button to reflect the changed value in the application.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===5.5 Routing===&lt;br /&gt;
In this submodule the user can configure the parameters related to routing of the device. like Target address, Networks address etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Routing IPV4 Routes.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To add a new device the user needs to fill all the required information and click on the add button.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Interface&lt;br /&gt;
|eth0.1&lt;br /&gt;
|In this drop down list the user should  configure the interface name.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Target&lt;br /&gt;
|192.168.10.1&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user needs to insert the  target IP address&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|IPV4 Netmask&lt;br /&gt;
|255.255.255.0&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user should give the  address for the IPV4Netmask&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Metric&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user should insert the  number of the metric.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|IPV4 Gateway&lt;br /&gt;
|192.168.100.1&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user should configured the  address for the IPV4 Gateway.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Route Type&lt;br /&gt;
|Unicast&lt;br /&gt;
|In this drop down box the user should select  the type of route needed for the device.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
To edit the existing device the user needs to click on the edit option.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Routing Configuration.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the changes are done click on the save button to save all the changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the deleted button to delete the existing device detail.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Advanced Static IPV4 Routes:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Advanced Static IPV4 Routes.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To add a new device the user needs to fill all the required information and click on the add button.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Interface&lt;br /&gt;
|eth0.1&lt;br /&gt;
|In this drop down list the user should  configure the interface name.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|To&lt;br /&gt;
|192.168.10.1&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user needs to insert the  target IP address&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|IPV4 Netmask&lt;br /&gt;
|255.255.255.0&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user should give the  address for the IPV4Netmask&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Table&lt;br /&gt;
|local&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|From&lt;br /&gt;
|192.168.100.1&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user should configured the  from address for the routes&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Priority&lt;br /&gt;
|230&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
To edit the existing device the user needs to click on the edit option.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Routing Editing.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the changes are done click on the save button to save all the changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the deleted button to delete the existing device detail.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once all the configurations are done click on the update button to reflect the changes made.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===5.6 Others===&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user will get to do all the other miscellaneous configuration with respect to the device based on the required parameters.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Miscellaneous configuration.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Utility&lt;br /&gt;
|Action&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Set Date&lt;br /&gt;
|SET&lt;br /&gt;
|Need to set the date and time and after  click command get the Date and time&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Gate Date&lt;br /&gt;
|GET&lt;br /&gt;
|Needs to get the system date and time&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|IPsec status all&lt;br /&gt;
|GET&lt;br /&gt;
|Needs to get the IPsec details&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Wi-Fi Scan&lt;br /&gt;
|GET&lt;br /&gt;
|Needs to get the Wi-Fi status&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|ipref3 client&lt;br /&gt;
|RUN&lt;br /&gt;
|Needs to click on the RUN to execute  the command&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|ipref3 server&lt;br /&gt;
|RUN&lt;br /&gt;
|Needs to click on the RUN to execute  the command&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|Ping&lt;br /&gt;
|PING&lt;br /&gt;
|Needs to click on the ping status&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|9&lt;br /&gt;
|Traceroute&lt;br /&gt;
|RUN&lt;br /&gt;
|Needs to click on the ping Traceroute status&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|10&lt;br /&gt;
|NTP Sync&lt;br /&gt;
|SYNC&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to Sync the NTP&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|11&lt;br /&gt;
|Download Files&lt;br /&gt;
|DOWNLOAD&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to Download the files /Database&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|12&lt;br /&gt;
|Restart Power&lt;br /&gt;
|RESTART&lt;br /&gt;
|Click Restart the power&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|13&lt;br /&gt;
|Restart Modem&lt;br /&gt;
|RESTART&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to Restart the modem&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|14&lt;br /&gt;
|Run at command&lt;br /&gt;
|RUN&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to Run the command&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|15&lt;br /&gt;
|Show board configuration&lt;br /&gt;
|SHOW&lt;br /&gt;
|To Show the board configuration&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|16&lt;br /&gt;
|Show VPN Certificate Name&lt;br /&gt;
|SHOW&lt;br /&gt;
|To Show VPN Certificate Name&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|17&lt;br /&gt;
|Switch SIM to Secondary&lt;br /&gt;
|RUN&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to switch the SIM to secondary  mode&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|18&lt;br /&gt;
|Send Test SMS&lt;br /&gt;
|SEND&lt;br /&gt;
|To Send the SMS Confirmation&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|19&lt;br /&gt;
|Readlatest SMS&lt;br /&gt;
|READ&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to Read the latest SMS&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|20&lt;br /&gt;
|Data Usage&lt;br /&gt;
|SHOW&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to show the data usage.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|21&lt;br /&gt;
|Monthly Data Usage&lt;br /&gt;
|SHOW&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to show the monthly data usage&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|22&lt;br /&gt;
|Modem debug Info&lt;br /&gt;
|READ&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to read the information about the  modem debug&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|23&lt;br /&gt;
|Scan Network operators (take&amp;gt;3mins)&lt;br /&gt;
|SHOW&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to show the Network operator&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|24&lt;br /&gt;
|Network operators (first perform scan  network operator&lt;br /&gt;
|SHOW&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to show the Network operator&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|25&lt;br /&gt;
|ReadLogFiles&lt;br /&gt;
|READ&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to read the log files&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|26&lt;br /&gt;
|Enable ssh&lt;br /&gt;
|RUN&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to Run the command&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|27&lt;br /&gt;
|Disable ssh&lt;br /&gt;
|RUN&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to Run the command&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|28&lt;br /&gt;
|Clear SIM1 Data&lt;br /&gt;
|CLEAR&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to clear the SIM1 data&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|29&lt;br /&gt;
|Clear SIM2 Data&lt;br /&gt;
|CLEAR&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to clear the SIM data&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==6 Logout==&lt;br /&gt;
The user should click on log out option to logged out from the router application.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Logout.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user needs to click on the ok to come out of the router application.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tanisha</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.silbonetworks.com/index.php?title=File:Loopback_Rule.png&amp;diff=1155</id>
		<title>File:Loopback Rule.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.silbonetworks.com/index.php?title=File:Loopback_Rule.png&amp;diff=1155"/>
		<updated>2024-09-02T11:08:09Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tanisha: Tanisha uploaded a new version of File:Loopback Rule.png&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Loopback Rule&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tanisha</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.silbonetworks.com/index.php?title=File:Zone_Forwarding_editing_Options_RC44.png&amp;diff=1151</id>
		<title>File:Zone Forwarding editing Options RC44.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.silbonetworks.com/index.php?title=File:Zone_Forwarding_editing_Options_RC44.png&amp;diff=1151"/>
		<updated>2024-09-02T10:49:48Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tanisha: Tanisha uploaded a new version of File:Zone Forwarding editing Options RC44.png&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Zone Forwarding editing Options RC44&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tanisha</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.silbonetworks.com/index.php?title=File:Zone_Forwarding_RC44.png&amp;diff=1149</id>
		<title>File:Zone Forwarding RC44.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.silbonetworks.com/index.php?title=File:Zone_Forwarding_RC44.png&amp;diff=1149"/>
		<updated>2024-09-02T10:48:53Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tanisha: Tanisha uploaded a new version of File:Zone Forwarding RC44.png&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Zone Forwarding RC44&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tanisha</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.silbonetworks.com/index.php?title=RC44_User_Manual&amp;diff=1148</id>
		<title>RC44 User Manual</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.silbonetworks.com/index.php?title=RC44_User_Manual&amp;diff=1148"/>
		<updated>2024-09-02T10:47:10Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tanisha: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;This page contains the user manual for RC44.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Connecting with the device to the System (Laptop/Desktop).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To log in to SILBO_RC44 by connecting the router to your laptop or desktop via LAN or using Wi-Fi, please follow the steps below. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Connecting via LAN:&#039;&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Connect your laptop&#039;s LAN port to one of the router&#039;s LAN interfaces. Ensure that you select any LAN interface (there are two available) while making sure the WAN interface is not used. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
                                                                                                                                                          &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;How to connect with the SILBO_RC44&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;application&#039;&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the LAN connection is established between the device and the laptop or the desktop&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please open the command prompt and ping go get the ip config of that device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Type the command &#039;&#039;&#039;Ipconfig&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:How_to_connect_with_the_SILBO_RB44_application.png|alt=How to connect with the SILBO RB44 application|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It will provide the Ip address/url of that device through which the application can be accessed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Connecting_via_LAN_RB44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Log In==&lt;br /&gt;
Open the web browser and type the IP address in the URL.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It will show the log in page of the application.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Log In.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Give the valid credentials for the username and password to login to the application page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user credentials are provided it will direct to the landing page of the application.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Login Dashboard RC44.png|frameless|636x636px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The “Status” landing page shows all the detailed specification of the device like system, memory storage and connection tracking etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The application is divided in to 6 Modules.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Info&lt;br /&gt;
* Settings&lt;br /&gt;
* Maintenance&lt;br /&gt;
* Status&lt;br /&gt;
* Features&lt;br /&gt;
* Logout&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==1.Info==&lt;br /&gt;
The “Info” module provides the information about the devices to the user.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It provides all the specification related to the hardware, firmware, Networks and the Connection uptimes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It has 3 submodules.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Overview&lt;br /&gt;
* System Log&lt;br /&gt;
* Kernel Log&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Info dashboard RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===1.1 Overview===&lt;br /&gt;
In overview module it displays all the specification categorically of a device like System, Memory, storage, Connection tracking, DHCP Lease.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Login Dashboard RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;System&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this section it displays the hardware configured specification of the device.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Info system RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The specifications details are as follows,&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&lt;br /&gt;
!SN&lt;br /&gt;
!Field name &lt;br /&gt;
!Sample value&lt;br /&gt;
!Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Hostname&lt;br /&gt;
|22B09230239&lt;br /&gt;
|This field  displays the router serial number of the device&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Model&lt;br /&gt;
|Silbo_RC44- EC200A&lt;br /&gt;
|This field  displays the model number of the device&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Firmware Version and IPK Version&lt;br /&gt;
|1.16_1.13_RC3&lt;br /&gt;
|This field  displays the firmware version and IPK version&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Kernel Version&lt;br /&gt;
|4.14.180&lt;br /&gt;
|This field  displays the kernel version of the device&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Local Time&lt;br /&gt;
|Monday, July 1, 2024, at 05:43:58 PM&lt;br /&gt;
|This field  displays the local time&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Uptime&lt;br /&gt;
|0h 7m 29s&lt;br /&gt;
|This field  displays the uptime of the device&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|Load Average&lt;br /&gt;
|1.73 1.87 1.04&lt;br /&gt;
|This field  displays the average load&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Memory&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this section it displays the memory configured specification of the device.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Memory Dashboard RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The specifications details are as follows.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Total Available&lt;br /&gt;
|68676 kB / 124208 kB (55%)&lt;br /&gt;
|This field  displays the total availability of memory space in the device&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Free&lt;br /&gt;
|59344 kB / 124208 kB (47%)&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the  Free memory space in the device&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Cached&lt;br /&gt;
|312 kB / 124208 kB (0%)&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the  Cached memory space in the device&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Buffered&lt;br /&gt;
|9332 kB / 124208 kB (7%)&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the  Buffered memory space in the device&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Storage&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this section it displays the status of storage as root and temporary usage specification of the device.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Storage Dashboard RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The specifications details are as follows.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Root Usage&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
796 kB / 15488 kB (5%)&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays  the total root usage of the device&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Temporary  Usage&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
312 kB / 62104 kB (0%)&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the total temporary  usage of the device&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Connection Tracking&#039;&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this section it displays the status of connection tracking for the device.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Connection Tracking RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The specifications details are as follows.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Active Connection&lt;br /&gt;
|48 / 16384 (0%)&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the active connection of the device.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;DHCP Leases&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this section, it displays the DHCP lease of the temporary assignment of an IP address to a device on the network.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:DCHP Leases RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The specifications details are as follows.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Host Name&lt;br /&gt;
|KermaniK-LT&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays  the configured Host Name/User Name for that device.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|IPv4-Address&lt;br /&gt;
|192.168.10.147&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the IP  address of the device.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|MAC-Address&lt;br /&gt;
|34:73:5a:bb: ab:7a&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the MAC-Address  of the device.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Lease time remaining&lt;br /&gt;
|11h 53m 49s&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the lease  time remaining for the device.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===1.2 System Log===&lt;br /&gt;
This page provides on screen System logging information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user gets to view the system logs &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:System Log.png|frameless|617x617px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===1.3 Kernel Log===&lt;br /&gt;
This page provides on-screen Kernel logging information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this page, the user gets to view the Kernel logs&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Kernel Log.png|frameless|621x621px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==2. Setting==&lt;br /&gt;
In this “Setting” module the user can Configure/update all the required parameters related to Network, SIM Switch, Internet, VPN, Firewall, Loopback Rule, Remote monitoring, Tunnel as per requirement.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
IT consist of 8 submodules.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Network&lt;br /&gt;
* Sim Switch&lt;br /&gt;
* Internet&lt;br /&gt;
* VPN&lt;br /&gt;
* Firewall&lt;br /&gt;
* Loopback Rule&lt;br /&gt;
* Remote Monitoring&lt;br /&gt;
* Tunnel&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Settings.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===2.1 Network===&lt;br /&gt;
In this section the user does all the setting related configuration with reference to network like Ethernet Setting, Cellular Setting, Band lock and Operator Lock, Wi-Fi, Guest Wi-Fi, Wireless Schedule, SMS Setting, Loopback IP.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Network Dashboard RC44.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Ethernet Setting&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this page it will display all the configured port that is attached with the device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For this device 3 ports are configured. Ethernet mode can be configured as WAN and as LAN as well. Ethernet LAN Connection settings can be configured as DHCP server or Static.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Ethernet Settings RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;For port 3 setting&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Kindly select the option &#039;&#039;&#039;LAN4&#039;&#039;&#039; for &#039;&#039;&#039;Port 3 mode LAN/WAN&#039;&#039;&#039;. Based on the option selected the filed will also changes the user needs to configure all the required field and click on the save to save the required fields.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Ethernet Settings RC44 part 2.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Port 3 mode LAN/WAN&lt;br /&gt;
|LAN&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the port mode selection&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Port 3 Ethernet Protocol [LAN Eth0.1]&lt;br /&gt;
|DHCP Server&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the Ethernet mode selection&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Port 3 DHCP Server IP&lt;br /&gt;
|192.168.10.1&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays DHCP server IP configured.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Port 3 DHCP Netmask&lt;br /&gt;
|255.255.255.0&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays DHCP server Netmask address configured&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Port 3 DHCP Start Address&lt;br /&gt;
|100&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays DHCP server  start address configured&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Port 3 DHCP Limit&lt;br /&gt;
|50&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays DHCP server  limit&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Kindly select the option &#039;&#039;&#039;EWAN&#039;&#039;&#039; for &#039;&#039;&#039;Port 3 mode LAN/WAN&#039;&#039;&#039;. Based on the option selected the filed will also changes the user needs to configure all the required field and click on the save to save the required fields.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:EWAN Port 3 Configuration RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Port 3 mode LAN/WAN&lt;br /&gt;
|EWAN&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the port mode selection&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Ethernet Protocol Port 3 WAN&lt;br /&gt;
|DHCP  client&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the client&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Gateway&lt;br /&gt;
|192.168.1.1&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays gateway address  configured&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the save once all the configuration is done and click on the update button to update all the information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;SW_LAN settings&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this part the user can configure the setting for SW_LAN &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SW LAN settings RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|SW_LAN Ethernet Protocol&lt;br /&gt;
|DHCP  Server&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the  Ethernet mode selection&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|SW_LAN DHCP Server IP&lt;br /&gt;
|192.168.10.1&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays DHCP server IP  configured.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|SW_LAN  DHCP Netmask&lt;br /&gt;
|255.255.255.0&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays DHCP server  Netmask address configured&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|SW_LAN  DHCP Start Address&lt;br /&gt;
|100&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays DHCP server  start address configured&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|SW_LAN  DHCP Limit&lt;br /&gt;
|50&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays DHCP server  limit&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|DNS  Server&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|This filed display number of DSN  server availability&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|DNS  Server Address&lt;br /&gt;
|8.8.8.8&lt;br /&gt;
|This  filed display the DSN server address.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After configuring all the required information, the user should click on the save and then click on the update to update the all the required information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Static option for SW_LAN Ethernet Protocol&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the option of static from the drop-down menu for SW_LAN Ethernet Protocol.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SW LAN settings Static Ethernet Protocol.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|SW_LAN Ethernet Protocol&lt;br /&gt;
|Static&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the  Ethernet mode selection&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|SW_LAN static IP&lt;br /&gt;
|192.168.5.1&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays static server IP  configured.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|SW_LAN  Netmask&lt;br /&gt;
|255.255.255.0&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays static server  Netmask address configured&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|DNS  Server&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|This filed display number of DSN  server availability&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|DSN  Server Address&lt;br /&gt;
|8.8.8.8&lt;br /&gt;
|This  filed display the DSN server address.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
After configuring all the required information, the user should click on the save and then click on the update to update the all the required information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Cellular Setting&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this page, the user needs to configure the various details with respect to the SIM.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
select single cellular single sim where the user must configure the APN details of the sim used for the router device. The Configurations can be done based on the SIM usage, with respect to IPV4 or IPV.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Cellular Settings RC44.png|frameless|619x619px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Cellular  Operation Mode&lt;br /&gt;
|Single Cellular with Dual Sim&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays  the cellular operation mode.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Cellular  Modem 1&lt;br /&gt;
|QuectelEC200A&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the modem name.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Network  Mode&lt;br /&gt;
|Automatic&lt;br /&gt;
|This  field displays the  Network mode selection&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM 1  Access Point Name&lt;br /&gt;
|airtelgprs.com&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the  name of the Sim 1 access point configured.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM 1  PDP Type&lt;br /&gt;
|IPV4&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays  the type of SIM 1&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM 1  Username&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|This field is optional, and the user can configure the name of  the SIM 1&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM 1  Password&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|This  field is optional, and the user can configure the password for the SIM 1&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM 1  Authentication Protocol&lt;br /&gt;
|None&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the type of  protocol is being used for SIM 1&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|9&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM 2  Access Point Name&lt;br /&gt;
|airtelgprs.com&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the name of the  Sim 2 access point configured.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|10&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM 2  PDP Type&lt;br /&gt;
|IPV4&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the type of SIM  2&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|11&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM 2  Username&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|This  field is optional, and the user can configure the name of the SIM 2&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|12&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM 2  Password&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|This  field is optional, and the user can configure the password for the SIM 2&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|13&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM 2  Authentication Protocol&lt;br /&gt;
|None&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the type of  protocol is being used for SIM 2&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|14&lt;br /&gt;
|Primary  SIM Switchback Time (In Minutes)&lt;br /&gt;
|10&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the time given  for sim to swich in between.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
After configuring all the required information, the user should click on the save and then click on the update to update the all the required information. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Band lock and Operator Lock&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this page, the user needs to configure the lock band and operator based on the service provider&#039;&#039;&#039;.&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Bands available in the drop-down list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Band lock and Operator Lock.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;2G/3G option&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2G/3G: - 3G allows additional features such as mobile internet access, video calls and mobile TV. While the main function of 2G technology is the transmission of information through voice calls.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:2G-3G option.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user should select the band check box  available for 2g/3g  from the given list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Bands available for selection under LTE for the bands available that zone.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Operator Selection Mode&#039;&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user needs to click on the check box of the “operator select enable” to select the operator.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the check box is clicked there will be a dropdown list of the operator modes from which the user needs to select the mode. The user needs to select the operator mode from the given dropdown list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Operator Selection Mode.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the user selects the mode “Manual” or “Manual-Automatic” then one more text box will appear where the user must provide the operator code.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Band lock and Operator Lock 1.png|frameless|542x542px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After configuring all the required information, the user should click on the save and then click on the update to update the all the required information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Wi-Fi Setting&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wi-Fi is a family of wireless network protocols based on the IEEE 802.11 family of standards, which are commonly used for local area network of devices and internet access, allowing nearby digital devices to exchanges data by radio waves. These are the most widely used computer network, used globally in home and small office networks to link devices and to provided internet access with wireless router and wireless access point in public places. In this router has the general setting and change country code, channel, radio mode, radio passphrase as per the requirement after clicking on enable Radio button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Wi-Fi Setting.png|frameless|585x585px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user needs to select the respective radio mode based on its need. Basically, it has 3 radio mode.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Wi-Fi Setting access Point.png|frameless|590x590px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Access Point mode:&#039;&#039;&#039; In Access Point mode, router connects to a wireless router through an Ethernet cable to extend the coverage of wireless signal to other network client.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Access Point Mode RC44.png|frameless|573x573px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Client point:&#039;&#039;&#039;  In client mode, the access point connects your wired devices to a wireless network. This mode is suitable when you have a wired device with an Ethernet port and no wireless capability, for example, a smart TV, Media Player, or Game console and you want to connect it to the internet wirelessly, select the Client Mode and give the Radio SSID &amp;amp; client passphrase&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Client Point RC44.png|frameless|587x587px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Access point and client point&#039;&#039;&#039;: select this option for both type connection, give both SSID and passphrase.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Access point and Client Point RC44.png|frameless|571x571px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After configuring all the required information, the user should click on the save and then click on the update to update the all the required information.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Radio  0 Protocol&lt;br /&gt;
|IEEE 802.11 b/g/n&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the  user should select which protocol is being used&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Country  Code&lt;br /&gt;
|INDIA&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the  user should select which county it belongs to.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Channel&lt;br /&gt;
|Auto&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user should  select the proper channel to be used.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|TX  Power&lt;br /&gt;
|100&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user should  specify the power.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Channel  Width&lt;br /&gt;
|20 MHz&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user should  select the channel width&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Radio  Mode&lt;br /&gt;
|Access  point&lt;br /&gt;
|In this drop down the user should  select the mode.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|Radio  SSID&lt;br /&gt;
|APClient_22B09230239&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user should  specify the SSID number&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|Radio  Authentication&lt;br /&gt;
|WPA2  Personal (PSK)&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user should  select the type of authentication.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|9&lt;br /&gt;
|Radio  Encryption&lt;br /&gt;
|AES&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user should  select the type of encryption required.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|10&lt;br /&gt;
|Radio  Passphrase&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user should  specify the password.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|11&lt;br /&gt;
|Radio  DHCP server IP&lt;br /&gt;
|192.168.100.1&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user should  specify the IP address of DHCP server.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|12&lt;br /&gt;
|Radio  DHCP start address&lt;br /&gt;
|100&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user should  specify the start address of the DHCP.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|13&lt;br /&gt;
|Radio  DHCP limit&lt;br /&gt;
|50&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user should  specify the limit for the DHCP.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Wireless Schedule&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wi-Fi can be automatically withdrawn based on the configuration done in this section.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user can schedule the Wi-Fi’s accessibility time during a particular period.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Wireless Schedule.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After configuring all the required information, the user should click on the save and then click on the update to update the all the required information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user can select more than one “day of the week” for scheduling the wifi working hours.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Wifi Schedule.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Loop back IP settings&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The loopback IP address, often referred to as “localhost”. it’s used to establish network connections within the same device for testing and troubleshooting purpose.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Loop back IP settings.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After configuring all the required information, the user should click on the save and then click on the update to update the all the required information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The loopback IP address, commonly represented as 127.0.0.1, is a special address used for testing network connectivity on a local machine. It allows a device to send network messages to itself without involving external networks, making it useful for troubleshooting and diagnostics.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
However, this IP can be changed as per requirement and to do that, Navigating to Setting&amp;gt;&amp;gt;Network configuration&amp;gt;&amp;gt; Loopback IP settings can be changed/updated.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Above screenshot shows the configuration window from GUI/WebUI&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;SMS Settings&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
User needs to enable SMS option in SMS settings page. This option is to validate the mobile numbers using which controlling commands could be sent to the router device. 1 to 5 mobile numbers can be authenticated by choosing from “Select Valid SMS user numbers” and adding the mobile numbers below respectively. API key is the pass key used in the commands while sending SMS. Displayed in the below screen is the default API key which can be edited and changed as per choice.   After addition of the mobile numbers user needs to click on save button for changes to take place.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SMS Settings.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select valid user number max. 5 and add authorized phone number in the main menu where want to find the alert and click on SMS Response Enable, save and update button, now send SMS commands from the configured mobile number. Once the commands are received from the user phone number the board send acknowledgement as per the commands after that it will send the router’s status once it has rebooted and is operational again. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mentioned below are a few commands which can be sent from the configured mobile number to the router device. Below two commands are One for rebooting the router device and another to get the uptime.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1) {&amp;quot;device&amp;quot;:[&amp;quot;passkey&amp;quot;,&amp;quot;API key&amp;quot;],&amp;quot;command&amp;quot;:&amp;quot;reboot&amp;quot;,&amp;quot;arguments&amp;quot;:&amp;quot;hardware&amp;quot;}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2) {&amp;quot;device&amp;quot;:[&amp;quot;passkey &amp;quot;,&amp;quot;API key&amp;quot;],&amp;quot;command&amp;quot;:&amp;quot;uptime&amp;quot;}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After configuring all the required information, the user should click on the save and then click on the update to update the all the required information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===2.2 SIM===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user needs to configure the Sim for the given device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SIM Switch.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user needs to select from the drop-down menu on which basis the sim needs to be switched.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Sim Switch Configuration.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user selects on “&#039;&#039;&#039;signal strength&#039;&#039;&#039;” then the parameters related to signal strength will pop up and the user needs to configure the parameters based on the requirement &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Signal Strength.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Threshold RSRP&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This Needs to be set appropriately. Incorrect setting may cause unnecessary SIM switching. ( In General a BAD RSRP value range is -140 to -115 and FAIR RSRP value range is -115 to -105).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Threshold SINR&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This Needs to be set appropriately. Incorrect setting may cause unnecessary SIM switching. ( In General a BAD SNR value range is -20 to 0 and FAIR SNR value range is 0 to 13)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user selects on “&#039;&#039;&#039;Data Limit&#039;&#039;&#039;” then the parameters related to Data Limit will pop up and the user needs to configure the parameters based on the requirement.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Data limit.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM Switch Based on&lt;br /&gt;
|Data Limit&lt;br /&gt;
|The user needs to select from the  drop-down menu on what basis the sim needs to be switched.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM 1 Data Usage Limit (In MB)&lt;br /&gt;
|1000&lt;br /&gt;
|The user needs to set the limit for the data  usage for SIM 1.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM 2 Data Usage Limit (In MB)&lt;br /&gt;
|1000&lt;br /&gt;
|The user needs to set the limit for the data  usage for SIM 2.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Periodicity&lt;br /&gt;
|Daily&lt;br /&gt;
|The user needs to set the pattern/frequency to  switch the sims.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Day Of Month&lt;br /&gt;
|16&lt;br /&gt;
|The user needs to set the day for switching the  sim.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
After configuring all the required information, the user should click on the save.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===2.3 Internet===&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user needs to configure the internet connection to set the priority from the various options. The user should decide what kind of connection it needs to provide to the device like LAN, WAN etc. Once the connections are configured then click on save option and then on update.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Internet.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the user needs to edit on the existing configuration, then the user should click on the “EDIT” button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Network Edit Options.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Name&lt;br /&gt;
|EWAN2&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the name of the WAN  connection&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Priority&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown box the user need to select  the priority.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Select Track IP Numbers&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user needs to select the  track number for the Ips.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|TrackIP1&lt;br /&gt;
|8.8.8.8&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text field the user needs to set the IP  address for the track 1&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|TrackIP2&lt;br /&gt;
|8.8.4.4&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text field the user needs to set the IP  address for the track 1&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Reliability&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Not sure what needs to be written&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|Count&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Not sure what needs to be written&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|Up&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Not sure what needs to be written&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|9&lt;br /&gt;
|Down&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Not sure what needs to be written&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user is done with modification click on the save button to save all the changes and then click on the update button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===2.4 VPN===&lt;br /&gt;
VPN stands for &#039;&#039;&#039;Virtual Private Network&#039;&#039;&#039;, it establishes a connection between the system and a remote server, which is owned by a VPN provider.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Creating a point-to-point tunnel that encrypts the personal data, masks the IP address, and allows to block the required website to blocks via firewalls on the internet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:VPN Settings RC44.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are 5 types of setting available under VPN configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* General Settings&lt;br /&gt;
* IPSEC&lt;br /&gt;
* Open VPN&lt;br /&gt;
* Wireguard&lt;br /&gt;
* Zerotier&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;General Settings&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user must choose which type of VPN connection is required for the device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user must select from IPSEC or Open VPN based on its requirement. If required, the user can select for both the options. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:VPN General Settings RC44.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user needs to click on the save after selecting the option based on its requirement.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;IPSEC&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
IPSEC VPN is used to create a VPN connection between local and remote networks. To use IPSEC VPN, the user should check that both local and remote routers support IPSEC VPN feature.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user can add/edit/delete the IPSEC VPN connection for the device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:VPN IPSEC changes RC44.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user needs to click on the update button once the required configuration is completed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In IPSEC the user needs to click on edit button to edit the configuration of an existing VPN connection.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:VPN Edit Options.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the save button after the required configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The tunnel will show established, showing the connection has been made.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:IPSEC .png|thumb|631x631px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|IPSEC&lt;br /&gt;
|Site to Site VPN&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user should select  the IPSEC connection type.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|IPSEC Role&lt;br /&gt;
|Client/Server&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown box the user needs to select  the IPSEC role.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Connection Type&lt;br /&gt;
|Tunnel&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user needs to select the connection  type. The user should select on the connection enable check box.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Connection mode&lt;br /&gt;
|start&lt;br /&gt;
|In this drop down list the user should select  the mode for the connection. it will have route/add/start/trap mode&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Remote Server IP&lt;br /&gt;
|1.1.1.1&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text field the user needs to set the IP  address for the remote server.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Local ID&lt;br /&gt;
|g300&lt;br /&gt;
|The user needs to set the local id.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|No. of local subnets&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user needs to select how  many subnets it will be connected.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|Local Subnet 1&lt;br /&gt;
|192.168.11.1/24&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user needs to put the  address of the local subnet.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|9&lt;br /&gt;
|Remote id&lt;br /&gt;
|sophos&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user needs to put the id  of the remote connection.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|10&lt;br /&gt;
|No of remote subnet&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user needs to select how  many subnets it will be connected remotely.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|11&lt;br /&gt;
|Remote subnet&lt;br /&gt;
|192.168.10.0/24&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user needs to put the  address of the remote subnet.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|12&lt;br /&gt;
|Key exchange&lt;br /&gt;
|Ikev1&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user should select the  which key exchange version to be selected.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|13&lt;br /&gt;
|Aggressive&lt;br /&gt;
|Yes/No&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user should select either  yes or no .&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|14&lt;br /&gt;
|IKE lifetime&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|Fill according to user’s requirements.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|15&lt;br /&gt;
|Lifetime in seconds&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Fill according to user’s requirements.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|16&lt;br /&gt;
|Enable DPD Detection&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;1&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
0&lt;br /&gt;
|Indicates  whether Dead Peer Detection is enabled to detect a lost connection. Enable  this option as per server-side settings.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|17&lt;br /&gt;
|Time Interval (In Seconds)&lt;br /&gt;
|60&lt;br /&gt;
|This option  is available only if DPD Detection is enabled. The time interval is the  interval for DPD checks.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|18&lt;br /&gt;
|Action&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Restart&#039;&#039;&#039;/clear/hold/&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
trap/start&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Restart&#039;&#039;&#039;: Action to take when  DPD detects a lost connection (restart the connection). Select as per  server-side setting.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|19&lt;br /&gt;
|Authentication Method&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;PSK&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;PSK&#039;&#039;&#039;: Pre-shared key is used  for authentication. Select this option for authentication as per sever side  setting.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|20&lt;br /&gt;
|Multiple Secrets&lt;br /&gt;
|1/&#039;&#039;&#039;0&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|Indicates  whether multiple PSK secrets are used. Enable only if required.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|21&lt;br /&gt;
|PSK Value&lt;br /&gt;
|******&lt;br /&gt;
|Pre-shared  key value (masked for security).&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;*Below are Phase I and Phase II settings details*&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&lt;br /&gt;
! colspan=&amp;quot;4&amp;quot; |                                                        &#039;&#039;&#039;Proposal settings Phase I&#039;&#039;&#039;                                                                                                                     &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|22            &lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Encryption Algorithm&#039;&#039;&#039;                                                 &lt;br /&gt;
|AES 128&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AES 192&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;AES 256&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3DES                                                                                                                                     &lt;br /&gt;
|                                                                                                                                     &#039;&#039;&#039;AES 256&#039;&#039;&#039;: Encryption algorithm  for Phase I. Select as per server-side configuration. Both server and client  should have same configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|23&lt;br /&gt;
|Authentication Phase I&lt;br /&gt;
|SHA1&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MD5&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SHA 256&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SHA 384&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;SHA 512&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;SHA 512&#039;&#039;&#039;: Authentication  algorithm for Phase I.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select as per  server-side configuration. Both server and client should have same configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|24&lt;br /&gt;
|DH Group&lt;br /&gt;
|MODP768(group1)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MODP1024(group2)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MODP1536(group5)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;MODP2048(group14)&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MODP3072(group15)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MODP4096(group16)&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;MODP2048 (group14)&#039;&#039;&#039;:  Diffie-Hellman group for key exchange.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select as per  server-side configuration. Both server and client should have same  configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| colspan=&amp;quot;4&amp;quot; |                                                                                                                                                                 &#039;&#039;&#039;Proposal settings Phase II&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|25&lt;br /&gt;
|Hash Algorithm&lt;br /&gt;
|AES 128&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AES 192&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;AES 256&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3DES&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;AES 256&#039;&#039;&#039;: Encryption algorithm  for Phase II. Select as per server-side configuration. Both server and client  should have same configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|26&lt;br /&gt;
|Authentication Phase II&lt;br /&gt;
|SHA1&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MD5&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SHA 256&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SHA 384&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;SHA 512&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;SHA 512&#039;&#039;&#039;: Authentication  algorithm for Phase II.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select as per  server-side configuration. Both server and client should have same  configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|27&lt;br /&gt;
|PFS Group&lt;br /&gt;
|MODP768(group1)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MODP1024(group2)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MODP1536(group5)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;MODP2048(group14)&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MODP3072(group15)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MODP4096(group16)&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;MODP2048 (group14)&#039;&#039;&#039;: Perfect  Forward Secrecy group.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select as per  server-side configuration. Both server and client should have same  configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Open VPN&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the OpenVPN connection, the home network can act as a server, and the remote device can access the server through the router which acts as an OpenVPN Server gateway. To use the VPN feature, the user should enable OpenVPN Server on the router, and install and run VPN client software on the remote device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Open VPN Settings RC44.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user needs to “upload” the respective certificate from a valid path and then click on the “Update.”&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the OpenVPN connection starts the user will get an option to enable/disable the VPN connection as and when required.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By clicking on the enable/disable button, the user can start/stop the VPN connection.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Open VPN Settings RC44 Dashboard.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
VPN has been established.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;WireGuard:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;WireGuard&#039;&#039;&#039; is simple, fast, lean, and modern VPN that utilizes secure and trusted cryptography.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on “Edit” to start configurations as needed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Wire Guard RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;EDIT:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Wire Guard RC44 Setttings.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the save button after the required configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample Value     &lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Wireguard Role&lt;br /&gt;
|Client/Server&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown box the user needs to select  the wireguard role.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Listen Port&lt;br /&gt;
|51820&lt;br /&gt;
|The UDP port on which the WireGuard client  listens for incoming connections.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|IP Addresses&lt;br /&gt;
|10.0.0.1/24&lt;br /&gt;
|The IP  address and subnet mask assigned to the WireGuard client&#039;s interface. This  address is used within the VPN.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Allowed PeerIPs&lt;br /&gt;
|10.1.1.1&lt;br /&gt;
|The IP  address of the allowed peer(s) that can connect to this WireGuard client.  This might need adjustment based on the actual peer IPs used in the network.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Endpoint HostIP&lt;br /&gt;
|10.1.1.1&lt;br /&gt;
|The IP  address of the WireGuard server (the endpoint to which the client connects).&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Endpoint HostPort&lt;br /&gt;
|51820&lt;br /&gt;
|The port on  the WireGuard server to which the client connects.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|PeerPublicKey&lt;br /&gt;
|*****&lt;br /&gt;
|The public  key of the peer (the server) the client is connecting to. This key is part of  the public-private key pair used in WireGuard for encryption and  authentication.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|Enable Preshared key&lt;br /&gt;
|Yes/No&lt;br /&gt;
|This option  indicates that a pre-shared key (PSK) is used in addition to the  public-private key pair for an extra layer of security.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|9&lt;br /&gt;
|Preshared key&lt;br /&gt;
|*****&lt;br /&gt;
|The actual  pre-shared key value shared between the client and the server. This option  appears only if you have enabled preshared key.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Zerotier:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ZeroTier is a tool that lets you create your own private network over the internet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Go to ZeroTier Central and sign up for a free account. In ZeroTier Central, click on &amp;quot;Create a Network&amp;quot;. This will generate a unique 16-digit network ID for your new network.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Go to settings =&amp;gt; VPN, in general settings, enable ZeroTier and save.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Zerotier Settings RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Copy and paste the unique 16-digit network ID in the edit section.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Zero Seetings Dashboard RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Zerotier Dashboard.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the save button after the required configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field Name    &lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  Value           &lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|NetworkID&lt;br /&gt;
|Ad2769hfkw2345f4&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown box the user needs to paste  the unique 16-digit network id.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Listen Port&lt;br /&gt;
|9993&lt;br /&gt;
|Default&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== 2.5 Firewall ===&lt;br /&gt;
A firewall is a layer of security between the network and the Internet. Since a router is the main connection from a network to the Internet, the firewall function is merged into this device. Every network should have a firewall to protect its privacy.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Firewall.png|frameless|635x635px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are 6 types of setting available under firewall.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* General Settings&lt;br /&gt;
* Port forwards&lt;br /&gt;
* Traffic Rules&lt;br /&gt;
* SNAT traffic Rules&lt;br /&gt;
* Parental Control&lt;br /&gt;
* Zone Forwarding&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;General Setting&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
General settings are subdivided into 2 parts,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1.) General settings&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In general settings, the settings that are made are default settings and can be changed according to user’s preference.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Firewall General Settings.png|frameless|622x622px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Specification details are below:&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;SN&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Field Name&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Sample Value&#039;&#039;&#039;      &lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Description&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Enable SYN-flood  protection&lt;br /&gt;
|Enabled&lt;br /&gt;
|This is  enabled by default; setting can be changed if required.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Disable IPV6&lt;br /&gt;
|Disabled&lt;br /&gt;
|This is  enabled by default; setting can be changed if required.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Drop invalid packets&lt;br /&gt;
|Disabled&lt;br /&gt;
|This is  enabled by default; setting can be changed if required.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|TCP SYN Cookies&lt;br /&gt;
|Disabled&lt;br /&gt;
|This is  enabled by default; setting can be changed if required.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Input&lt;br /&gt;
|Reject/Accept&lt;br /&gt;
|By  default, the setting is ‘Reject’ but this needs to be changed to ‘Accept’  compulsory.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Output&lt;br /&gt;
|Reject/Accept&lt;br /&gt;
|By  default, the setting is ‘Reject’ but this needs to be changed to ‘Accept’  compulsory.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|Forward&lt;br /&gt;
|Reject/Accept&lt;br /&gt;
|By  default, the setting is ‘Reject’ but this needs to be changed to ‘Accept’  compulsory.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2.) Zone settings&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In zone settings, there’s an option to add “New Zone”, according to user’s requirement.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Zone settings.png|thumb|628x628px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Port Forwards:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Port forwarding is a feature in a router or gateway that allows external devices to access services on a private network.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It maps an external port on the router to an internal IP address and port on the local network, enabling applications such as gaming servers, web servers, or remote desktop connections to be accessed from outside the network.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This helps in directing incoming traffic to the correct device within a local network based on the port number, enhancing connectivity and accessibility.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Firewall Port Forward.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;EDIT&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Firewall Edit Option RC44.png|frameless|622x622px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the save button after the required configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Name&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Web_Server_Forward&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|Field must  not be empty. Provide a name for the rule to easily identify it.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Protocol&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;TCP+UDP&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|Select the protocol  for the rule.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Options  typically include TCP+UDP, TCP, UDP, ICMP, Custom.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Source zone&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;SW_LAN&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|Select the  source zone where the traffic is originating from. Options typically include EWAN2,SW_LAN,CWAN1,CWAN1_0,CWAN1_1,VPN&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Source MAC address [optional]&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;any&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;any&#039;&#039;&#039;: Leave as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;any&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; if you don&#039;t want to specify a MAC address.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Source IP address[optional]&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: Leave blank if not needed.&lt;br /&gt;
|Optionally  specify an IP address or range.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Source port&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;80, 443&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;  (if matching traffic for web server ports)&lt;br /&gt;
|Specify the  source port or port range.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|Destination zone&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;SW_LAN&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|Select the  destination zone where the traffic is heading to.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|Destination IP address&lt;br /&gt;
|Leave blank if not needed.&lt;br /&gt;
|Optionally specify  the destination IP address or range.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|9&lt;br /&gt;
|Destination port&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;80&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;  (if redirecting to a web server port)&lt;br /&gt;
|Specify the  destination port or port range.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Traffic Rule:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;Traffic rules&amp;quot; refer to the policies and regulations that govern the flow of data packets within a network.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To allow new traffic, click on “Add and Edit” in “New Traffic Rule”.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Firewall Traffic Rule.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;EDIT&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Firewall Traffic Rule Edit.png|frameless|621x621px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Specification details are below:&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample Value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Name&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: Allow_HTTP_and_HTTPS&lt;br /&gt;
|Field must  not be empty: Provide a descriptive name for the traffic rule.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Restrict to Address Family&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|1.       Options:  IPv4, IPv6&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2.       Example:  IPv4 if dealing with typical internet traffic.&lt;br /&gt;
|Select the  address family to generate iptables rules for.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Protocol&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: TCP+UDP&lt;br /&gt;
|TCP+UDP:  Match incoming traffic using the given protocol.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Match ICMP Type&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: any&lt;br /&gt;
|Match all  ICMP types if set to any. Specific types can be chosen if needed.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Source Zone&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: LAN&lt;br /&gt;
|Specifies the  traffic source zone.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Enable DDoS Prevention&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: ‘Checked’ if you want to enable DDoS prevention  measures&lt;br /&gt;
|Enable or  disable Distributed Denial of Service (DDoS) prevention.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|Source MAC Address&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: any&lt;br /&gt;
|any: Match  traffic from any MAC address or specify a particular MAC address.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|Source Address&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: 192.168.1.0/24&lt;br /&gt;
|Match  incoming traffic from the specified source IP address or range.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|9&lt;br /&gt;
|Source Port&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: any if all source ports should be matched&lt;br /&gt;
|any: Match  incoming traffic from the specified source port or port range.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|10&lt;br /&gt;
|Destination Zone&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: WAN&lt;br /&gt;
|Specifies the  traffic destination zone.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|11&lt;br /&gt;
|Action&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: ACCEPT&lt;br /&gt;
|Options:  ACCEPT, DROP, REJECT. Specify the action to take for matched traffic.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|12&lt;br /&gt;
|Limit&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: 10/minute to limit matches to 10 times per  minute.&lt;br /&gt;
|Maximum  average matching rate; specified as a number, with an optional /second,  /minute, /hour, or /day suffix.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|13&lt;br /&gt;
|Extra arguments&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: --log-prefix &amp;quot;Blocked: &amp;quot; to add a log  prefix to log messages for this rule.&lt;br /&gt;
|Passes  additional arguments to iptables. Use with care as it can significantly alter  rule behaviour.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
Click on save once configured.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;SNAT Traffic Rule:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For configuring SNAT (Source Network Address Translation) traffic rules, you can control how outbound traffic from your local network is translated to a different IP address as it exits the network.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To add new source NAT,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on “ADD” in “New Source NAT:”&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SNAT Traffic Rule.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Edit&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SNAT Edit Options RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Specification details are below:&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Name&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: SNAT_WAN_to_LAN&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Field must  not be empty&#039;&#039;&#039;: Provide a unique and descriptive name for the SNAT rule.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Protocol&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: TCP+UDP&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;TCP+UDP&#039;&#039;&#039;:  Select the protocols that the SNAT rule will apply to.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Source Zone&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: wan&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;wan&#039;&#039;&#039;:  Specifies the source zone from which the traffic originates.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Source IP Address&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: any or a specific range like 192.168.1.0/24&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;-- please  choose --&#039;&#039;&#039;: Specify the source IP address or range. Leave empty if the  rule applies to any source IP.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Source Port&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: any&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;any&#039;&#039;&#039;:  Specify the source port or port range from which the traffic originates.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Destination Zone&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: lan&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;lan&#039;&#039;&#039;:  Specifies the destination zone to which the traffic is directed.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|Destination IP Address&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: any or a specific IP like 192.168.1.100&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;-- please  choose --&#039;&#039;&#039;: Specify the destination IP address or range. Leave empty if  the rule applies to any destination IP.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|Destination port&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: any&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;any&#039;&#039;&#039;:  Specify the destination port or port range to which the traffic is directed.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|9&lt;br /&gt;
|SNAT IP Address&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: 203.0.113.5 (an external IP address)&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;-- please  choose --&#039;&#039;&#039;: Specify the IP address to which the source IP should be  translated.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|10&lt;br /&gt;
|SNAT Port&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: Leave empty if not needed, or specify a port  like ‘12345’&lt;br /&gt;
|Optionally,  rewrite matched traffic to a specific source port. Leave empty to only  rewrite the IP address.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|11&lt;br /&gt;
|Extra Arguments&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: --log-prefix &amp;quot;SNAT_traffic: &amp;quot; (to add  a log prefix to log messages for this rule)&lt;br /&gt;
|Pass  additional arguments to iptables. Use with care as it can significantly alter  rule behaviour.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
Click on save once configured.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Parental Control:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For configuring parental control rules, you want to set restrictions based on time, source, and destination zones, as well as specific devices.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To add parental control in firewall,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on “Add and Edit” in “New parental control:” field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Parental Control.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Edit&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Parental Control Edit Options RC44.png|frameless|622x622px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Specification details are given below:&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  Name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  Value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Name&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  Parental_Control_Sunday&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Field must  not be empty&#039;&#039;&#039;: Provide a unique and descriptive name for the parental  control rule.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Proto&lt;br /&gt;
|all&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;all&#039;&#039;&#039;:  This specifies that the rule will apply to all protocols.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Source Zone&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: lan&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Field must  not be empty&#039;&#039;&#039;: Please look at Firewall-&amp;gt;Zone Settings to find zone  names.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Destination  Zone&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: wan&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Field must  not be empty&#039;&#039;&#039;: Please look at Firewall-&amp;gt;Zone Settings to find zone  names.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Source MAC  Address&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  00:1A:2B:3C:4D:5E&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Field&#039;&#039;&#039;:  Enter the MAC address of the device you want to apply the parental control  rule to. This is useful for restricting specific devices.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Target&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  Reject&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Accept&#039;&#039;&#039;:  This specifies the action to take. For parental controls, you might want to  use ‘Reject’ or ‘Drop’ to block traffic.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|Weekdays&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  Sunday&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Sunday&#039;&#039;&#039;:  Specify the days of the week when the rule should be active.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|Month Days&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: All&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;All:&#039;&#039;&#039; Specify  the days of the month when the rule should be active.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|9&lt;br /&gt;
|Start Time (hh:mm:ss)&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  18:00:00 (6:00 PM)&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Field must  not be empty:&#039;&#039;&#039; Specify the start time when the rule should begin to apply.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|10&lt;br /&gt;
|Stop Time  (hh:mm:ss)&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  22:00:00 (10:00 PM)&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Field must  not be empty:&#039;&#039;&#039; Specify the stop time when the rule should end.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
Click on save once configured.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Zone Forwarding:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Zone forwarding in network configuration allows traffic to be directed from one zone to another.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To ADD new zone,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on “Add” in “New Zone Forward:” field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Zone Forwarding RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;EDIT&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Zone Forwarding editing Options RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Specification details are below:&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  Name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  Value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Source Zone&lt;br /&gt;
|Example options: lan, wan, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;--please  choose--&#039;&#039;&#039;: Select the source zone from which the traffic originates.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Destination Zone&lt;br /&gt;
|Example options: lan, wan, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;--please  choose--&#039;&#039;&#039;: Select the destination zone to which the traffic is directed.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
Click on save once configured.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===2.6 Loopback Rule===&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user can configure the port where he want to forward the traffic to. Here the user can add/edit/delete different port ports as per the requirement. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Loopback Rule.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user should click on add/edit to do the required changes in the port and enter the valid information in each section to configure the port for forwarding.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Loopback Rule edit.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user is done with the required configurations, should click save button and then click on the update to save the changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===2.7 Remote Monitoring===&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user can select which equipment needs to be monitor remotely, the TR-069 device or the NMS device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Remote Monitoring.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
One the user selects the type of RMS click on the save.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;NMS&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
IN this page the user should type the server IP or domain name in the URL then click on sav. Click on upload and start (Once key is uploaded and this option is clicked, NMS automatically starts, and this router device gets registered with the NMS server provided.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:NMS.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;TR069&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To enable the TR069 the user needs to click on the enable check box.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:TR069.png|frameless|582x582px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user clicks on the check box of enable it will display all the required filed to configured.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Remote Monitoring Tr-069.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Serving Interval&lt;br /&gt;
|300&lt;br /&gt;
|This displays the interval time&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Interface&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|Not sure what needs to be written&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Username&lt;br /&gt;
|Username&lt;br /&gt;
|The user needs to mention the username&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Password&lt;br /&gt;
|******&lt;br /&gt;
|The user should set the password&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|URL&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|The user needs to mention the URL&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
The user should fill all the required fields and click on the save button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===2.8 Tunnel===&lt;br /&gt;
Tunnels are a method of transporting data across a network using protocols which are not supported by that network.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tunnel Settings.png|frameless|621x621px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;General Settings&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user needs to select under which type of tunnel it needs to send the data.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tunnel General Settings.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user selects the type of tunnel then click in the save button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;GRE Tunnel&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user needs to add all the details of GRE tunnels.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user configured all the required fields then it needs to click on the save. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:GRE Tunnel.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here the user can add/edit/delete the details of the tunnel. Once the required update is done then it needs to click on update to save the changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tunnel Configuration.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;IPIP Tunnel&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user needs to add all the details of IPIP tunnels.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user configured all the required fields then it needs to click on the save. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:IPIP Tunnel.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here the user can add/edit/delete the details of the tunnel. Once the required update is done then it needs to click on update to save the changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Ipip config.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==3 Maintenance==&lt;br /&gt;
In this module the user can configure/upgrade/modify the settings related to system, password, firmware and monitoring.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Maintenance System.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It includes below submodules.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* General&lt;br /&gt;
* Password&lt;br /&gt;
* Reboot&lt;br /&gt;
* Import and Export config&lt;br /&gt;
* Firmware upgrade&lt;br /&gt;
* Monitor Application&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===3.1 General===&lt;br /&gt;
In this section the user can configure the details related to time zone and host name&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Maintenance General.png|frameless|619x619px]]&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Local Time&lt;br /&gt;
|2023/12/13 12:24:11&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|It displays the system current date and  time.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|HostName&lt;br /&gt;
|31B30230298&lt;br /&gt;
|It displays the host name.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Timezone&lt;br /&gt;
|Asia/Kolkata&lt;br /&gt;
|It displays in which time zone its configured.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user configures the required details then click on the save button to save all the details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Logging&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here the user can configure the basic aspects of your device related to system.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Maintenance logging.png|frameless|608x608px]]&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|System log buffer size&lt;br /&gt;
|32&lt;br /&gt;
|This displays the log size of system buffer&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|External system log server&lt;br /&gt;
|0.0.0.0&lt;br /&gt;
|This displays the ip add of the external system  log&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|External system log server port&lt;br /&gt;
|514&lt;br /&gt;
|This displays the port number of the external  system log&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Log output level&lt;br /&gt;
|debug&lt;br /&gt;
|In this drop down the user selects the level of  the log output.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Cron Log level&lt;br /&gt;
|debug&lt;br /&gt;
|In this drop down the user selects the level of  the corn log .&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user configures the required details then click on the save button to save all the details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Language and Style&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here the user can configure the basic aspects of your device related to language.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Maintenance Language and Style.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user configures the required details then click on the save button to save all the details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===3.2 Password===&lt;br /&gt;
In this module the user can set the password for the admin credentials.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Change you password.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Specifies the password for the guest account. If the user enter a plaintext password here, it will get replaced with a crypted password on save. The new password will be effective once the user logs out and log in again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user needs to write the password in the text box and click on the save button to save the password.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===3.3 Reboot===&lt;br /&gt;
In this module the user can reboot the device remotely.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Reboot.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To start the reboot process first the user needs to fill all the required fields.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Need to select the type of reboot for the device whether it needs to be Hardware or Software reboot.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Maintenance Reboot.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Type&lt;br /&gt;
|Maintenance Reboot&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown list the user needs to  select the type of reboot is required to configure.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Reboot Type&lt;br /&gt;
|Hardware&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown list the user needs to select  the hardware or software reboot is required.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Minutes&lt;br /&gt;
|59&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user needs to configure  the min to start the reboot activity&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Hours&lt;br /&gt;
|22&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user needs to configure  the hours to start the reboot activity&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Day of Month&lt;br /&gt;
|All&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user needs to configure  the day of the month to start the reboot activity&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Month&lt;br /&gt;
|All&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user needs to configure  the month to start the reboot activity&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|Day of the week&lt;br /&gt;
|All&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user needs to configure  the week to start the reboot activity&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user fills all the required given parameters click on the save.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To start the reboot process, click on the “Reboot Now” button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===3.4 Import and Export===&lt;br /&gt;
In this section, User can Import &amp;amp; Export Configuration files of the Device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Import and Export.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
click “Export Config” to export device configuration &amp;amp; settings to a text file,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
click “Import Config” to import device configuration &amp;amp; settings from a previously exported text file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Import window.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user need to select on the choose file to and click on the apply.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===3.5 Firmware Upgrade===&lt;br /&gt;
The user can upgrade with the latest software for the existing firmware. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Frimware Upgrade.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the &#039;&#039;&#039;flash image&#039;&#039;&#039; and chose the path where the sys-upgrade file is kept and then click on flash image, it will upgrade to the latest software once the reboot is done.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Flash Image.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the &#039;&#039;&#039;Retain Config and flash&#039;&#039;&#039; and chose the path where the sys-upgrade file is kept and then click on Retain Config and flash, it will upgrade to the latest software once the reboot is done.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Flash Image.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the &#039;&#039;&#039;Factory Reset&#039;&#039;&#039; for the complete retest of the device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===3.6 Monitor Application===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Monitor Application.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Router Application Remote Configuration.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Router Remote Configuration.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==4 Status==&lt;br /&gt;
In this module the user can view the status of the router device with respect to the network, Wan, modem etc.[[File:Status.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It has 4 submodules.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Interfaces&lt;br /&gt;
* Internet&lt;br /&gt;
* Modem&lt;br /&gt;
* Route&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===4.1 Interfaces===&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user can see the traffic status for all the network through which the device works.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Status Interfaces.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Looking on the network status the user can check if the cellular or the ethernet is up.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===4.2 Internet===&lt;br /&gt;
In this submodule the user can view the status of the internet connections.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Internet Status.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
  To see the latest status of the internet connection the user needs to click on the refresh button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===4.3 Modem===&lt;br /&gt;
In this sub module the user will get to know the status of the cellular interface which is installed inside the modem. The user can view all the details related to the sim in terms of Operator, Network technology, Mobile country code, Upload bandwidth, Download Bandwidth, Frequency band, RSRP, RSRQ, RSSI &amp;amp; SNR under this page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Modem Status.png|frameless|602x602px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== 4.4 Route ===&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user can check the status of the route for the device. The ARP status can be visible in under this page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Route Status.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==5 Features==&lt;br /&gt;
In this module the user can see all the features that the router device has.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This module includes the below features.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Mac Address Binding&lt;br /&gt;
* URL Filtering&lt;br /&gt;
* Web Server&lt;br /&gt;
* Wi-Fi MacID Filtering&lt;br /&gt;
* Routing&lt;br /&gt;
* Others&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Features.png|frameless|618x618px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===5.1 Mac Address Binding===&lt;br /&gt;
Under this submodule the user can configure/update/edit the IP Address for MAC&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mac Addressing Binding.png|frameless|622x622px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user should write MAC address and then click on the add button. Once the address is added then click on the update button to save the modification.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user needs to click on the Edit button to modify the preexisting configuration. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mac Address Edit.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user modifies the MAC address /IP Address then click on the save button to save the changes done.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user can click on the deleted button to delete an existing configured device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Post all the changes the user needs to click on the update to reflect all the changes in the application.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===5.2 URL Filtering===&lt;br /&gt;
In this submodule the user should provide the URL which needs to be blocked for the device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:URL Filtering.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To add the new URL for blocking, click on the Add New button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user clicks on the Add New button a new pop will appear in that page write the URL and click on the save. The user can select the status of that URL while defining the URL.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Url Update.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To edit / delete the existing URL the user needs to click on the edit /deleted button respectively.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Edit or Delete URL.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the save after the changes are done as per the need.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== 5.3 Web Server ===&lt;br /&gt;
In this submodule the user can configure webserver related parameters.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Web server.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To configure the HTTP, click on the enable HTTP. Once the user clicks on the check box the HTTP Port text box will appear where the user needs to configure the port id.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Webserver Configuration.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on save buttons to save the changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To configure the 2nd HTTP, click on the enable HTTP. Once the user clicks on the check box the HTTP Port text box will appear where the user needs to configure the port id.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Webserver Https Redirect.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on save buttons to save the changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the “Redirect https” and “RFC1918 Filter” check box to respectively and click on the save button to save the changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To configure the NTP sync, click on the enable NTP sync. Once the user clicks on the check box the respective text boxes will appear to configure the parameters. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:RFC1918 Filter.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user configures the parameters click on the save button to save the given values.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===5.4 Wi-Fi MacID Filtering===&lt;br /&gt;
In this module the user can filter the Macids. Mac address filtering allows users to block traffic coming from certain known machines or devices.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Wi-Fi MacID Filtering.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Before adding the MacIDs the user needs to select the mode from the dropdown menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To Add the MacID the user needs to click on Add New option select the mac id and network name Wi-Fi 2.4G AP OR Wi-Fi 2.4G AP Guest, select enable/disable option and save it and update.              &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Configuring MacID and Network Name.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the required MACID and Network Name is configured the user needs to click on the save button to add the details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user needs to click on the edit button to do modifications on the pre-existing configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Macid and name removing.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the required MACID / Network Name is modified the user needs to click on the save button to reflect the changed value in the application.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;WIFI 2.4G AP Guest&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To Add the MacID the user needs to click on Add New option select the mac id and network name Wi-Fi 2.4G AP Guest, select enable/disable option and save it and update.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
     [[File:WIFI 2.4G AP Guest.png|frameless|623x623px]]  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the required MACID and Network Name is configured the user needs to click on the save button to add the details. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user needs to click on the edit button to do modifications on the pre-existing configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Configuring MacID and Network Name.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the required MACID / Network Name is modified the user needs to click on the save button to reflect the changed value in the application.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===5.5 Routing===&lt;br /&gt;
In this submodule the user can configure the parameters related to routing of the device. like Target address, Networks address etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Routing IPV4 Routes.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To add a new device the user needs to fill all the required information and click on the add button.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Interface&lt;br /&gt;
|eth0.1&lt;br /&gt;
|In this drop down list the user should  configure the interface name.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Target&lt;br /&gt;
|192.168.10.1&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user needs to insert the  target IP address&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|IPV4 Netmask&lt;br /&gt;
|255.255.255.0&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user should give the  address for the IPV4Netmask&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Metric&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user should insert the  number of the metric.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|IPV4 Gateway&lt;br /&gt;
|192.168.100.1&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user should configured the  address for the IPV4 Gateway.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Route Type&lt;br /&gt;
|Unicast&lt;br /&gt;
|In this drop down box the user should select  the type of route needed for the device.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
To edit the existing device the user needs to click on the edit option.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Routing Configuration.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the changes are done click on the save button to save all the changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the deleted button to delete the existing device detail.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Advanced Static IPV4 Routes:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Advanced Static IPV4 Routes.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To add a new device the user needs to fill all the required information and click on the add button.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Interface&lt;br /&gt;
|eth0.1&lt;br /&gt;
|In this drop down list the user should  configure the interface name.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|To&lt;br /&gt;
|192.168.10.1&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user needs to insert the  target IP address&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|IPV4 Netmask&lt;br /&gt;
|255.255.255.0&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user should give the  address for the IPV4Netmask&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Table&lt;br /&gt;
|local&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|From&lt;br /&gt;
|192.168.100.1&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user should configured the  from address for the routes&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Priority&lt;br /&gt;
|230&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
To edit the existing device the user needs to click on the edit option.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Routing Editing.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the changes are done click on the save button to save all the changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the deleted button to delete the existing device detail.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once all the configurations are done click on the update button to reflect the changes made.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===5.6 Others===&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user will get to do all the other miscellaneous configuration with respect to the device based on the required parameters.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Miscellaneous configuration.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Utility&lt;br /&gt;
|Action&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Set Date&lt;br /&gt;
|SET&lt;br /&gt;
|Need to set the date and time and after  click command get the Date and time&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Gate Date&lt;br /&gt;
|GET&lt;br /&gt;
|Needs to get the system date and time&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|IPsec status all&lt;br /&gt;
|GET&lt;br /&gt;
|Needs to get the IPsec details&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Wi-Fi Scan&lt;br /&gt;
|GET&lt;br /&gt;
|Needs to get the Wi-Fi status&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|ipref3 client&lt;br /&gt;
|RUN&lt;br /&gt;
|Needs to click on the RUN to execute  the command&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|ipref3 server&lt;br /&gt;
|RUN&lt;br /&gt;
|Needs to click on the RUN to execute  the command&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|Ping&lt;br /&gt;
|PING&lt;br /&gt;
|Needs to click on the ping status&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|9&lt;br /&gt;
|Traceroute&lt;br /&gt;
|RUN&lt;br /&gt;
|Needs to click on the ping Traceroute status&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|10&lt;br /&gt;
|NTP Sync&lt;br /&gt;
|SYNC&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to Sync the NTP&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|11&lt;br /&gt;
|Download Files&lt;br /&gt;
|DOWNLOAD&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to Download the files /Database&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|12&lt;br /&gt;
|Restart Power&lt;br /&gt;
|RESTART&lt;br /&gt;
|Click Restart the power&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|13&lt;br /&gt;
|Restart Modem&lt;br /&gt;
|RESTART&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to Restart the modem&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|14&lt;br /&gt;
|Run at command&lt;br /&gt;
|RUN&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to Run the command&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|15&lt;br /&gt;
|Show board configuration&lt;br /&gt;
|SHOW&lt;br /&gt;
|To Show the board configuration&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|16&lt;br /&gt;
|Show VPN Certificate Name&lt;br /&gt;
|SHOW&lt;br /&gt;
|To Show VPN Certificate Name&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|17&lt;br /&gt;
|Switch SIM to Secondary&lt;br /&gt;
|RUN&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to switch the SIM to secondary  mode&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|18&lt;br /&gt;
|Send Test SMS&lt;br /&gt;
|SEND&lt;br /&gt;
|To Send the SMS Confirmation&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|19&lt;br /&gt;
|Readlatest SMS&lt;br /&gt;
|READ&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to Read the latest SMS&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|20&lt;br /&gt;
|Data Usage&lt;br /&gt;
|SHOW&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to show the data usage.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|21&lt;br /&gt;
|Monthly Data Usage&lt;br /&gt;
|SHOW&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to show the monthly data usage&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|22&lt;br /&gt;
|Modem debug Info&lt;br /&gt;
|READ&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to read the information about the  modem debug&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|23&lt;br /&gt;
|Scan Network operators (take&amp;gt;3mins)&lt;br /&gt;
|SHOW&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to show the Network operator&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|24&lt;br /&gt;
|Network operators (first perform scan  network operator&lt;br /&gt;
|SHOW&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to show the Network operator&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|25&lt;br /&gt;
|ReadLogFiles&lt;br /&gt;
|READ&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to read the log files&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|26&lt;br /&gt;
|Enable ssh&lt;br /&gt;
|RUN&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to Run the command&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|27&lt;br /&gt;
|Disable ssh&lt;br /&gt;
|RUN&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to Run the command&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|28&lt;br /&gt;
|Clear SIM1 Data&lt;br /&gt;
|CLEAR&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to clear the SIM1 data&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|29&lt;br /&gt;
|Clear SIM2 Data&lt;br /&gt;
|CLEAR&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to clear the SIM data&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==6 Logout==&lt;br /&gt;
The user should click on log out option to logged out from the router application.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Logout.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user needs to click on the ok to come out of the router application.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tanisha</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.silbonetworks.com/index.php?title=File:Parental_Control_Edit_Options_RC44.png&amp;diff=1145</id>
		<title>File:Parental Control Edit Options RC44.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.silbonetworks.com/index.php?title=File:Parental_Control_Edit_Options_RC44.png&amp;diff=1145"/>
		<updated>2024-09-02T10:43:21Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tanisha: Tanisha uploaded a new version of File:Parental Control Edit Options RC44.png&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Parental Control Edit Options RC44&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tanisha</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.silbonetworks.com/index.php?title=File:Parental_Control.png&amp;diff=1144</id>
		<title>File:Parental Control.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.silbonetworks.com/index.php?title=File:Parental_Control.png&amp;diff=1144"/>
		<updated>2024-09-02T10:42:07Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tanisha: Tanisha uploaded a new version of File:Parental Control.png&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Parental Control&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tanisha</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.silbonetworks.com/index.php?title=RC44_User_Manual&amp;diff=1142</id>
		<title>RC44 User Manual</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.silbonetworks.com/index.php?title=RC44_User_Manual&amp;diff=1142"/>
		<updated>2024-09-02T10:41:19Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tanisha: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;This page contains the user manual for RC44.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Connecting with the device to the System (Laptop/Desktop).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To log in to SILBO_RC44 by connecting the router to your laptop or desktop via LAN or using Wi-Fi, please follow the steps below. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Connecting via LAN:&#039;&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Connect your laptop&#039;s LAN port to one of the router&#039;s LAN interfaces. Ensure that you select any LAN interface (there are two available) while making sure the WAN interface is not used. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
                                                                                                                                                          &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;How to connect with the SILBO_RC44&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;application&#039;&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the LAN connection is established between the device and the laptop or the desktop&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please open the command prompt and ping go get the ip config of that device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Type the command &#039;&#039;&#039;Ipconfig&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:How_to_connect_with_the_SILBO_RB44_application.png|alt=How to connect with the SILBO RB44 application|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It will provide the Ip address/url of that device through which the application can be accessed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Connecting_via_LAN_RB44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Log In==&lt;br /&gt;
Open the web browser and type the IP address in the URL.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It will show the log in page of the application.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Log In.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Give the valid credentials for the username and password to login to the application page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user credentials are provided it will direct to the landing page of the application.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Login Dashboard RC44.png|frameless|636x636px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The “Status” landing page shows all the detailed specification of the device like system, memory storage and connection tracking etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The application is divided in to 6 Modules.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Info&lt;br /&gt;
* Settings&lt;br /&gt;
* Maintenance&lt;br /&gt;
* Status&lt;br /&gt;
* Features&lt;br /&gt;
* Logout&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==1.Info==&lt;br /&gt;
The “Info” module provides the information about the devices to the user.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It provides all the specification related to the hardware, firmware, Networks and the Connection uptimes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It has 3 submodules.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Overview&lt;br /&gt;
* System Log&lt;br /&gt;
* Kernel Log&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Info dashboard RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===1.1 Overview===&lt;br /&gt;
In overview module it displays all the specification categorically of a device like System, Memory, storage, Connection tracking, DHCP Lease.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Login Dashboard RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;System&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this section it displays the hardware configured specification of the device.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Info system RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The specifications details are as follows,&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&lt;br /&gt;
!SN&lt;br /&gt;
!Field name &lt;br /&gt;
!Sample value&lt;br /&gt;
!Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Hostname&lt;br /&gt;
|22B09230239&lt;br /&gt;
|This field  displays the router serial number of the device&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Model&lt;br /&gt;
|Silbo_RC44- EC200A&lt;br /&gt;
|This field  displays the model number of the device&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Firmware Version and IPK Version&lt;br /&gt;
|1.16_1.13_RC3&lt;br /&gt;
|This field  displays the firmware version and IPK version&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Kernel Version&lt;br /&gt;
|4.14.180&lt;br /&gt;
|This field  displays the kernel version of the device&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Local Time&lt;br /&gt;
|Monday, July 1, 2024, at 05:43:58 PM&lt;br /&gt;
|This field  displays the local time&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Uptime&lt;br /&gt;
|0h 7m 29s&lt;br /&gt;
|This field  displays the uptime of the device&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|Load Average&lt;br /&gt;
|1.73 1.87 1.04&lt;br /&gt;
|This field  displays the average load&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Memory&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this section it displays the memory configured specification of the device.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Memory Dashboard RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The specifications details are as follows.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Total Available&lt;br /&gt;
|68676 kB / 124208 kB (55%)&lt;br /&gt;
|This field  displays the total availability of memory space in the device&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Free&lt;br /&gt;
|59344 kB / 124208 kB (47%)&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the  Free memory space in the device&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Cached&lt;br /&gt;
|312 kB / 124208 kB (0%)&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the  Cached memory space in the device&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Buffered&lt;br /&gt;
|9332 kB / 124208 kB (7%)&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the  Buffered memory space in the device&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Storage&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this section it displays the status of storage as root and temporary usage specification of the device.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Storage Dashboard RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The specifications details are as follows.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Root Usage&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
796 kB / 15488 kB (5%)&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays  the total root usage of the device&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Temporary  Usage&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
312 kB / 62104 kB (0%)&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the total temporary  usage of the device&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Connection Tracking&#039;&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this section it displays the status of connection tracking for the device.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Connection Tracking RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The specifications details are as follows.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Active Connection&lt;br /&gt;
|48 / 16384 (0%)&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the active connection of the device.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;DHCP Leases&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this section, it displays the DHCP lease of the temporary assignment of an IP address to a device on the network.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:DCHP Leases RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The specifications details are as follows.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Host Name&lt;br /&gt;
|KermaniK-LT&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays  the configured Host Name/User Name for that device.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|IPv4-Address&lt;br /&gt;
|192.168.10.147&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the IP  address of the device.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|MAC-Address&lt;br /&gt;
|34:73:5a:bb: ab:7a&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the MAC-Address  of the device.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Lease time remaining&lt;br /&gt;
|11h 53m 49s&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the lease  time remaining for the device.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===1.2 System Log===&lt;br /&gt;
This page provides on screen System logging information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user gets to view the system logs &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:System Log.png|frameless|617x617px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===1.3 Kernel Log===&lt;br /&gt;
This page provides on-screen Kernel logging information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this page, the user gets to view the Kernel logs&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Kernel Log.png|frameless|621x621px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==2. Setting==&lt;br /&gt;
In this “Setting” module the user can Configure/update all the required parameters related to Network, SIM Switch, Internet, VPN, Firewall, Loopback Rule, Remote monitoring, Tunnel as per requirement.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
IT consist of 8 submodules.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Network&lt;br /&gt;
* Sim Switch&lt;br /&gt;
* Internet&lt;br /&gt;
* VPN&lt;br /&gt;
* Firewall&lt;br /&gt;
* Loopback Rule&lt;br /&gt;
* Remote Monitoring&lt;br /&gt;
* Tunnel&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Settings.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===2.1 Network===&lt;br /&gt;
In this section the user does all the setting related configuration with reference to network like Ethernet Setting, Cellular Setting, Band lock and Operator Lock, Wi-Fi, Guest Wi-Fi, Wireless Schedule, SMS Setting, Loopback IP.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Network Dashboard RC44.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Ethernet Setting&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this page it will display all the configured port that is attached with the device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For this device 3 ports are configured. Ethernet mode can be configured as WAN and as LAN as well. Ethernet LAN Connection settings can be configured as DHCP server or Static.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Ethernet Settings RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;For port 3 setting&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Kindly select the option &#039;&#039;&#039;LAN4&#039;&#039;&#039; for &#039;&#039;&#039;Port 3 mode LAN/WAN&#039;&#039;&#039;. Based on the option selected the filed will also changes the user needs to configure all the required field and click on the save to save the required fields.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Ethernet Settings RC44 part 2.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Port 3 mode LAN/WAN&lt;br /&gt;
|LAN&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the port mode selection&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Port 3 Ethernet Protocol [LAN Eth0.1]&lt;br /&gt;
|DHCP Server&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the Ethernet mode selection&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Port 3 DHCP Server IP&lt;br /&gt;
|192.168.10.1&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays DHCP server IP configured.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Port 3 DHCP Netmask&lt;br /&gt;
|255.255.255.0&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays DHCP server Netmask address configured&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Port 3 DHCP Start Address&lt;br /&gt;
|100&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays DHCP server  start address configured&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Port 3 DHCP Limit&lt;br /&gt;
|50&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays DHCP server  limit&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Kindly select the option &#039;&#039;&#039;EWAN&#039;&#039;&#039; for &#039;&#039;&#039;Port 3 mode LAN/WAN&#039;&#039;&#039;. Based on the option selected the filed will also changes the user needs to configure all the required field and click on the save to save the required fields.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:EWAN Port 3 Configuration RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Port 3 mode LAN/WAN&lt;br /&gt;
|EWAN&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the port mode selection&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Ethernet Protocol Port 3 WAN&lt;br /&gt;
|DHCP  client&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the client&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Gateway&lt;br /&gt;
|192.168.1.1&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays gateway address  configured&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the save once all the configuration is done and click on the update button to update all the information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;SW_LAN settings&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this part the user can configure the setting for SW_LAN &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SW LAN settings RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|SW_LAN Ethernet Protocol&lt;br /&gt;
|DHCP  Server&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the  Ethernet mode selection&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|SW_LAN DHCP Server IP&lt;br /&gt;
|192.168.10.1&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays DHCP server IP  configured.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|SW_LAN  DHCP Netmask&lt;br /&gt;
|255.255.255.0&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays DHCP server  Netmask address configured&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|SW_LAN  DHCP Start Address&lt;br /&gt;
|100&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays DHCP server  start address configured&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|SW_LAN  DHCP Limit&lt;br /&gt;
|50&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays DHCP server  limit&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|DNS  Server&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|This filed display number of DSN  server availability&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|DNS  Server Address&lt;br /&gt;
|8.8.8.8&lt;br /&gt;
|This  filed display the DSN server address.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After configuring all the required information, the user should click on the save and then click on the update to update the all the required information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Static option for SW_LAN Ethernet Protocol&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the option of static from the drop-down menu for SW_LAN Ethernet Protocol.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SW LAN settings Static Ethernet Protocol.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|SW_LAN Ethernet Protocol&lt;br /&gt;
|Static&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the  Ethernet mode selection&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|SW_LAN static IP&lt;br /&gt;
|192.168.5.1&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays static server IP  configured.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|SW_LAN  Netmask&lt;br /&gt;
|255.255.255.0&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays static server  Netmask address configured&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|DNS  Server&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|This filed display number of DSN  server availability&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|DSN  Server Address&lt;br /&gt;
|8.8.8.8&lt;br /&gt;
|This  filed display the DSN server address.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
After configuring all the required information, the user should click on the save and then click on the update to update the all the required information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Cellular Setting&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this page, the user needs to configure the various details with respect to the SIM.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
select single cellular single sim where the user must configure the APN details of the sim used for the router device. The Configurations can be done based on the SIM usage, with respect to IPV4 or IPV.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Cellular Settings RC44.png|frameless|619x619px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Cellular  Operation Mode&lt;br /&gt;
|Single Cellular with Dual Sim&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays  the cellular operation mode.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Cellular  Modem 1&lt;br /&gt;
|QuectelEC200A&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the modem name.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Network  Mode&lt;br /&gt;
|Automatic&lt;br /&gt;
|This  field displays the  Network mode selection&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM 1  Access Point Name&lt;br /&gt;
|airtelgprs.com&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the  name of the Sim 1 access point configured.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM 1  PDP Type&lt;br /&gt;
|IPV4&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays  the type of SIM 1&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM 1  Username&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|This field is optional, and the user can configure the name of  the SIM 1&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM 1  Password&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|This  field is optional, and the user can configure the password for the SIM 1&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM 1  Authentication Protocol&lt;br /&gt;
|None&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the type of  protocol is being used for SIM 1&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|9&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM 2  Access Point Name&lt;br /&gt;
|airtelgprs.com&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the name of the  Sim 2 access point configured.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|10&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM 2  PDP Type&lt;br /&gt;
|IPV4&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the type of SIM  2&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|11&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM 2  Username&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|This  field is optional, and the user can configure the name of the SIM 2&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|12&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM 2  Password&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|This  field is optional, and the user can configure the password for the SIM 2&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|13&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM 2  Authentication Protocol&lt;br /&gt;
|None&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the type of  protocol is being used for SIM 2&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|14&lt;br /&gt;
|Primary  SIM Switchback Time (In Minutes)&lt;br /&gt;
|10&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the time given  for sim to swich in between.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
After configuring all the required information, the user should click on the save and then click on the update to update the all the required information. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Band lock and Operator Lock&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this page, the user needs to configure the lock band and operator based on the service provider&#039;&#039;&#039;.&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Bands available in the drop-down list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Band lock and Operator Lock.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;2G/3G option&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2G/3G: - 3G allows additional features such as mobile internet access, video calls and mobile TV. While the main function of 2G technology is the transmission of information through voice calls.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:2G-3G option.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user should select the band check box  available for 2g/3g  from the given list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Bands available for selection under LTE for the bands available that zone.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Operator Selection Mode&#039;&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user needs to click on the check box of the “operator select enable” to select the operator.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the check box is clicked there will be a dropdown list of the operator modes from which the user needs to select the mode. The user needs to select the operator mode from the given dropdown list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Operator Selection Mode.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the user selects the mode “Manual” or “Manual-Automatic” then one more text box will appear where the user must provide the operator code.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Band lock and Operator Lock 1.png|frameless|542x542px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After configuring all the required information, the user should click on the save and then click on the update to update the all the required information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Wi-Fi Setting&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wi-Fi is a family of wireless network protocols based on the IEEE 802.11 family of standards, which are commonly used for local area network of devices and internet access, allowing nearby digital devices to exchanges data by radio waves. These are the most widely used computer network, used globally in home and small office networks to link devices and to provided internet access with wireless router and wireless access point in public places. In this router has the general setting and change country code, channel, radio mode, radio passphrase as per the requirement after clicking on enable Radio button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Wi-Fi Setting.png|frameless|585x585px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user needs to select the respective radio mode based on its need. Basically, it has 3 radio mode.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Wi-Fi Setting access Point.png|frameless|590x590px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Access Point mode:&#039;&#039;&#039; In Access Point mode, router connects to a wireless router through an Ethernet cable to extend the coverage of wireless signal to other network client.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Access Point Mode RC44.png|frameless|573x573px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Client point:&#039;&#039;&#039;  In client mode, the access point connects your wired devices to a wireless network. This mode is suitable when you have a wired device with an Ethernet port and no wireless capability, for example, a smart TV, Media Player, or Game console and you want to connect it to the internet wirelessly, select the Client Mode and give the Radio SSID &amp;amp; client passphrase&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Client Point RC44.png|frameless|587x587px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Access point and client point&#039;&#039;&#039;: select this option for both type connection, give both SSID and passphrase.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Access point and Client Point RC44.png|frameless|571x571px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After configuring all the required information, the user should click on the save and then click on the update to update the all the required information.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Radio  0 Protocol&lt;br /&gt;
|IEEE 802.11 b/g/n&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the  user should select which protocol is being used&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Country  Code&lt;br /&gt;
|INDIA&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the  user should select which county it belongs to.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Channel&lt;br /&gt;
|Auto&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user should  select the proper channel to be used.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|TX  Power&lt;br /&gt;
|100&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user should  specify the power.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Channel  Width&lt;br /&gt;
|20 MHz&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user should  select the channel width&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Radio  Mode&lt;br /&gt;
|Access  point&lt;br /&gt;
|In this drop down the user should  select the mode.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|Radio  SSID&lt;br /&gt;
|APClient_22B09230239&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user should  specify the SSID number&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|Radio  Authentication&lt;br /&gt;
|WPA2  Personal (PSK)&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user should  select the type of authentication.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|9&lt;br /&gt;
|Radio  Encryption&lt;br /&gt;
|AES&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user should  select the type of encryption required.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|10&lt;br /&gt;
|Radio  Passphrase&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user should  specify the password.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|11&lt;br /&gt;
|Radio  DHCP server IP&lt;br /&gt;
|192.168.100.1&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user should  specify the IP address of DHCP server.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|12&lt;br /&gt;
|Radio  DHCP start address&lt;br /&gt;
|100&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user should  specify the start address of the DHCP.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|13&lt;br /&gt;
|Radio  DHCP limit&lt;br /&gt;
|50&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user should  specify the limit for the DHCP.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Wireless Schedule&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wi-Fi can be automatically withdrawn based on the configuration done in this section.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user can schedule the Wi-Fi’s accessibility time during a particular period.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Wireless Schedule.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After configuring all the required information, the user should click on the save and then click on the update to update the all the required information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user can select more than one “day of the week” for scheduling the wifi working hours.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Wifi Schedule.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Loop back IP settings&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The loopback IP address, often referred to as “localhost”. it’s used to establish network connections within the same device for testing and troubleshooting purpose.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Loop back IP settings.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After configuring all the required information, the user should click on the save and then click on the update to update the all the required information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The loopback IP address, commonly represented as 127.0.0.1, is a special address used for testing network connectivity on a local machine. It allows a device to send network messages to itself without involving external networks, making it useful for troubleshooting and diagnostics.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
However, this IP can be changed as per requirement and to do that, Navigating to Setting&amp;gt;&amp;gt;Network configuration&amp;gt;&amp;gt; Loopback IP settings can be changed/updated.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Above screenshot shows the configuration window from GUI/WebUI&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;SMS Settings&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
User needs to enable SMS option in SMS settings page. This option is to validate the mobile numbers using which controlling commands could be sent to the router device. 1 to 5 mobile numbers can be authenticated by choosing from “Select Valid SMS user numbers” and adding the mobile numbers below respectively. API key is the pass key used in the commands while sending SMS. Displayed in the below screen is the default API key which can be edited and changed as per choice.   After addition of the mobile numbers user needs to click on save button for changes to take place.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SMS Settings.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select valid user number max. 5 and add authorized phone number in the main menu where want to find the alert and click on SMS Response Enable, save and update button, now send SMS commands from the configured mobile number. Once the commands are received from the user phone number the board send acknowledgement as per the commands after that it will send the router’s status once it has rebooted and is operational again. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mentioned below are a few commands which can be sent from the configured mobile number to the router device. Below two commands are One for rebooting the router device and another to get the uptime.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1) {&amp;quot;device&amp;quot;:[&amp;quot;passkey&amp;quot;,&amp;quot;API key&amp;quot;],&amp;quot;command&amp;quot;:&amp;quot;reboot&amp;quot;,&amp;quot;arguments&amp;quot;:&amp;quot;hardware&amp;quot;}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2) {&amp;quot;device&amp;quot;:[&amp;quot;passkey &amp;quot;,&amp;quot;API key&amp;quot;],&amp;quot;command&amp;quot;:&amp;quot;uptime&amp;quot;}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After configuring all the required information, the user should click on the save and then click on the update to update the all the required information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===2.2 SIM===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user needs to configure the Sim for the given device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SIM Switch.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user needs to select from the drop-down menu on which basis the sim needs to be switched.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Sim Switch Configuration.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user selects on “&#039;&#039;&#039;signal strength&#039;&#039;&#039;” then the parameters related to signal strength will pop up and the user needs to configure the parameters based on the requirement &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Signal Strength.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Threshold RSRP&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This Needs to be set appropriately. Incorrect setting may cause unnecessary SIM switching. ( In General a BAD RSRP value range is -140 to -115 and FAIR RSRP value range is -115 to -105).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Threshold SINR&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This Needs to be set appropriately. Incorrect setting may cause unnecessary SIM switching. ( In General a BAD SNR value range is -20 to 0 and FAIR SNR value range is 0 to 13)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user selects on “&#039;&#039;&#039;Data Limit&#039;&#039;&#039;” then the parameters related to Data Limit will pop up and the user needs to configure the parameters based on the requirement.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Data limit.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM Switch Based on&lt;br /&gt;
|Data Limit&lt;br /&gt;
|The user needs to select from the  drop-down menu on what basis the sim needs to be switched.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM 1 Data Usage Limit (In MB)&lt;br /&gt;
|1000&lt;br /&gt;
|The user needs to set the limit for the data  usage for SIM 1.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM 2 Data Usage Limit (In MB)&lt;br /&gt;
|1000&lt;br /&gt;
|The user needs to set the limit for the data  usage for SIM 2.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Periodicity&lt;br /&gt;
|Daily&lt;br /&gt;
|The user needs to set the pattern/frequency to  switch the sims.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Day Of Month&lt;br /&gt;
|16&lt;br /&gt;
|The user needs to set the day for switching the  sim.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
After configuring all the required information, the user should click on the save.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===2.3 Internet===&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user needs to configure the internet connection to set the priority from the various options. The user should decide what kind of connection it needs to provide to the device like LAN, WAN etc. Once the connections are configured then click on save option and then on update.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Internet.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the user needs to edit on the existing configuration, then the user should click on the “EDIT” button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Network Edit Options.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Name&lt;br /&gt;
|EWAN2&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the name of the WAN  connection&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Priority&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown box the user need to select  the priority.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Select Track IP Numbers&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user needs to select the  track number for the Ips.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|TrackIP1&lt;br /&gt;
|8.8.8.8&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text field the user needs to set the IP  address for the track 1&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|TrackIP2&lt;br /&gt;
|8.8.4.4&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text field the user needs to set the IP  address for the track 1&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Reliability&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Not sure what needs to be written&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|Count&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Not sure what needs to be written&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|Up&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Not sure what needs to be written&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|9&lt;br /&gt;
|Down&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Not sure what needs to be written&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user is done with modification click on the save button to save all the changes and then click on the update button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===2.4 VPN===&lt;br /&gt;
VPN stands for &#039;&#039;&#039;Virtual Private Network&#039;&#039;&#039;, it establishes a connection between the system and a remote server, which is owned by a VPN provider.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Creating a point-to-point tunnel that encrypts the personal data, masks the IP address, and allows to block the required website to blocks via firewalls on the internet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:VPN Settings RC44.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are 5 types of setting available under VPN configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* General Settings&lt;br /&gt;
* IPSEC&lt;br /&gt;
* Open VPN&lt;br /&gt;
* Wireguard&lt;br /&gt;
* Zerotier&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;General Settings&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user must choose which type of VPN connection is required for the device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user must select from IPSEC or Open VPN based on its requirement. If required, the user can select for both the options. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:VPN General Settings RC44.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user needs to click on the save after selecting the option based on its requirement.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;IPSEC&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
IPSEC VPN is used to create a VPN connection between local and remote networks. To use IPSEC VPN, the user should check that both local and remote routers support IPSEC VPN feature.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user can add/edit/delete the IPSEC VPN connection for the device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:VPN IPSEC changes RC44.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user needs to click on the update button once the required configuration is completed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In IPSEC the user needs to click on edit button to edit the configuration of an existing VPN connection.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:VPN Edit Options.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the save button after the required configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The tunnel will show established, showing the connection has been made.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:IPSEC .png|thumb|631x631px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|IPSEC&lt;br /&gt;
|Site to Site VPN&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user should select  the IPSEC connection type.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|IPSEC Role&lt;br /&gt;
|Client/Server&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown box the user needs to select  the IPSEC role.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Connection Type&lt;br /&gt;
|Tunnel&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user needs to select the connection  type. The user should select on the connection enable check box.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Connection mode&lt;br /&gt;
|start&lt;br /&gt;
|In this drop down list the user should select  the mode for the connection. it will have route/add/start/trap mode&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Remote Server IP&lt;br /&gt;
|1.1.1.1&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text field the user needs to set the IP  address for the remote server.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Local ID&lt;br /&gt;
|g300&lt;br /&gt;
|The user needs to set the local id.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|No. of local subnets&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user needs to select how  many subnets it will be connected.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|Local Subnet 1&lt;br /&gt;
|192.168.11.1/24&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user needs to put the  address of the local subnet.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|9&lt;br /&gt;
|Remote id&lt;br /&gt;
|sophos&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user needs to put the id  of the remote connection.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|10&lt;br /&gt;
|No of remote subnet&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user needs to select how  many subnets it will be connected remotely.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|11&lt;br /&gt;
|Remote subnet&lt;br /&gt;
|192.168.10.0/24&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user needs to put the  address of the remote subnet.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|12&lt;br /&gt;
|Key exchange&lt;br /&gt;
|Ikev1&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user should select the  which key exchange version to be selected.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|13&lt;br /&gt;
|Aggressive&lt;br /&gt;
|Yes/No&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user should select either  yes or no .&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|14&lt;br /&gt;
|IKE lifetime&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|Fill according to user’s requirements.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|15&lt;br /&gt;
|Lifetime in seconds&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Fill according to user’s requirements.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|16&lt;br /&gt;
|Enable DPD Detection&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;1&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
0&lt;br /&gt;
|Indicates  whether Dead Peer Detection is enabled to detect a lost connection. Enable  this option as per server-side settings.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|17&lt;br /&gt;
|Time Interval (In Seconds)&lt;br /&gt;
|60&lt;br /&gt;
|This option  is available only if DPD Detection is enabled. The time interval is the  interval for DPD checks.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|18&lt;br /&gt;
|Action&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Restart&#039;&#039;&#039;/clear/hold/&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
trap/start&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Restart&#039;&#039;&#039;: Action to take when  DPD detects a lost connection (restart the connection). Select as per  server-side setting.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|19&lt;br /&gt;
|Authentication Method&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;PSK&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;PSK&#039;&#039;&#039;: Pre-shared key is used  for authentication. Select this option for authentication as per sever side  setting.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|20&lt;br /&gt;
|Multiple Secrets&lt;br /&gt;
|1/&#039;&#039;&#039;0&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|Indicates  whether multiple PSK secrets are used. Enable only if required.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|21&lt;br /&gt;
|PSK Value&lt;br /&gt;
|******&lt;br /&gt;
|Pre-shared  key value (masked for security).&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;*Below are Phase I and Phase II settings details*&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&lt;br /&gt;
! colspan=&amp;quot;4&amp;quot; |                                                        &#039;&#039;&#039;Proposal settings Phase I&#039;&#039;&#039;                                                                                                                     &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|22            &lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Encryption Algorithm&#039;&#039;&#039;                                                 &lt;br /&gt;
|AES 128&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AES 192&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;AES 256&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3DES                                                                                                                                     &lt;br /&gt;
|                                                                                                                                     &#039;&#039;&#039;AES 256&#039;&#039;&#039;: Encryption algorithm  for Phase I. Select as per server-side configuration. Both server and client  should have same configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|23&lt;br /&gt;
|Authentication Phase I&lt;br /&gt;
|SHA1&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MD5&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SHA 256&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SHA 384&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;SHA 512&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;SHA 512&#039;&#039;&#039;: Authentication  algorithm for Phase I.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select as per  server-side configuration. Both server and client should have same configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|24&lt;br /&gt;
|DH Group&lt;br /&gt;
|MODP768(group1)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MODP1024(group2)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MODP1536(group5)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;MODP2048(group14)&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MODP3072(group15)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MODP4096(group16)&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;MODP2048 (group14)&#039;&#039;&#039;:  Diffie-Hellman group for key exchange.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select as per  server-side configuration. Both server and client should have same  configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| colspan=&amp;quot;4&amp;quot; |                                                                                                                                                                 &#039;&#039;&#039;Proposal settings Phase II&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|25&lt;br /&gt;
|Hash Algorithm&lt;br /&gt;
|AES 128&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AES 192&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;AES 256&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3DES&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;AES 256&#039;&#039;&#039;: Encryption algorithm  for Phase II. Select as per server-side configuration. Both server and client  should have same configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|26&lt;br /&gt;
|Authentication Phase II&lt;br /&gt;
|SHA1&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MD5&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SHA 256&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SHA 384&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;SHA 512&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;SHA 512&#039;&#039;&#039;: Authentication  algorithm for Phase II.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select as per  server-side configuration. Both server and client should have same  configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|27&lt;br /&gt;
|PFS Group&lt;br /&gt;
|MODP768(group1)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MODP1024(group2)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MODP1536(group5)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;MODP2048(group14)&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MODP3072(group15)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MODP4096(group16)&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;MODP2048 (group14)&#039;&#039;&#039;: Perfect  Forward Secrecy group.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select as per  server-side configuration. Both server and client should have same  configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Open VPN&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the OpenVPN connection, the home network can act as a server, and the remote device can access the server through the router which acts as an OpenVPN Server gateway. To use the VPN feature, the user should enable OpenVPN Server on the router, and install and run VPN client software on the remote device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Open VPN Settings RC44.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user needs to “upload” the respective certificate from a valid path and then click on the “Update.”&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the OpenVPN connection starts the user will get an option to enable/disable the VPN connection as and when required.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By clicking on the enable/disable button, the user can start/stop the VPN connection.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Open VPN Settings RC44 Dashboard.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
VPN has been established.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;WireGuard:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;WireGuard&#039;&#039;&#039; is simple, fast, lean, and modern VPN that utilizes secure and trusted cryptography.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on “Edit” to start configurations as needed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Wire Guard RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;EDIT:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Wire Guard RC44 Setttings.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the save button after the required configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample Value     &lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Wireguard Role&lt;br /&gt;
|Client/Server&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown box the user needs to select  the wireguard role.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Listen Port&lt;br /&gt;
|51820&lt;br /&gt;
|The UDP port on which the WireGuard client  listens for incoming connections.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|IP Addresses&lt;br /&gt;
|10.0.0.1/24&lt;br /&gt;
|The IP  address and subnet mask assigned to the WireGuard client&#039;s interface. This  address is used within the VPN.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Allowed PeerIPs&lt;br /&gt;
|10.1.1.1&lt;br /&gt;
|The IP  address of the allowed peer(s) that can connect to this WireGuard client.  This might need adjustment based on the actual peer IPs used in the network.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Endpoint HostIP&lt;br /&gt;
|10.1.1.1&lt;br /&gt;
|The IP  address of the WireGuard server (the endpoint to which the client connects).&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Endpoint HostPort&lt;br /&gt;
|51820&lt;br /&gt;
|The port on  the WireGuard server to which the client connects.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|PeerPublicKey&lt;br /&gt;
|*****&lt;br /&gt;
|The public  key of the peer (the server) the client is connecting to. This key is part of  the public-private key pair used in WireGuard for encryption and  authentication.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|Enable Preshared key&lt;br /&gt;
|Yes/No&lt;br /&gt;
|This option  indicates that a pre-shared key (PSK) is used in addition to the  public-private key pair for an extra layer of security.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|9&lt;br /&gt;
|Preshared key&lt;br /&gt;
|*****&lt;br /&gt;
|The actual  pre-shared key value shared between the client and the server. This option  appears only if you have enabled preshared key.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Zerotier:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ZeroTier is a tool that lets you create your own private network over the internet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Go to ZeroTier Central and sign up for a free account. In ZeroTier Central, click on &amp;quot;Create a Network&amp;quot;. This will generate a unique 16-digit network ID for your new network.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Go to settings =&amp;gt; VPN, in general settings, enable ZeroTier and save.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Zerotier Settings RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Copy and paste the unique 16-digit network ID in the edit section.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Zero Seetings Dashboard RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Zerotier Dashboard.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the save button after the required configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field Name    &lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  Value           &lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|NetworkID&lt;br /&gt;
|Ad2769hfkw2345f4&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown box the user needs to paste  the unique 16-digit network id.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Listen Port&lt;br /&gt;
|9993&lt;br /&gt;
|Default&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== 2.5 Firewall ===&lt;br /&gt;
A firewall is a layer of security between the network and the Internet. Since a router is the main connection from a network to the Internet, the firewall function is merged into this device. Every network should have a firewall to protect its privacy.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Firewall.png|frameless|635x635px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are 6 types of setting available under firewall.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* General Settings&lt;br /&gt;
* Port forwards&lt;br /&gt;
* Traffic Rules&lt;br /&gt;
* SNAT traffic Rules&lt;br /&gt;
* Parental Control&lt;br /&gt;
* Zone Forwarding&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;General Setting&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
General settings are subdivided into 2 parts,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1.) General settings&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In general settings, the settings that are made are default settings and can be changed according to user’s preference.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Firewall General Settings.png|frameless|622x622px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Specification details are below:&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;SN&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Field Name&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Sample Value&#039;&#039;&#039;      &lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Description&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Enable SYN-flood  protection&lt;br /&gt;
|Enabled&lt;br /&gt;
|This is  enabled by default; setting can be changed if required.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Disable IPV6&lt;br /&gt;
|Disabled&lt;br /&gt;
|This is  enabled by default; setting can be changed if required.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Drop invalid packets&lt;br /&gt;
|Disabled&lt;br /&gt;
|This is  enabled by default; setting can be changed if required.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|TCP SYN Cookies&lt;br /&gt;
|Disabled&lt;br /&gt;
|This is  enabled by default; setting can be changed if required.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Input&lt;br /&gt;
|Reject/Accept&lt;br /&gt;
|By  default, the setting is ‘Reject’ but this needs to be changed to ‘Accept’  compulsory.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Output&lt;br /&gt;
|Reject/Accept&lt;br /&gt;
|By  default, the setting is ‘Reject’ but this needs to be changed to ‘Accept’  compulsory.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|Forward&lt;br /&gt;
|Reject/Accept&lt;br /&gt;
|By  default, the setting is ‘Reject’ but this needs to be changed to ‘Accept’  compulsory.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2.) Zone settings&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In zone settings, there’s an option to add “New Zone”, according to user’s requirement.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Zone settings.png|thumb|628x628px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Port Forwards:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Port forwarding is a feature in a router or gateway that allows external devices to access services on a private network.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It maps an external port on the router to an internal IP address and port on the local network, enabling applications such as gaming servers, web servers, or remote desktop connections to be accessed from outside the network.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This helps in directing incoming traffic to the correct device within a local network based on the port number, enhancing connectivity and accessibility.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Firewall Port Forward.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;EDIT&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Firewall Edit Option RC44.png|frameless|622x622px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the save button after the required configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Name&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Web_Server_Forward&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|Field must  not be empty. Provide a name for the rule to easily identify it.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Protocol&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;TCP+UDP&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|Select the protocol  for the rule.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Options  typically include TCP+UDP, TCP, UDP, ICMP, Custom.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Source zone&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;SW_LAN&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|Select the  source zone where the traffic is originating from. Options typically include EWAN2,SW_LAN,CWAN1,CWAN1_0,CWAN1_1,VPN&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Source MAC address [optional]&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;any&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;any&#039;&#039;&#039;: Leave as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;any&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; if you don&#039;t want to specify a MAC address.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Source IP address[optional]&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: Leave blank if not needed.&lt;br /&gt;
|Optionally  specify an IP address or range.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Source port&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;80, 443&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;  (if matching traffic for web server ports)&lt;br /&gt;
|Specify the  source port or port range.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|Destination zone&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;SW_LAN&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|Select the  destination zone where the traffic is heading to.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|Destination IP address&lt;br /&gt;
|Leave blank if not needed.&lt;br /&gt;
|Optionally specify  the destination IP address or range.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|9&lt;br /&gt;
|Destination port&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;80&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;  (if redirecting to a web server port)&lt;br /&gt;
|Specify the  destination port or port range.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Traffic Rule:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;Traffic rules&amp;quot; refer to the policies and regulations that govern the flow of data packets within a network.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To allow new traffic, click on “Add and Edit” in “New Traffic Rule”.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Firewall Traffic Rule.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;EDIT&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Firewall Traffic Rule Edit.png|frameless|621x621px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Specification details are below:&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample Value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Name&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: Allow_HTTP_and_HTTPS&lt;br /&gt;
|Field must  not be empty: Provide a descriptive name for the traffic rule.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Restrict to Address Family&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|1.       Options:  IPv4, IPv6&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2.       Example:  IPv4 if dealing with typical internet traffic.&lt;br /&gt;
|Select the  address family to generate iptables rules for.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Protocol&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: TCP+UDP&lt;br /&gt;
|TCP+UDP:  Match incoming traffic using the given protocol.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Match ICMP Type&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: any&lt;br /&gt;
|Match all  ICMP types if set to any. Specific types can be chosen if needed.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Source Zone&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: LAN&lt;br /&gt;
|Specifies the  traffic source zone.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Enable DDoS Prevention&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: ‘Checked’ if you want to enable DDoS prevention  measures&lt;br /&gt;
|Enable or  disable Distributed Denial of Service (DDoS) prevention.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|Source MAC Address&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: any&lt;br /&gt;
|any: Match  traffic from any MAC address or specify a particular MAC address.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|Source Address&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: 192.168.1.0/24&lt;br /&gt;
|Match  incoming traffic from the specified source IP address or range.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|9&lt;br /&gt;
|Source Port&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: any if all source ports should be matched&lt;br /&gt;
|any: Match  incoming traffic from the specified source port or port range.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|10&lt;br /&gt;
|Destination Zone&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: WAN&lt;br /&gt;
|Specifies the  traffic destination zone.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|11&lt;br /&gt;
|Action&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: ACCEPT&lt;br /&gt;
|Options:  ACCEPT, DROP, REJECT. Specify the action to take for matched traffic.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|12&lt;br /&gt;
|Limit&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: 10/minute to limit matches to 10 times per  minute.&lt;br /&gt;
|Maximum  average matching rate; specified as a number, with an optional /second,  /minute, /hour, or /day suffix.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|13&lt;br /&gt;
|Extra arguments&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: --log-prefix &amp;quot;Blocked: &amp;quot; to add a log  prefix to log messages for this rule.&lt;br /&gt;
|Passes  additional arguments to iptables. Use with care as it can significantly alter  rule behaviour.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
Click on save once configured.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;SNAT Traffic Rule:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For configuring SNAT (Source Network Address Translation) traffic rules, you can control how outbound traffic from your local network is translated to a different IP address as it exits the network.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To add new source NAT,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on “ADD” in “New Source NAT:”&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SNAT Traffic Rule.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Edit&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SNAT Edit Options RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Specification details are below:&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Name&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: SNAT_WAN_to_LAN&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Field must  not be empty&#039;&#039;&#039;: Provide a unique and descriptive name for the SNAT rule.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Protocol&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: TCP+UDP&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;TCP+UDP&#039;&#039;&#039;:  Select the protocols that the SNAT rule will apply to.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Source Zone&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: wan&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;wan&#039;&#039;&#039;:  Specifies the source zone from which the traffic originates.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Source IP Address&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: any or a specific range like 192.168.1.0/24&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;-- please  choose --&#039;&#039;&#039;: Specify the source IP address or range. Leave empty if the  rule applies to any source IP.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Source Port&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: any&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;any&#039;&#039;&#039;:  Specify the source port or port range from which the traffic originates.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Destination Zone&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: lan&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;lan&#039;&#039;&#039;:  Specifies the destination zone to which the traffic is directed.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|Destination IP Address&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: any or a specific IP like 192.168.1.100&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;-- please  choose --&#039;&#039;&#039;: Specify the destination IP address or range. Leave empty if  the rule applies to any destination IP.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|Destination port&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: any&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;any&#039;&#039;&#039;:  Specify the destination port or port range to which the traffic is directed.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|9&lt;br /&gt;
|SNAT IP Address&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: 203.0.113.5 (an external IP address)&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;-- please  choose --&#039;&#039;&#039;: Specify the IP address to which the source IP should be  translated.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|10&lt;br /&gt;
|SNAT Port&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: Leave empty if not needed, or specify a port  like ‘12345’&lt;br /&gt;
|Optionally,  rewrite matched traffic to a specific source port. Leave empty to only  rewrite the IP address.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|11&lt;br /&gt;
|Extra Arguments&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: --log-prefix &amp;quot;SNAT_traffic: &amp;quot; (to add  a log prefix to log messages for this rule)&lt;br /&gt;
|Pass  additional arguments to iptables. Use with care as it can significantly alter  rule behaviour.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
Click on save once configured.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Parental Control:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For configuring parental control rules, you want to set restrictions based on time, source, and destination zones, as well as specific devices.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To add parental control in firewall,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on “Add and Edit” in “New parental control:” field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Parental Control.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Edit&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Parental Control Edit Options RC44.png|frameless|622x622px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Specification details are given below:&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  Name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  Value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Name&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  Parental_Control_Sunday&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Field must  not be empty&#039;&#039;&#039;: Provide a unique and descriptive name for the parental  control rule.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Proto&lt;br /&gt;
|all&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;all&#039;&#039;&#039;:  This specifies that the rule will apply to all protocols.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Source Zone&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: lan&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Field must  not be empty&#039;&#039;&#039;: Please look at Firewall-&amp;gt;Zone Settings to find zone  names.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Destination  Zone&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: wan&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Field must  not be empty&#039;&#039;&#039;: Please look at Firewall-&amp;gt;Zone Settings to find zone  names.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Source MAC  Address&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  00:1A:2B:3C:4D:5E&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Field&#039;&#039;&#039;:  Enter the MAC address of the device you want to apply the parental control  rule to. This is useful for restricting specific devices.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Target&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  Reject&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Accept&#039;&#039;&#039;:  This specifies the action to take. For parental controls, you might want to  use ‘Reject’ or ‘Drop’ to block traffic.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|Weekdays&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  Sunday&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Sunday&#039;&#039;&#039;:  Specify the days of the week when the rule should be active.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|Month Days&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: All&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;All:&#039;&#039;&#039; Specify  the days of the month when the rule should be active.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|9&lt;br /&gt;
|Start Time (hh:mm:ss)&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  18:00:00 (6:00 PM)&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Field must  not be empty:&#039;&#039;&#039; Specify the start time when the rule should begin to apply.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|10&lt;br /&gt;
|Stop Time  (hh:mm:ss)&lt;br /&gt;
|Example:  22:00:00 (10:00 PM)&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Field must  not be empty:&#039;&#039;&#039; Specify the stop time when the rule should end.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
Click on save once configured.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Zone Forwarding&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Zone Forwarding RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;EDIT&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Zone Forwarding editing Options RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===2.6 Loopback Rule===&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user can configure the port where he want to forward the traffic to. Here the user can add/edit/delete different port ports as per the requirement. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Loopback Rule.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user should click on add/edit to do the required changes in the port and enter the valid information in each section to configure the port for forwarding.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Loopback Rule edit.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user is done with the required configurations, should click save button and then click on the update to save the changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===2.7 Remote Monitoring===&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user can select which equipment needs to be monitor remotely, the TR-069 device or the NMS device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Remote Monitoring.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
One the user selects the type of RMS click on the save.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;NMS&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
IN this page the user should type the server IP or domain name in the URL then click on sav. Click on upload and start (Once key is uploaded and this option is clicked, NMS automatically starts, and this router device gets registered with the NMS server provided.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:NMS.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;TR069&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To enable the TR069 the user needs to click on the enable check box.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:TR069.png|frameless|582x582px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user clicks on the check box of enable it will display all the required filed to configured.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Remote Monitoring Tr-069.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Serving Interval&lt;br /&gt;
|300&lt;br /&gt;
|This displays the interval time&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Interface&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|Not sure what needs to be written&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Username&lt;br /&gt;
|Username&lt;br /&gt;
|The user needs to mention the username&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Password&lt;br /&gt;
|******&lt;br /&gt;
|The user should set the password&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|URL&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|The user needs to mention the URL&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
The user should fill all the required fields and click on the save button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===2.8 Tunnel===&lt;br /&gt;
Tunnels are a method of transporting data across a network using protocols which are not supported by that network.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tunnel Settings.png|frameless|621x621px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;General Settings&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user needs to select under which type of tunnel it needs to send the data.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tunnel General Settings.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user selects the type of tunnel then click in the save button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;GRE Tunnel&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user needs to add all the details of GRE tunnels.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user configured all the required fields then it needs to click on the save. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:GRE Tunnel.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here the user can add/edit/delete the details of the tunnel. Once the required update is done then it needs to click on update to save the changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tunnel Configuration.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;IPIP Tunnel&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user needs to add all the details of IPIP tunnels.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user configured all the required fields then it needs to click on the save. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:IPIP Tunnel.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here the user can add/edit/delete the details of the tunnel. Once the required update is done then it needs to click on update to save the changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Ipip config.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==3 Maintenance==&lt;br /&gt;
In this module the user can configure/upgrade/modify the settings related to system, password, firmware and monitoring.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Maintenance System.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It includes below submodules.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* General&lt;br /&gt;
* Password&lt;br /&gt;
* Reboot&lt;br /&gt;
* Import and Export config&lt;br /&gt;
* Firmware upgrade&lt;br /&gt;
* Monitor Application&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===3.1 General===&lt;br /&gt;
In this section the user can configure the details related to time zone and host name&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Maintenance General.png|frameless|619x619px]]&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Local Time&lt;br /&gt;
|2023/12/13 12:24:11&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|It displays the system current date and  time.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|HostName&lt;br /&gt;
|31B30230298&lt;br /&gt;
|It displays the host name.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Timezone&lt;br /&gt;
|Asia/Kolkata&lt;br /&gt;
|It displays in which time zone its configured.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user configures the required details then click on the save button to save all the details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Logging&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here the user can configure the basic aspects of your device related to system.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Maintenance logging.png|frameless|608x608px]]&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|System log buffer size&lt;br /&gt;
|32&lt;br /&gt;
|This displays the log size of system buffer&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|External system log server&lt;br /&gt;
|0.0.0.0&lt;br /&gt;
|This displays the ip add of the external system  log&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|External system log server port&lt;br /&gt;
|514&lt;br /&gt;
|This displays the port number of the external  system log&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Log output level&lt;br /&gt;
|debug&lt;br /&gt;
|In this drop down the user selects the level of  the log output.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Cron Log level&lt;br /&gt;
|debug&lt;br /&gt;
|In this drop down the user selects the level of  the corn log .&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user configures the required details then click on the save button to save all the details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Language and Style&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here the user can configure the basic aspects of your device related to language.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Maintenance Language and Style.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user configures the required details then click on the save button to save all the details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===3.2 Password===&lt;br /&gt;
In this module the user can set the password for the admin credentials.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Change you password.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Specifies the password for the guest account. If the user enter a plaintext password here, it will get replaced with a crypted password on save. The new password will be effective once the user logs out and log in again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user needs to write the password in the text box and click on the save button to save the password.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===3.3 Reboot===&lt;br /&gt;
In this module the user can reboot the device remotely.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Reboot.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To start the reboot process first the user needs to fill all the required fields.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Need to select the type of reboot for the device whether it needs to be Hardware or Software reboot.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Maintenance Reboot.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Type&lt;br /&gt;
|Maintenance Reboot&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown list the user needs to  select the type of reboot is required to configure.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Reboot Type&lt;br /&gt;
|Hardware&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown list the user needs to select  the hardware or software reboot is required.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Minutes&lt;br /&gt;
|59&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user needs to configure  the min to start the reboot activity&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Hours&lt;br /&gt;
|22&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user needs to configure  the hours to start the reboot activity&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Day of Month&lt;br /&gt;
|All&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user needs to configure  the day of the month to start the reboot activity&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Month&lt;br /&gt;
|All&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user needs to configure  the month to start the reboot activity&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|Day of the week&lt;br /&gt;
|All&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user needs to configure  the week to start the reboot activity&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user fills all the required given parameters click on the save.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To start the reboot process, click on the “Reboot Now” button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===3.4 Import and Export===&lt;br /&gt;
In this section, User can Import &amp;amp; Export Configuration files of the Device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Import and Export.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
click “Export Config” to export device configuration &amp;amp; settings to a text file,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
click “Import Config” to import device configuration &amp;amp; settings from a previously exported text file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Import window.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user need to select on the choose file to and click on the apply.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===3.5 Firmware Upgrade===&lt;br /&gt;
The user can upgrade with the latest software for the existing firmware. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Frimware Upgrade.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the &#039;&#039;&#039;flash image&#039;&#039;&#039; and chose the path where the sys-upgrade file is kept and then click on flash image, it will upgrade to the latest software once the reboot is done.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Flash Image.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the &#039;&#039;&#039;Retain Config and flash&#039;&#039;&#039; and chose the path where the sys-upgrade file is kept and then click on Retain Config and flash, it will upgrade to the latest software once the reboot is done.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Flash Image.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the &#039;&#039;&#039;Factory Reset&#039;&#039;&#039; for the complete retest of the device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===3.6 Monitor Application===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Monitor Application.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Router Application Remote Configuration.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Router Remote Configuration.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==4 Status==&lt;br /&gt;
In this module the user can view the status of the router device with respect to the network, Wan, modem etc.[[File:Status.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It has 4 submodules.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Interfaces&lt;br /&gt;
* Internet&lt;br /&gt;
* Modem&lt;br /&gt;
* Route&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===4.1 Interfaces===&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user can see the traffic status for all the network through which the device works.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Status Interfaces.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Looking on the network status the user can check if the cellular or the ethernet is up.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===4.2 Internet===&lt;br /&gt;
In this submodule the user can view the status of the internet connections.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Internet Status.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
  To see the latest status of the internet connection the user needs to click on the refresh button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===4.3 Modem===&lt;br /&gt;
In this sub module the user will get to know the status of the cellular interface which is installed inside the modem. The user can view all the details related to the sim in terms of Operator, Network technology, Mobile country code, Upload bandwidth, Download Bandwidth, Frequency band, RSRP, RSRQ, RSSI &amp;amp; SNR under this page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Modem Status.png|frameless|602x602px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== 4.4 Route ===&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user can check the status of the route for the device. The ARP status can be visible in under this page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Route Status.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==5 Features==&lt;br /&gt;
In this module the user can see all the features that the router device has.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This module includes the below features.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Mac Address Binding&lt;br /&gt;
* URL Filtering&lt;br /&gt;
* Web Server&lt;br /&gt;
* Wi-Fi MacID Filtering&lt;br /&gt;
* Routing&lt;br /&gt;
* Others&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Features.png|frameless|618x618px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===5.1 Mac Address Binding===&lt;br /&gt;
Under this submodule the user can configure/update/edit the IP Address for MAC&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mac Addressing Binding.png|frameless|622x622px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user should write MAC address and then click on the add button. Once the address is added then click on the update button to save the modification.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user needs to click on the Edit button to modify the preexisting configuration. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mac Address Edit.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user modifies the MAC address /IP Address then click on the save button to save the changes done.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user can click on the deleted button to delete an existing configured device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Post all the changes the user needs to click on the update to reflect all the changes in the application.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===5.2 URL Filtering===&lt;br /&gt;
In this submodule the user should provide the URL which needs to be blocked for the device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:URL Filtering.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To add the new URL for blocking, click on the Add New button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user clicks on the Add New button a new pop will appear in that page write the URL and click on the save. The user can select the status of that URL while defining the URL.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Url Update.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To edit / delete the existing URL the user needs to click on the edit /deleted button respectively.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Edit or Delete URL.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the save after the changes are done as per the need.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== 5.3 Web Server ===&lt;br /&gt;
In this submodule the user can configure webserver related parameters.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Web server.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To configure the HTTP, click on the enable HTTP. Once the user clicks on the check box the HTTP Port text box will appear where the user needs to configure the port id.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Webserver Configuration.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on save buttons to save the changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To configure the 2nd HTTP, click on the enable HTTP. Once the user clicks on the check box the HTTP Port text box will appear where the user needs to configure the port id.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Webserver Https Redirect.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on save buttons to save the changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the “Redirect https” and “RFC1918 Filter” check box to respectively and click on the save button to save the changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To configure the NTP sync, click on the enable NTP sync. Once the user clicks on the check box the respective text boxes will appear to configure the parameters. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:RFC1918 Filter.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user configures the parameters click on the save button to save the given values.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===5.4 Wi-Fi MacID Filtering===&lt;br /&gt;
In this module the user can filter the Macids. Mac address filtering allows users to block traffic coming from certain known machines or devices.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Wi-Fi MacID Filtering.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Before adding the MacIDs the user needs to select the mode from the dropdown menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To Add the MacID the user needs to click on Add New option select the mac id and network name Wi-Fi 2.4G AP OR Wi-Fi 2.4G AP Guest, select enable/disable option and save it and update.              &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Configuring MacID and Network Name.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the required MACID and Network Name is configured the user needs to click on the save button to add the details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user needs to click on the edit button to do modifications on the pre-existing configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Macid and name removing.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the required MACID / Network Name is modified the user needs to click on the save button to reflect the changed value in the application.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;WIFI 2.4G AP Guest&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To Add the MacID the user needs to click on Add New option select the mac id and network name Wi-Fi 2.4G AP Guest, select enable/disable option and save it and update.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
     [[File:WIFI 2.4G AP Guest.png|frameless|623x623px]]  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the required MACID and Network Name is configured the user needs to click on the save button to add the details. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user needs to click on the edit button to do modifications on the pre-existing configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Configuring MacID and Network Name.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the required MACID / Network Name is modified the user needs to click on the save button to reflect the changed value in the application.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===5.5 Routing===&lt;br /&gt;
In this submodule the user can configure the parameters related to routing of the device. like Target address, Networks address etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Routing IPV4 Routes.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To add a new device the user needs to fill all the required information and click on the add button.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Interface&lt;br /&gt;
|eth0.1&lt;br /&gt;
|In this drop down list the user should  configure the interface name.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Target&lt;br /&gt;
|192.168.10.1&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user needs to insert the  target IP address&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|IPV4 Netmask&lt;br /&gt;
|255.255.255.0&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user should give the  address for the IPV4Netmask&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Metric&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user should insert the  number of the metric.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|IPV4 Gateway&lt;br /&gt;
|192.168.100.1&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user should configured the  address for the IPV4 Gateway.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Route Type&lt;br /&gt;
|Unicast&lt;br /&gt;
|In this drop down box the user should select  the type of route needed for the device.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
To edit the existing device the user needs to click on the edit option.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Routing Configuration.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the changes are done click on the save button to save all the changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the deleted button to delete the existing device detail.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Advanced Static IPV4 Routes:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Advanced Static IPV4 Routes.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To add a new device the user needs to fill all the required information and click on the add button.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Interface&lt;br /&gt;
|eth0.1&lt;br /&gt;
|In this drop down list the user should  configure the interface name.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|To&lt;br /&gt;
|192.168.10.1&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user needs to insert the  target IP address&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|IPV4 Netmask&lt;br /&gt;
|255.255.255.0&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user should give the  address for the IPV4Netmask&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Table&lt;br /&gt;
|local&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|From&lt;br /&gt;
|192.168.100.1&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user should configured the  from address for the routes&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Priority&lt;br /&gt;
|230&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
To edit the existing device the user needs to click on the edit option.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Routing Editing.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the changes are done click on the save button to save all the changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the deleted button to delete the existing device detail.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once all the configurations are done click on the update button to reflect the changes made.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===5.6 Others===&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user will get to do all the other miscellaneous configuration with respect to the device based on the required parameters.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Miscellaneous configuration.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Utility&lt;br /&gt;
|Action&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Set Date&lt;br /&gt;
|SET&lt;br /&gt;
|Need to set the date and time and after  click command get the Date and time&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Gate Date&lt;br /&gt;
|GET&lt;br /&gt;
|Needs to get the system date and time&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|IPsec status all&lt;br /&gt;
|GET&lt;br /&gt;
|Needs to get the IPsec details&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Wi-Fi Scan&lt;br /&gt;
|GET&lt;br /&gt;
|Needs to get the Wi-Fi status&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|ipref3 client&lt;br /&gt;
|RUN&lt;br /&gt;
|Needs to click on the RUN to execute  the command&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|ipref3 server&lt;br /&gt;
|RUN&lt;br /&gt;
|Needs to click on the RUN to execute  the command&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|Ping&lt;br /&gt;
|PING&lt;br /&gt;
|Needs to click on the ping status&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|9&lt;br /&gt;
|Traceroute&lt;br /&gt;
|RUN&lt;br /&gt;
|Needs to click on the ping Traceroute status&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|10&lt;br /&gt;
|NTP Sync&lt;br /&gt;
|SYNC&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to Sync the NTP&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|11&lt;br /&gt;
|Download Files&lt;br /&gt;
|DOWNLOAD&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to Download the files /Database&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|12&lt;br /&gt;
|Restart Power&lt;br /&gt;
|RESTART&lt;br /&gt;
|Click Restart the power&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|13&lt;br /&gt;
|Restart Modem&lt;br /&gt;
|RESTART&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to Restart the modem&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|14&lt;br /&gt;
|Run at command&lt;br /&gt;
|RUN&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to Run the command&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|15&lt;br /&gt;
|Show board configuration&lt;br /&gt;
|SHOW&lt;br /&gt;
|To Show the board configuration&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|16&lt;br /&gt;
|Show VPN Certificate Name&lt;br /&gt;
|SHOW&lt;br /&gt;
|To Show VPN Certificate Name&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|17&lt;br /&gt;
|Switch SIM to Secondary&lt;br /&gt;
|RUN&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to switch the SIM to secondary  mode&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|18&lt;br /&gt;
|Send Test SMS&lt;br /&gt;
|SEND&lt;br /&gt;
|To Send the SMS Confirmation&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|19&lt;br /&gt;
|Readlatest SMS&lt;br /&gt;
|READ&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to Read the latest SMS&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|20&lt;br /&gt;
|Data Usage&lt;br /&gt;
|SHOW&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to show the data usage.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|21&lt;br /&gt;
|Monthly Data Usage&lt;br /&gt;
|SHOW&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to show the monthly data usage&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|22&lt;br /&gt;
|Modem debug Info&lt;br /&gt;
|READ&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to read the information about the  modem debug&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|23&lt;br /&gt;
|Scan Network operators (take&amp;gt;3mins)&lt;br /&gt;
|SHOW&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to show the Network operator&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|24&lt;br /&gt;
|Network operators (first perform scan  network operator&lt;br /&gt;
|SHOW&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to show the Network operator&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|25&lt;br /&gt;
|ReadLogFiles&lt;br /&gt;
|READ&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to read the log files&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|26&lt;br /&gt;
|Enable ssh&lt;br /&gt;
|RUN&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to Run the command&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|27&lt;br /&gt;
|Disable ssh&lt;br /&gt;
|RUN&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to Run the command&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|28&lt;br /&gt;
|Clear SIM1 Data&lt;br /&gt;
|CLEAR&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to clear the SIM1 data&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|29&lt;br /&gt;
|Clear SIM2 Data&lt;br /&gt;
|CLEAR&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to clear the SIM data&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==6 Logout==&lt;br /&gt;
The user should click on log out option to logged out from the router application.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Logout.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user needs to click on the ok to come out of the router application.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tanisha</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.silbonetworks.com/index.php?title=RC44_User_Manual&amp;diff=1140</id>
		<title>RC44 User Manual</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.silbonetworks.com/index.php?title=RC44_User_Manual&amp;diff=1140"/>
		<updated>2024-09-02T10:38:32Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tanisha: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;This page contains the user manual for RC44.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Connecting with the device to the System (Laptop/Desktop).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To log in to SILBO_RC44 by connecting the router to your laptop or desktop via LAN or using Wi-Fi, please follow the steps below. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Connecting via LAN:&#039;&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Connect your laptop&#039;s LAN port to one of the router&#039;s LAN interfaces. Ensure that you select any LAN interface (there are two available) while making sure the WAN interface is not used. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
                                                                                                                                                          &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;How to connect with the SILBO_RC44&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;application&#039;&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the LAN connection is established between the device and the laptop or the desktop&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please open the command prompt and ping go get the ip config of that device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Type the command &#039;&#039;&#039;Ipconfig&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:How_to_connect_with_the_SILBO_RB44_application.png|alt=How to connect with the SILBO RB44 application|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It will provide the Ip address/url of that device through which the application can be accessed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Connecting_via_LAN_RB44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Log In==&lt;br /&gt;
Open the web browser and type the IP address in the URL.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It will show the log in page of the application.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Log In.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Give the valid credentials for the username and password to login to the application page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user credentials are provided it will direct to the landing page of the application.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Login Dashboard RC44.png|frameless|636x636px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The “Status” landing page shows all the detailed specification of the device like system, memory storage and connection tracking etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The application is divided in to 6 Modules.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Info&lt;br /&gt;
* Settings&lt;br /&gt;
* Maintenance&lt;br /&gt;
* Status&lt;br /&gt;
* Features&lt;br /&gt;
* Logout&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==1.Info==&lt;br /&gt;
The “Info” module provides the information about the devices to the user.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It provides all the specification related to the hardware, firmware, Networks and the Connection uptimes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It has 3 submodules.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Overview&lt;br /&gt;
* System Log&lt;br /&gt;
* Kernel Log&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Info dashboard RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===1.1 Overview===&lt;br /&gt;
In overview module it displays all the specification categorically of a device like System, Memory, storage, Connection tracking, DHCP Lease.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Login Dashboard RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;System&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this section it displays the hardware configured specification of the device.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Info system RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The specifications details are as follows,&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&lt;br /&gt;
!SN&lt;br /&gt;
!Field name &lt;br /&gt;
!Sample value&lt;br /&gt;
!Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Hostname&lt;br /&gt;
|22B09230239&lt;br /&gt;
|This field  displays the router serial number of the device&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Model&lt;br /&gt;
|Silbo_RC44- EC200A&lt;br /&gt;
|This field  displays the model number of the device&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Firmware Version and IPK Version&lt;br /&gt;
|1.16_1.13_RC3&lt;br /&gt;
|This field  displays the firmware version and IPK version&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Kernel Version&lt;br /&gt;
|4.14.180&lt;br /&gt;
|This field  displays the kernel version of the device&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Local Time&lt;br /&gt;
|Monday, July 1, 2024, at 05:43:58 PM&lt;br /&gt;
|This field  displays the local time&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Uptime&lt;br /&gt;
|0h 7m 29s&lt;br /&gt;
|This field  displays the uptime of the device&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|Load Average&lt;br /&gt;
|1.73 1.87 1.04&lt;br /&gt;
|This field  displays the average load&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Memory&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this section it displays the memory configured specification of the device.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Memory Dashboard RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The specifications details are as follows.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Total Available&lt;br /&gt;
|68676 kB / 124208 kB (55%)&lt;br /&gt;
|This field  displays the total availability of memory space in the device&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Free&lt;br /&gt;
|59344 kB / 124208 kB (47%)&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the  Free memory space in the device&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Cached&lt;br /&gt;
|312 kB / 124208 kB (0%)&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the  Cached memory space in the device&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Buffered&lt;br /&gt;
|9332 kB / 124208 kB (7%)&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the  Buffered memory space in the device&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Storage&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this section it displays the status of storage as root and temporary usage specification of the device.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Storage Dashboard RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The specifications details are as follows.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Root Usage&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
796 kB / 15488 kB (5%)&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays  the total root usage of the device&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Temporary  Usage&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
312 kB / 62104 kB (0%)&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the total temporary  usage of the device&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Connection Tracking&#039;&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this section it displays the status of connection tracking for the device.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Connection Tracking RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The specifications details are as follows.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Active Connection&lt;br /&gt;
|48 / 16384 (0%)&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the active connection of the device.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;DHCP Leases&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this section, it displays the DHCP lease of the temporary assignment of an IP address to a device on the network.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:DCHP Leases RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The specifications details are as follows.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Host Name&lt;br /&gt;
|KermaniK-LT&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays  the configured Host Name/User Name for that device.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|IPv4-Address&lt;br /&gt;
|192.168.10.147&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the IP  address of the device.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|MAC-Address&lt;br /&gt;
|34:73:5a:bb: ab:7a&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the MAC-Address  of the device.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Lease time remaining&lt;br /&gt;
|11h 53m 49s&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the lease  time remaining for the device.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===1.2 System Log===&lt;br /&gt;
This page provides on screen System logging information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user gets to view the system logs &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:System Log.png|frameless|617x617px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===1.3 Kernel Log===&lt;br /&gt;
This page provides on-screen Kernel logging information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this page, the user gets to view the Kernel logs&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Kernel Log.png|frameless|621x621px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==2. Setting==&lt;br /&gt;
In this “Setting” module the user can Configure/update all the required parameters related to Network, SIM Switch, Internet, VPN, Firewall, Loopback Rule, Remote monitoring, Tunnel as per requirement.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
IT consist of 8 submodules.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Network&lt;br /&gt;
* Sim Switch&lt;br /&gt;
* Internet&lt;br /&gt;
* VPN&lt;br /&gt;
* Firewall&lt;br /&gt;
* Loopback Rule&lt;br /&gt;
* Remote Monitoring&lt;br /&gt;
* Tunnel&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Settings.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===2.1 Network===&lt;br /&gt;
In this section the user does all the setting related configuration with reference to network like Ethernet Setting, Cellular Setting, Band lock and Operator Lock, Wi-Fi, Guest Wi-Fi, Wireless Schedule, SMS Setting, Loopback IP.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Network Dashboard RC44.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Ethernet Setting&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this page it will display all the configured port that is attached with the device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For this device 3 ports are configured. Ethernet mode can be configured as WAN and as LAN as well. Ethernet LAN Connection settings can be configured as DHCP server or Static.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Ethernet Settings RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;For port 3 setting&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Kindly select the option &#039;&#039;&#039;LAN4&#039;&#039;&#039; for &#039;&#039;&#039;Port 3 mode LAN/WAN&#039;&#039;&#039;. Based on the option selected the filed will also changes the user needs to configure all the required field and click on the save to save the required fields.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Ethernet Settings RC44 part 2.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Port 3 mode LAN/WAN&lt;br /&gt;
|LAN&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the port mode selection&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Port 3 Ethernet Protocol [LAN Eth0.1]&lt;br /&gt;
|DHCP Server&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the Ethernet mode selection&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Port 3 DHCP Server IP&lt;br /&gt;
|192.168.10.1&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays DHCP server IP configured.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Port 3 DHCP Netmask&lt;br /&gt;
|255.255.255.0&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays DHCP server Netmask address configured&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Port 3 DHCP Start Address&lt;br /&gt;
|100&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays DHCP server  start address configured&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Port 3 DHCP Limit&lt;br /&gt;
|50&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays DHCP server  limit&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Kindly select the option &#039;&#039;&#039;EWAN&#039;&#039;&#039; for &#039;&#039;&#039;Port 3 mode LAN/WAN&#039;&#039;&#039;. Based on the option selected the filed will also changes the user needs to configure all the required field and click on the save to save the required fields.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:EWAN Port 3 Configuration RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Port 3 mode LAN/WAN&lt;br /&gt;
|EWAN&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the port mode selection&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Ethernet Protocol Port 3 WAN&lt;br /&gt;
|DHCP  client&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the client&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Gateway&lt;br /&gt;
|192.168.1.1&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays gateway address  configured&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the save once all the configuration is done and click on the update button to update all the information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;SW_LAN settings&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this part the user can configure the setting for SW_LAN &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SW LAN settings RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|SW_LAN Ethernet Protocol&lt;br /&gt;
|DHCP  Server&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the  Ethernet mode selection&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|SW_LAN DHCP Server IP&lt;br /&gt;
|192.168.10.1&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays DHCP server IP  configured.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|SW_LAN  DHCP Netmask&lt;br /&gt;
|255.255.255.0&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays DHCP server  Netmask address configured&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|SW_LAN  DHCP Start Address&lt;br /&gt;
|100&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays DHCP server  start address configured&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|SW_LAN  DHCP Limit&lt;br /&gt;
|50&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays DHCP server  limit&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|DNS  Server&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|This filed display number of DSN  server availability&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|DNS  Server Address&lt;br /&gt;
|8.8.8.8&lt;br /&gt;
|This  filed display the DSN server address.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After configuring all the required information, the user should click on the save and then click on the update to update the all the required information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Static option for SW_LAN Ethernet Protocol&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the option of static from the drop-down menu for SW_LAN Ethernet Protocol.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SW LAN settings Static Ethernet Protocol.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|SW_LAN Ethernet Protocol&lt;br /&gt;
|Static&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the  Ethernet mode selection&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|SW_LAN static IP&lt;br /&gt;
|192.168.5.1&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays static server IP  configured.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|SW_LAN  Netmask&lt;br /&gt;
|255.255.255.0&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays static server  Netmask address configured&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|DNS  Server&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|This filed display number of DSN  server availability&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|DSN  Server Address&lt;br /&gt;
|8.8.8.8&lt;br /&gt;
|This  filed display the DSN server address.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
After configuring all the required information, the user should click on the save and then click on the update to update the all the required information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Cellular Setting&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this page, the user needs to configure the various details with respect to the SIM.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
select single cellular single sim where the user must configure the APN details of the sim used for the router device. The Configurations can be done based on the SIM usage, with respect to IPV4 or IPV.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Cellular Settings RC44.png|frameless|619x619px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Cellular  Operation Mode&lt;br /&gt;
|Single Cellular with Dual Sim&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays  the cellular operation mode.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Cellular  Modem 1&lt;br /&gt;
|QuectelEC200A&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the modem name.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Network  Mode&lt;br /&gt;
|Automatic&lt;br /&gt;
|This  field displays the  Network mode selection&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM 1  Access Point Name&lt;br /&gt;
|airtelgprs.com&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the  name of the Sim 1 access point configured.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM 1  PDP Type&lt;br /&gt;
|IPV4&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays  the type of SIM 1&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM 1  Username&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|This field is optional, and the user can configure the name of  the SIM 1&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM 1  Password&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|This  field is optional, and the user can configure the password for the SIM 1&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM 1  Authentication Protocol&lt;br /&gt;
|None&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the type of  protocol is being used for SIM 1&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|9&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM 2  Access Point Name&lt;br /&gt;
|airtelgprs.com&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the name of the  Sim 2 access point configured.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|10&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM 2  PDP Type&lt;br /&gt;
|IPV4&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the type of SIM  2&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|11&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM 2  Username&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|This  field is optional, and the user can configure the name of the SIM 2&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|12&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM 2  Password&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|This  field is optional, and the user can configure the password for the SIM 2&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|13&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM 2  Authentication Protocol&lt;br /&gt;
|None&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the type of  protocol is being used for SIM 2&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|14&lt;br /&gt;
|Primary  SIM Switchback Time (In Minutes)&lt;br /&gt;
|10&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the time given  for sim to swich in between.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
After configuring all the required information, the user should click on the save and then click on the update to update the all the required information. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Band lock and Operator Lock&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this page, the user needs to configure the lock band and operator based on the service provider&#039;&#039;&#039;.&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Bands available in the drop-down list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Band lock and Operator Lock.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;2G/3G option&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2G/3G: - 3G allows additional features such as mobile internet access, video calls and mobile TV. While the main function of 2G technology is the transmission of information through voice calls.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:2G-3G option.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user should select the band check box  available for 2g/3g  from the given list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Bands available for selection under LTE for the bands available that zone.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Operator Selection Mode&#039;&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user needs to click on the check box of the “operator select enable” to select the operator.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the check box is clicked there will be a dropdown list of the operator modes from which the user needs to select the mode. The user needs to select the operator mode from the given dropdown list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Operator Selection Mode.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the user selects the mode “Manual” or “Manual-Automatic” then one more text box will appear where the user must provide the operator code.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Band lock and Operator Lock 1.png|frameless|542x542px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After configuring all the required information, the user should click on the save and then click on the update to update the all the required information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Wi-Fi Setting&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wi-Fi is a family of wireless network protocols based on the IEEE 802.11 family of standards, which are commonly used for local area network of devices and internet access, allowing nearby digital devices to exchanges data by radio waves. These are the most widely used computer network, used globally in home and small office networks to link devices and to provided internet access with wireless router and wireless access point in public places. In this router has the general setting and change country code, channel, radio mode, radio passphrase as per the requirement after clicking on enable Radio button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Wi-Fi Setting.png|frameless|585x585px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user needs to select the respective radio mode based on its need. Basically, it has 3 radio mode.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Wi-Fi Setting access Point.png|frameless|590x590px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Access Point mode:&#039;&#039;&#039; In Access Point mode, router connects to a wireless router through an Ethernet cable to extend the coverage of wireless signal to other network client.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Access Point Mode RC44.png|frameless|573x573px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Client point:&#039;&#039;&#039;  In client mode, the access point connects your wired devices to a wireless network. This mode is suitable when you have a wired device with an Ethernet port and no wireless capability, for example, a smart TV, Media Player, or Game console and you want to connect it to the internet wirelessly, select the Client Mode and give the Radio SSID &amp;amp; client passphrase&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Client Point RC44.png|frameless|587x587px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Access point and client point&#039;&#039;&#039;: select this option for both type connection, give both SSID and passphrase.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Access point and Client Point RC44.png|frameless|571x571px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After configuring all the required information, the user should click on the save and then click on the update to update the all the required information.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Radio  0 Protocol&lt;br /&gt;
|IEEE 802.11 b/g/n&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the  user should select which protocol is being used&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Country  Code&lt;br /&gt;
|INDIA&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the  user should select which county it belongs to.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Channel&lt;br /&gt;
|Auto&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user should  select the proper channel to be used.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|TX  Power&lt;br /&gt;
|100&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user should  specify the power.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Channel  Width&lt;br /&gt;
|20 MHz&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user should  select the channel width&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Radio  Mode&lt;br /&gt;
|Access  point&lt;br /&gt;
|In this drop down the user should  select the mode.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|Radio  SSID&lt;br /&gt;
|APClient_22B09230239&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user should  specify the SSID number&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|Radio  Authentication&lt;br /&gt;
|WPA2  Personal (PSK)&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user should  select the type of authentication.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|9&lt;br /&gt;
|Radio  Encryption&lt;br /&gt;
|AES&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user should  select the type of encryption required.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|10&lt;br /&gt;
|Radio  Passphrase&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user should  specify the password.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|11&lt;br /&gt;
|Radio  DHCP server IP&lt;br /&gt;
|192.168.100.1&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user should  specify the IP address of DHCP server.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|12&lt;br /&gt;
|Radio  DHCP start address&lt;br /&gt;
|100&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user should  specify the start address of the DHCP.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|13&lt;br /&gt;
|Radio  DHCP limit&lt;br /&gt;
|50&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user should  specify the limit for the DHCP.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Wireless Schedule&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wi-Fi can be automatically withdrawn based on the configuration done in this section.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user can schedule the Wi-Fi’s accessibility time during a particular period.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Wireless Schedule.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After configuring all the required information, the user should click on the save and then click on the update to update the all the required information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user can select more than one “day of the week” for scheduling the wifi working hours.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Wifi Schedule.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Loop back IP settings&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The loopback IP address, often referred to as “localhost”. it’s used to establish network connections within the same device for testing and troubleshooting purpose.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Loop back IP settings.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After configuring all the required information, the user should click on the save and then click on the update to update the all the required information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The loopback IP address, commonly represented as 127.0.0.1, is a special address used for testing network connectivity on a local machine. It allows a device to send network messages to itself without involving external networks, making it useful for troubleshooting and diagnostics.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
However, this IP can be changed as per requirement and to do that, Navigating to Setting&amp;gt;&amp;gt;Network configuration&amp;gt;&amp;gt; Loopback IP settings can be changed/updated.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Above screenshot shows the configuration window from GUI/WebUI&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;SMS Settings&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
User needs to enable SMS option in SMS settings page. This option is to validate the mobile numbers using which controlling commands could be sent to the router device. 1 to 5 mobile numbers can be authenticated by choosing from “Select Valid SMS user numbers” and adding the mobile numbers below respectively. API key is the pass key used in the commands while sending SMS. Displayed in the below screen is the default API key which can be edited and changed as per choice.   After addition of the mobile numbers user needs to click on save button for changes to take place.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SMS Settings.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select valid user number max. 5 and add authorized phone number in the main menu where want to find the alert and click on SMS Response Enable, save and update button, now send SMS commands from the configured mobile number. Once the commands are received from the user phone number the board send acknowledgement as per the commands after that it will send the router’s status once it has rebooted and is operational again. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mentioned below are a few commands which can be sent from the configured mobile number to the router device. Below two commands are One for rebooting the router device and another to get the uptime.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1) {&amp;quot;device&amp;quot;:[&amp;quot;passkey&amp;quot;,&amp;quot;API key&amp;quot;],&amp;quot;command&amp;quot;:&amp;quot;reboot&amp;quot;,&amp;quot;arguments&amp;quot;:&amp;quot;hardware&amp;quot;}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2) {&amp;quot;device&amp;quot;:[&amp;quot;passkey &amp;quot;,&amp;quot;API key&amp;quot;],&amp;quot;command&amp;quot;:&amp;quot;uptime&amp;quot;}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After configuring all the required information, the user should click on the save and then click on the update to update the all the required information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===2.2 SIM===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user needs to configure the Sim for the given device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SIM Switch.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user needs to select from the drop-down menu on which basis the sim needs to be switched.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Sim Switch Configuration.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user selects on “&#039;&#039;&#039;signal strength&#039;&#039;&#039;” then the parameters related to signal strength will pop up and the user needs to configure the parameters based on the requirement &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Signal Strength.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Threshold RSRP&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This Needs to be set appropriately. Incorrect setting may cause unnecessary SIM switching. ( In General a BAD RSRP value range is -140 to -115 and FAIR RSRP value range is -115 to -105).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Threshold SINR&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This Needs to be set appropriately. Incorrect setting may cause unnecessary SIM switching. ( In General a BAD SNR value range is -20 to 0 and FAIR SNR value range is 0 to 13)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user selects on “&#039;&#039;&#039;Data Limit&#039;&#039;&#039;” then the parameters related to Data Limit will pop up and the user needs to configure the parameters based on the requirement.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Data limit.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM Switch Based on&lt;br /&gt;
|Data Limit&lt;br /&gt;
|The user needs to select from the  drop-down menu on what basis the sim needs to be switched.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM 1 Data Usage Limit (In MB)&lt;br /&gt;
|1000&lt;br /&gt;
|The user needs to set the limit for the data  usage for SIM 1.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM 2 Data Usage Limit (In MB)&lt;br /&gt;
|1000&lt;br /&gt;
|The user needs to set the limit for the data  usage for SIM 2.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Periodicity&lt;br /&gt;
|Daily&lt;br /&gt;
|The user needs to set the pattern/frequency to  switch the sims.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Day Of Month&lt;br /&gt;
|16&lt;br /&gt;
|The user needs to set the day for switching the  sim.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
After configuring all the required information, the user should click on the save.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===2.3 Internet===&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user needs to configure the internet connection to set the priority from the various options. The user should decide what kind of connection it needs to provide to the device like LAN, WAN etc. Once the connections are configured then click on save option and then on update.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Internet.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the user needs to edit on the existing configuration, then the user should click on the “EDIT” button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Network Edit Options.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Name&lt;br /&gt;
|EWAN2&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the name of the WAN  connection&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Priority&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown box the user need to select  the priority.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Select Track IP Numbers&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user needs to select the  track number for the Ips.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|TrackIP1&lt;br /&gt;
|8.8.8.8&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text field the user needs to set the IP  address for the track 1&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|TrackIP2&lt;br /&gt;
|8.8.4.4&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text field the user needs to set the IP  address for the track 1&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Reliability&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Not sure what needs to be written&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|Count&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Not sure what needs to be written&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|Up&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Not sure what needs to be written&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|9&lt;br /&gt;
|Down&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Not sure what needs to be written&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user is done with modification click on the save button to save all the changes and then click on the update button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===2.4 VPN===&lt;br /&gt;
VPN stands for &#039;&#039;&#039;Virtual Private Network&#039;&#039;&#039;, it establishes a connection between the system and a remote server, which is owned by a VPN provider.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Creating a point-to-point tunnel that encrypts the personal data, masks the IP address, and allows to block the required website to blocks via firewalls on the internet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:VPN Settings RC44.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are 5 types of setting available under VPN configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* General Settings&lt;br /&gt;
* IPSEC&lt;br /&gt;
* Open VPN&lt;br /&gt;
* Wireguard&lt;br /&gt;
* Zerotier&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;General Settings&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user must choose which type of VPN connection is required for the device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user must select from IPSEC or Open VPN based on its requirement. If required, the user can select for both the options. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:VPN General Settings RC44.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user needs to click on the save after selecting the option based on its requirement.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;IPSEC&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
IPSEC VPN is used to create a VPN connection between local and remote networks. To use IPSEC VPN, the user should check that both local and remote routers support IPSEC VPN feature.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user can add/edit/delete the IPSEC VPN connection for the device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:VPN IPSEC changes RC44.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user needs to click on the update button once the required configuration is completed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In IPSEC the user needs to click on edit button to edit the configuration of an existing VPN connection.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:VPN Edit Options.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the save button after the required configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The tunnel will show established, showing the connection has been made.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:IPSEC .png|thumb|631x631px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|IPSEC&lt;br /&gt;
|Site to Site VPN&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user should select  the IPSEC connection type.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|IPSEC Role&lt;br /&gt;
|Client/Server&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown box the user needs to select  the IPSEC role.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Connection Type&lt;br /&gt;
|Tunnel&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user needs to select the connection  type. The user should select on the connection enable check box.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Connection mode&lt;br /&gt;
|start&lt;br /&gt;
|In this drop down list the user should select  the mode for the connection. it will have route/add/start/trap mode&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Remote Server IP&lt;br /&gt;
|1.1.1.1&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text field the user needs to set the IP  address for the remote server.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Local ID&lt;br /&gt;
|g300&lt;br /&gt;
|The user needs to set the local id.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|No. of local subnets&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user needs to select how  many subnets it will be connected.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|Local Subnet 1&lt;br /&gt;
|192.168.11.1/24&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user needs to put the  address of the local subnet.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|9&lt;br /&gt;
|Remote id&lt;br /&gt;
|sophos&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user needs to put the id  of the remote connection.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|10&lt;br /&gt;
|No of remote subnet&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user needs to select how  many subnets it will be connected remotely.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|11&lt;br /&gt;
|Remote subnet&lt;br /&gt;
|192.168.10.0/24&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user needs to put the  address of the remote subnet.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|12&lt;br /&gt;
|Key exchange&lt;br /&gt;
|Ikev1&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user should select the  which key exchange version to be selected.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|13&lt;br /&gt;
|Aggressive&lt;br /&gt;
|Yes/No&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user should select either  yes or no .&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|14&lt;br /&gt;
|IKE lifetime&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|Fill according to user’s requirements.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|15&lt;br /&gt;
|Lifetime in seconds&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Fill according to user’s requirements.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|16&lt;br /&gt;
|Enable DPD Detection&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;1&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
0&lt;br /&gt;
|Indicates  whether Dead Peer Detection is enabled to detect a lost connection. Enable  this option as per server-side settings.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|17&lt;br /&gt;
|Time Interval (In Seconds)&lt;br /&gt;
|60&lt;br /&gt;
|This option  is available only if DPD Detection is enabled. The time interval is the  interval for DPD checks.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|18&lt;br /&gt;
|Action&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Restart&#039;&#039;&#039;/clear/hold/&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
trap/start&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Restart&#039;&#039;&#039;: Action to take when  DPD detects a lost connection (restart the connection). Select as per  server-side setting.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|19&lt;br /&gt;
|Authentication Method&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;PSK&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;PSK&#039;&#039;&#039;: Pre-shared key is used  for authentication. Select this option for authentication as per sever side  setting.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|20&lt;br /&gt;
|Multiple Secrets&lt;br /&gt;
|1/&#039;&#039;&#039;0&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|Indicates  whether multiple PSK secrets are used. Enable only if required.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|21&lt;br /&gt;
|PSK Value&lt;br /&gt;
|******&lt;br /&gt;
|Pre-shared  key value (masked for security).&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;*Below are Phase I and Phase II settings details*&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&lt;br /&gt;
! colspan=&amp;quot;4&amp;quot; |                                                        &#039;&#039;&#039;Proposal settings Phase I&#039;&#039;&#039;                                                                                                                     &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|22            &lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Encryption Algorithm&#039;&#039;&#039;                                                 &lt;br /&gt;
|AES 128&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AES 192&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;AES 256&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3DES                                                                                                                                     &lt;br /&gt;
|                                                                                                                                     &#039;&#039;&#039;AES 256&#039;&#039;&#039;: Encryption algorithm  for Phase I. Select as per server-side configuration. Both server and client  should have same configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|23&lt;br /&gt;
|Authentication Phase I&lt;br /&gt;
|SHA1&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MD5&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SHA 256&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SHA 384&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;SHA 512&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;SHA 512&#039;&#039;&#039;: Authentication  algorithm for Phase I.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select as per  server-side configuration. Both server and client should have same configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|24&lt;br /&gt;
|DH Group&lt;br /&gt;
|MODP768(group1)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MODP1024(group2)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MODP1536(group5)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;MODP2048(group14)&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MODP3072(group15)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MODP4096(group16)&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;MODP2048 (group14)&#039;&#039;&#039;:  Diffie-Hellman group for key exchange.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select as per  server-side configuration. Both server and client should have same  configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| colspan=&amp;quot;4&amp;quot; |                                                                                                                                                                 &#039;&#039;&#039;Proposal settings Phase II&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|25&lt;br /&gt;
|Hash Algorithm&lt;br /&gt;
|AES 128&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AES 192&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;AES 256&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3DES&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;AES 256&#039;&#039;&#039;: Encryption algorithm  for Phase II. Select as per server-side configuration. Both server and client  should have same configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|26&lt;br /&gt;
|Authentication Phase II&lt;br /&gt;
|SHA1&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MD5&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SHA 256&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SHA 384&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;SHA 512&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;SHA 512&#039;&#039;&#039;: Authentication  algorithm for Phase II.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select as per  server-side configuration. Both server and client should have same  configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|27&lt;br /&gt;
|PFS Group&lt;br /&gt;
|MODP768(group1)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MODP1024(group2)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MODP1536(group5)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;MODP2048(group14)&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MODP3072(group15)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MODP4096(group16)&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;MODP2048 (group14)&#039;&#039;&#039;: Perfect  Forward Secrecy group.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select as per  server-side configuration. Both server and client should have same  configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Open VPN&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the OpenVPN connection, the home network can act as a server, and the remote device can access the server through the router which acts as an OpenVPN Server gateway. To use the VPN feature, the user should enable OpenVPN Server on the router, and install and run VPN client software on the remote device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Open VPN Settings RC44.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user needs to “upload” the respective certificate from a valid path and then click on the “Update.”&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the OpenVPN connection starts the user will get an option to enable/disable the VPN connection as and when required.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By clicking on the enable/disable button, the user can start/stop the VPN connection.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Open VPN Settings RC44 Dashboard.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
VPN has been established.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;WireGuard:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;WireGuard&#039;&#039;&#039; is simple, fast, lean, and modern VPN that utilizes secure and trusted cryptography.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on “Edit” to start configurations as needed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Wire Guard RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;EDIT:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Wire Guard RC44 Setttings.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the save button after the required configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample Value     &lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Wireguard Role&lt;br /&gt;
|Client/Server&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown box the user needs to select  the wireguard role.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Listen Port&lt;br /&gt;
|51820&lt;br /&gt;
|The UDP port on which the WireGuard client  listens for incoming connections.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|IP Addresses&lt;br /&gt;
|10.0.0.1/24&lt;br /&gt;
|The IP  address and subnet mask assigned to the WireGuard client&#039;s interface. This  address is used within the VPN.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Allowed PeerIPs&lt;br /&gt;
|10.1.1.1&lt;br /&gt;
|The IP  address of the allowed peer(s) that can connect to this WireGuard client.  This might need adjustment based on the actual peer IPs used in the network.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Endpoint HostIP&lt;br /&gt;
|10.1.1.1&lt;br /&gt;
|The IP  address of the WireGuard server (the endpoint to which the client connects).&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Endpoint HostPort&lt;br /&gt;
|51820&lt;br /&gt;
|The port on  the WireGuard server to which the client connects.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|PeerPublicKey&lt;br /&gt;
|*****&lt;br /&gt;
|The public  key of the peer (the server) the client is connecting to. This key is part of  the public-private key pair used in WireGuard for encryption and  authentication.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|Enable Preshared key&lt;br /&gt;
|Yes/No&lt;br /&gt;
|This option  indicates that a pre-shared key (PSK) is used in addition to the  public-private key pair for an extra layer of security.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|9&lt;br /&gt;
|Preshared key&lt;br /&gt;
|*****&lt;br /&gt;
|The actual  pre-shared key value shared between the client and the server. This option  appears only if you have enabled preshared key.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Zerotier:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ZeroTier is a tool that lets you create your own private network over the internet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Go to ZeroTier Central and sign up for a free account. In ZeroTier Central, click on &amp;quot;Create a Network&amp;quot;. This will generate a unique 16-digit network ID for your new network.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Go to settings =&amp;gt; VPN, in general settings, enable ZeroTier and save.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Zerotier Settings RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Copy and paste the unique 16-digit network ID in the edit section.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Zero Seetings Dashboard RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Zerotier Dashboard.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the save button after the required configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field Name    &lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  Value           &lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|NetworkID&lt;br /&gt;
|Ad2769hfkw2345f4&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown box the user needs to paste  the unique 16-digit network id.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Listen Port&lt;br /&gt;
|9993&lt;br /&gt;
|Default&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== 2.5 Firewall ===&lt;br /&gt;
A firewall is a layer of security between the network and the Internet. Since a router is the main connection from a network to the Internet, the firewall function is merged into this device. Every network should have a firewall to protect its privacy.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Firewall.png|frameless|635x635px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are 6 types of setting available under firewall.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* General Settings&lt;br /&gt;
* Port forwards&lt;br /&gt;
* Traffic Rules&lt;br /&gt;
* SNAT traffic Rules&lt;br /&gt;
* Parental Control&lt;br /&gt;
* Zone Forwarding&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;General Setting&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
General settings are subdivided into 2 parts,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1.) General settings&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In general settings, the settings that are made are default settings and can be changed according to user’s preference.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Firewall General Settings.png|frameless|622x622px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Specification details are below:&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;SN&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Field Name&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Sample Value&#039;&#039;&#039;      &lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Description&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Enable SYN-flood  protection&lt;br /&gt;
|Enabled&lt;br /&gt;
|This is  enabled by default; setting can be changed if required.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Disable IPV6&lt;br /&gt;
|Disabled&lt;br /&gt;
|This is  enabled by default; setting can be changed if required.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Drop invalid packets&lt;br /&gt;
|Disabled&lt;br /&gt;
|This is  enabled by default; setting can be changed if required.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|TCP SYN Cookies&lt;br /&gt;
|Disabled&lt;br /&gt;
|This is  enabled by default; setting can be changed if required.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Input&lt;br /&gt;
|Reject/Accept&lt;br /&gt;
|By  default, the setting is ‘Reject’ but this needs to be changed to ‘Accept’  compulsory.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Output&lt;br /&gt;
|Reject/Accept&lt;br /&gt;
|By  default, the setting is ‘Reject’ but this needs to be changed to ‘Accept’  compulsory.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|Forward&lt;br /&gt;
|Reject/Accept&lt;br /&gt;
|By  default, the setting is ‘Reject’ but this needs to be changed to ‘Accept’  compulsory.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2.) Zone settings&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In zone settings, there’s an option to add “New Zone”, according to user’s requirement.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Zone settings.png|thumb|628x628px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Port Forwards:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Port forwarding is a feature in a router or gateway that allows external devices to access services on a private network.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It maps an external port on the router to an internal IP address and port on the local network, enabling applications such as gaming servers, web servers, or remote desktop connections to be accessed from outside the network.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This helps in directing incoming traffic to the correct device within a local network based on the port number, enhancing connectivity and accessibility.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Firewall Port Forward.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;EDIT&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Firewall Edit Option RC44.png|frameless|622x622px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the save button after the required configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Name&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Web_Server_Forward&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|Field must  not be empty. Provide a name for the rule to easily identify it.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Protocol&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;TCP+UDP&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|Select the protocol  for the rule.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Options  typically include TCP+UDP, TCP, UDP, ICMP, Custom.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Source zone&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;SW_LAN&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|Select the  source zone where the traffic is originating from. Options typically include EWAN2,SW_LAN,CWAN1,CWAN1_0,CWAN1_1,VPN&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Source MAC address [optional]&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;any&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;any&#039;&#039;&#039;: Leave as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;any&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; if you don&#039;t want to specify a MAC address.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Source IP address[optional]&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: Leave blank if not needed.&lt;br /&gt;
|Optionally  specify an IP address or range.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Source port&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;80, 443&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;  (if matching traffic for web server ports)&lt;br /&gt;
|Specify the  source port or port range.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|Destination zone&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;SW_LAN&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|Select the  destination zone where the traffic is heading to.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|Destination IP address&lt;br /&gt;
|Leave blank if not needed.&lt;br /&gt;
|Optionally specify  the destination IP address or range.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|9&lt;br /&gt;
|Destination port&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;80&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;  (if redirecting to a web server port)&lt;br /&gt;
|Specify the  destination port or port range.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Traffic Rule:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;Traffic rules&amp;quot; refer to the policies and regulations that govern the flow of data packets within a network.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To allow new traffic, click on “Add and Edit” in “New Traffic Rule”.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Firewall Traffic Rule.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;EDIT&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Firewall Traffic Rule Edit.png|frameless|621x621px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Specification details are below:&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample Value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Name&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: Allow_HTTP_and_HTTPS&lt;br /&gt;
|Field must  not be empty: Provide a descriptive name for the traffic rule.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Restrict to Address Family&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|1.       Options:  IPv4, IPv6&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2.       Example:  IPv4 if dealing with typical internet traffic.&lt;br /&gt;
|Select the  address family to generate iptables rules for.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Protocol&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: TCP+UDP&lt;br /&gt;
|TCP+UDP:  Match incoming traffic using the given protocol.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Match ICMP Type&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: any&lt;br /&gt;
|Match all  ICMP types if set to any. Specific types can be chosen if needed.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Source Zone&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: LAN&lt;br /&gt;
|Specifies the  traffic source zone.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Enable DDoS Prevention&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: ‘Checked’ if you want to enable DDoS prevention  measures&lt;br /&gt;
|Enable or  disable Distributed Denial of Service (DDoS) prevention.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|Source MAC Address&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: any&lt;br /&gt;
|any: Match  traffic from any MAC address or specify a particular MAC address.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|Source Address&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: 192.168.1.0/24&lt;br /&gt;
|Match  incoming traffic from the specified source IP address or range.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|9&lt;br /&gt;
|Source Port&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: any if all source ports should be matched&lt;br /&gt;
|any: Match  incoming traffic from the specified source port or port range.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|10&lt;br /&gt;
|Destination Zone&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: WAN&lt;br /&gt;
|Specifies the  traffic destination zone.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|11&lt;br /&gt;
|Action&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: ACCEPT&lt;br /&gt;
|Options:  ACCEPT, DROP, REJECT. Specify the action to take for matched traffic.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|12&lt;br /&gt;
|Limit&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: 10/minute to limit matches to 10 times per  minute.&lt;br /&gt;
|Maximum  average matching rate; specified as a number, with an optional /second,  /minute, /hour, or /day suffix.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|13&lt;br /&gt;
|Extra arguments&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: --log-prefix &amp;quot;Blocked: &amp;quot; to add a log  prefix to log messages for this rule.&lt;br /&gt;
|Passes  additional arguments to iptables. Use with care as it can significantly alter  rule behaviour.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
Click on save once configured.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;SNAT Traffic Rule:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For configuring SNAT (Source Network Address Translation) traffic rules, you can control how outbound traffic from your local network is translated to a different IP address as it exits the network.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To add new source NAT,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on “ADD” in “New Source NAT:”&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SNAT Traffic Rule.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Edit&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SNAT Edit Options RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Specification details are below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on save once configured.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Parental Control:&#039;&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Parental Control.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Edit&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Parental Control Edit Options RC44.png|frameless|622x622px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Note:&#039;&#039;&#039; Details are to be filled according to user’s requirements.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Zone Forwarding&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Zone Forwarding RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;EDIT&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Zone Forwarding editing Options RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===2.6 Loopback Rule===&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user can configure the port where he want to forward the traffic to. Here the user can add/edit/delete different port ports as per the requirement. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Loopback Rule.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user should click on add/edit to do the required changes in the port and enter the valid information in each section to configure the port for forwarding.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Loopback Rule edit.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user is done with the required configurations, should click save button and then click on the update to save the changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===2.7 Remote Monitoring===&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user can select which equipment needs to be monitor remotely, the TR-069 device or the NMS device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Remote Monitoring.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
One the user selects the type of RMS click on the save.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;NMS&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
IN this page the user should type the server IP or domain name in the URL then click on sav. Click on upload and start (Once key is uploaded and this option is clicked, NMS automatically starts, and this router device gets registered with the NMS server provided.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:NMS.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;TR069&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To enable the TR069 the user needs to click on the enable check box.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:TR069.png|frameless|582x582px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user clicks on the check box of enable it will display all the required filed to configured.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Remote Monitoring Tr-069.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Serving Interval&lt;br /&gt;
|300&lt;br /&gt;
|This displays the interval time&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Interface&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|Not sure what needs to be written&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Username&lt;br /&gt;
|Username&lt;br /&gt;
|The user needs to mention the username&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Password&lt;br /&gt;
|******&lt;br /&gt;
|The user should set the password&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|URL&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|The user needs to mention the URL&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
The user should fill all the required fields and click on the save button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===2.8 Tunnel===&lt;br /&gt;
Tunnels are a method of transporting data across a network using protocols which are not supported by that network.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tunnel Settings.png|frameless|621x621px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;General Settings&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user needs to select under which type of tunnel it needs to send the data.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tunnel General Settings.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user selects the type of tunnel then click in the save button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;GRE Tunnel&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user needs to add all the details of GRE tunnels.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user configured all the required fields then it needs to click on the save. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:GRE Tunnel.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here the user can add/edit/delete the details of the tunnel. Once the required update is done then it needs to click on update to save the changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tunnel Configuration.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;IPIP Tunnel&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user needs to add all the details of IPIP tunnels.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user configured all the required fields then it needs to click on the save. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:IPIP Tunnel.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here the user can add/edit/delete the details of the tunnel. Once the required update is done then it needs to click on update to save the changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Ipip config.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==3 Maintenance==&lt;br /&gt;
In this module the user can configure/upgrade/modify the settings related to system, password, firmware and monitoring.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Maintenance System.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It includes below submodules.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* General&lt;br /&gt;
* Password&lt;br /&gt;
* Reboot&lt;br /&gt;
* Import and Export config&lt;br /&gt;
* Firmware upgrade&lt;br /&gt;
* Monitor Application&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===3.1 General===&lt;br /&gt;
In this section the user can configure the details related to time zone and host name&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Maintenance General.png|frameless|619x619px]]&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Local Time&lt;br /&gt;
|2023/12/13 12:24:11&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|It displays the system current date and  time.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|HostName&lt;br /&gt;
|31B30230298&lt;br /&gt;
|It displays the host name.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Timezone&lt;br /&gt;
|Asia/Kolkata&lt;br /&gt;
|It displays in which time zone its configured.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user configures the required details then click on the save button to save all the details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Logging&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here the user can configure the basic aspects of your device related to system.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Maintenance logging.png|frameless|608x608px]]&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|System log buffer size&lt;br /&gt;
|32&lt;br /&gt;
|This displays the log size of system buffer&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|External system log server&lt;br /&gt;
|0.0.0.0&lt;br /&gt;
|This displays the ip add of the external system  log&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|External system log server port&lt;br /&gt;
|514&lt;br /&gt;
|This displays the port number of the external  system log&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Log output level&lt;br /&gt;
|debug&lt;br /&gt;
|In this drop down the user selects the level of  the log output.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Cron Log level&lt;br /&gt;
|debug&lt;br /&gt;
|In this drop down the user selects the level of  the corn log .&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user configures the required details then click on the save button to save all the details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Language and Style&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here the user can configure the basic aspects of your device related to language.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Maintenance Language and Style.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user configures the required details then click on the save button to save all the details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===3.2 Password===&lt;br /&gt;
In this module the user can set the password for the admin credentials.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Change you password.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Specifies the password for the guest account. If the user enter a plaintext password here, it will get replaced with a crypted password on save. The new password will be effective once the user logs out and log in again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user needs to write the password in the text box and click on the save button to save the password.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===3.3 Reboot===&lt;br /&gt;
In this module the user can reboot the device remotely.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Reboot.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To start the reboot process first the user needs to fill all the required fields.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Need to select the type of reboot for the device whether it needs to be Hardware or Software reboot.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Maintenance Reboot.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Type&lt;br /&gt;
|Maintenance Reboot&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown list the user needs to  select the type of reboot is required to configure.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Reboot Type&lt;br /&gt;
|Hardware&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown list the user needs to select  the hardware or software reboot is required.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Minutes&lt;br /&gt;
|59&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user needs to configure  the min to start the reboot activity&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Hours&lt;br /&gt;
|22&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user needs to configure  the hours to start the reboot activity&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Day of Month&lt;br /&gt;
|All&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user needs to configure  the day of the month to start the reboot activity&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Month&lt;br /&gt;
|All&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user needs to configure  the month to start the reboot activity&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|Day of the week&lt;br /&gt;
|All&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user needs to configure  the week to start the reboot activity&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user fills all the required given parameters click on the save.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To start the reboot process, click on the “Reboot Now” button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===3.4 Import and Export===&lt;br /&gt;
In this section, User can Import &amp;amp; Export Configuration files of the Device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Import and Export.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
click “Export Config” to export device configuration &amp;amp; settings to a text file,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
click “Import Config” to import device configuration &amp;amp; settings from a previously exported text file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Import window.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user need to select on the choose file to and click on the apply.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===3.5 Firmware Upgrade===&lt;br /&gt;
The user can upgrade with the latest software for the existing firmware. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Frimware Upgrade.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the &#039;&#039;&#039;flash image&#039;&#039;&#039; and chose the path where the sys-upgrade file is kept and then click on flash image, it will upgrade to the latest software once the reboot is done.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Flash Image.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the &#039;&#039;&#039;Retain Config and flash&#039;&#039;&#039; and chose the path where the sys-upgrade file is kept and then click on Retain Config and flash, it will upgrade to the latest software once the reboot is done.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Flash Image.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the &#039;&#039;&#039;Factory Reset&#039;&#039;&#039; for the complete retest of the device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===3.6 Monitor Application===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Monitor Application.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Router Application Remote Configuration.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Router Remote Configuration.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==4 Status==&lt;br /&gt;
In this module the user can view the status of the router device with respect to the network, Wan, modem etc.[[File:Status.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It has 4 submodules.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Interfaces&lt;br /&gt;
* Internet&lt;br /&gt;
* Modem&lt;br /&gt;
* Route&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===4.1 Interfaces===&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user can see the traffic status for all the network through which the device works.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Status Interfaces.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Looking on the network status the user can check if the cellular or the ethernet is up.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===4.2 Internet===&lt;br /&gt;
In this submodule the user can view the status of the internet connections.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Internet Status.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
  To see the latest status of the internet connection the user needs to click on the refresh button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===4.3 Modem===&lt;br /&gt;
In this sub module the user will get to know the status of the cellular interface which is installed inside the modem. The user can view all the details related to the sim in terms of Operator, Network technology, Mobile country code, Upload bandwidth, Download Bandwidth, Frequency band, RSRP, RSRQ, RSSI &amp;amp; SNR under this page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Modem Status.png|frameless|602x602px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== 4.4 Route ===&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user can check the status of the route for the device. The ARP status can be visible in under this page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Route Status.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==5 Features==&lt;br /&gt;
In this module the user can see all the features that the router device has.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This module includes the below features.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Mac Address Binding&lt;br /&gt;
* URL Filtering&lt;br /&gt;
* Web Server&lt;br /&gt;
* Wi-Fi MacID Filtering&lt;br /&gt;
* Routing&lt;br /&gt;
* Others&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Features.png|frameless|618x618px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===5.1 Mac Address Binding===&lt;br /&gt;
Under this submodule the user can configure/update/edit the IP Address for MAC&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mac Addressing Binding.png|frameless|622x622px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user should write MAC address and then click on the add button. Once the address is added then click on the update button to save the modification.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user needs to click on the Edit button to modify the preexisting configuration. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mac Address Edit.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user modifies the MAC address /IP Address then click on the save button to save the changes done.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user can click on the deleted button to delete an existing configured device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Post all the changes the user needs to click on the update to reflect all the changes in the application.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===5.2 URL Filtering===&lt;br /&gt;
In this submodule the user should provide the URL which needs to be blocked for the device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:URL Filtering.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To add the new URL for blocking, click on the Add New button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user clicks on the Add New button a new pop will appear in that page write the URL and click on the save. The user can select the status of that URL while defining the URL.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Url Update.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To edit / delete the existing URL the user needs to click on the edit /deleted button respectively.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Edit or Delete URL.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the save after the changes are done as per the need.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== 5.3 Web Server ===&lt;br /&gt;
In this submodule the user can configure webserver related parameters.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Web server.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To configure the HTTP, click on the enable HTTP. Once the user clicks on the check box the HTTP Port text box will appear where the user needs to configure the port id.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Webserver Configuration.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on save buttons to save the changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To configure the 2nd HTTP, click on the enable HTTP. Once the user clicks on the check box the HTTP Port text box will appear where the user needs to configure the port id.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Webserver Https Redirect.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on save buttons to save the changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the “Redirect https” and “RFC1918 Filter” check box to respectively and click on the save button to save the changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To configure the NTP sync, click on the enable NTP sync. Once the user clicks on the check box the respective text boxes will appear to configure the parameters. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:RFC1918 Filter.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user configures the parameters click on the save button to save the given values.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===5.4 Wi-Fi MacID Filtering===&lt;br /&gt;
In this module the user can filter the Macids. Mac address filtering allows users to block traffic coming from certain known machines or devices.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Wi-Fi MacID Filtering.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Before adding the MacIDs the user needs to select the mode from the dropdown menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To Add the MacID the user needs to click on Add New option select the mac id and network name Wi-Fi 2.4G AP OR Wi-Fi 2.4G AP Guest, select enable/disable option and save it and update.              &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Configuring MacID and Network Name.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the required MACID and Network Name is configured the user needs to click on the save button to add the details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user needs to click on the edit button to do modifications on the pre-existing configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Macid and name removing.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the required MACID / Network Name is modified the user needs to click on the save button to reflect the changed value in the application.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;WIFI 2.4G AP Guest&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To Add the MacID the user needs to click on Add New option select the mac id and network name Wi-Fi 2.4G AP Guest, select enable/disable option and save it and update.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
     [[File:WIFI 2.4G AP Guest.png|frameless|623x623px]]  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the required MACID and Network Name is configured the user needs to click on the save button to add the details. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user needs to click on the edit button to do modifications on the pre-existing configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Configuring MacID and Network Name.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the required MACID / Network Name is modified the user needs to click on the save button to reflect the changed value in the application.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===5.5 Routing===&lt;br /&gt;
In this submodule the user can configure the parameters related to routing of the device. like Target address, Networks address etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Routing IPV4 Routes.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To add a new device the user needs to fill all the required information and click on the add button.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Interface&lt;br /&gt;
|eth0.1&lt;br /&gt;
|In this drop down list the user should  configure the interface name.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Target&lt;br /&gt;
|192.168.10.1&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user needs to insert the  target IP address&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|IPV4 Netmask&lt;br /&gt;
|255.255.255.0&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user should give the  address for the IPV4Netmask&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Metric&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user should insert the  number of the metric.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|IPV4 Gateway&lt;br /&gt;
|192.168.100.1&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user should configured the  address for the IPV4 Gateway.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Route Type&lt;br /&gt;
|Unicast&lt;br /&gt;
|In this drop down box the user should select  the type of route needed for the device.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
To edit the existing device the user needs to click on the edit option.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Routing Configuration.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the changes are done click on the save button to save all the changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the deleted button to delete the existing device detail.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Advanced Static IPV4 Routes:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Advanced Static IPV4 Routes.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To add a new device the user needs to fill all the required information and click on the add button.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Interface&lt;br /&gt;
|eth0.1&lt;br /&gt;
|In this drop down list the user should  configure the interface name.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|To&lt;br /&gt;
|192.168.10.1&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user needs to insert the  target IP address&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|IPV4 Netmask&lt;br /&gt;
|255.255.255.0&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user should give the  address for the IPV4Netmask&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Table&lt;br /&gt;
|local&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|From&lt;br /&gt;
|192.168.100.1&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user should configured the  from address for the routes&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Priority&lt;br /&gt;
|230&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
To edit the existing device the user needs to click on the edit option.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Routing Editing.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the changes are done click on the save button to save all the changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the deleted button to delete the existing device detail.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once all the configurations are done click on the update button to reflect the changes made.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===5.6 Others===&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user will get to do all the other miscellaneous configuration with respect to the device based on the required parameters.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Miscellaneous configuration.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Utility&lt;br /&gt;
|Action&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Set Date&lt;br /&gt;
|SET&lt;br /&gt;
|Need to set the date and time and after  click command get the Date and time&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Gate Date&lt;br /&gt;
|GET&lt;br /&gt;
|Needs to get the system date and time&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|IPsec status all&lt;br /&gt;
|GET&lt;br /&gt;
|Needs to get the IPsec details&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Wi-Fi Scan&lt;br /&gt;
|GET&lt;br /&gt;
|Needs to get the Wi-Fi status&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|ipref3 client&lt;br /&gt;
|RUN&lt;br /&gt;
|Needs to click on the RUN to execute  the command&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|ipref3 server&lt;br /&gt;
|RUN&lt;br /&gt;
|Needs to click on the RUN to execute  the command&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|Ping&lt;br /&gt;
|PING&lt;br /&gt;
|Needs to click on the ping status&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|9&lt;br /&gt;
|Traceroute&lt;br /&gt;
|RUN&lt;br /&gt;
|Needs to click on the ping Traceroute status&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|10&lt;br /&gt;
|NTP Sync&lt;br /&gt;
|SYNC&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to Sync the NTP&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|11&lt;br /&gt;
|Download Files&lt;br /&gt;
|DOWNLOAD&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to Download the files /Database&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|12&lt;br /&gt;
|Restart Power&lt;br /&gt;
|RESTART&lt;br /&gt;
|Click Restart the power&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|13&lt;br /&gt;
|Restart Modem&lt;br /&gt;
|RESTART&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to Restart the modem&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|14&lt;br /&gt;
|Run at command&lt;br /&gt;
|RUN&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to Run the command&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|15&lt;br /&gt;
|Show board configuration&lt;br /&gt;
|SHOW&lt;br /&gt;
|To Show the board configuration&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|16&lt;br /&gt;
|Show VPN Certificate Name&lt;br /&gt;
|SHOW&lt;br /&gt;
|To Show VPN Certificate Name&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|17&lt;br /&gt;
|Switch SIM to Secondary&lt;br /&gt;
|RUN&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to switch the SIM to secondary  mode&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|18&lt;br /&gt;
|Send Test SMS&lt;br /&gt;
|SEND&lt;br /&gt;
|To Send the SMS Confirmation&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|19&lt;br /&gt;
|Readlatest SMS&lt;br /&gt;
|READ&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to Read the latest SMS&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|20&lt;br /&gt;
|Data Usage&lt;br /&gt;
|SHOW&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to show the data usage.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|21&lt;br /&gt;
|Monthly Data Usage&lt;br /&gt;
|SHOW&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to show the monthly data usage&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|22&lt;br /&gt;
|Modem debug Info&lt;br /&gt;
|READ&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to read the information about the  modem debug&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|23&lt;br /&gt;
|Scan Network operators (take&amp;gt;3mins)&lt;br /&gt;
|SHOW&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to show the Network operator&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|24&lt;br /&gt;
|Network operators (first perform scan  network operator&lt;br /&gt;
|SHOW&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to show the Network operator&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|25&lt;br /&gt;
|ReadLogFiles&lt;br /&gt;
|READ&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to read the log files&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|26&lt;br /&gt;
|Enable ssh&lt;br /&gt;
|RUN&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to Run the command&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|27&lt;br /&gt;
|Disable ssh&lt;br /&gt;
|RUN&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to Run the command&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|28&lt;br /&gt;
|Clear SIM1 Data&lt;br /&gt;
|CLEAR&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to clear the SIM1 data&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|29&lt;br /&gt;
|Clear SIM2 Data&lt;br /&gt;
|CLEAR&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to clear the SIM data&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==6 Logout==&lt;br /&gt;
The user should click on log out option to logged out from the router application.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Logout.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user needs to click on the ok to come out of the router application.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tanisha</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.silbonetworks.com/index.php?title=File:SNAT_Edit_Options_RC44.png&amp;diff=1139</id>
		<title>File:SNAT Edit Options RC44.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.silbonetworks.com/index.php?title=File:SNAT_Edit_Options_RC44.png&amp;diff=1139"/>
		<updated>2024-09-02T10:37:54Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tanisha: Tanisha uploaded a new version of File:SNAT Edit Options RC44.png&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;SNAT Edit Options RC44&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tanisha</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.silbonetworks.com/index.php?title=File:SNAT_Traffic_Rule.png&amp;diff=1138</id>
		<title>File:SNAT Traffic Rule.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.silbonetworks.com/index.php?title=File:SNAT_Traffic_Rule.png&amp;diff=1138"/>
		<updated>2024-09-02T10:36:55Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tanisha: Tanisha uploaded a new version of File:SNAT Traffic Rule.png&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;SNAT Traffic Rule&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tanisha</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.silbonetworks.com/index.php?title=RC44_User_Manual&amp;diff=1136</id>
		<title>RC44 User Manual</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.silbonetworks.com/index.php?title=RC44_User_Manual&amp;diff=1136"/>
		<updated>2024-09-02T10:35:52Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tanisha: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;This page contains the user manual for RC44.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Connecting with the device to the System (Laptop/Desktop).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To log in to SILBO_RC44 by connecting the router to your laptop or desktop via LAN or using Wi-Fi, please follow the steps below. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Connecting via LAN:&#039;&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Connect your laptop&#039;s LAN port to one of the router&#039;s LAN interfaces. Ensure that you select any LAN interface (there are two available) while making sure the WAN interface is not used. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
                                                                                                                                                          &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;How to connect with the SILBO_RC44&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;application&#039;&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the LAN connection is established between the device and the laptop or the desktop&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please open the command prompt and ping go get the ip config of that device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Type the command &#039;&#039;&#039;Ipconfig&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:How_to_connect_with_the_SILBO_RB44_application.png|alt=How to connect with the SILBO RB44 application|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It will provide the Ip address/url of that device through which the application can be accessed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Connecting_via_LAN_RB44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Log In==&lt;br /&gt;
Open the web browser and type the IP address in the URL.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It will show the log in page of the application.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Log In.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Give the valid credentials for the username and password to login to the application page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user credentials are provided it will direct to the landing page of the application.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Login Dashboard RC44.png|frameless|636x636px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The “Status” landing page shows all the detailed specification of the device like system, memory storage and connection tracking etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The application is divided in to 6 Modules.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Info&lt;br /&gt;
* Settings&lt;br /&gt;
* Maintenance&lt;br /&gt;
* Status&lt;br /&gt;
* Features&lt;br /&gt;
* Logout&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==1.Info==&lt;br /&gt;
The “Info” module provides the information about the devices to the user.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It provides all the specification related to the hardware, firmware, Networks and the Connection uptimes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It has 3 submodules.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Overview&lt;br /&gt;
* System Log&lt;br /&gt;
* Kernel Log&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Info dashboard RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===1.1 Overview===&lt;br /&gt;
In overview module it displays all the specification categorically of a device like System, Memory, storage, Connection tracking, DHCP Lease.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Login Dashboard RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;System&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this section it displays the hardware configured specification of the device.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Info system RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The specifications details are as follows,&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&lt;br /&gt;
!SN&lt;br /&gt;
!Field name &lt;br /&gt;
!Sample value&lt;br /&gt;
!Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Hostname&lt;br /&gt;
|22B09230239&lt;br /&gt;
|This field  displays the router serial number of the device&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Model&lt;br /&gt;
|Silbo_RC44- EC200A&lt;br /&gt;
|This field  displays the model number of the device&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Firmware Version and IPK Version&lt;br /&gt;
|1.16_1.13_RC3&lt;br /&gt;
|This field  displays the firmware version and IPK version&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Kernel Version&lt;br /&gt;
|4.14.180&lt;br /&gt;
|This field  displays the kernel version of the device&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Local Time&lt;br /&gt;
|Monday, July 1, 2024, at 05:43:58 PM&lt;br /&gt;
|This field  displays the local time&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Uptime&lt;br /&gt;
|0h 7m 29s&lt;br /&gt;
|This field  displays the uptime of the device&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|Load Average&lt;br /&gt;
|1.73 1.87 1.04&lt;br /&gt;
|This field  displays the average load&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Memory&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this section it displays the memory configured specification of the device.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Memory Dashboard RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The specifications details are as follows.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Total Available&lt;br /&gt;
|68676 kB / 124208 kB (55%)&lt;br /&gt;
|This field  displays the total availability of memory space in the device&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Free&lt;br /&gt;
|59344 kB / 124208 kB (47%)&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the  Free memory space in the device&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Cached&lt;br /&gt;
|312 kB / 124208 kB (0%)&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the  Cached memory space in the device&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Buffered&lt;br /&gt;
|9332 kB / 124208 kB (7%)&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the  Buffered memory space in the device&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Storage&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this section it displays the status of storage as root and temporary usage specification of the device.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Storage Dashboard RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The specifications details are as follows.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Root Usage&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
796 kB / 15488 kB (5%)&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays  the total root usage of the device&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Temporary  Usage&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
312 kB / 62104 kB (0%)&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the total temporary  usage of the device&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Connection Tracking&#039;&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this section it displays the status of connection tracking for the device.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Connection Tracking RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The specifications details are as follows.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Active Connection&lt;br /&gt;
|48 / 16384 (0%)&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the active connection of the device.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;DHCP Leases&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this section, it displays the DHCP lease of the temporary assignment of an IP address to a device on the network.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:DCHP Leases RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The specifications details are as follows.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Host Name&lt;br /&gt;
|KermaniK-LT&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays  the configured Host Name/User Name for that device.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|IPv4-Address&lt;br /&gt;
|192.168.10.147&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the IP  address of the device.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|MAC-Address&lt;br /&gt;
|34:73:5a:bb: ab:7a&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the MAC-Address  of the device.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Lease time remaining&lt;br /&gt;
|11h 53m 49s&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the lease  time remaining for the device.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===1.2 System Log===&lt;br /&gt;
This page provides on screen System logging information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user gets to view the system logs &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:System Log.png|frameless|617x617px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===1.3 Kernel Log===&lt;br /&gt;
This page provides on-screen Kernel logging information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this page, the user gets to view the Kernel logs&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Kernel Log.png|frameless|621x621px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==2. Setting==&lt;br /&gt;
In this “Setting” module the user can Configure/update all the required parameters related to Network, SIM Switch, Internet, VPN, Firewall, Loopback Rule, Remote monitoring, Tunnel as per requirement.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
IT consist of 8 submodules.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Network&lt;br /&gt;
* Sim Switch&lt;br /&gt;
* Internet&lt;br /&gt;
* VPN&lt;br /&gt;
* Firewall&lt;br /&gt;
* Loopback Rule&lt;br /&gt;
* Remote Monitoring&lt;br /&gt;
* Tunnel&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Settings.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===2.1 Network===&lt;br /&gt;
In this section the user does all the setting related configuration with reference to network like Ethernet Setting, Cellular Setting, Band lock and Operator Lock, Wi-Fi, Guest Wi-Fi, Wireless Schedule, SMS Setting, Loopback IP.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Network Dashboard RC44.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Ethernet Setting&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this page it will display all the configured port that is attached with the device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For this device 3 ports are configured. Ethernet mode can be configured as WAN and as LAN as well. Ethernet LAN Connection settings can be configured as DHCP server or Static.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Ethernet Settings RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;For port 3 setting&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Kindly select the option &#039;&#039;&#039;LAN4&#039;&#039;&#039; for &#039;&#039;&#039;Port 3 mode LAN/WAN&#039;&#039;&#039;. Based on the option selected the filed will also changes the user needs to configure all the required field and click on the save to save the required fields.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Ethernet Settings RC44 part 2.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Port 3 mode LAN/WAN&lt;br /&gt;
|LAN&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the port mode selection&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Port 3 Ethernet Protocol [LAN Eth0.1]&lt;br /&gt;
|DHCP Server&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the Ethernet mode selection&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Port 3 DHCP Server IP&lt;br /&gt;
|192.168.10.1&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays DHCP server IP configured.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Port 3 DHCP Netmask&lt;br /&gt;
|255.255.255.0&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays DHCP server Netmask address configured&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Port 3 DHCP Start Address&lt;br /&gt;
|100&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays DHCP server  start address configured&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Port 3 DHCP Limit&lt;br /&gt;
|50&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays DHCP server  limit&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Kindly select the option &#039;&#039;&#039;EWAN&#039;&#039;&#039; for &#039;&#039;&#039;Port 3 mode LAN/WAN&#039;&#039;&#039;. Based on the option selected the filed will also changes the user needs to configure all the required field and click on the save to save the required fields.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:EWAN Port 3 Configuration RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Port 3 mode LAN/WAN&lt;br /&gt;
|EWAN&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the port mode selection&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Ethernet Protocol Port 3 WAN&lt;br /&gt;
|DHCP  client&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the client&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Gateway&lt;br /&gt;
|192.168.1.1&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays gateway address  configured&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the save once all the configuration is done and click on the update button to update all the information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;SW_LAN settings&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this part the user can configure the setting for SW_LAN &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SW LAN settings RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|SW_LAN Ethernet Protocol&lt;br /&gt;
|DHCP  Server&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the  Ethernet mode selection&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|SW_LAN DHCP Server IP&lt;br /&gt;
|192.168.10.1&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays DHCP server IP  configured.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|SW_LAN  DHCP Netmask&lt;br /&gt;
|255.255.255.0&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays DHCP server  Netmask address configured&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|SW_LAN  DHCP Start Address&lt;br /&gt;
|100&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays DHCP server  start address configured&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|SW_LAN  DHCP Limit&lt;br /&gt;
|50&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays DHCP server  limit&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|DNS  Server&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|This filed display number of DSN  server availability&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|DNS  Server Address&lt;br /&gt;
|8.8.8.8&lt;br /&gt;
|This  filed display the DSN server address.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After configuring all the required information, the user should click on the save and then click on the update to update the all the required information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Static option for SW_LAN Ethernet Protocol&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the option of static from the drop-down menu for SW_LAN Ethernet Protocol.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SW LAN settings Static Ethernet Protocol.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|SW_LAN Ethernet Protocol&lt;br /&gt;
|Static&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the  Ethernet mode selection&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|SW_LAN static IP&lt;br /&gt;
|192.168.5.1&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays static server IP  configured.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|SW_LAN  Netmask&lt;br /&gt;
|255.255.255.0&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays static server  Netmask address configured&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|DNS  Server&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|This filed display number of DSN  server availability&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|DSN  Server Address&lt;br /&gt;
|8.8.8.8&lt;br /&gt;
|This  filed display the DSN server address.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
After configuring all the required information, the user should click on the save and then click on the update to update the all the required information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Cellular Setting&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this page, the user needs to configure the various details with respect to the SIM.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
select single cellular single sim where the user must configure the APN details of the sim used for the router device. The Configurations can be done based on the SIM usage, with respect to IPV4 or IPV.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Cellular Settings RC44.png|frameless|619x619px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Cellular  Operation Mode&lt;br /&gt;
|Single Cellular with Dual Sim&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays  the cellular operation mode.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Cellular  Modem 1&lt;br /&gt;
|QuectelEC200A&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the modem name.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Network  Mode&lt;br /&gt;
|Automatic&lt;br /&gt;
|This  field displays the  Network mode selection&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM 1  Access Point Name&lt;br /&gt;
|airtelgprs.com&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the  name of the Sim 1 access point configured.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM 1  PDP Type&lt;br /&gt;
|IPV4&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays  the type of SIM 1&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM 1  Username&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|This field is optional, and the user can configure the name of  the SIM 1&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM 1  Password&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|This  field is optional, and the user can configure the password for the SIM 1&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM 1  Authentication Protocol&lt;br /&gt;
|None&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the type of  protocol is being used for SIM 1&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|9&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM 2  Access Point Name&lt;br /&gt;
|airtelgprs.com&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the name of the  Sim 2 access point configured.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|10&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM 2  PDP Type&lt;br /&gt;
|IPV4&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the type of SIM  2&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|11&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM 2  Username&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|This  field is optional, and the user can configure the name of the SIM 2&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|12&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM 2  Password&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|This  field is optional, and the user can configure the password for the SIM 2&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|13&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM 2  Authentication Protocol&lt;br /&gt;
|None&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the type of  protocol is being used for SIM 2&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|14&lt;br /&gt;
|Primary  SIM Switchback Time (In Minutes)&lt;br /&gt;
|10&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the time given  for sim to swich in between.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
After configuring all the required information, the user should click on the save and then click on the update to update the all the required information. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Band lock and Operator Lock&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this page, the user needs to configure the lock band and operator based on the service provider&#039;&#039;&#039;.&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Bands available in the drop-down list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Band lock and Operator Lock.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;2G/3G option&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2G/3G: - 3G allows additional features such as mobile internet access, video calls and mobile TV. While the main function of 2G technology is the transmission of information through voice calls.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:2G-3G option.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user should select the band check box  available for 2g/3g  from the given list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Bands available for selection under LTE for the bands available that zone.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Operator Selection Mode&#039;&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user needs to click on the check box of the “operator select enable” to select the operator.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the check box is clicked there will be a dropdown list of the operator modes from which the user needs to select the mode. The user needs to select the operator mode from the given dropdown list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Operator Selection Mode.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the user selects the mode “Manual” or “Manual-Automatic” then one more text box will appear where the user must provide the operator code.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Band lock and Operator Lock 1.png|frameless|542x542px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After configuring all the required information, the user should click on the save and then click on the update to update the all the required information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Wi-Fi Setting&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wi-Fi is a family of wireless network protocols based on the IEEE 802.11 family of standards, which are commonly used for local area network of devices and internet access, allowing nearby digital devices to exchanges data by radio waves. These are the most widely used computer network, used globally in home and small office networks to link devices and to provided internet access with wireless router and wireless access point in public places. In this router has the general setting and change country code, channel, radio mode, radio passphrase as per the requirement after clicking on enable Radio button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Wi-Fi Setting.png|frameless|585x585px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user needs to select the respective radio mode based on its need. Basically, it has 3 radio mode.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Wi-Fi Setting access Point.png|frameless|590x590px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Access Point mode:&#039;&#039;&#039; In Access Point mode, router connects to a wireless router through an Ethernet cable to extend the coverage of wireless signal to other network client.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Access Point Mode RC44.png|frameless|573x573px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Client point:&#039;&#039;&#039;  In client mode, the access point connects your wired devices to a wireless network. This mode is suitable when you have a wired device with an Ethernet port and no wireless capability, for example, a smart TV, Media Player, or Game console and you want to connect it to the internet wirelessly, select the Client Mode and give the Radio SSID &amp;amp; client passphrase&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Client Point RC44.png|frameless|587x587px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Access point and client point&#039;&#039;&#039;: select this option for both type connection, give both SSID and passphrase.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Access point and Client Point RC44.png|frameless|571x571px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After configuring all the required information, the user should click on the save and then click on the update to update the all the required information.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Radio  0 Protocol&lt;br /&gt;
|IEEE 802.11 b/g/n&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the  user should select which protocol is being used&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Country  Code&lt;br /&gt;
|INDIA&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the  user should select which county it belongs to.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Channel&lt;br /&gt;
|Auto&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user should  select the proper channel to be used.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|TX  Power&lt;br /&gt;
|100&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user should  specify the power.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Channel  Width&lt;br /&gt;
|20 MHz&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user should  select the channel width&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Radio  Mode&lt;br /&gt;
|Access  point&lt;br /&gt;
|In this drop down the user should  select the mode.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|Radio  SSID&lt;br /&gt;
|APClient_22B09230239&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user should  specify the SSID number&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|Radio  Authentication&lt;br /&gt;
|WPA2  Personal (PSK)&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user should  select the type of authentication.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|9&lt;br /&gt;
|Radio  Encryption&lt;br /&gt;
|AES&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user should  select the type of encryption required.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|10&lt;br /&gt;
|Radio  Passphrase&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user should  specify the password.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|11&lt;br /&gt;
|Radio  DHCP server IP&lt;br /&gt;
|192.168.100.1&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user should  specify the IP address of DHCP server.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|12&lt;br /&gt;
|Radio  DHCP start address&lt;br /&gt;
|100&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user should  specify the start address of the DHCP.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|13&lt;br /&gt;
|Radio  DHCP limit&lt;br /&gt;
|50&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user should  specify the limit for the DHCP.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Wireless Schedule&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wi-Fi can be automatically withdrawn based on the configuration done in this section.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user can schedule the Wi-Fi’s accessibility time during a particular period.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Wireless Schedule.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After configuring all the required information, the user should click on the save and then click on the update to update the all the required information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user can select more than one “day of the week” for scheduling the wifi working hours.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Wifi Schedule.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Loop back IP settings&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The loopback IP address, often referred to as “localhost”. it’s used to establish network connections within the same device for testing and troubleshooting purpose.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Loop back IP settings.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After configuring all the required information, the user should click on the save and then click on the update to update the all the required information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The loopback IP address, commonly represented as 127.0.0.1, is a special address used for testing network connectivity on a local machine. It allows a device to send network messages to itself without involving external networks, making it useful for troubleshooting and diagnostics.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
However, this IP can be changed as per requirement and to do that, Navigating to Setting&amp;gt;&amp;gt;Network configuration&amp;gt;&amp;gt; Loopback IP settings can be changed/updated.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Above screenshot shows the configuration window from GUI/WebUI&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;SMS Settings&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
User needs to enable SMS option in SMS settings page. This option is to validate the mobile numbers using which controlling commands could be sent to the router device. 1 to 5 mobile numbers can be authenticated by choosing from “Select Valid SMS user numbers” and adding the mobile numbers below respectively. API key is the pass key used in the commands while sending SMS. Displayed in the below screen is the default API key which can be edited and changed as per choice.   After addition of the mobile numbers user needs to click on save button for changes to take place.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SMS Settings.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select valid user number max. 5 and add authorized phone number in the main menu where want to find the alert and click on SMS Response Enable, save and update button, now send SMS commands from the configured mobile number. Once the commands are received from the user phone number the board send acknowledgement as per the commands after that it will send the router’s status once it has rebooted and is operational again. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mentioned below are a few commands which can be sent from the configured mobile number to the router device. Below two commands are One for rebooting the router device and another to get the uptime.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1) {&amp;quot;device&amp;quot;:[&amp;quot;passkey&amp;quot;,&amp;quot;API key&amp;quot;],&amp;quot;command&amp;quot;:&amp;quot;reboot&amp;quot;,&amp;quot;arguments&amp;quot;:&amp;quot;hardware&amp;quot;}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2) {&amp;quot;device&amp;quot;:[&amp;quot;passkey &amp;quot;,&amp;quot;API key&amp;quot;],&amp;quot;command&amp;quot;:&amp;quot;uptime&amp;quot;}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After configuring all the required information, the user should click on the save and then click on the update to update the all the required information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===2.2 SIM===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user needs to configure the Sim for the given device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SIM Switch.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user needs to select from the drop-down menu on which basis the sim needs to be switched.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Sim Switch Configuration.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user selects on “&#039;&#039;&#039;signal strength&#039;&#039;&#039;” then the parameters related to signal strength will pop up and the user needs to configure the parameters based on the requirement &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Signal Strength.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Threshold RSRP&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This Needs to be set appropriately. Incorrect setting may cause unnecessary SIM switching. ( In General a BAD RSRP value range is -140 to -115 and FAIR RSRP value range is -115 to -105).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Threshold SINR&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This Needs to be set appropriately. Incorrect setting may cause unnecessary SIM switching. ( In General a BAD SNR value range is -20 to 0 and FAIR SNR value range is 0 to 13)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user selects on “&#039;&#039;&#039;Data Limit&#039;&#039;&#039;” then the parameters related to Data Limit will pop up and the user needs to configure the parameters based on the requirement.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Data limit.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM Switch Based on&lt;br /&gt;
|Data Limit&lt;br /&gt;
|The user needs to select from the  drop-down menu on what basis the sim needs to be switched.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM 1 Data Usage Limit (In MB)&lt;br /&gt;
|1000&lt;br /&gt;
|The user needs to set the limit for the data  usage for SIM 1.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM 2 Data Usage Limit (In MB)&lt;br /&gt;
|1000&lt;br /&gt;
|The user needs to set the limit for the data  usage for SIM 2.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Periodicity&lt;br /&gt;
|Daily&lt;br /&gt;
|The user needs to set the pattern/frequency to  switch the sims.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Day Of Month&lt;br /&gt;
|16&lt;br /&gt;
|The user needs to set the day for switching the  sim.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
After configuring all the required information, the user should click on the save.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===2.3 Internet===&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user needs to configure the internet connection to set the priority from the various options. The user should decide what kind of connection it needs to provide to the device like LAN, WAN etc. Once the connections are configured then click on save option and then on update.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Internet.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the user needs to edit on the existing configuration, then the user should click on the “EDIT” button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Network Edit Options.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Name&lt;br /&gt;
|EWAN2&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the name of the WAN  connection&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Priority&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown box the user need to select  the priority.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Select Track IP Numbers&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user needs to select the  track number for the Ips.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|TrackIP1&lt;br /&gt;
|8.8.8.8&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text field the user needs to set the IP  address for the track 1&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|TrackIP2&lt;br /&gt;
|8.8.4.4&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text field the user needs to set the IP  address for the track 1&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Reliability&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Not sure what needs to be written&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|Count&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Not sure what needs to be written&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|Up&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Not sure what needs to be written&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|9&lt;br /&gt;
|Down&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Not sure what needs to be written&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user is done with modification click on the save button to save all the changes and then click on the update button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===2.4 VPN===&lt;br /&gt;
VPN stands for &#039;&#039;&#039;Virtual Private Network&#039;&#039;&#039;, it establishes a connection between the system and a remote server, which is owned by a VPN provider.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Creating a point-to-point tunnel that encrypts the personal data, masks the IP address, and allows to block the required website to blocks via firewalls on the internet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:VPN Settings RC44.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are 5 types of setting available under VPN configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* General Settings&lt;br /&gt;
* IPSEC&lt;br /&gt;
* Open VPN&lt;br /&gt;
* Wireguard&lt;br /&gt;
* Zerotier&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;General Settings&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user must choose which type of VPN connection is required for the device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user must select from IPSEC or Open VPN based on its requirement. If required, the user can select for both the options. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:VPN General Settings RC44.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user needs to click on the save after selecting the option based on its requirement.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;IPSEC&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
IPSEC VPN is used to create a VPN connection between local and remote networks. To use IPSEC VPN, the user should check that both local and remote routers support IPSEC VPN feature.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user can add/edit/delete the IPSEC VPN connection for the device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:VPN IPSEC changes RC44.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user needs to click on the update button once the required configuration is completed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In IPSEC the user needs to click on edit button to edit the configuration of an existing VPN connection.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:VPN Edit Options.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the save button after the required configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The tunnel will show established, showing the connection has been made.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:IPSEC .png|thumb|631x631px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|IPSEC&lt;br /&gt;
|Site to Site VPN&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user should select  the IPSEC connection type.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|IPSEC Role&lt;br /&gt;
|Client/Server&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown box the user needs to select  the IPSEC role.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Connection Type&lt;br /&gt;
|Tunnel&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user needs to select the connection  type. The user should select on the connection enable check box.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Connection mode&lt;br /&gt;
|start&lt;br /&gt;
|In this drop down list the user should select  the mode for the connection. it will have route/add/start/trap mode&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Remote Server IP&lt;br /&gt;
|1.1.1.1&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text field the user needs to set the IP  address for the remote server.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Local ID&lt;br /&gt;
|g300&lt;br /&gt;
|The user needs to set the local id.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|No. of local subnets&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user needs to select how  many subnets it will be connected.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|Local Subnet 1&lt;br /&gt;
|192.168.11.1/24&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user needs to put the  address of the local subnet.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|9&lt;br /&gt;
|Remote id&lt;br /&gt;
|sophos&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user needs to put the id  of the remote connection.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|10&lt;br /&gt;
|No of remote subnet&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user needs to select how  many subnets it will be connected remotely.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|11&lt;br /&gt;
|Remote subnet&lt;br /&gt;
|192.168.10.0/24&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user needs to put the  address of the remote subnet.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|12&lt;br /&gt;
|Key exchange&lt;br /&gt;
|Ikev1&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user should select the  which key exchange version to be selected.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|13&lt;br /&gt;
|Aggressive&lt;br /&gt;
|Yes/No&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user should select either  yes or no .&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|14&lt;br /&gt;
|IKE lifetime&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|Fill according to user’s requirements.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|15&lt;br /&gt;
|Lifetime in seconds&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Fill according to user’s requirements.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|16&lt;br /&gt;
|Enable DPD Detection&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;1&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
0&lt;br /&gt;
|Indicates  whether Dead Peer Detection is enabled to detect a lost connection. Enable  this option as per server-side settings.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|17&lt;br /&gt;
|Time Interval (In Seconds)&lt;br /&gt;
|60&lt;br /&gt;
|This option  is available only if DPD Detection is enabled. The time interval is the  interval for DPD checks.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|18&lt;br /&gt;
|Action&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Restart&#039;&#039;&#039;/clear/hold/&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
trap/start&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Restart&#039;&#039;&#039;: Action to take when  DPD detects a lost connection (restart the connection). Select as per  server-side setting.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|19&lt;br /&gt;
|Authentication Method&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;PSK&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;PSK&#039;&#039;&#039;: Pre-shared key is used  for authentication. Select this option for authentication as per sever side  setting.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|20&lt;br /&gt;
|Multiple Secrets&lt;br /&gt;
|1/&#039;&#039;&#039;0&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|Indicates  whether multiple PSK secrets are used. Enable only if required.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|21&lt;br /&gt;
|PSK Value&lt;br /&gt;
|******&lt;br /&gt;
|Pre-shared  key value (masked for security).&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;*Below are Phase I and Phase II settings details*&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&lt;br /&gt;
! colspan=&amp;quot;4&amp;quot; |                                                        &#039;&#039;&#039;Proposal settings Phase I&#039;&#039;&#039;                                                                                                                     &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|22            &lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Encryption Algorithm&#039;&#039;&#039;                                                 &lt;br /&gt;
|AES 128&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AES 192&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;AES 256&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3DES                                                                                                                                     &lt;br /&gt;
|                                                                                                                                     &#039;&#039;&#039;AES 256&#039;&#039;&#039;: Encryption algorithm  for Phase I. Select as per server-side configuration. Both server and client  should have same configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|23&lt;br /&gt;
|Authentication Phase I&lt;br /&gt;
|SHA1&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MD5&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SHA 256&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SHA 384&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;SHA 512&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;SHA 512&#039;&#039;&#039;: Authentication  algorithm for Phase I.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select as per  server-side configuration. Both server and client should have same configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|24&lt;br /&gt;
|DH Group&lt;br /&gt;
|MODP768(group1)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MODP1024(group2)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MODP1536(group5)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;MODP2048(group14)&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MODP3072(group15)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MODP4096(group16)&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;MODP2048 (group14)&#039;&#039;&#039;:  Diffie-Hellman group for key exchange.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select as per  server-side configuration. Both server and client should have same  configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| colspan=&amp;quot;4&amp;quot; |                                                                                                                                                                 &#039;&#039;&#039;Proposal settings Phase II&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|25&lt;br /&gt;
|Hash Algorithm&lt;br /&gt;
|AES 128&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AES 192&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;AES 256&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3DES&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;AES 256&#039;&#039;&#039;: Encryption algorithm  for Phase II. Select as per server-side configuration. Both server and client  should have same configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|26&lt;br /&gt;
|Authentication Phase II&lt;br /&gt;
|SHA1&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MD5&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SHA 256&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SHA 384&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;SHA 512&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;SHA 512&#039;&#039;&#039;: Authentication  algorithm for Phase II.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select as per  server-side configuration. Both server and client should have same  configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|27&lt;br /&gt;
|PFS Group&lt;br /&gt;
|MODP768(group1)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MODP1024(group2)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MODP1536(group5)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;MODP2048(group14)&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MODP3072(group15)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MODP4096(group16)&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;MODP2048 (group14)&#039;&#039;&#039;: Perfect  Forward Secrecy group.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select as per  server-side configuration. Both server and client should have same  configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Open VPN&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the OpenVPN connection, the home network can act as a server, and the remote device can access the server through the router which acts as an OpenVPN Server gateway. To use the VPN feature, the user should enable OpenVPN Server on the router, and install and run VPN client software on the remote device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Open VPN Settings RC44.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user needs to “upload” the respective certificate from a valid path and then click on the “Update.”&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the OpenVPN connection starts the user will get an option to enable/disable the VPN connection as and when required.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By clicking on the enable/disable button, the user can start/stop the VPN connection.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Open VPN Settings RC44 Dashboard.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
VPN has been established.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;WireGuard:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;WireGuard&#039;&#039;&#039; is simple, fast, lean, and modern VPN that utilizes secure and trusted cryptography.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on “Edit” to start configurations as needed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Wire Guard RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;EDIT:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Wire Guard RC44 Setttings.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the save button after the required configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample Value     &lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Wireguard Role&lt;br /&gt;
|Client/Server&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown box the user needs to select  the wireguard role.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Listen Port&lt;br /&gt;
|51820&lt;br /&gt;
|The UDP port on which the WireGuard client  listens for incoming connections.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|IP Addresses&lt;br /&gt;
|10.0.0.1/24&lt;br /&gt;
|The IP  address and subnet mask assigned to the WireGuard client&#039;s interface. This  address is used within the VPN.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Allowed PeerIPs&lt;br /&gt;
|10.1.1.1&lt;br /&gt;
|The IP  address of the allowed peer(s) that can connect to this WireGuard client.  This might need adjustment based on the actual peer IPs used in the network.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Endpoint HostIP&lt;br /&gt;
|10.1.1.1&lt;br /&gt;
|The IP  address of the WireGuard server (the endpoint to which the client connects).&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Endpoint HostPort&lt;br /&gt;
|51820&lt;br /&gt;
|The port on  the WireGuard server to which the client connects.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|PeerPublicKey&lt;br /&gt;
|*****&lt;br /&gt;
|The public  key of the peer (the server) the client is connecting to. This key is part of  the public-private key pair used in WireGuard for encryption and  authentication.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|Enable Preshared key&lt;br /&gt;
|Yes/No&lt;br /&gt;
|This option  indicates that a pre-shared key (PSK) is used in addition to the  public-private key pair for an extra layer of security.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|9&lt;br /&gt;
|Preshared key&lt;br /&gt;
|*****&lt;br /&gt;
|The actual  pre-shared key value shared between the client and the server. This option  appears only if you have enabled preshared key.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Zerotier:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ZeroTier is a tool that lets you create your own private network over the internet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Go to ZeroTier Central and sign up for a free account. In ZeroTier Central, click on &amp;quot;Create a Network&amp;quot;. This will generate a unique 16-digit network ID for your new network.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Go to settings =&amp;gt; VPN, in general settings, enable ZeroTier and save.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Zerotier Settings RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Copy and paste the unique 16-digit network ID in the edit section.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Zero Seetings Dashboard RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Zerotier Dashboard.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the save button after the required configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field Name    &lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  Value           &lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|NetworkID&lt;br /&gt;
|Ad2769hfkw2345f4&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown box the user needs to paste  the unique 16-digit network id.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Listen Port&lt;br /&gt;
|9993&lt;br /&gt;
|Default&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== 2.5 Firewall ===&lt;br /&gt;
A firewall is a layer of security between the network and the Internet. Since a router is the main connection from a network to the Internet, the firewall function is merged into this device. Every network should have a firewall to protect its privacy.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Firewall.png|frameless|635x635px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are 6 types of setting available under firewall.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* General Settings&lt;br /&gt;
* Port forwards&lt;br /&gt;
* Traffic Rules&lt;br /&gt;
* SNAT traffic Rules&lt;br /&gt;
* Parental Control&lt;br /&gt;
* Zone Forwarding&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;General Setting&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
General settings are subdivided into 2 parts,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1.) General settings&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In general settings, the settings that are made are default settings and can be changed according to user’s preference.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Firewall General Settings.png|frameless|622x622px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Specification details are below:&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;SN&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Field Name&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Sample Value&#039;&#039;&#039;      &lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Description&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Enable SYN-flood  protection&lt;br /&gt;
|Enabled&lt;br /&gt;
|This is  enabled by default; setting can be changed if required.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Disable IPV6&lt;br /&gt;
|Disabled&lt;br /&gt;
|This is  enabled by default; setting can be changed if required.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Drop invalid packets&lt;br /&gt;
|Disabled&lt;br /&gt;
|This is  enabled by default; setting can be changed if required.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|TCP SYN Cookies&lt;br /&gt;
|Disabled&lt;br /&gt;
|This is  enabled by default; setting can be changed if required.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Input&lt;br /&gt;
|Reject/Accept&lt;br /&gt;
|By  default, the setting is ‘Reject’ but this needs to be changed to ‘Accept’  compulsory.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Output&lt;br /&gt;
|Reject/Accept&lt;br /&gt;
|By  default, the setting is ‘Reject’ but this needs to be changed to ‘Accept’  compulsory.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|Forward&lt;br /&gt;
|Reject/Accept&lt;br /&gt;
|By  default, the setting is ‘Reject’ but this needs to be changed to ‘Accept’  compulsory.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2.) Zone settings&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In zone settings, there’s an option to add “New Zone”, according to user’s requirement.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Zone settings.png|thumb|628x628px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Port Forwards:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Port forwarding is a feature in a router or gateway that allows external devices to access services on a private network.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It maps an external port on the router to an internal IP address and port on the local network, enabling applications such as gaming servers, web servers, or remote desktop connections to be accessed from outside the network.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This helps in directing incoming traffic to the correct device within a local network based on the port number, enhancing connectivity and accessibility.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Firewall Port Forward.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;EDIT&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Firewall Edit Option RC44.png|frameless|622x622px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the save button after the required configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Name&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Web_Server_Forward&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|Field must  not be empty. Provide a name for the rule to easily identify it.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Protocol&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;TCP+UDP&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|Select the protocol  for the rule.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Options  typically include TCP+UDP, TCP, UDP, ICMP, Custom.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Source zone&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;SW_LAN&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|Select the  source zone where the traffic is originating from. Options typically include EWAN2,SW_LAN,CWAN1,CWAN1_0,CWAN1_1,VPN&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Source MAC address [optional]&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;any&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;any&#039;&#039;&#039;: Leave as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;any&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; if you don&#039;t want to specify a MAC address.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Source IP address[optional]&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: Leave blank if not needed.&lt;br /&gt;
|Optionally  specify an IP address or range.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Source port&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;80, 443&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;  (if matching traffic for web server ports)&lt;br /&gt;
|Specify the  source port or port range.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|Destination zone&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;SW_LAN&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|Select the  destination zone where the traffic is heading to.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|Destination IP address&lt;br /&gt;
|Leave blank if not needed.&lt;br /&gt;
|Optionally specify  the destination IP address or range.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|9&lt;br /&gt;
|Destination port&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;80&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;  (if redirecting to a web server port)&lt;br /&gt;
|Specify the  destination port or port range.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Traffic Rule:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;Traffic rules&amp;quot; refer to the policies and regulations that govern the flow of data packets within a network.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To allow new traffic, click on “Add and Edit” in “New Traffic Rule”.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Firewall Traffic Rule.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;EDIT&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Firewall Traffic Rule Edit.png|frameless|621x621px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Specification details are below:&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample Value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Name&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: Allow_HTTP_and_HTTPS&lt;br /&gt;
|Field must  not be empty: Provide a descriptive name for the traffic rule.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Restrict to Address Family&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|1.       Options:  IPv4, IPv6&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2.       Example:  IPv4 if dealing with typical internet traffic.&lt;br /&gt;
|Select the  address family to generate iptables rules for.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Protocol&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: TCP+UDP&lt;br /&gt;
|TCP+UDP:  Match incoming traffic using the given protocol.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Match ICMP Type&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: any&lt;br /&gt;
|Match all  ICMP types if set to any. Specific types can be chosen if needed.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Source Zone&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: LAN&lt;br /&gt;
|Specifies the  traffic source zone.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Enable DDoS Prevention&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: ‘Checked’ if you want to enable DDoS prevention  measures&lt;br /&gt;
|Enable or  disable Distributed Denial of Service (DDoS) prevention.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|Source MAC Address&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: any&lt;br /&gt;
|any: Match  traffic from any MAC address or specify a particular MAC address.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|Source Address&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: 192.168.1.0/24&lt;br /&gt;
|Match  incoming traffic from the specified source IP address or range.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|9&lt;br /&gt;
|Source Port&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: any if all source ports should be matched&lt;br /&gt;
|any: Match  incoming traffic from the specified source port or port range.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|10&lt;br /&gt;
|Destination Zone&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: WAN&lt;br /&gt;
|Specifies the  traffic destination zone.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|11&lt;br /&gt;
|Action&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: ACCEPT&lt;br /&gt;
|Options:  ACCEPT, DROP, REJECT. Specify the action to take for matched traffic.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|12&lt;br /&gt;
|Limit&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: 10/minute to limit matches to 10 times per  minute.&lt;br /&gt;
|Maximum  average matching rate; specified as a number, with an optional /second,  /minute, /hour, or /day suffix.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|13&lt;br /&gt;
|Extra arguments&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: --log-prefix &amp;quot;Blocked: &amp;quot; to add a log  prefix to log messages for this rule.&lt;br /&gt;
|Passes  additional arguments to iptables. Use with care as it can significantly alter  rule behaviour.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
Click on save once configured.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;SNAT Traffic Rule:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For configuring SNAT (Source Network Address Translation) traffic rules, you can control how outbound traffic from your local network is translated to a different IP address as it exits the network.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To add new source NAT,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on “ADD” in “New Source NAT:”&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SNAT Traffic Rule.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Edit&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SNAT Edit Options RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Specification details are below:&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Name&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: SNAT_WAN_to_LAN&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Field must  not be empty&#039;&#039;&#039;: Provide a unique and descriptive name for the SNAT rule.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Protocol&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: TCP+UDP&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;TCP+UDP&#039;&#039;&#039;:  Select the protocols that the SNAT rule will apply to.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Source Zone&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: wan&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;wan&#039;&#039;&#039;:  Specifies the source zone from which the traffic originates.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Source IP Address&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: any or a specific range like 192.168.1.0/24&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;-- please  choose --&#039;&#039;&#039;: Specify the source IP address or range. Leave empty if the  rule applies to any source IP.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Source Port&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: any&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;any&#039;&#039;&#039;:  Specify the source port or port range from which the traffic originates.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Destination Zone&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: lan&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;lan&#039;&#039;&#039;:  Specifies the destination zone to which the traffic is directed.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|Destination IP Address&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: any or a specific IP like 192.168.1.100&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;-- please  choose --&#039;&#039;&#039;: Specify the destination IP address or range. Leave empty if  the rule applies to any destination IP.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|Destination port&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: any&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;any&#039;&#039;&#039;:  Specify the destination port or port range to which the traffic is directed.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|9&lt;br /&gt;
|SNAT IP Address&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: 203.0.113.5 (an external IP address)&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;-- please  choose --&#039;&#039;&#039;: Specify the IP address to which the source IP should be  translated.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|10&lt;br /&gt;
|SNAT Port&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: Leave empty if not needed, or specify a port  like ‘12345’&lt;br /&gt;
|Optionally,  rewrite matched traffic to a specific source port. Leave empty to only  rewrite the IP address.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|11&lt;br /&gt;
|Extra Arguments&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: --log-prefix &amp;quot;SNAT_traffic: &amp;quot; (to add  a log prefix to log messages for this rule)&lt;br /&gt;
|Pass  additional arguments to iptables. Use with care as it can significantly alter  rule behaviour.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
Click on save once configured.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Parental Control:&#039;&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Parental Control.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Edit&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Parental Control Edit Options RC44.png|frameless|622x622px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Note:&#039;&#039;&#039; Details are to be filled according to user’s requirements.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Zone Forwarding&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Zone Forwarding RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;EDIT&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Zone Forwarding editing Options RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===2.6 Loopback Rule===&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user can configure the port where he want to forward the traffic to. Here the user can add/edit/delete different port ports as per the requirement. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Loopback Rule.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user should click on add/edit to do the required changes in the port and enter the valid information in each section to configure the port for forwarding.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Loopback Rule edit.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user is done with the required configurations, should click save button and then click on the update to save the changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===2.7 Remote Monitoring===&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user can select which equipment needs to be monitor remotely, the TR-069 device or the NMS device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Remote Monitoring.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
One the user selects the type of RMS click on the save.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;NMS&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
IN this page the user should type the server IP or domain name in the URL then click on sav. Click on upload and start (Once key is uploaded and this option is clicked, NMS automatically starts, and this router device gets registered with the NMS server provided.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:NMS.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;TR069&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To enable the TR069 the user needs to click on the enable check box.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:TR069.png|frameless|582x582px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user clicks on the check box of enable it will display all the required filed to configured.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Remote Monitoring Tr-069.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Serving Interval&lt;br /&gt;
|300&lt;br /&gt;
|This displays the interval time&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Interface&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|Not sure what needs to be written&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Username&lt;br /&gt;
|Username&lt;br /&gt;
|The user needs to mention the username&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Password&lt;br /&gt;
|******&lt;br /&gt;
|The user should set the password&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|URL&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|The user needs to mention the URL&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
The user should fill all the required fields and click on the save button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===2.8 Tunnel===&lt;br /&gt;
Tunnels are a method of transporting data across a network using protocols which are not supported by that network.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tunnel Settings.png|frameless|621x621px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;General Settings&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user needs to select under which type of tunnel it needs to send the data.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tunnel General Settings.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user selects the type of tunnel then click in the save button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;GRE Tunnel&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user needs to add all the details of GRE tunnels.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user configured all the required fields then it needs to click on the save. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:GRE Tunnel.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here the user can add/edit/delete the details of the tunnel. Once the required update is done then it needs to click on update to save the changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tunnel Configuration.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;IPIP Tunnel&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user needs to add all the details of IPIP tunnels.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user configured all the required fields then it needs to click on the save. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:IPIP Tunnel.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here the user can add/edit/delete the details of the tunnel. Once the required update is done then it needs to click on update to save the changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Ipip config.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==3 Maintenance==&lt;br /&gt;
In this module the user can configure/upgrade/modify the settings related to system, password, firmware and monitoring.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Maintenance System.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It includes below submodules.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* General&lt;br /&gt;
* Password&lt;br /&gt;
* Reboot&lt;br /&gt;
* Import and Export config&lt;br /&gt;
* Firmware upgrade&lt;br /&gt;
* Monitor Application&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===3.1 General===&lt;br /&gt;
In this section the user can configure the details related to time zone and host name&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Maintenance General.png|frameless|619x619px]]&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Local Time&lt;br /&gt;
|2023/12/13 12:24:11&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|It displays the system current date and  time.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|HostName&lt;br /&gt;
|31B30230298&lt;br /&gt;
|It displays the host name.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Timezone&lt;br /&gt;
|Asia/Kolkata&lt;br /&gt;
|It displays in which time zone its configured.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user configures the required details then click on the save button to save all the details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Logging&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here the user can configure the basic aspects of your device related to system.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Maintenance logging.png|frameless|608x608px]]&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|System log buffer size&lt;br /&gt;
|32&lt;br /&gt;
|This displays the log size of system buffer&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|External system log server&lt;br /&gt;
|0.0.0.0&lt;br /&gt;
|This displays the ip add of the external system  log&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|External system log server port&lt;br /&gt;
|514&lt;br /&gt;
|This displays the port number of the external  system log&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Log output level&lt;br /&gt;
|debug&lt;br /&gt;
|In this drop down the user selects the level of  the log output.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Cron Log level&lt;br /&gt;
|debug&lt;br /&gt;
|In this drop down the user selects the level of  the corn log .&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user configures the required details then click on the save button to save all the details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Language and Style&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here the user can configure the basic aspects of your device related to language.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Maintenance Language and Style.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user configures the required details then click on the save button to save all the details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===3.2 Password===&lt;br /&gt;
In this module the user can set the password for the admin credentials.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Change you password.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Specifies the password for the guest account. If the user enter a plaintext password here, it will get replaced with a crypted password on save. The new password will be effective once the user logs out and log in again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user needs to write the password in the text box and click on the save button to save the password.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===3.3 Reboot===&lt;br /&gt;
In this module the user can reboot the device remotely.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Reboot.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To start the reboot process first the user needs to fill all the required fields.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Need to select the type of reboot for the device whether it needs to be Hardware or Software reboot.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Maintenance Reboot.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Type&lt;br /&gt;
|Maintenance Reboot&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown list the user needs to  select the type of reboot is required to configure.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Reboot Type&lt;br /&gt;
|Hardware&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown list the user needs to select  the hardware or software reboot is required.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Minutes&lt;br /&gt;
|59&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user needs to configure  the min to start the reboot activity&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Hours&lt;br /&gt;
|22&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user needs to configure  the hours to start the reboot activity&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Day of Month&lt;br /&gt;
|All&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user needs to configure  the day of the month to start the reboot activity&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Month&lt;br /&gt;
|All&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user needs to configure  the month to start the reboot activity&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|Day of the week&lt;br /&gt;
|All&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user needs to configure  the week to start the reboot activity&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user fills all the required given parameters click on the save.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To start the reboot process, click on the “Reboot Now” button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===3.4 Import and Export===&lt;br /&gt;
In this section, User can Import &amp;amp; Export Configuration files of the Device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Import and Export.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
click “Export Config” to export device configuration &amp;amp; settings to a text file,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
click “Import Config” to import device configuration &amp;amp; settings from a previously exported text file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Import window.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user need to select on the choose file to and click on the apply.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===3.5 Firmware Upgrade===&lt;br /&gt;
The user can upgrade with the latest software for the existing firmware. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Frimware Upgrade.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the &#039;&#039;&#039;flash image&#039;&#039;&#039; and chose the path where the sys-upgrade file is kept and then click on flash image, it will upgrade to the latest software once the reboot is done.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Flash Image.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the &#039;&#039;&#039;Retain Config and flash&#039;&#039;&#039; and chose the path where the sys-upgrade file is kept and then click on Retain Config and flash, it will upgrade to the latest software once the reboot is done.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Flash Image.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the &#039;&#039;&#039;Factory Reset&#039;&#039;&#039; for the complete retest of the device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===3.6 Monitor Application===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Monitor Application.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Router Application Remote Configuration.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Router Remote Configuration.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==4 Status==&lt;br /&gt;
In this module the user can view the status of the router device with respect to the network, Wan, modem etc.[[File:Status.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It has 4 submodules.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Interfaces&lt;br /&gt;
* Internet&lt;br /&gt;
* Modem&lt;br /&gt;
* Route&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===4.1 Interfaces===&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user can see the traffic status for all the network through which the device works.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Status Interfaces.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Looking on the network status the user can check if the cellular or the ethernet is up.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===4.2 Internet===&lt;br /&gt;
In this submodule the user can view the status of the internet connections.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Internet Status.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
  To see the latest status of the internet connection the user needs to click on the refresh button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===4.3 Modem===&lt;br /&gt;
In this sub module the user will get to know the status of the cellular interface which is installed inside the modem. The user can view all the details related to the sim in terms of Operator, Network technology, Mobile country code, Upload bandwidth, Download Bandwidth, Frequency band, RSRP, RSRQ, RSSI &amp;amp; SNR under this page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Modem Status.png|frameless|602x602px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== 4.4 Route ===&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user can check the status of the route for the device. The ARP status can be visible in under this page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Route Status.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==5 Features==&lt;br /&gt;
In this module the user can see all the features that the router device has.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This module includes the below features.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Mac Address Binding&lt;br /&gt;
* URL Filtering&lt;br /&gt;
* Web Server&lt;br /&gt;
* Wi-Fi MacID Filtering&lt;br /&gt;
* Routing&lt;br /&gt;
* Others&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Features.png|frameless|618x618px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===5.1 Mac Address Binding===&lt;br /&gt;
Under this submodule the user can configure/update/edit the IP Address for MAC&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mac Addressing Binding.png|frameless|622x622px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user should write MAC address and then click on the add button. Once the address is added then click on the update button to save the modification.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user needs to click on the Edit button to modify the preexisting configuration. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mac Address Edit.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user modifies the MAC address /IP Address then click on the save button to save the changes done.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user can click on the deleted button to delete an existing configured device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Post all the changes the user needs to click on the update to reflect all the changes in the application.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===5.2 URL Filtering===&lt;br /&gt;
In this submodule the user should provide the URL which needs to be blocked for the device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:URL Filtering.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To add the new URL for blocking, click on the Add New button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user clicks on the Add New button a new pop will appear in that page write the URL and click on the save. The user can select the status of that URL while defining the URL.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Url Update.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To edit / delete the existing URL the user needs to click on the edit /deleted button respectively.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Edit or Delete URL.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the save after the changes are done as per the need.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== 5.3 Web Server ===&lt;br /&gt;
In this submodule the user can configure webserver related parameters.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Web server.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To configure the HTTP, click on the enable HTTP. Once the user clicks on the check box the HTTP Port text box will appear where the user needs to configure the port id.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Webserver Configuration.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on save buttons to save the changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To configure the 2nd HTTP, click on the enable HTTP. Once the user clicks on the check box the HTTP Port text box will appear where the user needs to configure the port id.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Webserver Https Redirect.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on save buttons to save the changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the “Redirect https” and “RFC1918 Filter” check box to respectively and click on the save button to save the changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To configure the NTP sync, click on the enable NTP sync. Once the user clicks on the check box the respective text boxes will appear to configure the parameters. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:RFC1918 Filter.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user configures the parameters click on the save button to save the given values.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===5.4 Wi-Fi MacID Filtering===&lt;br /&gt;
In this module the user can filter the Macids. Mac address filtering allows users to block traffic coming from certain known machines or devices.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Wi-Fi MacID Filtering.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Before adding the MacIDs the user needs to select the mode from the dropdown menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To Add the MacID the user needs to click on Add New option select the mac id and network name Wi-Fi 2.4G AP OR Wi-Fi 2.4G AP Guest, select enable/disable option and save it and update.              &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Configuring MacID and Network Name.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the required MACID and Network Name is configured the user needs to click on the save button to add the details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user needs to click on the edit button to do modifications on the pre-existing configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Macid and name removing.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the required MACID / Network Name is modified the user needs to click on the save button to reflect the changed value in the application.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;WIFI 2.4G AP Guest&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To Add the MacID the user needs to click on Add New option select the mac id and network name Wi-Fi 2.4G AP Guest, select enable/disable option and save it and update.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
     [[File:WIFI 2.4G AP Guest.png|frameless|623x623px]]  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the required MACID and Network Name is configured the user needs to click on the save button to add the details. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user needs to click on the edit button to do modifications on the pre-existing configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Configuring MacID and Network Name.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the required MACID / Network Name is modified the user needs to click on the save button to reflect the changed value in the application.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===5.5 Routing===&lt;br /&gt;
In this submodule the user can configure the parameters related to routing of the device. like Target address, Networks address etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Routing IPV4 Routes.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To add a new device the user needs to fill all the required information and click on the add button.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Interface&lt;br /&gt;
|eth0.1&lt;br /&gt;
|In this drop down list the user should  configure the interface name.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Target&lt;br /&gt;
|192.168.10.1&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user needs to insert the  target IP address&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|IPV4 Netmask&lt;br /&gt;
|255.255.255.0&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user should give the  address for the IPV4Netmask&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Metric&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user should insert the  number of the metric.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|IPV4 Gateway&lt;br /&gt;
|192.168.100.1&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user should configured the  address for the IPV4 Gateway.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Route Type&lt;br /&gt;
|Unicast&lt;br /&gt;
|In this drop down box the user should select  the type of route needed for the device.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
To edit the existing device the user needs to click on the edit option.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Routing Configuration.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the changes are done click on the save button to save all the changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the deleted button to delete the existing device detail.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Advanced Static IPV4 Routes:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Advanced Static IPV4 Routes.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To add a new device the user needs to fill all the required information and click on the add button.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Interface&lt;br /&gt;
|eth0.1&lt;br /&gt;
|In this drop down list the user should  configure the interface name.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|To&lt;br /&gt;
|192.168.10.1&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user needs to insert the  target IP address&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|IPV4 Netmask&lt;br /&gt;
|255.255.255.0&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user should give the  address for the IPV4Netmask&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Table&lt;br /&gt;
|local&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|From&lt;br /&gt;
|192.168.100.1&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user should configured the  from address for the routes&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Priority&lt;br /&gt;
|230&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
To edit the existing device the user needs to click on the edit option.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Routing Editing.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the changes are done click on the save button to save all the changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the deleted button to delete the existing device detail.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once all the configurations are done click on the update button to reflect the changes made.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===5.6 Others===&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user will get to do all the other miscellaneous configuration with respect to the device based on the required parameters.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Miscellaneous configuration.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Utility&lt;br /&gt;
|Action&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Set Date&lt;br /&gt;
|SET&lt;br /&gt;
|Need to set the date and time and after  click command get the Date and time&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Gate Date&lt;br /&gt;
|GET&lt;br /&gt;
|Needs to get the system date and time&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|IPsec status all&lt;br /&gt;
|GET&lt;br /&gt;
|Needs to get the IPsec details&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Wi-Fi Scan&lt;br /&gt;
|GET&lt;br /&gt;
|Needs to get the Wi-Fi status&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|ipref3 client&lt;br /&gt;
|RUN&lt;br /&gt;
|Needs to click on the RUN to execute  the command&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|ipref3 server&lt;br /&gt;
|RUN&lt;br /&gt;
|Needs to click on the RUN to execute  the command&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|Ping&lt;br /&gt;
|PING&lt;br /&gt;
|Needs to click on the ping status&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|9&lt;br /&gt;
|Traceroute&lt;br /&gt;
|RUN&lt;br /&gt;
|Needs to click on the ping Traceroute status&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|10&lt;br /&gt;
|NTP Sync&lt;br /&gt;
|SYNC&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to Sync the NTP&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|11&lt;br /&gt;
|Download Files&lt;br /&gt;
|DOWNLOAD&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to Download the files /Database&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|12&lt;br /&gt;
|Restart Power&lt;br /&gt;
|RESTART&lt;br /&gt;
|Click Restart the power&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|13&lt;br /&gt;
|Restart Modem&lt;br /&gt;
|RESTART&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to Restart the modem&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|14&lt;br /&gt;
|Run at command&lt;br /&gt;
|RUN&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to Run the command&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|15&lt;br /&gt;
|Show board configuration&lt;br /&gt;
|SHOW&lt;br /&gt;
|To Show the board configuration&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|16&lt;br /&gt;
|Show VPN Certificate Name&lt;br /&gt;
|SHOW&lt;br /&gt;
|To Show VPN Certificate Name&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|17&lt;br /&gt;
|Switch SIM to Secondary&lt;br /&gt;
|RUN&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to switch the SIM to secondary  mode&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|18&lt;br /&gt;
|Send Test SMS&lt;br /&gt;
|SEND&lt;br /&gt;
|To Send the SMS Confirmation&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|19&lt;br /&gt;
|Readlatest SMS&lt;br /&gt;
|READ&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to Read the latest SMS&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|20&lt;br /&gt;
|Data Usage&lt;br /&gt;
|SHOW&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to show the data usage.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|21&lt;br /&gt;
|Monthly Data Usage&lt;br /&gt;
|SHOW&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to show the monthly data usage&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|22&lt;br /&gt;
|Modem debug Info&lt;br /&gt;
|READ&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to read the information about the  modem debug&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|23&lt;br /&gt;
|Scan Network operators (take&amp;gt;3mins)&lt;br /&gt;
|SHOW&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to show the Network operator&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|24&lt;br /&gt;
|Network operators (first perform scan  network operator&lt;br /&gt;
|SHOW&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to show the Network operator&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|25&lt;br /&gt;
|ReadLogFiles&lt;br /&gt;
|READ&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to read the log files&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|26&lt;br /&gt;
|Enable ssh&lt;br /&gt;
|RUN&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to Run the command&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|27&lt;br /&gt;
|Disable ssh&lt;br /&gt;
|RUN&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to Run the command&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|28&lt;br /&gt;
|Clear SIM1 Data&lt;br /&gt;
|CLEAR&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to clear the SIM1 data&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|29&lt;br /&gt;
|Clear SIM2 Data&lt;br /&gt;
|CLEAR&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to clear the SIM data&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==6 Logout==&lt;br /&gt;
The user should click on log out option to logged out from the router application.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Logout.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user needs to click on the ok to come out of the router application.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tanisha</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.silbonetworks.com/index.php?title=File:Firewall_Traffic_Rule_Edit.png&amp;diff=1134</id>
		<title>File:Firewall Traffic Rule Edit.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.silbonetworks.com/index.php?title=File:Firewall_Traffic_Rule_Edit.png&amp;diff=1134"/>
		<updated>2024-09-02T10:32:31Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tanisha: Tanisha uploaded a new version of File:Firewall Traffic Rule Edit.png&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Firewall Traffic Rule Edit&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tanisha</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.silbonetworks.com/index.php?title=File:Firewall_Traffic_Rule.png&amp;diff=1131</id>
		<title>File:Firewall Traffic Rule.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.silbonetworks.com/index.php?title=File:Firewall_Traffic_Rule.png&amp;diff=1131"/>
		<updated>2024-09-02T10:05:09Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tanisha: Tanisha uploaded a new version of File:Firewall Traffic Rule.png&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt; Firewall Traffic Rule&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tanisha</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.silbonetworks.com/index.php?title=RC44_User_Manual&amp;diff=1129</id>
		<title>RC44 User Manual</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.silbonetworks.com/index.php?title=RC44_User_Manual&amp;diff=1129"/>
		<updated>2024-09-02T10:04:13Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tanisha: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;This page contains the user manual for RC44.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Connecting with the device to the System (Laptop/Desktop).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To log in to SILBO_RC44 by connecting the router to your laptop or desktop via LAN or using Wi-Fi, please follow the steps below. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Connecting via LAN:&#039;&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Connect your laptop&#039;s LAN port to one of the router&#039;s LAN interfaces. Ensure that you select any LAN interface (there are two available) while making sure the WAN interface is not used. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
                                                                                                                                                          &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;How to connect with the SILBO_RC44&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;application&#039;&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the LAN connection is established between the device and the laptop or the desktop&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please open the command prompt and ping go get the ip config of that device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Type the command &#039;&#039;&#039;Ipconfig&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:How_to_connect_with_the_SILBO_RB44_application.png|alt=How to connect with the SILBO RB44 application|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It will provide the Ip address/url of that device through which the application can be accessed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Connecting_via_LAN_RB44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Log In==&lt;br /&gt;
Open the web browser and type the IP address in the URL.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It will show the log in page of the application.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Log In.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Give the valid credentials for the username and password to login to the application page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user credentials are provided it will direct to the landing page of the application.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Login Dashboard RC44.png|frameless|636x636px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The “Status” landing page shows all the detailed specification of the device like system, memory storage and connection tracking etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The application is divided in to 6 Modules.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Info&lt;br /&gt;
* Settings&lt;br /&gt;
* Maintenance&lt;br /&gt;
* Status&lt;br /&gt;
* Features&lt;br /&gt;
* Logout&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==1.Info==&lt;br /&gt;
The “Info” module provides the information about the devices to the user.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It provides all the specification related to the hardware, firmware, Networks and the Connection uptimes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It has 3 submodules.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Overview&lt;br /&gt;
* System Log&lt;br /&gt;
* Kernel Log&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Info dashboard RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===1.1 Overview===&lt;br /&gt;
In overview module it displays all the specification categorically of a device like System, Memory, storage, Connection tracking, DHCP Lease.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Login Dashboard RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;System&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this section it displays the hardware configured specification of the device.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Info system RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The specifications details are as follows,&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&lt;br /&gt;
!SN&lt;br /&gt;
!Field name &lt;br /&gt;
!Sample value&lt;br /&gt;
!Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Hostname&lt;br /&gt;
|22B09230239&lt;br /&gt;
|This field  displays the router serial number of the device&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Model&lt;br /&gt;
|Silbo_RC44- EC200A&lt;br /&gt;
|This field  displays the model number of the device&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Firmware Version and IPK Version&lt;br /&gt;
|1.16_1.13_RC3&lt;br /&gt;
|This field  displays the firmware version and IPK version&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Kernel Version&lt;br /&gt;
|4.14.180&lt;br /&gt;
|This field  displays the kernel version of the device&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Local Time&lt;br /&gt;
|Monday, July 1, 2024, at 05:43:58 PM&lt;br /&gt;
|This field  displays the local time&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Uptime&lt;br /&gt;
|0h 7m 29s&lt;br /&gt;
|This field  displays the uptime of the device&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|Load Average&lt;br /&gt;
|1.73 1.87 1.04&lt;br /&gt;
|This field  displays the average load&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Memory&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this section it displays the memory configured specification of the device.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Memory Dashboard RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The specifications details are as follows.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Total Available&lt;br /&gt;
|68676 kB / 124208 kB (55%)&lt;br /&gt;
|This field  displays the total availability of memory space in the device&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Free&lt;br /&gt;
|59344 kB / 124208 kB (47%)&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the  Free memory space in the device&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Cached&lt;br /&gt;
|312 kB / 124208 kB (0%)&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the  Cached memory space in the device&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Buffered&lt;br /&gt;
|9332 kB / 124208 kB (7%)&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the  Buffered memory space in the device&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Storage&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this section it displays the status of storage as root and temporary usage specification of the device.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Storage Dashboard RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The specifications details are as follows.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Root Usage&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
796 kB / 15488 kB (5%)&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays  the total root usage of the device&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Temporary  Usage&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
312 kB / 62104 kB (0%)&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the total temporary  usage of the device&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Connection Tracking&#039;&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this section it displays the status of connection tracking for the device.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Connection Tracking RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The specifications details are as follows.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Active Connection&lt;br /&gt;
|48 / 16384 (0%)&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the active connection of the device.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;DHCP Leases&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this section, it displays the DHCP lease of the temporary assignment of an IP address to a device on the network.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:DCHP Leases RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The specifications details are as follows.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Host Name&lt;br /&gt;
|KermaniK-LT&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays  the configured Host Name/User Name for that device.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|IPv4-Address&lt;br /&gt;
|192.168.10.147&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the IP  address of the device.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|MAC-Address&lt;br /&gt;
|34:73:5a:bb: ab:7a&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the MAC-Address  of the device.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Lease time remaining&lt;br /&gt;
|11h 53m 49s&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the lease  time remaining for the device.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===1.2 System Log===&lt;br /&gt;
This page provides on screen System logging information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user gets to view the system logs &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:System Log.png|frameless|617x617px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===1.3 Kernel Log===&lt;br /&gt;
This page provides on-screen Kernel logging information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this page, the user gets to view the Kernel logs&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Kernel Log.png|frameless|621x621px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==2. Setting==&lt;br /&gt;
In this “Setting” module the user can Configure/update all the required parameters related to Network, SIM Switch, Internet, VPN, Firewall, Loopback Rule, Remote monitoring, Tunnel as per requirement.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
IT consist of 8 submodules.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Network&lt;br /&gt;
* Sim Switch&lt;br /&gt;
* Internet&lt;br /&gt;
* VPN&lt;br /&gt;
* Firewall&lt;br /&gt;
* Loopback Rule&lt;br /&gt;
* Remote Monitoring&lt;br /&gt;
* Tunnel&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Settings.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===2.1 Network===&lt;br /&gt;
In this section the user does all the setting related configuration with reference to network like Ethernet Setting, Cellular Setting, Band lock and Operator Lock, Wi-Fi, Guest Wi-Fi, Wireless Schedule, SMS Setting, Loopback IP.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Network Dashboard RC44.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Ethernet Setting&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this page it will display all the configured port that is attached with the device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For this device 3 ports are configured. Ethernet mode can be configured as WAN and as LAN as well. Ethernet LAN Connection settings can be configured as DHCP server or Static.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Ethernet Settings RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;For port 3 setting&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Kindly select the option &#039;&#039;&#039;LAN4&#039;&#039;&#039; for &#039;&#039;&#039;Port 3 mode LAN/WAN&#039;&#039;&#039;. Based on the option selected the filed will also changes the user needs to configure all the required field and click on the save to save the required fields.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Ethernet Settings RC44 part 2.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Port 3 mode LAN/WAN&lt;br /&gt;
|LAN&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the port mode selection&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Port 3 Ethernet Protocol [LAN Eth0.1]&lt;br /&gt;
|DHCP Server&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the Ethernet mode selection&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Port 3 DHCP Server IP&lt;br /&gt;
|192.168.10.1&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays DHCP server IP configured.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Port 3 DHCP Netmask&lt;br /&gt;
|255.255.255.0&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays DHCP server Netmask address configured&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Port 3 DHCP Start Address&lt;br /&gt;
|100&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays DHCP server  start address configured&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Port 3 DHCP Limit&lt;br /&gt;
|50&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays DHCP server  limit&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Kindly select the option &#039;&#039;&#039;EWAN&#039;&#039;&#039; for &#039;&#039;&#039;Port 3 mode LAN/WAN&#039;&#039;&#039;. Based on the option selected the filed will also changes the user needs to configure all the required field and click on the save to save the required fields.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:EWAN Port 3 Configuration RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Port 3 mode LAN/WAN&lt;br /&gt;
|EWAN&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the port mode selection&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Ethernet Protocol Port 3 WAN&lt;br /&gt;
|DHCP  client&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the client&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Gateway&lt;br /&gt;
|192.168.1.1&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays gateway address  configured&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the save once all the configuration is done and click on the update button to update all the information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;SW_LAN settings&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this part the user can configure the setting for SW_LAN &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SW LAN settings RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|SW_LAN Ethernet Protocol&lt;br /&gt;
|DHCP  Server&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the  Ethernet mode selection&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|SW_LAN DHCP Server IP&lt;br /&gt;
|192.168.10.1&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays DHCP server IP  configured.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|SW_LAN  DHCP Netmask&lt;br /&gt;
|255.255.255.0&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays DHCP server  Netmask address configured&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|SW_LAN  DHCP Start Address&lt;br /&gt;
|100&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays DHCP server  start address configured&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|SW_LAN  DHCP Limit&lt;br /&gt;
|50&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays DHCP server  limit&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|DNS  Server&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|This filed display number of DSN  server availability&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|DNS  Server Address&lt;br /&gt;
|8.8.8.8&lt;br /&gt;
|This  filed display the DSN server address.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After configuring all the required information, the user should click on the save and then click on the update to update the all the required information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Static option for SW_LAN Ethernet Protocol&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the option of static from the drop-down menu for SW_LAN Ethernet Protocol.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SW LAN settings Static Ethernet Protocol.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|SW_LAN Ethernet Protocol&lt;br /&gt;
|Static&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the  Ethernet mode selection&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|SW_LAN static IP&lt;br /&gt;
|192.168.5.1&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays static server IP  configured.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|SW_LAN  Netmask&lt;br /&gt;
|255.255.255.0&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays static server  Netmask address configured&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|DNS  Server&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|This filed display number of DSN  server availability&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|DSN  Server Address&lt;br /&gt;
|8.8.8.8&lt;br /&gt;
|This  filed display the DSN server address.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
After configuring all the required information, the user should click on the save and then click on the update to update the all the required information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Cellular Setting&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this page, the user needs to configure the various details with respect to the SIM.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
select single cellular single sim where the user must configure the APN details of the sim used for the router device. The Configurations can be done based on the SIM usage, with respect to IPV4 or IPV.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Cellular Settings RC44.png|frameless|619x619px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Cellular  Operation Mode&lt;br /&gt;
|Single Cellular with Dual Sim&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays  the cellular operation mode.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Cellular  Modem 1&lt;br /&gt;
|QuectelEC200A&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the modem name.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Network  Mode&lt;br /&gt;
|Automatic&lt;br /&gt;
|This  field displays the  Network mode selection&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM 1  Access Point Name&lt;br /&gt;
|airtelgprs.com&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the  name of the Sim 1 access point configured.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM 1  PDP Type&lt;br /&gt;
|IPV4&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays  the type of SIM 1&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM 1  Username&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|This field is optional, and the user can configure the name of  the SIM 1&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM 1  Password&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|This  field is optional, and the user can configure the password for the SIM 1&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM 1  Authentication Protocol&lt;br /&gt;
|None&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the type of  protocol is being used for SIM 1&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|9&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM 2  Access Point Name&lt;br /&gt;
|airtelgprs.com&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the name of the  Sim 2 access point configured.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|10&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM 2  PDP Type&lt;br /&gt;
|IPV4&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the type of SIM  2&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|11&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM 2  Username&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|This  field is optional, and the user can configure the name of the SIM 2&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|12&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM 2  Password&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|This  field is optional, and the user can configure the password for the SIM 2&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|13&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM 2  Authentication Protocol&lt;br /&gt;
|None&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the type of  protocol is being used for SIM 2&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|14&lt;br /&gt;
|Primary  SIM Switchback Time (In Minutes)&lt;br /&gt;
|10&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the time given  for sim to swich in between.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
After configuring all the required information, the user should click on the save and then click on the update to update the all the required information. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Band lock and Operator Lock&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this page, the user needs to configure the lock band and operator based on the service provider&#039;&#039;&#039;.&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Bands available in the drop-down list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Band lock and Operator Lock.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;2G/3G option&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2G/3G: - 3G allows additional features such as mobile internet access, video calls and mobile TV. While the main function of 2G technology is the transmission of information through voice calls.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:2G-3G option.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user should select the band check box  available for 2g/3g  from the given list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Bands available for selection under LTE for the bands available that zone.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Operator Selection Mode&#039;&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user needs to click on the check box of the “operator select enable” to select the operator.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the check box is clicked there will be a dropdown list of the operator modes from which the user needs to select the mode. The user needs to select the operator mode from the given dropdown list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Operator Selection Mode.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the user selects the mode “Manual” or “Manual-Automatic” then one more text box will appear where the user must provide the operator code.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Band lock and Operator Lock 1.png|frameless|542x542px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After configuring all the required information, the user should click on the save and then click on the update to update the all the required information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Wi-Fi Setting&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wi-Fi is a family of wireless network protocols based on the IEEE 802.11 family of standards, which are commonly used for local area network of devices and internet access, allowing nearby digital devices to exchanges data by radio waves. These are the most widely used computer network, used globally in home and small office networks to link devices and to provided internet access with wireless router and wireless access point in public places. In this router has the general setting and change country code, channel, radio mode, radio passphrase as per the requirement after clicking on enable Radio button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Wi-Fi Setting.png|frameless|585x585px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user needs to select the respective radio mode based on its need. Basically, it has 3 radio mode.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Wi-Fi Setting access Point.png|frameless|590x590px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Access Point mode:&#039;&#039;&#039; In Access Point mode, router connects to a wireless router through an Ethernet cable to extend the coverage of wireless signal to other network client.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Access Point Mode RC44.png|frameless|573x573px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Client point:&#039;&#039;&#039;  In client mode, the access point connects your wired devices to a wireless network. This mode is suitable when you have a wired device with an Ethernet port and no wireless capability, for example, a smart TV, Media Player, or Game console and you want to connect it to the internet wirelessly, select the Client Mode and give the Radio SSID &amp;amp; client passphrase&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Client Point RC44.png|frameless|587x587px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Access point and client point&#039;&#039;&#039;: select this option for both type connection, give both SSID and passphrase.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Access point and Client Point RC44.png|frameless|571x571px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After configuring all the required information, the user should click on the save and then click on the update to update the all the required information.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Radio  0 Protocol&lt;br /&gt;
|IEEE 802.11 b/g/n&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the  user should select which protocol is being used&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Country  Code&lt;br /&gt;
|INDIA&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the  user should select which county it belongs to.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Channel&lt;br /&gt;
|Auto&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user should  select the proper channel to be used.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|TX  Power&lt;br /&gt;
|100&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user should  specify the power.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Channel  Width&lt;br /&gt;
|20 MHz&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user should  select the channel width&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Radio  Mode&lt;br /&gt;
|Access  point&lt;br /&gt;
|In this drop down the user should  select the mode.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|Radio  SSID&lt;br /&gt;
|APClient_22B09230239&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user should  specify the SSID number&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|Radio  Authentication&lt;br /&gt;
|WPA2  Personal (PSK)&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user should  select the type of authentication.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|9&lt;br /&gt;
|Radio  Encryption&lt;br /&gt;
|AES&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user should  select the type of encryption required.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|10&lt;br /&gt;
|Radio  Passphrase&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user should  specify the password.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|11&lt;br /&gt;
|Radio  DHCP server IP&lt;br /&gt;
|192.168.100.1&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user should  specify the IP address of DHCP server.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|12&lt;br /&gt;
|Radio  DHCP start address&lt;br /&gt;
|100&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user should  specify the start address of the DHCP.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|13&lt;br /&gt;
|Radio  DHCP limit&lt;br /&gt;
|50&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user should  specify the limit for the DHCP.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Wireless Schedule&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wi-Fi can be automatically withdrawn based on the configuration done in this section.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user can schedule the Wi-Fi’s accessibility time during a particular period.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Wireless Schedule.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After configuring all the required information, the user should click on the save and then click on the update to update the all the required information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user can select more than one “day of the week” for scheduling the wifi working hours.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Wifi Schedule.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Loop back IP settings&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The loopback IP address, often referred to as “localhost”. it’s used to establish network connections within the same device for testing and troubleshooting purpose.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Loop back IP settings.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After configuring all the required information, the user should click on the save and then click on the update to update the all the required information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The loopback IP address, commonly represented as 127.0.0.1, is a special address used for testing network connectivity on a local machine. It allows a device to send network messages to itself without involving external networks, making it useful for troubleshooting and diagnostics.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
However, this IP can be changed as per requirement and to do that, Navigating to Setting&amp;gt;&amp;gt;Network configuration&amp;gt;&amp;gt; Loopback IP settings can be changed/updated.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Above screenshot shows the configuration window from GUI/WebUI&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;SMS Settings&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
User needs to enable SMS option in SMS settings page. This option is to validate the mobile numbers using which controlling commands could be sent to the router device. 1 to 5 mobile numbers can be authenticated by choosing from “Select Valid SMS user numbers” and adding the mobile numbers below respectively. API key is the pass key used in the commands while sending SMS. Displayed in the below screen is the default API key which can be edited and changed as per choice.   After addition of the mobile numbers user needs to click on save button for changes to take place.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SMS Settings.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select valid user number max. 5 and add authorized phone number in the main menu where want to find the alert and click on SMS Response Enable, save and update button, now send SMS commands from the configured mobile number. Once the commands are received from the user phone number the board send acknowledgement as per the commands after that it will send the router’s status once it has rebooted and is operational again. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mentioned below are a few commands which can be sent from the configured mobile number to the router device. Below two commands are One for rebooting the router device and another to get the uptime.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1) {&amp;quot;device&amp;quot;:[&amp;quot;passkey&amp;quot;,&amp;quot;API key&amp;quot;],&amp;quot;command&amp;quot;:&amp;quot;reboot&amp;quot;,&amp;quot;arguments&amp;quot;:&amp;quot;hardware&amp;quot;}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2) {&amp;quot;device&amp;quot;:[&amp;quot;passkey &amp;quot;,&amp;quot;API key&amp;quot;],&amp;quot;command&amp;quot;:&amp;quot;uptime&amp;quot;}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After configuring all the required information, the user should click on the save and then click on the update to update the all the required information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===2.2 SIM===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user needs to configure the Sim for the given device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SIM Switch.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user needs to select from the drop-down menu on which basis the sim needs to be switched.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Sim Switch Configuration.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user selects on “&#039;&#039;&#039;signal strength&#039;&#039;&#039;” then the parameters related to signal strength will pop up and the user needs to configure the parameters based on the requirement &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Signal Strength.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Threshold RSRP&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This Needs to be set appropriately. Incorrect setting may cause unnecessary SIM switching. ( In General a BAD RSRP value range is -140 to -115 and FAIR RSRP value range is -115 to -105).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Threshold SINR&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This Needs to be set appropriately. Incorrect setting may cause unnecessary SIM switching. ( In General a BAD SNR value range is -20 to 0 and FAIR SNR value range is 0 to 13)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user selects on “&#039;&#039;&#039;Data Limit&#039;&#039;&#039;” then the parameters related to Data Limit will pop up and the user needs to configure the parameters based on the requirement.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Data limit.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM Switch Based on&lt;br /&gt;
|Data Limit&lt;br /&gt;
|The user needs to select from the  drop-down menu on what basis the sim needs to be switched.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM 1 Data Usage Limit (In MB)&lt;br /&gt;
|1000&lt;br /&gt;
|The user needs to set the limit for the data  usage for SIM 1.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|SIM 2 Data Usage Limit (In MB)&lt;br /&gt;
|1000&lt;br /&gt;
|The user needs to set the limit for the data  usage for SIM 2.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Periodicity&lt;br /&gt;
|Daily&lt;br /&gt;
|The user needs to set the pattern/frequency to  switch the sims.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Day Of Month&lt;br /&gt;
|16&lt;br /&gt;
|The user needs to set the day for switching the  sim.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
After configuring all the required information, the user should click on the save.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===2.3 Internet===&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user needs to configure the internet connection to set the priority from the various options. The user should decide what kind of connection it needs to provide to the device like LAN, WAN etc. Once the connections are configured then click on save option and then on update.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Internet.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the user needs to edit on the existing configuration, then the user should click on the “EDIT” button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Network Edit Options.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Name&lt;br /&gt;
|EWAN2&lt;br /&gt;
|This field displays the name of the WAN  connection&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Priority&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown box the user need to select  the priority.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Select Track IP Numbers&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user needs to select the  track number for the Ips.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|TrackIP1&lt;br /&gt;
|8.8.8.8&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text field the user needs to set the IP  address for the track 1&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|TrackIP2&lt;br /&gt;
|8.8.4.4&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text field the user needs to set the IP  address for the track 1&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Reliability&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Not sure what needs to be written&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|Count&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Not sure what needs to be written&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|Up&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Not sure what needs to be written&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|9&lt;br /&gt;
|Down&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Not sure what needs to be written&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user is done with modification click on the save button to save all the changes and then click on the update button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===2.4 VPN===&lt;br /&gt;
VPN stands for &#039;&#039;&#039;Virtual Private Network&#039;&#039;&#039;, it establishes a connection between the system and a remote server, which is owned by a VPN provider.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Creating a point-to-point tunnel that encrypts the personal data, masks the IP address, and allows to block the required website to blocks via firewalls on the internet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:VPN Settings RC44.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are 5 types of setting available under VPN configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* General Settings&lt;br /&gt;
* IPSEC&lt;br /&gt;
* Open VPN&lt;br /&gt;
* Wireguard&lt;br /&gt;
* Zerotier&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;General Settings&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user must choose which type of VPN connection is required for the device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user must select from IPSEC or Open VPN based on its requirement. If required, the user can select for both the options. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:VPN General Settings RC44.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user needs to click on the save after selecting the option based on its requirement.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;IPSEC&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
IPSEC VPN is used to create a VPN connection between local and remote networks. To use IPSEC VPN, the user should check that both local and remote routers support IPSEC VPN feature.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user can add/edit/delete the IPSEC VPN connection for the device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:VPN IPSEC changes RC44.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user needs to click on the update button once the required configuration is completed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In IPSEC the user needs to click on edit button to edit the configuration of an existing VPN connection.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:VPN Edit Options.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the save button after the required configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The tunnel will show established, showing the connection has been made.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:IPSEC .png|thumb|631x631px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|IPSEC&lt;br /&gt;
|Site to Site VPN&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user should select  the IPSEC connection type.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|IPSEC Role&lt;br /&gt;
|Client/Server&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown box the user needs to select  the IPSEC role.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Connection Type&lt;br /&gt;
|Tunnel&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user needs to select the connection  type. The user should select on the connection enable check box.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Connection mode&lt;br /&gt;
|start&lt;br /&gt;
|In this drop down list the user should select  the mode for the connection. it will have route/add/start/trap mode&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Remote Server IP&lt;br /&gt;
|1.1.1.1&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text field the user needs to set the IP  address for the remote server.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Local ID&lt;br /&gt;
|g300&lt;br /&gt;
|The user needs to set the local id.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|No. of local subnets&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user needs to select how  many subnets it will be connected.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|Local Subnet 1&lt;br /&gt;
|192.168.11.1/24&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user needs to put the  address of the local subnet.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|9&lt;br /&gt;
|Remote id&lt;br /&gt;
|sophos&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user needs to put the id  of the remote connection.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|10&lt;br /&gt;
|No of remote subnet&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user needs to select how  many subnets it will be connected remotely.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|11&lt;br /&gt;
|Remote subnet&lt;br /&gt;
|192.168.10.0/24&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user needs to put the  address of the remote subnet.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|12&lt;br /&gt;
|Key exchange&lt;br /&gt;
|Ikev1&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user should select the  which key exchange version to be selected.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|13&lt;br /&gt;
|Aggressive&lt;br /&gt;
|Yes/No&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user should select either  yes or no .&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|14&lt;br /&gt;
|IKE lifetime&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|Fill according to user’s requirements.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|15&lt;br /&gt;
|Lifetime in seconds&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Fill according to user’s requirements.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|16&lt;br /&gt;
|Enable DPD Detection&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;1&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
0&lt;br /&gt;
|Indicates  whether Dead Peer Detection is enabled to detect a lost connection. Enable  this option as per server-side settings.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|17&lt;br /&gt;
|Time Interval (In Seconds)&lt;br /&gt;
|60&lt;br /&gt;
|This option  is available only if DPD Detection is enabled. The time interval is the  interval for DPD checks.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|18&lt;br /&gt;
|Action&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Restart&#039;&#039;&#039;/clear/hold/&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
trap/start&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Restart&#039;&#039;&#039;: Action to take when  DPD detects a lost connection (restart the connection). Select as per  server-side setting.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|19&lt;br /&gt;
|Authentication Method&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;PSK&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;PSK&#039;&#039;&#039;: Pre-shared key is used  for authentication. Select this option for authentication as per sever side  setting.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|20&lt;br /&gt;
|Multiple Secrets&lt;br /&gt;
|1/&#039;&#039;&#039;0&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|Indicates  whether multiple PSK secrets are used. Enable only if required.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|21&lt;br /&gt;
|PSK Value&lt;br /&gt;
|******&lt;br /&gt;
|Pre-shared  key value (masked for security).&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;*Below are Phase I and Phase II settings details*&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&lt;br /&gt;
! colspan=&amp;quot;4&amp;quot; |                                                        &#039;&#039;&#039;Proposal settings Phase I&#039;&#039;&#039;                                                                                                                     &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|22            &lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Encryption Algorithm&#039;&#039;&#039;                                                 &lt;br /&gt;
|AES 128&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AES 192&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;AES 256&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3DES                                                                                                                                     &lt;br /&gt;
|                                                                                                                                     &#039;&#039;&#039;AES 256&#039;&#039;&#039;: Encryption algorithm  for Phase I. Select as per server-side configuration. Both server and client  should have same configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|23&lt;br /&gt;
|Authentication Phase I&lt;br /&gt;
|SHA1&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MD5&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SHA 256&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SHA 384&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;SHA 512&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;SHA 512&#039;&#039;&#039;: Authentication  algorithm for Phase I.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select as per  server-side configuration. Both server and client should have same configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|24&lt;br /&gt;
|DH Group&lt;br /&gt;
|MODP768(group1)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MODP1024(group2)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MODP1536(group5)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;MODP2048(group14)&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MODP3072(group15)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MODP4096(group16)&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;MODP2048 (group14)&#039;&#039;&#039;:  Diffie-Hellman group for key exchange.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select as per  server-side configuration. Both server and client should have same  configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| colspan=&amp;quot;4&amp;quot; |                                                                                                                                                                 &#039;&#039;&#039;Proposal settings Phase II&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|25&lt;br /&gt;
|Hash Algorithm&lt;br /&gt;
|AES 128&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
AES 192&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;AES 256&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3DES&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;AES 256&#039;&#039;&#039;: Encryption algorithm  for Phase II. Select as per server-side configuration. Both server and client  should have same configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|26&lt;br /&gt;
|Authentication Phase II&lt;br /&gt;
|SHA1&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MD5&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SHA 256&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SHA 384&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;SHA 512&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;SHA 512&#039;&#039;&#039;: Authentication  algorithm for Phase II.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select as per  server-side configuration. Both server and client should have same  configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|27&lt;br /&gt;
|PFS Group&lt;br /&gt;
|MODP768(group1)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MODP1024(group2)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MODP1536(group5)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;MODP2048(group14)&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MODP3072(group15)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MODP4096(group16)&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;MODP2048 (group14)&#039;&#039;&#039;: Perfect  Forward Secrecy group.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select as per  server-side configuration. Both server and client should have same  configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Open VPN&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the OpenVPN connection, the home network can act as a server, and the remote device can access the server through the router which acts as an OpenVPN Server gateway. To use the VPN feature, the user should enable OpenVPN Server on the router, and install and run VPN client software on the remote device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Open VPN Settings RC44.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user needs to “upload” the respective certificate from a valid path and then click on the “Update.”&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the OpenVPN connection starts the user will get an option to enable/disable the VPN connection as and when required.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By clicking on the enable/disable button, the user can start/stop the VPN connection.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Open VPN Settings RC44 Dashboard.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
VPN has been established.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;WireGuard:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;WireGuard&#039;&#039;&#039; is simple, fast, lean, and modern VPN that utilizes secure and trusted cryptography.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on “Edit” to start configurations as needed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Wire Guard RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;EDIT:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Wire Guard RC44 Setttings.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the save button after the required configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample Value     &lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Wireguard Role&lt;br /&gt;
|Client/Server&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown box the user needs to select  the wireguard role.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Listen Port&lt;br /&gt;
|51820&lt;br /&gt;
|The UDP port on which the WireGuard client  listens for incoming connections.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|IP Addresses&lt;br /&gt;
|10.0.0.1/24&lt;br /&gt;
|The IP  address and subnet mask assigned to the WireGuard client&#039;s interface. This  address is used within the VPN.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Allowed PeerIPs&lt;br /&gt;
|10.1.1.1&lt;br /&gt;
|The IP  address of the allowed peer(s) that can connect to this WireGuard client.  This might need adjustment based on the actual peer IPs used in the network.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Endpoint HostIP&lt;br /&gt;
|10.1.1.1&lt;br /&gt;
|The IP  address of the WireGuard server (the endpoint to which the client connects).&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Endpoint HostPort&lt;br /&gt;
|51820&lt;br /&gt;
|The port on  the WireGuard server to which the client connects.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|PeerPublicKey&lt;br /&gt;
|*****&lt;br /&gt;
|The public  key of the peer (the server) the client is connecting to. This key is part of  the public-private key pair used in WireGuard for encryption and  authentication.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|Enable Preshared key&lt;br /&gt;
|Yes/No&lt;br /&gt;
|This option  indicates that a pre-shared key (PSK) is used in addition to the  public-private key pair for an extra layer of security.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|9&lt;br /&gt;
|Preshared key&lt;br /&gt;
|*****&lt;br /&gt;
|The actual  pre-shared key value shared between the client and the server. This option  appears only if you have enabled preshared key.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Zerotier:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ZeroTier is a tool that lets you create your own private network over the internet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Go to ZeroTier Central and sign up for a free account. In ZeroTier Central, click on &amp;quot;Create a Network&amp;quot;. This will generate a unique 16-digit network ID for your new network.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Go to settings =&amp;gt; VPN, in general settings, enable ZeroTier and save.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Zerotier Settings RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Copy and paste the unique 16-digit network ID in the edit section.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Zero Seetings Dashboard RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Zerotier Dashboard.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the save button after the required configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field Name    &lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  Value           &lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|NetworkID&lt;br /&gt;
|Ad2769hfkw2345f4&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown box the user needs to paste  the unique 16-digit network id.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Listen Port&lt;br /&gt;
|9993&lt;br /&gt;
|Default&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== 2.5 Firewall ===&lt;br /&gt;
A firewall is a layer of security between the network and the Internet. Since a router is the main connection from a network to the Internet, the firewall function is merged into this device. Every network should have a firewall to protect its privacy.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Firewall.png|frameless|635x635px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are 6 types of setting available under firewall.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* General Settings&lt;br /&gt;
* Port forwards&lt;br /&gt;
* Traffic Rules&lt;br /&gt;
* SNAT traffic Rules&lt;br /&gt;
* Parental Control&lt;br /&gt;
* Zone Forwarding&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;General Setting&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
General settings are subdivided into 2 parts,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1.) General settings&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In general settings, the settings that are made are default settings and can be changed according to user’s preference.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Firewall General Settings.png|frameless|622x622px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Specification details are below:&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;SN&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Field Name&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Sample Value&#039;&#039;&#039;      &lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Description&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Enable SYN-flood  protection&lt;br /&gt;
|Enabled&lt;br /&gt;
|This is  enabled by default; setting can be changed if required.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Disable IPV6&lt;br /&gt;
|Disabled&lt;br /&gt;
|This is  enabled by default; setting can be changed if required.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Drop invalid packets&lt;br /&gt;
|Disabled&lt;br /&gt;
|This is  enabled by default; setting can be changed if required.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|TCP SYN Cookies&lt;br /&gt;
|Disabled&lt;br /&gt;
|This is  enabled by default; setting can be changed if required.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Input&lt;br /&gt;
|Reject/Accept&lt;br /&gt;
|By  default, the setting is ‘Reject’ but this needs to be changed to ‘Accept’  compulsory.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Output&lt;br /&gt;
|Reject/Accept&lt;br /&gt;
|By  default, the setting is ‘Reject’ but this needs to be changed to ‘Accept’  compulsory.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|Forward&lt;br /&gt;
|Reject/Accept&lt;br /&gt;
|By  default, the setting is ‘Reject’ but this needs to be changed to ‘Accept’  compulsory.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2.) Zone settings&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In zone settings, there’s an option to add “New Zone”, according to user’s requirement.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Zone settings.png|thumb|628x628px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Port Forwards:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Port forwarding is a feature in a router or gateway that allows external devices to access services on a private network.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It maps an external port on the router to an internal IP address and port on the local network, enabling applications such as gaming servers, web servers, or remote desktop connections to be accessed from outside the network.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This helps in directing incoming traffic to the correct device within a local network based on the port number, enhancing connectivity and accessibility.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Firewall Port Forward.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;EDIT&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Firewall Edit Option RC44.png|frameless|622x622px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the save button after the required configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Name&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Web_Server_Forward&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|Field must  not be empty. Provide a name for the rule to easily identify it.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Protocol&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;TCP+UDP&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|Select the protocol  for the rule.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Options  typically include TCP+UDP, TCP, UDP, ICMP, Custom.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Source zone&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;SW_LAN&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|Select the  source zone where the traffic is originating from. Options typically include EWAN2,SW_LAN,CWAN1,CWAN1_0,CWAN1_1,VPN&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Source MAC address [optional]&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;any&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;any&#039;&#039;&#039;: Leave as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;any&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; if you don&#039;t want to specify a MAC address.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Source IP address[optional]&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: Leave blank if not needed.&lt;br /&gt;
|Optionally  specify an IP address or range.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Source port&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;80, 443&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;  (if matching traffic for web server ports)&lt;br /&gt;
|Specify the  source port or port range.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|Destination zone&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;SW_LAN&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|Select the  destination zone where the traffic is heading to.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|Destination IP address&lt;br /&gt;
|Leave blank if not needed.&lt;br /&gt;
|Optionally specify  the destination IP address or range.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|9&lt;br /&gt;
|Destination port&lt;br /&gt;
|Example: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;80&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;  (if redirecting to a web server port)&lt;br /&gt;
|Specify the  destination port or port range.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Traffic Rule:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;Traffic rules&amp;quot; refer to the policies and regulations that govern the flow of data packets within a network.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To allow new traffic, click on “Add and Edit” in “New Traffic Rule”.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Firewall Traffic Rule.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;EDIT&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Firewall Traffic Rule Edit.png|frameless|621x621px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;SNAT Traffic Rule&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SNAT Traffic Rule.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Edit&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SNAT Edit Options RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Note:&#039;&#039;&#039; Details are to be filled according to user’s requirements.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Parental Control&#039;&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Parental Control.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Edit&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Parental Control Edit Options RC44.png|frameless|622x622px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Note:&#039;&#039;&#039; Details are to be filled according to user’s requirements.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Zone Forwarding&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Zone Forwarding RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;EDIT&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Zone Forwarding editing Options RC44.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===2.6 Loopback Rule===&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user can configure the port where he want to forward the traffic to. Here the user can add/edit/delete different port ports as per the requirement. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Loopback Rule.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user should click on add/edit to do the required changes in the port and enter the valid information in each section to configure the port for forwarding.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Loopback Rule edit.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user is done with the required configurations, should click save button and then click on the update to save the changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===2.7 Remote Monitoring===&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user can select which equipment needs to be monitor remotely, the TR-069 device or the NMS device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Remote Monitoring.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
One the user selects the type of RMS click on the save.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;NMS&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
IN this page the user should type the server IP or domain name in the URL then click on sav. Click on upload and start (Once key is uploaded and this option is clicked, NMS automatically starts, and this router device gets registered with the NMS server provided.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:NMS.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;TR069&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To enable the TR069 the user needs to click on the enable check box.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:TR069.png|frameless|582x582px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user clicks on the check box of enable it will display all the required filed to configured.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Remote Monitoring Tr-069.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Serving Interval&lt;br /&gt;
|300&lt;br /&gt;
|This displays the interval time&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Interface&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|Not sure what needs to be written&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Username&lt;br /&gt;
|Username&lt;br /&gt;
|The user needs to mention the username&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Password&lt;br /&gt;
|******&lt;br /&gt;
|The user should set the password&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|URL&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|The user needs to mention the URL&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
The user should fill all the required fields and click on the save button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===2.8 Tunnel===&lt;br /&gt;
Tunnels are a method of transporting data across a network using protocols which are not supported by that network.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tunnel Settings.png|frameless|621x621px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;General Settings&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user needs to select under which type of tunnel it needs to send the data.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tunnel General Settings.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user selects the type of tunnel then click in the save button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;GRE Tunnel&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user needs to add all the details of GRE tunnels.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user configured all the required fields then it needs to click on the save. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:GRE Tunnel.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here the user can add/edit/delete the details of the tunnel. Once the required update is done then it needs to click on update to save the changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tunnel Configuration.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;IPIP Tunnel&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user needs to add all the details of IPIP tunnels.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user configured all the required fields then it needs to click on the save. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:IPIP Tunnel.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here the user can add/edit/delete the details of the tunnel. Once the required update is done then it needs to click on update to save the changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Ipip config.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==3 Maintenance==&lt;br /&gt;
In this module the user can configure/upgrade/modify the settings related to system, password, firmware and monitoring.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Maintenance System.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It includes below submodules.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* General&lt;br /&gt;
* Password&lt;br /&gt;
* Reboot&lt;br /&gt;
* Import and Export config&lt;br /&gt;
* Firmware upgrade&lt;br /&gt;
* Monitor Application&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===3.1 General===&lt;br /&gt;
In this section the user can configure the details related to time zone and host name&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Maintenance General.png|frameless|619x619px]]&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Local Time&lt;br /&gt;
|2023/12/13 12:24:11&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|It displays the system current date and  time.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|HostName&lt;br /&gt;
|31B30230298&lt;br /&gt;
|It displays the host name.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Timezone&lt;br /&gt;
|Asia/Kolkata&lt;br /&gt;
|It displays in which time zone its configured.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user configures the required details then click on the save button to save all the details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Logging&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here the user can configure the basic aspects of your device related to system.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Maintenance logging.png|frameless|608x608px]]&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|System log buffer size&lt;br /&gt;
|32&lt;br /&gt;
|This displays the log size of system buffer&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|External system log server&lt;br /&gt;
|0.0.0.0&lt;br /&gt;
|This displays the ip add of the external system  log&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|External system log server port&lt;br /&gt;
|514&lt;br /&gt;
|This displays the port number of the external  system log&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Log output level&lt;br /&gt;
|debug&lt;br /&gt;
|In this drop down the user selects the level of  the log output.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Cron Log level&lt;br /&gt;
|debug&lt;br /&gt;
|In this drop down the user selects the level of  the corn log .&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user configures the required details then click on the save button to save all the details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Language and Style&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here the user can configure the basic aspects of your device related to language.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Maintenance Language and Style.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user configures the required details then click on the save button to save all the details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===3.2 Password===&lt;br /&gt;
In this module the user can set the password for the admin credentials.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Change you password.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Specifies the password for the guest account. If the user enter a plaintext password here, it will get replaced with a crypted password on save. The new password will be effective once the user logs out and log in again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user needs to write the password in the text box and click on the save button to save the password.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===3.3 Reboot===&lt;br /&gt;
In this module the user can reboot the device remotely.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Reboot.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To start the reboot process first the user needs to fill all the required fields.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Need to select the type of reboot for the device whether it needs to be Hardware or Software reboot.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Maintenance Reboot.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Type&lt;br /&gt;
|Maintenance Reboot&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown list the user needs to  select the type of reboot is required to configure.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Reboot Type&lt;br /&gt;
|Hardware&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown list the user needs to select  the hardware or software reboot is required.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Minutes&lt;br /&gt;
|59&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user needs to configure  the min to start the reboot activity&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Hours&lt;br /&gt;
|22&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user needs to configure  the hours to start the reboot activity&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|Day of Month&lt;br /&gt;
|All&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user needs to configure  the day of the month to start the reboot activity&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Month&lt;br /&gt;
|All&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user needs to configure  the month to start the reboot activity&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|Day of the week&lt;br /&gt;
|All&lt;br /&gt;
|In this dropdown the user needs to configure  the week to start the reboot activity&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user fills all the required given parameters click on the save.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To start the reboot process, click on the “Reboot Now” button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===3.4 Import and Export===&lt;br /&gt;
In this section, User can Import &amp;amp; Export Configuration files of the Device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Import and Export.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
click “Export Config” to export device configuration &amp;amp; settings to a text file,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
click “Import Config” to import device configuration &amp;amp; settings from a previously exported text file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Import window.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user need to select on the choose file to and click on the apply.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===3.5 Firmware Upgrade===&lt;br /&gt;
The user can upgrade with the latest software for the existing firmware. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Frimware Upgrade.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the &#039;&#039;&#039;flash image&#039;&#039;&#039; and chose the path where the sys-upgrade file is kept and then click on flash image, it will upgrade to the latest software once the reboot is done.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Flash Image.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the &#039;&#039;&#039;Retain Config and flash&#039;&#039;&#039; and chose the path where the sys-upgrade file is kept and then click on Retain Config and flash, it will upgrade to the latest software once the reboot is done.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Flash Image.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the &#039;&#039;&#039;Factory Reset&#039;&#039;&#039; for the complete retest of the device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===3.6 Monitor Application===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Monitor Application.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Router Application Remote Configuration.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Router Remote Configuration.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==4 Status==&lt;br /&gt;
In this module the user can view the status of the router device with respect to the network, Wan, modem etc.[[File:Status.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It has 4 submodules.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Interfaces&lt;br /&gt;
* Internet&lt;br /&gt;
* Modem&lt;br /&gt;
* Route&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===4.1 Interfaces===&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user can see the traffic status for all the network through which the device works.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Status Interfaces.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Looking on the network status the user can check if the cellular or the ethernet is up.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===4.2 Internet===&lt;br /&gt;
In this submodule the user can view the status of the internet connections.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Internet Status.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
  To see the latest status of the internet connection the user needs to click on the refresh button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===4.3 Modem===&lt;br /&gt;
In this sub module the user will get to know the status of the cellular interface which is installed inside the modem. The user can view all the details related to the sim in terms of Operator, Network technology, Mobile country code, Upload bandwidth, Download Bandwidth, Frequency band, RSRP, RSRQ, RSSI &amp;amp; SNR under this page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Modem Status.png|frameless|602x602px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== 4.4 Route ===&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user can check the status of the route for the device. The ARP status can be visible in under this page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Route Status.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==5 Features==&lt;br /&gt;
In this module the user can see all the features that the router device has.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This module includes the below features.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Mac Address Binding&lt;br /&gt;
* URL Filtering&lt;br /&gt;
* Web Server&lt;br /&gt;
* Wi-Fi MacID Filtering&lt;br /&gt;
* Routing&lt;br /&gt;
* Others&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Features.png|frameless|618x618px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===5.1 Mac Address Binding===&lt;br /&gt;
Under this submodule the user can configure/update/edit the IP Address for MAC&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mac Addressing Binding.png|frameless|622x622px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user should write MAC address and then click on the add button. Once the address is added then click on the update button to save the modification.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user needs to click on the Edit button to modify the preexisting configuration. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mac Address Edit.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user modifies the MAC address /IP Address then click on the save button to save the changes done.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user can click on the deleted button to delete an existing configured device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Post all the changes the user needs to click on the update to reflect all the changes in the application.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===5.2 URL Filtering===&lt;br /&gt;
In this submodule the user should provide the URL which needs to be blocked for the device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:URL Filtering.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To add the new URL for blocking, click on the Add New button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user clicks on the Add New button a new pop will appear in that page write the URL and click on the save. The user can select the status of that URL while defining the URL.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Url Update.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To edit / delete the existing URL the user needs to click on the edit /deleted button respectively.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Edit or Delete URL.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the save after the changes are done as per the need.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== 5.3 Web Server ===&lt;br /&gt;
In this submodule the user can configure webserver related parameters.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Web server.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To configure the HTTP, click on the enable HTTP. Once the user clicks on the check box the HTTP Port text box will appear where the user needs to configure the port id.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Webserver Configuration.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on save buttons to save the changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To configure the 2nd HTTP, click on the enable HTTP. Once the user clicks on the check box the HTTP Port text box will appear where the user needs to configure the port id.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Webserver Https Redirect.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on save buttons to save the changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the “Redirect https” and “RFC1918 Filter” check box to respectively and click on the save button to save the changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To configure the NTP sync, click on the enable NTP sync. Once the user clicks on the check box the respective text boxes will appear to configure the parameters. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:RFC1918 Filter.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the user configures the parameters click on the save button to save the given values.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===5.4 Wi-Fi MacID Filtering===&lt;br /&gt;
In this module the user can filter the Macids. Mac address filtering allows users to block traffic coming from certain known machines or devices.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Wi-Fi MacID Filtering.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Before adding the MacIDs the user needs to select the mode from the dropdown menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To Add the MacID the user needs to click on Add New option select the mac id and network name Wi-Fi 2.4G AP OR Wi-Fi 2.4G AP Guest, select enable/disable option and save it and update.              &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Configuring MacID and Network Name.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the required MACID and Network Name is configured the user needs to click on the save button to add the details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user needs to click on the edit button to do modifications on the pre-existing configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Macid and name removing.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the required MACID / Network Name is modified the user needs to click on the save button to reflect the changed value in the application.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;WIFI 2.4G AP Guest&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To Add the MacID the user needs to click on Add New option select the mac id and network name Wi-Fi 2.4G AP Guest, select enable/disable option and save it and update.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
     [[File:WIFI 2.4G AP Guest.png|frameless|623x623px]]  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the required MACID and Network Name is configured the user needs to click on the save button to add the details. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user needs to click on the edit button to do modifications on the pre-existing configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Configuring MacID and Network Name.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the required MACID / Network Name is modified the user needs to click on the save button to reflect the changed value in the application.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===5.5 Routing===&lt;br /&gt;
In this submodule the user can configure the parameters related to routing of the device. like Target address, Networks address etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Routing IPV4 Routes.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To add a new device the user needs to fill all the required information and click on the add button.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Interface&lt;br /&gt;
|eth0.1&lt;br /&gt;
|In this drop down list the user should  configure the interface name.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Target&lt;br /&gt;
|192.168.10.1&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user needs to insert the  target IP address&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|IPV4 Netmask&lt;br /&gt;
|255.255.255.0&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user should give the  address for the IPV4Netmask&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Metric&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user should insert the  number of the metric.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|IPV4 Gateway&lt;br /&gt;
|192.168.100.1&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user should configured the  address for the IPV4 Gateway.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Route Type&lt;br /&gt;
|Unicast&lt;br /&gt;
|In this drop down box the user should select  the type of route needed for the device.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
To edit the existing device the user needs to click on the edit option.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Routing Configuration.png|frameless|624x624px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the changes are done click on the save button to save all the changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the deleted button to delete the existing device detail.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Advanced Static IPV4 Routes:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Advanced Static IPV4 Routes.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To add a new device the user needs to fill all the required information and click on the add button.&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Field  name&lt;br /&gt;
|Sample  value&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Interface&lt;br /&gt;
|eth0.1&lt;br /&gt;
|In this drop down list the user should  configure the interface name.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|To&lt;br /&gt;
|192.168.10.1&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user needs to insert the  target IP address&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|IPV4 Netmask&lt;br /&gt;
|255.255.255.0&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user should give the  address for the IPV4Netmask&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Table&lt;br /&gt;
|local&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|From&lt;br /&gt;
|192.168.100.1&lt;br /&gt;
|In this text box the user should configured the  from address for the routes&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|6&lt;br /&gt;
|Priority&lt;br /&gt;
|230&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
To edit the existing device the user needs to click on the edit option.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Routing Editing.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the changes are done click on the save button to save all the changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the deleted button to delete the existing device detail.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once all the configurations are done click on the update button to reflect the changes made.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===5.6 Others===&lt;br /&gt;
In this page the user will get to do all the other miscellaneous configuration with respect to the device based on the required parameters.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Miscellaneous configuration.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|SN&lt;br /&gt;
|Utility&lt;br /&gt;
|Action&lt;br /&gt;
|Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Set Date&lt;br /&gt;
|SET&lt;br /&gt;
|Need to set the date and time and after  click command get the Date and time&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2&lt;br /&gt;
|Gate Date&lt;br /&gt;
|GET&lt;br /&gt;
|Needs to get the system date and time&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|IPsec status all&lt;br /&gt;
|GET&lt;br /&gt;
|Needs to get the IPsec details&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|4&lt;br /&gt;
|Wi-Fi Scan&lt;br /&gt;
|GET&lt;br /&gt;
|Needs to get the Wi-Fi status&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|5&lt;br /&gt;
|ipref3 client&lt;br /&gt;
|RUN&lt;br /&gt;
|Needs to click on the RUN to execute  the command&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|7&lt;br /&gt;
|ipref3 server&lt;br /&gt;
|RUN&lt;br /&gt;
|Needs to click on the RUN to execute  the command&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|8&lt;br /&gt;
|Ping&lt;br /&gt;
|PING&lt;br /&gt;
|Needs to click on the ping status&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|9&lt;br /&gt;
|Traceroute&lt;br /&gt;
|RUN&lt;br /&gt;
|Needs to click on the ping Traceroute status&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|10&lt;br /&gt;
|NTP Sync&lt;br /&gt;
|SYNC&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to Sync the NTP&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|11&lt;br /&gt;
|Download Files&lt;br /&gt;
|DOWNLOAD&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to Download the files /Database&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|12&lt;br /&gt;
|Restart Power&lt;br /&gt;
|RESTART&lt;br /&gt;
|Click Restart the power&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|13&lt;br /&gt;
|Restart Modem&lt;br /&gt;
|RESTART&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to Restart the modem&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|14&lt;br /&gt;
|Run at command&lt;br /&gt;
|RUN&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to Run the command&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|15&lt;br /&gt;
|Show board configuration&lt;br /&gt;
|SHOW&lt;br /&gt;
|To Show the board configuration&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|16&lt;br /&gt;
|Show VPN Certificate Name&lt;br /&gt;
|SHOW&lt;br /&gt;
|To Show VPN Certificate Name&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|17&lt;br /&gt;
|Switch SIM to Secondary&lt;br /&gt;
|RUN&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to switch the SIM to secondary  mode&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|18&lt;br /&gt;
|Send Test SMS&lt;br /&gt;
|SEND&lt;br /&gt;
|To Send the SMS Confirmation&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|19&lt;br /&gt;
|Readlatest SMS&lt;br /&gt;
|READ&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to Read the latest SMS&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|20&lt;br /&gt;
|Data Usage&lt;br /&gt;
|SHOW&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to show the data usage.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|21&lt;br /&gt;
|Monthly Data Usage&lt;br /&gt;
|SHOW&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to show the monthly data usage&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|22&lt;br /&gt;
|Modem debug Info&lt;br /&gt;
|READ&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to read the information about the  modem debug&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|23&lt;br /&gt;
|Scan Network operators (take&amp;gt;3mins)&lt;br /&gt;
|SHOW&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to show the Network operator&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|24&lt;br /&gt;
|Network operators (first perform scan  network operator&lt;br /&gt;
|SHOW&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to show the Network operator&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|25&lt;br /&gt;
|ReadLogFiles&lt;br /&gt;
|READ&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to read the log files&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|26&lt;br /&gt;
|Enable ssh&lt;br /&gt;
|RUN&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to Run the command&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|27&lt;br /&gt;
|Disable ssh&lt;br /&gt;
|RUN&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to Run the command&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|28&lt;br /&gt;
|Clear SIM1 Data&lt;br /&gt;
|CLEAR&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to clear the SIM1 data&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|29&lt;br /&gt;
|Clear SIM2 Data&lt;br /&gt;
|CLEAR&lt;br /&gt;
|Click to clear the SIM data&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==6 Logout==&lt;br /&gt;
The user should click on log out option to logged out from the router application.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Logout.png|frameless|623x623px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user needs to click on the ok to come out of the router application.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tanisha</name></author>
	</entry>
</feed>